diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation')
581 files changed, 22785 insertions, 10143 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-class-dax b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-class-dax new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2cb9fc5e8bd1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-class-dax @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +What: /sys/class/dax/ +Date: May, 2016 +KernelVersion: v4.7 +Contact: linux-nvdimm@lists.01.org +Description: Device DAX is the device-centric analogue of Filesystem + DAX (CONFIG_FS_DAX). It allows memory ranges to be + allocated and mapped without need of an intervening file + system. Device DAX is strict, precise and predictable. + Specifically this interface: + + 1/ Guarantees fault granularity with respect to a given + page size (pte, pmd, or pud) set at configuration time. + + 2/ Enforces deterministic behavior by being strict about + what fault scenarios are supported. + + The /sys/class/dax/ interface enumerates all the + device-dax instances in the system. The ABI is + deprecated and will be removed after 2020. It is + replaced with the DAX bus interface /sys/bus/dax/ where + device-dax instances can be found under + /sys/bus/dax/devices/ diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-vmbus b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-vmbus index 3fed8fdb873d..826689dcc2e6 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-vmbus +++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-vmbus @@ -146,3 +146,36 @@ KernelVersion: 4.16 Contact: Stephen Hemminger <sthemmin@microsoft.com> Description: Binary file created by uio_hv_generic for ring buffer Users: Userspace drivers + +What: /sys/bus/vmbus/devices/<UUID>/channels/<N>/intr_in_full +Date: February 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.0 +Contact: Michael Kelley <mikelley@microsoft.com> +Description: Number of guest to host interrupts caused by the inbound ring + buffer transitioning from full to not full while a packet is + waiting for buffer space to become available +Users: Debugging tools + +What: /sys/bus/vmbus/devices/<UUID>/channels/<N>/intr_out_empty +Date: February 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.0 +Contact: Michael Kelley <mikelley@microsoft.com> +Description: Number of guest to host interrupts caused by the outbound ring + buffer transitioning from empty to not empty +Users: Debugging tools + +What: /sys/bus/vmbus/devices/<UUID>/channels/<N>/out_full_first +Date: February 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.0 +Contact: Michael Kelley <mikelley@microsoft.com> +Description: Number of write operations that were the first to encounter an + outbound ring buffer full condition +Users: Debugging tools + +What: /sys/bus/vmbus/devices/<UUID>/channels/<N>/out_full_total +Date: February 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.0 +Contact: Michael Kelley <mikelley@microsoft.com> +Description: Total number of write operations that encountered an outbound + ring buffer full condition +Users: Debugging tools diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-mlxreg-io b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-mlxreg-io index 9b642669cb16..156319fc5b80 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-mlxreg-io +++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-mlxreg-io @@ -21,10 +21,22 @@ Description: These files show with which CPLD versions have been burned The files are read only. What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/ - cpld3_version + fan_dir + +Date: December 2018 +KernelVersion: 5.0 +Contact: Vadim Pasternak <vadimpmellanox.com> +Description: This file shows the system fans direction: + forward direction - relevant bit is set 0; + reversed direction - relevant bit is set 1. + + The files are read only. + +What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/ + jtag_enable Date: November 2018 -KernelVersion: 4.21 +KernelVersion: 5.0 Contact: Vadim Pasternak <vadimpmellanox.com> Description: These files show with which CPLD versions have been burned on LED board. @@ -35,7 +47,7 @@ What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/ jtag_enable Date: November 2018 -KernelVersion: 4.21 +KernelVersion: 5.0 Contact: Vadim Pasternak <vadimpmellanox.com> Description: These files enable and disable the access to the JTAG domain. By default access to the JTAG domain is disabled. @@ -105,7 +117,7 @@ What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/ reset_voltmon_upgrade_fail Date: November 2018 -KernelVersion: 4.21 +KernelVersion: 5.0 Contact: Vadim Pasternak <vadimpmellanox.com> Description: These files show the system reset cause, as following: ComEx power fail, reset from ComEx, system platform reset, reset diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-driver-habanalabs b/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-driver-habanalabs new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2f5b80be07a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-driver-habanalabs @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ +What: /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/addr +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Sets the device address to be used for read or write through + PCI bar. The acceptable value is a string that starts with "0x" + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/command_buffers +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Displays a list with information about the currently allocated + command buffers + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/command_submission +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Displays a list with information about the currently active + command submissions + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/command_submission_jobs +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Displays a list with detailed information about each JOB (CB) of + each active command submission + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/data32 +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Allows the root user to read or write directly through the + device's PCI bar. Writing to this file generates a write + transaction while reading from the file generates a read + transcation. This custom interface is needed (instead of using + the generic Linux user-space PCI mapping) because the DDR bar + is very small compared to the DDR memory and only the driver can + move the bar before and after the transaction + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/device +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Enables the root user to set the device to specific state. + Valid values are "disable", "enable", "suspend", "resume". + User can read this property to see the valid values + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/i2c_addr +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Sets I2C device address for I2C transaction that is generated + by the device's CPU + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/i2c_bus +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Sets I2C bus address for I2C transaction that is generated by + the device's CPU + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/i2c_data +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Triggers an I2C transaction that is generated by the device's + CPU. Writing to this file generates a write transaction while + reading from the file generates a read transcation + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/i2c_reg +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Sets I2C register id for I2C transaction that is generated by + the device's CPU + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/led0 +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Sets the state of the first S/W led on the device + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/led1 +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Sets the state of the second S/W led on the device + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/led2 +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Sets the state of the third S/W led on the device + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/mmu +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Displays the hop values and physical address for a given ASID + and virtual address. The user should write the ASID and VA into + the file and then read the file to get the result. + e.g. to display info about VA 0x1000 for ASID 1 you need to do: + echo "1 0x1000" > /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl0/mmu + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/set_power_state +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Sets the PCI power state. Valid values are "1" for D0 and "2" + for D3Hot + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/userptr +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Displays a list with information about the currently user + pointers (user virtual addresses) that are pinned and mapped + to DMA addresses + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/vm +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Displays a list with information about all the active virtual + address mappings per ASID diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-wilco-ec b/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-wilco-ec new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f814f112e213 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-wilco-ec @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +What: /sys/kernel/debug/wilco_ec/raw +Date: January 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Description: + Write and read raw mailbox commands to the EC. + + For writing: + Bytes 0-1 indicate the message type: + 00 F0 = Execute Legacy Command + 00 F2 = Read/Write NVRAM Property + Byte 2 provides the command code + Bytes 3+ consist of the data passed in the request + + At least three bytes are required, for the msg type and command, + with additional bytes optional for additional data. + + Example: + // Request EC info type 3 (EC firmware build date) + $ echo 00 f0 38 00 03 00 > raw + // View the result. The decoded ASCII result "12/21/18" is + // included after the raw hex. + $ cat raw + 00 31 32 2f 32 31 2f 31 38 00 38 00 01 00 2f 00 .12/21/18.8... diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio index 8127a08e366d..864f8efd12e5 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio @@ -1554,6 +1554,10 @@ What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentration_raw What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentrationX_raw What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentration_co2_raw What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentrationX_co2_raw +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentration_ethanol_raw +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentrationX_ethanol_raw +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentration_h2_raw +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentrationX_h2_raw What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentration_voc_raw What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentrationX_voc_raw KernelVersion: 4.3 @@ -1684,4 +1688,19 @@ KernelVersion: 4.18 Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org Description: Raw (unscaled) phase difference reading from channel Y - that can be processed to radians.
\ No newline at end of file + that can be processed to radians. + +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_massconcentration_pm1_input +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_massconcentrationY_pm1_input +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_massconcentration_pm2p5_input +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_massconcentrationY_pm2p5_input +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_massconcentration_pm4_input +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_massconcentrationY_pm4_input +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_massconcentration_pm10_input +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_massconcentrationY_pm10_input +KernelVersion: 4.22 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Mass concentration reading of particulate matter in ug / m3. + pmX consists of particles with aerodynamic diameter less or + equal to X micrometers. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-sps30 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-sps30 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..143df8e89d08 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-sps30 @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/start_cleaning +Date: December 2018 +KernelVersion: 4.22 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Writing 1 starts sensor self cleaning. Internal fan accelerates + to its maximum speed and keeps spinning for about 10 seconds in + order to blow out accumulated dust. + +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/cleaning_period +Date: January 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Sensor is capable of triggering self cleaning periodically. + Period can be changed by writing a new value here. Upon reading + the current one is returned. Units are seconds. + + Writing 0 disables periodical self cleaning entirely. + +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/cleaning_period_available +Date: January 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + The range of available values in seconds represented as the + minimum value, the step and the maximum value, all enclosed in + square brackets. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-intel_th-output-devices b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-intel_th-output-devices index 4d48a9451866..d1f667104944 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-intel_th-output-devices +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-intel_th-output-devices @@ -3,11 +3,13 @@ Date: June 2015 KernelVersion: 4.3 Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com> Description: (RW) Writes of 1 or 0 enable or disable trace output to this - output device. Reads return current status. + output device. Reads return current status. Requires that the + correstponding output port driver be loaded. What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-msc<msc-id>/port Date: June 2015 KernelVersion: 4.3 Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com> Description: (RO) Port number, corresponding to this output device on the - switch (GTH). + switch (GTH) or "unassigned" if the corresponding output + port driver is not loaded. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb index 559baa5c418c..614d216dff1d 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ Contact: Lan Tianyu <tianyu.lan@intel.com> Description: Some platforms provide usb port connect types through ACPI. This attribute is to expose these information to user space. - The file will read "hotplug", "wired" and "not used" if the + The file will read "hotplug", "hardwired" and "not used" if the information is available, and "unknown" otherwise. What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/.../(hub interface)/portX/location diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-chromeos b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-chromeos new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5819699d66ec --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-chromeos @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +What: /sys/class/chromeos/<ec-device-name>/flashinfo +Date: August 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.2 +Description: + Show the EC flash information. + +What: /sys/class/chromeos/<ec-device-name>/kb_wake_angle +Date: March 2018 +KernelVersion: 4.17 +Description: + Control the keyboard wake lid angle. Values are between + 0 and 360. This file will also show the keyboard wake lid + angle by querying the hardware. + +What: /sys/class/chromeos/<ec-device-name>/reboot +Date: August 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.2 +Description: + Tell the EC to reboot in various ways. Options are: + "cancel": Cancel a pending reboot. + "ro": Jump to RO without rebooting. + "rw": Jump to RW without rebooting. + "cold": Cold reboot. + "disable-jump": Disable jump until next reboot. + "hibernate": Hibernate the EC. + "at-shutdown": Reboot after an AP shutdown. + +What: /sys/class/chromeos/<ec-device-name>/version +Date: August 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.2 +Description: + Show the information about the EC software and hardware. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-chromeos-driver-cros-ec-lightbar b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-chromeos-driver-cros-ec-lightbar new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..57a037791403 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-chromeos-driver-cros-ec-lightbar @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +What: /sys/class/chromeos/<ec-device-name>/lightbar/brightness +Date: August 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.2 +Description: + Writing to this file adjusts the overall brightness of + the lightbar, separate from any color intensity. The + valid range is 0 (off) to 255 (maximum brightness). + +What: /sys/class/chromeos/<ec-device-name>/lightbar/interval_msec +Date: August 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.2 +Description: + The lightbar is controlled by an embedded controller (EC), + which also manages the keyboard, battery charging, fans, + and other system hardware. To prevent unprivileged users + from interfering with the other EC functions, the rate at + which the lightbar control files can be read or written is + limited. + + Reading this file will return the number of milliseconds + that must elapse between accessing any of the lightbar + functions through this interface. Going faster will simply + block until the necessary interval has lapsed. The interval + applies uniformly to all accesses of any kind by any user. + +What: /sys/class/chromeos/<ec-device-name>/lightbar/led_rgb +Date: August 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.2 +Description: + This allows you to control each LED segment. If the + lightbar is already running one of the automatic + sequences, you probably won’t see anything change because + your color setting will be almost immediately replaced. + To get useful results, you should stop the lightbar + sequence first. + + The values written to this file are sets of four integers, + indicating LED, RED, GREEN, BLUE. The LED number is 0 to 3 + to select a single segment, or 4 to set all four segments + to the same value at once. The RED, GREEN, and BLUE + numbers should be in the range 0 (off) to 255 (maximum). + You can update more than one segment at a time by writing + more than one set of four integers. + +What: /sys/class/chromeos/<ec-device-name>/lightbar/program +Date: August 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.2 +Description: + This allows you to upload and run custom lightbar sequences. + +What: /sys/class/chromeos/<ec-device-name>/lightbar/sequence +Date: August 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.2 +Description: + The Pixel lightbar has a number of built-in sequences + that it displays under various conditions, such as at + power on, shut down, or while running. Reading from this + file displays the current sequence that the lightbar is + displaying. Writing to this file allows you to change the + sequence. + +What: /sys/class/chromeos/<ec-device-name>/lightbar/userspace_control +Date: August 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.2 +Description: + This allows you to take the control of the lightbar. This + prevents the kernel from going through its normal + sequences. + +What: /sys/class/chromeos/<ec-device-name>/lightbar/version +Date: August 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.2 +Description: + Show the information about the lightbar version. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-chromeos-driver-cros-ec-vbc b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-chromeos-driver-cros-ec-vbc new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..38c5aaaaa89a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-chromeos-driver-cros-ec-vbc @@ -0,0 +1,6 @@ +What: /sys/class/chromeos/<ec-device-name>/vbc/vboot_context +Date: October 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.4 +Description: + Read/write the verified boot context data included on a + small nvram space on some EC implementations. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led-trigger-pattern b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led-trigger-pattern index 1e5d172e0646..bd92ef9d6faa 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led-trigger-pattern +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led-trigger-pattern @@ -7,55 +7,10 @@ Description: timer. It can do gradual dimming and step change of brightness. The pattern is given by a series of tuples, of brightness and - duration (ms). The LED is expected to traverse the series and - each brightness value for the specified duration. Duration of - 0 means brightness should immediately change to new value, and - writing malformed pattern deactivates any active one. + duration (ms). - 1. For gradual dimming, the dimming interval now is set as 50 - milliseconds. So the tuple with duration less than dimming - interval (50ms) is treated as a step change of brightness, - i.e. the subsequent brightness will be applied without adding - intervening dimming intervals. - - The gradual dimming format of the software pattern values should be: - "brightness_1 duration_1 brightness_2 duration_2 brightness_3 - duration_3 ...". For example: - - echo 0 1000 255 2000 > pattern - - It will make the LED go gradually from zero-intensity to max (255) - intensity in 1000 milliseconds, then back to zero intensity in 2000 - milliseconds: - - LED brightness - ^ - 255-| / \ / \ / - | / \ / \ / - | / \ / \ / - | / \ / \ / - 0-| / \/ \/ - +---0----1----2----3----4----5----6------------> time (s) - - 2. To make the LED go instantly from one brightness value to another, - we should use zero-time lengths (the brightness must be same as - the previous tuple's). So the format should be: - "brightness_1 duration_1 brightness_1 0 brightness_2 duration_2 - brightness_2 0 ...". For example: - - echo 0 1000 0 0 255 2000 255 0 > pattern - - It will make the LED stay off for one second, then stay at max brightness - for two seconds: - - LED brightness - ^ - 255-| +---------+ +---------+ - | | | | | - | | | | | - | | | | | - 0-| -----+ +----+ +---- - +---0----1----2----3----4----5----6------------> time (s) + The exact format is described in: + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-trigger-pattern.txt What: /sys/class/leds/<led>/hw_pattern Date: September 2018 diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-watchdog b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-watchdog index 736046b33040..6317ade5ad19 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-watchdog +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-watchdog @@ -49,3 +49,26 @@ Contact: Wim Van Sebroeck <wim@iguana.be> Description: It is a read only file. It is read to know about current value of timeout programmed. + +What: /sys/class/watchdog/watchdogn/pretimeout +Date: December 2016 +Contact: Wim Van Sebroeck <wim@iguana.be> +Description: + It is a read only file. It specifies the time in seconds before + timeout when the pretimeout interrupt is delivered. Pretimeout + is an optional feature. + +What: /sys/class/watchdog/watchdogn/pretimeout_avaialable_governors +Date: February 2017 +Contact: Wim Van Sebroeck <wim@iguana.be> +Description: + It is a read only file. It shows the pretimeout governors + available for this watchdog. + +What: /sys/class/watchdog/watchdogn/pretimeout_governor +Date: February 2017 +Contact: Wim Van Sebroeck <wim@iguana.be> +Description: + It is a read/write file. When read, the currently assigned + pretimeout governor is returned. When written, it sets + the pretimeout governor. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-habanalabs b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-habanalabs new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..78b2bcf316a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-habanalabs @@ -0,0 +1,190 @@ +What: /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/armcp_kernel_ver +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Version of the Linux kernel running on the device's CPU + +What: /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/armcp_ver +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Version of the application running on the device's CPU + +What: /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/cpld_ver +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Version of the Device's CPLD F/W + +What: /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/device_type +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Displays the code name of the device according to its type. + The supported values are: "GOYA" + +What: /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/eeprom +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: A binary file attribute that contains the contents of the + on-board EEPROM + +What: /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/fuse_ver +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Displays the device's version from the eFuse + +What: /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/hard_reset +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Interface to trigger a hard-reset operation for the device. + Hard-reset will reset ALL internal components of the device + except for the PCI interface and the internal PLLs + +What: /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/hard_reset_cnt +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Displays how many times the device have undergone a hard-reset + operation since the driver was loaded + +What: /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/high_pll +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Allows the user to set the maximum clock frequency for MME, TPC + and IC when the power management profile is set to "automatic". + +What: /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/ic_clk +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Allows the user to set the maximum clock frequency of the + Interconnect fabric. Writes to this parameter affect the device + only when the power management profile is set to "manual" mode. + The device IC clock might be set to lower value then the + maximum. The user should read the ic_clk_curr to see the actual + frequency value of the IC + +What: /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/ic_clk_curr +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Displays the current clock frequency of the Interconnect fabric + +What: /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/infineon_ver +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Version of the Device's power supply F/W code + +What: /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/max_power +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Allows the user to set the maximum power consumption of the + device in milliwatts. + +What: /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/mme_clk +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Allows the user to set the maximum clock frequency of the + MME compute engine. Writes to this parameter affect the device + only when the power management profile is set to "manual" mode. + The device MME clock might be set to lower value then the + maximum. The user should read the mme_clk_curr to see the actual + frequency value of the MME + +What: /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/mme_clk_curr +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Displays the current clock frequency of the MME compute engine + +What: /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/pci_addr +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Displays the PCI address of the device. This is needed so the + user would be able to open a device based on its PCI address + +What: /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/pm_mng_profile +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Power management profile. Values are "auto", "manual". In "auto" + mode, the driver will set the maximum clock frequency to a high + value when a user-space process opens the device's file (unless + it was already opened by another process). The driver will set + the max clock frequency to a low value when there are no user + processes that are opened on the device's file. In "manual" + mode, the user sets the maximum clock frequency by writing to + ic_clk, mme_clk and tpc_clk + + +What: /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/preboot_btl_ver +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Version of the device's preboot F/W code + +What: /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/soft_reset +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Interface to trigger a soft-reset operation for the device. + Soft-reset will reset only the compute and DMA engines of the + device + +What: /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/soft_reset_cnt +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Displays how many times the device have undergone a soft-reset + operation since the driver was loaded + +What: /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/status +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Status of the card: "Operational", "Malfunction", "In reset". + +What: /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/thermal_ver +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Version of the Device's thermal daemon + +What: /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/tpc_clk +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Allows the user to set the maximum clock frequency of the + TPC compute engines. Writes to this parameter affect the device + only when the power management profile is set to "manual" mode. + The device TPC clock might be set to lower value then the + maximum. The user should read the tpc_clk_curr to see the actual + frequency value of the TPC + +What: /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/tpc_clk_curr +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Displays the current clock frequency of the TPC compute engines + +What: /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/uboot_ver +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Version of the u-boot running on the device's CPU + +What: /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/write_open_cnt +Date: Jan 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.1 +Contact: oded.gabbay@gmail.com +Description: Displays the total number of user processes that are currently + opened on the device's file diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-ext4 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-ext4 index c631253cf85c..78604db56279 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-ext4 +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-ext4 @@ -109,3 +109,10 @@ Description: write operation (since a 4k random write might turn into a much larger write due to the zeroout operation). + +What: /sys/fs/ext4/<disk>/journal_task +Date: February 2019 +Contact: "Theodore Ts'o" <tytso@mit.edu> +Description: + This file is read-only and shows the pid of journal thread in + current pid-namespace or 0 if task is unreachable. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-f2fs b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-f2fs index a7ce33199457..91822ce25831 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-f2fs +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-f2fs @@ -86,6 +86,13 @@ Description: The unit size is one block, now only support configuring in range of [1, 512]. +What: /sys/fs/f2fs/<disk>/umount_discard_timeout +Date: January 2019 +Contact: "Jaegeuk Kim" <jaegeuk@kernel.org> +Description: + Set timeout to issue discard commands during umount. + Default: 5 secs + What: /sys/fs/f2fs/<disk>/max_victim_search Date: January 2014 Contact: "Jaegeuk Kim" <jaegeuk.kim@samsung.com> diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-livepatch b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-livepatch index dac7e1e62a8b..85db352f68f9 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-livepatch +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-livepatch @@ -33,18 +33,6 @@ Description: An attribute which indicates whether the patch is currently in transition. -What: /sys/kernel/livepatch/<patch>/signal -Date: Nov 2017 -KernelVersion: 4.15.0 -Contact: live-patching@vger.kernel.org -Description: - A writable attribute that allows administrator to affect the - course of an existing transition. Writing 1 sends a fake - signal to all remaining blocking tasks. The fake signal - means that no proper signal is delivered (there is no data in - signal pending structures). Tasks are interrupted or woken up, - and forced to change their patched state. - What: /sys/kernel/livepatch/<patch>/force Date: Nov 2017 KernelVersion: 4.15.0 diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt index f0cc3f772265..1a721d0f35c8 100644 --- a/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt +++ b/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt @@ -146,114 +146,75 @@ What about block I/O and networking buffers? The block I/O and networking subsystems make sure that the buffers they use are valid for you to DMA from/to. -DMA addressing limitations +DMA addressing capabilities ========================== -Does your device have any DMA addressing limitations? For example, is -your device only capable of driving the low order 24-bits of address? -If so, you need to inform the kernel of this fact. +By default, the kernel assumes that your device can address 32-bits of DMA +addressing. For a 64-bit capable device, this needs to be increased, and for +a device with limitations, it needs to be decreased. -By default, the kernel assumes that your device can address the full -32-bits. For a 64-bit capable device, this needs to be increased. -And for a device with limitations, as discussed in the previous -paragraph, it needs to be decreased. +Special note about PCI: PCI-X specification requires PCI-X devices to support +64-bit addressing (DAC) for all transactions. And at least one platform (SGI +SN2) requires 64-bit consistent allocations to operate correctly when the IO +bus is in PCI-X mode. -Special note about PCI: PCI-X specification requires PCI-X devices to -support 64-bit addressing (DAC) for all transactions. And at least -one platform (SGI SN2) requires 64-bit consistent allocations to -operate correctly when the IO bus is in PCI-X mode. +For correct operation, you must set the DMA mask to inform the kernel about +your devices DMA addressing capabilities. -For correct operation, you must interrogate the kernel in your device -probe routine to see if the DMA controller on the machine can properly -support the DMA addressing limitation your device has. It is good -style to do this even if your device holds the default setting, -because this shows that you did think about these issues wrt. your -device. - -The query is performed via a call to dma_set_mask_and_coherent():: +This is performed via a call to dma_set_mask_and_coherent():: int dma_set_mask_and_coherent(struct device *dev, u64 mask); -which will query the mask for both streaming and coherent APIs together. -If you have some special requirements, then the following two separate -queries can be used instead: +which will set the mask for both streaming and coherent APIs together. If you +have some special requirements, then the following two separate calls can be +used instead: - The query for streaming mappings is performed via a call to + The setup for streaming mappings is performed via a call to dma_set_mask():: int dma_set_mask(struct device *dev, u64 mask); - The query for consistent allocations is performed via a call + The setup for consistent allocations is performed via a call to dma_set_coherent_mask():: int dma_set_coherent_mask(struct device *dev, u64 mask); -Here, dev is a pointer to the device struct of your device, and mask -is a bit mask describing which bits of an address your device -supports. It returns zero if your card can perform DMA properly on -the machine given the address mask you provided. In general, the -device struct of your device is embedded in the bus-specific device -struct of your device. For example, &pdev->dev is a pointer to the -device struct of a PCI device (pdev is a pointer to the PCI device -struct of your device). +Here, dev is a pointer to the device struct of your device, and mask is a bit +mask describing which bits of an address your device supports. Often the +device struct of your device is embedded in the bus-specific device struct of +your device. For example, &pdev->dev is a pointer to the device struct of a +PCI device (pdev is a pointer to the PCI device struct of your device). -If it returns non-zero, your device cannot perform DMA properly on -this platform, and attempting to do so will result in undefined -behavior. You must either use a different mask, or not use DMA. +These calls usually return zero to indicated your device can perform DMA +properly on the machine given the address mask you provided, but they might +return an error if the mask is too small to be supportable on the given +system. If it returns non-zero, your device cannot perform DMA properly on +this platform, and attempting to do so will result in undefined behavior. +You must not use DMA on this device unless the dma_set_mask family of +functions has returned success. -This means that in the failure case, you have three options: +This means that in the failure case, you have two options: -1) Use another DMA mask, if possible (see below). -2) Use some non-DMA mode for data transfer, if possible. -3) Ignore this device and do not initialize it. +1) Use some non-DMA mode for data transfer, if possible. +2) Ignore this device and do not initialize it. -It is recommended that your driver print a kernel KERN_WARNING message -when you end up performing either #2 or #3. In this manner, if a user -of your driver reports that performance is bad or that the device is not -even detected, you can ask them for the kernel messages to find out -exactly why. +It is recommended that your driver print a kernel KERN_WARNING message when +setting the DMA mask fails. In this manner, if a user of your driver reports +that performance is bad or that the device is not even detected, you can ask +them for the kernel messages to find out exactly why. -The standard 32-bit addressing device would do something like this:: +The standard 64-bit addressing device would do something like this:: - if (dma_set_mask_and_coherent(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(32))) { + if (dma_set_mask_and_coherent(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(64))) { dev_warn(dev, "mydev: No suitable DMA available\n"); goto ignore_this_device; } -Another common scenario is a 64-bit capable device. The approach here -is to try for 64-bit addressing, but back down to a 32-bit mask that -should not fail. The kernel may fail the 64-bit mask not because the -platform is not capable of 64-bit addressing. Rather, it may fail in -this case simply because 32-bit addressing is done more efficiently -than 64-bit addressing. For example, Sparc64 PCI SAC addressing is -more efficient than DAC addressing. - -Here is how you would handle a 64-bit capable device which can drive -all 64-bits when accessing streaming DMA:: - - int using_dac; +If the device only supports 32-bit addressing for descriptors in the +coherent allocations, but supports full 64-bits for streaming mappings +it would look like this: - if (!dma_set_mask(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(64))) { - using_dac = 1; - } else if (!dma_set_mask(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(32))) { - using_dac = 0; - } else { - dev_warn(dev, "mydev: No suitable DMA available\n"); - goto ignore_this_device; - } - -If a card is capable of using 64-bit consistent allocations as well, -the case would look like this:: - - int using_dac, consistent_using_dac; - - if (!dma_set_mask_and_coherent(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(64))) { - using_dac = 1; - consistent_using_dac = 1; - } else if (!dma_set_mask_and_coherent(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(32))) { - using_dac = 0; - consistent_using_dac = 0; - } else { + if (dma_set_mask(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(64))) { dev_warn(dev, "mydev: No suitable DMA available\n"); goto ignore_this_device; } diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt index e133ccd60228..0076150fdccb 100644 --- a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt +++ b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt @@ -195,6 +195,14 @@ Requesting the required mask does not alter the current mask. If you wish to take advantage of it, you should issue a dma_set_mask() call to set the mask to the value returned. +:: + + size_t + dma_direct_max_mapping_size(struct device *dev); + +Returns the maximum size of a mapping for the device. The size parameter +of the mapping functions like dma_map_single(), dma_map_page() and +others should not be larger than the returned value. Part Id - Streaming DMA mappings -------------------------------- @@ -530,8 +538,8 @@ that simply cannot make consistent memory. dma_free_attrs(struct device *dev, size_t size, void *cpu_addr, dma_addr_t dma_handle, unsigned long attrs) -Free memory allocated by the dma_alloc_attrs(). All parameters common -parameters must identical to those otherwise passed to dma_fre_coherent, +Free memory allocated by the dma_alloc_attrs(). All common +parameters must be identical to those otherwise passed to dma_free_coherent, and the attrs argument must be identical to the attrs passed to dma_alloc_attrs(). @@ -566,8 +574,7 @@ boundaries when doing this. int dma_declare_coherent_memory(struct device *dev, phys_addr_t phys_addr, - dma_addr_t device_addr, size_t size, int - flags) + dma_addr_t device_addr, size_t size); Declare region of memory to be handed out by dma_alloc_coherent() when it's asked for coherent memory for this device. @@ -581,12 +588,6 @@ dma_addr_t in dma_alloc_coherent()). size is the size of the area (must be multiples of PAGE_SIZE). -flags can be ORed together and are: - -- DMA_MEMORY_EXCLUSIVE - only allocate memory from the declared regions. - Do not allow dma_alloc_coherent() to fall back to system memory when - it's out of memory in the declared region. - As a simplification for the platforms, only *one* such region of memory may be declared per device. @@ -605,23 +606,6 @@ unconditionally having removed all the required structures. It is the driver's job to ensure that no parts of this memory region are currently in use. -:: - - void * - dma_mark_declared_memory_occupied(struct device *dev, - dma_addr_t device_addr, size_t size) - -This is used to occupy specific regions of the declared space -(dma_alloc_coherent() will hand out the first free region it finds). - -device_addr is the *device* address of the region requested. - -size is the size (and should be a page-sized multiple). - -The return value will be either a pointer to the processor virtual -address of the memory, or an error (via PTR_ERR()) if any part of the -region is occupied. - Part III - Debug drivers use of the DMA-API ------------------------------------------- @@ -696,6 +680,9 @@ dma-api/disabled This read-only file contains the character 'Y' happen when it runs out of memory or if it was disabled at boot time +dma-api/dump This read-only file contains current DMA + mappings. + dma-api/error_count This file is read-only and shows the total numbers of errors found. @@ -717,7 +704,7 @@ dma-api/num_free_entries The current number of free dma_debug_entries dma-api/nr_total_entries The total number of dma_debug_entries in the allocator, both free and used. -dma-api/driver-filter You can write a name of a driver into this file +dma-api/driver_filter You can write a name of a driver into this file to limit the debug output to requests from that particular driver. Write an empty string to that file to disable the filter and see diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-ISA-LPC.txt b/Documentation/DMA-ISA-LPC.txt index 8c2b8be6e45b..b1ec7b16c21f 100644 --- a/Documentation/DMA-ISA-LPC.txt +++ b/Documentation/DMA-ISA-LPC.txt @@ -52,8 +52,8 @@ Address translation ------------------- To translate the virtual address to a bus address, use the normal DMA -API. Do _not_ use isa_virt_to_phys() even though it does the same -thing. The reason for this is that the function isa_virt_to_phys() +API. Do _not_ use isa_virt_to_bus() even though it does the same +thing. The reason for this is that the function isa_virt_to_bus() will require a Kconfig dependency to ISA, not just ISA_DMA_API which is really all you need. Remember that even though the DMA controller has its origins in ISA it is used elsewhere. diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Expedited-Grace-Periods/ExpSchedFlow.svg b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Expedited-Grace-Periods/ExpSchedFlow.svg index e4233ac93c2b..6189ffcc6aff 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Expedited-Grace-Periods/ExpSchedFlow.svg +++ b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Expedited-Grace-Periods/ExpSchedFlow.svg @@ -328,13 +328,13 @@ inkscape:window-height="1148" id="namedview90" showgrid="true" - inkscape:zoom="0.80021373" - inkscape:cx="462.49289" - inkscape:cy="473.6718" + inkscape:zoom="0.69092787" + inkscape:cx="476.34085" + inkscape:cy="712.80957" inkscape:window-x="770" inkscape:window-y="24" inkscape:window-maximized="0" - inkscape:current-layer="g4114-9-3-9" + inkscape:current-layer="g4" inkscape:snap-grids="false" fit-margin-top="5" fit-margin-right="5" @@ -813,14 +813,18 @@ <text sodipodi:linespacing="125%" id="text4110-5-7-6-2-4-0" - y="841.88086" + y="670.74316" x="1460.1007" style="font-size:267.24359131px;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal;text-align:center;line-height:125%;letter-spacing:0px;word-spacing:0px;text-anchor:middle;fill:#000000;fill-opacity:1;stroke:none;font-family:Sans" xml:space="preserve"><tspan - y="841.88086" + y="670.74316" + x="1460.1007" + sodipodi:role="line" + id="tspan4925-1-2-4-5">Request</tspan><tspan + y="1004.7976" x="1460.1007" sodipodi:role="line" - id="tspan4925-1-2-4-5">reched_cpu()</tspan></text> + id="tspan3100">context switch</tspan></text> </g> </g> </svg> diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Expedited-Grace-Periods/Expedited-Grace-Periods.html b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Expedited-Grace-Periods/Expedited-Grace-Periods.html index 8e4f873b979f..19e7a5fb6b73 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Expedited-Grace-Periods/Expedited-Grace-Periods.html +++ b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Expedited-Grace-Periods/Expedited-Grace-Periods.html @@ -72,10 +72,10 @@ will ignore it because idle and offline CPUs are already residing in quiescent states. Otherwise, the expedited grace period will use <tt>smp_call_function_single()</tt> to send the CPU an IPI, which -is handled by <tt>sync_rcu_exp_handler()</tt>. +is handled by <tt>rcu_exp_handler()</tt>. <p> -However, because this is preemptible RCU, <tt>sync_rcu_exp_handler()</tt> +However, because this is preemptible RCU, <tt>rcu_exp_handler()</tt> can check to see if the CPU is currently running in an RCU read-side critical section. If not, the handler can immediately report a quiescent state. @@ -145,19 +145,18 @@ expedited grace period is shown in the following diagram: <p><img src="ExpSchedFlow.svg" alt="ExpSchedFlow.svg" width="55%"> <p> -As with RCU-preempt's <tt>synchronize_rcu_expedited()</tt>, +As with RCU-preempt, RCU-sched's <tt>synchronize_sched_expedited()</tt> ignores offline and idle CPUs, again because they are in remotely detectable quiescent states. -However, the <tt>synchronize_rcu_expedited()</tt> handler -is <tt>sync_sched_exp_handler()</tt>, and because the +However, because the <tt>rcu_read_lock_sched()</tt> and <tt>rcu_read_unlock_sched()</tt> leave no trace of their invocation, in general it is not possible to tell whether or not the current CPU is in an RCU read-side critical section. -The best that <tt>sync_sched_exp_handler()</tt> can do is to check +The best that RCU-sched's <tt>rcu_exp_handler()</tt> can do is to check for idle, on the off-chance that the CPU went idle while the IPI was in flight. -If the CPU is idle, then <tt>sync_sched_exp_handler()</tt> reports +If the CPU is idle, then <tt>rcu_exp_handler()</tt> reports the quiescent state. <p> Otherwise, the handler forces a future context switch by setting the @@ -298,19 +297,18 @@ Instead, the task pushing the grace period forward will include the idle CPUs in the mask passed to <tt>rcu_report_exp_cpu_mult()</tt>. <p> -For RCU-sched, there is an additional check for idle in the IPI -handler, <tt>sync_sched_exp_handler()</tt>. +For RCU-sched, there is an additional check: If the IPI has interrupted the idle loop, then -<tt>sync_sched_exp_handler()</tt> invokes <tt>rcu_report_exp_rdp()</tt> +<tt>rcu_exp_handler()</tt> invokes <tt>rcu_report_exp_rdp()</tt> to report the corresponding quiescent state. <p> For RCU-preempt, there is no specific check for idle in the -IPI handler (<tt>sync_rcu_exp_handler()</tt>), but because +IPI handler (<tt>rcu_exp_handler()</tt>), but because RCU read-side critical sections are not permitted within the -idle loop, if <tt>sync_rcu_exp_handler()</tt> sees that the CPU is within +idle loop, if <tt>rcu_exp_handler()</tt> sees that the CPU is within RCU read-side critical section, the CPU cannot possibly be idle. -Otherwise, <tt>sync_rcu_exp_handler()</tt> invokes +Otherwise, <tt>rcu_exp_handler()</tt> invokes <tt>rcu_report_exp_rdp()</tt> to report the corresponding quiescent state, regardless of whether or not that quiescent state was due to the CPU being idle. @@ -625,6 +623,8 @@ checks, but only during the mid-boot dead zone. <p> With this refinement, synchronous grace periods can now be used from task context pretty much any time during the life of the kernel. +That is, aside from some points in the suspend, hibernate, or shutdown +code path. <h3><a name="Summary"> Summary</a></h3> diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/Tree-RCU-Memory-Ordering.html b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/Tree-RCU-Memory-Ordering.html index e4d94fba6c89..8d21af02b1f0 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/Tree-RCU-Memory-Ordering.html +++ b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/Tree-RCU-Memory-Ordering.html @@ -485,13 +485,13 @@ section that the grace period must wait on. noted by <tt>rcu_node_context_switch()</tt> on the left. On the other hand, if the CPU takes a scheduler-clock interrupt while executing in usermode, a quiescent state will be noted by -<tt>rcu_check_callbacks()</tt> on the right. +<tt>rcu_sched_clock_irq()</tt> on the right. Either way, the passage through a quiescent state will be noted in a per-CPU variable. <p>The next time an <tt>RCU_SOFTIRQ</tt> handler executes on this CPU (for example, after the next scheduler-clock -interrupt), <tt>__rcu_process_callbacks()</tt> will invoke +interrupt), <tt>rcu_core()</tt> will invoke <tt>rcu_check_quiescent_state()</tt>, which will notice the recorded quiescent state, and invoke <tt>rcu_report_qs_rdp()</tt>. @@ -651,7 +651,7 @@ to end. These callbacks are identified by <tt>rcu_advance_cbs()</tt>, which is usually invoked by <tt>__note_gp_changes()</tt>. As shown in the diagram below, this invocation can be triggered by -the scheduling-clock interrupt (<tt>rcu_check_callbacks()</tt> on +the scheduling-clock interrupt (<tt>rcu_sched_clock_irq()</tt> on the left) or by idle entry (<tt>rcu_cleanup_after_idle()</tt> on the right, but only for kernels build with <tt>CONFIG_RCU_FAST_NO_HZ=y</tt>). diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-callback-invocation.svg b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-callback-invocation.svg index 832408313d93..3fcf0c17cef2 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-callback-invocation.svg +++ b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-callback-invocation.svg @@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ font-weight="bold" font-size="192" id="text202-7-5" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">rcu_check_callbacks()</text> + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">rcu_sched_clock_irq()</text> <rect x="7069.6187" y="5087.4678" diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-gp.svg b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-gp.svg index acd73c7ad0f4..2bcd742d6e49 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-gp.svg +++ b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-gp.svg @@ -3902,7 +3902,7 @@ font-style="normal" y="-4418.6582" x="3745.7725" - xml:space="preserve">rcu_check_callbacks()</text> + xml:space="preserve">rcu_sched_clock_irq()</text> </g> <g transform="translate(-850.30204,55463.106)" @@ -3924,7 +3924,7 @@ font-style="normal" y="-4418.6582" x="3745.7725" - xml:space="preserve">rcu_process_callbacks()</text> + xml:space="preserve">rcu_core()</text> <text style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier" id="text202-7-5-3-27-0" @@ -3933,7 +3933,7 @@ font-style="normal" y="-4165.7954" x="3745.7725" - xml:space="preserve">rcu_check_quiescent_state())</text> + xml:space="preserve">rcu_check_quiescent_state()</text> <text style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier" id="text202-7-5-3-27-0-9" @@ -4968,7 +4968,7 @@ font-weight="bold" font-size="192" id="text202-7-5-19" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">rcu_check_callbacks()</text> + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">rcu_sched_clock_irq()</text> <rect x="5314.2671" y="82817.688" diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-qs.svg b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-qs.svg index 149bec2a4493..779c9ac31a52 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-qs.svg +++ b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-qs.svg @@ -775,7 +775,7 @@ font-style="normal" y="-4418.6582" x="3745.7725" - xml:space="preserve">rcu_check_callbacks()</text> + xml:space="preserve">rcu_sched_clock_irq()</text> </g> <g transform="translate(399.7744,828.86448)" @@ -797,7 +797,7 @@ font-style="normal" y="-4418.6582" x="3745.7725" - xml:space="preserve">rcu_process_callbacks()</text> + xml:space="preserve">rcu_core()</text> <text style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier" id="text202-7-5-3-27-0" @@ -806,7 +806,7 @@ font-style="normal" y="-4165.7954" x="3745.7725" - xml:space="preserve">rcu_check_quiescent_state())</text> + xml:space="preserve">rcu_check_quiescent_state()</text> <text style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier" id="text202-7-5-3-27-0-9" diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Requirements/Requirements.html b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Requirements/Requirements.html index 9fca73e03a98..5a9238a2883c 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Requirements/Requirements.html +++ b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Requirements/Requirements.html @@ -3099,7 +3099,7 @@ If you block forever in one of a given domain's SRCU read-side critical sections, then that domain's grace periods will also be blocked forever. Of course, one good way to block forever is to deadlock, which can happen if any operation in a given domain's SRCU read-side critical -section can block waiting, either directly or indirectly, for that domain's +section can wait, either directly or indirectly, for that domain's grace period to elapse. For example, this results in a self-deadlock: @@ -3139,12 +3139,18 @@ API, which, in combination with <tt>srcu_read_unlock()</tt>, guarantees a full memory barrier. <p> -Also unlike other RCU flavors, SRCU's callbacks-wait function -<tt>srcu_barrier()</tt> may be invoked from CPU-hotplug notifiers, -though this is not necessarily a good idea. -The reason that this is possible is that SRCU is insensitive -to whether or not a CPU is online, which means that <tt>srcu_barrier()</tt> -need not exclude CPU-hotplug operations. +Also unlike other RCU flavors, <tt>synchronize_srcu()</tt> may <b>not</b> +be invoked from CPU-hotplug notifiers, due to the fact that SRCU grace +periods make use of timers and the possibility of timers being temporarily +“stranded” on the outgoing CPU. +This stranding of timers means that timers posted to the outgoing CPU +will not fire until late in the CPU-hotplug process. +The problem is that if a notifier is waiting on an SRCU grace period, +that grace period is waiting on a timer, and that timer is stranded on the +outgoing CPU, then the notifier will never be awakened, in other words, +deadlock has occurred. +This same situation of course also prohibits <tt>srcu_barrier()</tt> +from being invoked from CPU-hotplug notifiers. <p> SRCU also differs from other RCU flavors in that SRCU's expedited and diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/lockdep-splat.txt b/Documentation/RCU/lockdep-splat.txt index 238e9f61352f..9c015976b174 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/lockdep-splat.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/lockdep-splat.txt @@ -14,9 +14,9 @@ being the real world and all that. So let's look at an example RCU lockdep splat from 3.0-rc5, one that has long since been fixed: -=============================== -[ INFO: suspicious RCU usage. ] -------------------------------- +============================= +WARNING: suspicious RCU usage +----------------------------- block/cfq-iosched.c:2776 suspicious rcu_dereference_protected() usage! other info that might help us debug this: @@ -24,11 +24,11 @@ other info that might help us debug this: rcu_scheduler_active = 1, debug_locks = 0 3 locks held by scsi_scan_6/1552: - #0: (&shost->scan_mutex){+.+.+.}, at: [<ffffffff8145efca>] + #0: (&shost->scan_mutex){+.+.}, at: [<ffffffff8145efca>] scsi_scan_host_selected+0x5a/0x150 - #1: (&eq->sysfs_lock){+.+...}, at: [<ffffffff812a5032>] + #1: (&eq->sysfs_lock){+.+.}, at: [<ffffffff812a5032>] elevator_exit+0x22/0x60 - #2: (&(&q->__queue_lock)->rlock){-.-...}, at: [<ffffffff812b6233>] + #2: (&(&q->__queue_lock)->rlock){-.-.}, at: [<ffffffff812b6233>] cfq_exit_queue+0x43/0x190 stack backtrace: diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt b/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt index 073dbc12d1ea..1ab70c37921f 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt @@ -219,17 +219,18 @@ an estimate of the total number of RCU callbacks queued across all CPUs In kernels with CONFIG_RCU_FAST_NO_HZ, more information is printed for each CPU: - 0: (64628 ticks this GP) idle=dd5/3fffffffffffffff/0 softirq=82/543 last_accelerate: a345/d342 nonlazy_posted: 25 .D + 0: (64628 ticks this GP) idle=dd5/3fffffffffffffff/0 softirq=82/543 last_accelerate: a345/d342 Nonlazy posted: ..D The "last_accelerate:" prints the low-order 16 bits (in hex) of the jiffies counter when this CPU last invoked rcu_try_advance_all_cbs() from rcu_needs_cpu() or last invoked rcu_accelerate_cbs() from -rcu_prepare_for_idle(). The "nonlazy_posted:" prints the number -of non-lazy callbacks posted since the last call to rcu_needs_cpu(). -Finally, an "L" indicates that there are currently no non-lazy callbacks -("." is printed otherwise, as shown above) and "D" indicates that -dyntick-idle processing is enabled ("." is printed otherwise, for example, -if disabled via the "nohz=" kernel boot parameter). +rcu_prepare_for_idle(). The "Nonlazy posted:" indicates lazy-callback +status, so that an "l" indicates that all callbacks were lazy at the start +of the last idle period and an "L" indicates that there are currently +no non-lazy callbacks (in both cases, "." is printed otherwise, as +shown above) and "D" indicates that dyntick-idle processing is enabled +("." is printed otherwise, for example, if disabled via the "nohz=" +kernel boot parameter). If the grace period ends just as the stall warning starts printing, there will be a spurious stall-warning message, which will include diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt b/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt index 55918b54808b..a41a0384d20c 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt @@ -10,173 +10,8 @@ status messages via printk(), which can be examined via the dmesg command (perhaps grepping for "torture"). The test is started when the module is loaded, and stops when the module is unloaded. - -MODULE PARAMETERS - -This module has the following parameters: - -fqs_duration Duration (in microseconds) of artificially induced bursts - of force_quiescent_state() invocations. In RCU - implementations having force_quiescent_state(), these - bursts help force races between forcing a given grace - period and that grace period ending on its own. - -fqs_holdoff Holdoff time (in microseconds) between consecutive calls - to force_quiescent_state() within a burst. - -fqs_stutter Wait time (in seconds) between consecutive bursts - of calls to force_quiescent_state(). - -gp_normal Make the fake writers use normal synchronous grace-period - primitives. - -gp_exp Make the fake writers use expedited synchronous grace-period - primitives. If both gp_normal and gp_exp are set, or - if neither gp_normal nor gp_exp are set, then randomly - choose the primitive so that about 50% are normal and - 50% expedited. By default, neither are set, which - gives best overall test coverage. - -irqreader Says to invoke RCU readers from irq level. This is currently - done via timers. Defaults to "1" for variants of RCU that - permit this. (Or, more accurately, variants of RCU that do - -not- permit this know to ignore this variable.) - -n_barrier_cbs If this is nonzero, RCU barrier testing will be conducted, - in which case n_barrier_cbs specifies the number of - RCU callbacks (and corresponding kthreads) to use for - this testing. The value cannot be negative. If you - specify this to be non-zero when torture_type indicates a - synchronous RCU implementation (one for which a member of - the synchronize_rcu() rather than the call_rcu() family is - used -- see the documentation for torture_type below), an - error will be reported and no testing will be carried out. - -nfakewriters This is the number of RCU fake writer threads to run. Fake - writer threads repeatedly use the synchronous "wait for - current readers" function of the interface selected by - torture_type, with a delay between calls to allow for various - different numbers of writers running in parallel. - nfakewriters defaults to 4, which provides enough parallelism - to trigger special cases caused by multiple writers, such as - the synchronize_srcu() early return optimization. - -nreaders This is the number of RCU reading threads supported. - The default is twice the number of CPUs. Why twice? - To properly exercise RCU implementations with preemptible - read-side critical sections. - -onoff_interval - The number of seconds between each attempt to execute a - randomly selected CPU-hotplug operation. Defaults to - zero, which disables CPU hotplugging. In HOTPLUG_CPU=n - kernels, rcutorture will silently refuse to do any - CPU-hotplug operations regardless of what value is - specified for onoff_interval. - -onoff_holdoff The number of seconds to wait until starting CPU-hotplug - operations. This would normally only be used when - rcutorture was built into the kernel and started - automatically at boot time, in which case it is useful - in order to avoid confusing boot-time code with CPUs - coming and going. - -shuffle_interval - The number of seconds to keep the test threads affinitied - to a particular subset of the CPUs, defaults to 3 seconds. - Used in conjunction with test_no_idle_hz. - -shutdown_secs The number of seconds to run the test before terminating - the test and powering off the system. The default is - zero, which disables test termination and system shutdown. - This capability is useful for automated testing. - -stall_cpu The number of seconds that a CPU should be stalled while - within both an rcu_read_lock() and a preempt_disable(). - This stall happens only once per rcutorture run. - If you need multiple stalls, use modprobe and rmmod to - repeatedly run rcutorture. The default for stall_cpu - is zero, which prevents rcutorture from stalling a CPU. - - Note that attempts to rmmod rcutorture while the stall - is ongoing will hang, so be careful what value you - choose for this module parameter! In addition, too-large - values for stall_cpu might well induce failures and - warnings in other parts of the kernel. You have been - warned! - -stall_cpu_holdoff - The number of seconds to wait after rcutorture starts - before stalling a CPU. Defaults to 10 seconds. - -stat_interval The number of seconds between output of torture - statistics (via printk()). Regardless of the interval, - statistics are printed when the module is unloaded. - Setting the interval to zero causes the statistics to - be printed -only- when the module is unloaded, and this - is the default. - -stutter The length of time to run the test before pausing for this - same period of time. Defaults to "stutter=5", so as - to run and pause for (roughly) five-second intervals. - Specifying "stutter=0" causes the test to run continuously - without pausing, which is the old default behavior. - -test_boost Whether or not to test the ability of RCU to do priority - boosting. Defaults to "test_boost=1", which performs - RCU priority-inversion testing only if the selected - RCU implementation supports priority boosting. Specifying - "test_boost=0" never performs RCU priority-inversion - testing. Specifying "test_boost=2" performs RCU - priority-inversion testing even if the selected RCU - implementation does not support RCU priority boosting, - which can be used to test rcutorture's ability to - carry out RCU priority-inversion testing. - -test_boost_interval - The number of seconds in an RCU priority-inversion test - cycle. Defaults to "test_boost_interval=7". It is - usually wise for this value to be relatively prime to - the value selected for "stutter". - -test_boost_duration - The number of seconds to do RCU priority-inversion testing - within any given "test_boost_interval". Defaults to - "test_boost_duration=4". - -test_no_idle_hz Whether or not to test the ability of RCU to operate in - a kernel that disables the scheduling-clock interrupt to - idle CPUs. Boolean parameter, "1" to test, "0" otherwise. - Defaults to omitting this test. - -torture_type The type of RCU to test, with string values as follows: - - "rcu": rcu_read_lock(), rcu_read_unlock() and call_rcu(), - along with expedited, synchronous, and polling - variants. - - "rcu_bh": rcu_read_lock_bh(), rcu_read_unlock_bh(), and - call_rcu_bh(), along with expedited and synchronous - variants. - - "rcu_busted": This tests an intentionally incorrect version - of RCU in order to help test rcutorture itself. - - "srcu": srcu_read_lock(), srcu_read_unlock() and - call_srcu(), along with expedited and - synchronous variants. - - "sched": preempt_disable(), preempt_enable(), and - call_rcu_sched(), along with expedited, - synchronous, and polling variants. - - "tasks": voluntary context switch and call_rcu_tasks(), - along with expedited and synchronous variants. - - Defaults to "rcu". - -verbose Enable debug printk()s. Default is disabled. - +Module parameters are prefixed by "rcutorture." in +Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt. OUTPUT diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt index 4a6854318b17..1ace20815bb1 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt @@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ rcu_dereference() must prohibit. The rcu_dereference_protected() variant takes a lockdep expression to indicate which locks must be acquired by the caller. If the indicated protection is not provided, - a lockdep splat is emitted. See RCU/Design/Requirements.html + a lockdep splat is emitted. See RCU/Design/Requirements/Requirements.html and the API's code comments for more details and example usage. The following diagram shows how each API communicates among the @@ -560,7 +560,7 @@ presents two such "toy" implementations of RCU, one that is implemented in terms of familiar locking primitives, and another that more closely resembles "classic" RCU. Both are way too simple for real-world use, lacking both functionality and performance. However, they are useful -in getting a feel for how RCU works. See kernel/rcupdate.c for a +in getting a feel for how RCU works. See kernel/rcu/update.c for a production-quality implementation, and see: http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/aml-debugger.txt b/Documentation/acpi/aml-debugger.txt index e851cc5de63f..75ebeb64ab29 100644 --- a/Documentation/acpi/aml-debugger.txt +++ b/Documentation/acpi/aml-debugger.txt @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ kernel. The resultant userspace tool binary is then located at: - tools/acpi/power/acpi/acpidbg/acpidbg + tools/power/acpi/acpidbg It can be installed to system directories by running "make install" (as a sufficiently privileged user). @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ kernel. # mount -t debugfs none /sys/kernel/debug # modprobe acpi_dbg - # tools/acpi/power/acpi/acpidbg/acpidbg + # tools/power/acpi/acpidbg That spawns the interactive AML debugger environment where you can execute debugger commands. diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/initrd_table_override.txt b/Documentation/acpi/initrd_table_override.txt index eb651a6aa285..30437a6db373 100644 --- a/Documentation/acpi/initrd_table_override.txt +++ b/Documentation/acpi/initrd_table_override.txt @@ -14,6 +14,10 @@ upgrade the ACPI execution environment that is defined by the ACPI tables via upgrading the ACPI tables provided by the BIOS with an instrumented, modified, more recent version one, or installing brand new ACPI tables. +When building initrd with kernel in a single image, option +ACPI_TABLE_OVERRIDE_VIA_BUILTIN_INITRD should also be true for this +feature to work. + For a full list of ACPI tables that can be upgraded/installed, take a look at the char *table_sigs[MAX_ACPI_SIGNATURE]; definition in drivers/acpi/tables.c. diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/LSM/SafeSetID.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/LSM/SafeSetID.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..212434ef65ad --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/LSM/SafeSetID.rst @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ +========= +SafeSetID +========= +SafeSetID is an LSM module that gates the setid family of syscalls to restrict +UID/GID transitions from a given UID/GID to only those approved by a +system-wide whitelist. These restrictions also prohibit the given UIDs/GIDs +from obtaining auxiliary privileges associated with CAP_SET{U/G}ID, such as +allowing a user to set up user namespace UID mappings. + + +Background +========== +In absence of file capabilities, processes spawned on a Linux system that need +to switch to a different user must be spawned with CAP_SETUID privileges. +CAP_SETUID is granted to programs running as root or those running as a non-root +user that have been explicitly given the CAP_SETUID runtime capability. It is +often preferable to use Linux runtime capabilities rather than file +capabilities, since using file capabilities to run a program with elevated +privileges opens up possible security holes since any user with access to the +file can exec() that program to gain the elevated privileges. + +While it is possible to implement a tree of processes by giving full +CAP_SET{U/G}ID capabilities, this is often at odds with the goals of running a +tree of processes under non-root user(s) in the first place. Specifically, +since CAP_SETUID allows changing to any user on the system, including the root +user, it is an overpowered capability for what is needed in this scenario, +especially since programs often only call setuid() to drop privileges to a +lesser-privileged user -- not elevate privileges. Unfortunately, there is no +generally feasible way in Linux to restrict the potential UIDs that a user can +switch to through setuid() beyond allowing a switch to any user on the system. +This SafeSetID LSM seeks to provide a solution for restricting setid +capabilities in such a way. + +The main use case for this LSM is to allow a non-root program to transition to +other untrusted uids without full blown CAP_SETUID capabilities. The non-root +program would still need CAP_SETUID to do any kind of transition, but the +additional restrictions imposed by this LSM would mean it is a "safer" version +of CAP_SETUID since the non-root program cannot take advantage of CAP_SETUID to +do any unapproved actions (e.g. setuid to uid 0 or create/enter new user +namespace). The higher level goal is to allow for uid-based sandboxing of system +services without having to give out CAP_SETUID all over the place just so that +non-root programs can drop to even-lesser-privileged uids. This is especially +relevant when one non-root daemon on the system should be allowed to spawn other +processes as different uids, but its undesirable to give the daemon a +basically-root-equivalent CAP_SETUID. + + +Other Approaches Considered +=========================== + +Solve this problem in userspace +------------------------------- +For candidate applications that would like to have restricted setid capabilities +as implemented in this LSM, an alternative option would be to simply take away +setid capabilities from the application completely and refactor the process +spawning semantics in the application (e.g. by using a privileged helper program +to do process spawning and UID/GID transitions). Unfortunately, there are a +number of semantics around process spawning that would be affected by this, such +as fork() calls where the program doesn???t immediately call exec() after the +fork(), parent processes specifying custom environment variables or command line +args for spawned child processes, or inheritance of file handles across a +fork()/exec(). Because of this, as solution that uses a privileged helper in +userspace would likely be less appealing to incorporate into existing projects +that rely on certain process-spawning semantics in Linux. + +Use user namespaces +------------------- +Another possible approach would be to run a given process tree in its own user +namespace and give programs in the tree setid capabilities. In this way, +programs in the tree could change to any desired UID/GID in the context of their +own user namespace, and only approved UIDs/GIDs could be mapped back to the +initial system user namespace, affectively preventing privilege escalation. +Unfortunately, it is not generally feasible to use user namespaces in isolation, +without pairing them with other namespace types, which is not always an option. +Linux checks for capabilities based off of the user namespace that ???owns??? some +entity. For example, Linux has the notion that network namespaces are owned by +the user namespace in which they were created. A consequence of this is that +capability checks for access to a given network namespace are done by checking +whether a task has the given capability in the context of the user namespace +that owns the network namespace -- not necessarily the user namespace under +which the given task runs. Therefore spawning a process in a new user namespace +effectively prevents it from accessing the network namespace owned by the +initial namespace. This is a deal-breaker for any application that expects to +retain the CAP_NET_ADMIN capability for the purpose of adjusting network +configurations. Using user namespaces in isolation causes problems regarding +other system interactions, including use of pid namespaces and device creation. + +Use an existing LSM +------------------- +None of the other in-tree LSMs have the capability to gate setid transitions, or +even employ the security_task_fix_setuid hook at all. SELinux says of that hook: +"Since setuid only affects the current process, and since the SELinux controls +are not based on the Linux identity attributes, SELinux does not need to control +this operation." + + +Directions for use +================== +This LSM hooks the setid syscalls to make sure transitions are allowed if an +applicable restriction policy is in place. Policies are configured through +securityfs by writing to the safesetid/add_whitelist_policy and +safesetid/flush_whitelist_policies files at the location where securityfs is +mounted. The format for adding a policy is '<UID>:<UID>', using literal +numbers, such as '123:456'. To flush the policies, any write to the file is +sufficient. Again, configuring a policy for a UID will prevent that UID from +obtaining auxiliary setid privileges, such as allowing a user to set up user +namespace UID mappings. diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/LSM/index.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/LSM/index.rst index c980dfe9abf1..a6ba95fbaa9f 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/LSM/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/LSM/index.rst @@ -17,9 +17,8 @@ MAC extensions, other extensions can be built using the LSM to provide specific changes to system operation when these tweaks are not available in the core functionality of Linux itself. -Without a specific LSM built into the kernel, the default LSM will be the -Linux capabilities system. Most LSMs choose to extend the capabilities -system, building their checks on top of the defined capability hooks. +The Linux capabilities modules will always be included. This may be +followed by any number of "minor" modules and at most one "major" module. For more details on capabilities, see ``capabilities(7)`` in the Linux man-pages project. @@ -30,6 +29,14 @@ order in which checks are made. The capability module will always be first, followed by any "minor" modules (e.g. Yama) and then the one "major" module (e.g. SELinux) if there is one configured. +Process attributes associated with "major" security modules should +be accessed and maintained using the special files in ``/proc/.../attr``. +A security module may maintain a module specific subdirectory there, +named after the module. ``/proc/.../attr/smack`` is provided by the Smack +security module and contains all its special files. The files directly +in ``/proc/.../attr`` remain as legacy interfaces for modules that provide +subdirectories. + .. toctree:: :maxdepth: 1 @@ -39,3 +46,4 @@ the one "major" module (e.g. SELinux) if there is one configured. Smack tomoyo Yama + SafeSetID diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/README.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/README.rst index 0797eec76be1..a582c780c3bd 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/README.rst +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/README.rst @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ .. _readme: -Linux kernel release 4.x <http://kernel.org/> +Linux kernel release 5.x <http://kernel.org/> ============================================= -These are the release notes for Linux version 4. Read them carefully, +These are the release notes for Linux version 5. Read them carefully, as they tell you what this is all about, explain how to install the kernel, and what to do if something goes wrong. @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Installing the kernel source directory where you have permissions (e.g. your home directory) and unpack it:: - xz -cd linux-4.X.tar.xz | tar xvf - + xz -cd linux-5.x.tar.xz | tar xvf - Replace "X" with the version number of the latest kernel. @@ -72,26 +72,26 @@ Installing the kernel source files. They should match the library, and not get messed up by whatever the kernel-du-jour happens to be. - - You can also upgrade between 4.x releases by patching. Patches are + - You can also upgrade between 5.x releases by patching. Patches are distributed in the xz format. To install by patching, get all the newer patch files, enter the top level directory of the kernel source - (linux-4.X) and execute:: + (linux-5.x) and execute:: - xz -cd ../patch-4.x.xz | patch -p1 + xz -cd ../patch-5.x.xz | patch -p1 - Replace "x" for all versions bigger than the version "X" of your current + Replace "x" for all versions bigger than the version "x" of your current source tree, **in_order**, and you should be ok. You may want to remove the backup files (some-file-name~ or some-file-name.orig), and make sure that there are no failed patches (some-file-name# or some-file-name.rej). If there are, either you or I have made a mistake. - Unlike patches for the 4.x kernels, patches for the 4.x.y kernels + Unlike patches for the 5.x kernels, patches for the 5.x.y kernels (also known as the -stable kernels) are not incremental but instead apply - directly to the base 4.x kernel. For example, if your base kernel is 4.0 - and you want to apply the 4.0.3 patch, you must not first apply the 4.0.1 - and 4.0.2 patches. Similarly, if you are running kernel version 4.0.2 and - want to jump to 4.0.3, you must first reverse the 4.0.2 patch (that is, - patch -R) **before** applying the 4.0.3 patch. You can read more on this in + directly to the base 5.x kernel. For example, if your base kernel is 5.0 + and you want to apply the 5.0.3 patch, you must not first apply the 5.0.1 + and 5.0.2 patches. Similarly, if you are running kernel version 5.0.2 and + want to jump to 5.0.3, you must first reverse the 5.0.2 patch (that is, + patch -R) **before** applying the 5.0.3 patch. You can read more on this in :ref:`Documentation/process/applying-patches.rst <applying_patches>`. Alternatively, the script patch-kernel can be used to automate this @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Installing the kernel source Software requirements --------------------- - Compiling and running the 4.x kernels requires up-to-date + Compiling and running the 5.x kernels requires up-to-date versions of various software packages. Consult :ref:`Documentation/process/changes.rst <changes>` for the minimum version numbers required and how to get updates for these packages. Beware that using @@ -132,12 +132,12 @@ Build directory for the kernel place for the output files (including .config). Example:: - kernel source code: /usr/src/linux-4.X + kernel source code: /usr/src/linux-5.x build directory: /home/name/build/kernel To configure and build the kernel, use:: - cd /usr/src/linux-4.X + cd /usr/src/linux-5.x make O=/home/name/build/kernel menuconfig make O=/home/name/build/kernel sudo make O=/home/name/build/kernel modules_install install @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ Configuring the kernel Compiling the kernel -------------------- - - Make sure you have at least gcc 3.2 available. + - Make sure you have at least gcc 4.6 available. For more information, refer to :ref:`Documentation/process/changes.rst <changes>`. Please note that you can still run a.out user programs with this kernel. diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/cgroup-v2.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/cgroup-v2.rst index 7bf3f129c68b..20f92c16ffbf 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/cgroup-v2.rst +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/cgroup-v2.rst @@ -1189,6 +1189,10 @@ PAGE_SIZE multiple when read back. Amount of cached filesystem data that was modified and is currently being written back to disk + anon_thp + Amount of memory used in anonymous mappings backed by + transparent hugepages + inactive_anon, active_anon, inactive_file, active_file, unevictable Amount of memory, swap-backed and filesystem-backed, on the internal memory management lists used by the @@ -1248,6 +1252,18 @@ PAGE_SIZE multiple when read back. Amount of reclaimed lazyfree pages + thp_fault_alloc + + Number of transparent hugepages which were allocated to satisfy + a page fault, including COW faults. This counter is not present + when CONFIG_TRANSPARENT_HUGEPAGE is not set. + + thp_collapse_alloc + + Number of transparent hugepages which were allocated to allow + collapsing an existing range of pages. This counter is not + present when CONFIG_TRANSPARENT_HUGEPAGE is not set. + memory.swap.current A read-only single value file which exists on non-root cgroups. @@ -1503,7 +1519,7 @@ protected workload. The limits are only applied at the peer level in the hierarchy. This means that in the diagram below, only groups A, B, and C will influence each other, and -groups D and F will influence each other. Group G will influence nobody. +groups D and F will influence each other. Group G will influence nobody:: [root] / | \ diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt index b799bcf67d7b..2b8ee90bb644 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -461,6 +461,11 @@ possible to determine what the correct size should be. This option provides an override for these situations. + carrier_timeout= + [NET] Specifies amount of time (in seconds) that + the kernel should wait for a network carrier. By default + it waits 120 seconds. + ca_keys= [KEYS] This parameter identifies a specific key(s) on the system trusted keyring to be used for certificate trust validation. @@ -910,6 +915,10 @@ The filter can be disabled or changed to another driver later using sysfs. + driver_async_probe= [KNL] + List of driver names to be probed asynchronously. + Format: <driver_name1>,<driver_name2>... + drm.edid_firmware=[<connector>:]<file>[,[<connector>:]<file>] Broken monitors, graphic adapters, KVMs and EDIDless panels may send no or incorrect EDID data sets. @@ -1073,9 +1082,15 @@ specified address. The serial port must already be setup and configured. Options are not yet supported. + efifb,[options] + Start an early, unaccelerated console on the EFI + memory mapped framebuffer (if available). On cache + coherent non-x86 systems that use system memory for + the framebuffer, pass the 'ram' option so that it is + mapped with the correct attributes. + earlyprintk= [X86,SH,ARM,M68k,S390] earlyprintk=vga - earlyprintk=efi earlyprintk=sclp earlyprintk=xen earlyprintk=serial[,ttySn[,baudrate]] @@ -1182,9 +1197,10 @@ arch/x86/kernel/cpu/cpufreq/elanfreq.c. elevator= [IOSCHED] - Format: {"cfq" | "deadline" | "noop"} - See Documentation/block/cfq-iosched.txt and - Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt for details. + Format: { "mq-deadline" | "kyber" | "bfq" } + See Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt, + Documentation/block/kyber-iosched.txt and + Documentation/block/bfq-iosched.txt for details. elfcorehdr=[size[KMG]@]offset[KMG] [IA64,PPC,SH,X86,S390] Specifies physical address of start of kernel core @@ -1696,12 +1712,11 @@ By default, super page will be supported if Intel IOMMU has the capability. With this option, super page will not be supported. - sm_off [Default Off] - By default, scalable mode will be supported if the + sm_on [Default Off] + By default, scalable mode will be disabled even if the hardware advertises that it has support for the scalable mode translation. With this option set, scalable mode - will not be used even on hardware which claims to support - it. + will be used on hardware which claims to support it. tboot_noforce [Default Off] Do not force the Intel IOMMU enabled under tboot. By default, tboot will force Intel IOMMU on, which @@ -1831,6 +1846,11 @@ to let secondary kernels in charge of setting up LPIs. + irqchip.gicv3_pseudo_nmi= [ARM64] + Enables support for pseudo-NMIs in the kernel. This + requires the kernel to be built with + CONFIG_ARM64_PSEUDO_NMI. + irqfixup [HW] When an interrupt is not handled search all handlers for it. Intended to get systems with badly broken @@ -1982,6 +2002,12 @@ Built with CONFIG_DEBUG_KMEMLEAK_DEFAULT_OFF=y, the default is off. + kpti= [ARM64] Control page table isolation of user + and kernel address spaces. + Default: enabled on cores which need mitigation. + 0: force disabled + 1: force enabled + kvm.ignore_msrs=[KVM] Ignore guest accesses to unhandled MSRs. Default is 0 (don't ignore, but inject #GP) @@ -2319,6 +2345,10 @@ lsm.debug [SECURITY] Enable LSM initialization debugging output. + lsm=lsm1,...,lsmN + [SECURITY] Choose order of LSM initialization. This + overrides CONFIG_LSM, and the "security=" parameter. + machvec= [IA-64] Force the use of a particular machine-vector (machvec) in a generic kernel. Example: machvec=hpzx1_swiotlb @@ -3654,19 +3684,6 @@ latencies, which will choose a value aligned with the appropriate hardware boundaries. - rcutree.jiffies_till_sched_qs= [KNL] - Set required age in jiffies for a - given grace period before RCU starts - soliciting quiescent-state help from - rcu_note_context_switch(). If not specified, the - kernel will calculate a value based on the most - recent settings of rcutree.jiffies_till_first_fqs - and rcutree.jiffies_till_next_fqs. - This calculated value may be viewed in - rcutree.jiffies_to_sched_qs. Any attempt to - set rcutree.jiffies_to_sched_qs will be - cheerfully overwritten. - rcutree.jiffies_till_first_fqs= [KNL] Set delay from grace-period initialization to first attempt to force quiescent states. @@ -3678,6 +3695,20 @@ quiescent states. Units are jiffies, minimum value is one, and maximum value is HZ. + rcutree.jiffies_till_sched_qs= [KNL] + Set required age in jiffies for a + given grace period before RCU starts + soliciting quiescent-state help from + rcu_note_context_switch() and cond_resched(). + If not specified, the kernel will calculate + a value based on the most recent settings + of rcutree.jiffies_till_first_fqs + and rcutree.jiffies_till_next_fqs. + This calculated value may be viewed in + rcutree.jiffies_to_sched_qs. Any attempt to set + rcutree.jiffies_to_sched_qs will be cheerfully + overwritten. + rcutree.kthread_prio= [KNL,BOOT] Set the SCHED_FIFO priority of the RCU per-CPU kthreads (rcuc/N). This value is also used for @@ -3721,6 +3752,11 @@ This wake_up() will be accompanied by a WARN_ONCE() splat and an ftrace_dump(). + rcutree.sysrq_rcu= [KNL] + Commandeer a sysrq key to dump out Tree RCU's + rcu_node tree with an eye towards determining + why a new grace period has not yet started. + rcuperf.gp_async= [KNL] Measure performance of asynchronous grace-period primitives such as call_rcu(). @@ -4090,11 +4126,9 @@ Note: increases power consumption, thus should only be enabled if running jitter sensitive (HPC/RT) workloads. - security= [SECURITY] Choose a security module to enable at boot. - If this boot parameter is not specified, only the first - security module asking for security registration will be - loaded. An invalid security module name will be treated - as if no module has been chosen. + security= [SECURITY] Choose a legacy "major" security module to + enable at boot. This has been deprecated by the + "lsm=" parameter. selinux= [SELINUX] Disable or enable SELinux at boot time. Format: { "0" | "1" } @@ -4698,7 +4732,8 @@ usbcore.authorized_default= [USB] Default USB device authorization: (default -1 = authorized except for wireless USB, - 0 = not authorized, 1 = authorized) + 0 = not authorized, 1 = authorized, 2 = authorized + if device connected to internal port) usbcore.autosuspend= [USB] The autosuspend time delay (in seconds) used @@ -5043,6 +5078,14 @@ or other driver-specific files in the Documentation/watchdog/ directory. + watchdog_thresh= + [KNL] + Set the hard lockup detector stall duration + threshold in seconds. The soft lockup detector + threshold is set to twice the value. A value of 0 + disables both lockup detectors. Default is 10 + seconds. + workqueue.watchdog_thresh= If CONFIG_WQ_WATCHDOG is configured, workqueue can warn stall conditions and dump internal state to diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/md.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/md.rst index 84de718f24a4..3c51084ffd37 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/md.rst +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/md.rst @@ -756,3 +756,6 @@ These currently include: The cache mode for raid5. raid5 could include an extra disk for caching. The mode can be "write-throuth" and "write-back". The default is "write-through". + + ppl_write_hint + NVMe stream ID to be set for each PPL write request. diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/mm/pagemap.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/mm/pagemap.rst index 3f7bade2c231..340a5aee9b80 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/mm/pagemap.rst +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/mm/pagemap.rst @@ -75,9 +75,10 @@ number of times a page is mapped. 20. NOPAGE 21. KSM 22. THP - 23. BALLOON + 23. OFFLINE 24. ZERO_PAGE 25. IDLE + 26. PGTABLE * ``/proc/kpagecgroup``. This file contains a 64-bit inode number of the memory cgroup each page is charged to, indexed by PFN. Only available when @@ -118,8 +119,8 @@ Short descriptions to the page flags identical memory pages dynamically shared between one or more processes 22 - THP contiguous pages which construct transparent hugepages -23 - BALLOON - balloon compaction page +23 - OFFLINE + page is logically offline 24 - ZERO_PAGE zero page for pfn_zero or huge_zero page 25 - IDLE @@ -128,6 +129,8 @@ Short descriptions to the page flags Note that this flag may be stale in case the page was accessed via a PTE. To make sure the flag is up-to-date one has to read ``/sys/kernel/mm/page_idle/bitmap`` first. +26 - PGTABLE + page is in use as a page table IO related page flags --------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/perf-security.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/perf-security.rst index f73ebfe9bfe2..72effa7c23b9 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/perf-security.rst +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/perf-security.rst @@ -6,83 +6,211 @@ Perf Events and tool security Overview -------- -Usage of Performance Counters for Linux (perf_events) [1]_ , [2]_ , [3]_ can -impose a considerable risk of leaking sensitive data accessed by monitored -processes. The data leakage is possible both in scenarios of direct usage of -perf_events system call API [2]_ and over data files generated by Perf tool user -mode utility (Perf) [3]_ , [4]_ . The risk depends on the nature of data that -perf_events performance monitoring units (PMU) [2]_ collect and expose for -performance analysis. Having that said perf_events/Perf performance monitoring -is the subject for security access control management [5]_ . +Usage of Performance Counters for Linux (perf_events) [1]_ , [2]_ , [3]_ +can impose a considerable risk of leaking sensitive data accessed by +monitored processes. The data leakage is possible both in scenarios of +direct usage of perf_events system call API [2]_ and over data files +generated by Perf tool user mode utility (Perf) [3]_ , [4]_ . The risk +depends on the nature of data that perf_events performance monitoring +units (PMU) [2]_ and Perf collect and expose for performance analysis. +Collected system and performance data may be split into several +categories: + +1. System hardware and software configuration data, for example: a CPU + model and its cache configuration, an amount of available memory and + its topology, used kernel and Perf versions, performance monitoring + setup including experiment time, events configuration, Perf command + line parameters, etc. + +2. User and kernel module paths and their load addresses with sizes, + process and thread names with their PIDs and TIDs, timestamps for + captured hardware and software events. + +3. Content of kernel software counters (e.g., for context switches, page + faults, CPU migrations), architectural hardware performance counters + (PMC) [8]_ and machine specific registers (MSR) [9]_ that provide + execution metrics for various monitored parts of the system (e.g., + memory controller (IMC), interconnect (QPI/UPI) or peripheral (PCIe) + uncore counters) without direct attribution to any execution context + state. + +4. Content of architectural execution context registers (e.g., RIP, RSP, + RBP on x86_64), process user and kernel space memory addresses and + data, content of various architectural MSRs that capture data from + this category. + +Data that belong to the fourth category can potentially contain +sensitive process data. If PMUs in some monitoring modes capture values +of execution context registers or data from process memory then access +to such monitoring capabilities requires to be ordered and secured +properly. So, perf_events/Perf performance monitoring is the subject for +security access control management [5]_ . perf_events/Perf access control ------------------------------- -To perform security checks, the Linux implementation splits processes into two -categories [6]_ : a) privileged processes (whose effective user ID is 0, referred -to as superuser or root), and b) unprivileged processes (whose effective UID is -nonzero). Privileged processes bypass all kernel security permission checks so -perf_events performance monitoring is fully available to privileged processes -without access, scope and resource restrictions. - -Unprivileged processes are subject to a full security permission check based on -the process's credentials [5]_ (usually: effective UID, effective GID, and -supplementary group list). - -Linux divides the privileges traditionally associated with superuser into -distinct units, known as capabilities [6]_ , which can be independently enabled -and disabled on per-thread basis for processes and files of unprivileged users. - -Unprivileged processes with enabled CAP_SYS_ADMIN capability are treated as -privileged processes with respect to perf_events performance monitoring and -bypass *scope* permissions checks in the kernel. - -Unprivileged processes using perf_events system call API is also subject for -PTRACE_MODE_READ_REALCREDS ptrace access mode check [7]_ , whose outcome -determines whether monitoring is permitted. So unprivileged processes provided -with CAP_SYS_PTRACE capability are effectively permitted to pass the check. - -Other capabilities being granted to unprivileged processes can effectively -enable capturing of additional data required for later performance analysis of -monitored processes or a system. For example, CAP_SYSLOG capability permits -reading kernel space memory addresses from /proc/kallsyms file. +To perform security checks, the Linux implementation splits processes +into two categories [6]_ : a) privileged processes (whose effective user +ID is 0, referred to as superuser or root), and b) unprivileged +processes (whose effective UID is nonzero). Privileged processes bypass +all kernel security permission checks so perf_events performance +monitoring is fully available to privileged processes without access, +scope and resource restrictions. + +Unprivileged processes are subject to a full security permission check +based on the process's credentials [5]_ (usually: effective UID, +effective GID, and supplementary group list). + +Linux divides the privileges traditionally associated with superuser +into distinct units, known as capabilities [6]_ , which can be +independently enabled and disabled on per-thread basis for processes and +files of unprivileged users. + +Unprivileged processes with enabled CAP_SYS_ADMIN capability are treated +as privileged processes with respect to perf_events performance +monitoring and bypass *scope* permissions checks in the kernel. + +Unprivileged processes using perf_events system call API is also subject +for PTRACE_MODE_READ_REALCREDS ptrace access mode check [7]_ , whose +outcome determines whether monitoring is permitted. So unprivileged +processes provided with CAP_SYS_PTRACE capability are effectively +permitted to pass the check. + +Other capabilities being granted to unprivileged processes can +effectively enable capturing of additional data required for later +performance analysis of monitored processes or a system. For example, +CAP_SYSLOG capability permits reading kernel space memory addresses from +/proc/kallsyms file. + +perf_events/Perf privileged users +--------------------------------- + +Mechanisms of capabilities, privileged capability-dumb files [6]_ and +file system ACLs [10]_ can be used to create a dedicated group of +perf_events/Perf privileged users who are permitted to execute +performance monitoring without scope limits. The following steps can be +taken to create such a group of privileged Perf users. + +1. Create perf_users group of privileged Perf users, assign perf_users + group to Perf tool executable and limit access to the executable for + other users in the system who are not in the perf_users group: + +:: + + # groupadd perf_users + # ls -alhF + -rwxr-xr-x 2 root root 11M Oct 19 15:12 perf + # chgrp perf_users perf + # ls -alhF + -rwxr-xr-x 2 root perf_users 11M Oct 19 15:12 perf + # chmod o-rwx perf + # ls -alhF + -rwxr-x--- 2 root perf_users 11M Oct 19 15:12 perf + +2. Assign the required capabilities to the Perf tool executable file and + enable members of perf_users group with performance monitoring + privileges [6]_ : + +:: + + # setcap "cap_sys_admin,cap_sys_ptrace,cap_syslog=ep" perf + # setcap -v "cap_sys_admin,cap_sys_ptrace,cap_syslog=ep" perf + perf: OK + # getcap perf + perf = cap_sys_ptrace,cap_sys_admin,cap_syslog+ep + +As a result, members of perf_users group are capable of conducting +performance monitoring by using functionality of the configured Perf +tool executable that, when executes, passes perf_events subsystem scope +checks. + +This specific access control management is only available to superuser +or root running processes with CAP_SETPCAP, CAP_SETFCAP [6]_ +capabilities. perf_events/Perf unprivileged users ----------------------------------- -perf_events/Perf *scope* and *access* control for unprivileged processes is -governed by perf_event_paranoid [2]_ setting: +perf_events/Perf *scope* and *access* control for unprivileged processes +is governed by perf_event_paranoid [2]_ setting: -1: - Impose no *scope* and *access* restrictions on using perf_events performance - monitoring. Per-user per-cpu perf_event_mlock_kb [2]_ locking limit is - ignored when allocating memory buffers for storing performance data. - This is the least secure mode since allowed monitored *scope* is - maximized and no perf_events specific limits are imposed on *resources* - allocated for performance monitoring. + Impose no *scope* and *access* restrictions on using perf_events + performance monitoring. Per-user per-cpu perf_event_mlock_kb [2]_ + locking limit is ignored when allocating memory buffers for storing + performance data. This is the least secure mode since allowed + monitored *scope* is maximized and no perf_events specific limits + are imposed on *resources* allocated for performance monitoring. >=0: *scope* includes per-process and system wide performance monitoring - but excludes raw tracepoints and ftrace function tracepoints monitoring. - CPU and system events happened when executing either in user or - in kernel space can be monitored and captured for later analysis. - Per-user per-cpu perf_event_mlock_kb locking limit is imposed but - ignored for unprivileged processes with CAP_IPC_LOCK [6]_ capability. + but excludes raw tracepoints and ftrace function tracepoints + monitoring. CPU and system events happened when executing either in + user or in kernel space can be monitored and captured for later + analysis. Per-user per-cpu perf_event_mlock_kb locking limit is + imposed but ignored for unprivileged processes with CAP_IPC_LOCK + [6]_ capability. >=1: - *scope* includes per-process performance monitoring only and excludes - system wide performance monitoring. CPU and system events happened when - executing either in user or in kernel space can be monitored and - captured for later analysis. Per-user per-cpu perf_event_mlock_kb - locking limit is imposed but ignored for unprivileged processes with - CAP_IPC_LOCK capability. + *scope* includes per-process performance monitoring only and + excludes system wide performance monitoring. CPU and system events + happened when executing either in user or in kernel space can be + monitored and captured for later analysis. Per-user per-cpu + perf_event_mlock_kb locking limit is imposed but ignored for + unprivileged processes with CAP_IPC_LOCK capability. >=2: - *scope* includes per-process performance monitoring only. CPU and system - events happened when executing in user space only can be monitored and - captured for later analysis. Per-user per-cpu perf_event_mlock_kb - locking limit is imposed but ignored for unprivileged processes with - CAP_IPC_LOCK capability. + *scope* includes per-process performance monitoring only. CPU and + system events happened when executing in user space only can be + monitored and captured for later analysis. Per-user per-cpu + perf_event_mlock_kb locking limit is imposed but ignored for + unprivileged processes with CAP_IPC_LOCK capability. + +perf_events/Perf resource control +--------------------------------- + +Open file descriptors ++++++++++++++++++++++ + +The perf_events system call API [2]_ allocates file descriptors for +every configured PMU event. Open file descriptors are a per-process +accountable resource governed by the RLIMIT_NOFILE [11]_ limit +(ulimit -n), which is usually derived from the login shell process. When +configuring Perf collection for a long list of events on a large server +system, this limit can be easily hit preventing required monitoring +configuration. RLIMIT_NOFILE limit can be increased on per-user basis +modifying content of the limits.conf file [12]_ . Ordinarily, a Perf +sampling session (perf record) requires an amount of open perf_event +file descriptors that is not less than the number of monitored events +multiplied by the number of monitored CPUs. + +Memory allocation ++++++++++++++++++ + +The amount of memory available to user processes for capturing +performance monitoring data is governed by the perf_event_mlock_kb [2]_ +setting. This perf_event specific resource setting defines overall +per-cpu limits of memory allowed for mapping by the user processes to +execute performance monitoring. The setting essentially extends the +RLIMIT_MEMLOCK [11]_ limit, but only for memory regions mapped +specifically for capturing monitored performance events and related data. + +For example, if a machine has eight cores and perf_event_mlock_kb limit +is set to 516 KiB, then a user process is provided with 516 KiB * 8 = +4128 KiB of memory above the RLIMIT_MEMLOCK limit (ulimit -l) for +perf_event mmap buffers. In particular, this means that, if the user +wants to start two or more performance monitoring processes, the user is +required to manually distribute the available 4128 KiB between the +monitoring processes, for example, using the --mmap-pages Perf record +mode option. Otherwise, the first started performance monitoring process +allocates all available 4128 KiB and the other processes will fail to +proceed due to the lack of memory. + +RLIMIT_MEMLOCK and perf_event_mlock_kb resource constraints are ignored +for processes with the CAP_IPC_LOCK capability. Thus, perf_events/Perf +privileged users can be provided with memory above the constraints for +perf_events/Perf performance monitoring purpose by providing the Perf +executable with CAP_IPC_LOCK capability. Bibliography ------------ @@ -94,4 +222,9 @@ Bibliography .. [5] `<https://www.kernel.org/doc/html/latest/security/credentials.html>`_ .. [6] `<http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man7/capabilities.7.html>`_ .. [7] `<http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man2/ptrace.2.html>`_ +.. [8] `<https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hardware_performance_counter>`_ +.. [9] `<https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Model-specific_register>`_ +.. [10] `<http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man5/acl.5.html>`_ +.. [11] `<http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man2/getrlimit.2.html>`_ +.. [12] `<http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man5/limits.conf.5.html>`_ diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/cpuidle.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/cpuidle.rst index 106379e2619f..9c58b35a81cb 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/cpuidle.rst +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/cpuidle.rst @@ -155,14 +155,14 @@ governor uses that information depends on what algorithm is implemented by it and that is the primary reason for having more than one governor in the ``CPUIdle`` subsystem. -There are two ``CPUIdle`` governors available, ``menu`` and ``ladder``. Which -of them is used depends on the configuration of the kernel and in particular on -whether or not the scheduler tick can be `stopped by the idle -loop <idle-cpus-and-tick_>`_. It is possible to change the governor at run time -if the ``cpuidle_sysfs_switch`` command line parameter has been passed to the -kernel, but that is not safe in general, so it should not be done on production -systems (that may change in the future, though). The name of the ``CPUIdle`` -governor currently used by the kernel can be read from the +There are three ``CPUIdle`` governors available, ``menu``, `TEO <teo-gov_>`_ +and ``ladder``. Which of them is used by default depends on the configuration +of the kernel and in particular on whether or not the scheduler tick can be +`stopped by the idle loop <idle-cpus-and-tick_>`_. It is possible to change the +governor at run time if the ``cpuidle_sysfs_switch`` command line parameter has +been passed to the kernel, but that is not safe in general, so it should not be +done on production systems (that may change in the future, though). The name of +the ``CPUIdle`` governor currently used by the kernel can be read from the :file:`current_governor_ro` (or :file:`current_governor` if ``cpuidle_sysfs_switch`` is present in the kernel command line) file under :file:`/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuidle/` in ``sysfs``. @@ -256,6 +256,8 @@ the ``menu`` governor by default and if it is not tickless, the default ``CPUIdle`` governor on it will be ``ladder``. +.. _menu-gov: + The ``menu`` Governor ===================== @@ -333,6 +335,92 @@ that time, the governor may need to select a shallower state with a suitable target residency. +.. _teo-gov: + +The Timer Events Oriented (TEO) Governor +======================================== + +The timer events oriented (TEO) governor is an alternative ``CPUIdle`` governor +for tickless systems. It follows the same basic strategy as the ``menu`` `one +<menu-gov_>`_: it always tries to find the deepest idle state suitable for the +given conditions. However, it applies a different approach to that problem. + +First, it does not use sleep length correction factors, but instead it attempts +to correlate the observed idle duration values with the available idle states +and use that information to pick up the idle state that is most likely to +"match" the upcoming CPU idle interval. Second, it does not take the tasks +that were running on the given CPU in the past and are waiting on some I/O +operations to complete now at all (there is no guarantee that they will run on +the same CPU when they become runnable again) and the pattern detection code in +it avoids taking timer wakeups into account. It also only uses idle duration +values less than the current time till the closest timer (with the scheduler +tick excluded) for that purpose. + +Like in the ``menu`` governor `case <menu-gov_>`_, the first step is to obtain +the *sleep length*, which is the time until the closest timer event with the +assumption that the scheduler tick will be stopped (that also is the upper bound +on the time until the next CPU wakeup). That value is then used to preselect an +idle state on the basis of three metrics maintained for each idle state provided +by the ``CPUIdle`` driver: ``hits``, ``misses`` and ``early_hits``. + +The ``hits`` and ``misses`` metrics measure the likelihood that a given idle +state will "match" the observed (post-wakeup) idle duration if it "matches" the +sleep length. They both are subject to decay (after a CPU wakeup) every time +the target residency of the idle state corresponding to them is less than or +equal to the sleep length and the target residency of the next idle state is +greater than the sleep length (that is, when the idle state corresponding to +them "matches" the sleep length). The ``hits`` metric is increased if the +former condition is satisfied and the target residency of the given idle state +is less than or equal to the observed idle duration and the target residency of +the next idle state is greater than the observed idle duration at the same time +(that is, it is increased when the given idle state "matches" both the sleep +length and the observed idle duration). In turn, the ``misses`` metric is +increased when the given idle state "matches" the sleep length only and the +observed idle duration is too short for its target residency. + +The ``early_hits`` metric measures the likelihood that a given idle state will +"match" the observed (post-wakeup) idle duration if it does not "match" the +sleep length. It is subject to decay on every CPU wakeup and it is increased +when the idle state corresponding to it "matches" the observed (post-wakeup) +idle duration and the target residency of the next idle state is less than or +equal to the sleep length (i.e. the idle state "matching" the sleep length is +deeper than the given one). + +The governor walks the list of idle states provided by the ``CPUIdle`` driver +and finds the last (deepest) one with the target residency less than or equal +to the sleep length. Then, the ``hits`` and ``misses`` metrics of that idle +state are compared with each other and it is preselected if the ``hits`` one is +greater (which means that that idle state is likely to "match" the observed idle +duration after CPU wakeup). If the ``misses`` one is greater, the governor +preselects the shallower idle state with the maximum ``early_hits`` metric +(or if there are multiple shallower idle states with equal ``early_hits`` +metric which also is the maximum, the shallowest of them will be preselected). +[If there is a wakeup latency constraint coming from the `PM QoS framework +<cpu-pm-qos_>`_ which is hit before reaching the deepest idle state with the +target residency within the sleep length, the deepest idle state with the exit +latency within the constraint is preselected without consulting the ``hits``, +``misses`` and ``early_hits`` metrics.] + +Next, the governor takes several idle duration values observed most recently +into consideration and if at least a half of them are greater than or equal to +the target residency of the preselected idle state, that idle state becomes the +final candidate to ask for. Otherwise, the average of the most recent idle +duration values below the target residency of the preselected idle state is +computed and the governor walks the idle states shallower than the preselected +one and finds the deepest of them with the target residency within that average. +That idle state is then taken as the final candidate to ask for. + +Still, at this point the governor may need to refine the idle state selection if +it has not decided to `stop the scheduler tick <idle-cpus-and-tick_>`_. That +generally happens if the target residency of the idle state selected so far is +less than the tick period and the tick has not been stopped already (in a +previous iteration of the idle loop). Then, like in the ``menu`` governor +`case <menu-gov_>`_, the sleep length used in the previous computations may not +reflect the real time until the closest timer event and if it really is greater +than that time, a shallower state with a suitable target residency may need to +be selected. + + .. _idle-states-representation: Representation of Idle States diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/tainted-kernels.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/tainted-kernels.rst index 28a869c509a0..71e9184a9079 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/tainted-kernels.rst +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/tainted-kernels.rst @@ -1,59 +1,164 @@ Tainted kernels --------------- -Some oops reports contain the string **'Tainted: '** after the program -counter. This indicates that the kernel has been tainted by some -mechanism. The string is followed by a series of position-sensitive -characters, each representing a particular tainted value. - - 1) ``G`` if all modules loaded have a GPL or compatible license, ``P`` if +The kernel will mark itself as 'tainted' when something occurs that might be +relevant later when investigating problems. Don't worry too much about this, +most of the time it's not a problem to run a tainted kernel; the information is +mainly of interest once someone wants to investigate some problem, as its real +cause might be the event that got the kernel tainted. That's why bug reports +from tainted kernels will often be ignored by developers, hence try to reproduce +problems with an untainted kernel. + +Note the kernel will remain tainted even after you undo what caused the taint +(i.e. unload a proprietary kernel module), to indicate the kernel remains not +trustworthy. That's also why the kernel will print the tainted state when it +notices an internal problem (a 'kernel bug'), a recoverable error +('kernel oops') or a non-recoverable error ('kernel panic') and writes debug +information about this to the logs ``dmesg`` outputs. It's also possible to +check the tainted state at runtime through a file in ``/proc/``. + + +Tainted flag in bugs, oops or panics messages +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +You find the tainted state near the top in a line starting with 'CPU:'; if or +why the kernel was tainted is shown after the Process ID ('PID:') and a shortened +name of the command ('Comm:') that triggered the event:: + + BUG: unable to handle kernel NULL pointer dereference at 0000000000000000 + Oops: 0002 [#1] SMP PTI + CPU: 0 PID: 4424 Comm: insmod Tainted: P W O 4.20.0-0.rc6.fc30 #1 + Hardware name: Red Hat KVM, BIOS 0.5.1 01/01/2011 + RIP: 0010:my_oops_init+0x13/0x1000 [kpanic] + [...] + +You'll find a 'Not tainted: ' there if the kernel was not tainted at the +time of the event; if it was, then it will print 'Tainted: ' and characters +either letters or blanks. In above example it looks like this:: + + Tainted: P W O + +The meaning of those characters is explained in the table below. In tis case +the kernel got tainted earlier because a proprietary Module (``P``) was loaded, +a warning occurred (``W``), and an externally-built module was loaded (``O``). +To decode other letters use the table below. + + +Decoding tainted state at runtime +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +At runtime, you can query the tainted state by reading +``cat /proc/sys/kernel/tainted``. If that returns ``0``, the kernel is not +tainted; any other number indicates the reasons why it is. The easiest way to +decode that number is the script ``tools/debugging/kernel-chktaint``, which your +distribution might ship as part of a package called ``linux-tools`` or +``kernel-tools``; if it doesn't you can download the script from +`git.kernel.org <https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux.git/plain/tools/debugging/kernel-chktaint>`_ +and execute it with ``sh kernel-chktaint``, which would print something like +this on the machine that had the statements in the logs that were quoted earlier:: + + Kernel is Tainted for following reasons: + * Proprietary module was loaded (#0) + * Kernel issued warning (#9) + * Externally-built ('out-of-tree') module was loaded (#12) + See Documentation/admin-guide/tainted-kernels.rst in the the Linux kernel or + https://www.kernel.org/doc/html/latest/admin-guide/tainted-kernels.html for + a more details explanation of the various taint flags. + Raw taint value as int/string: 4609/'P W O ' + +You can try to decode the number yourself. That's easy if there was only one +reason that got your kernel tainted, as in this case you can find the number +with the table below. If there were multiple reasons you need to decode the +number, as it is a bitfield, where each bit indicates the absence or presence of +a particular type of taint. It's best to leave that to the aforementioned +script, but if you need something quick you can use this shell command to check +which bits are set:: + + $ for i in $(seq 18); do echo $(($i-1)) $(($(cat /proc/sys/kernel/tainted)>>($i-1)&1));done + +Table for decoding tainted state +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +=== === ====== ======================================================== +Bit Log Number Reason that got the kernel tainted +=== === ====== ======================================================== + 0 G/P 1 proprietary module was loaded + 1 _/F 2 module was force loaded + 2 _/S 4 SMP kernel oops on an officially SMP incapable processor + 3 _/R 8 module was force unloaded + 4 _/M 16 processor reported a Machine Check Exception (MCE) + 5 _/B 32 bad page referenced or some unexpected page flags + 6 _/U 64 taint requested by userspace application + 7 _/D 128 kernel died recently, i.e. there was an OOPS or BUG + 8 _/A 256 ACPI table overridden by user + 9 _/W 512 kernel issued warning + 10 _/C 1024 staging driver was loaded + 11 _/I 2048 workaround for bug in platform firmware applied + 12 _/O 4096 externally-built ("out-of-tree") module was loaded + 13 _/E 8192 unsigned module was loaded + 14 _/L 16384 soft lockup occurred + 15 _/K 32768 kernel has been live patched + 16 _/X 65536 auxiliary taint, defined for and used by distros + 17 _/T 131072 kernel was built with the struct randomization plugin +=== === ====== ======================================================== + +Note: The character ``_`` is representing a blank in this table to make reading +easier. + +More detailed explanation for tainting +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + + 0) ``G`` if all modules loaded have a GPL or compatible license, ``P`` if any proprietary module has been loaded. Modules without a MODULE_LICENSE or with a MODULE_LICENSE that is not recognised by insmod as GPL compatible are assumed to be proprietary. - 2) ``F`` if any module was force loaded by ``insmod -f``, ``' '`` if all + 1) ``F`` if any module was force loaded by ``insmod -f``, ``' '`` if all modules were loaded normally. - 3) ``S`` if the oops occurred on an SMP kernel running on hardware that + 2) ``S`` if the oops occurred on an SMP kernel running on hardware that hasn't been certified as safe to run multiprocessor. Currently this occurs only on various Athlons that are not SMP capable. - 4) ``R`` if a module was force unloaded by ``rmmod -f``, ``' '`` if all + 3) ``R`` if a module was force unloaded by ``rmmod -f``, ``' '`` if all modules were unloaded normally. - 5) ``M`` if any processor has reported a Machine Check Exception, + 4) ``M`` if any processor has reported a Machine Check Exception, ``' '`` if no Machine Check Exceptions have occurred. - 6) ``B`` if a page-release function has found a bad page reference or - some unexpected page flags. + 5) ``B`` If a page-release function has found a bad page reference or some + unexpected page flags. This indicates a hardware problem or a kernel bug; + there should be other information in the log indicating why this tainting + occured. - 7) ``U`` if a user or user application specifically requested that the + 6) ``U`` if a user or user application specifically requested that the Tainted flag be set, ``' '`` otherwise. - 8) ``D`` if the kernel has died recently, i.e. there was an OOPS or BUG. + 7) ``D`` if the kernel has died recently, i.e. there was an OOPS or BUG. - 9) ``A`` if the ACPI table has been overridden. + 8) ``A`` if an ACPI table has been overridden. - 10) ``W`` if a warning has previously been issued by the kernel. + 9) ``W`` if a warning has previously been issued by the kernel. (Though some warnings may set more specific taint flags.) - 11) ``C`` if a staging driver has been loaded. + 10) ``C`` if a staging driver has been loaded. - 12) ``I`` if the kernel is working around a severe bug in the platform + 11) ``I`` if the kernel is working around a severe bug in the platform firmware (BIOS or similar). - 13) ``O`` if an externally-built ("out-of-tree") module has been loaded. + 12) ``O`` if an externally-built ("out-of-tree") module has been loaded. - 14) ``E`` if an unsigned module has been loaded in a kernel supporting + 13) ``E`` if an unsigned module has been loaded in a kernel supporting module signature. - 15) ``L`` if a soft lockup has previously occurred on the system. + 14) ``L`` if a soft lockup has previously occurred on the system. + + 15) ``K`` if the kernel has been live patched. - 16) ``K`` if the kernel has been live patched. + 16) ``X`` Auxiliary taint, defined for and used by Linux distributors. -The primary reason for the **'Tainted: '** string is to tell kernel -debuggers if this is a clean kernel or if anything unusual has -occurred. Tainting is permanent: even if an offending module is -unloaded, the tainted value remains to indicate that the kernel is not -trustworthy. + 17) ``T`` Kernel was build with the randstruct plugin, which can intentionally + produce extremely unusual kernel structure layouts (even performance + pathological ones), which is important to know when debugging. Set at + build time. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/kernel_mode_neon.txt b/Documentation/arm/kernel_mode_neon.txt index 525452726d31..b9e060c5b61e 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/kernel_mode_neon.txt +++ b/Documentation/arm/kernel_mode_neon.txt @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ TL;DR summary * Use only NEON instructions, or VFP instructions that don't rely on support code * Isolate your NEON code in a separate compilation unit, and compile it with - '-mfpu=neon -mfloat-abi=softfp' + '-march=armv7-a -mfpu=neon -mfloat-abi=softfp' * Put kernel_neon_begin() and kernel_neon_end() calls around the calls into your NEON code * Don't sleep in your NEON code, and be aware that it will be executed with @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ instructions appearing in unexpected places if no special care is taken. Therefore, the recommended and only supported way of using NEON/VFP in the kernel is by adhering to the following rules: * isolate the NEON code in a separate compilation unit and compile it with - '-mfpu=neon -mfloat-abi=softfp'; + '-march=armv7-a -mfpu=neon -mfloat-abi=softfp'; * issue the calls to kernel_neon_begin(), kernel_neon_end() as well as the calls into the unit containing the NEON code from a compilation unit which is *not* built with the GCC flag '-mfpu=neon' set. diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt b/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt index 8df9f4658d6f..fbab7e21d116 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt +++ b/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt @@ -188,6 +188,11 @@ Before jumping into the kernel, the following conditions must be met: the kernel image will be entered must be initialised by software at a higher exception level to prevent execution in an UNKNOWN state. + - SCR_EL3.FIQ must have the same value across all CPUs the kernel is + executing on. + - The value of SCR_EL3.FIQ must be the same as the one present at boot + time whenever the kernel is executing. + For systems with a GICv3 interrupt controller to be used in v3 mode: - If EL3 is present: ICC_SRE_EL3.Enable (bit 3) must be initialiased to 0b1. diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/pointer-authentication.txt b/Documentation/arm64/pointer-authentication.txt index a25cd21290e9..5baca42ba146 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm64/pointer-authentication.txt +++ b/Documentation/arm64/pointer-authentication.txt @@ -78,6 +78,11 @@ bits can vary between the two. Note that the masks apply to TTBR0 addresses, and are not valid to apply to TTBR1 addresses (e.g. kernel pointers). +Additionally, when CONFIG_CHECKPOINT_RESTORE is also set, the kernel +will expose the NT_ARM_PACA_KEYS and NT_ARM_PACG_KEYS regsets (struct +user_pac_address_keys and struct user_pac_generic_keys). These can be +used to get and set the keys for a thread. + Virtualization -------------- diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/silicon-errata.txt b/Documentation/arm64/silicon-errata.txt index 1f09d043d086..d1e2bb801e1b 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm64/silicon-errata.txt +++ b/Documentation/arm64/silicon-errata.txt @@ -44,6 +44,8 @@ stable kernels. | Implementor | Component | Erratum ID | Kconfig | +----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+ +| Allwinner | A64/R18 | UNKNOWN1 | SUN50I_ERRATUM_UNKNOWN1 | +| | | | | | ARM | Cortex-A53 | #826319 | ARM64_ERRATUM_826319 | | ARM | Cortex-A53 | #827319 | ARM64_ERRATUM_827319 | | ARM | Cortex-A53 | #824069 | ARM64_ERRATUM_824069 | @@ -80,3 +82,4 @@ stable kernels. | Qualcomm Tech. | Falkor v1 | E1009 | QCOM_FALKOR_ERRATUM_1009 | | Qualcomm Tech. | QDF2400 ITS | E0065 | QCOM_QDF2400_ERRATUM_0065 | | Qualcomm Tech. | Falkor v{1,2} | E1041 | QCOM_FALKOR_ERRATUM_1041 | +| Fujitsu | A64FX | E#010001 | FUJITSU_ERRATUM_010001 | diff --git a/Documentation/block/biovecs.txt b/Documentation/block/biovecs.txt index 25689584e6e0..ce6eccaf5df7 100644 --- a/Documentation/block/biovecs.txt +++ b/Documentation/block/biovecs.txt @@ -117,3 +117,28 @@ Other implications: size limitations and the limitations of the underlying devices. Thus there's no need to define ->merge_bvec_fn() callbacks for individual block drivers. + +Usage of helpers: +================= + +* The following helpers whose names have the suffix of "_all" can only be used +on non-BIO_CLONED bio. They are usually used by filesystem code. Drivers +shouldn't use them because the bio may have been split before it reached the +driver. + + bio_for_each_segment_all() + bio_first_bvec_all() + bio_first_page_all() + bio_last_bvec_all() + +* The following helpers iterate over single-page segment. The passed 'struct +bio_vec' will contain a single-page IO vector during the iteration + + bio_for_each_segment() + bio_for_each_segment_all() + +* The following helpers iterate over multi-page bvec. The passed 'struct +bio_vec' will contain a multi-page IO vector during the iteration + + bio_for_each_bvec() + rq_for_each_bvec() diff --git a/Documentation/bpf/bpf_design_QA.rst b/Documentation/bpf/bpf_design_QA.rst index 7cc9e368c1e9..10453c627135 100644 --- a/Documentation/bpf/bpf_design_QA.rst +++ b/Documentation/bpf/bpf_design_QA.rst @@ -36,27 +36,27 @@ consideration important quirks of other architectures) and defines calling convention that is compatible with C calling convention of the linux kernel on those architectures. -Q: can multiple return values be supported in the future? +Q: Can multiple return values be supported in the future? ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ A: NO. BPF allows only register R0 to be used as return value. -Q: can more than 5 function arguments be supported in the future? +Q: Can more than 5 function arguments be supported in the future? ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ A: NO. BPF calling convention only allows registers R1-R5 to be used as arguments. BPF is not a standalone instruction set. (unlike x64 ISA that allows msft, cdecl and other conventions) -Q: can BPF programs access instruction pointer or return address? +Q: Can BPF programs access instruction pointer or return address? ----------------------------------------------------------------- A: NO. -Q: can BPF programs access stack pointer ? +Q: Can BPF programs access stack pointer ? ------------------------------------------ A: NO. Only frame pointer (register R10) is accessible. From compiler point of view it's necessary to have stack pointer. -For example LLVM defines register R11 as stack pointer in its +For example, LLVM defines register R11 as stack pointer in its BPF backend, but it makes sure that generated code never uses it. Q: Does C-calling convention diminishes possible use cases? @@ -66,8 +66,8 @@ A: YES. BPF design forces addition of major functionality in the form of kernel helper functions and kernel objects like BPF maps with seamless interoperability between them. It lets kernel call into -BPF programs and programs call kernel helpers with zero overhead. -As all of them were native C code. That is particularly the case +BPF programs and programs call kernel helpers with zero overhead, +as all of them were native C code. That is particularly the case for JITed BPF programs that are indistinguishable from native kernel C code. @@ -75,9 +75,9 @@ Q: Does it mean that 'innovative' extensions to BPF code are disallowed? ------------------------------------------------------------------------ A: Soft yes. -At least for now until BPF core has support for +At least for now, until BPF core has support for bpf-to-bpf calls, indirect calls, loops, global variables, -jump tables, read only sections and all other normal constructs +jump tables, read-only sections, and all other normal constructs that C code can produce. Q: Can loops be supported in a safe way? @@ -109,16 +109,16 @@ For example why BPF_JNE and other compare and jumps are not cpu-like? A: This was necessary to avoid introducing flags into ISA which are impossible to make generic and efficient across CPU architectures. -Q: why BPF_DIV instruction doesn't map to x64 div? +Q: Why BPF_DIV instruction doesn't map to x64 div? ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ A: Because if we picked one-to-one relationship to x64 it would have made it more complicated to support on arm64 and other archs. Also it needs div-by-zero runtime check. -Q: why there is no BPF_SDIV for signed divide operation? +Q: Why there is no BPF_SDIV for signed divide operation? ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ A: Because it would be rarely used. llvm errors in such case and -prints a suggestion to use unsigned divide instead +prints a suggestion to use unsigned divide instead. Q: Why BPF has implicit prologue and epilogue? ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ diff --git a/Documentation/bpf/btf.rst b/Documentation/bpf/btf.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9a60a5d60e38 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/bpf/btf.rst @@ -0,0 +1,848 @@ +===================== +BPF Type Format (BTF) +===================== + +1. Introduction +*************** + +BTF (BPF Type Format) is the metadata format which encodes the debug info +related to BPF program/map. The name BTF was used initially to describe data +types. The BTF was later extended to include function info for defined +subroutines, and line info for source/line information. + +The debug info is used for map pretty print, function signature, etc. The +function signature enables better bpf program/function kernel symbol. The line +info helps generate source annotated translated byte code, jited code and +verifier log. + +The BTF specification contains two parts, + * BTF kernel API + * BTF ELF file format + +The kernel API is the contract between user space and kernel. The kernel +verifies the BTF info before using it. The ELF file format is a user space +contract between ELF file and libbpf loader. + +The type and string sections are part of the BTF kernel API, describing the +debug info (mostly types related) referenced by the bpf program. These two +sections are discussed in details in :ref:`BTF_Type_String`. + +.. _BTF_Type_String: + +2. BTF Type and String Encoding +******************************* + +The file ``include/uapi/linux/btf.h`` provides high-level definition of how +types/strings are encoded. + +The beginning of data blob must be:: + + struct btf_header { + __u16 magic; + __u8 version; + __u8 flags; + __u32 hdr_len; + + /* All offsets are in bytes relative to the end of this header */ + __u32 type_off; /* offset of type section */ + __u32 type_len; /* length of type section */ + __u32 str_off; /* offset of string section */ + __u32 str_len; /* length of string section */ + }; + +The magic is ``0xeB9F``, which has different encoding for big and little +endian systems, and can be used to test whether BTF is generated for big- or +little-endian target. The ``btf_header`` is designed to be extensible with +``hdr_len`` equal to ``sizeof(struct btf_header)`` when a data blob is +generated. + +2.1 String Encoding +=================== + +The first string in the string section must be a null string. The rest of +string table is a concatenation of other null-terminated strings. + +2.2 Type Encoding +================= + +The type id ``0`` is reserved for ``void`` type. The type section is parsed +sequentially and type id is assigned to each recognized type starting from id +``1``. Currently, the following types are supported:: + + #define BTF_KIND_INT 1 /* Integer */ + #define BTF_KIND_PTR 2 /* Pointer */ + #define BTF_KIND_ARRAY 3 /* Array */ + #define BTF_KIND_STRUCT 4 /* Struct */ + #define BTF_KIND_UNION 5 /* Union */ + #define BTF_KIND_ENUM 6 /* Enumeration */ + #define BTF_KIND_FWD 7 /* Forward */ + #define BTF_KIND_TYPEDEF 8 /* Typedef */ + #define BTF_KIND_VOLATILE 9 /* Volatile */ + #define BTF_KIND_CONST 10 /* Const */ + #define BTF_KIND_RESTRICT 11 /* Restrict */ + #define BTF_KIND_FUNC 12 /* Function */ + #define BTF_KIND_FUNC_PROTO 13 /* Function Proto */ + +Note that the type section encodes debug info, not just pure types. +``BTF_KIND_FUNC`` is not a type, and it represents a defined subprogram. + +Each type contains the following common data:: + + struct btf_type { + __u32 name_off; + /* "info" bits arrangement + * bits 0-15: vlen (e.g. # of struct's members) + * bits 16-23: unused + * bits 24-27: kind (e.g. int, ptr, array...etc) + * bits 28-30: unused + * bit 31: kind_flag, currently used by + * struct, union and fwd + */ + __u32 info; + /* "size" is used by INT, ENUM, STRUCT and UNION. + * "size" tells the size of the type it is describing. + * + * "type" is used by PTR, TYPEDEF, VOLATILE, CONST, RESTRICT, + * FUNC and FUNC_PROTO. + * "type" is a type_id referring to another type. + */ + union { + __u32 size; + __u32 type; + }; + }; + +For certain kinds, the common data are followed by kind-specific data. The +``name_off`` in ``struct btf_type`` specifies the offset in the string table. +The following sections detail encoding of each kind. + +2.2.1 BTF_KIND_INT +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +``struct btf_type`` encoding requirement: + * ``name_off``: any valid offset + * ``info.kind_flag``: 0 + * ``info.kind``: BTF_KIND_INT + * ``info.vlen``: 0 + * ``size``: the size of the int type in bytes. + +``btf_type`` is followed by a ``u32`` with the following bits arrangement:: + + #define BTF_INT_ENCODING(VAL) (((VAL) & 0x0f000000) >> 24) + #define BTF_INT_OFFSET(VAL) (((VAL & 0x00ff0000)) >> 16) + #define BTF_INT_BITS(VAL) ((VAL) & 0x000000ff) + +The ``BTF_INT_ENCODING`` has the following attributes:: + + #define BTF_INT_SIGNED (1 << 0) + #define BTF_INT_CHAR (1 << 1) + #define BTF_INT_BOOL (1 << 2) + +The ``BTF_INT_ENCODING()`` provides extra information: signedness, char, or +bool, for the int type. The char and bool encoding are mostly useful for +pretty print. At most one encoding can be specified for the int type. + +The ``BTF_INT_BITS()`` specifies the number of actual bits held by this int +type. For example, a 4-bit bitfield encodes ``BTF_INT_BITS()`` equals to 4. +The ``btf_type.size * 8`` must be equal to or greater than ``BTF_INT_BITS()`` +for the type. The maximum value of ``BTF_INT_BITS()`` is 128. + +The ``BTF_INT_OFFSET()`` specifies the starting bit offset to calculate values +for this int. For example, a bitfield struct member has: * btf member bit +offset 100 from the start of the structure, * btf member pointing to an int +type, * the int type has ``BTF_INT_OFFSET() = 2`` and ``BTF_INT_BITS() = 4`` + +Then in the struct memory layout, this member will occupy ``4`` bits starting +from bits ``100 + 2 = 102``. + +Alternatively, the bitfield struct member can be the following to access the +same bits as the above: + + * btf member bit offset 102, + * btf member pointing to an int type, + * the int type has ``BTF_INT_OFFSET() = 0`` and ``BTF_INT_BITS() = 4`` + +The original intention of ``BTF_INT_OFFSET()`` is to provide flexibility of +bitfield encoding. Currently, both llvm and pahole generate +``BTF_INT_OFFSET() = 0`` for all int types. + +2.2.2 BTF_KIND_PTR +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +``struct btf_type`` encoding requirement: + * ``name_off``: 0 + * ``info.kind_flag``: 0 + * ``info.kind``: BTF_KIND_PTR + * ``info.vlen``: 0 + * ``type``: the pointee type of the pointer + +No additional type data follow ``btf_type``. + +2.2.3 BTF_KIND_ARRAY +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +``struct btf_type`` encoding requirement: + * ``name_off``: 0 + * ``info.kind_flag``: 0 + * ``info.kind``: BTF_KIND_ARRAY + * ``info.vlen``: 0 + * ``size/type``: 0, not used + +``btf_type`` is followed by one ``struct btf_array``:: + + struct btf_array { + __u32 type; + __u32 index_type; + __u32 nelems; + }; + +The ``struct btf_array`` encoding: + * ``type``: the element type + * ``index_type``: the index type + * ``nelems``: the number of elements for this array (``0`` is also allowed). + +The ``index_type`` can be any regular int type (``u8``, ``u16``, ``u32``, +``u64``, ``unsigned __int128``). The original design of including +``index_type`` follows DWARF, which has an ``index_type`` for its array type. +Currently in BTF, beyond type verification, the ``index_type`` is not used. + +The ``struct btf_array`` allows chaining through element type to represent +multidimensional arrays. For example, for ``int a[5][6]``, the following type +information illustrates the chaining: + + * [1]: int + * [2]: array, ``btf_array.type = [1]``, ``btf_array.nelems = 6`` + * [3]: array, ``btf_array.type = [2]``, ``btf_array.nelems = 5`` + +Currently, both pahole and llvm collapse multidimensional array into +one-dimensional array, e.g., for ``a[5][6]``, the ``btf_array.nelems`` is +equal to ``30``. This is because the original use case is map pretty print +where the whole array is dumped out so one-dimensional array is enough. As +more BTF usage is explored, pahole and llvm can be changed to generate proper +chained representation for multidimensional arrays. + +2.2.4 BTF_KIND_STRUCT +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +2.2.5 BTF_KIND_UNION +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +``struct btf_type`` encoding requirement: + * ``name_off``: 0 or offset to a valid C identifier + * ``info.kind_flag``: 0 or 1 + * ``info.kind``: BTF_KIND_STRUCT or BTF_KIND_UNION + * ``info.vlen``: the number of struct/union members + * ``info.size``: the size of the struct/union in bytes + +``btf_type`` is followed by ``info.vlen`` number of ``struct btf_member``.:: + + struct btf_member { + __u32 name_off; + __u32 type; + __u32 offset; + }; + +``struct btf_member`` encoding: + * ``name_off``: offset to a valid C identifier + * ``type``: the member type + * ``offset``: <see below> + +If the type info ``kind_flag`` is not set, the offset contains only bit offset +of the member. Note that the base type of the bitfield can only be int or enum +type. If the bitfield size is 32, the base type can be either int or enum +type. If the bitfield size is not 32, the base type must be int, and int type +``BTF_INT_BITS()`` encodes the bitfield size. + +If the ``kind_flag`` is set, the ``btf_member.offset`` contains both member +bitfield size and bit offset. The bitfield size and bit offset are calculated +as below.:: + + #define BTF_MEMBER_BITFIELD_SIZE(val) ((val) >> 24) + #define BTF_MEMBER_BIT_OFFSET(val) ((val) & 0xffffff) + +In this case, if the base type is an int type, it must be a regular int type: + + * ``BTF_INT_OFFSET()`` must be 0. + * ``BTF_INT_BITS()`` must be equal to ``{1,2,4,8,16} * 8``. + +The following kernel patch introduced ``kind_flag`` and explained why both +modes exist: + + https://github.com/torvalds/linux/commit/9d5f9f701b1891466fb3dbb1806ad97716f95cc3#diff-fa650a64fdd3968396883d2fe8215ff3 + +2.2.6 BTF_KIND_ENUM +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +``struct btf_type`` encoding requirement: + * ``name_off``: 0 or offset to a valid C identifier + * ``info.kind_flag``: 0 + * ``info.kind``: BTF_KIND_ENUM + * ``info.vlen``: number of enum values + * ``size``: 4 + +``btf_type`` is followed by ``info.vlen`` number of ``struct btf_enum``.:: + + struct btf_enum { + __u32 name_off; + __s32 val; + }; + +The ``btf_enum`` encoding: + * ``name_off``: offset to a valid C identifier + * ``val``: any value + +2.2.7 BTF_KIND_FWD +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +``struct btf_type`` encoding requirement: + * ``name_off``: offset to a valid C identifier + * ``info.kind_flag``: 0 for struct, 1 for union + * ``info.kind``: BTF_KIND_FWD + * ``info.vlen``: 0 + * ``type``: 0 + +No additional type data follow ``btf_type``. + +2.2.8 BTF_KIND_TYPEDEF +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +``struct btf_type`` encoding requirement: + * ``name_off``: offset to a valid C identifier + * ``info.kind_flag``: 0 + * ``info.kind``: BTF_KIND_TYPEDEF + * ``info.vlen``: 0 + * ``type``: the type which can be referred by name at ``name_off`` + +No additional type data follow ``btf_type``. + +2.2.9 BTF_KIND_VOLATILE +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +``struct btf_type`` encoding requirement: + * ``name_off``: 0 + * ``info.kind_flag``: 0 + * ``info.kind``: BTF_KIND_VOLATILE + * ``info.vlen``: 0 + * ``type``: the type with ``volatile`` qualifier + +No additional type data follow ``btf_type``. + +2.2.10 BTF_KIND_CONST +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +``struct btf_type`` encoding requirement: + * ``name_off``: 0 + * ``info.kind_flag``: 0 + * ``info.kind``: BTF_KIND_CONST + * ``info.vlen``: 0 + * ``type``: the type with ``const`` qualifier + +No additional type data follow ``btf_type``. + +2.2.11 BTF_KIND_RESTRICT +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +``struct btf_type`` encoding requirement: + * ``name_off``: 0 + * ``info.kind_flag``: 0 + * ``info.kind``: BTF_KIND_RESTRICT + * ``info.vlen``: 0 + * ``type``: the type with ``restrict`` qualifier + +No additional type data follow ``btf_type``. + +2.2.12 BTF_KIND_FUNC +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +``struct btf_type`` encoding requirement: + * ``name_off``: offset to a valid C identifier + * ``info.kind_flag``: 0 + * ``info.kind``: BTF_KIND_FUNC + * ``info.vlen``: 0 + * ``type``: a BTF_KIND_FUNC_PROTO type + +No additional type data follow ``btf_type``. + +A BTF_KIND_FUNC defines not a type, but a subprogram (function) whose +signature is defined by ``type``. The subprogram is thus an instance of that +type. The BTF_KIND_FUNC may in turn be referenced by a func_info in the +:ref:`BTF_Ext_Section` (ELF) or in the arguments to :ref:`BPF_Prog_Load` +(ABI). + +2.2.13 BTF_KIND_FUNC_PROTO +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +``struct btf_type`` encoding requirement: + * ``name_off``: 0 + * ``info.kind_flag``: 0 + * ``info.kind``: BTF_KIND_FUNC_PROTO + * ``info.vlen``: # of parameters + * ``type``: the return type + +``btf_type`` is followed by ``info.vlen`` number of ``struct btf_param``.:: + + struct btf_param { + __u32 name_off; + __u32 type; + }; + +If a BTF_KIND_FUNC_PROTO type is referred by a BTF_KIND_FUNC type, then +``btf_param.name_off`` must point to a valid C identifier except for the +possible last argument representing the variable argument. The btf_param.type +refers to parameter type. + +If the function has variable arguments, the last parameter is encoded with +``name_off = 0`` and ``type = 0``. + +3. BTF Kernel API +***************** + +The following bpf syscall command involves BTF: + * BPF_BTF_LOAD: load a blob of BTF data into kernel + * BPF_MAP_CREATE: map creation with btf key and value type info. + * BPF_PROG_LOAD: prog load with btf function and line info. + * BPF_BTF_GET_FD_BY_ID: get a btf fd + * BPF_OBJ_GET_INFO_BY_FD: btf, func_info, line_info + and other btf related info are returned. + +The workflow typically looks like: +:: + + Application: + BPF_BTF_LOAD + | + v + BPF_MAP_CREATE and BPF_PROG_LOAD + | + V + ...... + + Introspection tool: + ...... + BPF_{PROG,MAP}_GET_NEXT_ID (get prog/map id's) + | + V + BPF_{PROG,MAP}_GET_FD_BY_ID (get a prog/map fd) + | + V + BPF_OBJ_GET_INFO_BY_FD (get bpf_prog_info/bpf_map_info with btf_id) + | | + V | + BPF_BTF_GET_FD_BY_ID (get btf_fd) | + | | + V | + BPF_OBJ_GET_INFO_BY_FD (get btf) | + | | + V V + pretty print types, dump func signatures and line info, etc. + + +3.1 BPF_BTF_LOAD +================ + +Load a blob of BTF data into kernel. A blob of data, described in +:ref:`BTF_Type_String`, can be directly loaded into the kernel. A ``btf_fd`` +is returned to a userspace. + +3.2 BPF_MAP_CREATE +================== + +A map can be created with ``btf_fd`` and specified key/value type id.:: + + __u32 btf_fd; /* fd pointing to a BTF type data */ + __u32 btf_key_type_id; /* BTF type_id of the key */ + __u32 btf_value_type_id; /* BTF type_id of the value */ + +In libbpf, the map can be defined with extra annotation like below: +:: + + struct bpf_map_def SEC("maps") btf_map = { + .type = BPF_MAP_TYPE_ARRAY, + .key_size = sizeof(int), + .value_size = sizeof(struct ipv_counts), + .max_entries = 4, + }; + BPF_ANNOTATE_KV_PAIR(btf_map, int, struct ipv_counts); + +Here, the parameters for macro BPF_ANNOTATE_KV_PAIR are map name, key and +value types for the map. During ELF parsing, libbpf is able to extract +key/value type_id's and assign them to BPF_MAP_CREATE attributes +automatically. + +.. _BPF_Prog_Load: + +3.3 BPF_PROG_LOAD +================= + +During prog_load, func_info and line_info can be passed to kernel with proper +values for the following attributes: +:: + + __u32 insn_cnt; + __aligned_u64 insns; + ...... + __u32 prog_btf_fd; /* fd pointing to BTF type data */ + __u32 func_info_rec_size; /* userspace bpf_func_info size */ + __aligned_u64 func_info; /* func info */ + __u32 func_info_cnt; /* number of bpf_func_info records */ + __u32 line_info_rec_size; /* userspace bpf_line_info size */ + __aligned_u64 line_info; /* line info */ + __u32 line_info_cnt; /* number of bpf_line_info records */ + +The func_info and line_info are an array of below, respectively.:: + + struct bpf_func_info { + __u32 insn_off; /* [0, insn_cnt - 1] */ + __u32 type_id; /* pointing to a BTF_KIND_FUNC type */ + }; + struct bpf_line_info { + __u32 insn_off; /* [0, insn_cnt - 1] */ + __u32 file_name_off; /* offset to string table for the filename */ + __u32 line_off; /* offset to string table for the source line */ + __u32 line_col; /* line number and column number */ + }; + +func_info_rec_size is the size of each func_info record, and +line_info_rec_size is the size of each line_info record. Passing the record +size to kernel make it possible to extend the record itself in the future. + +Below are requirements for func_info: + * func_info[0].insn_off must be 0. + * the func_info insn_off is in strictly increasing order and matches + bpf func boundaries. + +Below are requirements for line_info: + * the first insn in each func must have a line_info record pointing to it. + * the line_info insn_off is in strictly increasing order. + +For line_info, the line number and column number are defined as below: +:: + + #define BPF_LINE_INFO_LINE_NUM(line_col) ((line_col) >> 10) + #define BPF_LINE_INFO_LINE_COL(line_col) ((line_col) & 0x3ff) + +3.4 BPF_{PROG,MAP}_GET_NEXT_ID + +In kernel, every loaded program, map or btf has a unique id. The id won't +change during the lifetime of a program, map, or btf. + +The bpf syscall command BPF_{PROG,MAP}_GET_NEXT_ID returns all id's, one for +each command, to user space, for bpf program or maps, respectively, so an +inspection tool can inspect all programs and maps. + +3.5 BPF_{PROG,MAP}_GET_FD_BY_ID + +An introspection tool cannot use id to get details about program or maps. +A file descriptor needs to be obtained first for reference-counting purpose. + +3.6 BPF_OBJ_GET_INFO_BY_FD +========================== + +Once a program/map fd is acquired, an introspection tool can get the detailed +information from kernel about this fd, some of which are BTF-related. For +example, ``bpf_map_info`` returns ``btf_id`` and key/value type ids. +``bpf_prog_info`` returns ``btf_id``, func_info, and line info for translated +bpf byte codes, and jited_line_info. + +3.7 BPF_BTF_GET_FD_BY_ID +======================== + +With ``btf_id`` obtained in ``bpf_map_info`` and ``bpf_prog_info``, bpf +syscall command BPF_BTF_GET_FD_BY_ID can retrieve a btf fd. Then, with +command BPF_OBJ_GET_INFO_BY_FD, the btf blob, originally loaded into the +kernel with BPF_BTF_LOAD, can be retrieved. + +With the btf blob, ``bpf_map_info``, and ``bpf_prog_info``, an introspection +tool has full btf knowledge and is able to pretty print map key/values, dump +func signatures and line info, along with byte/jit codes. + +4. ELF File Format Interface +**************************** + +4.1 .BTF section +================ + +The .BTF section contains type and string data. The format of this section is +same as the one describe in :ref:`BTF_Type_String`. + +.. _BTF_Ext_Section: + +4.2 .BTF.ext section +==================== + +The .BTF.ext section encodes func_info and line_info which needs loader +manipulation before loading into the kernel. + +The specification for .BTF.ext section is defined at ``tools/lib/bpf/btf.h`` +and ``tools/lib/bpf/btf.c``. + +The current header of .BTF.ext section:: + + struct btf_ext_header { + __u16 magic; + __u8 version; + __u8 flags; + __u32 hdr_len; + + /* All offsets are in bytes relative to the end of this header */ + __u32 func_info_off; + __u32 func_info_len; + __u32 line_info_off; + __u32 line_info_len; + }; + +It is very similar to .BTF section. Instead of type/string section, it +contains func_info and line_info section. See :ref:`BPF_Prog_Load` for details +about func_info and line_info record format. + +The func_info is organized as below.:: + + func_info_rec_size + btf_ext_info_sec for section #1 /* func_info for section #1 */ + btf_ext_info_sec for section #2 /* func_info for section #2 */ + ... + +``func_info_rec_size`` specifies the size of ``bpf_func_info`` structure when +.BTF.ext is generated. ``btf_ext_info_sec``, defined below, is a collection of +func_info for each specific ELF section.:: + + struct btf_ext_info_sec { + __u32 sec_name_off; /* offset to section name */ + __u32 num_info; + /* Followed by num_info * record_size number of bytes */ + __u8 data[0]; + }; + +Here, num_info must be greater than 0. + +The line_info is organized as below.:: + + line_info_rec_size + btf_ext_info_sec for section #1 /* line_info for section #1 */ + btf_ext_info_sec for section #2 /* line_info for section #2 */ + ... + +``line_info_rec_size`` specifies the size of ``bpf_line_info`` structure when +.BTF.ext is generated. + +The interpretation of ``bpf_func_info->insn_off`` and +``bpf_line_info->insn_off`` is different between kernel API and ELF API. For +kernel API, the ``insn_off`` is the instruction offset in the unit of ``struct +bpf_insn``. For ELF API, the ``insn_off`` is the byte offset from the +beginning of section (``btf_ext_info_sec->sec_name_off``). + +5. Using BTF +************ + +5.1 bpftool map pretty print +============================ + +With BTF, the map key/value can be printed based on fields rather than simply +raw bytes. This is especially valuable for large structure or if your data +structure has bitfields. For example, for the following map,:: + + enum A { A1, A2, A3, A4, A5 }; + typedef enum A ___A; + struct tmp_t { + char a1:4; + int a2:4; + int :4; + __u32 a3:4; + int b; + ___A b1:4; + enum A b2:4; + }; + struct bpf_map_def SEC("maps") tmpmap = { + .type = BPF_MAP_TYPE_ARRAY, + .key_size = sizeof(__u32), + .value_size = sizeof(struct tmp_t), + .max_entries = 1, + }; + BPF_ANNOTATE_KV_PAIR(tmpmap, int, struct tmp_t); + +bpftool is able to pretty print like below: +:: + + [{ + "key": 0, + "value": { + "a1": 0x2, + "a2": 0x4, + "a3": 0x6, + "b": 7, + "b1": 0x8, + "b2": 0xa + } + } + ] + +5.2 bpftool prog dump +===================== + +The following is an example showing how func_info and line_info can help prog +dump with better kernel symbol names, function prototypes and line +information.:: + + $ bpftool prog dump jited pinned /sys/fs/bpf/test_btf_haskv + [...] + int test_long_fname_2(struct dummy_tracepoint_args * arg): + bpf_prog_44a040bf25481309_test_long_fname_2: + ; static int test_long_fname_2(struct dummy_tracepoint_args *arg) + 0: push %rbp + 1: mov %rsp,%rbp + 4: sub $0x30,%rsp + b: sub $0x28,%rbp + f: mov %rbx,0x0(%rbp) + 13: mov %r13,0x8(%rbp) + 17: mov %r14,0x10(%rbp) + 1b: mov %r15,0x18(%rbp) + 1f: xor %eax,%eax + 21: mov %rax,0x20(%rbp) + 25: xor %esi,%esi + ; int key = 0; + 27: mov %esi,-0x4(%rbp) + ; if (!arg->sock) + 2a: mov 0x8(%rdi),%rdi + ; if (!arg->sock) + 2e: cmp $0x0,%rdi + 32: je 0x0000000000000070 + 34: mov %rbp,%rsi + ; counts = bpf_map_lookup_elem(&btf_map, &key); + [...] + +5.3 Verifier Log +================ + +The following is an example of how line_info can help debugging verification +failure.:: + + /* The code at tools/testing/selftests/bpf/test_xdp_noinline.c + * is modified as below. + */ + data = (void *)(long)xdp->data; + data_end = (void *)(long)xdp->data_end; + /* + if (data + 4 > data_end) + return XDP_DROP; + */ + *(u32 *)data = dst->dst; + + $ bpftool prog load ./test_xdp_noinline.o /sys/fs/bpf/test_xdp_noinline type xdp + ; data = (void *)(long)xdp->data; + 224: (79) r2 = *(u64 *)(r10 -112) + 225: (61) r2 = *(u32 *)(r2 +0) + ; *(u32 *)data = dst->dst; + 226: (63) *(u32 *)(r2 +0) = r1 + invalid access to packet, off=0 size=4, R2(id=0,off=0,r=0) + R2 offset is outside of the packet + +6. BTF Generation +***************** + +You need latest pahole + + https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/devel/pahole/pahole.git/ + +or llvm (8.0 or later). The pahole acts as a dwarf2btf converter. It doesn't +support .BTF.ext and btf BTF_KIND_FUNC type yet. For example,:: + + -bash-4.4$ cat t.c + struct t { + int a:2; + int b:3; + int c:2; + } g; + -bash-4.4$ gcc -c -O2 -g t.c + -bash-4.4$ pahole -JV t.o + File t.o: + [1] STRUCT t kind_flag=1 size=4 vlen=3 + a type_id=2 bitfield_size=2 bits_offset=0 + b type_id=2 bitfield_size=3 bits_offset=2 + c type_id=2 bitfield_size=2 bits_offset=5 + [2] INT int size=4 bit_offset=0 nr_bits=32 encoding=SIGNED + +The llvm is able to generate .BTF and .BTF.ext directly with -g for bpf target +only. The assembly code (-S) is able to show the BTF encoding in assembly +format.:: + + -bash-4.4$ cat t2.c + typedef int __int32; + struct t2 { + int a2; + int (*f2)(char q1, __int32 q2, ...); + int (*f3)(); + } g2; + int main() { return 0; } + int test() { return 0; } + -bash-4.4$ clang -c -g -O2 -target bpf t2.c + -bash-4.4$ readelf -S t2.o + ...... + [ 8] .BTF PROGBITS 0000000000000000 00000247 + 000000000000016e 0000000000000000 0 0 1 + [ 9] .BTF.ext PROGBITS 0000000000000000 000003b5 + 0000000000000060 0000000000000000 0 0 1 + [10] .rel.BTF.ext REL 0000000000000000 000007e0 + 0000000000000040 0000000000000010 16 9 8 + ...... + -bash-4.4$ clang -S -g -O2 -target bpf t2.c + -bash-4.4$ cat t2.s + ...... + .section .BTF,"",@progbits + .short 60319 # 0xeb9f + .byte 1 + .byte 0 + .long 24 + .long 0 + .long 220 + .long 220 + .long 122 + .long 0 # BTF_KIND_FUNC_PROTO(id = 1) + .long 218103808 # 0xd000000 + .long 2 + .long 83 # BTF_KIND_INT(id = 2) + .long 16777216 # 0x1000000 + .long 4 + .long 16777248 # 0x1000020 + ...... + .byte 0 # string offset=0 + .ascii ".text" # string offset=1 + .byte 0 + .ascii "/home/yhs/tmp-pahole/t2.c" # string offset=7 + .byte 0 + .ascii "int main() { return 0; }" # string offset=33 + .byte 0 + .ascii "int test() { return 0; }" # string offset=58 + .byte 0 + .ascii "int" # string offset=83 + ...... + .section .BTF.ext,"",@progbits + .short 60319 # 0xeb9f + .byte 1 + .byte 0 + .long 24 + .long 0 + .long 28 + .long 28 + .long 44 + .long 8 # FuncInfo + .long 1 # FuncInfo section string offset=1 + .long 2 + .long .Lfunc_begin0 + .long 3 + .long .Lfunc_begin1 + .long 5 + .long 16 # LineInfo + .long 1 # LineInfo section string offset=1 + .long 2 + .long .Ltmp0 + .long 7 + .long 33 + .long 7182 # Line 7 Col 14 + .long .Ltmp3 + .long 7 + .long 58 + .long 8206 # Line 8 Col 14 + +7. Testing +********** + +Kernel bpf selftest `test_btf.c` provides extensive set of BTF-related tests. diff --git a/Documentation/bpf/index.rst b/Documentation/bpf/index.rst index 00a8450a602f..4e77932959cc 100644 --- a/Documentation/bpf/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/bpf/index.rst @@ -15,6 +15,13 @@ that goes into great technical depth about the BPF Architecture. The primary info for the bpf syscall is available in the `man-pages`_ for `bpf(2)`_. +BPF Type Format (BTF) +===================== + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 1 + + btf Frequently asked questions (FAQ) diff --git a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/memcg_test.txt b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/memcg_test.txt index 5c7f310f32bb..621e29ffb358 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/memcg_test.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/memcg_test.txt @@ -107,9 +107,9 @@ Under below explanation, we assume CONFIG_MEM_RES_CTRL_SWAP=y. 8. LRU Each memcg has its own private LRU. Now, its handling is under global - VM's control (means that it's handled under global zone_lru_lock). + VM's control (means that it's handled under global pgdat->lru_lock). Almost all routines around memcg's LRU is called by global LRU's - list management functions under zone_lru_lock(). + list management functions under pgdat->lru_lock. A special function is mem_cgroup_isolate_pages(). This scans memcg's private LRU and call __isolate_lru_page() to extract a page diff --git a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/memory.txt b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/memory.txt index 3682e99234c2..a33cedf85427 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/memory.txt @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Brief summary of control files. memory.soft_limit_in_bytes # set/show soft limit of memory usage memory.stat # show various statistics memory.use_hierarchy # set/show hierarchical account enabled - memory.force_empty # trigger forced move charge to parent + memory.force_empty # trigger forced page reclaim memory.pressure_level # set memory pressure notifications memory.swappiness # set/show swappiness parameter of vmscan (See sysctl's vm.swappiness) @@ -267,11 +267,11 @@ When oom event notifier is registered, event will be delivered. Other lock order is following: PG_locked. mm->page_table_lock - zone_lru_lock + pgdat->lru_lock lock_page_cgroup. In many cases, just lock_page_cgroup() is called. per-zone-per-cgroup LRU (cgroup's private LRU) is just guarded by - zone_lru_lock, it has no lock of its own. + pgdat->lru_lock, it has no lock of its own. 2.7 Kernel Memory Extension (CONFIG_MEMCG_KMEM) @@ -459,8 +459,9 @@ About use_hierarchy, see Section 6. the cgroup will be reclaimed and as many pages reclaimed as possible. The typical use case for this interface is before calling rmdir(). - Because rmdir() moves all pages to parent, some out-of-use page caches can be - moved to the parent. If you want to avoid that, force_empty will be useful. + Though rmdir() offlines memcg, but the memcg may still stay there due to + charged file caches. Some out-of-use page caches may keep charged until + memory pressure happens. If you want to avoid that, force_empty will be useful. Also, note that when memory.kmem.limit_in_bytes is set the charges due to kernel pages will still be seen. This is not considered a failure and the diff --git a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/pids.txt b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/pids.txt index 1a078b5d281a..e105d708ccde 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/pids.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/pids.txt @@ -33,6 +33,9 @@ limit in the hierarchy is followed). pids.current tracks all child cgroup hierarchies, so parent/pids.current is a superset of parent/child/pids.current. +The pids.events file contains event counters: + - max: Number of times fork failed because limit was hit. + Example ------- diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/flexible-arrays.rst b/Documentation/core-api/flexible-arrays.rst deleted file mode 100644 index b6b85a1b518e..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/core-api/flexible-arrays.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,130 +0,0 @@ - -=================================== -Using flexible arrays in the kernel -=================================== - -Large contiguous memory allocations can be unreliable in the Linux kernel. -Kernel programmers will sometimes respond to this problem by allocating -pages with :c:func:`vmalloc()`. This solution not ideal, though. On 32-bit -systems, memory from vmalloc() must be mapped into a relatively small address -space; it's easy to run out. On SMP systems, the page table changes required -by vmalloc() allocations can require expensive cross-processor interrupts on -all CPUs. And, on all systems, use of space in the vmalloc() range increases -pressure on the translation lookaside buffer (TLB), reducing the performance -of the system. - -In many cases, the need for memory from vmalloc() can be eliminated by piecing -together an array from smaller parts; the flexible array library exists to make -this task easier. - -A flexible array holds an arbitrary (within limits) number of fixed-sized -objects, accessed via an integer index. Sparse arrays are handled -reasonably well. Only single-page allocations are made, so memory -allocation failures should be relatively rare. The down sides are that the -arrays cannot be indexed directly, individual object size cannot exceed the -system page size, and putting data into a flexible array requires a copy -operation. It's also worth noting that flexible arrays do no internal -locking at all; if concurrent access to an array is possible, then the -caller must arrange for appropriate mutual exclusion. - -The creation of a flexible array is done with :c:func:`flex_array_alloc()`:: - - #include <linux/flex_array.h> - - struct flex_array *flex_array_alloc(int element_size, - unsigned int total, - gfp_t flags); - -The individual object size is provided by ``element_size``, while total is the -maximum number of objects which can be stored in the array. The flags -argument is passed directly to the internal memory allocation calls. With -the current code, using flags to ask for high memory is likely to lead to -notably unpleasant side effects. - -It is also possible to define flexible arrays at compile time with:: - - DEFINE_FLEX_ARRAY(name, element_size, total); - -This macro will result in a definition of an array with the given name; the -element size and total will be checked for validity at compile time. - -Storing data into a flexible array is accomplished with a call to -:c:func:`flex_array_put()`:: - - int flex_array_put(struct flex_array *array, unsigned int element_nr, - void *src, gfp_t flags); - -This call will copy the data from src into the array, in the position -indicated by ``element_nr`` (which must be less than the maximum specified when -the array was created). If any memory allocations must be performed, flags -will be used. The return value is zero on success, a negative error code -otherwise. - -There might possibly be a need to store data into a flexible array while -running in some sort of atomic context; in this situation, sleeping in the -memory allocator would be a bad thing. That can be avoided by using -``GFP_ATOMIC`` for the flags value, but, often, there is a better way. The -trick is to ensure that any needed memory allocations are done before -entering atomic context, using :c:func:`flex_array_prealloc()`:: - - int flex_array_prealloc(struct flex_array *array, unsigned int start, - unsigned int nr_elements, gfp_t flags); - -This function will ensure that memory for the elements indexed in the range -defined by ``start`` and ``nr_elements`` has been allocated. Thereafter, a -``flex_array_put()`` call on an element in that range is guaranteed not to -block. - -Getting data back out of the array is done with :c:func:`flex_array_get()`:: - - void *flex_array_get(struct flex_array *fa, unsigned int element_nr); - -The return value is a pointer to the data element, or NULL if that -particular element has never been allocated. - -Note that it is possible to get back a valid pointer for an element which -has never been stored in the array. Memory for array elements is allocated -one page at a time; a single allocation could provide memory for several -adjacent elements. Flexible array elements are normally initialized to the -value ``FLEX_ARRAY_FREE`` (defined as 0x6c in <linux/poison.h>), so errors -involving that number probably result from use of unstored array entries. -Note that, if array elements are allocated with ``__GFP_ZERO``, they will be -initialized to zero and this poisoning will not happen. - -Individual elements in the array can be cleared with -:c:func:`flex_array_clear()`:: - - int flex_array_clear(struct flex_array *array, unsigned int element_nr); - -This function will set the given element to ``FLEX_ARRAY_FREE`` and return -zero. If storage for the indicated element is not allocated for the array, -``flex_array_clear()`` will return ``-EINVAL`` instead. Note that clearing an -element does not release the storage associated with it; to reduce the -allocated size of an array, call :c:func:`flex_array_shrink()`:: - - int flex_array_shrink(struct flex_array *array); - -The return value will be the number of pages of memory actually freed. -This function works by scanning the array for pages containing nothing but -``FLEX_ARRAY_FREE`` bytes, so (1) it can be expensive, and (2) it will not work -if the array's pages are allocated with ``__GFP_ZERO``. - -It is possible to remove all elements of an array with a call to -:c:func:`flex_array_free_parts()`:: - - void flex_array_free_parts(struct flex_array *array); - -This call frees all elements, but leaves the array itself in place. -Freeing the entire array is done with :c:func:`flex_array_free()`:: - - void flex_array_free(struct flex_array *array); - -As of this writing, there are no users of flexible arrays in the mainline -kernel. The functions described here are also not exported to modules; -that will probably be fixed when somebody comes up with a need for it. - - -Flexible array functions ------------------------- - -.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/flex_array.h diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/generic-radix-tree.rst b/Documentation/core-api/generic-radix-tree.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ed42839ae42f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/core-api/generic-radix-tree.rst @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +================================= +Generic radix trees/sparse arrays +================================= + +.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/generic-radix-tree.h + :doc: Generic radix trees/sparse arrays + +generic radix tree functions +---------------------------- + +.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/generic-radix-tree.h + :functions: diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/index.rst b/Documentation/core-api/index.rst index 3adee82be311..6870baffef82 100644 --- a/Documentation/core-api/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/core-api/index.rst @@ -28,6 +28,7 @@ Core utilities errseq printk-formats circular-buffers + generic-radix-tree memory-allocation mm-api gfp_mask-from-fs-io diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/kernel-api.rst b/Documentation/core-api/kernel-api.rst index cdd24943fbcc..71f5d2fe39b7 100644 --- a/Documentation/core-api/kernel-api.rst +++ b/Documentation/core-api/kernel-api.rst @@ -356,10 +356,6 @@ Read-Copy Update (RCU) .. kernel-doc:: include/linux/rcupdate.h -.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/rcupdate_wait.h - -.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/rcutree.h - .. kernel-doc:: kernel/rcu/tree.c .. kernel-doc:: kernel/rcu/tree_plugin.h diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/memory-allocation.rst b/Documentation/core-api/memory-allocation.rst index 8954a88ff5b7..7744aa3bf2e0 100644 --- a/Documentation/core-api/memory-allocation.rst +++ b/Documentation/core-api/memory-allocation.rst @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.. _memory-allocation: +.. _memory_allocation: ======================= Memory Allocation Guide @@ -113,9 +113,11 @@ see :c:func:`kvmalloc_node` reference documentation. Note that If you need to allocate many identical objects you can use the slab cache allocator. The cache should be set up with -:c:func:`kmem_cache_create` before it can be used. Afterwards -:c:func:`kmem_cache_alloc` and its convenience wrappers can allocate -memory from that cache. +:c:func:`kmem_cache_create` or :c:func:`kmem_cache_create_usercopy` +before it can be used. The second function should be used if a part of +the cache might be copied to the userspace. After the cache is +created :c:func:`kmem_cache_alloc` and its convenience wrappers can +allocate memory from that cache. When the allocated memory is no longer needed it must be freed. You can use :c:func:`kvfree` for the memory allocated with `kmalloc`, diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/mm-api.rst b/Documentation/core-api/mm-api.rst index aa8e54b85221..128e8a721c1e 100644 --- a/Documentation/core-api/mm-api.rst +++ b/Documentation/core-api/mm-api.rst @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ users will want to use a plain ``GFP_KERNEL``. :doc: Reclaim modifiers .. kernel-doc:: include/linux/gfp.h - :doc: Common combinations + :doc: Useful GFP flag combinations The Slab Cache ============== diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/printk-formats.rst b/Documentation/core-api/printk-formats.rst index a7fae4538946..c37ec7cd9c06 100644 --- a/Documentation/core-api/printk-formats.rst +++ b/Documentation/core-api/printk-formats.rst @@ -13,6 +13,10 @@ Integer types If variable is of Type, use printk format specifier: ------------------------------------------------------------ + char %hhd or %hhx + unsigned char %hhu or %hhx + short int %hd or %hx + unsigned short int %hu or %hx int %d or %x unsigned int %u or %x long %ld or %lx @@ -21,6 +25,10 @@ Integer types unsigned long long %llu or %llx size_t %zu or %zx ssize_t %zd or %zx + s8 %hhd or %hhx + u8 %hhu or %hhx + s16 %hd or %hx + u16 %hu or %hx s32 %d or %x u32 %u or %x s64 %lld or %llx diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/refcount-vs-atomic.rst b/Documentation/core-api/refcount-vs-atomic.rst index 322851bada16..976e85adffe8 100644 --- a/Documentation/core-api/refcount-vs-atomic.rst +++ b/Documentation/core-api/refcount-vs-atomic.rst @@ -54,6 +54,13 @@ must propagate to all other CPUs before the release operation (A-cumulative property). This is implemented using :c:func:`smp_store_release`. +An ACQUIRE memory ordering guarantees that all post loads and +stores (all po-later instructions) on the same CPU are +completed after the acquire operation. It also guarantees that all +po-later stores on the same CPU must propagate to all other CPUs +after the acquire operation executes. This is implemented using +:c:func:`smp_acquire__after_ctrl_dep`. + A control dependency (on success) for refcounters guarantees that if a reference for an object was successfully obtained (reference counter increment or addition happened, function returned true), @@ -119,13 +126,24 @@ Memory ordering guarantees changes: result of obtaining pointer to the object! -case 5) - decrement-based RMW ops that return a value ------------------------------------------------------ +case 5) - generic dec/sub decrement-based RMW ops that return a value +--------------------------------------------------------------------- Function changes: * :c:func:`atomic_dec_and_test` --> :c:func:`refcount_dec_and_test` * :c:func:`atomic_sub_and_test` --> :c:func:`refcount_sub_and_test` + +Memory ordering guarantees changes: + + * fully ordered --> RELEASE ordering + ACQUIRE ordering on success + + +case 6) other decrement-based RMW ops that return a value +--------------------------------------------------------- + +Function changes: + * no atomic counterpart --> :c:func:`refcount_dec_if_one` * ``atomic_add_unless(&var, -1, 1)`` --> ``refcount_dec_not_one(&var)`` @@ -136,7 +154,7 @@ Memory ordering guarantees changes: .. note:: :c:func:`atomic_add_unless` only provides full order on success. -case 6) - lock-based RMW +case 7) - lock-based RMW ------------------------ Function changes: diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/xarray.rst b/Documentation/core-api/xarray.rst index 6a6d67acaf69..ef6f9f98f595 100644 --- a/Documentation/core-api/xarray.rst +++ b/Documentation/core-api/xarray.rst @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ which was at that index; if it returns the same entry which was passed as If you want to only store a new entry to an index if the current entry at that index is ``NULL``, you can use :c:func:`xa_insert` which -returns ``-EEXIST`` if the entry is not empty. +returns ``-EBUSY`` if the entry is not empty. You can enquire whether a mark is set on an entry by using :c:func:`xa_get_mark`. If the entry is not ``NULL``, you can set a mark @@ -108,12 +108,13 @@ some, but not all of the other indices changing. Sometimes you need to ensure that a subsequent call to :c:func:`xa_store` will not need to allocate memory. The :c:func:`xa_reserve` function -will store a reserved entry at the indicated index. Users of the normal -API will see this entry as containing ``NULL``. If you do not need to -use the reserved entry, you can call :c:func:`xa_release` to remove the -unused entry. If another user has stored to the entry in the meantime, -:c:func:`xa_release` will do nothing; if instead you want the entry to -become ``NULL``, you should use :c:func:`xa_erase`. +will store a reserved entry at the indicated index. Users of the +normal API will see this entry as containing ``NULL``. If you do +not need to use the reserved entry, you can call :c:func:`xa_release` +to remove the unused entry. If another user has stored to the entry +in the meantime, :c:func:`xa_release` will do nothing; if instead you +want the entry to become ``NULL``, you should use :c:func:`xa_erase`. +Using :c:func:`xa_insert` on a reserved entry will fail. If all entries in the array are ``NULL``, the :c:func:`xa_empty` function will return ``true``. @@ -130,17 +131,23 @@ If you use :c:func:`DEFINE_XARRAY_ALLOC` to define the XArray, or initialise it by passing ``XA_FLAGS_ALLOC`` to :c:func:`xa_init_flags`, the XArray changes to track whether entries are in use or not. -You can call :c:func:`xa_alloc` to store the entry at any unused index +You can call :c:func:`xa_alloc` to store the entry at an unused index in the XArray. If you need to modify the array from interrupt context, you can use :c:func:`xa_alloc_bh` or :c:func:`xa_alloc_irq` to disable interrupts while allocating the ID. -Using :c:func:`xa_store`, :c:func:`xa_cmpxchg` or :c:func:`xa_insert` -will mark the entry as being allocated. Unlike a normal XArray, storing +Using :c:func:`xa_store`, :c:func:`xa_cmpxchg` or :c:func:`xa_insert` will +also mark the entry as being allocated. Unlike a normal XArray, storing ``NULL`` will mark the entry as being in use, like :c:func:`xa_reserve`. To free an entry, use :c:func:`xa_erase` (or :c:func:`xa_release` if you only want to free the entry if it's ``NULL``). +By default, the lowest free entry is allocated starting from 0. If you +want to allocate entries starting at 1, it is more efficient to use +:c:func:`DEFINE_XARRAY_ALLOC1` or ``XA_FLAGS_ALLOC1``. If you want to +allocate IDs up to a maximum, then wrap back around to the lowest free +ID, you can use :c:func:`xa_alloc_cyclic`. + You cannot use ``XA_MARK_0`` with an allocating XArray as this mark is used to track whether an entry is free or not. The other marks are available for your use. @@ -183,6 +190,8 @@ Takes xa_lock internally: * :c:func:`xa_store_bh` * :c:func:`xa_store_irq` * :c:func:`xa_insert` + * :c:func:`xa_insert_bh` + * :c:func:`xa_insert_irq` * :c:func:`xa_erase` * :c:func:`xa_erase_bh` * :c:func:`xa_erase_irq` @@ -206,7 +215,6 @@ Assumes xa_lock held on entry: * :c:func:`__xa_erase` * :c:func:`__xa_cmpxchg` * :c:func:`__xa_alloc` - * :c:func:`__xa_reserve` * :c:func:`__xa_set_mark` * :c:func:`__xa_clear_mark` diff --git a/Documentation/cpuidle/driver.txt b/Documentation/cpuidle/driver.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 1b0d81d92583..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/cpuidle/driver.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ - - - Supporting multiple CPU idle levels in kernel - - cpuidle drivers - - - - -cpuidle driver hooks into the cpuidle infrastructure and handles the -architecture/platform dependent part of CPU idle states. Driver -provides the platform idle state detection capability and also -has mechanisms in place to support actual entry-exit into CPU idle states. - -cpuidle driver initializes the cpuidle_device structure for each CPU device -and registers with cpuidle using cpuidle_register_device. - -If all the idle states are the same, the wrapper function cpuidle_register -could be used instead. - -It can also support the dynamic changes (like battery <-> AC), by using -cpuidle_pause_and_lock, cpuidle_disable_device and cpuidle_enable_device, -cpuidle_resume_and_unlock. - -Interfaces: -extern int cpuidle_register(struct cpuidle_driver *drv, - const struct cpumask *const coupled_cpus); -extern int cpuidle_unregister(struct cpuidle_driver *drv); -extern int cpuidle_register_driver(struct cpuidle_driver *drv); -extern void cpuidle_unregister_driver(struct cpuidle_driver *drv); -extern int cpuidle_register_device(struct cpuidle_device *dev); -extern void cpuidle_unregister_device(struct cpuidle_device *dev); - -extern void cpuidle_pause_and_lock(void); -extern void cpuidle_resume_and_unlock(void); -extern int cpuidle_enable_device(struct cpuidle_device *dev); -extern void cpuidle_disable_device(struct cpuidle_device *dev); diff --git a/Documentation/cpuidle/governor.txt b/Documentation/cpuidle/governor.txt deleted file mode 100644 index d9020f5e847b..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/cpuidle/governor.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ - - - - Supporting multiple CPU idle levels in kernel - - cpuidle governors - - - - -cpuidle governor is policy routine that decides what idle state to enter at -any given time. cpuidle core uses different callbacks to the governor. - -* enable() to enable governor for a particular device -* disable() to disable governor for a particular device -* select() to select an idle state to enter -* reflect() called after returning from the idle state, which can be used - by the governor for some record keeping. - -More than one governor can be registered at the same time and -users can switch between drivers using /sysfs interface (when enabled). -More than one governor part is supported for developers to easily experiment -with different governors. By default, most optimal governor based on your -kernel configuration and platform will be selected by cpuidle. - -Interfaces: -extern int cpuidle_register_governor(struct cpuidle_governor *gov); -struct cpuidle_governor diff --git a/Documentation/dev-tools/kcov.rst b/Documentation/dev-tools/kcov.rst index c2f6452e38ed..42b612677799 100644 --- a/Documentation/dev-tools/kcov.rst +++ b/Documentation/dev-tools/kcov.rst @@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ Configure the kernel with:: CONFIG_KCOV=y -CONFIG_KCOV requires gcc built on revision 231296 or later. +CONFIG_KCOV requires gcc 6.1.0 or later. If the comparison operands need to be collected, set:: diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/cache.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/cache.txt index ff0841711fd5..8ae1cf8e94da 100644 --- a/Documentation/device-mapper/cache.txt +++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/cache.txt @@ -206,6 +206,9 @@ Optional feature arguments are: in a separate btree, which improves speed of shutting down the cache. + no_discard_passdown : disable passing down discards from the cache + to the origin's data device. + A policy called 'default' is always registered. This is an alias for the policy we currently think is giving best all round performance. diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-init.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-init.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8464ee7c01b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-init.txt @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ +Early creation of mapped devices +==================================== + +It is possible to configure a device-mapper device to act as the root device for +your system in two ways. + +The first is to build an initial ramdisk which boots to a minimal userspace +which configures the device, then pivot_root(8) in to it. + +The second is to create one or more device-mappers using the module parameter +"dm-mod.create=" through the kernel boot command line argument. + +The format is specified as a string of data separated by commas and optionally +semi-colons, where: + - a comma is used to separate fields like name, uuid, flags and table + (specifies one device) + - a semi-colon is used to separate devices. + +So the format will look like this: + + dm-mod.create=<name>,<uuid>,<minor>,<flags>,<table>[,<table>+][;<name>,<uuid>,<minor>,<flags>,<table>[,<table>+]+] + +Where, + <name> ::= The device name. + <uuid> ::= xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx | "" + <minor> ::= The device minor number | "" + <flags> ::= "ro" | "rw" + <table> ::= <start_sector> <num_sectors> <target_type> <target_args> + <target_type> ::= "verity" | "linear" | ... (see list below) + +The dm line should be equivalent to the one used by the dmsetup tool with the +--concise argument. + +Target types +============ + +Not all target types are available as there are serious risks in allowing +activation of certain DM targets without first using userspace tools to check +the validity of associated metadata. + + "cache": constrained, userspace should verify cache device + "crypt": allowed + "delay": allowed + "era": constrained, userspace should verify metadata device + "flakey": constrained, meant for test + "linear": allowed + "log-writes": constrained, userspace should verify metadata device + "mirror": constrained, userspace should verify main/mirror device + "raid": constrained, userspace should verify metadata device + "snapshot": constrained, userspace should verify src/dst device + "snapshot-origin": allowed + "snapshot-merge": constrained, userspace should verify src/dst device + "striped": allowed + "switch": constrained, userspace should verify dev path + "thin": constrained, requires dm target message from userspace + "thin-pool": constrained, requires dm target message from userspace + "verity": allowed + "writecache": constrained, userspace should verify cache device + "zero": constrained, not meant for rootfs + +If the target is not listed above, it is constrained by default (not tested). + +Examples +======== +An example of booting to a linear array made up of user-mode linux block +devices: + + dm-mod.create="lroot,,,rw, 0 4096 linear 98:16 0, 4096 4096 linear 98:32 0" root=/dev/dm-0 + +This will boot to a rw dm-linear target of 8192 sectors split across two block +devices identified by their major:minor numbers. After boot, udev will rename +this target to /dev/mapper/lroot (depending on the rules). No uuid was assigned. + +An example of multiple device-mappers, with the dm-mod.create="..." contents is shown here +split on multiple lines for readability: + + vroot,,,ro, + 0 1740800 verity 254:0 254:0 1740800 sha1 + 76e9be054b15884a9fa85973e9cb274c93afadb6 + 5b3549d54d6c7a3837b9b81ed72e49463a64c03680c47835bef94d768e5646fe; + vram,,,rw, + 0 32768 linear 1:0 0, + 32768 32768 linear 1:1 0 + +Other examples (per target): + +"crypt": + dm-crypt,,8,ro, + 0 1048576 crypt aes-xts-plain64 + babebabebabebabebabebabebabebabebabebabebabebabebabebabebabebabe 0 + /dev/sda 0 1 allow_discards + +"delay": + dm-delay,,4,ro,0 409600 delay /dev/sda1 0 500 + +"linear": + dm-linear,,,rw, + 0 32768 linear /dev/sda1 0, + 32768 1024000 linear /dev/sda2 0, + 1056768 204800 linear /dev/sda3 0, + 1261568 512000 linear /dev/sda4 0 + +"snapshot-origin": + dm-snap-orig,,4,ro,0 409600 snapshot-origin 8:2 + +"striped": + dm-striped,,4,ro,0 1638400 striped 4 4096 + /dev/sda1 0 /dev/sda2 0 /dev/sda3 0 /dev/sda4 0 + +"verity": + dm-verity,,4,ro, + 0 1638400 verity 1 8:1 8:2 4096 4096 204800 1 sha256 + fb1a5a0f00deb908d8b53cb270858975e76cf64105d412ce764225d53b8f3cfd + 51934789604d1b92399c52e7cb149d1b3a1b74bbbcb103b2a0aaacbed5c08584 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/Makefile b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/Makefile index 6e5cef0ed6fb..63b139f9ae28 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/Makefile @@ -15,9 +15,13 @@ DT_TMP_SCHEMA := processed-schema.yaml extra-y += $(DT_TMP_SCHEMA) quiet_cmd_mk_schema = SCHEMA $@ - cmd_mk_schema = $(DT_MK_SCHEMA) $(DT_MK_SCHEMA_FLAGS) -o $@ $(filter-out FORCE, $^) + cmd_mk_schema = $(DT_MK_SCHEMA) $(DT_MK_SCHEMA_FLAGS) -o $@ $(real-prereqs) + +DT_DOCS = $(shell \ + cd $(srctree)/$(src) && \ + find * \( -name '*.yaml' ! -name $(DT_TMP_SCHEMA) \) \ + ) -DT_DOCS = $(shell cd $(srctree)/$(src) && find * -name '*.yaml') DT_SCHEMA_FILES ?= $(addprefix $(src)/,$(DT_DOCS)) extra-y += $(patsubst $(src)/%.yaml,%.example.dts, $(DT_SCHEMA_FILES)) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/amlogic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/amlogic.txt index 8dbc259081e4..7f40cb5f490b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/amlogic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/amlogic.txt @@ -109,6 +109,7 @@ Board compatible values (alphabetically, grouped by SoC): - "amlogic,s400" (Meson axg a113d) - "amlogic,u200" (Meson g12a s905d2) + - "amediatech,x96-max" (Meson g12a s905x2) Amlogic Meson Firmware registers Interface ------------------------------------------ diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armadeus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armadeus.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 9821283ff516..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armadeus.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,6 +0,0 @@ -Armadeus i.MX Platforms Device Tree Bindings ------------------------------------------------ - -APF51: i.MX51 based module. -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "armadeus,imx51-apf51", "fsl,imx51"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-sysregs.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-sysregs.txt index 14f319f694b7..e61d00e25b95 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-sysregs.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-sysregs.txt @@ -21,7 +21,8 @@ Its subnodes can be: RSTC Reset Controller required properties: - compatible: Should be "atmel,<chip>-rstc". - <chip> can be "at91sam9260" or "at91sam9g45" or "sama5d3" + <chip> can be "at91sam9260", "at91sam9g45", "sama5d3" or "samx7" + it also can be "microchip,sam9x60-rstc" - reg: Should contain registers location and length - clocks: phandle to input clock. @@ -147,6 +148,7 @@ required properties: - compatible: Should be "atmel,<chip>-sfr", "syscon" or "atmel,<chip>-sfrbu", "syscon" <chip> can be "sama5d3", "sama5d4" or "sama5d2". + It also can be "microchip,sam9x60-sfr", "syscon". - reg: Should contain registers location and length sfr@f0038000 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/brcm,bcm2835.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/brcm,bcm2835.txt index 0dcc3ea5adff..245328f36580 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/brcm,bcm2835.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/brcm,bcm2835.txt @@ -30,6 +30,10 @@ Raspberry Pi 2 Model B Required root node properties: compatible = "raspberrypi,2-model-b", "brcm,bcm2836"; +Raspberry Pi 3 Model A+ +Required root node properties: +compatible = "raspberrypi,3-model-a-plus", "brcm,bcm2837"; + Raspberry Pi 3 Model B Required root node properties: compatible = "raspberrypi,3-model-b", "brcm,bcm2837"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bhf.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bhf.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 886b503caf9c..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bhf.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,6 +0,0 @@ -Beckhoff Automation Platforms Device Tree Bindings --------------------------------------------------- - -CX9020 Embedded PC -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "bhf,cx9020", "fsl,imx53"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bitmain.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bitmain.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0efdb4ac028e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bitmain.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/arm/bitmain.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Bitmain platform device tree bindings + +maintainers: + - Manivannan Sadhasivam <manivannan.sadhasivam@linaro.org> + +properties: + compatible: + items: + - enum: + - bitmain,sophon-edge + - const: bitmain,bm1880 +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/compulab-boards.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/compulab-boards.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 42a10285af9c..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/compulab-boards.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -CompuLab SB-SOM is a multi-module baseboard capable of carrying: - - CM-T43 - - CM-T54 - - CM-QS600 - - CL-SOM-AM57x - - CL-SOM-iMX7 -modules with minor modifications to the SB-SOM assembly. - -Required root node properties: - - compatible = should be "compulab,sb-som" - -Compulab CL-SOM-iMX7 is a miniature System-on-Module (SoM) based on -Freescale i.MX7 ARM Cortex-A7 System-on-Chip. - -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "compulab,cl-som-imx7", "fsl,imx7d"; - -Compulab SBC-iMX7 is a single board computer based on the -Freescale i.MX7 system-on-chip. SBC-iMX7 is implemented with -the CL-SOM-iMX7 System-on-Module providing most of the functions, -and SB-SOM-iMX7 carrier board providing additional peripheral -functions and connectors. - -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "compulab,sbc-imx7", "compulab,cl-som-imx7", "fsl,imx7d"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.yaml index 298c17b327c6..365dcf384d73 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.yaml +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.yaml @@ -228,6 +228,7 @@ patternProperties: - renesas,r9a06g032-smp - rockchip,rk3036-smp - rockchip,rk3066-smp + - socionext,milbeaut-m10v-smp - ste,dbx500-smp cpu-release-addr: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/freescale/fsl,imx7ulp-sim.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/freescale/fsl,imx7ulp-sim.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7d0c7f002401 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/freescale/fsl,imx7ulp-sim.txt @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +Freescale i.MX7ULP System Integration Module +---------------------------------------------- +The system integration module (SIM) provides system control and chip configuration +registers. In this module, chip revision information is located in JTAG ID register, +and a set of registers have been made available in DGO domain for SW use, with the +objective to maintain its value between system resets. + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be "fsl,imx7ulp-sim". +- reg: Specifies base physical address and size of the register sets. + +Example: +sim: sim@410a3000 { + compatible = "fsl,imx7ulp-sim", "syscon"; + reg = <0x410a3000 0x1000>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/freescale/fsl,scu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/freescale/fsl,scu.txt index 27784b6edfed..72d481c8dd48 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/freescale/fsl,scu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/freescale/fsl,scu.txt @@ -58,7 +58,11 @@ This binding for the SCU power domain providers uses the generic power domain binding[2]. Required properties: -- compatible: Should be "fsl,imx8qxp-scu-pd". +- compatible: Should be one of: + "fsl,imx8qm-scu-pd", + "fsl,imx8qxp-scu-pd" + followed by "fsl,scu-pd" + - #power-domain-cells: Must be 1. Contains the Resource ID used by SCU commands. See detailed Resource ID list from: @@ -70,7 +74,10 @@ Clock bindings based on SCU Message Protocol This binding uses the common clock binding[1]. Required properties: -- compatible: Should be "fsl,imx8qxp-clock". +- compatible: Should be one of: + "fsl,imx8qm-clock" + "fsl,imx8qxp-clock" + followed by "fsl,scu-clk" - #clock-cells: Should be 1. Contains the Clock ID value. - clocks: List of clock specifiers, must contain an entry for each required entry in clock-names @@ -137,7 +144,7 @@ firmware { &lsio_mu1 1 3>; clk: clk { - compatible = "fsl,imx8qxp-clk"; + compatible = "fsl,imx8qxp-clk", "fsl,scu-clk"; #clock-cells = <1>; }; @@ -154,7 +161,7 @@ firmware { }; pd: imx8qx-pd { - compatible = "fsl,imx8qxp-scu-pd"; + compatible = "fsl,imx8qxp-scu-pd", "fsl,scu-pd"; #power-domain-cells = <1>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 7fbc42484001..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,237 +0,0 @@ -Freescale i.MX Platforms Device Tree Bindings ------------------------------------------------ - -i.MX23 Evaluation Kit -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx23-evk", "fsl,imx23"; - -i.MX25 Product Development Kit -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx25-pdk", "fsl,imx25"; - -i.MX27 Product Development Kit -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx27-pdk", "fsl,imx27"; - -i.MX28 Evaluation Kit -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx28-evk", "fsl,imx28"; - -i.MX51 Babbage Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx51-babbage", "fsl,imx51"; - -i.MX53 Automotive Reference Design Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx53-ard", "fsl,imx53"; - -i.MX53 Evaluation Kit -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx53-evk", "fsl,imx53"; - -i.MX53 Quick Start Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx53-qsb", "fsl,imx53"; - -i.MX53 Smart Mobile Reference Design Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx53-smd", "fsl,imx53"; - -i.MX6 Quad Armadillo2 Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx6q-arm2", "fsl,imx6q"; - -i.MX6 Quad SABRE Lite Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx6q-sabrelite", "fsl,imx6q"; - -i.MX6 Quad SABRE Smart Device Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx6q-sabresd", "fsl,imx6q"; - -i.MX6 Quad SABRE Automotive Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx6q-sabreauto", "fsl,imx6q"; - -i.MX6SLL EVK board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx6sll-evk", "fsl,imx6sll"; - -i.MX6 Quad Plus SABRE Smart Device Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx6qp-sabresd", "fsl,imx6qp"; - -i.MX6 Quad Plus SABRE Automotive Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx6qp-sabreauto", "fsl,imx6qp"; - -i.MX6 DualLite SABRE Smart Device Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx6dl-sabresd", "fsl,imx6dl"; - -i.MX6 DualLite/Solo SABRE Automotive Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx6dl-sabreauto", "fsl,imx6dl"; - -i.MX6 SoloLite EVK Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx6sl-evk", "fsl,imx6sl"; - -i.MX6 UltraLite 14x14 EVK Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx6ul-14x14-evk", "fsl,imx6ul"; - -i.MX6 UltraLiteLite 14x14 EVK Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx6ull-14x14-evk", "fsl,imx6ull"; - -i.MX6 ULZ 14x14 EVK Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx6ulz-14x14-evk", "fsl,imx6ull", "fsl,imx6ulz"; - -i.MX6 SoloX SDB Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx6sx-sdb", "fsl,imx6sx"; - -i.MX6 SoloX Sabre Auto Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx6sx-sabreauto", "fsl,imx6sx"; - -i.MX7 SabreSD Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx7d-sdb", "fsl,imx7d"; - -i.MX7ULP Evaluation Kit -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx7ulp-evk", "fsl,imx7ulp"; - -Generic i.MX boards -------------------- - -No iomux setup is done for these boards, so this must have been configured -by the bootloader for boards to work with the generic bindings. - -i.MX27 generic board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx27"; - -i.MX51 generic board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx51"; - -i.MX53 generic board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx53"; - -i.MX6q generic board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx6q"; - -i.MX7ULP generic board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,imx7ulp"; - -Freescale Vybrid Platform Device Tree Bindings ----------------------------------------------- - -For the Vybrid SoC familiy all variants with DDR controller are supported, -which is the VF5xx and VF6xx series. Out of historical reasons, in most -places the kernel uses vf610 to refer to the whole familiy. -The compatible string "fsl,vf610m4" is used for the secondary Cortex-M4 -core support. - -Required root node compatible property (one of them): - - compatible = "fsl,vf500"; - - compatible = "fsl,vf510"; - - compatible = "fsl,vf600"; - - compatible = "fsl,vf610"; - - compatible = "fsl,vf610m4"; - -Freescale LS1021A Platform Device Tree Bindings ------------------------------------------------- - -Required root node compatible properties: - - compatible = "fsl,ls1021a"; - -Freescale ARMv8 based Layerscape SoC family Device Tree Bindings ----------------------------------------------------------------- - -LS1012A SoC -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,ls1012a"; - -LS1012A ARMv8 based RDB Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,ls1012a-rdb", "fsl,ls1012a"; - -LS1012A ARMv8 based FRDM Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,ls1012a-frdm", "fsl,ls1012a"; - -LS1012A ARMv8 based QDS Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,ls1012a-qds", "fsl,ls1012a"; - -LS1043A SoC -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,ls1043a"; - -LS1043A ARMv8 based RDB Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,ls1043a-rdb", "fsl,ls1043a"; - -LS1043A ARMv8 based QDS Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,ls1043a-qds", "fsl,ls1043a"; - -LS1046A SoC -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,ls1046a"; - -LS1046A ARMv8 based QDS Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,ls1046a-qds", "fsl,ls1046a"; - -LS1046A ARMv8 based RDB Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,ls1046a-rdb", "fsl,ls1046a"; - -LS1088A SoC -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,ls1088a"; - -LS1088A ARMv8 based QDS Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,ls1088a-qds", "fsl,ls1088a"; - -LS1088A ARMv8 based RDB Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,ls1088a-rdb", "fsl,ls1088a"; - -LS2080A SoC -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,ls2080a"; - -LS2080A ARMv8 based Simulator model -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,ls2080a-simu", "fsl,ls2080a"; - -LS2080A ARMv8 based QDS Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,ls2080a-qds", "fsl,ls2080a"; - -LS2080A ARMv8 based RDB Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,ls2080a-rdb", "fsl,ls2080a"; - -LS2088A SoC -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,ls2088a"; - -LS2088A ARMv8 based QDS Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,ls2088a-qds", "fsl,ls2088a"; - -LS2088A ARMv8 based RDB Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "fsl,ls2088a-rdb", "fsl,ls2088a"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7e2cd6ad26bd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,232 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/bindings/arm/fsl.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Freescale i.MX Platforms Device Tree Bindings + +maintainers: + - Shawn Guo <shawnguo@kernel.org> + - Li Yang <leoyang.li@nxp.com> + +properties: + $nodename: + const: '/' + compatible: + oneOf: + - description: i.MX23 based Boards + items: + - enum: + - fsl,imx23-evk + - olimex,imx23-olinuxino + - const: fsl,imx23 + + - description: i.MX25 Product Development Kit + items: + - enum: + - fsl,imx25-pdk + - const: fsl,imx25 + + - description: i.MX27 Product Development Kit + items: + - enum: + - fsl,imx27-pdk + - const: fsl,imx27 + + - description: i.MX28 based Boards + items: + - enum: + - fsl,imx28-evk + - i2se,duckbill + - i2se,duckbill-2 + - technologic,imx28-ts4600 + - const: fsl,imx28 + - description: i.MX28 Duckbill 2 based Boards + items: + - enum: + - i2se,duckbill-2-485 + - i2se,duckbill-2-enocean + - i2se,duckbill-2-spi + - const: i2se,duckbill-2 + - const: fsl,imx28 + + - description: i.MX51 Babbage Board + items: + - enum: + - armadeus,imx51-apf51 + - fsl,imx51-babbage + - technologic,imx51-ts4800 + - const: fsl,imx51 + + - description: i.MX53 based Boards + items: + - enum: + - bhf,cx9020 + - fsl,imx53-ard + - fsl,imx53-evk + - fsl,imx53-qsb + - fsl,imx53-smd + - const: fsl,imx53 + + - description: i.MX6Q based Boards + items: + - enum: + - fsl,imx6q-arm2 + - fsl,imx6q-sabreauto + - fsl,imx6q-sabrelite + - fsl,imx6q-sabresd + - technologic,imx6q-ts4900 + - technologic,imx6q-ts7970 + - const: fsl,imx6q + + - description: i.MX6QP based Boards + items: + - enum: + - fsl,imx6qp-sabreauto # i.MX6 Quad Plus SABRE Automotive Board + - fsl,imx6qp-sabresd # i.MX6 Quad Plus SABRE Smart Device Board + - const: fsl,imx6qp + + - description: i.MX6DL based Boards + items: + - enum: + - fsl,imx6dl-sabreauto # i.MX6 DualLite/Solo SABRE Automotive Board + - fsl,imx6dl-sabresd # i.MX6 DualLite SABRE Smart Device Board + - technologic,imx6dl-ts4900 + - technologic,imx6dl-ts7970 + - ysoft,imx6dl-yapp4-draco # i.MX6 DualLite Y Soft IOTA Draco board + - ysoft,imx6dl-yapp4-hydra # i.MX6 DualLite Y Soft IOTA Hydra board + - ysoft,imx6dl-yapp4-ursa # i.MX6 Solo Y Soft IOTA Ursa board + - const: fsl,imx6dl + + - description: i.MX6SL based Boards + items: + - enum: + - fsl,imx6sl-evk # i.MX6 SoloLite EVK Board + - const: fsl,imx6sl + + - description: i.MX6SLL based Boards + items: + - enum: + - fsl,imx6sll-evk + - const: fsl,imx6sll + + - description: i.MX6SX based Boards + items: + - enum: + - fsl,imx6sx-sabreauto # i.MX6 SoloX Sabre Auto Board + - fsl,imx6sx-sdb # i.MX6 SoloX SDB Board + - const: fsl,imx6sx + + - description: i.MX6UL based Boards + items: + - enum: + - fsl,imx6ul-14x14-evk # i.MX6 UltraLite 14x14 EVK Board + - const: fsl,imx6ul + + - description: i.MX6ULL based Boards + items: + - enum: + - fsl,imx6ull-14x14-evk # i.MX6 UltraLiteLite 14x14 EVK Board + - const: fsl,imx6ull + + - description: i.MX6ULZ based Boards + items: + - enum: + - fsl,imx6ulz-14x14-evk # i.MX6 ULZ 14x14 EVK Board + - const: fsl,imx6ull # This seems odd. Should be last? + - const: fsl,imx6ulz + + - description: i.MX7D based Boards + items: + - enum: + - fsl,imx7d-sdb # i.MX7 SabreSD Board + - const: fsl,imx7d + + - description: + Compulab SBC-iMX7 is a single board computer based on the + Freescale i.MX7 system-on-chip. SBC-iMX7 is implemented with + the CL-SOM-iMX7 System-on-Module providing most of the functions, + and SB-SOM-iMX7 carrier board providing additional peripheral + functions and connectors. + items: + - const: compulab,sbc-imx7 + - const: compulab,cl-som-imx7 + - const: fsl,imx7d + + - description: i.MX8QXP based Boards + items: + - enum: + - fsl,imx8qxp-mek # i.MX8QXP MEK Board + - const: fsl,imx8qxp + + - description: + Freescale Vybrid Platform Device Tree Bindings + + For the Vybrid SoC familiy all variants with DDR controller are supported, + which is the VF5xx and VF6xx series. Out of historical reasons, in most + places the kernel uses vf610 to refer to the whole familiy. + The compatible string "fsl,vf610m4" is used for the secondary Cortex-M4 + core support. + items: + - enum: + - fsl,vf500 + - fsl,vf510 + - fsl,vf600 + - fsl,vf610 + - fsl,vf610m4 + + - description: LS1012A based Boards + items: + - enum: + - ebs-systart,oxalis + - fsl,ls1012a-rdb + - fsl,ls1012a-frdm + - fsl,ls1012a-qds + - const: fsl,ls1012a + + - description: LS1021A based Boards + items: + - enum: + - fsl,ls1021a-moxa-uc-8410a + - fsl,ls1021a-qds + - fsl,ls1021a-twr + - const: fsl,ls1021a + + - description: LS1043A based Boards + items: + - enum: + - fsl,ls1043a-rdb + - fsl,ls1043a-qds + - const: fsl,ls1043a + + - description: LS1046A based Boards + items: + - enum: + - fsl,ls1046a-qds + - fsl,ls1046a-rdb + - const: fsl,ls1046a + + - description: LS1088A based Boards + items: + - enum: + - fsl,ls1088a-qds + - fsl,ls1088a-rdb + - const: fsl,ls1088a + + - description: LS2080A based Boards + items: + - enum: + - fsl,ls2080a-simu + - fsl,ls2080a-qds + - fsl,ls2080a-rdb + - const: fsl,ls2080a + + - description: LS2088A based Boards + items: + - enum: + - fsl,ls2088a-qds + - fsl,ls2088a-rdb + - const: fsl,ls2088a + +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/i2se.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/i2se.txt deleted file mode 100644 index dbd54a3aa07d..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/i2se.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,22 +0,0 @@ -I2SE Device Tree Bindings -------------------------- - -Duckbill Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "i2se,duckbill", "fsl,imx28"; - -Duckbill 2 Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "i2se,duckbill-2", "fsl,imx28"; - -Duckbill 2 485 Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "i2se,duckbill-2-485", "i2se,duckbill-2", "fsl,imx28"; - -Duckbill 2 EnOcean Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "i2se,duckbill-2-enocean", "i2se,duckbill-2", "fsl,imx28"; - -Duckbill 2 SPI Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "i2se,duckbill-2-spi", "i2se,duckbill-2", "fsl,imx28"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2c2x0.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2c2x0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index fbe6cb21f4cf..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2c2x0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,114 +0,0 @@ -* ARM L2 Cache Controller - -ARM cores often have a separate L2C210/L2C220/L2C310 (also known as PL210/PL220/ -PL310 and variants) based level 2 cache controller. All these various implementations -of the L2 cache controller have compatible programming models (Note 1). -Some of the properties that are just prefixed "cache-*" are taken from section -3.7.3 of the Devicetree Specification which can be found at: -https://www.devicetree.org/specifications/ - -The ARM L2 cache representation in the device tree should be done as follows: - -Required properties: - -- compatible : should be one of: - "arm,pl310-cache" - "arm,l220-cache" - "arm,l210-cache" - "bcm,bcm11351-a2-pl310-cache": DEPRECATED by "brcm,bcm11351-a2-pl310-cache" - "brcm,bcm11351-a2-pl310-cache": For Broadcom bcm11351 chipset where an - offset needs to be added to the address before passing down to the L2 - cache controller - "marvell,aurora-system-cache": Marvell Controller designed to be - compatible with the ARM one, with system cache mode (meaning - maintenance operations on L1 are broadcasted to the L2 and L2 - performs the same operation). - "marvell,aurora-outer-cache": Marvell Controller designed to be - compatible with the ARM one with outer cache mode. - "marvell,tauros3-cache": Marvell Tauros3 cache controller, compatible - with arm,pl310-cache controller. -- cache-unified : Specifies the cache is a unified cache. -- cache-level : Should be set to 2 for a level 2 cache. -- reg : Physical base address and size of cache controller's memory mapped - registers. - -Optional properties: - -- arm,data-latency : Cycles of latency for Data RAM accesses. Specifies 3 cells of - read, write and setup latencies. Minimum valid values are 1. Controllers - without setup latency control should use a value of 0. -- arm,tag-latency : Cycles of latency for Tag RAM accesses. Specifies 3 cells of - read, write and setup latencies. Controllers without setup latency control - should use 0. Controllers without separate read and write Tag RAM latency - values should only use the first cell. -- arm,dirty-latency : Cycles of latency for Dirty RAMs. This is a single cell. -- arm,filter-ranges : <start length> Starting address and length of window to - filter. Addresses in the filter window are directed to the M1 port. Other - addresses will go to the M0 port. -- arm,io-coherent : indicates that the system is operating in an hardware - I/O coherent mode. Valid only when the arm,pl310-cache compatible - string is used. -- interrupts : 1 combined interrupt. -- cache-size : specifies the size in bytes of the cache -- cache-sets : specifies the number of associativity sets of the cache -- cache-block-size : specifies the size in bytes of a cache block -- cache-line-size : specifies the size in bytes of a line in the cache, - if this is not specified, the line size is assumed to be equal to the - cache block size -- cache-id-part: cache id part number to be used if it is not present - on hardware -- wt-override: If present then L2 is forced to Write through mode -- arm,double-linefill : Override double linefill enable setting. Enable if - non-zero, disable if zero. -- arm,double-linefill-incr : Override double linefill on INCR read. Enable - if non-zero, disable if zero. -- arm,double-linefill-wrap : Override double linefill on WRAP read. Enable - if non-zero, disable if zero. -- arm,prefetch-drop : Override prefetch drop enable setting. Enable if non-zero, - disable if zero. -- arm,prefetch-offset : Override prefetch offset value. Valid values are - 0-7, 15, 23, and 31. -- arm,shared-override : The default behavior of the L220 or PL310 cache - controllers with respect to the shareable attribute is to transform "normal - memory non-cacheable transactions" into "cacheable no allocate" (for reads) - or "write through no write allocate" (for writes). - On systems where this may cause DMA buffer corruption, this property must be - specified to indicate that such transforms are precluded. -- arm,parity-enable : enable parity checking on the L2 cache (L220 or PL310). -- arm,parity-disable : disable parity checking on the L2 cache (L220 or PL310). -- arm,outer-sync-disable : disable the outer sync operation on the L2 cache. - Some core tiles, especially ARM PB11MPCore have a faulty L220 cache that - will randomly hang unless outer sync operations are disabled. -- prefetch-data : Data prefetch. Value: <0> (forcibly disable), <1> - (forcibly enable), property absent (retain settings set by firmware) -- prefetch-instr : Instruction prefetch. Value: <0> (forcibly disable), - <1> (forcibly enable), property absent (retain settings set by - firmware) -- arm,dynamic-clock-gating : L2 dynamic clock gating. Value: <0> (forcibly - disable), <1> (forcibly enable), property absent (OS specific behavior, - preferably retain firmware settings) -- arm,standby-mode: L2 standby mode enable. Value <0> (forcibly disable), - <1> (forcibly enable), property absent (OS specific behavior, - preferably retain firmware settings) -- arm,early-bresp-disable : Disable the CA9 optimization Early BRESP (PL310) -- arm,full-line-zero-disable : Disable the CA9 optimization Full line of zero - write (PL310) - -Example: - -L2: cache-controller { - compatible = "arm,pl310-cache"; - reg = <0xfff12000 0x1000>; - arm,data-latency = <1 1 1>; - arm,tag-latency = <2 2 2>; - arm,filter-ranges = <0x80000000 0x8000000>; - cache-unified; - cache-level = <2>; - interrupts = <45>; -}; - -Note 1: The description in this document doesn't apply to integrated L2 - cache controllers as found in e.g. Cortex-A15/A7/A57/A53. These - integrated L2 controllers are assumed to be all preconfigured by - early secure boot code. Thus no need to deal with their configuration - in the kernel at all. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2c2x0.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2c2x0.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..bfc5c185561c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2c2x0.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,248 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/arm/l2c2x0.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: ARM L2 Cache Controller + +maintainers: + - Rob Herring <robh@kernel.org> + +description: |+ + ARM cores often have a separate L2C210/L2C220/L2C310 (also known as PL210/ + PL220/PL310 and variants) based level 2 cache controller. All these various + implementations of the L2 cache controller have compatible programming + models (Note 1). Some of the properties that are just prefixed "cache-*" are + taken from section 3.7.3 of the Devicetree Specification which can be found + at: + https://www.devicetree.org/specifications/ + + Note 1: The description in this document doesn't apply to integrated L2 + cache controllers as found in e.g. Cortex-A15/A7/A57/A53. These + integrated L2 controllers are assumed to be all preconfigured by + early secure boot code. Thus no need to deal with their configuration + in the kernel at all. + +allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/cache-controller.yaml# + +properties: + compatible: + enum: + - arm,pl310-cache + - arm,l220-cache + - arm,l210-cache + # DEPRECATED by "brcm,bcm11351-a2-pl310-cache" + - bcm,bcm11351-a2-pl310-cache + # For Broadcom bcm11351 chipset where an + # offset needs to be added to the address before passing down to the L2 + # cache controller + - brcm,bcm11351-a2-pl310-cache + # Marvell Controller designed to be + # compatible with the ARM one, with system cache mode (meaning + # maintenance operations on L1 are broadcasted to the L2 and L2 + # performs the same operation). + - marvell,aurora-system-cache + # Marvell Controller designed to be + # compatible with the ARM one with outer cache mode. + - marvell,aurora-outer-cache + # Marvell Tauros3 cache controller, compatible + # with arm,pl310-cache controller. + - marvell,tauros3-cache + + cache-level: + const: 2 + + cache-unified: true + cache-size: true + cache-sets: true + cache-block-size: true + cache-line-size: true + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + arm,data-latency: + description: Cycles of latency for Data RAM accesses. Specifies 3 cells of + read, write and setup latencies. Minimum valid values are 1. Controllers + without setup latency control should use a value of 0. + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32-array + - minItems: 2 + maxItems: 3 + items: + minimum: 0 + maximum: 8 + + arm,tag-latency: + description: Cycles of latency for Tag RAM accesses. Specifies 3 cells of + read, write and setup latencies. Controllers without setup latency control + should use 0. Controllers without separate read and write Tag RAM latency + values should only use the first cell. + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32-array + - minItems: 1 + maxItems: 3 + items: + minimum: 0 + maximum: 8 + + arm,dirty-latency: + description: Cycles of latency for Dirty RAMs. This is a single cell. + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + - minimum: 1 + maximum: 8 + + arm,filter-ranges: + description: <start length> Starting address and length of window to + filter. Addresses in the filter window are directed to the M1 port. Other + addresses will go to the M0 port. + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32-array + - items: + minItems: 2 + maxItems: 2 + + arm,io-coherent: + description: indicates that the system is operating in an hardware + I/O coherent mode. Valid only when the arm,pl310-cache compatible + string is used. + type: boolean + + interrupts: + # Either a single combined interrupt or up to 9 individual interrupts + minItems: 1 + maxItems: 9 + + cache-id-part: + description: cache id part number to be used if it is not present + on hardware + $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + + wt-override: + description: If present then L2 is forced to Write through mode + type: boolean + + arm,double-linefill: + description: Override double linefill enable setting. Enable if + non-zero, disable if zero. + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + - enum: [ 0, 1 ] + + arm,double-linefill-incr: + description: Override double linefill on INCR read. Enable + if non-zero, disable if zero. + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + - enum: [ 0, 1 ] + + arm,double-linefill-wrap: + description: Override double linefill on WRAP read. Enable + if non-zero, disable if zero. + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + - enum: [ 0, 1 ] + + arm,prefetch-drop: + description: Override prefetch drop enable setting. Enable if non-zero, + disable if zero. + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + - enum: [ 0, 1 ] + + arm,prefetch-offset: + description: Override prefetch offset value. + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + - enum: [ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 15, 23, 31 ] + + arm,shared-override: + description: The default behavior of the L220 or PL310 cache + controllers with respect to the shareable attribute is to transform "normal + memory non-cacheable transactions" into "cacheable no allocate" (for reads) + or "write through no write allocate" (for writes). + On systems where this may cause DMA buffer corruption, this property must + be specified to indicate that such transforms are precluded. + type: boolean + + arm,parity-enable: + description: enable parity checking on the L2 cache (L220 or PL310). + type: boolean + + arm,parity-disable: + description: disable parity checking on the L2 cache (L220 or PL310). + type: boolean + + arm,outer-sync-disable: + description: disable the outer sync operation on the L2 cache. + Some core tiles, especially ARM PB11MPCore have a faulty L220 cache that + will randomly hang unless outer sync operations are disabled. + type: boolean + + prefetch-data: + description: | + Data prefetch. Value: <0> (forcibly disable), <1> + (forcibly enable), property absent (retain settings set by firmware) + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + - enum: [ 0, 1 ] + + prefetch-instr: + description: | + Instruction prefetch. Value: <0> (forcibly disable), + <1> (forcibly enable), property absent (retain settings set by + firmware) + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + - enum: [ 0, 1 ] + + arm,dynamic-clock-gating: + description: | + L2 dynamic clock gating. Value: <0> (forcibly + disable), <1> (forcibly enable), property absent (OS specific behavior, + preferably retain firmware settings) + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + - enum: [ 0, 1 ] + + arm,standby-mode: + description: L2 standby mode enable. Value <0> (forcibly disable), + <1> (forcibly enable), property absent (OS specific behavior, + preferably retain firmware settings) + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + - enum: [ 0, 1 ] + + arm,early-bresp-disable: + description: Disable the CA9 optimization Early BRESP (PL310) + type: boolean + + arm,full-line-zero-disable: + description: Disable the CA9 optimization Full line of zero + write (PL310) + type: boolean + +required: + - compatible + - cache-unified + - reg + +additionalProperties: false + +examples: + - | + cache-controller@fff12000 { + compatible = "arm,pl310-cache"; + reg = <0xfff12000 0x1000>; + arm,data-latency = <1 1 1>; + arm,tag-latency = <2 2 2>; + arm,filter-ranges = <0x80000000 0x8000000>; + cache-unified; + cache-level = <2>; + interrupts = <45>; + }; + +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek.txt index 8f260e5cfd16..56ac7896d6d8 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek.txt @@ -15,11 +15,12 @@ compatible: Must contain one of "mediatek,mt6795" "mediatek,mt6797" "mediatek,mt7622" - "mediatek,mt7623" which is referred to MT7623N SoC - "mediatek,mt7623a" + "mediatek,mt7623" + "mediatek,mt7629" "mediatek,mt8127" "mediatek,mt8135" "mediatek,mt8173" + "mediatek,mt8183" Supported boards: @@ -57,6 +58,9 @@ Supported boards: - Reference board variant 1 for MT7622: Required root node properties: - compatible = "mediatek,mt7622-rfb1", "mediatek,mt7622"; +- Bananapi BPI-R64 for MT7622: + Required root node properties: + - compatible = "bananapi,bpi-r64", "mediatek,mt7622"; - Reference board for MT7623a with eMMC: Required root node properties: - compatible = "mediatek,mt7623a-rfb-emmc", "mediatek,mt7623"; @@ -68,6 +72,9 @@ Supported boards: - compatible = "mediatek,mt7623n-rfb-emmc", "mediatek,mt7623"; - Bananapi BPI-R2 board: - compatible = "bananapi,bpi-r2", "mediatek,mt7623"; +- Reference board for MT7629: + Required root node properties: + - compatible = "mediatek,mt7629-rfb", "mediatek,mt7629"; - MTK mt8127 tablet moose EVB: Required root node properties: - compatible = "mediatek,mt8127-moose", "mediatek,mt8127"; @@ -77,3 +84,6 @@ Supported boards: - MTK mt8173 tablet EVB: Required root node properties: - compatible = "mediatek,mt8173-evb", "mediatek,mt8173"; +- Evaluation board for MT8183: + Required root node properties: + - compatible = "mediatek,mt8183-evb", "mediatek,mt8183"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/olimex.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/olimex.txt deleted file mode 100644 index d726aeca56be..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/olimex.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,10 +0,0 @@ -Olimex Device Tree Bindings ---------------------------- - -SAM9-L9260 Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "olimex,sam9-l9260", "atmel,at91sam9260"; - -i.MX23 Olinuxino Low Cost Board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "olimex,imx23-olinuxino", "fsl,imx23"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 13611a8199bb..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,70 +0,0 @@ -* ARM Performance Monitor Units - -ARM cores often have a PMU for counting cpu and cache events like cache misses -and hits. The interface to the PMU is part of the ARM ARM. The ARM PMU -representation in the device tree should be done as under:- - -Required properties: - -- compatible : should be one of - "apm,potenza-pmu" - "arm,armv8-pmuv3" - "arm,cortex-a73-pmu" - "arm,cortex-a72-pmu" - "arm,cortex-a57-pmu" - "arm,cortex-a53-pmu" - "arm,cortex-a35-pmu" - "arm,cortex-a17-pmu" - "arm,cortex-a15-pmu" - "arm,cortex-a12-pmu" - "arm,cortex-a9-pmu" - "arm,cortex-a8-pmu" - "arm,cortex-a7-pmu" - "arm,cortex-a5-pmu" - "arm,arm11mpcore-pmu" - "arm,arm1176-pmu" - "arm,arm1136-pmu" - "brcm,vulcan-pmu" - "cavium,thunder-pmu" - "qcom,scorpion-pmu" - "qcom,scorpion-mp-pmu" - "qcom,krait-pmu" -- interrupts : 1 combined interrupt or 1 per core. If the interrupt is a per-cpu - interrupt (PPI) then 1 interrupt should be specified. - -Optional properties: - -- interrupt-affinity : When using SPIs, specifies a list of phandles to CPU - nodes corresponding directly to the affinity of - the SPIs listed in the interrupts property. - - When using a PPI, specifies a list of phandles to CPU - nodes corresponding to the set of CPUs which have - a PMU of this type signalling the PPI listed in the - interrupts property, unless this is already specified - by the PPI interrupt specifier itself (in which case - the interrupt-affinity property shouldn't be present). - - This property should be present when there is more than - a single SPI. - - -- qcom,no-pc-write : Indicates that this PMU doesn't support the 0xc and 0xd - events. - -- secure-reg-access : Indicates that the ARMv7 Secure Debug Enable Register - (SDER) is accessible. This will cause the driver to do - any setup required that is only possible in ARMv7 secure - state. If not present the ARMv7 SDER will not be touched, - which means the PMU may fail to operate unless external - code (bootloader or security monitor) has performed the - appropriate initialisation. Note that this property is - not valid for non-ARMv7 CPUs or ARMv7 CPUs booting Linux - in Non-secure state. - -Example: - -pmu { - compatible = "arm,cortex-a9-pmu"; - interrupts = <100 101>; -}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..52ae094ce330 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/arm/pmu.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: ARM Performance Monitor Units + +maintainers: + - Mark Rutland <mark.rutland@arm.com> + - Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> + +description: |+ + ARM cores often have a PMU for counting cpu and cache events like cache misses + and hits. The interface to the PMU is part of the ARM ARM. The ARM PMU + representation in the device tree should be done as under:- + +properties: + compatible: + items: + - enum: + - apm,potenza-pmu + - arm,armv8-pmuv3 + - arm,cortex-a73-pmu + - arm,cortex-a72-pmu + - arm,cortex-a57-pmu + - arm,cortex-a53-pmu + - arm,cortex-a35-pmu + - arm,cortex-a17-pmu + - arm,cortex-a15-pmu + - arm,cortex-a12-pmu + - arm,cortex-a9-pmu + - arm,cortex-a8-pmu + - arm,cortex-a7-pmu + - arm,cortex-a5-pmu + - arm,arm11mpcore-pmu + - arm,arm1176-pmu + - arm,arm1136-pmu + - brcm,vulcan-pmu + - cavium,thunder-pmu + - qcom,scorpion-pmu + - qcom,scorpion-mp-pmu + - qcom,krait-pmu + + interrupts: + # Don't know how many CPUs, so no constraints to specify + description: 1 per-cpu interrupt (PPI) or 1 interrupt per core. + + interrupt-affinity: + $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/phandle-array + description: + When using SPIs, specifies a list of phandles to CPU + nodes corresponding directly to the affinity of + the SPIs listed in the interrupts property. + + When using a PPI, specifies a list of phandles to CPU + nodes corresponding to the set of CPUs which have + a PMU of this type signalling the PPI listed in the + interrupts property, unless this is already specified + by the PPI interrupt specifier itself (in which case + the interrupt-affinity property shouldn't be present). + + This property should be present when there is more than + a single SPI. + + qcom,no-pc-write: + type: boolean + description: + Indicates that this PMU doesn't support the 0xc and 0xd events. + + secure-reg-access: + type: boolean + description: + Indicates that the ARMv7 Secure Debug Enable Register + (SDER) is accessible. This will cause the driver to do + any setup required that is only possible in ARMv7 secure + state. If not present the ARMv7 SDER will not be touched, + which means the PMU may fail to operate unless external + code (bootloader or security monitor) has performed the + appropriate initialisation. Note that this property is + not valid for non-ARMv7 CPUs or ARMv7 CPUs booting Linux + in Non-secure state. + +required: + - compatible + +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/renesas.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/renesas.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..19f379863d50 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/renesas.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,238 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/arm/shmobile.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Renesas SH-Mobile, R-Mobile, and R-Car Platform Device Tree Bindings + +maintainers: + - Geert Uytterhoeven <geert+renesas@glider.be> + +properties: + $nodename: + const: '/' + compatible: + oneOf: + - description: Emma Mobile EV2 + items: + - enum: + - renesas,kzm9d # Kyoto Microcomputer Co. KZM-A9-Dual + - const: renesas,emev2 + + - description: RZ/A1H (R7S72100) + items: + - enum: + - renesas,genmai # Genmai (RTK772100BC00000BR) + - renesas,gr-peach # GR-Peach (X28A-M01-E/F) + - renesas,rskrza1 # RSKRZA1 (YR0K77210C000BE) + - const: renesas,r7s72100 + + - description: RZ/A2 (R7S9210) + items: + - enum: + - renesas,rza2mevb # RZ/A2M Eval Board (RTK7921053S00000BE) + - const: renesas,r7s9210 + + - description: SH-Mobile AG5 (R8A73A00/SH73A0) + items: + - enum: + - renesas,kzm9g # Kyoto Microcomputer Co. KZM-A9-GT + - const: renesas,sh73a0 + + - description: R-Mobile APE6 (R8A73A40) + items: + - enum: + - renesas,ape6evm + - const: renesas,r8a73a4 + + - description: R-Mobile A1 (R8A77400) + items: + - enum: + - renesas,armadillo800eva # Atmark Techno Armadillo-800 EVA + - const: renesas,r8a7740 + + - description: RZ/G1H (R8A77420) + items: + - const: renesas,r8a7742 + + - description: RZ/G1M (R8A77430) + items: + - enum: + # iWave Systems RZ/G1M Qseven Development Platform (iW-RainboW-G20D-Qseven) + - iwave,g20d + - const: iwave,g20m + - const: renesas,r8a7743 + + - items: + - enum: + # iWave Systems RZ/G1M Qseven System On Module (iW-RainboW-G20M-Qseven) + - iwave,g20m + - renesas,sk-rzg1m # SK-RZG1M (YR8A77430S000BE) + - const: renesas,r8a7743 + + - description: RZ/G1N (R8A77440) + items: + - enum: + # iWave Systems RZ/G1N Qseven Development Platform (iW-RainboW-G20D-Qseven) + - iwave,g20d + - const: iwave,g20m + - const: renesas,r8a7744 + + - items: + - enum: + # iWave Systems RZ/G1N Qseven System On Module (iW-RainboW-G20M-Qseven) + - iwave,g20m + - const: renesas,r8a7744 + + - description: RZ/G1E (R8A77450) + items: + - enum: + - iwave,g22m # iWave Systems RZ/G1E SODIMM System On Module (iW-RainboW-G22M-SM) + - renesas,sk-rzg1e # SK-RZG1E (YR8A77450S000BE) + - const: renesas,r8a7745 + + - description: iWave Systems RZ/G1E SODIMM SOM Development Platform (iW-RainboW-G22D) + items: + - const: iwave,g22d + - const: iwave,g22m + - const: renesas,r8a7745 + + - description: RZ/G1C (R8A77470) + items: + - enum: + - iwave,g23s #iWave Systems RZ/G1C Single Board Computer (iW-RainboW-G23S) + - const: renesas,r8a77470 + + - description: RZ/G2M (R8A774A1) + items: + - const: renesas,r8a774a1 + + - description: RZ/G2E (R8A774C0) + items: + - enum: + - si-linux,cat874 # Silicon Linux RZ/G2E 96board platform (CAT874) + - const: renesas,r8a774c0 + + - items: + - enum: + - si-linux,cat875 # Silicon Linux sub board for CAT874 (CAT875) + - const: si-linux,cat874 + - const: renesas,r8a774c0 + + - description: R-Car M1A (R8A77781) + items: + - enum: + - renesas,bockw + - const: renesas,r8a7778 + + - description: R-Car H1 (R8A77790) + items: + - enum: + - renesas,marzen # Marzen (R0P7779A00010S) + - const: renesas,r8a7779 + + - description: R-Car H2 (R8A77900) + items: + - enum: + - renesas,lager # Lager (RTP0RC7790SEB00010S) + - renesas,stout # Stout (ADAS Starterkit, Y-R-CAR-ADAS-SKH2-BOARD) + - const: renesas,r8a7790 + + - description: R-Car M2-W (R8A77910) + items: + - enum: + - renesas,henninger + - renesas,koelsch # Koelsch (RTP0RC7791SEB00010S) + - renesas,porter # Porter (M2-LCDP) + - const: renesas,r8a7791 + + - description: R-Car V2H (R8A77920) + items: + - enum: + - renesas,blanche # Blanche (RTP0RC7792SEB00010S) + - renesas,wheat # Wheat (RTP0RC7792ASKB0000JE) + - const: renesas,r8a7792 + + - description: R-Car M2-N (R8A77930) + items: + - enum: + - renesas,gose # Gose (RTP0RC7793SEB00010S) + - const: renesas,r8a7793 + + - description: R-Car E2 (R8A77940) + items: + - enum: + - renesas,alt # Alt (RTP0RC7794SEB00010S) + - renesas,silk # SILK (RTP0RC7794LCB00011S) + - const: renesas,r8a7794 + + - description: R-Car H3 (R8A77950) + items: + - enum: + # H3ULCB (R-Car Starter Kit Premier, RTP0RC7795SKBX0010SA00 (H3 ES1.1)) + # H3ULCB (R-Car Starter Kit Premier, RTP0RC77951SKBX010SA00 (H3 ES2.0)) + - renesas,h3ulcb + - renesas,salvator-x # Salvator-X (RTP0RC7795SIPB0010S) + - renesas,salvator-xs # Salvator-XS (Salvator-X 2nd version, RTP0RC7795SIPB0012S) + - const: renesas,r8a7795 + + - description: R-Car M3-W (R8A77960) + items: + - enum: + - renesas,m3ulcb # M3ULCB (R-Car Starter Kit Pro, RTP0RC7796SKBX0010SA09 (M3 ES1.0)) + - renesas,salvator-x # Salvator-X (RTP0RC7796SIPB0011S) + - renesas,salvator-xs # Salvator-XS (Salvator-X 2nd version, RTP0RC7796SIPB0012S) + - const: renesas,r8a7796 + + - description: Kingfisher (SBEV-RCAR-KF-M03) + items: + - const: shimafuji,kingfisher + - enum: + - renesas,h3ulcb + - renesas,m3ulcb + - enum: + - renesas,r8a7795 + - renesas,r8a7796 + + - description: R-Car M3-N (R8A77965) + items: + - enum: + - renesas,m3nulcb # M3NULCB (R-Car Starter Kit Pro, RTP0RC77965SKBX010SA00 (M3-N ES1.1)) + - renesas,salvator-x # Salvator-X (RTP0RC7796SIPB0011S (M3-N)) + - renesas,salvator-xs # Salvator-XS (Salvator-X 2nd version, RTP0RC77965SIPB012S) + - const: renesas,r8a77965 + + - description: R-Car V3M (R8A77970) + items: + - enum: + - renesas,eagle # Eagle (RTP0RC77970SEB0010S) + - renesas,v3msk # V3MSK (Y-ASK-RCAR-V3M-WS10) + - const: renesas,r8a77970 + + - description: R-Car V3H (R8A77980) + items: + - enum: + - renesas,condor # Condor (RTP0RC77980SEB0010SS/RTP0RC77980SEB0010SA01) + - renesas,v3hsk # V3HSK (Y-ASK-RCAR-V3H-WS10) + - const: renesas,r8a77980 + + - description: R-Car E3 (R8A77990) + items: + - enum: + - renesas,ebisu # Ebisu (RTP0RC77990SEB0010S) + - const: renesas,r8a77990 + + - description: R-Car D3 (R8A77995) + items: + - enum: + - renesas,draak # Draak (RTP0RC77995SEB0010S) + - const: renesas,r8a77995 + + - description: RZ/N1D (R9A06G032) + items: + - enum: + - renesas,rzn1d400-db # RZN1D-DB (RZ/N1D Demo Board for the RZ/N1D 400 pins package) + - const: renesas,r9a06g032 + +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/rockchip.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/rockchip.yaml index b12958bda09c..061a03edf9c8 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/rockchip.yaml +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/rockchip.yaml @@ -60,6 +60,11 @@ properties: - const: chipspark,rayeager-px2 - const: rockchip,rk3066a + - description: Elgin RV1108 R1 + items: + - const: elgin,rv1108-r1 + - const: rockchip,rv1108 + - description: Firefly Firefly-RK3288 items: - enum: @@ -87,6 +92,13 @@ properties: - const: firefly,roc-rk3399-pc - const: rockchip,rk3399 + - description: FriendlyElec NanoPi4 series boards + items: + - enum: + - friendlyarm,nanopc-t4 + - friendlyarm,nanopi-m4 + - const: rockchip,rk3399 + - description: GeekBuying GeekBox items: - const: geekbuying,geekbox @@ -317,6 +329,11 @@ properties: - const: radxa,rock - const: rockchip,rk3188 + - description: Radxa ROCK Pi 4 + items: + - const: radxa,rockpi4 + - const: rockchip,rk3399 + - description: Radxa Rock2 Square items: - const: radxa,rock2-square diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/shmobile.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/shmobile.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 7f91c2a8b54e..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/shmobile.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,155 +0,0 @@ -Renesas SH-Mobile, R-Mobile, and R-Car Platform Device Tree Bindings --------------------------------------------------------------------- - -SoCs: - - - Emma Mobile EV2 - compatible = "renesas,emev2" - - RZ/A1H (R7S72100) - compatible = "renesas,r7s72100" - - RZ/A2 (R7S9210) - compatible = "renesas,r7s9210" - - SH-Mobile AG5 (R8A73A00/SH73A0) - compatible = "renesas,sh73a0" - - R-Mobile APE6 (R8A73A40) - compatible = "renesas,r8a73a4" - - R-Mobile A1 (R8A77400) - compatible = "renesas,r8a7740" - - RZ/G1H (R8A77420) - compatible = "renesas,r8a7742" - - RZ/G1M (R8A77430) - compatible = "renesas,r8a7743" - - RZ/G1N (R8A77440) - compatible = "renesas,r8a7744" - - RZ/G1E (R8A77450) - compatible = "renesas,r8a7745" - - RZ/G1C (R8A77470) - compatible = "renesas,r8a77470" - - RZ/G2M (R8A774A1) - compatible = "renesas,r8a774a1" - - RZ/G2E (R8A774C0) - compatible = "renesas,r8a774c0" - - R-Car M1A (R8A77781) - compatible = "renesas,r8a7778" - - R-Car H1 (R8A77790) - compatible = "renesas,r8a7779" - - R-Car H2 (R8A77900) - compatible = "renesas,r8a7790" - - R-Car M2-W (R8A77910) - compatible = "renesas,r8a7791" - - R-Car V2H (R8A77920) - compatible = "renesas,r8a7792" - - R-Car M2-N (R8A77930) - compatible = "renesas,r8a7793" - - R-Car E2 (R8A77940) - compatible = "renesas,r8a7794" - - R-Car H3 (R8A77950) - compatible = "renesas,r8a7795" - - R-Car M3-W (R8A77960) - compatible = "renesas,r8a7796" - - R-Car M3-N (R8A77965) - compatible = "renesas,r8a77965" - - R-Car V3M (R8A77970) - compatible = "renesas,r8a77970" - - R-Car V3H (R8A77980) - compatible = "renesas,r8a77980" - - R-Car E3 (R8A77990) - compatible = "renesas,r8a77990" - - R-Car D3 (R8A77995) - compatible = "renesas,r8a77995" - - RZ/N1D (R9A06G032) - compatible = "renesas,r9a06g032" - -Boards: - - - Alt (RTP0RC7794SEB00010S) - compatible = "renesas,alt", "renesas,r8a7794" - - APE6-EVM - compatible = "renesas,ape6evm", "renesas,r8a73a4" - - Atmark Techno Armadillo-800 EVA - compatible = "renesas,armadillo800eva", "renesas,r8a7740" - - Blanche (RTP0RC7792SEB00010S) - compatible = "renesas,blanche", "renesas,r8a7792" - - BOCK-W - compatible = "renesas,bockw", "renesas,r8a7778" - - Condor (RTP0RC77980SEB0010SS/RTP0RC77980SEB0010SA01) - compatible = "renesas,condor", "renesas,r8a77980" - - Draak (RTP0RC77995SEB0010S) - compatible = "renesas,draak", "renesas,r8a77995" - - Eagle (RTP0RC77970SEB0010S) - compatible = "renesas,eagle", "renesas,r8a77970" - - Ebisu (RTP0RC77990SEB0010S) - compatible = "renesas,ebisu", "renesas,r8a77990" - - Genmai (RTK772100BC00000BR) - compatible = "renesas,genmai", "renesas,r7s72100" - - GR-Peach (X28A-M01-E/F) - compatible = "renesas,gr-peach", "renesas,r7s72100" - - Gose (RTP0RC7793SEB00010S) - compatible = "renesas,gose", "renesas,r8a7793" - - H3ULCB (R-Car Starter Kit Premier, RTP0RC7795SKBX0010SA00 (H3 ES1.1)) - H3ULCB (R-Car Starter Kit Premier, RTP0RC77951SKBX010SA00 (H3 ES2.0)) - compatible = "renesas,h3ulcb", "renesas,r8a7795" - - Henninger - compatible = "renesas,henninger", "renesas,r8a7791" - - iWave Systems RZ/G1C Single Board Computer (iW-RainboW-G23S) - compatible = "iwave,g23s", "renesas,r8a77470" - - iWave Systems RZ/G1E SODIMM SOM Development Platform (iW-RainboW-G22D) - compatible = "iwave,g22d", "iwave,g22m", "renesas,r8a7745" - - iWave Systems RZ/G1E SODIMM System On Module (iW-RainboW-G22M-SM) - compatible = "iwave,g22m", "renesas,r8a7745" - - iWave Systems RZ/G1M Qseven Development Platform (iW-RainboW-G20D-Qseven) - compatible = "iwave,g20d", "iwave,g20m", "renesas,r8a7743" - - iWave Systems RZ/G1M Qseven System On Module (iW-RainboW-G20M-Qseven) - compatible = "iwave,g20m", "renesas,r8a7743" - - iWave Systems RZ/G1N Qseven Development Platform (iW-RainboW-G20D-Qseven) - compatible = "iwave,g20d", "iwave,g20m", "renesas,r8a7744" - - iWave Systems RZ/G1N Qseven System On Module (iW-RainboW-G20M-Qseven) - compatible = "iwave,g20m", "renesas,r8a7744" - - Kingfisher (SBEV-RCAR-KF-M03) - compatible = "shimafuji,kingfisher" - - Koelsch (RTP0RC7791SEB00010S) - compatible = "renesas,koelsch", "renesas,r8a7791" - - Kyoto Microcomputer Co. KZM-A9-Dual - compatible = "renesas,kzm9d", "renesas,emev2" - - Kyoto Microcomputer Co. KZM-A9-GT - compatible = "renesas,kzm9g", "renesas,sh73a0" - - Lager (RTP0RC7790SEB00010S) - compatible = "renesas,lager", "renesas,r8a7790" - - M3ULCB (R-Car Starter Kit Pro, RTP0RC7796SKBX0010SA09 (M3 ES1.0)) - compatible = "renesas,m3ulcb", "renesas,r8a7796" - - M3NULCB (R-Car Starter Kit Pro, RTP0RC77965SKBX010SA00 (M3-N ES1.1)) - compatible = "renesas,m3nulcb", "renesas,r8a77965" - - Marzen (R0P7779A00010S) - compatible = "renesas,marzen", "renesas,r8a7779" - - Porter (M2-LCDP) - compatible = "renesas,porter", "renesas,r8a7791" - - RSKRZA1 (YR0K77210C000BE) - compatible = "renesas,rskrza1", "renesas,r7s72100" - - RZN1D-DB (RZ/N1D Demo Board for the RZ/N1D 400 pins package) - compatible = "renesas,rzn1d400-db", "renesas,r9a06g032" - - Salvator-X (RTP0RC7795SIPB0010S) - compatible = "renesas,salvator-x", "renesas,r8a7795" - - Salvator-X (RTP0RC7796SIPB0011S) - compatible = "renesas,salvator-x", "renesas,r8a7796" - - Salvator-X (RTP0RC7796SIPB0011S (M3-N)) - compatible = "renesas,salvator-x", "renesas,r8a77965" - - Salvator-XS (Salvator-X 2nd version, RTP0RC7795SIPB0012S) - compatible = "renesas,salvator-xs", "renesas,r8a7795" - - Salvator-XS (Salvator-X 2nd version, RTP0RC7796SIPB0012S) - compatible = "renesas,salvator-xs", "renesas,r8a7796" - - Salvator-XS (Salvator-X 2nd version, RTP0RC77965SIPB012S) - compatible = "renesas,salvator-xs", "renesas,r8a77965" - - SILK (RTP0RC7794LCB00011S) - compatible = "renesas,silk", "renesas,r8a7794" - - SK-RZG1E (YR8A77450S000BE) - compatible = "renesas,sk-rzg1e", "renesas,r8a7745" - - SK-RZG1M (YR8A77430S000BE) - compatible = "renesas,sk-rzg1m", "renesas,r8a7743" - - Stout (ADAS Starterkit, Y-R-CAR-ADAS-SKH2-BOARD) - compatible = "renesas,stout", "renesas,r8a7790" - - V3HSK (Y-ASK-RCAR-V3H-WS10) - compatible = "renesas,v3hsk", "renesas,r8a77980" - - V3MSK (Y-ASK-RCAR-V3M-WS10) - compatible = "renesas,v3msk", "renesas,r8a77970" - - Wheat (RTP0RC7792ASKB0000JE) - compatible = "renesas,wheat", "renesas,r8a7792" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/socionext/milbeaut.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/socionext/milbeaut.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..aae53fc3cb1e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/socionext/milbeaut.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/arm/milbeaut.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Milbeaut platforms device tree bindings + +maintainers: + - Taichi Sugaya <sugaya.taichi@socionext.com> + - Takao Orito <orito.takao@socionext.com> + +properties: + $nodename: + const: '/' + compatible: + oneOf: + - items: + - enum: + - socionext,milbeaut-m10v-evb + - const: socionext,sc2000a +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/technologic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/technologic.txt deleted file mode 100644 index f1cedc00dcab..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/technologic.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,23 +0,0 @@ -Technologic Systems Platforms Device Tree Bindings --------------------------------------------------- - -TS-4600 is a System-on-Module based on the Freescale i.MX28 System-on-Chip. -It can be mounted on a carrier board providing additional peripheral connectors. -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "technologic,imx28-ts4600", "fsl,imx28" - -TS-4800 board -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "technologic,imx51-ts4800", "fsl,imx51"; - -TS-4900 is a System-on-Module based on the Freescale i.MX6 System-on-Chip. -It can be mounted on a carrier board providing additional peripheral connectors. -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "technologic,imx6dl-ts4900", "fsl,imx6dl" - - compatible = "technologic,imx6q-ts4900", "fsl,imx6q" - -TS-7970 is a System-on-Module based on the Freescale i.MX6 System-on-Chip. -It can be mounted on a carrier board providing additional peripheral connectors. -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "technologic,imx6dl-ts7970", "fsl,imx6dl" - - compatible = "technologic,imx6q-ts7970", "fsl,imx6q" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra.yaml index fbcde8a7e067..60b38eb5c61a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra.yaml +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra.yaml @@ -87,9 +87,11 @@ properties: - const: nvidia,tegra124 - items: - enum: + - nvidia,darcy - nvidia,p2371-0000 - nvidia,p2371-2180 - nvidia,p2571 + - nvidia,p2894-0050-a08 - const: nvidia,tegra210 - items: - enum: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/imx-weim.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/imx-weim.txt index 683eaf3aed79..dda7d6d66479 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/imx-weim.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/imx-weim.txt @@ -47,9 +47,9 @@ Optional properties: Timing property for child nodes. It is mandatory, not optional. - fsl,weim-cs-timing: The timing array, contains timing values for the - child node. We can get the CS index from the child - node's "reg" property. The number of registers depends - on the selected chip. + child node. We get the CS indexes from the address + ranges in the child node's "reg" property. + The number of registers depends on the selected chip: For i.MX1, i.MX21 ("fsl,imx1-weim") there are two registers: CSxU, CSxL. For i.MX25, i.MX27, i.MX31 and i.MX35 ("fsl,imx27-weim") @@ -80,3 +80,29 @@ Example for an imx6q-sabreauto board, the NOR flash connected to the WEIM: 0x0000c000 0x1404a38e 0x00000000>; }; }; + +Example for an imx6q-based board, a multi-chipselect device connected to WEIM: + +In this case, both chip select 0 and 1 will be configured with the same timing +array values. + + weim: weim@21b8000 { + compatible = "fsl,imx6q-weim"; + reg = <0x021b8000 0x4000>; + clocks = <&clks 196>; + #address-cells = <2>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges = <0 0 0x08000000 0x02000000 + 1 0 0x0a000000 0x02000000 + 2 0 0x0c000000 0x02000000 + 3 0 0x0e000000 0x02000000>; + fsl,weim-cs-gpr = <&gpr>; + + acme@0 { + compatible = "acme,whatever"; + reg = <0 0 0x100>, <0 0x400000 0x800>, + <1 0x400000 0x800>; + fsl,weim-cs-timing = <0x024400b1 0x00001010 0x20081100 + 0x00000000 0xa0000240 0x00000000>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/actions,owl-cmu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/actions,owl-cmu.txt index 2ef86ae96df8..d19885b7c73f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/actions,owl-cmu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/actions,owl-cmu.txt @@ -2,13 +2,14 @@ The Actions Semi Owl Clock Management Unit generates and supplies clock to various controllers within the SoC. The clock binding described here is -applicable to S900 and S700 SoC's. +applicable to S900, S700 and S500 SoC's. Required Properties: - compatible: should be one of the following, "actions,s900-cmu" "actions,s700-cmu" + "actions,s500-cmu" - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped region. - clocks: Reference to the parent clocks ("hosc", "losc") @@ -19,8 +20,8 @@ Each clock is assigned an identifier, and client nodes can use this identifier to specify the clock which they consume. All available clocks are defined as preprocessor macros in corresponding -dt-bindings/clock/actions,s900-cmu.h or actions,s700-cmu.h header and can be -used in device tree sources. +dt-bindings/clock/actions,s900-cmu.h or actions,s700-cmu.h or +actions,s500-cmu.h header and can be used in device tree sources. External clocks: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/amlogic,gxbb-aoclkc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/amlogic,gxbb-aoclkc.txt index 79511d7bb321..c41f0be5d438 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/amlogic,gxbb-aoclkc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/amlogic,gxbb-aoclkc.txt @@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ Required Properties: - GXL (S905X, S905D) : "amlogic,meson-gxl-aoclkc" - GXM (S912) : "amlogic,meson-gxm-aoclkc" - AXG (A113D, A113X) : "amlogic,meson-axg-aoclkc" + - G12A (S905X2, S905D2, S905Y2) : "amlogic,meson-g12a-aoclkc" followed by the common "amlogic,meson-gx-aoclkc" - clocks: list of clock phandle, one for each entry clock-names. - clock-names: should contain the following: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/amlogic,gxbb-clkc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/amlogic,gxbb-clkc.txt index a6871953bf04..5c8b105be4d6 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/amlogic,gxbb-clkc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/amlogic,gxbb-clkc.txt @@ -9,6 +9,7 @@ Required Properties: "amlogic,gxbb-clkc" for GXBB SoC, "amlogic,gxl-clkc" for GXL and GXM SoC, "amlogic,axg-clkc" for AXG SoC. + "amlogic,g12a-clkc" for G12A SoC. - clocks : list of clock phandle, one for each entry clock-names. - clock-names : should contain the following: * "xtal": the platform xtal diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5433-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5433-clock.txt index 50d5897c9849..183c327a7d6b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5433-clock.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5433-clock.txt @@ -50,6 +50,8 @@ Required Properties: IPs. - "samsung,exynos5433-cmu-cam1" - clock controller compatible for CMU_CAM1 which generates clocks for Cortex-A5/MIPI_CSIS2/FIMC-LITE_C/FIMC-FD IPs. + - "samsung,exynos5433-cmu-imem" - clock controller compatible for CMU_IMEM + which generates clocks for SSS (Security SubSystem) and SlimSSS IPs. - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped region. @@ -168,6 +170,12 @@ Required Properties: - aclk_cam1_400 - aclk_cam1_552 + Input clocks for imem clock controller: + - oscclk + - aclk_imem_sssx_266 + - aclk_imem_266 + - aclk_imem_200 + Optional properties: - power-domains: a phandle to respective power domain node as described by generic PM domain bindings (see power/power_domain.txt for more @@ -469,6 +477,21 @@ Example 2: Examples of clock controller nodes are listed below. power-domains = <&pd_cam1>; }; + cmu_imem: clock-controller@11060000 { + compatible = "samsung,exynos5433-cmu-imem"; + reg = <0x11060000 0x1000>; + #clock-cells = <1>; + + clock-names = "oscclk", + "aclk_imem_sssx_266", + "aclk_imem_266", + "aclk_imem_200"; + clocks = <&xxti>, + <&cmu_top CLK_DIV_ACLK_IMEM_SSSX_266>, + <&cmu_top CLK_DIV_ACLK_IMEM_266>, + <&cmu_top CLK_DIV_ACLK_IMEM_200>; + }; + Example 3: UART controller node that consumes the clock generated by the clock controller. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-clock.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 0641a663ad69..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-clock.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,23 +0,0 @@ -Binding for simple fixed-rate clock sources. - -This binding uses the common clock binding[1]. - -[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt - -Required properties: -- compatible : shall be "fixed-clock". -- #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0. -- clock-frequency : frequency of clock in Hz. Should be a single cell. - -Optional properties: -- clock-accuracy : accuracy of clock in ppb (parts per billion). - Should be a single cell. -- clock-output-names : From common clock binding. - -Example: - clock { - compatible = "fixed-clock"; - #clock-cells = <0>; - clock-frequency = <1000000000>; - clock-accuracy = <100>; - }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-clock.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-clock.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b657ecd0ef1c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-clock.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/clock/fixed-clock.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Binding for simple fixed-rate clock sources + +maintainers: + - Michael Turquette <mturquette@baylibre.com> + - Stephen Boyd <sboyd@kernel.org> + +properties: + compatible: + const: fixed-clock + + "#clock-cells": + const: 0 + + clock-frequency: true + + clock-accuracy: + description: accuracy of clock in ppb (parts per billion). + $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + + clock-output-names: + maxItems: 1 + +required: + - compatible + - "#clock-cells" + - clock-frequency + +additionalProperties: false + +examples: + - | + clock { + compatible = "fixed-clock"; + #clock-cells = <0>; + clock-frequency = <1000000000>; + clock-accuracy = <100>; + }; +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-factor-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-factor-clock.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 189467a7188a..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-factor-clock.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ -Binding for simple fixed factor rate clock sources. - -This binding uses the common clock binding[1]. - -[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt - -Required properties: -- compatible : shall be "fixed-factor-clock". -- #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0. -- clock-div: fixed divider. -- clock-mult: fixed multiplier. -- clocks: parent clock. - -Optional properties: -- clock-output-names : From common clock binding. - -Some clocks that require special treatments are also handled by that -driver, with the compatibles: - - allwinner,sun4i-a10-pll3-2x-clk - -Example: - clock { - compatible = "fixed-factor-clock"; - clocks = <&parentclk>; - #clock-cells = <0>; - clock-div = <2>; - clock-mult = <1>; - }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-factor-clock.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-factor-clock.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b567f8092f8c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-factor-clock.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/clock/fixed-factor-clock.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Binding for simple fixed factor rate clock sources + +maintainers: + - Michael Turquette <mturquette@baylibre.com> + - Stephen Boyd <sboyd@kernel.org> + +properties: + compatible: + enum: + - allwinner,sun4i-a10-pll3-2x-clk + - fixed-factor-clock + + "#clock-cells": + const: 0 + + clocks: + maxItems: 1 + + clock-div: + description: Fixed divider + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + - minimum: 1 + + clock-mult: + description: Fixed multiplier + $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + + clock-output-names: + maxItems: 1 + +required: + - compatible + - clocks + - "#clock-cells" + - clock-div + - clock-mult + +additionalProperties: false + +examples: + - | + clock { + compatible = "fixed-factor-clock"; + clocks = <&parentclk>; + #clock-cells = <0>; + clock-div = <2>; + clock-mult = <1>; + }; +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-mmio-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-mmio-clock.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c359367fd1a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-mmio-clock.txt @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +Binding for simple memory mapped io fixed-rate clock sources. +The driver reads a clock frequency value from a single 32-bit memory mapped +I/O register and registers it as a fixed rate clock. + +It was designed for test systems, like FPGA, not for complete, finished SoCs. + +This binding uses the common clock binding[1]. + +[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt + +Required properties: +- compatible : shall be "fixed-mmio-clock". +- #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0. +- reg : Address and length of the clock value register set. + +Optional properties: +- clock-output-names : From common clock binding. + +Example: +sysclock: sysclock@fd020004 { + #clock-cells = <0>; + compatible = "fixed-mmio-clock"; + reg = <0xfd020004 0x4>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx8mm-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx8mm-clock.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8e4ab9e619a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx8mm-clock.txt @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +* Clock bindings for NXP i.MX8M Mini + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be "fsl,imx8mm-ccm" +- reg: Address and length of the register set +- #clock-cells: Should be <1> +- clocks: list of clock specifiers, must contain an entry for each required + entry in clock-names +- clock-names: should include the following entries: + - "osc_32k" + - "osc_24m" + - "clk_ext1" + - "clk_ext2" + - "clk_ext3" + - "clk_ext4" + +clk: clock-controller@30380000 { + compatible = "fsl,imx8mm-ccm"; + reg = <0x0 0x30380000 0x0 0x10000>; + #clock-cells = <1>; + clocks = <&osc_32k>, <&osc_24m>, <&clk_ext1>, <&clk_ext2>, + <&clk_ext3>, <&clk_ext4>; + clock-names = "osc_32k", "osc_24m", "clk_ext1", "clk_ext2", + "clk_ext3", "clk_ext4"; +}; + +The clock consumer should specify the desired clock by having the clock +ID in its "clocks" phandle cell. See include/dt-bindings/clock/imx8mm-clock.h +for the full list of i.MX8M Mini clock IDs. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/nvidia,tegra124-dfll.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/nvidia,tegra124-dfll.txt index dff236f524a7..958e0ad78c52 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/nvidia,tegra124-dfll.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/nvidia,tegra124-dfll.txt @@ -8,10 +8,11 @@ the fast CPU cluster. It consists of a free-running voltage controlled oscillator connected to the CPU voltage rail (VDD_CPU), and a closed loop control module that will automatically adjust the VDD_CPU voltage by communicating with an off-chip PMIC either via an I2C bus or via PWM signals. -Currently only the I2C mode is supported by these bindings. Required properties: -- compatible : should be "nvidia,tegra124-dfll" +- compatible : should be one of: + - "nvidia,tegra124-dfll": for Tegra124 + - "nvidia,tegra210-dfll": for Tegra210 - reg : Defines the following set of registers, in the order listed: - registers for the DFLL control logic. - registers for the I2C output logic. @@ -45,10 +46,31 @@ Required properties for the control loop parameters: Optional properties for the control loop parameters: - nvidia,cg-scale: Boolean value, see the field DFLL_PARAMS_CG_SCALE in the TRM. +Optional properties for mode selection: +- nvidia,pwm-to-pmic: Use PWM to control regulator rather then I2C. + Required properties for I2C mode: - nvidia,i2c-fs-rate: I2C transfer rate, if using full speed mode. -Example: +Required properties for PWM mode: +- nvidia,pwm-period-nanoseconds: period of PWM square wave in nanoseconds. +- nvidia,pwm-tristate-microvolts: Regulator voltage in micro volts when PWM + control is disabled and the PWM output is tristated. Note that this voltage is + configured in hardware, typically via a resistor divider. +- nvidia,pwm-min-microvolts: Regulator voltage in micro volts when PWM control + is enabled and PWM output is low. Hence, this is the minimum output voltage + that the regulator supports when PWM control is enabled. +- nvidia,pwm-voltage-step-microvolts: Voltage increase in micro volts + corresponding to a 1/33th increase in duty cycle. Eg the voltage for 2/33th + duty cycle would be: nvidia,pwm-min-microvolts + + nvidia,pwm-voltage-step-microvolts * 2. +- pinctrl-0: I/O pad configuration when PWM control is enabled. +- pinctrl-1: I/O pad configuration when PWM control is disabled. +- pinctrl-names: must include the following entries: + - dvfs_pwm_enable: I/O pad configuration when PWM control is enabled. + - dvfs_pwm_disable: I/O pad configuration when PWM control is disabled. + +Example for I2C: clock@70110000 { compatible = "nvidia,tegra124-dfll"; @@ -76,3 +98,58 @@ clock@70110000 { nvidia,i2c-fs-rate = <400000>; }; + +Example for PWM: + +clock@70110000 { + compatible = "nvidia,tegra124-dfll"; + reg = <0 0x70110000 0 0x100>, /* DFLL control */ + <0 0x70110000 0 0x100>, /* I2C output control */ + <0 0x70110100 0 0x100>, /* Integrated I2C controller */ + <0 0x70110200 0 0x100>; /* Look-up table RAM */ + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 62 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clocks = <&tegra_car TEGRA210_CLK_DFLL_SOC>, + <&tegra_car TEGRA210_CLK_DFLL_REF>, + <&tegra_car TEGRA124_CLK_I2C5>;; + clock-names = "soc", "ref", "i2c"; + resets = <&tegra_car TEGRA124_RST_DFLL_DVCO>; + reset-names = "dvco"; + #clock-cells = <0>; + clock-output-names = "dfllCPU_out"; + + nvidia,sample-rate = <25000>; + nvidia,droop-ctrl = <0x00000f00>; + nvidia,force-mode = <1>; + nvidia,cf = <6>; + nvidia,ci = <0>; + nvidia,cg = <2>; + + nvidia,pwm-min-microvolts = <708000>; /* 708mV */ + nvidia,pwm-period-nanoseconds = <2500>; /* 2.5us */ + nvidia,pwm-to-pmic; + nvidia,pwm-tristate-microvolts = <1000000>; + nvidia,pwm-voltage-step-microvolts = <19200>; /* 19.2mV */ + + pinctrl-names = "dvfs_pwm_enable", "dvfs_pwm_disable"; + pinctrl-0 = <&dvfs_pwm_active_state>; + pinctrl-1 = <&dvfs_pwm_inactive_state>; +}; + +/* pinmux nodes added for completeness. Binding doc can be found in: + * Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra210-pinmux.txt + */ + +pinmux: pinmux@700008d4 { + dvfs_pwm_active_state: dvfs_pwm_active { + dvfs_pwm_pbb1 { + nvidia,pins = "dvfs_pwm_pbb1"; + nvidia,tristate = <TEGRA_PIN_DISABLE>; + }; + }; + dvfs_pwm_inactive_state: dvfs_pwm_inactive { + dvfs_pwm_pbb1 { + nvidia,pins = "dvfs_pwm_pbb1"; + nvidia,tristate = <TEGRA_PIN_ENABLE>; + }; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/qcom,rpmcc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/qcom,rpmcc.txt index 87b4949e9bc8..944719bd586f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/qcom,rpmcc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/qcom,rpmcc.txt @@ -16,6 +16,7 @@ Required properties : "qcom,rpmcc-msm8974", "qcom,rpmcc" "qcom,rpmcc-apq8064", "qcom,rpmcc" "qcom,rpmcc-msm8996", "qcom,rpmcc" + "qcom,rpmcc-msm8998", "qcom,rpmcc" "qcom,rpmcc-qcs404", "qcom,rpmcc" - #clock-cells : shall contain 1 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/nvidia,tegra124-cpufreq.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/nvidia,tegra124-cpufreq.txt index b1669fbfb740..03196d5ea515 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/nvidia,tegra124-cpufreq.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/nvidia,tegra124-cpufreq.txt @@ -9,11 +9,9 @@ Required properties: See ../clocks/clock-bindings.txt for details. - clock-names: Must include the following entries: - cpu_g: Clock mux for the fast CPU cluster. - - cpu_lp: Clock mux for the low-power CPU cluster. - pll_x: Fast PLL clocksource. - pll_p: Auxiliary PLL used during fast PLL rate changes. - dfll: Fast DFLL clocksource that also automatically scales CPU voltage. -- vdd-cpu-supply: Regulator for CPU voltage Optional properties: - clock-latency: Specify the possible maximum transition latency for clock, @@ -31,13 +29,11 @@ cpus { reg = <0>; clocks = <&tegra_car TEGRA124_CLK_CCLK_G>, - <&tegra_car TEGRA124_CLK_CCLK_LP>, <&tegra_car TEGRA124_CLK_PLL_X>, <&tegra_car TEGRA124_CLK_PLL_P>, <&dfll>; - clock-names = "cpu_g", "cpu_lp", "pll_x", "pll_p", "dfll"; + clock-names = "cpu_g", "pll_x", "pll_p", "dfll"; clock-latency = <300000>; - vdd-cpu-supply: <&vdd_cpu>; }; <...> diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/samsung-slimsss.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/samsung-slimsss.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7ec9a5a7727a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/samsung-slimsss.txt @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +Samsung SoC SlimSSS (Slim Security SubSystem) module + +The SlimSSS module in Exynos5433 SoC supports the following: +-- Feeder (FeedCtrl) +-- Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) with ECB,CBC,CTR,XTS and (CBC/XTS)/CTS +-- SHA-1/SHA-256 and (SHA-1/SHA-256)/HMAC + +Required properties: + +- compatible : Should contain entry for slimSSS version: + - "samsung,exynos5433-slim-sss" for Exynos5433 SoC. +- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the module +- interrupts : interrupt specifiers of SlimSSS module interrupts (one feed + control interrupt). + +- clocks : list of clock phandle and specifier pairs for all clocks listed in + clock-names property. +- clock-names : list of device clock input names; should contain "pclk" and + "aclk" for slim-sss in Exynos5433. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/amlogic,simple-framebuffer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/amlogic,simple-framebuffer.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..aaa6c24c8e70 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/amlogic,simple-framebuffer.txt @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +Meson specific Simple Framebuffer bindings + +This binding documents meson specific extensions to the simple-framebuffer +bindings. The meson simplefb u-boot code relies on the devicetree containing +pre-populated simplefb nodes. + +These extensions are intended so that u-boot can select the right node based +on which pipeline is being used. As such they are solely intended for +firmware / bootloader use, and the OS should ignore them. + +Required properties: +- compatible: "amlogic,simple-framebuffer", "simple-framebuffer" +- amlogic,pipeline, one of: + "vpu-cvbs" + "vpu-hdmi" + +Example: + +chosen { + #address-cells = <2>; + #size-cells = <2>; + ranges; + + simplefb_hdmi: framebuffer-hdmi { + compatible = "amlogic,simple-framebuffer", + "simple-framebuffer"; + amlogic,pipeline = "vpu-hdmi"; + clocks = <&clkc CLKID_HDMI_PCLK>, + <&clkc CLKID_CLK81>, + <&clkc CLKID_GCLK_VENCI_INT0>; + power-domains = <&pwrc_vpu>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/arm,komeda.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/arm,komeda.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..02b226532ebd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/arm,komeda.txt @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ +Device Tree bindings for Arm Komeda display driver + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be "arm,mali-d71" +- reg: Physical base address and length of the registers in the system +- interrupts: the interrupt line number of the device in the system +- clocks: A list of phandle + clock-specifier pairs, one for each entry + in 'clock-names' +- clock-names: A list of clock names. It should contain: + - "mclk": for the main processor clock + - "pclk": for the APB interface clock +- #address-cells: Must be 1 +- #size-cells: Must be 0 + +Required properties for sub-node: pipeline@nq +Each device contains one or two pipeline sub-nodes (at least one), each +pipeline node should provide properties: +- reg: Zero-indexed identifier for the pipeline +- clocks: A list of phandle + clock-specifier pairs, one for each entry + in 'clock-names' +- clock-names: should contain: + - "pxclk": pixel clock + - "aclk": AXI interface clock + +- port: each pipeline connect to an encoder input port. The connection is + modeled using the OF graph bindings specified in + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/graph.txt + +Optional properties: + - memory-region: phandle to a node describing memory (see + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reserved-memory/reserved-memory.txt) + to be used for the framebuffer; if not present, the framebuffer may + be located anywhere in memory. + +Example: +/ { + ... + + dp0: display@c00000 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + compatible = "arm,mali-d71"; + reg = <0xc00000 0x20000>; + interrupts = <0 168 4>; + clocks = <&dpu_mclk>, <&dpu_aclk>; + clock-names = "mclk", "pclk"; + + dp0_pipe0: pipeline@0 { + clocks = <&fpgaosc2>, <&dpu_aclk>; + clock-names = "pxclk", "aclk"; + reg = <0>; + + port { + dp0_pipe0_out: endpoint { + remote-endpoint = <&db_dvi0_in>; + }; + }; + }; + + dp0_pipe1: pipeline@1 { + clocks = <&fpgaosc2>, <&dpu_aclk>; + clock-names = "pxclk", "aclk"; + reg = <1>; + + port { + dp0_pipe1_out: endpoint { + remote-endpoint = <&db_dvi1_in>; + }; + }; + }; + }; + ... +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/cdns,dsi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/cdns,dsi.txt index f5725bb6c61c..525a4bfd8634 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/cdns,dsi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/cdns,dsi.txt @@ -31,28 +31,7 @@ Required subnodes: - one subnode per DSI device connected on the DSI bus. Each DSI device should contain a reg property encoding its virtual channel. -Cadence DPHY -============ - -Cadence DPHY block. - -Required properties: -- compatible: should be set to "cdns,dphy". -- reg: physical base address and length of the DPHY registers. -- clocks: DPHY reference clocks. -- clock-names: must contain "psm" and "pll_ref". -- #phy-cells: must be set to 0. - - Example: - dphy0: dphy@fd0e0000{ - compatible = "cdns,dphy"; - reg = <0x0 0xfd0e0000 0x0 0x1000>; - clocks = <&psm_clk>, <&pll_ref_clk>; - clock-names = "psm", "pll_ref"; - #phy-cells = <0>; - }; - dsi0: dsi@fd0c0000 { compatible = "cdns,dsi"; reg = <0x0 0xfd0c0000 0x0 0x1000>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/lvds-transmitter.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/lvds-transmitter.txt index 50220190c203..60091db5dfa5 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/lvds-transmitter.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/lvds-transmitter.txt @@ -22,13 +22,11 @@ among others. Required properties: -- compatible: Must be one or more of the following - - "ti,ds90c185" for the TI DS90C185 FPD-Link Serializer - - "lvds-encoder" for a generic LVDS encoder device +- compatible: Must be "lvds-encoder" - When compatible with the generic version, nodes must list the - device-specific version corresponding to the device first - followed by the generic version. + Any encoder compatible with this generic binding, but with additional + properties not listed here, must list a device specific compatible first + followed by this generic compatible. Required nodes: @@ -44,8 +42,6 @@ Example lvds-encoder { compatible = "lvds-encoder"; - #address-cells = <1>; - #size-cells = <0>; ports { #address-cells = <1>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/renesas,lvds.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/renesas,lvds.txt index ba5469dd09f3..900a884ad9f5 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/renesas,lvds.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/renesas,lvds.txt @@ -8,6 +8,8 @@ Required properties: - compatible : Shall contain one of - "renesas,r8a7743-lvds" for R8A7743 (RZ/G1M) compatible LVDS encoders + - "renesas,r8a7744-lvds" for R8A7744 (RZ/G1N) compatible LVDS encoders + - "renesas,r8a774c0-lvds" for R8A774C0 (RZ/G2E) compatible LVDS encoders - "renesas,r8a7790-lvds" for R8A7790 (R-Car H2) compatible LVDS encoders - "renesas,r8a7791-lvds" for R8A7791 (R-Car M2-W) compatible LVDS encoders - "renesas,r8a7793-lvds" for R8A7793 (R-Car M2-N) compatible LVDS encoders @@ -25,7 +27,7 @@ Required properties: - clock-names: Name of the clocks. This property is model-dependent. - The functional clock, which mandatory for all models, shall be listed first, and shall be named "fck". - - On R8A77990 and R8A77995, the LVDS encoder can use the EXTAL or + - On R8A77990, R8A77995 and R8A774C0, the LVDS encoder can use the EXTAL or DU_DOTCLKINx clocks. Those clocks are optional. When supplied they must be named "extal" and "dclkin.x" respectively, with "x" being the DU_DOTCLKIN numerical index. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/thine,thc63lvdm83d.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/thine,thc63lvdm83d.txt index 527e236e9a2a..fee3c88e1a17 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/thine,thc63lvdm83d.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/thine,thc63lvdm83d.txt @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: -- pwdn-gpios: Power down control GPIO +- powerdown-gpios: Power down control GPIO (the /PWDN pin, active low). Required nodes: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/ti,ds90c185.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/ti,ds90c185.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e575f996959a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/ti,ds90c185.txt @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +Texas Instruments FPD-Link (LVDS) Serializer +-------------------------------------------- + +The DS90C185 and DS90C187 are low-power serializers for portable +battery-powered applications that reduces the size of the RGB +interface between the host GPU and the display. + +Required properties: + +- compatible: Should be + "ti,ds90c185", "lvds-encoder" for the TI DS90C185 FPD-Link Serializer + "ti,ds90c187", "lvds-encoder" for the TI DS90C187 FPD-Link Serializer + +Optional properties: + +- powerdown-gpios: Power down control GPIO (the PDB pin, active-low) + +Required nodes: + +The devices have two video ports. Their connections are modeled using the OF +graph bindings specified in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/graph.txt. + +- Video port 0 for parallel input +- Video port 1 for LVDS output + + +Example +------- + +lvds-encoder { + compatible = "ti,ds90c185", "lvds-encoder"; + + powerdown-gpios = <&gpio 17 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + + ports { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + port@0 { + reg = <0>; + + lvds_enc_in: endpoint { + remote-endpoint = <&lcdc_out_rgb>; + }; + }; + + port@1 { + reg = <1>; + + lvds_enc_out: endpoint { + remote-endpoint = <&lvds_panel_in>; + }; + }; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/gmu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/gmu.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..3439b38e60f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/gmu.txt @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ +Qualcomm adreno/snapdragon GMU (Graphics management unit) + +The GMU is a programmable power controller for the GPU. the CPU controls the +GMU which in turn handles power controls for the GPU. + +Required properties: +- compatible: "qcom,adreno-gmu-XYZ.W", "qcom,adreno-gmu" + for example: "qcom,adreno-gmu-630.2", "qcom,adreno-gmu" + Note that you need to list the less specific "qcom,adreno-gmu" + for generic matches and the more specific identifier to identify + the specific device. +- reg: Physical base address and length of the GMU registers. +- reg-names: Matching names for the register regions + * "gmu" + * "gmu_pdc" + * "gmu_pdc_seg" +- interrupts: The interrupt signals from the GMU. +- interrupt-names: Matching names for the interrupts + * "hfi" + * "gmu" +- clocks: phandles to the device clocks +- clock-names: Matching names for the clocks + * "gmu" + * "cxo" + * "axi" + * "mnoc" +- power-domains: should be <&clock_gpucc GPU_CX_GDSC> +- iommus: phandle to the adreno iommu +- operating-points-v2: phandle to the OPP operating points + +Example: + +/ { + ... + + gmu: gmu@506a000 { + compatible="qcom,adreno-gmu-630.2", "qcom,adreno-gmu"; + + reg = <0x506a000 0x30000>, + <0xb280000 0x10000>, + <0xb480000 0x10000>; + reg-names = "gmu", "gmu_pdc", "gmu_pdc_seq"; + + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 304 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 305 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + interrupt-names = "hfi", "gmu"; + + clocks = <&gpucc GPU_CC_CX_GMU_CLK>, + <&gpucc GPU_CC_CXO_CLK>, + <&gcc GCC_DDRSS_GPU_AXI_CLK>, + <&gcc GCC_GPU_MEMNOC_GFX_CLK>; + clock-names = "gmu", "cxo", "axi", "memnoc"; + + power-domains = <&gpucc GPU_CX_GDSC>; + iommus = <&adreno_smmu 5>; + + operating-points-v2 = <&gmu_opp_table>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/gpu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/gpu.txt index ac8df3b871f9..aad1aef682f7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/gpu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/gpu.txt @@ -10,14 +10,23 @@ Required properties: If "amd,imageon" is used, there should be no top level msm device. - reg: Physical base address and length of the controller's registers. - interrupts: The interrupt signal from the gpu. -- clocks: device clocks +- clocks: device clocks (if applicable) See ../clocks/clock-bindings.txt for details. -- clock-names: the following clocks are required: +- clock-names: the following clocks are required by a3xx, a4xx and a5xx + cores: * "core" * "iface" * "mem_iface" + For GMU attached devices the GPU clocks are not used and are not required. The + following devices should not list clocks: + - qcom,adreno-630.2 +- iommus: optional phandle to an adreno iommu instance +- operating-points-v2: optional phandle to the OPP operating points +- qcom,gmu: For GMU attached devices a phandle to the GMU device that will + control the power for the GPU. Applicable targets: + - qcom,adreno-630.2 -Example: +Example 3xx/4xx/a5xx: / { ... @@ -27,7 +36,6 @@ Example: reg = <0x04300000 0x20000>; reg-names = "kgsl_3d0_reg_memory"; interrupts = <GIC_SPI 80 0>; - interrupt-names = "kgsl_3d0_irq"; clock-names = "core", "iface", @@ -38,3 +46,30 @@ Example: <&mmcc MMSS_IMEM_AHB_CLK>; }; }; + +Example a6xx (with GMU): + +/ { + ... + + gpu@5000000 { + compatible = "qcom,adreno-630.2", "qcom,adreno"; + #stream-id-cells = <16>; + + reg = <0x5000000 0x40000>, <0x509e000 0x10>; + reg-names = "kgsl_3d0_reg_memory", "cx_mem"; + + /* + * Look ma, no clocks! The GPU clocks and power are + * controlled entirely by the GMU + */ + + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 300 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + + iommus = <&adreno_smmu 0>; + + operating-points-v2 = <&gpu_opp_table>; + + qcom,gmu = <&gmu>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/auo,g101evn010 b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/auo,g101evn010.txt index bc6a0c858e23..bc6a0c858e23 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/auo,g101evn010 +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/auo,g101evn010.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/innolux,ee101ia-01d.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/innolux,ee101ia-01d.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e5ca4ccd55ed --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/innolux,ee101ia-01d.txt @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ +Innolux Corporation 10.1" EE101IA-01D WXGA (1280x800) LVDS panel + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be "innolux,ee101ia-01d" + +This binding is compatible with the lvds-panel binding, which is specified +in panel-lvds.txt in this directory. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/lemaker,bl035-rgb-002.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/lemaker,bl035-rgb-002.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..74ee7ea6b493 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/lemaker,bl035-rgb-002.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +LeMaker BL035-RGB-002 3.5" QVGA TFT LCD panel + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be "lemaker,bl035-rgb-002" +- power-supply: as specified in the base binding + +Optional properties: +- backlight: as specified in the base binding +- enable-gpios: as specified in the base binding + +This binding is compatible with the simple-panel binding, which is specified +in simple-panel.txt in this directory. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/pda,91-00156-a0.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/pda,91-00156-a0.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1639fb17a9f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/pda,91-00156-a0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +PDA 91-00156-A0 5.0" WVGA TFT LCD panel + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be "pda,91-00156-a0" +- power-supply: this panel requires a single power supply. A phandle to a +regulator needs to be specified here. Compatible with panel-common binding which +is specified in the panel-common.txt in this directory. +- backlight: this panel's backlight is controlled by an external backlight +controller. A phandle to this controller needs to be specified here. +Compatible with panel-common binding which is specified in the panel-common.txt +in this directory. + +This binding is compatible with the simple-panel binding, which is specified +in simple-panel.txt in this directory. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/sitronix,st7701.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/sitronix,st7701.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ccd17597f1f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/sitronix,st7701.txt @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +Sitronix ST7701 based LCD panels + +ST7701 designed for small and medium sizes of TFT LCD display, is +capable of supporting up to 480RGBX864 in resolution. It provides +several system interfaces like MIPI/RGB/SPI. + +Techstar TS8550B is 480x854, 2-lane MIPI DSI LCD panel which has +inbuilt ST7701 chip. + +Required properties: +- compatible: must be "sitronix,st7701" and one of + * "techstar,ts8550b" +- reset-gpios: a GPIO phandle for the reset pin + +Required properties for techstar,ts8550b: +- reg: DSI virtual channel used by that screen +- VCC-supply: analog regulator for MIPI circuit +- IOVCC-supply: I/O system regulator + +Optional properties: +- backlight: phandle for the backlight control. + +panel@0 { + compatible = "techstar,ts8550b", "sitronix,st7701"; + reg = <0>; + VCC-supply = <®_dldo2>; + IOVCC-supply = <®_dldo2>; + reset-gpios = <&pio 3 24 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; /* LCD-RST: PD24 */ + backlight = <&backlight>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/renesas,du.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/renesas,du.txt index 3c855d9f2719..aedb22b4d161 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/renesas,du.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/renesas,du.txt @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ Required Properties: - "renesas,du-r8a7744" for R8A7744 (RZ/G1N) compatible DU - "renesas,du-r8a7745" for R8A7745 (RZ/G1E) compatible DU - "renesas,du-r8a77470" for R8A77470 (RZ/G1C) compatible DU + - "renesas,du-r8a774c0" for R8A774C0 (RZ/G2E) compatible DU - "renesas,du-r8a7779" for R8A7779 (R-Car H1) compatible DU - "renesas,du-r8a7790" for R8A7790 (R-Car H2) compatible DU - "renesas,du-r8a7791" for R8A7791 (R-Car M2-W) compatible DU @@ -57,6 +58,7 @@ corresponding to each DU output. R8A7744 (RZ/G1N) DPAD 0 LVDS 0 - - R8A7745 (RZ/G1E) DPAD 0 DPAD 1 - - R8A77470 (RZ/G1C) DPAD 0 DPAD 1 LVDS 0 - + R8A774C0 (RZ/G2E) DPAD 0 LVDS 0 LVDS 1 - R8A7779 (R-Car H1) DPAD 0 DPAD 1 - - R8A7790 (R-Car H2) DPAD 0 LVDS 0 LVDS 1 - R8A7791 (R-Car M2-W) DPAD 0 LVDS 0 - - diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/rockchip/rockchip-vop.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/rockchip/rockchip-vop.txt index b79e5769f0ae..4f58c5a2d195 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/rockchip/rockchip-vop.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/rockchip/rockchip-vop.txt @@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ Required properties: "rockchip,rk3126-vop"; "rockchip,px30-vop-lit"; "rockchip,px30-vop-big"; + "rockchip,rk3066-vop"; "rockchip,rk3188-vop"; "rockchip,rk3288-vop"; "rockchip,rk3368-vop"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/sitronix,st7735r.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/sitronix,st7735r.txt index f0a5090a3326..cd5c7186890a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/sitronix,st7735r.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/sitronix,st7735r.txt @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ Example: backlight: backlight { compatible = "gpio-backlight"; gpios = <&gpio 44 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; - } + }; ... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/ssd1307fb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/ssd1307fb.txt index 209d931ef16c..b67f8caa212c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/ssd1307fb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/ssd1307fb.txt @@ -36,7 +36,6 @@ ssd1307: oled@3c { reg = <0x3c>; pwms = <&pwm 4 3000>; reset-gpios = <&gpio2 7>; - reset-active-low; }; ssd1306: oled@3c { @@ -44,7 +43,6 @@ ssd1306: oled@3c { reg = <0x3c>; pwms = <&pwm 4 3000>; reset-gpios = <&gpio2 7>; - reset-active-low; solomon,com-lrremap; solomon,com-invdir; solomon,com-offset = <32>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/sunxi/sun4i-drm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/sunxi/sun4i-drm.txt index f426bdb42f18..31ab72cba3d4 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/sunxi/sun4i-drm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/sunxi/sun4i-drm.txt @@ -156,6 +156,7 @@ Required properties: * allwinner,sun6i-a31-tcon * allwinner,sun6i-a31s-tcon * allwinner,sun7i-a20-tcon + * allwinner,sun8i-a23-tcon * allwinner,sun8i-a33-tcon * allwinner,sun8i-a83t-tcon-lcd * allwinner,sun8i-a83t-tcon-tv @@ -276,6 +277,7 @@ Required properties: - compatible: value must be one of: * allwinner,sun6i-a31-drc * allwinner,sun6i-a31s-drc + * allwinner,sun8i-a23-drc * allwinner,sun8i-a33-drc * allwinner,sun9i-a80-drc - reg: base address and size of the memory-mapped region. @@ -303,6 +305,7 @@ Required properties: * allwinner,sun5i-a13-display-backend * allwinner,sun6i-a31-display-backend * allwinner,sun7i-a20-display-backend + * allwinner,sun8i-a23-display-backend * allwinner,sun8i-a33-display-backend * allwinner,sun9i-a80-display-backend - reg: base address and size of the memory-mapped region. @@ -360,6 +363,7 @@ Required properties: * allwinner,sun5i-a13-display-frontend * allwinner,sun6i-a31-display-frontend * allwinner,sun7i-a20-display-frontend + * allwinner,sun8i-a23-display-frontend * allwinner,sun8i-a33-display-frontend * allwinner,sun9i-a80-display-frontend - reg: base address and size of the memory-mapped region. @@ -419,6 +423,7 @@ Required properties: * allwinner,sun6i-a31-display-engine * allwinner,sun6i-a31s-display-engine * allwinner,sun7i-a20-display-engine + * allwinner,sun8i-a23-display-engine * allwinner,sun8i-a33-display-engine * allwinner,sun8i-a83t-display-engine * allwinner,sun8i-h3-display-engine diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/tegra/nvidia,tegra20-host1x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/tegra/nvidia,tegra20-host1x.txt index 593be44a53c9..9999255ac5b6 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/tegra/nvidia,tegra20-host1x.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/tegra/nvidia,tegra20-host1x.txt @@ -238,6 +238,9 @@ of the following host1x client modules: - nvidia,hpd-gpio: specifies a GPIO used for hotplug detection - nvidia,edid: supplies a binary EDID blob - nvidia,panel: phandle of a display panel + - nvidia,xbar-cfg: 5 cells containing the crossbar configuration. Each lane + of the SOR, identified by the cell's index, is mapped via the crossbar to + the pad specified by the cell's value. Optional properties when driving an eDP output: - nvidia,dpaux: phandle to a DispayPort AUX interface diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt index 6312fb00ce8d..eeb4e4d1771e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt @@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ Optional properties: - dma-channels: Number of DMA channels supported by the controller. - dma-requests: Number of DMA request signals supported by the controller. +- dma-channel-mask: Bitmask of available DMA channels in ascending order + that are not reserved by firmware and are available to + the kernel. i.e. first channel corresponds to LSB. Example: @@ -29,6 +32,7 @@ Example: #dma-cells = <1>; dma-channels = <32>; dma-requests = <127>; + dma-channel-mask = <0xfffe> }; * DMA router diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-qdma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-qdma.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6a0ff9059e72 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-qdma.txt @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +NXP Layerscape SoC qDMA Controller +================================== + +This device follows the generic DMA bindings defined in dma/dma.txt. + +Required properties: + +- compatible: Must be one of + "fsl,ls1021a-qdma": for LS1021A Board + "fsl,ls1043a-qdma": for ls1043A Board + "fsl,ls1046a-qdma": for ls1046A Board +- reg: Should contain the register's base address and length. +- interrupts: Should contain a reference to the interrupt used by this + device. +- interrupt-names: Should contain interrupt names: + "qdma-queue0": the block0 interrupt + "qdma-queue1": the block1 interrupt + "qdma-queue2": the block2 interrupt + "qdma-queue3": the block3 interrupt + "qdma-error": the error interrupt +- fsl,dma-queues: Should contain number of queues supported. +- dma-channels: Number of DMA channels supported +- block-number: the virtual block number +- block-offset: the offset of different virtual block +- status-sizes: status queue size of per virtual block +- queue-sizes: command queue size of per virtual block, the size number + based on queues + +Optional properties: + +- dma-channels: Number of DMA channels supported by the controller. +- big-endian: If present registers and hardware scatter/gather descriptors + of the qDMA are implemented in big endian mode, otherwise in little + mode. + +Examples: + + qdma: dma-controller@8390000 { + compatible = "fsl,ls1021a-qdma"; + reg = <0x0 0x8388000 0x0 0x1000>, /* Controller regs */ + <0x0 0x8389000 0x0 0x1000>, /* Status regs */ + <0x0 0x838a000 0x0 0x2000>; /* Block regs */ + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 185 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 76 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 77 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + interrupt-names = "qdma-error", + "qdma-queue0", "qdma-queue1"; + dma-channels = <8>; + block-number = <2>; + block-offset = <0x1000>; + fsl,dma-queues = <2>; + status-sizes = <64>; + queue-sizes = <64 64>; + big-endian; + }; + +DMA clients must use the format described in dma/dma.txt file. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/k3dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/k3dma.txt index 4945aeac4dc4..10a2f15b08a3 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/k3dma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/k3dma.txt @@ -3,7 +3,9 @@ See dma.txt first Required properties: -- compatible: Should be "hisilicon,k3-dma-1.0" +- compatible: Must be one of +- "hisilicon,k3-dma-1.0" +- "hisilicon,hisi-pcm-asp-dma-1.0" - reg: Should contain DMA registers location and length. - interrupts: Should contain one interrupt shared by all channel - #dma-cells: see dma.txt, should be 1, para number diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/snps-dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/snps-dma.txt index db757df7057d..0bedceed1963 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/snps-dma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/snps-dma.txt @@ -23,8 +23,6 @@ Deprecated properties: Optional properties: -- is_private: The device channels should be marked as private and not for by the - general purpose DMA channel allocator. False if not passed. - multi-block: Multi block transfers supported by hardware. Array property with one cell per channel. 0: not supported, 1 (default): supported. - snps,dma-protection-control: AHB HPROT[3:1] protection setting. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/sprd-dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/sprd-dma.txt index 7a10fea2e51b..adccea9941f1 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/sprd-dma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/sprd-dma.txt @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ DMA clients connected to the Spreadtrum DMA controller must use the format described in the dma.txt file, using a two-cell specifier for each channel. The two cells in order are: 1. A phandle pointing to the DMA controller. -2. The channel id. +2. The slave id. spi0: spi@70a00000{ ... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/xilinx/xilinx_dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/xilinx/xilinx_dma.txt index 174af2c45e77..93b6d961dd4f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/xilinx/xilinx_dma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/xilinx/xilinx_dma.txt @@ -37,10 +37,11 @@ Required properties: Required properties for VDMA: - xlnx,num-fstores: Should be the number of framebuffers as configured in h/w. -Optional properties: -- xlnx,include-sg: Tells configured for Scatter-mode in - the hardware. Optional properties for AXI DMA: +- xlnx,sg-length-width: Should be set to the width in bits of the length + register as configured in h/w. Takes values {8...26}. If the property + is missing or invalid then the default value 23 is used. This is the + maximum value that is supported by all IP versions. - xlnx,mcdma: Tells whether configured for multi-channel mode in the hardware. Optional properties for VDMA: - xlnx,flush-fsync: Tells which channel to Flush on Frame sync. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/edac/aspeed-sdram-edac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/edac/aspeed-sdram-edac.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6a0f3d90d682 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/edac/aspeed-sdram-edac.txt @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +Aspeed AST2500 SoC EDAC node + +The Aspeed AST2500 SoC supports DDR3 and DDR4 memory with and without ECC (error +correction check). + +The memory controller supports SECDED (single bit error correction, double bit +error detection) and single bit error auto scrubbing by reserving 8 bits for +every 64 bit word (effectively reducing available memory to 8/9). + +Note, the bootloader must configure ECC mode in the memory controller. + + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be "aspeed,ast2500-sdram-edac" +- reg: sdram controller register set should be <0x1e6e0000 0x174> +- interrupts: should be AVIC interrupt #0 + + +Example: + + edac: sdram@1e6e0000 { + compatible = "aspeed,ast2500-sdram-edac"; + reg = <0x1e6e0000 0x174>; + interrupts = <0>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/eeprom/at24.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/eeprom/at24.txt index f9a7c984274c..0e456bbc1213 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/eeprom/at24.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/eeprom/at24.txt @@ -75,6 +75,8 @@ Optional properties: - address-width: number of address bits (one of 8, 16). + - num-addresses: total number of i2c slave addresses this device takes + Example: eeprom@52 { @@ -82,4 +84,5 @@ eeprom@52 { reg = <0x52>; pagesize = <32>; wp-gpios = <&gpio1 3 0>; + num-addresses = <8>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/extcon/extcon-ptn5150.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/extcon/extcon-ptn5150.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..936fbdf12815 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/extcon/extcon-ptn5150.txt @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +* PTN5150 CC (Configuration Channel) Logic device + +PTN5150 is a small thin low power CC logic chip supporting the USB Type-C +connector application with CC control logic detection and indication functions. +It is interfaced to the host controller using an I2C interface. + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be "nxp,ptn5150" +- reg: specifies the I2C slave address of the device +- int-gpio: should contain a phandle and GPIO specifier for the GPIO pin + connected to the PTN5150's INTB pin. +- vbus-gpio: should contain a phandle and GPIO specifier for the GPIO pin which + is used to control VBUS. +- pinctrl-names : a pinctrl state named "default" must be defined. +- pinctrl-0 : phandle referencing pin configuration of interrupt and vbus + control. + +Example: + ptn5150@1d { + compatible = "nxp,ptn5150"; + reg = <0x1d>; + int-gpio = <&msmgpio 78 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + vbus-gpio = <&msmgpio 148 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&ptn5150_default>; + status = "okay"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/firmware/nvidia,tegra186-bpmp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/firmware/nvidia,tegra186-bpmp.txt index 0c10802c8327..ff380dadb5f9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/firmware/nvidia,tegra186-bpmp.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/firmware/nvidia,tegra186-bpmp.txt @@ -8,7 +8,6 @@ which can create the interprocessor communication (IPC) between the CPU and BPMP. Required properties: -- name : Should be bpmp - compatible Array of strings One of: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/firmware/nvidia,tegra210-bpmp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/firmware/nvidia,tegra210-bpmp.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..68d814e8c09d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/firmware/nvidia,tegra210-bpmp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +NVIDIA Tegra210 Boot and Power Management Processor (BPMP) + +The Boot and Power Management Processor (BPMP) is a co-processor found +in Tegra210 SoC. It is designed to handle the early stages of the boot +process as well as to assisting in entering deep low power state +(suspend to ram), and also offloading DRAM memory clock scaling on +some platforms. The binding document defines the resources that would +be used by the BPMP T210 firmware driver, which can create the +interprocessor communication (IPC) between the CPU and BPMP. + +Required properties: +- compatible + Array of strings + One of: + - "nvidia,tegra210-bpmp" +- reg: physical base address and length for HW synchornization primitives + 1) base address and length to Tegra 'atomics' hardware + 2) base address and length to Tegra 'semaphore' hardware +- interrupts: specifies the interrupt number for receiving messages ("rx") + and for triggering messages ("tx") + +Optional properties: +- #clock-cells : Should be 1 for platforms where DRAM clock control is + offloaded to bpmp. + +Example: + +bpmp@70016000 { + compatible = "nvidia,tegra210-bpmp"; + reg = <0x0 0x70016000 0x0 0x2000 + 0x0 0x60001000 0x0 0x1000>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 6 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>, + <GIC_SPI 4 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>; + interrupt-names = "tx", "rx"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/gnss.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/gnss.txt index f1e4a2ff47c5..f547bd4549fe 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/gnss.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/gnss.txt @@ -17,6 +17,7 @@ Required properties: represents Optional properties: +- lna-supply : Separate supply for an LNA - enable-gpios : GPIO used to enable the device - timepulse-gpios : Time pulse GPIO diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/mediatek.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/mediatek.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..80cb802813c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/mediatek.txt @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +Mediatek-based GNSS Receiver DT binding + +Mediatek chipsets are used in GNSS-receiver modules produced by several +vendors and can use a UART interface. + +Please see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/gnss.txt for generic +properties. + +Required properties: + +- compatible : Must be + + "globaltop,pa6h" + +- vcc-supply : Main voltage regulator (pin name: VCC) + +Optional properties: + +- current-speed : Default UART baud rate +- gnss-fix-gpios : GPIO used to determine device position fix state + (pin name: FIX, 3D_FIX) +- reset-gpios : GPIO used to reset the device (pin name: RESET, NRESET) +- timepulse-gpios : Time pulse GPIO (pin name: PPS1, 1PPS) +- vbackup-supply : Backup voltage regulator (pin name: VBAT, VBACKUP) + +Example: + +serial@1234 { + compatible = "ns16550a"; + + gnss { + compatible = "globaltop,pa6h"; + vcc-supply = <&vcc_3v3>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/sirfstar.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/sirfstar.txt index 648d183cdb77..f4252b6b660b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/sirfstar.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/sirfstar.txt @@ -12,6 +12,7 @@ Required properties: "fastrax,uc430" "linx,r4" + "wi2wi,w2sg0004" "wi2wi,w2sg0008i" "wi2wi,w2sg0084i" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gateworks,pld-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gateworks,pld-gpio.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6e81f8b755c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gateworks,pld-gpio.txt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +Gateworks PLD GPIO controller bindings + +The GPIO controller should be a child node on an I2C bus, +see: i2c/i2c.txt for details. + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be "gateworks,pld-gpio" +- reg: I2C slave address +- gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a GPIO controller. +- #gpio-cells: Should be <2>. The first cell is the gpio number and + the second cell is used to specify optional parameters. + +Example: + +pld@56 { + compatible = "gateworks,pld-gpio"; + reg = <0x56>; + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-eic-sprd.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-eic-sprd.txt index 93d98d09d92b..54040a2bfe3a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-eic-sprd.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-eic-sprd.txt @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ Required properties: "sprd,sc9860-eic-latch", "sprd,sc9860-eic-async", "sprd,sc9860-eic-sync", - "sprd,sc27xx-eic". + "sprd,sc2731-eic". - reg: Define the base and range of the I/O address space containing the GPIO controller registers. - gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a GPIO controller. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Example: }; pmic_eic: gpio@300 { - compatible = "sprd,sc27xx-eic"; + compatible = "sprd,sc2731-eic"; reg = <0x300>; interrupt-parent = <&sc2731_pmic>; interrupts = <5 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-pca953x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-pca953x.txt index 4e3c550e319a..fb144e2b6522 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-pca953x.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-pca953x.txt @@ -16,6 +16,7 @@ Required properties: nxp,pca9574 nxp,pca9575 nxp,pca9698 + nxp,pcal6416 nxp,pcal6524 nxp,pcal9555a maxim,max7310 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt index f0ba154b5723..a8895d339bfe 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt @@ -67,6 +67,18 @@ Optional standard bitfield specifiers for the last cell: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Open_collector - Bit 3: 0 means the output should be maintained during sleep/low-power mode 1 means the output state can be lost during sleep/low-power mode +- Bit 4: 0 means no pull-up resistor should be enabled + 1 means a pull-up resistor should be enabled + This setting only applies to hardware with a simple on/off + control for pull-up configuration. If the hardware has more + elaborate pull-up configuration, it should be represented + using a pin control binding. +- Bit 5: 0 means no pull-down resistor should be enabled + 1 means a pull-down resistor should be enabled + This setting only applies to hardware with a simple on/off + control for pull-down configuration. If the hardware has more + elaborate pull-down configuration, it should be represented + using a pin control binding. 1.1) GPIO specifier best practices ---------------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/intel,ixp4xx-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/intel,ixp4xx-gpio.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8dc41ed99685 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/intel,ixp4xx-gpio.txt @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +Intel IXP4xx XScale Networking Processors GPIO + +This GPIO controller is found in the Intel IXP4xx processors. +It supports 16 GPIO lines. + +The interrupt portions of the GPIO controller is hierarchical: +the synchronous edge detector is part of the GPIO block, but the +actual enabling/disabling of the interrupt line is done in the +main IXP4xx interrupt controller which has a 1:1 mapping for +the first 12 GPIO lines to 12 system interrupts. + +The remaining 4 GPIO lines can not be used for receiving +interrupts. + +The interrupt parent of this GPIO controller must be the +IXP4xx interrupt controller. + +Required properties: + +- compatible : Should be + "intel,ixp4xx-gpio" +- reg : Should contain registers location and length +- gpio-controller : marks this as a GPIO controller +- #gpio-cells : Should be 2, see gpio/gpio.txt +- interrupt-controller : marks this as an interrupt controller +- #interrupt-cells : a standard two-cell interrupt, see + interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt + +Example: + +gpio0: gpio@c8004000 { + compatible = "intel,ixp4xx-gpio"; + reg = <0xc8004000 0x1000>; + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/arm,mali-utgard.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/arm,mali-utgard.txt index 3f128e4f95c6..ae63f09fda7d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/arm,mali-utgard.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/arm,mali-utgard.txt @@ -13,6 +13,8 @@ Required properties: + allwinner,sun8i-h3-mali + allwinner,sun50i-a64-mali + allwinner,sun50i-h5-mali + + amlogic,meson8-mali + + amlogic,meson8b-mali + amlogic,meson-gxbb-mali + amlogic,meson-gxl-mali + rockchip,rk3036-mali @@ -82,6 +84,10 @@ to specify one more vendor-specific compatible, among: Required properties: * resets: phandle to the reset line for the GPU + - amlogic,meson8-mali and amlogic,meson8b-mali + Required properties: + * resets: phandle to the reset line for the GPU + - Rockchip variants: Required properties: * resets: phandle to the reset line for the GPU diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/samsung-rotator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/samsung-rotator.txt index 82cd1ed0be93..3aca2578da0b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/samsung-rotator.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/samsung-rotator.txt @@ -2,9 +2,10 @@ Required properties: - compatible : value should be one of the following: - (a) "samsung,exynos4210-rotator" for Rotator IP in Exynos4210 - (b) "samsung,exynos4212-rotator" for Rotator IP in Exynos4212/4412 - (c) "samsung,exynos5250-rotator" for Rotator IP in Exynos5250 + * "samsung,s5pv210-rotator" for Rotator IP in S5PV210 + * "samsung,exynos4210-rotator" for Rotator IP in Exynos4210 + * "samsung,exynos4212-rotator" for Rotator IP in Exynos4212/4412 + * "samsung,exynos5250-rotator" for Rotator IP in Exynos5250 - reg : Physical base address of the IP registers and length of memory mapped region. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ad741x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ad741x.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9102152c8410 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ad741x.txt @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +* AD7416/AD7417/AD7418 Temperature Sensor Device Tree Bindings + +Required properties: +- compatible: one of + "adi,ad7416" + "adi,ad7417" + "adi,ad7418" +- reg: I2C address + +Example: + +hwmon@28 { + compatible = "adi,ad7418"; + reg = <0x28>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/dps650ab.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/dps650ab.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..76780e795899 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/dps650ab.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +Bindings for Delta Electronics DPS-650-AB power supply + +Required properties: +- compatible : "delta,dps650ab" +- reg : I2C address, one of 0x58, 0x59. + +Example: + dps650ab@58 { + compatible = "delta,dps650ab"; + reg = <0x58>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/hih6130.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/hih6130.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2c43837af4c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/hih6130.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +Honeywell Humidicon HIH-6130 humidity/temperature sensor +-------------------------------------------------------- + +Requires node properties: +- compatible : "honeywell,hi6130" +- reg : the I2C address of the device. This is 0x27. + +Example: + hih6130@27 { + compatible = "honeywell,hih6130"; + reg = <0x27>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ina3221.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ina3221.txt index a7b25caa2b8e..fa63b6171407 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ina3221.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ina3221.txt @@ -6,6 +6,16 @@ Texas Instruments INA3221 Device Tree Bindings - reg: I2C address Optional properties: + - ti,single-shot: This chip has two power modes: single-shot (chip takes one + measurement and then shuts itself down) and continuous ( + chip takes continuous measurements). The continuous mode is + more reliable and suitable for hardware monitor type device, + but the single-shot mode is more power-friendly and useful + for battery-powered device which cares power consumptions + while still needs some measurements occasionally. + If this property is present, the single-shot mode will be + used, instead of the default continuous one for monitoring. + = The node contains optional child nodes for three channels = = Each child node describes the information of input source = diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/lm75.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/lm75.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..12d8cf7cf592 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/lm75.txt @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +*LM75 hwmon sensor. + +Required properties: +- compatible: manufacturer and chip name, one of + "adi,adt75", + "dallas,ds1775", + "dallas,ds75", + "dallas,ds7505", + "gmt,g751", + "national,lm75", + "national,lm75a", + "national,lm75b", + "maxim,max6625", + "maxim,max6626", + "maxim,max31725", + "maxim,max31726", + "maxim,mcp980x", + "st,stds75", + "st,stlm75", + "microchip,tcn75", + "ti,tmp100", + "ti,tmp101", + "ti,tmp105", + "ti,tmp112", + "ti,tmp175", + "ti,tmp275", + "ti,tmp75", + "ti,tmp75c", + +- reg: I2C bus address of the device + +Example: + +sensor@48 { + compatible = "st,stlm75"; + reg = <0x48>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/pwm-fan.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/pwm-fan.txt index c6d533202d3e..49ca5d83ed13 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/pwm-fan.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/pwm-fan.txt @@ -6,6 +6,9 @@ Required properties: - cooling-levels : PWM duty cycle values in a range from 0 to 255 which correspond to thermal cooling states +Optional properties: +- fan-supply : phandle to the regulator that provides power to the fan + Example: fan0: pwm-fan { compatible = "pwm-fan"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mtk.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mtk.txt index e199695b1c96..ee4c32454198 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mtk.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mtk.txt @@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ Required properties: "mediatek,mt6589-i2c": for MediaTek MT6589 "mediatek,mt7622-i2c": for MediaTek MT7622 "mediatek,mt7623-i2c", "mediatek,mt6577-i2c": for MediaTek MT7623 + "mediatek,mt7629-i2c", "mediatek,mt2712-i2c": for MediaTek MT7629 "mediatek,mt8173-i2c": for MediaTek MT8173 - reg: physical base address of the controller and dma base, length of memory mapped region. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-xscale.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-xscale.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..dcc8390e0d24 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-xscale.txt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +i2c Controller on XScale platforms such as IOP3xx and IXP4xx + +Required properties: +- compatible : Must be one of + "intel,iop3xx-i2c" + "intel,ixp4xx-i2c"; +- reg +- #address-cells = <1>; +- #size-cells = <0>; + +Optional properties: +- Child nodes conforming to i2c bus binding + +Example: + +i2c@c8011000 { + compatible = "intel,ixp4xx-i2c"; + reg = <0xc8011000 0x18>; + interrupts = <33 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/mma8452.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/mma8452.txt index 2100e9af379c..e132394375a1 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/mma8452.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/mma8452.txt @@ -20,6 +20,10 @@ Optional properties: - interrupt-names: should contain "INT1" and/or "INT2", the accelerometer's interrupt line in use. + - vdd-supply: phandle to the regulator that provides vdd power to the accelerometer. + + - vddio-supply: phandle to the regulator that provides vddio power to the accelerometer. + Example: mma8453fc@1d { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/adi,ad7606.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/adi,ad7606.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d7b6241ca881 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/adi,ad7606.txt @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +Analog Devices AD7606 Simultaneous Sampling ADC + +Required properties for the AD7606: + +- compatible: Must be one of + * "adi,ad7605-4" + * "adi,ad7606-8" + * "adi,ad7606-6" + * "adi,ad7606-4" +- reg: SPI chip select number for the device +- spi-max-frequency: Max SPI frequency to use + see: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt +- spi-cpha: See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt +- avcc-supply: phandle to the Avcc power supply +- interrupts: IRQ line for the ADC + see: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt +- adi,conversion-start-gpios: must be the device tree identifier of the CONVST pin. + This logic input is used to initiate conversions on the analog + input channels. As the line is active high, it should be marked + GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH. + +Optional properties: + +- reset-gpios: must be the device tree identifier of the RESET pin. If specified, + it will be asserted during driver probe. As the line is active high, + it should be marked GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH. +- standby-gpios: must be the device tree identifier of the STBY pin. This pin is used + to place the AD7606 into one of two power-down modes, Standby mode or + Shutdown mode. As the line is active low, it should be marked + GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW. +- adi,first-data-gpios: must be the device tree identifier of the FRSTDATA pin. + The FRSTDATA output indicates when the first channel, V1, is + being read back on either the parallel, byte or serial interface. + As the line is active high, it should be marked GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH. +- adi,range-gpios: must be the device tree identifier of the RANGE pin. The polarity on + this pin determines the input range of the analog input channels. If + this pin is tied to a logic high, the analog input range is ±10V for + all channels. If this pin is tied to a logic low, the analog input range + is ±5V for all channels. As the line is active high, it should be marked + GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH. +- adi,oversampling-ratio-gpios: must be the device tree identifier of the over-sampling + mode pins. As the line is active high, it should be marked + GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH. + +Example: + + adc@0 { + compatible = "adi,ad7606-8"; + reg = <0>; + spi-max-frequency = <1000000>; + spi-cpol; + + avcc-supply = <&adc_vref>; + + interrupts = <25 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio>; + + adi,conversion-start-gpios = <&gpio 17 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + reset-gpios = <&gpio 27 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + adi,first-data-gpios = <&gpio 22 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + adi,oversampling-ratio-gpios = <&gpio 18 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH + &gpio 23 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH + &gpio 26 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + standby-gpios = <&gpio 24 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/adi,ad7768-1.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/adi,ad7768-1.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9f5b88cf680d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/adi,ad7768-1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +Analog Devices AD7768-1 ADC device driver + +Required properties for the AD7768-1: + +- compatible: Must be "adi,ad7768-1" +- reg: SPI chip select number for the device +- spi-max-frequency: Max SPI frequency to use + see: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt +- clocks: phandle to the master clock (mclk) + see: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt +- clock-names: Must be "mclk". +- interrupts: IRQ line for the ADC + see: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt +- vref-supply: vref supply can be used as reference for conversion +- adi,sync-in-gpios: must be the device tree identifier of the SYNC-IN pin. Enables + synchronization of multiple devices that require simultaneous sampling. + A pulse is always required if the configuration is changed in any way, for example + if the filter decimation rate changes. As the line is active low, it should + be marked GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW. + +Optional properties: + + - reset-gpios : GPIO spec for the RESET pin. If specified, it will be asserted during + driver probe. As the line is active low, it should be marked GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW. + +Example: + + adc@0 { + compatible = "adi,ad7768-1"; + reg = <0>; + spi-max-frequency = <2000000>; + spi-cpol; + spi-cpha; + vref-supply = <&adc_vref>; + interrupts = <25 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio>; + adi,sync-in-gpios = <&gpio 22 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + reset-gpios = <&gpio 27 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + clocks = <&ad7768_mclk>; + clock-names = "mclk"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/amlogic,meson-saradc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/amlogic,meson-saradc.txt index 325090e43ce6..75c775954102 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/amlogic,meson-saradc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/amlogic,meson-saradc.txt @@ -23,6 +23,10 @@ Required properties: - #io-channel-cells: must be 1, see ../iio-bindings.txt Optional properties: +- amlogic,hhi-sysctrl: phandle to the syscon which contains the 5th bit + of the TSC (temperature sensor coefficient) on + Meson8b and Meson8m2 (which used to calibrate the + temperature sensor) - nvmem-cells: phandle to the temperature_calib eFuse cells - nvmem-cell-names: if present (to enable the temperature sensor calibration) this must contain "temperature_calib" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/ingenic,adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/ingenic,adc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f01159f20d87 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/ingenic,adc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +* Ingenic JZ47xx ADC controller IIO bindings + +Required properties: + +- compatible: Should be one of: + * ingenic,jz4725b-adc + * ingenic,jz4740-adc +- reg: ADC controller registers location and length. +- clocks: phandle to the SoC's ADC clock. +- clock-names: Must be set to "adc". +- #io-channel-cells: Must be set to <1> to indicate channels are selected + by index. + +ADC clients must use the format described in iio-bindings.txt, giving +a phandle and IIO specifier pair ("io-channels") to the ADC controller. + +Example: + +#include <dt-bindings/iio/adc/ingenic,adc.h> + +adc: adc@10070000 { + compatible = "ingenic,jz4740-adc"; + #io-channel-cells = <1>; + + reg = <0x10070000 0x30>; + + clocks = <&cgu JZ4740_CLK_ADC>; + clock-names = "adc"; + + interrupt-parent = <&intc>; + interrupts = <18>; +}; + +adc-keys { + ... + compatible = "adc-keys"; + io-channels = <&adc INGENIC_ADC_AUX>; + io-channel-names = "buttons"; + ... +}; + +battery { + ... + compatible = "ingenic,jz4740-battery"; + io-channels = <&adc INGENIC_ADC_BATTERY>; + io-channel-names = "battery"; + ... +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/iio/adc/lpc32xx-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/lpc32xx-adc.txt index b3629d3a9adf..b3629d3a9adf 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/iio/adc/lpc32xx-adc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/lpc32xx-adc.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/nuvoton,npcm-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/nuvoton,npcm-adc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..eb939fe77836 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/nuvoton,npcm-adc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +Nuvoton NPCM Analog to Digital Converter (ADC) + +The NPCM ADC is a 10-bit converter for eight channel inputs. + +Required properties: +- compatible: "nuvoton,npcm750-adc" for the NPCM7XX BMC. +- reg: specifies physical base address and size of the registers. +- interrupts: Contain the ADC interrupt with flags for falling edge. + +Optional properties: +- clocks: phandle of ADC reference clock, in case the clock is not + added the ADC will use the default ADC sample rate. +- vref-supply: The regulator supply ADC reference voltage, in case the + vref-supply is not added the ADC will use internal voltage + reference. + +Example: + +adc: adc@f000c000 { + compatible = "nuvoton,npcm750-adc"; + reg = <0xf000c000 0x8>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 0 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clocks = <&clk NPCM7XX_CLK_ADC>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/samsung,exynos-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/samsung,exynos-adc.txt index a10c1f89037d..e1fe02f3e3e9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/samsung,exynos-adc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/samsung,exynos-adc.txt @@ -11,11 +11,13 @@ New driver handles the following Required properties: - compatible: Must be "samsung,exynos-adc-v1" - for exynos4412/5250 controllers. + for Exynos5250 controllers. Must be "samsung,exynos-adc-v2" for future controllers. Must be "samsung,exynos3250-adc" for controllers compatible with ADC of Exynos3250. + Must be "samsung,exynos4212-adc" for + controllers compatible with ADC of Exynos4212 and Exynos4412. Must be "samsung,exynos7-adc" for the ADC in Exynos7 and compatibles Must be "samsung,s3c2410-adc" for diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/stmpe-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/stmpe-adc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..480e66422625 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/stmpe-adc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +STMPE ADC driver +---------------- + +Required properties: + - compatible: "st,stmpe-adc" + +Optional properties: +Note that the ADC is shared with the STMPE touchscreen. ADC related settings +have to be done in the mfd. +- st,norequest-mask: bitmask specifying which ADC channels should _not_ be + requestable due to different usage (e.g. touch) + +Node name must be stmpe_adc and should be child node of stmpe node to +which it belongs. + +Example: + + stmpe_adc { + compatible = "st,stmpe-adc"; + st,norequest-mask = <0x0F>; /* dont use ADC CH3-0 */ + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/ti-ads124s08.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/ti-ads124s08.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ecf807bb32f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/ti-ads124s08.txt @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +* Texas Instruments' ads124s08 and ads124s06 ADC chip + +Required properties: + - compatible : + "ti,ads124s08" + "ti,ads124s06" + - reg : spi chip select number for the device + +Recommended properties: + - spi-max-frequency : Definition as per + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt + - spi-cpha : Definition as per + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt + +Optional properties: + - reset-gpios : GPIO pin used to reset the device. + +Example: +adc@0 { + compatible = "ti,ads124s08"; + reg = <0>; + spi-max-frequency = <1000000>; + spi-cpha; + reset-gpios = <&gpio1 16 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/bme680.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/bme680.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7f3827cfb2ff --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/bme680.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +Bosch Sensortec BME680 pressure/temperature/humidity/voc sensors + +Required properties: +- compatible: must be "bosch,bme680" + +Example: + +bme680@76 { + compatible = "bosch,bme680"; + reg = <0x76>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/plantower,pms7003.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/plantower,pms7003.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7b5f06f324c8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/plantower,pms7003.txt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +* Plantower PMS7003 particulate matter sensor + +Required properties: +- compatible: must be "plantower,pms7003" +- vcc-supply: phandle to the regulator that provides power to the sensor + +Optional properties: +- plantower,set-gpios: phandle to the GPIO connected to the SET line +- reset-gpios: phandle to the GPIO connected to the RESET line + +Refer to serial/slave-device.txt for generic serial attached device bindings. + +Example: + +&uart0 { + air-pollution-sensor { + compatible = "plantower,pms7003"; + vcc-supply = <®_vcc5v0>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/sensirion,sgp30.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/sensirion,sgp30.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5844ed58173c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/sensirion,sgp30.txt @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +* Sensirion SGP30/SGPC3 multi-pixel Gas Sensor + +Required properties: + + - compatible: must be one of + "sensirion,sgp30" + "sensirion,sgpc3" + - reg: the I2C address of the sensor + +Example: + +gas@58 { + compatible = "sensirion,sgp30"; + reg = <0x58>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/sensirion,sps30.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/sensirion,sps30.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6eee2709b5b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/sensirion,sps30.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +* Sensirion SPS30 particulate matter sensor + +Required properties: +- compatible: must be "sensirion,sps30" +- reg: the I2C address of the sensor + +Example: + +sps30@69 { + compatible = "sensirion,sps30"; + reg = <0x69>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/dac/ti,dac7612.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/dac/ti,dac7612.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..639c94ed83e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/dac/ti,dac7612.txt @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +* Texas Instruments Dual, 12-Bit Serial Input Digital-to-Analog Converter + +The DAC7612 is a dual, 12-bit digital-to-analog converter (DAC) with guaranteed +12-bit monotonicity performance over the industrial temperature range. +Is is programmable through an SPI interface. + +The internal DACs are loaded when the LOADDACS pin is pulled down. + +http://www.ti.com/lit/ds/sbas106/sbas106.pdf + +Required Properties: +- compatible: Should be one of: + "ti,dac7612" + "ti,dac7612u" + "ti,dac7612ub" +- reg: Definition as per Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt + +Optional Properties: +- ti,loaddacs-gpios: GPIO descriptor for the LOADDACS pin. +- spi-*: Definition as per Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt + +Example: + + dac@1 { + compatible = "ti,dac7612"; + reg = <0x1>; + ti,loaddacs-gpios = <&msmgpio 25 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/impedance-analyzer/ad5933.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/impedance-analyzer/ad5933.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5ff38728ff91 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/impedance-analyzer/ad5933.txt @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +Analog Devices AD5933/AD5934 Impedance Converter, Network Analyzer + +https://www.analog.com/media/en/technical-documentation/data-sheets/AD5933.pdf +https://www.analog.com/media/en/technical-documentation/data-sheets/AD5934.pdf + +Required properties: + - compatible : should be one of + "adi,ad5933" + "adi,ad5934" + - reg : the I2C address. + - vdd-supply : The regulator supply for DVDD, AVDD1 and AVDD2 when they + are connected together. + +Optional properties: +- clocks : external clock reference. +- clock-names : must be "mclk" if clocks is set. + +Example for a I2C device node: + + impedance-analyzer@0d { + compatible = "adi,adxl345"; + reg = <0x0d>; + vdd-supply = <&vdd_supply>; + clocks = <&ref_clk>; + clock-names = "mclk"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/bmi160.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/bmi160.txt index 0c1c105fb503..900c169de00f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/bmi160.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/bmi160.txt @@ -9,9 +9,11 @@ Required properties: - spi-max-frequency : set maximum clock frequency (only for SPI) Optional properties: - - interrupts : interrupt mapping for IRQ, must be IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW + - interrupts : interrupt mapping for IRQ - interrupt-names : set to "INT1" if INT1 pin should be used as interrupt input, set to "INT2" if INT2 pin should be used instead + - drive-open-drain : set if the specified interrupt pin should be configured as + open drain. If not set, defaults to push-pull. Examples: @@ -20,7 +22,7 @@ bmi160@68 { reg = <0x68>; interrupt-parent = <&gpio4>; - interrupts = <12 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>; + interrupts = <12 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>; interrupt-names = "INT1"; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/inv_mpu6050.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/inv_mpu6050.txt index 6ab9a9d196b0..268bf7568e19 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/inv_mpu6050.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/inv_mpu6050.txt @@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ Required properties: "invensense,mpu9250" "invensense,mpu9255" "invensense,icm20608" + "invensense,icm20602" - reg : the I2C address of the sensor - interrupts: interrupt mapping for IRQ. It should be configured with flags IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH, IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING, IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW or diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/max44009.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/max44009.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4a98848e35c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/max44009.txt @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +* MAX44009 Ambient Light Sensor + +Required properties: + +- compatible: should be "maxim,max44009" +- reg: the I2C address of the device (default is <0x4a>) + +Optional properties: + +- interrupts: interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ. Should be configured with + IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING. + +Refer to interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for generic interrupt client +node bindings. + +Example: + +light-sensor@4a { + compatible = "maxim,max44009"; + reg = <0x4a>; + + interrupt-parent = <&gpio1>; + interrupts = <17 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/st-sensors.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/st-sensors.txt index ddcb95509599..52ee4baec6f0 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/st-sensors.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/st-sensors.txt @@ -77,3 +77,4 @@ Pressure sensors: - st,lps22hb-press - st,lps33hw - st,lps35hw +- st,lps22hh diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/cypress,tm2-touchkey.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/cypress,tm2-touchkey.txt index 0c252d9306da..ef2ae729718f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/cypress,tm2-touchkey.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/cypress,tm2-touchkey.txt @@ -1,13 +1,19 @@ Samsung tm2-touchkey Required properties: -- compatible: must be "cypress,tm2-touchkey" +- compatible: + * "cypress,tm2-touchkey" - for the touchkey found on the tm2 board + * "cypress,midas-touchkey" - for the touchkey found on midas boards + * "cypress,aries-touchkey" - for the touchkey found on aries boards - reg: I2C address of the chip. - interrupts: interrupt to which the chip is connected (see interrupt binding[0]). - vcc-supply : internal regulator output. 1.8V - vdd-supply : power supply for IC 3.3V +Optional properties: +- linux,keycodes: array of keycodes (max 4), default KEY_PHONE and KEY_BACK + [0]: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt Example: @@ -21,5 +27,6 @@ Example: interrupts = <2 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>; vcc-supply=<&ldo32_reg>; vdd-supply=<&ldo33_reg>; + linux,keycodes = <KEY_PHONE KEY_BACK>; }; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/ilitek,ili2xxx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/ilitek,ili2xxx.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b2a76301e632 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/ilitek,ili2xxx.txt @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +Ilitek ILI210x/ILI251x touchscreen controller + +Required properties: +- compatible: + ilitek,ili210x for ILI210x + ilitek,ili251x for ILI251x + +- reg: The I2C address of the device + +- interrupts: The sink for the touchscreen's IRQ output + See ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt + +Optional properties for main touchpad device: + +- reset-gpios: GPIO specifier for the touchscreen's reset pin (active low) + +Example: + + touchscreen@41 { + compatible = "ilitek,ili251x"; + reg = <0x41>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio4>; + interrupts = <7 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>; + reset-gpios = <&gpio5 21 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/msm-vibrator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/msm-vibrator.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8dcf014ef2e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/msm-vibrator.txt @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +* Device tree bindings for the Qualcomm MSM vibrator + +Required properties: + + - compatible: Should be one of + "qcom,msm8226-vibrator" + "qcom,msm8974-vibrator" + - reg: the base address and length of the IO memory for the registers. + - pinctrl-names: set to default. + - pinctrl-0: phandles pointing to pin configuration nodes. See + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt + - clock-names: set to pwm + - clocks: phandle of the clock. See + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt + - enable-gpios: GPIO that enables the vibrator. + +Optional properties: + + - vcc-supply: phandle to the regulator that provides power to the sensor. + +Example from a LG Nexus 5 (hammerhead) phone: + +vibrator@fd8c3450 { + reg = <0xfd8c3450 0x400>; + compatible = "qcom,msm8974-vibrator"; + + vcc-supply = <&pm8941_l19>; + + clocks = <&mmcc CAMSS_GP1_CLK>; + clock-names = "pwm"; + + enable-gpios = <&msmgpio 60 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&vibrator_pin>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/st,stpmic1-onkey.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/st,stpmic1-onkey.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4494613ae7ad --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/st,stpmic1-onkey.txt @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +STMicroelectronics STPMIC1 Onkey + +Required properties: + +- compatible = "st,stpmic1-onkey"; +- interrupts: interrupt line to use +- interrupt-names = "onkey-falling", "onkey-rising" + onkey-falling: happens when onkey is pressed; IT_PONKEY_F of pmic + onkey-rising: happens when onkey is released; IT_PONKEY_R of pmic + +Optional properties: + +- st,onkey-clear-cc-flag: onkey is able power on after an + over-current shutdown event. +- st,onkey-pu-inactive: onkey pull up is not active +- power-off-time-sec: Duration in seconds which the key should be kept + pressed for device to power off automatically (from 1 to 16 seconds). + see See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/keys.txt + +Example: + +onkey { + compatible = "st,stpmic1-onkey"; + interrupt-parent = <&pmic>; + interrupts = <IT_PONKEY_F 0>,<IT_PONKEY_R 1>; + interrupt-names = "onkey-falling", "onkey-rising"; + power-off-time-sec = <10>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/edt-ft5x06.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/edt-ft5x06.txt index da2dc5d6c98b..870b8c5cce9b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/edt-ft5x06.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/edt-ft5x06.txt @@ -1,11 +1,12 @@ FocalTech EDT-FT5x06 Polytouch driver ===================================== -There are 3 variants of the chip for various touch panel sizes +There are 5 variants of the chip for various touch panel sizes FT5206GE1 2.8" .. 3.8" FT5306DE4 4.3" .. 7" FT5406EE8 7" .. 8.9" FT5506EEG 7" .. 8.9" +FT5726NEI 5.7” .. 11.6" The software interface is identical for all those chips, so that currently there is no need for the driver to distinguish between the @@ -19,6 +20,7 @@ Required properties: or: "edt,edt-ft5306" or: "edt,edt-ft5406" or: "edt,edt-ft5506" + or: "evervision,ev-ft5726" or: "focaltech,ft6236" - reg: I2C slave address of the chip (0x38) @@ -42,6 +44,15 @@ Optional properties: - offset: allows setting the edge compensation in the range from 0 to 31. + + - offset-x: Same as offset, but applies only to the horizontal position. + Range from 0 to 80, only supported by evervision,ev-ft5726 + devices. + + - offset-y: Same as offset, but applies only to the vertical position. + Range from 0 to 80, only supported by evervision,ev-ft5726 + devices. + - touchscreen-size-x : See touchscreen.txt - touchscreen-size-y : See touchscreen.txt - touchscreen-fuzz-x : See touchscreen.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/goodix.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/goodix.txt index f7e95c52f3c7..8cf0b4d38a7e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/goodix.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/goodix.txt @@ -3,6 +3,7 @@ Device tree bindings for Goodix GT9xx series touchscreen controller Required properties: - compatible : Should be "goodix,gt1151" + or "goodix,gt5688" or "goodix,gt911" or "goodix,gt9110" or "goodix,gt912" @@ -18,11 +19,14 @@ Optional properties: - irq-gpios : GPIO pin used for IRQ. The driver uses the interrupt gpio pin as output to reset the device. - reset-gpios : GPIO pin used for reset - - - touchscreen-inverted-x : X axis is inverted (boolean) - - touchscreen-inverted-y : Y axis is inverted (boolean) - - touchscreen-swapped-x-y : X and Y axis are swapped (boolean) - (swapping is done after inverting the axis) + - touchscreen-inverted-x + - touchscreen-inverted-y + - touchscreen-size-x + - touchscreen-size-y + - touchscreen-swapped-x-y + +The touchscreen-* properties are documented in touchscreen.txt in this +directory. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sitronix-st1232.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sitronix-st1232.txt index 64ad48b824a2..019373253b28 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sitronix-st1232.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sitronix-st1232.txt @@ -1,13 +1,17 @@ -* Sitronix st1232 touchscreen controller +* Sitronix st1232 or st1633 touchscreen controller Required properties: -- compatible: must be "sitronix,st1232" +- compatible: must contain one of + * "sitronix,st1232" + * "sitronix,st1633" - reg: I2C address of the chip - interrupts: interrupt to which the chip is connected Optional properties: - gpios: a phandle to the reset GPIO +For additional optional properties see: touchscreen.txt + Example: i2c@00000000 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/stmpe.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/stmpe.txt index 127baa31a77a..c549924603d2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/stmpe.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/stmpe.txt @@ -5,39 +5,105 @@ Required properties: - compatible: "st,stmpe-ts" Optional properties: -- st,sample-time: ADC converstion time in number of clock. (0 -> 36 clocks, 1 -> - 44 clocks, 2 -> 56 clocks, 3 -> 64 clocks, 4 -> 80 clocks, 5 -> 96 clocks, 6 - -> 144 clocks), recommended is 4. -- st,mod-12b: ADC Bit mode (0 -> 10bit ADC, 1 -> 12bit ADC) -- st,ref-sel: ADC reference source (0 -> internal reference, 1 -> external - reference) -- st,adc-freq: ADC Clock speed (0 -> 1.625 MHz, 1 -> 3.25 MHz, 2 || 3 -> 6.5 MHz) -- st,ave-ctrl: Sample average control (0 -> 1 sample, 1 -> 2 samples, 2 -> 4 - samples, 3 -> 8 samples) -- st,touch-det-delay: Touch detect interrupt delay (0 -> 10 us, 1 -> 50 us, 2 -> - 100 us, 3 -> 500 us, 4-> 1 ms, 5 -> 5 ms, 6 -> 10 ms, 7 -> 50 ms) recommended - is 3 -- st,settling: Panel driver settling time (0 -> 10 us, 1 -> 100 us, 2 -> 500 us, 3 - -> 1 ms, 4 -> 5 ms, 5 -> 10 ms, 6 for 50 ms, 7 -> 100 ms) recommended is 2 -- st,fraction-z: Length of the fractional part in z (fraction-z ([0..7]) = Count of - the fractional part) recommended is 7 -- st,i-drive: current limit value of the touchscreen drivers (0 -> 20 mA typical 35 - mA max, 1 -> 50 mA typical 80 mA max) +- st,ave-ctrl : Sample average control + 0 -> 1 sample + 1 -> 2 samples + 2 -> 4 samples + 3 -> 8 samples +- st,touch-det-delay : Touch detect interrupt delay (recommended is 3) + 0 -> 10 us + 1 -> 50 us + 2 -> 100 us + 3 -> 500 us + 4 -> 1 ms + 5 -> 5 ms + 6 -> 10 ms + 7 -> 50 ms +- st,settling : Panel driver settling time (recommended is 2) + 0 -> 10 us + 1 -> 100 us + 2 -> 500 us + 3 -> 1 ms + 4 -> 5 ms + 5 -> 10 ms + 6 -> 50 ms + 7 -> 100 ms +- st,fraction-z : Length of the fractional part in z (recommended is 7) + (fraction-z ([0..7]) = Count of the fractional part) +- st,i-drive : current limit value of the touchscreen drivers + 0 -> 20 mA (typical 35mA max) + 1 -> 50 mA (typical 80 mA max) + +Optional properties common with MFD (deprecated): + - st,sample-time : ADC conversion time in number of clock. + 0 -> 36 clocks + 1 -> 44 clocks + 2 -> 56 clocks + 3 -> 64 clocks + 4 -> 80 clocks (recommended) + 5 -> 96 clocks + 6 -> 124 clocks + - st,mod-12b : ADC Bit mode + 0 -> 10bit ADC + 1 -> 12bit ADC + - st,ref-sel : ADC reference source + 0 -> internal + 1 -> external + - st,adc-freq : ADC Clock speed + 0 -> 1.625 MHz + 1 -> 3.25 MHz + 2 || 3 -> 6.5 MHz Node name must be stmpe_touchscreen and should be child node of stmpe node to which it belongs. +Note that common ADC settings of stmpe_touchscreen (child) will take precedence +over the settings done in MFD. + Example: +stmpe811@41 { + compatible = "st,stmpe811"; + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_touch_int>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + reg = <0x41>; + interrupts = <10 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio4>; + interrupt-controller; + id = <0>; + blocks = <0x5>; + irq-trigger = <0x1>; + /* Common ADC settings */ + /* 3.25 MHz ADC clock speed */ + st,adc-freq = <1>; + /* 12-bit ADC */ + st,mod-12b = <1>; + /* internal ADC reference */ + st,ref-sel = <0>; + /* ADC converstion time: 80 clocks */ + st,sample-time = <4>; + stmpe_touchscreen { compatible = "st,stmpe-ts"; - st,sample-time = <4>; - st,mod-12b = <1>; - st,ref-sel = <0>; - st,adc-freq = <1>; - st,ave-ctrl = <1>; - st,touch-det-delay = <2>; - st,settling = <2>; + reg = <0>; + /* 8 sample average control */ + st,ave-ctrl = <3>; + /* 5 ms touch detect interrupt delay */ + st,touch-det-delay = <5>; + /* 1 ms panel driver settling time */ + st,settling = <3>; + /* 7 length fractional part in z */ st,fraction-z = <7>; + /* + * 50 mA typical 80 mA max touchscreen drivers + * current limit value + */ st,i-drive = <1>; }; + stmpe_adc { + compatible = "st,stmpe-adc"; + st,norequest-mask = <0x0F>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sx8654.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sx8654.txt index 4886c4aa2906..0ebe6dd043c7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sx8654.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sx8654.txt @@ -1,10 +1,17 @@ * Semtech SX8654 I2C Touchscreen Controller Required properties: -- compatible: must be "semtech,sx8654" +- compatible: must be one of the following, depending on the model: + "semtech,sx8650" + "semtech,sx8654" + "semtech,sx8655" + "semtech,sx8656" - reg: i2c slave address - interrupts: touch controller interrupt +Optional properties: + - reset-gpios: GPIO specification for the NRST input + Example: sx8654@48 { @@ -12,4 +19,5 @@ Example: reg = <0x48>; interrupt-parent = <&gpio6>; interrupts = <3 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>; + reset-gpios = <&gpio4 2 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ti-tsc-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ti-tsc-adc.txt index b1163bf97146..aad5e34965eb 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ti-tsc-adc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ti-tsc-adc.txt @@ -2,7 +2,12 @@ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Required properties: +- mfd + compatible: Should be + "ti,am3359-tscadc" for AM335x/AM437x SoCs + "ti,am654-tscadc", "ti,am3359-tscadc" for AM654 SoCs - child "tsc" + compatible: Should be "ti,am3359-tsc". ti,wires: Wires refer to application modes i.e. 4/5/8 wire touchscreen support on the platform. ti,x-plate-resistance: X plate resistance @@ -25,6 +30,9 @@ Required properties: AIN0 = 0, AIN1 = 1 and so on till AIN7 = 7. XP = 0, XN = 1, YP = 2, YN = 3. - child "adc" + compatible: Should be + "ti,am3359-adc" for AM335x/AM437x SoCs + "ti,am654-adc", "ti,am3359-adc" for AM654 SoCs ti,adc-channels: List of analog inputs available for ADC. AIN0 = 0, AIN1 = 1 and so on till AIN7 = 7. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interconnect/interconnect.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interconnect/interconnect.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5a3c575b387a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interconnect/interconnect.txt @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +Interconnect Provider Device Tree Bindings +========================================= + +The purpose of this document is to define a common set of generic interconnect +providers/consumers properties. + + += interconnect providers = + +The interconnect provider binding is intended to represent the interconnect +controllers in the system. Each provider registers a set of interconnect +nodes, which expose the interconnect related capabilities of the interconnect +to consumer drivers. These capabilities can be throughput, latency, priority +etc. The consumer drivers set constraints on interconnect path (or endpoints) +depending on the use case. Interconnect providers can also be interconnect +consumers, such as in the case where two network-on-chip fabrics interface +directly. + +Required properties: +- compatible : contains the interconnect provider compatible string +- #interconnect-cells : number of cells in a interconnect specifier needed to + encode the interconnect node id + +Example: + + snoc: interconnect@580000 { + compatible = "qcom,msm8916-snoc"; + #interconnect-cells = <1>; + reg = <0x580000 0x14000>; + clock-names = "bus_clk", "bus_a_clk"; + clocks = <&rpmcc RPM_SMD_SNOC_CLK>, + <&rpmcc RPM_SMD_SNOC_A_CLK>; + }; + + += interconnect consumers = + +The interconnect consumers are device nodes which dynamically express their +bandwidth requirements along interconnect paths they are connected to. There +can be multiple interconnect providers on a SoC and the consumer may consume +multiple paths from different providers depending on use case and the +components it has to interact with. + +Required properties: +interconnects : Pairs of phandles and interconnect provider specifier to denote + the edge source and destination ports of the interconnect path. + +Optional properties: +interconnect-names : List of interconnect path name strings sorted in the same + order as the interconnects property. Consumers drivers will use + interconnect-names to match interconnect paths with interconnect + specifier pairs. + +Example: + + sdhci@7864000 { + ... + interconnects = <&pnoc MASTER_SDCC_1 &bimc SLAVE_EBI_CH0>; + interconnect-names = "sdhc-mem"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interconnect/qcom,sdm845.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interconnect/qcom,sdm845.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5c4f1d911630 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interconnect/qcom,sdm845.txt @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +Qualcomm SDM845 Network-On-Chip interconnect driver binding +----------------------------------------------------------- + +SDM845 interconnect providers support system bandwidth requirements through +RPMh hardware accelerators known as Bus Clock Manager (BCM). The provider is +able to communicate with the BCM through the Resource State Coordinator (RSC) +associated with each execution environment. Provider nodes must reside within +an RPMh device node pertaining to their RSC and each provider maps to a single +RPMh resource. + +Required properties : +- compatible : shall contain only one of the following: + "qcom,sdm845-rsc-hlos" +- #interconnect-cells : should contain 1 + +Examples: + +apps_rsc: rsc { + rsc_hlos: interconnect { + compatible = "qcom,sdm845-rsc-hlos"; + #interconnect-cells = <1>; + }; +}; + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic-v3.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic-v3.txt deleted file mode 100644 index a3be5298a5eb..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic-v3.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,175 +0,0 @@ -* ARM Generic Interrupt Controller, version 3 - -AArch64 SMP cores are often associated with a GICv3, providing Private -Peripheral Interrupts (PPI), Shared Peripheral Interrupts (SPI), -Software Generated Interrupts (SGI), and Locality-specific Peripheral -Interrupts (LPI). - -Main node required properties: - -- compatible : should at least contain "arm,gic-v3" or either - "qcom,msm8996-gic-v3", "arm,gic-v3" for msm8996 SoCs - to address SoC specific bugs/quirks -- interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller -- #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an - interrupt source. Must be a single cell with a value of at least 3. - If the system requires describing PPI affinity, then the value must - be at least 4. - - The 1st cell is the interrupt type; 0 for SPI interrupts, 1 for PPI - interrupts. Other values are reserved for future use. - - The 2nd cell contains the interrupt number for the interrupt type. - SPI interrupts are in the range [0-987]. PPI interrupts are in the - range [0-15]. - - The 3rd cell is the flags, encoded as follows: - bits[3:0] trigger type and level flags. - 1 = edge triggered - 4 = level triggered - - The 4th cell is a phandle to a node describing a set of CPUs this - interrupt is affine to. The interrupt must be a PPI, and the node - pointed must be a subnode of the "ppi-partitions" subnode. For - interrupt types other than PPI or PPIs that are not partitionned, - this cell must be zero. See the "ppi-partitions" node description - below. - - Cells 5 and beyond are reserved for future use and must have a value - of 0 if present. - -- reg : Specifies base physical address(s) and size of the GIC - registers, in the following order: - - GIC Distributor interface (GICD) - - GIC Redistributors (GICR), one range per redistributor region - - GIC CPU interface (GICC) - - GIC Hypervisor interface (GICH) - - GIC Virtual CPU interface (GICV) - - GICC, GICH and GICV are optional. - -- interrupts : Interrupt source of the VGIC maintenance interrupt. - -Optional - -- redistributor-stride : If using padding pages, specifies the stride - of consecutive redistributors. Must be a multiple of 64kB. - -- #redistributor-regions: The number of independent contiguous regions - occupied by the redistributors. Required if more than one such - region is present. - -- msi-controller: Boolean property. Identifies the node as an MSI - controller. Only present if the Message Based Interrupt - functionnality is being exposed by the HW, and the mbi-ranges - property present. - -- mbi-ranges: A list of pairs <intid span>, where "intid" is the first - SPI of a range that can be used an MBI, and "span" the size of that - range. Multiple ranges can be provided. Requires "msi-controller" to - be set. - -- mbi-alias: Address property. Base address of an alias of the GICD - region containing only the {SET,CLR}SPI registers to be used if - isolation is required, and if supported by the HW. - -Sub-nodes: - -PPI affinity can be expressed as a single "ppi-partitions" node, -containing a set of sub-nodes, each with the following property: -- affinity: Should be a list of phandles to CPU nodes (as described in - Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.yaml). - -GICv3 has one or more Interrupt Translation Services (ITS) that are -used to route Message Signalled Interrupts (MSI) to the CPUs. - -These nodes must have the following properties: -- compatible : Should at least contain "arm,gic-v3-its". -- msi-controller : Boolean property. Identifies the node as an MSI controller -- #msi-cells: Must be <1>. The single msi-cell is the DeviceID of the device - which will generate the MSI. -- reg: Specifies the base physical address and size of the ITS - registers. - -Optional: -- socionext,synquacer-pre-its: (u32, u32) tuple describing the untranslated - address and size of the pre-ITS window. - -The main GIC node must contain the appropriate #address-cells, -#size-cells and ranges properties for the reg property of all ITS -nodes. - -Examples: - - gic: interrupt-controller@2cf00000 { - compatible = "arm,gic-v3"; - #interrupt-cells = <3>; - #address-cells = <2>; - #size-cells = <2>; - ranges; - interrupt-controller; - reg = <0x0 0x2f000000 0 0x10000>, // GICD - <0x0 0x2f100000 0 0x200000>, // GICR - <0x0 0x2c000000 0 0x2000>, // GICC - <0x0 0x2c010000 0 0x2000>, // GICH - <0x0 0x2c020000 0 0x2000>; // GICV - interrupts = <1 9 4>; - - msi-controller; - mbi-ranges = <256 128>; - - gic-its@2c200000 { - compatible = "arm,gic-v3-its"; - msi-controller; - #msi-cells = <1>; - reg = <0x0 0x2c200000 0 0x20000>; - }; - }; - - gic: interrupt-controller@2c010000 { - compatible = "arm,gic-v3"; - #interrupt-cells = <4>; - #address-cells = <2>; - #size-cells = <2>; - ranges; - interrupt-controller; - redistributor-stride = <0x0 0x40000>; // 256kB stride - #redistributor-regions = <2>; - reg = <0x0 0x2c010000 0 0x10000>, // GICD - <0x0 0x2d000000 0 0x800000>, // GICR 1: CPUs 0-31 - <0x0 0x2e000000 0 0x800000>; // GICR 2: CPUs 32-63 - <0x0 0x2c040000 0 0x2000>, // GICC - <0x0 0x2c060000 0 0x2000>, // GICH - <0x0 0x2c080000 0 0x2000>; // GICV - interrupts = <1 9 4>; - - gic-its@2c200000 { - compatible = "arm,gic-v3-its"; - msi-controller; - #msi-cells = <1>; - reg = <0x0 0x2c200000 0 0x20000>; - }; - - gic-its@2c400000 { - compatible = "arm,gic-v3-its"; - msi-controller; - #msi-cells = <1>; - reg = <0x0 0x2c400000 0 0x20000>; - }; - - ppi-partitions { - part0: interrupt-partition-0 { - affinity = <&cpu0 &cpu2>; - }; - - part1: interrupt-partition-1 { - affinity = <&cpu1 &cpu3>; - }; - }; - }; - - - device@0 { - reg = <0 0 0 4>; - interrupts = <1 1 4 &part0>; - }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic-v3.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic-v3.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c34df35a25fc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic-v3.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,279 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/interrupt-controller/arm,gic-v3.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: ARM Generic Interrupt Controller, version 3 + +maintainers: + - Marc Zyngier <marc.zyngier@arm.com> + +description: | + AArch64 SMP cores are often associated with a GICv3, providing Private + Peripheral Interrupts (PPI), Shared Peripheral Interrupts (SPI), + Software Generated Interrupts (SGI), and Locality-specific Peripheral + Interrupts (LPI). + +allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/interrupt-controller.yaml# + +properties: + compatible: + oneOf: + - items: + - enum: + - qcom,msm8996-gic-v3 + - const: arm,gic-v3 + - const: arm,gic-v3 + + interrupt-controller: true + + "#address-cells": + enum: [ 0, 1, 2 ] + "#size-cells": + enum: [ 1, 2 ] + + ranges: true + + "#interrupt-cells": + description: | + Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an interrupt source. + Must be a single cell with a value of at least 3. + If the system requires describing PPI affinity, then the value must + be at least 4. + + The 1st cell is the interrupt type; 0 for SPI interrupts, 1 for PPI + interrupts. Other values are reserved for future use. + + The 2nd cell contains the interrupt number for the interrupt type. + SPI interrupts are in the range [0-987]. PPI interrupts are in the + range [0-15]. + + The 3rd cell is the flags, encoded as follows: + bits[3:0] trigger type and level flags. + 1 = edge triggered + 4 = level triggered + + The 4th cell is a phandle to a node describing a set of CPUs this + interrupt is affine to. The interrupt must be a PPI, and the node + pointed must be a subnode of the "ppi-partitions" subnode. For + interrupt types other than PPI or PPIs that are not partitionned, + this cell must be zero. See the "ppi-partitions" node description + below. + + Cells 5 and beyond are reserved for future use and must have a value + of 0 if present. + enum: [ 3, 4 ] + + reg: + description: | + Specifies base physical address(s) and size of the GIC + registers, in the following order: + - GIC Distributor interface (GICD) + - GIC Redistributors (GICR), one range per redistributor region + - GIC CPU interface (GICC) + - GIC Hypervisor interface (GICH) + - GIC Virtual CPU interface (GICV) + + GICC, GICH and GICV are optional. + minItems: 2 + maxItems: 4096 # Should be enough? + + interrupts: + description: + Interrupt source of the VGIC maintenance interrupt. + maxItems: 1 + + redistributor-stride: + description: + If using padding pages, specifies the stride of consecutive + redistributors. Must be a multiple of 64kB. + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint64 + - multipleOf: 0x10000 + exclusiveMinimum: 0 + + "#redistributor-regions": + description: + The number of independent contiguous regions occupied by the + redistributors. Required if more than one such region is present. + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + - maximum: 4096 # Should be enough? + + msi-controller: + description: + Only present if the Message Based Interrupt functionnality is + being exposed by the HW, and the mbi-ranges property present. + + mbi-ranges: + description: + A list of pairs <intid span>, where "intid" is the first SPI of a range + that can be used an MBI, and "span" the size of that range. Multiple + ranges can be provided. + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32-matrix + - items: + minItems: 2 + maxItems: 2 + + mbi-alias: + description: + Address property. Base address of an alias of the GICD region containing + only the {SET,CLR}SPI registers to be used if isolation is required, + and if supported by the HW. + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32-array + - items: + minItems: 1 + maxItems: 2 + + ppi-partitions: + type: object + description: + PPI affinity can be expressed as a single "ppi-partitions" node, + containing a set of sub-nodes. + patternProperties: + "^interrupt-partition-[0-9]+$": + properties: + affinity: + $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/phandle-array + description: + Should be a list of phandles to CPU nodes (as described in + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.yaml). + + required: + - affinity + +dependencies: + mbi-ranges: [ msi-controller ] + msi-controller: [ mbi-ranges ] + +required: + - compatible + - interrupts + - reg + +patternProperties: + "^gic-its@": false + "^interrupt-controller@[0-9a-f]+$": false + # msi-controller is preferred, but allow other names + "^(msi-controller|gic-its|interrupt-controller)@[0-9a-f]+$": + type: object + description: + GICv3 has one or more Interrupt Translation Services (ITS) that are + used to route Message Signalled Interrupts (MSI) to the CPUs. + properties: + compatible: + const: arm,gic-v3-its + + msi-controller: true + + "#msi-cells": + description: + The single msi-cell is the DeviceID of the device which will generate + the MSI. + const: 1 + + reg: + description: + Specifies the base physical address and size of the ITS registers. + maxItems: 1 + + socionext,synquacer-pre-its: + description: + (u32, u32) tuple describing the untranslated + address and size of the pre-ITS window. + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32-array + - items: + minItems: 2 + maxItems: 2 + + required: + - compatible + - msi-controller + - "#msi-cells" + - reg + + additionalProperties: false + +additionalProperties: false + +examples: + - | + gic: interrupt-controller@2cf00000 { + compatible = "arm,gic-v3"; + #interrupt-cells = <3>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges; + interrupt-controller; + reg = <0x2f000000 0x10000>, // GICD + <0x2f100000 0x200000>, // GICR + <0x2c000000 0x2000>, // GICC + <0x2c010000 0x2000>, // GICH + <0x2c020000 0x2000>; // GICV + interrupts = <1 9 4>; + + msi-controller; + mbi-ranges = <256 128>; + + msi-controller@2c200000 { + compatible = "arm,gic-v3-its"; + msi-controller; + #msi-cells = <1>; + reg = <0x2c200000 0x20000>; + }; + }; + + interrupt-controller@2c010000 { + compatible = "arm,gic-v3"; + #interrupt-cells = <4>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges; + interrupt-controller; + redistributor-stride = <0x0 0x40000>; // 256kB stride + #redistributor-regions = <2>; + reg = <0x2c010000 0x10000>, // GICD + <0x2d000000 0x800000>, // GICR 1: CPUs 0-31 + <0x2e000000 0x800000>, // GICR 2: CPUs 32-63 + <0x2c040000 0x2000>, // GICC + <0x2c060000 0x2000>, // GICH + <0x2c080000 0x2000>; // GICV + interrupts = <1 9 4>; + + msi-controller@2c200000 { + compatible = "arm,gic-v3-its"; + msi-controller; + #msi-cells = <1>; + reg = <0x2c200000 0x20000>; + }; + + msi-controller@2c400000 { + compatible = "arm,gic-v3-its"; + msi-controller; + #msi-cells = <1>; + reg = <0x2c400000 0x20000>; + }; + + ppi-partitions { + part0: interrupt-partition-0 { + affinity = <&cpu0 &cpu2>; + }; + + part1: interrupt-partition-1 { + affinity = <&cpu1 &cpu3>; + }; + }; + }; + + + device@0 { + reg = <0 4>; + interrupts = <1 1 4 &part0>; + }; + +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 2f3244648646..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,171 +0,0 @@ -* ARM Generic Interrupt Controller - -ARM SMP cores are often associated with a GIC, providing per processor -interrupts (PPI), shared processor interrupts (SPI) and software -generated interrupts (SGI). - -Primary GIC is attached directly to the CPU and typically has PPIs and SGIs. -Secondary GICs are cascaded into the upward interrupt controller and do not -have PPIs or SGIs. - -Main node required properties: - -- compatible : should be one of: - "arm,arm1176jzf-devchip-gic" - "arm,arm11mp-gic" - "arm,cortex-a15-gic" - "arm,cortex-a7-gic" - "arm,cortex-a9-gic" - "arm,eb11mp-gic" - "arm,gic-400" - "arm,pl390" - "arm,tc11mp-gic" - "brcm,brahma-b15-gic" - "nvidia,tegra210-agic" - "qcom,msm-8660-qgic" - "qcom,msm-qgic2" -- interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller -- #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an - interrupt source. The type shall be a <u32> and the value shall be 3. - - The 1st cell is the interrupt type; 0 for SPI interrupts, 1 for PPI - interrupts. - - The 2nd cell contains the interrupt number for the interrupt type. - SPI interrupts are in the range [0-987]. PPI interrupts are in the - range [0-15]. - - The 3rd cell is the flags, encoded as follows: - bits[3:0] trigger type and level flags. - 1 = low-to-high edge triggered - 2 = high-to-low edge triggered (invalid for SPIs) - 4 = active high level-sensitive - 8 = active low level-sensitive (invalid for SPIs). - bits[15:8] PPI interrupt cpu mask. Each bit corresponds to each of - the 8 possible cpus attached to the GIC. A bit set to '1' indicated - the interrupt is wired to that CPU. Only valid for PPI interrupts. - Also note that the configurability of PPI interrupts is IMPLEMENTATION - DEFINED and as such not guaranteed to be present (most SoC available - in 2014 seem to ignore the setting of this flag and use the hardware - default value). - -- reg : Specifies base physical address(s) and size of the GIC registers. The - first region is the GIC distributor register base and size. The 2nd region is - the GIC cpu interface register base and size. - -Optional -- interrupts : Interrupt source of the parent interrupt controller on - secondary GICs, or VGIC maintenance interrupt on primary GIC (see - below). - -- cpu-offset : per-cpu offset within the distributor and cpu interface - regions, used when the GIC doesn't have banked registers. The offset is - cpu-offset * cpu-nr. - -- clocks : List of phandle and clock-specific pairs, one for each entry - in clock-names. -- clock-names : List of names for the GIC clock input(s). Valid clock names - depend on the GIC variant: - "ic_clk" (for "arm,arm11mp-gic") - "PERIPHCLKEN" (for "arm,cortex-a15-gic") - "PERIPHCLK", "PERIPHCLKEN" (for "arm,cortex-a9-gic") - "clk" (for "arm,gic-400" and "nvidia,tegra210") - "gclk" (for "arm,pl390") - -- power-domains : A phandle and PM domain specifier as defined by bindings of - the power controller specified by phandle, used when the GIC - is part of a Power or Clock Domain. - - -Example: - - intc: interrupt-controller@fff11000 { - compatible = "arm,cortex-a9-gic"; - #interrupt-cells = <3>; - #address-cells = <1>; - interrupt-controller; - reg = <0xfff11000 0x1000>, - <0xfff10100 0x100>; - }; - - -* GIC virtualization extensions (VGIC) - -For ARM cores that support the virtualization extensions, additional -properties must be described (they only exist if the GIC is the -primary interrupt controller). - -Required properties: - -- reg : Additional regions specifying the base physical address and - size of the VGIC registers. The first additional region is the GIC - virtual interface control register base and size. The 2nd additional - region is the GIC virtual cpu interface register base and size. - -- interrupts : VGIC maintenance interrupt. - -Example: - - interrupt-controller@2c001000 { - compatible = "arm,cortex-a15-gic"; - #interrupt-cells = <3>; - interrupt-controller; - reg = <0x2c001000 0x1000>, - <0x2c002000 0x2000>, - <0x2c004000 0x2000>, - <0x2c006000 0x2000>; - interrupts = <1 9 0xf04>; - }; - - -* GICv2m extension for MSI/MSI-x support (Optional) - -Certain revisions of GIC-400 supports MSI/MSI-x via V2M register frame(s). -This is enabled by specifying v2m sub-node(s). - -Required properties: - -- compatible : The value here should contain "arm,gic-v2m-frame". - -- msi-controller : Identifies the node as an MSI controller. - -- reg : GICv2m MSI interface register base and size - -Optional properties: - -- arm,msi-base-spi : When the MSI_TYPER register contains an incorrect - value, this property should contain the SPI base of - the MSI frame, overriding the HW value. - -- arm,msi-num-spis : When the MSI_TYPER register contains an incorrect - value, this property should contain the number of - SPIs assigned to the frame, overriding the HW value. - -Example: - - interrupt-controller@e1101000 { - compatible = "arm,gic-400"; - #interrupt-cells = <3>; - #address-cells = <2>; - #size-cells = <2>; - interrupt-controller; - interrupts = <1 8 0xf04>; - ranges = <0 0 0 0xe1100000 0 0x100000>; - reg = <0x0 0xe1110000 0 0x01000>, - <0x0 0xe112f000 0 0x02000>, - <0x0 0xe1140000 0 0x10000>, - <0x0 0xe1160000 0 0x10000>; - v2m0: v2m@8000 { - compatible = "arm,gic-v2m-frame"; - msi-controller; - reg = <0x0 0x80000 0 0x1000>; - }; - - .... - - v2mN: v2m@9000 { - compatible = "arm,gic-v2m-frame"; - msi-controller; - reg = <0x0 0x90000 0 0x1000>; - }; - }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..758fbd7128e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,223 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/interrupt-controller/arm,gic.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: ARM Generic Interrupt Controller v1 and v2 + +maintainers: + - Marc Zyngier <marc.zyngier@arm.com> + +description: |+ + ARM SMP cores are often associated with a GIC, providing per processor + interrupts (PPI), shared processor interrupts (SPI) and software + generated interrupts (SGI). + + Primary GIC is attached directly to the CPU and typically has PPIs and SGIs. + Secondary GICs are cascaded into the upward interrupt controller and do not + have PPIs or SGIs. + +allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/interrupt-controller.yaml# + +properties: + compatible: + oneOf: + - items: + - enum: + - arm,arm11mp-gic + - arm,cortex-a15-gic + - arm,cortex-a7-gic + - arm,cortex-a5-gic + - arm,cortex-a9-gic + - arm,eb11mp-gic + - arm,gic-400 + - arm,pl390 + - arm,tc11mp-gic + - nvidia,tegra210-agic + - qcom,msm-8660-qgic + - qcom,msm-qgic2 + + - items: + - const: arm,arm1176jzf-devchip-gic + - const: arm,arm11mp-gic + + - items: + - const: brcm,brahma-b15-gic + - const: arm,cortex-a15-gic + + interrupt-controller: true + + "#address-cells": + enum: [ 0, 1 ] + "#size-cells": + const: 1 + + "#interrupt-cells": + const: 3 + description: | + The 1st cell is the interrupt type; 0 for SPI interrupts, 1 for PPI + interrupts. + + The 2nd cell contains the interrupt number for the interrupt type. + SPI interrupts are in the range [0-987]. PPI interrupts are in the + range [0-15]. + + The 3rd cell is the flags, encoded as follows: + bits[3:0] trigger type and level flags. + 1 = low-to-high edge triggered + 2 = high-to-low edge triggered (invalid for SPIs) + 4 = active high level-sensitive + 8 = active low level-sensitive (invalid for SPIs). + bits[15:8] PPI interrupt cpu mask. Each bit corresponds to each of + the 8 possible cpus attached to the GIC. A bit set to '1' indicated + the interrupt is wired to that CPU. Only valid for PPI interrupts. + Also note that the configurability of PPI interrupts is IMPLEMENTATION + DEFINED and as such not guaranteed to be present (most SoC available + in 2014 seem to ignore the setting of this flag and use the hardware + default value). + + reg: + description: | + Specifies base physical address(s) and size of the GIC registers. The + first region is the GIC distributor register base and size. The 2nd region + is the GIC cpu interface register base and size. + + For GICv2 with virtualization extensions, additional regions are + required for specifying the base physical address and size of the VGIC + registers. The first additional region is the GIC virtual interface + control register base and size. The 2nd additional region is the GIC + virtual cpu interface register base and size. + minItems: 2 + maxItems: 4 + + interrupts: + description: Interrupt source of the parent interrupt controller on + secondary GICs, or VGIC maintenance interrupt on primary GIC (see + below). + maxItems: 1 + + cpu-offset: + description: per-cpu offset within the distributor and cpu interface + regions, used when the GIC doesn't have banked registers. The offset + is cpu-offset * cpu-nr. + $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + + clocks: + minItems: 1 + maxItems: 2 + + clock-names: + description: List of names for the GIC clock input(s). Valid clock names + depend on the GIC variant. + oneOf: + - const: ic_clk # for "arm,arm11mp-gic" + - const: PERIPHCLKEN # for "arm,cortex-a15-gic" + - items: # for "arm,cortex-a9-gic" + - const: PERIPHCLK + - const: PERIPHCLKEN + - const: clk # for "arm,gic-400" and "nvidia,tegra210" + - const: gclk #for "arm,pl390" + + power-domains: + maxItems: 1 + +required: + - compatible + - reg + +patternProperties: + "^v2m@[0-9a-f]+$": + description: | + * GICv2m extension for MSI/MSI-x support (Optional) + + Certain revisions of GIC-400 supports MSI/MSI-x via V2M register frame(s). + This is enabled by specifying v2m sub-node(s). + + properties: + compatible: + const: arm,gic-v2m-frame + + msi-controller: true + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + description: GICv2m MSI interface register base and size + + arm,msi-base-spi: + description: When the MSI_TYPER register contains an incorrect value, + this property should contain the SPI base of the MSI frame, overriding + the HW value. + $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + + arm,msi-num-spis: + description: When the MSI_TYPER register contains an incorrect value, + this property should contain the number of SPIs assigned to the + frame, overriding the HW value. + $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + + required: + - compatible + - msi-controller + - reg + + additionalProperties: false + +additionalProperties: false + +examples: + - | + // GICv1 + intc: interrupt-controller@fff11000 { + compatible = "arm,cortex-a9-gic"; + #interrupt-cells = <3>; + #address-cells = <1>; + interrupt-controller; + reg = <0xfff11000 0x1000>, + <0xfff10100 0x100>; + }; + + - | + // GICv2 + interrupt-controller@2c001000 { + compatible = "arm,cortex-a15-gic"; + #interrupt-cells = <3>; + interrupt-controller; + reg = <0x2c001000 0x1000>, + <0x2c002000 0x2000>, + <0x2c004000 0x2000>, + <0x2c006000 0x2000>; + interrupts = <1 9 0xf04>; + }; + + - | + // GICv2m extension for MSI/MSI-x support + interrupt-controller@e1101000 { + compatible = "arm,gic-400"; + #interrupt-cells = <3>; + #address-cells = <2>; + #size-cells = <2>; + interrupt-controller; + interrupts = <1 8 0xf04>; + ranges = <0 0 0 0xe1100000 0 0x100000>; + reg = <0x0 0xe1110000 0 0x01000>, + <0x0 0xe112f000 0 0x02000>, + <0x0 0xe1140000 0 0x10000>, + <0x0 0xe1160000 0 0x10000>; + + v2m0: v2m@8000 { + compatible = "arm,gic-v2m-frame"; + msi-controller; + reg = <0x0 0x80000 0 0x1000>; + }; + + //... + + v2mN: v2m@9000 { + compatible = "arm,gic-v2m-frame"; + msi-controller; + reg = <0x0 0x90000 0 0x1000>; + }; + }; +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/fsl,irqsteer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/fsl,irqsteer.txt index 45790ce6f5b9..582991c426ee 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/fsl,irqsteer.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/fsl,irqsteer.txt @@ -6,8 +6,9 @@ Required properties: - "fsl,imx8m-irqsteer" - "fsl,imx-irqsteer" - reg: Physical base address and size of registers. -- interrupts: Should contain the parent interrupt line used to multiplex the - input interrupts. +- interrupts: Should contain the up to 8 parent interrupt lines used to + multiplex the input interrupts. They should be specified sequentially + from output 0 to 7. - clocks: Should contain one clock for entry in clock-names see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt - clock-names: @@ -16,8 +17,8 @@ Required properties: - #interrupt-cells: Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an interrupt source. The value must be 1. - fsl,channel: The output channel that all input IRQs should be steered into. -- fsl,irq-groups: Number of IRQ groups managed by this controller instance. - Each group manages 64 input interrupts. +- fsl,num-irqs: Number of input interrupts of this channel. + Should be multiple of 32 input interrupts and up to 512 interrupts. Example: @@ -28,7 +29,7 @@ Example: clocks = <&clk IMX8MQ_CLK_DISP_APB_ROOT>; clock-names = "ipg"; fsl,channel = <0>; - fsl,irq-groups = <1>; + fsl,num-irqs = <64>; interrupt-controller; #interrupt-cells = <1>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/loongson,ls1x-intc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/loongson,ls1x-intc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a63ed9fcb535 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/loongson,ls1x-intc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +Loongson ls1x Interrupt Controller + +Required properties: + +- compatible : should be "loongson,ls1x-intc". Valid strings are: + +- reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers. +- interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller +- #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an + interrupt source. The value shall be 2. +- interrupts : Specifies the CPU interrupt the controller is connected to. + +Example: + +intc: interrupt-controller@1fd01040 { + compatible = "loongson,ls1x-intc"; + reg = <0x1fd01040 0x18>; + + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + + interrupt-parent = <&cpu_intc>; + interrupts = <2>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/mediatek,sysirq.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/mediatek,sysirq.txt index 33a98eb44949..c5d589108a94 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/mediatek,sysirq.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/mediatek,sysirq.txt @@ -9,6 +9,7 @@ Required properties: "mediatek,mt8135-sysirq", "mediatek,mt6577-sysirq": for MT8135 "mediatek,mt8127-sysirq", "mediatek,mt6577-sysirq": for MT8127 "mediatek,mt7622-sysirq", "mediatek,mt6577-sysirq": for MT7622 + "mediatek,mt7623-sysirq", "mediatek,mt6577-sysirq": for MT7623 "mediatek,mt6795-sysirq", "mediatek,mt6577-sysirq": for MT6795 "mediatek,mt6797-sysirq", "mediatek,mt6577-sysirq": for MT6797 "mediatek,mt6765-sysirq", "mediatek,mt6577-sysirq": for MT6765 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/nvidia,tegra20-gart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/nvidia,tegra20-gart.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 099d9362ebc1..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/nvidia,tegra20-gart.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ -NVIDIA Tegra 20 GART - -Required properties: -- compatible: "nvidia,tegra20-gart" -- reg: Two pairs of cells specifying the physical address and size of - the memory controller registers and the GART aperture respectively. - -Example: - - gart { - compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-gart"; - reg = <0x7000f024 0x00000018 /* controller registers */ - 0x58000000 0x02000000>; /* GART aperture */ - }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt index aa1399814a2a..70876ac11367 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt @@ -37,6 +37,18 @@ Optional properties for child nodes: "ide-disk" - LED indicates IDE disk activity (deprecated), in new implementations use "disk-activity" "timer" - LED flashes at a fixed, configurable rate + "pattern" - LED alters the brightness for the specified duration with one + software timer (requires "led-pattern" property) + +- led-pattern : Array of integers with default pattern for certain triggers. + Each trigger may parse this property differently: + - one-shot : two numbers specifying delay on and delay off (in ms), + - timer : two numbers specifying delay on and delay off (in ms), + - pattern : the pattern is given by a series of tuples, of + brightness and duration (in ms). The exact format is + described in: + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-trigger-pattern.txt + - led-max-microamp : Maximum LED supply current in microamperes. This property can be made mandatory for the board configurations diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-trigger-pattern.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-trigger-pattern.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d3696680bfc8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-trigger-pattern.txt @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +* Pattern format for LED pattern trigger + +The pattern is given by a series of tuples, of brightness and duration (ms). +The LED is expected to traverse the series and each brightness value for the +specified duration. Duration of 0 means brightness should immediately change to +new value, and writing malformed pattern deactivates any active one. + +1. For gradual dimming, the dimming interval now is set as 50 milliseconds. So +the tuple with duration less than dimming interval (50ms) is treated as a step +change of brightness, i.e. the subsequent brightness will be applied without +adding intervening dimming intervals. + +The gradual dimming format of the software pattern values should be: +"brightness_1 duration_1 brightness_2 duration_2 brightness_3 duration_3 ...". +For example (using sysfs interface): + +echo 0 1000 255 2000 > pattern + +It will make the LED go gradually from zero-intensity to max (255) intensity in +1000 milliseconds, then back to zero intensity in 2000 milliseconds: + +LED brightness + ^ +255-| / \ / \ / + | / \ / \ / + | / \ / \ / + | / \ / \ / + 0-| / \/ \/ + +---0----1----2----3----4----5----6------------> time (s) + +2. To make the LED go instantly from one brightness value to another, we should +use zero-time lengths (the brightness must be same as the previous tuple's). So +the format should be: "brightness_1 duration_1 brightness_1 0 brightness_2 +duration_2 brightness_2 0 ...". +For example (using sysfs interface): + +echo 0 1000 0 0 255 2000 255 0 > pattern + +It will make the LED stay off for one second, then stay at max brightness for +two seconds: + +LED brightness + ^ +255-| +---------+ +---------+ + | | | | | + | | | | | + | | | | | + 0-| -----+ +----+ +---- + +---0----1----2----3----4----5----6------------> time (s) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/xlnx,zynqmp-ipi-mailbox.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/xlnx,zynqmp-ipi-mailbox.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4438432bfe9b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/xlnx,zynqmp-ipi-mailbox.txt @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ +Xilinx IPI Mailbox Controller +======================================== + +The Xilinx IPI(Inter Processor Interrupt) mailbox controller is to manage +messaging between two Xilinx Zynq UltraScale+ MPSoC IPI agents. Each IPI +agent owns registers used for notification and buffers for message. + + +-------------------------------------+ + | Xilinx ZynqMP IPI Controller | + +-------------------------------------+ + +--------------------------------------------------+ +ATF | | + | | + | | + +--------------------------+ | + | | + | | + +--------------------------------------------------+ + +------------------------------------------+ + | +----------------+ +----------------+ | +Hardware | | IPI Agent | | IPI Buffers | | + | | Registers | | | | + | | | | | | + | +----------------+ +----------------+ | + | | + | Xilinx IPI Agent Block | + +------------------------------------------+ + + +Controller Device Node: +=========================== +Required properties: +-------------------- +IPI agent node: +- compatible: Shall be: "xlnx,zynqmp-ipi-mailbox" +- interrupt-parent: Phandle for the interrupt controller +- interrupts: Interrupt information corresponding to the + interrupt-names property. +- xlnx,ipi-id: local Xilinx IPI agent ID +- #address-cells: number of address cells of internal IPI mailbox nodes +- #size-cells: number of size cells of internal IPI mailbox nodes + +Internal IPI mailbox node: +- reg: IPI buffers address ranges +- reg-names: Names of the reg resources. It should have: + * local_request_region + - IPI request msg buffer written by local and read + by remote + * local_response_region + - IPI response msg buffer written by local and read + by remote + * remote_request_region + - IPI request msg buffer written by remote and read + by local + * remote_response_region + - IPI response msg buffer written by remote and read + by local +- #mbox-cells: Shall be 1. It contains: + * tx(0) or rx(1) channel +- xlnx,ipi-id: remote Xilinx IPI agent ID of which the mailbox is + connected to. + +Optional properties: +-------------------- +- method: The method of accessing the IPI agent registers. + Permitted values are: "smc" and "hvc". Default is + "smc". + +Client Device Node: +=========================== +Required properties: +-------------------- +- mboxes: Standard property to specify a mailbox + (See ./mailbox.txt) +- mbox-names: List of identifier strings for each mailbox + channel. + +Example: +=========================== + zynqmp_ipi { + compatible = "xlnx,zynqmp-ipi-mailbox"; + interrupt-parent = <&gic>; + interrupts = <0 29 4>; + xlnx,ipi-id = <0>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges; + + /* APU<->RPU0 IPI mailbox controller */ + ipi_mailbox_rpu0: mailbox@ff90400 { + reg = <0xff990400 0x20>, + <0xff990420 0x20>, + <0xff990080 0x20>, + <0xff9900a0 0x20>; + reg-names = "local_request_region", + "local_response_region", + "remote_request_region", + "remote_response_region"; + #mbox-cells = <1>; + xlnx,ipi-id = <1>; + }; + /* APU<->RPU1 IPI mailbox controller */ + ipi_mailbox_rpu1: mailbox@ff990440 { + reg = <0xff990440 0x20>, + <0xff990460 0x20>, + <0xff990280 0x20>, + <0xff9902a0 0x20>; + reg-names = "local_request_region", + "local_response_region", + "remote_request_region", + "remote_response_region"; + #mbox-cells = <1>; + xlnx,ipi-id = <2>; + }; + }; + rpu0 { + ... + mboxes = <&ipi_mailbox_rpu0 0>, + <&ipi_mailbox_rpu0 1>; + mbox-names = "tx", "rx"; + }; + rpu1 { + ... + mboxes = <&ipi_mailbox_rpu1 0>, + <&ipi_mailbox_rpu1 1>; + mbox-names = "tx", "rx"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/adv748x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/adv748x.txt index 5dddc95f9cc4..4f91686e54a6 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/adv748x.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/adv748x.txt @@ -48,7 +48,16 @@ are numbered as follows. TXA source 10 TXB source 11 -The digital output port nodes must contain at least one endpoint. +The digital output port nodes, when present, shall contain at least one +endpoint. Each of those endpoints shall contain the data-lanes property as +described in video-interfaces.txt. + +Required source endpoint properties: + - data-lanes: an array of physical data lane indexes + The accepted value(s) for this property depends on which of the two + sources are described. For TXA 1, 2 or 4 data lanes can be described + while for TXB only 1 data lane is valid. See video-interfaces.txt + for detailed description. Ports are optional if they are not connected to anything at the hardware level. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/melexis,mlx90640.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/melexis,mlx90640.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..060d2b7a5893 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/melexis,mlx90640.txt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +* Melexis MLX90640 FIR Sensor + +Melexis MLX90640 FIR sensor support which allows recording of thermal data +with 32x24 resolution excluding 2 lines of coefficient data that is used by +userspace to render processed frames. + +Required Properties: + - compatible : Must be "melexis,mlx90640" + - reg : i2c address of the device + +Example: + + i2c0@1c22000 { + ... + mlx90640@33 { + compatible = "melexis,mlx90640"; + reg = <0x33>; + }; + ... + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/mt9m001.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/mt9m001.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c920552b03ef --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/mt9m001.txt @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +MT9M001: 1/2-Inch Megapixel Digital Image Sensor + +The MT9M001 is an SXGA-format with a 1/2-inch CMOS active-pixel digital +image sensor. It is programmable through I2C interface. + +Required Properties: + +- compatible: shall be "onnn,mt9m001". +- clocks: reference to the master clock into sensor + +Optional Properties: + +- reset-gpios: GPIO handle which is connected to the reset pin of the chip. + Active low. +- standby-gpios: GPIO handle which is connected to the standby pin of the chip. + Active high. + +The device node must contain one 'port' child node with one 'endpoint' child +sub-node for its digital output video port, in accordance with the video +interface bindings defined in: +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/video-interfaces.txt + +Example: + + &i2c1 { + camera-sensor@5d { + compatible = "onnn,mt9m001"; + reg = <0x5d>; + reset-gpios = <&gpio0 0 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + standby-gpios = <&gpio0 1 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + clocks = <&camera_clk>; + port { + mt9m001_out: endpoint { + remote-endpoint = <&vcap_in>; + }; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/ov5645.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/ov5645.txt index fd7aec9f8e24..72ad992f77be 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/ov5645.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/ov5645.txt @@ -26,9 +26,9 @@ Example: &i2c1 { ... - ov5645: ov5645@78 { + ov5645: ov5645@3c { compatible = "ovti,ov5645"; - reg = <0x78>; + reg = <0x3c>; enable-gpios = <&gpio1 6 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; reset-gpios = <&gpio5 20 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Example: clocks = <&clks 200>; clock-names = "xclk"; - clock-frequency = <23880000>; + clock-frequency = <24000000>; vdddo-supply = <&camera_dovdd_1v8>; vdda-supply = <&camera_avdd_2v8>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/imx7-csi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/imx7-csi.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..3c07bc676bc3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/imx7-csi.txt @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +Freescale i.MX7 CMOS Sensor Interface +===================================== + +csi node +-------- + +This is device node for the CMOS Sensor Interface (CSI) which enables the chip +to connect directly to external CMOS image sensors. + +Required properties: + +- compatible : "fsl,imx7-csi"; +- reg : base address and length of the register set for the device; +- interrupts : should contain CSI interrupt; +- clocks : list of clock specifiers, see + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt for details; +- clock-names : must contain "axi", "mclk" and "dcic" entries, matching + entries in the clock property; + +The device node shall contain one 'port' child node with one child 'endpoint' +node, according to the bindings defined in: +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/video-interfaces.txt. + +In the following example a remote endpoint is a video multiplexer. + +example: + + csi: csi@30710000 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + compatible = "fsl,imx7-csi"; + reg = <0x30710000 0x10000>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 7 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clocks = <&clks IMX7D_CLK_DUMMY>, + <&clks IMX7D_CSI_MCLK_ROOT_CLK>, + <&clks IMX7D_CLK_DUMMY>; + clock-names = "axi", "mclk", "dcic"; + + port { + csi_from_csi_mux: endpoint { + remote-endpoint = <&csi_mux_to_csi>; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/imx7-mipi-csi2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/imx7-mipi-csi2.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..71fd74ed3ec8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/imx7-mipi-csi2.txt @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ +Freescale i.MX7 Mipi CSI2 +========================= + +mipi_csi2 node +-------------- + +This is the device node for the MIPI CSI-2 receiver core in i.MX7 SoC. It is +compatible with previous version of Samsung D-phy. + +Required properties: + +- compatible : "fsl,imx7-mipi-csi2"; +- reg : base address and length of the register set for the device; +- interrupts : should contain MIPI CSIS interrupt; +- clocks : list of clock specifiers, see + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt for details; +- clock-names : must contain "pclk", "wrap" and "phy" entries, matching + entries in the clock property; +- power-domains : a phandle to the power domain, see + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/power_domain.txt for details. +- reset-names : should include following entry "mrst"; +- resets : a list of phandle, should contain reset entry of + reset-names; +- phy-supply : from the generic phy bindings, a phandle to a regulator that + provides power to MIPI CSIS core; + +Optional properties: + +- clock-frequency : The IP's main (system bus) clock frequency in Hz, default + value when this property is not specified is 166 MHz; +- fsl,csis-hs-settle : differential receiver (HS-RX) settle time; + +The device node should contain two 'port' child nodes with one child 'endpoint' +node, according to the bindings defined in: + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ media/video-interfaces.txt. + The following are properties specific to those nodes. + +port node +--------- + +- reg : (required) can take the values 0 or 1, where 0 shall be + related to the sink port and port 1 shall be the source + one; + +endpoint node +------------- + +- data-lanes : (required) an array specifying active physical MIPI-CSI2 + data input lanes and their mapping to logical lanes; this + shall only be applied to port 0 (sink port), the array's + content is unused only its length is meaningful, + in this case the maximum length supported is 2; + +example: + + mipi_csi: mipi-csi@30750000 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + compatible = "fsl,imx7-mipi-csi2"; + reg = <0x30750000 0x10000>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 25 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clocks = <&clks IMX7D_IPG_ROOT_CLK>, + <&clks IMX7D_MIPI_CSI_ROOT_CLK>, + <&clks IMX7D_MIPI_DPHY_ROOT_CLK>; + clock-names = "pclk", "wrap", "phy"; + clock-frequency = <166000000>; + power-domains = <&pgc_mipi_phy>; + phy-supply = <®_1p0d>; + resets = <&src IMX7_RESET_MIPI_PHY_MRST>; + reset-names = "mrst"; + fsl,csis-hs-settle = <3>; + + port@0 { + reg = <0>; + + mipi_from_sensor: endpoint { + remote-endpoint = <&ov2680_to_mipi>; + data-lanes = <1>; + }; + }; + + port@1 { + reg = <1>; + + mipi_vc0_to_csi_mux: endpoint { + remote-endpoint = <&csi_mux_from_mipi_vc0>; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/mediatek-vcodec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/mediatek-vcodec.txt index 2a615d84a682..b6b5dde6abd8 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/mediatek-vcodec.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/mediatek-vcodec.txt @@ -66,6 +66,15 @@ vcodec_dec: vcodec@16000000 { "vencpll", "venc_lt_sel", "vdec_bus_clk_src"; + assigned-clocks = <&topckgen CLK_TOP_VENC_LT_SEL>, + <&topckgen CLK_TOP_CCI400_SEL>, + <&topckgen CLK_TOP_VDEC_SEL>, + <&apmixedsys CLK_APMIXED_VCODECPLL>, + <&apmixedsys CLK_APMIXED_VENCPLL>; + assigned-clock-parents = <&topckgen CLK_TOP_VCODECPLL_370P5>, + <&topckgen CLK_TOP_UNIVPLL_D2>, + <&topckgen CLK_TOP_VCODECPLL>; + assigned-clock-rates = <0>, <0>, <0>, <1482000000>, <800000000>; }; vcodec_enc: vcodec@18002000 { @@ -105,4 +114,8 @@ vcodec_dec: vcodec@16000000 { "venc_sel", "venc_lt_sel_src", "venc_lt_sel"; + assigned-clocks = <&topckgen CLK_TOP_VENC_SEL>, + <&topckgen CLK_TOP_VENC_LT_SEL>; + assigned-clock-parents = <&topckgen CLK_TOP_VENCPLL_D2>, + <&topckgen CLK_TOP_UNIVPLL1_D2>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/rcar_vin.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/rcar_vin.txt index 0dd84a183ca7..224a4615b418 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/rcar_vin.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/rcar_vin.txt @@ -7,12 +7,13 @@ family of devices. Each VIN instance has a single parallel input that supports RGB and YUV video, with both external synchronization and BT.656 synchronization for the latter. Depending on the instance the VIN input is connected to external SoC pins, or -on Gen3 platforms to a CSI-2 receiver. +on Gen3 and RZ/G2 platforms to a CSI-2 receiver. - compatible: Must be one or more of the following - "renesas,vin-r8a7743" for the R8A7743 device - "renesas,vin-r8a7744" for the R8A7744 device - "renesas,vin-r8a7745" for the R8A7745 device + - "renesas,vin-r8a774c0" for the R8A774C0 device - "renesas,vin-r8a7778" for the R8A7778 device - "renesas,vin-r8a7779" for the R8A7779 device - "renesas,vin-r8a7790" for the R8A7790 device @@ -61,10 +62,10 @@ The per-board settings Gen2 platforms: - data-enable-active: polarity of CLKENB signal, see [1] for description. Default is active high. -The per-board settings Gen3 platforms: +The per-board settings Gen3 and RZ/G2 platforms: -Gen3 platforms can support both a single connected parallel input source -from external SoC pins (port@0) and/or multiple parallel input sources +Gen3 and RZ/G2 platforms can support both a single connected parallel input +source from external SoC pins (port@0) and/or multiple parallel input sources from local SoC CSI-2 receivers (port@1) depending on SoC. - renesas,id - ID number of the VIN, VINx in the documentation. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,fcp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,fcp.txt index 3ec91803ba58..79c37395b396 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,fcp.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,fcp.txt @@ -2,8 +2,9 @@ Renesas R-Car Frame Compression Processor (FCP) ----------------------------------------------- The FCP is a companion module of video processing modules in the Renesas R-Car -Gen3 SoCs. It provides data compression and decompression, data caching, and -conversion of AXI transactions in order to reduce the memory bandwidth. +Gen3 and RZ/G2 SoCs. It provides data compression and decompression, data +caching, and conversion of AXI transactions in order to reduce the memory +bandwidth. There are three types of FCP: FCP for Codec (FCPC), FCP for VSP (FCPV) and FCP for FDP (FCPF). Their configuration and behaviour depend on the module they diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,rcar-csi2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,rcar-csi2.txt index 541d936b62e8..d63275e17afd 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,rcar-csi2.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,rcar-csi2.txt @@ -2,12 +2,13 @@ Renesas R-Car MIPI CSI-2 ------------------------ The R-Car CSI-2 receiver device provides MIPI CSI-2 capabilities for the -Renesas R-Car family of devices. It is used in conjunction with the +Renesas R-Car and RZ/G2 family of devices. It is used in conjunction with the R-Car VIN module, which provides the video capture capabilities. Mandatory properties -------------------- - compatible: Must be one or more of the following + - "renesas,r8a774c0-csi2" for the R8A774C0 device. - "renesas,r8a7795-csi2" for the R8A7795 device. - "renesas,r8a7796-csi2" for the R8A7796 device. - "renesas,r8a77965-csi2" for the R8A77965 device. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,vsp1.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,vsp1.txt index 16427017cb45..cd5a955b2ea0 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,vsp1.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,vsp1.txt @@ -2,13 +2,13 @@ The VSP is a video processing engine that supports up-/down-scaling, alpha blending, color space conversion and various other image processing features. -It can be found in the Renesas R-Car second generation SoCs. +It can be found in the Renesas R-Car Gen2, R-Car Gen3, RZ/G1, and RZ/G2 SoCs. Required properties: - compatible: Must contain one of the following values - - "renesas,vsp1" for the R-Car Gen2 VSP1 - - "renesas,vsp2" for the R-Car Gen3 VSP2 + - "renesas,vsp1" for the R-Car Gen2 and RZ/G1 VSP1 + - "renesas,vsp2" for the R-Car Gen3 and RZ/G2 VSP2 - reg: Base address and length of the registers block for the VSP. - interrupts: VSP interrupt specifier. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/si470x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/si470x.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a9403558362e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/si470x.txt @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +* Silicon Labs FM Radio receiver + +The Silicon Labs Si470x is family of FM radio receivers with receive power scan +supporting 76-108 MHz, programmable through an I2C interface. +Some of them includes an RDS encoder. + +Required Properties: +- compatible: Should contain "silabs,si470x" +- reg: the I2C address of the device + +Optional Properties: +- interrupts : The interrupt number +- reset-gpios: GPIO specifier for the chips reset line + +Example: + +&i2c2 { + si470x@63 { + compatible = "silabs,si470x"; + reg = <0x63>; + + interrupt-parent = <&gpj2>; + interrupts = <4 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>; + reset-gpios = <&gpj2 5 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/sun6i-csi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/sun6i-csi.txt index d4ab34f2240c..0dd540bb03db 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/sun6i-csi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/sun6i-csi.txt @@ -6,8 +6,9 @@ Allwinner V3s SoC features a CSI module(CSI1) with parallel interface. Required properties: - compatible: value must be one of: * "allwinner,sun6i-a31-csi" - * "allwinner,sun8i-h3-csi", "allwinner,sun6i-a31-csi" + * "allwinner,sun8i-h3-csi" * "allwinner,sun8i-v3s-csi" + * "allwinner,sun50i-a64-csi" - reg: base address and size of the memory-mapped region. - interrupts: interrupt associated to this IP - clocks: phandles to the clocks feeding the CSI diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/nvidia,tegra20-mc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/nvidia,tegra20-mc.txt index 7d60a50a4fa1..e55328237df4 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/nvidia,tegra20-mc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/nvidia,tegra20-mc.txt @@ -1,26 +1,37 @@ NVIDIA Tegra20 MC(Memory Controller) Required properties: -- compatible : "nvidia,tegra20-mc" -- reg : Should contain 2 register ranges(address and length); see the - example below. Note that the MC registers are interleaved with the - GART registers, and hence must be represented as multiple ranges. +- compatible : "nvidia,tegra20-mc-gart" +- reg : Should contain 2 register ranges: physical base address and length of + the controller's registers and the GART aperture respectively. +- clocks: Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names. + See ../clocks/clock-bindings.txt for details. +- clock-names: Must include the following entries: + - mc: the module's clock input - interrupts : Should contain MC General interrupt. - #reset-cells : Should be 1. This cell represents memory client module ID. The assignments may be found in header file <dt-bindings/memory/tegra20-mc.h> or in the TRM documentation. +- #iommu-cells: Should be 0. This cell represents the number of cells in an + IOMMU specifier needed to encode an address. GART supports only a single + address space that is shared by all devices, therefore no additional + information needed for the address encoding. Example: mc: memory-controller@7000f000 { - compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-mc"; - reg = <0x7000f000 0x024 - 0x7000f03c 0x3c4>; - interrupts = <0 77 0x04>; + compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-mc-gart"; + reg = <0x7000f000 0x400 /* controller registers */ + 0x58000000 0x02000000>; /* GART aperture */ + clocks = <&tegra_car TEGRA20_CLK_MC>; + clock-names = "mc"; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 77 0x04>; #reset-cells = <1>; + #iommu-cells = <0>; }; video-codec@6001a000 { compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-vde"; ... resets = <&mc TEGRA20_MC_RESET_VDE>; + iommus = <&mc>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/aspeed-lpc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/aspeed-lpc.txt index 34dd89087cff..86446074e206 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/aspeed-lpc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/aspeed-lpc.txt @@ -135,6 +135,8 @@ Required properties: - clocks: contains a phandle to the syscon node describing the clocks. There should then be one cell representing the clock to use +Optional properties: + - memory-region: A phandle to a reserved_memory region to be used for the LPC to AHB mapping diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/cirrus,lochnagar.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/cirrus,lochnagar.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..004b0158cf4d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/cirrus,lochnagar.txt @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +Cirrus Logic Lochnagar Audio Development Board + +Lochnagar is an evaluation and development board for Cirrus Logic +Smart CODEC and Amp devices. It allows the connection of most Cirrus +Logic devices on mini-cards, as well as allowing connection of +various application processor systems to provide a full evaluation +platform. Audio system topology, clocking and power can all be +controlled through the Lochnagar, allowing the device under test +to be used in a variety of possible use cases. + +Also see these documents for generic binding information: + [1] GPIO : ../gpio/gpio.txt + +And these for relevant defines: + [2] include/dt-bindings/pinctrl/lochnagar.h + [3] include/dt-bindings/clock/lochnagar.h + +And these documents for the required sub-node binding details: + [4] Clock: ../clock/cirrus,lochnagar.txt + [5] Pinctrl: ../pinctrl/cirrus,lochnagar.txt + [6] Regulator: ../regulator/cirrus,lochnagar.txt + +Required properties: + + - compatible : One of the following strings: + "cirrus,lochnagar1" + "cirrus,lochnagar2" + + - reg : I2C slave address + + - reset-gpios : Reset line to the Lochnagar, see [1]. + +Required sub-nodes: + + - lochnagar-clk : Binding for the clocking components, see [4]. + + - lochnagar-pinctrl : Binding for the pin control components, see [5]. + +Optional sub-nodes: + + - Bindings for the regulator components, see [6]. Only available on + Lochnagar 2. + +Optional properties: + + - present-gpios : Host present line, indicating the presence of a + host system, see [1]. This can be omitted if the present line is + tied in hardware. + +Example: + +lochnagar: lochnagar@22 { + compatible = "cirrus,lochnagar2"; + reg = <0x22>; + + reset-gpios = <&gpio0 55 0>; + present-gpios = <&gpio0 60 0>; + + lochnagar-clk { + compatible = "cirrus,lochnagar2-clk"; + ... + }; + + lochnagar-pinctrl { + compatible = "cirrus,lochnagar-pinctrl"; + ... + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/rohm,bd71837-pmic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/rohm,bd71837-pmic.txt index a4b056761eaa..d5f68ac78d15 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/rohm,bd71837-pmic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/rohm,bd71837-pmic.txt @@ -23,6 +23,20 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - clock-output-names : Should contain name for output clock. +- rohm,reset-snvs-powered : Transfer BD718x7 to SNVS state at reset. + +The BD718x7 supports two different HW states as reset target states. States +are called as SNVS and READY. At READY state all the PMIC power outputs go +down and OTP is reload. At the SNVS state all other logic and external +devices apart from the SNVS power domain are shut off. Please refer to NXP +i.MX8 documentation for further information regarding SNVS state. When a +reset is done via SNVS state the PMIC OTP data is not reload. This causes +power outputs that have been under SW control to stay down when reset has +switched power state to SNVS. If reset is done via READY state the power +outputs will be returned to HW control by OTP loading. Thus the reset +target state is set to READY by default. If SNVS state is used the boot +crucial regulators must have the regulator-always-on and regulator-boot-on +properties set in regulator node. Example: @@ -43,6 +57,7 @@ Example: #clock-cells = <0>; clocks = <&osc 0>; clock-output-names = "bd71837-32k-out"; + rohm,reset-snvs-powered; regulators { buck1: BUCK1 { @@ -50,8 +65,10 @@ Example: regulator-min-microvolt = <700000>; regulator-max-microvolt = <1300000>; regulator-boot-on; + regulator-always-on; regulator-ramp-delay = <1250>; }; + // [...] }; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/st,stpmic1.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/st,stpmic1.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..afd45c089585 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/st,stpmic1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ +* STMicroelectronics STPMIC1 Power Management IC + +Required properties: +- compatible: : "st,stpmic1" +- reg: : The I2C slave address for the STPMIC1 chip. +- interrupts: : The interrupt line the device is connected to. +- #interrupt-cells: : Should be 1. +- interrupt-controller: : Marks the device node as an interrupt controller. + Interrupt numbers are defined at + dt-bindings/mfd/st,stpmic1.h. + +STPMIC1 consists in a varied group of sub-devices. +Each sub-device binding is be described in own documentation file. + +Device Description +------ ------------ +st,stpmic1-onkey : Power on key, see ../input/st,stpmic1-onkey.txt +st,stpmic1-regulators : Regulators, see ../regulator/st,stpmic1-regulator.txt +st,stpmic1-wdt : Watchdog, see ../watchdog/st,stpmic1-wdt.txt + +Example: + +#include <dt-bindings/mfd/st,stpmic1.h> + +pmic: pmic@33 { + compatible = "st,stpmic1"; + reg = <0x33>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpioa>; + interrupts = <0 2>; + + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + + onkey { + compatible = "st,stpmic1-onkey"; + interrupts = <IT_PONKEY_F 0>,<IT_PONKEY_R 1>; + interrupt-names = "onkey-falling", "onkey-rising"; + power-off-time-sec = <10>; + }; + + watchdog { + compatible = "st,stpmic1-wdt"; + }; + + regulators { + compatible = "st,stpmic1-regulators"; + + vdd_core: buck1 { + regulator-name = "vdd_core"; + regulator-boot-on; + regulator-min-microvolt = <700000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1200000>; + }; + vdd: buck3 { + regulator-name = "vdd"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <3300000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>; + regulator-boot-on; + regulator-pull-down; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/stmpe.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/stmpe.txt index c797c05cd3c2..d4408a417193 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/stmpe.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/stmpe.txt @@ -4,15 +4,29 @@ STMPE is an MFD device which may expose the following inbuilt devices: gpio, keypad, touchscreen, adc, pwm, rotator. Required properties: - - compatible : "st,stmpe[610|801|811|1600|1601|2401|2403]" - - reg : I2C/SPI address of the device + - compatible : "st,stmpe[610|801|811|1600|1601|2401|2403]" + - reg : I2C/SPI address of the device Optional properties: - - interrupts : The interrupt outputs from the controller - - interrupt-controller : Marks the device node as an interrupt controller - - wakeup-source : Marks the input device as wakable - - st,autosleep-timeout : Valid entries (ms); 4, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512 and 1024 - - irq-gpio : If present, which GPIO to use for event IRQ + - interrupts : The interrupt outputs from the controller + - interrupt-controller : Marks the device node as an interrupt controller + - wakeup-source : Marks the input device as wakable + - st,autosleep-timeout : Valid entries (ms); 4, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512 and 1024 + - irq-gpio : If present, which GPIO to use for event IRQ + +Optional properties for devices with touch and ADC (STMPE811|STMPE610): + - st,sample-time : ADC conversion time in number of clock. + 0 -> 36 clocks 4 -> 80 clocks (recommended) + 1 -> 44 clocks 5 -> 96 clocks + 2 -> 56 clocks 6 -> 124 clocks + 3 -> 64 clocks + - st,mod-12b : ADC Bit mode + 0 -> 10bit ADC 1 -> 12bit ADC + - st,ref-sel : ADC reference source + 0 -> internal 1 -> external + - st,adc-freq : ADC Clock speed + 0 -> 1.625 MHz 2 || 3 -> 6.5 MHz + 1 -> 3.25 MHz Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/lantiq/rcu-gphy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/lantiq/rcu-gphy.txt deleted file mode 100644 index a0c19bd1ce66..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/lantiq/rcu-gphy.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ -Lantiq XWAY SoC GPHY binding -============================ - -This binding describes a software-defined ethernet PHY, provided by the RCU -module on newer Lantiq XWAY SoCs (xRX200 and newer). - -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -Required properties: -- compatible : Should be one of - "lantiq,xrx200a1x-gphy" - "lantiq,xrx200a2x-gphy" - "lantiq,xrx300-gphy" - "lantiq,xrx330-gphy" -- reg : Addrress of the GPHY FW load address register -- resets : Must reference the RCU GPHY reset bit -- reset-names : One entry, value must be "gphy" or optional "gphy2" -- clocks : A reference to the (PMU) GPHY clock gate - -Optional properties: -- lantiq,gphy-mode : GPHY_MODE_GE (default) or GPHY_MODE_FE as defined in - <dt-bindings/mips/lantiq_xway_gphy.h> - - -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -Example for the GPHys on the xRX200 SoCs: - -#include <dt-bindings/mips/lantiq_rcu_gphy.h> - gphy0: gphy@20 { - compatible = "lantiq,xrx200a2x-gphy"; - reg = <0x20 0x4>; - - resets = <&reset0 31 30>, <&reset1 7 7>; - reset-names = "gphy", "gphy2"; - clocks = <&pmu0 XRX200_PMU_GATE_GPHY>; - lantiq,gphy-mode = <GPHY_MODE_GE>; - }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/lantiq/rcu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/lantiq/rcu.txt index 7f0822b4beae..58d51f480c9e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/lantiq/rcu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/lantiq/rcu.txt @@ -26,24 +26,6 @@ Example of the RCU bindings on a xRX200 SoC: ranges = <0x0 0x203000 0x100>; big-endian; - gphy0: gphy@20 { - compatible = "lantiq,xrx200a2x-gphy"; - reg = <0x20 0x4>; - - resets = <&reset0 31 30>, <&reset1 7 7>; - reset-names = "gphy", "gphy2"; - lantiq,gphy-mode = <GPHY_MODE_GE>; - }; - - gphy1: gphy@68 { - compatible = "lantiq,xrx200a2x-gphy"; - reg = <0x68 0x4>; - - resets = <&reset0 29 28>, <&reset1 6 6>; - reset-names = "gphy", "gphy2"; - lantiq,gphy-mode = <GPHY_MODE_GE>; - }; - reset0: reset-controller@10 { compatible = "lantiq,xrx200-reset"; reg = <0x10 4>, <0x14 4>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/qcom,fastrpc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/qcom,fastrpc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2a1827ab50d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/qcom,fastrpc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ +Qualcomm Technologies, Inc. FastRPC Driver + +The FastRPC implements an IPC (Inter-Processor Communication) +mechanism that allows for clients to transparently make remote method +invocations across DSP and APPS boundaries. This enables developers +to offload tasks to the DSP and free up the application processor for +other tasks. + +- compatible: + Usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: must be "qcom,fastrpc" + +- label + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: should specify the dsp domain name this fastrpc + corresponds to. must be one of this: "adsp", "mdsp", "sdsp", "cdsp" + +- #address-cells + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: Must be 1 + +- #size-cells + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: Must be 0 + += COMPUTE BANKS +Each subnode of the Fastrpc represents compute context banks available +on the dsp. +- All Compute context banks MUST contain the following properties: + +- compatible: + Usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: must be "qcom,fastrpc-compute-cb" + +- reg + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: Context Bank ID. + +- qcom,nsessions: + Usage: Optional + Value type: <u32> + Defination: A value indicating how many sessions can share this + context bank. Defaults to 1 when this property + is not specified. + +Example: + +adsp-pil { + compatible = "qcom,msm8996-adsp-pil"; + ... + smd-edge { + label = "lpass"; + fastrpc { + compatible = "qcom,fastrpc"; + qcom,smd-channels = "fastrpcsmd-apps-dsp"; + label = "adsp"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + cb@1 { + compatible = "qcom,fastrpc-compute-cb"; + reg = <1>; + }; + + cb@2 { + compatible = "qcom,fastrpc-compute-cb"; + reg = <2>; + }; + ... + }; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-esdhc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-esdhc.txt index 9201a7d8d7b0..540c65ed9cba 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-esdhc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-esdhc.txt @@ -15,6 +15,7 @@ Required properties: "fsl,imx6q-usdhc" "fsl,imx6sl-usdhc" "fsl,imx6sx-usdhc" + "fsl,imx6ull-usdhc" "fsl,imx7d-usdhc" "fsl,imx8qxp-usdhc" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc.txt index f5a0923b34ca..cdbcfd3a4ff2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc.txt @@ -62,6 +62,8 @@ Optional properties: be referred to mmc-pwrseq-simple.txt. But now it's reused as a tunable delay waiting for I/O signalling and card power supply to be stable, regardless of whether pwrseq-simple is used. Default to 10ms if no available. +- supports-cqe : The presence of this property indicates that the corresponding + MMC host controller supports HW command queue feature. *NOTE* on CD and WP polarity. To use common for all SD/MMC host controllers line polarity properties, we have to fix the meaning of the "normal" and "inverted" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia,tegra20-sdhci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia,tegra20-sdhci.txt index 32b4b4e41923..2cecdc71d94c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia,tegra20-sdhci.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia,tegra20-sdhci.txt @@ -39,12 +39,16 @@ sdhci@c8000200 { bus-width = <8>; }; -Optional properties for Tegra210 and Tegra186: +Optional properties for Tegra210, Tegra186 and Tegra194: - pinctrl-names, pinctrl-0, pinctrl-1 : Specify pad voltage configurations. Valid pinctrl-names are "sdmmc-3v3" and "sdmmc-1v8" for controllers supporting multiple voltage levels. The order of names should correspond to the pin configuration states in pinctrl-0 and pinctrl-1. +- pinctrl-names : "sdmmc-3v3-drv" and "sdmmc-1v8-drv" are applicable for + Tegra210 where pad config registers are in the pinmux register domain + for pull-up-strength and pull-down-strength values configuration when + using pads at 3V3 and 1V8 levels. - nvidia,only-1-8-v : The presence of this property indicates that the controller operates at a 1.8 V fixed I/O voltage. - nvidia,pad-autocal-pull-up-offset-3v3, diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/ti-omap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/ti-omap.txt index 8de579969763..02fd31cf361d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/ti-omap.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/ti-omap.txt @@ -24,31 +24,3 @@ Examples: dmas = <&sdma 61 &sdma 62>; dma-names = "tx", "rx"; }; - -* TI MMC host controller for OMAP1 and 2420 - -The MMC Host Controller on TI OMAP1 and 2420 family provides -an interface for MMC, SD, and SDIO types of memory cards. - -This file documents differences between the core properties described -by mmc.txt and the properties used by the omap mmc driver. - -Note that this driver will not work with omap2430 or later omaps, -please see the omap hsmmc driver for the current omaps. - -Required properties: -- compatible: Must be "ti,omap2420-mmc", for OMAP2420 controllers -- ti,hwmods: For 2420, must be "msdi<n>", where n is controller - instance starting 1 - -Examples: - - msdi1: mmc@4809c000 { - compatible = "ti,omap2420-mmc"; - ti,hwmods = "msdi1"; - reg = <0x4809c000 0x80>; - interrupts = <83>; - dmas = <&sdma 61 &sdma 62>; - dma-names = "tx", "rx"; - }; - diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/amlogic,meson-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/amlogic,meson-nand.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..3983c11e062c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/amlogic,meson-nand.txt @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +Amlogic NAND Flash Controller (NFC) for GXBB/GXL/AXG family SoCs + +This file documents the properties in addition to those available in +the MTD NAND bindings. + +Required properties: +- compatible : contains one of: + - "amlogic,meson-gxl-nfc" + - "amlogic,meson-axg-nfc" +- clocks : + A list of phandle + clock-specifier pairs for the clocks listed + in clock-names. + +- clock-names: Should contain the following: + "core" - NFC module gate clock + "device" - device clock from eMMC sub clock controller + "rx" - rx clock phase + "tx" - tx clock phase + +- amlogic,mmc-syscon : Required for NAND clocks, it's shared with SD/eMMC + controller port C + +Optional children nodes: +Children nodes represent the available nand chips. + +Other properties: +see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nand.txt for generic bindings. + +Example demonstrate on AXG SoC: + + sd_emmc_c_clkc: mmc@7000 { + compatible = "amlogic,meson-axg-mmc-clkc", "syscon"; + reg = <0x0 0x7000 0x0 0x800>; + }; + + nand-controller@7800 { + compatible = "amlogic,meson-axg-nfc"; + reg = <0x0 0x7800 0x0 0x100>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 34 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>; + + clocks = <&clkc CLKID_SD_EMMC_C>, + <&sd_emmc_c_clkc CLKID_MMC_DIV>, + <&sd_emmc_c_clkc CLKID_MMC_PHASE_RX>, + <&sd_emmc_c_clkc CLKID_MMC_PHASE_TX>; + clock-names = "core", "device", "rx", "tx"; + amlogic,mmc-syscon = <&sd_emmc_c_clkc>; + + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&nand_pins>; + + nand@0 { + reg = <0>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + + nand-on-flash-bbt; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/cadence-quadspi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/cadence-quadspi.txt index bb2075df9b38..4345c3a6f530 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/cadence-quadspi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/cadence-quadspi.txt @@ -4,6 +4,7 @@ Required properties: - compatible : should be one of the following: Generic default - "cdns,qspi-nor". For TI 66AK2G SoC - "ti,k2g-qspi", "cdns,qspi-nor". + For TI AM654 SoC - "ti,am654-ospi", "cdns,qspi-nor". - reg : Contains two entries, each of which is a tuple consisting of a physical address and length. The first entry is the address and length of the controller register set. The second entry is the diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtk-quadspi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtk-quadspi.txt index 56d3668e2c50..a12e3b5c495d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtk-quadspi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtk-quadspi.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -* Serial NOR flash controller for MTK MT81xx (and similar) +* Serial NOR flash controller for MediaTek SoCs Required properties: - compatible: For mt8173, compatible should be "mediatek,mt8173-nor", @@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ Required properties: "mediatek,mt2712-nor", "mediatek,mt8173-nor" "mediatek,mt7622-nor", "mediatek,mt8173-nor" "mediatek,mt7623-nor", "mediatek,mt8173-nor" + "mediatek,mt7629-nor", "mediatek,mt8173-nor" "mediatek,mt8173-nor" - reg: physical base address and length of the controller's register - clocks: the phandle of the clocks needed by the nor controller diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/stm32-fmc2-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/stm32-fmc2-nand.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ad2bef826582 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/stm32-fmc2-nand.txt @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ +STMicroelectronics Flexible Memory Controller 2 (FMC2) +NAND Interface + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be one of: + * st,stm32mp15-fmc2 +- reg: NAND flash controller memory areas. + First region contains the register location. + Regions 2 to 4 respectively contain the data, command, + and address space for CS0. + Regions 5 to 7 contain the same areas for CS1. +- interrupts: The interrupt number +- pinctrl-0: Standard Pinctrl phandle (see: pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt) +- clocks: The clock needed by the NAND flash controller + +Optional properties: +- resets: Reference to a reset controller asserting the FMC controller +- dmas: DMA specifiers (see: dma/stm32-mdma.txt) +- dma-names: Must be "tx", "rx" and "ecc" + +* NAND device bindings: + +Required properties: +- reg: describes the CS lines assigned to the NAND device. + +Optional properties: +- nand-on-flash-bbt: see nand.txt +- nand-ecc-strength: see nand.txt +- nand-ecc-step-size: see nand.txt + +The following ECC strength and step size are currently supported: + - nand-ecc-strength = <1>, nand-ecc-step-size = <512> (Hamming) + - nand-ecc-strength = <4>, nand-ecc-step-size = <512> (BCH4) + - nand-ecc-strength = <8>, nand-ecc-step-size = <512> (BCH8) (default) + +Example: + + fmc: nand-controller@58002000 { + compatible = "st,stm32mp15-fmc2"; + reg = <0x58002000 0x1000>, + <0x80000000 0x1000>, + <0x88010000 0x1000>, + <0x88020000 0x1000>, + <0x81000000 0x1000>, + <0x89010000 0x1000>, + <0x89020000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 48 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clocks = <&rcc FMC_K>; + resets = <&rcc FMC_R>; + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&fmc_pins_a>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + nand@0 { + reg = <0>; + nand-on-flash-bbt; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/btusb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/btusb.txt index 37d67926dd6d..b1ad6ee68e90 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/btusb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/btusb.txt @@ -9,6 +9,9 @@ Required properties: (more may be added later) are: "usb1286,204e" (Marvell 8997) + "usbcf3,e300" (Qualcomm QCA6174A) + "usb4ca,301a" (Qualcomm QCA6174A (Lite-On)) + Also, vendors that use btusb may have device additional properties, e.g: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-bt-8xxx.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cpsw-phy-sel.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cpsw-phy-sel.txt index 764c0c79b43d..5d76f991c027 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cpsw-phy-sel.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cpsw-phy-sel.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -TI CPSW Phy mode Selection Device Tree Bindings +TI CPSW Phy mode Selection Device Tree Bindings (DEPRECATED) ----------------------------------------------- Required properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/dsa.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/dsa.txt index 35694c0c376b..d66a5292b9d3 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/dsa.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/dsa.txt @@ -71,6 +71,10 @@ properties, described in binding documents: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fixed-link.txt for details. +- local-mac-address : See + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ethernet.txt + for details. + Example The following example shows three switches on three MDIO busses, @@ -97,6 +101,7 @@ linked into one DSA cluster. port@1 { reg = <1>; label = "lan1"; + local-mac-address = [00 00 00 00 00 00]; }; port@2 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/ksz.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/ksz.txt index 0f407fb371ce..e7db7268fd0f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/ksz.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/ksz.txt @@ -7,6 +7,11 @@ Required properties: of the following: - "microchip,ksz9477" - "microchip,ksz9897" + - "microchip,ksz9896" + - "microchip,ksz9567" + - "microchip,ksz8565" + - "microchip,ksz9893" + - "microchip,ksz9563" Optional properties: @@ -19,58 +24,96 @@ Examples: Ethernet switch connected via SPI to the host, CPU port wired to eth0: - eth0: ethernet@10001000 { - fixed-link { - speed = <1000>; - full-duplex; - }; - }; + eth0: ethernet@10001000 { + fixed-link { + speed = <1000>; + full-duplex; + }; + }; - spi1: spi@f8008000 { - pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_spi_ksz>; - cs-gpios = <&pioC 25 0>; - id = <1>; + spi1: spi@f8008000 { + pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_spi_ksz>; + cs-gpios = <&pioC 25 0>; + id = <1>; - ksz9477: ksz9477@0 { - compatible = "microchip,ksz9477"; - reg = <0>; + ksz9477: ksz9477@0 { + compatible = "microchip,ksz9477"; + reg = <0>; - spi-max-frequency = <44000000>; - spi-cpha; - spi-cpol; + spi-max-frequency = <44000000>; + spi-cpha; + spi-cpol; - ports { - #address-cells = <1>; - #size-cells = <0>; - port@0 { - reg = <0>; - label = "lan1"; - }; - port@1 { - reg = <1>; - label = "lan2"; - }; - port@2 { - reg = <2>; - label = "lan3"; - }; - port@3 { - reg = <3>; - label = "lan4"; - }; - port@4 { - reg = <4>; - label = "lan5"; - }; - port@5 { - reg = <5>; - label = "cpu"; - ethernet = <ð0>; - fixed-link { - speed = <1000>; - full-duplex; - }; - }; - }; - }; - }; + ports { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + port@0 { + reg = <0>; + label = "lan1"; + }; + port@1 { + reg = <1>; + label = "lan2"; + }; + port@2 { + reg = <2>; + label = "lan3"; + }; + port@3 { + reg = <3>; + label = "lan4"; + }; + port@4 { + reg = <4>; + label = "lan5"; + }; + port@5 { + reg = <5>; + label = "cpu"; + ethernet = <ð0>; + fixed-link { + speed = <1000>; + full-duplex; + }; + }; + }; + }; + ksz8565: ksz8565@0 { + compatible = "microchip,ksz8565"; + reg = <0>; + + spi-max-frequency = <44000000>; + spi-cpha; + spi-cpol; + + ports { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + port@0 { + reg = <0>; + label = "lan1"; + }; + port@1 { + reg = <1>; + label = "lan2"; + }; + port@2 { + reg = <2>; + label = "lan3"; + }; + port@3 { + reg = <3>; + label = "lan4"; + }; + port@6 { + reg = <6>; + label = "cpu"; + ethernet = <ð0>; + fixed-link { + speed = <1000>; + full-duplex; + }; + }; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/mt7530.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/mt7530.txt index aa3527f71fdc..47aa205ee0bd 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/mt7530.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/mt7530.txt @@ -3,12 +3,16 @@ Mediatek MT7530 Ethernet switch Required properties: -- compatible: Must be compatible = "mediatek,mt7530"; +- compatible: may be compatible = "mediatek,mt7530" + or compatible = "mediatek,mt7621" - #address-cells: Must be 1. - #size-cells: Must be 0. - mediatek,mcm: Boolean; if defined, indicates that either MT7530 is the part on multi-chip module belong to MT7623A has or the remotely standalone chip as the function MT7623N reference board provided for. + +If compatible mediatek,mt7530 is set then the following properties are required + - core-supply: Phandle to the regulator node necessary for the core power. - io-supply: Phandle to the regulator node necessary for the I/O power. See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/mt6323-regulator.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-enetc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-enetc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c812e25ae90f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-enetc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +* ENETC ethernet device tree bindings + +Depending on board design and ENETC port type (internal or +external) there are two supported link modes specified by +below device tree bindings. + +Required properties: + +- reg : Specifies PCIe Device Number and Function + Number of the ENETC endpoint device, according + to parent node bindings. +- compatible : Should be "fsl,enetc". + +1) The ENETC external port is connected to a MDIO configurable phy: + +In this case, the ENETC node should include a "mdio" sub-node +that in turn should contain the "ethernet-phy" node describing the +external phy. Below properties are required, their bindings +already defined in ethernet.txt or phy.txt, under +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/*. + +Required: + +- phy-handle : Phandle to a PHY on the MDIO bus. + Defined in ethernet.txt. + +- phy-connection-type : Defined in ethernet.txt. + +- mdio : "mdio" node, defined in mdio.txt. + +- ethernet-phy : "ethernet-phy" node, defined in phy.txt. + +Example: + + ethernet@0,0 { + compatible = "fsl,enetc"; + reg = <0x000000 0 0 0 0>; + phy-handle = <&sgmii_phy0>; + phy-connection-type = "sgmii"; + + mdio { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + sgmii_phy0: ethernet-phy@2 { + reg = <0x2>; + }; + }; + }; + +2) The ENETC port is an internal port or has a fixed-link external +connection: + +In this case, the ENETC port node defines a fixed link connection, +as specified by "fixed-link.txt", under +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/*. + +Required: + +- fixed-link : "fixed-link" node, defined in "fixed-link.txt". + +Example: + ethernet@0,2 { + compatible = "fsl,enetc"; + reg = <0x000200 0 0 0 0>; + fixed-link { + speed = <1000>; + full-duplex; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/macb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/macb.txt index 3e17ac1d5d58..174f292d8a3e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/macb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/macb.txt @@ -3,8 +3,8 @@ Required properties: - compatible: Should be "cdns,[<chip>-]{macb|gem}" Use "cdns,at91rm9200-emac" Atmel at91rm9200 SoC. - Use "cdns,at91sam9260-macb" for Atmel at91sam9 SoCs or the 10/100Mbit IP - available on sama5d3 SoCs. + Use "cdns,at91sam9260-macb" for Atmel at91sam9 SoCs. + Use "cdns,sam9x60-macb" for Microchip sam9x60 SoC. Use "cdns,np4-macb" for NP4 SoC devices. Use "cdns,at32ap7000-macb" for other 10/100 usage or use the generic form: "cdns,macb". Use "cdns,pc302-gem" for Picochip picoXcell pc302 and later devices based on diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-armada-370-neta.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-armada-370-neta.txt index bedcfd5a52cd..691f886cfc4a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-armada-370-neta.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-armada-370-neta.txt @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Optional properties: "marvell,armada-370-neta" and 9800B for others. - clock-names: List of names corresponding to clocks property; shall be "core" for core clock and "bus" for the optional bus clock. - +- phys: comphy for the ethernet port, see ../phy/phy-bindings.txt Optional properties (valid only for Armada XP/38x): diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-mux-multiplexer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-mux-multiplexer.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..534e38058fe0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-mux-multiplexer.txt @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +Properties for an MDIO bus multiplexer consumer device + +This is a special case of MDIO mux when MDIO mux is defined as a consumer +of a mux producer device. The mux producer can be of any type like mmio mux +producer, gpio mux producer or generic register based mux producer. + +Required properties in addition to the MDIO Bus multiplexer properties: + +- compatible : should be "mmio-mux-multiplexer" +- mux-controls : mux controller node to use for operating the mux +- mdio-parent-bus : phandle to the parent MDIO bus. + +each child node of mdio bus multiplexer consumer device represent a mdio +bus. + +for more information please refer +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mux/mux-controller.txt +and Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-mux.txt + +Example: +In below example the Mux producer and consumer are separate nodes. + +&i2c0 { + fpga@66 { // fpga connected to i2c + compatible = "fsl,lx2160aqds-fpga", "fsl,fpga-qixis-i2c", + "simple-mfd"; + reg = <0x66>; + + mux: mux-controller { // Mux Producer + compatible = "reg-mux"; + #mux-control-cells = <1>; + mux-reg-masks = <0x54 0xf8>, /* 0: reg 0x54, bits 7:3 */ + <0x54 0x07>; /* 1: reg 0x54, bits 2:0 */ + }; + }; +}; + +mdio-mux-1 { // Mux consumer + compatible = "mdio-mux-multiplexer"; + mux-controls = <&mux 0>; + mdio-parent-bus = <&emdio1>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + mdio@0 { + reg = <0x0>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + }; + + mdio@8 { + reg = <0x8>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + }; + + .. + .. +}; + +mdio-mux-2 { // Mux consumer + compatible = "mdio-mux-multiplexer"; + mux-controls = <&mux 1>; + mdio-parent-bus = <&emdio2>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + mdio@0 { + reg = <0x0>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + }; + + mdio@1 { + reg = <0x1>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + }; + + .. + .. +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mediatek-bluetooth.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mediatek-bluetooth.txt index 14ceb2a5b4e8..41a7dcc80f5b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mediatek-bluetooth.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mediatek-bluetooth.txt @@ -33,3 +33,67 @@ Example: clock-names = "ref"; }; }; + +MediaTek UART based Bluetooth Devices +================================== + +This device is a serial attached device to UART device and thus it must be a +child node of the serial node with UART. + +Please refer to the following documents for generic properties: + + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/slave-device.txt + +Required properties: + +- compatible: Must be + "mediatek,mt7663u-bluetooth": for MT7663U device + "mediatek,mt7668u-bluetooth": for MT7668U device +- vcc-supply: Main voltage regulator +- pinctrl-names: Should be "default", "runtime" +- pinctrl-0: Should contain UART RXD low when the device is powered up to + enter proper bootstrap mode. +- pinctrl-1: Should contain UART mode pin ctrl + +Optional properties: + +- reset-gpios: GPIO used to reset the device whose initial state keeps low, + if the GPIO is missing, then board-level design should be + guaranteed. +- current-speed: Current baud rate of the device whose defaults to 921600 + +Example: + + uart1_pins_boot: uart1-default { + pins-dat { + pinmux = <MT7623_PIN_81_URXD1_FUNC_GPIO81>; + output-low; + }; + }; + + uart1_pins_runtime: uart1-runtime { + pins-dat { + pinmux = <MT7623_PIN_81_URXD1_FUNC_URXD1>, + <MT7623_PIN_82_UTXD1_FUNC_UTXD1>; + }; + }; + + uart1: serial@11003000 { + compatible = "mediatek,mt7623-uart", + "mediatek,mt6577-uart"; + reg = <0 0x11003000 0 0x400>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 52 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>; + clocks = <&pericfg CLK_PERI_UART1_SEL>, + <&pericfg CLK_PERI_UART1>; + clock-names = "baud", "bus"; + + bluetooth { + compatible = "mediatek,mt7663u-bluetooth"; + vcc-supply = <®_5v>; + reset-gpios = <&pio 24 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + pinctrl-names = "default", "runtime"; + pinctrl-0 = <&uart1_pins_boot>; + pinctrl-1 = <&uart1_pins_runtime>; + current-speed = <921600>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nixge.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nixge.txt index e55af7f0881a..85d7240a9b20 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nixge.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nixge.txt @@ -1,17 +1,53 @@ * NI XGE Ethernet controller Required properties: -- compatible: Should be "ni,xge-enet-2.00" -- reg: Address and length of the register set for the device +- compatible: Should be "ni,xge-enet-3.00", but can be "ni,xge-enet-2.00" for + older device trees with DMA engines co-located in the address map, + with the one reg entry to describe the whole device. +- reg: Address and length of the register set for the device. It contains the + information of registers in the same order as described by reg-names. +- reg-names: Should contain the reg names + "dma": DMA engine control and status region + "ctrl": MDIO and PHY control and status region - interrupts: Should contain tx and rx interrupt - interrupt-names: Should be "rx" and "tx" - phy-mode: See ethernet.txt file in the same directory. -- phy-handle: See ethernet.txt file in the same directory. - nvmem-cells: Phandle of nvmem cell containing the MAC address - nvmem-cell-names: Should be "address" +Optional properties: +- mdio subnode to indicate presence of MDIO controller +- fixed-link : Assume a fixed link. See fixed-link.txt in the same directory. + Use instead of phy-handle. +- phy-handle: See ethernet.txt file in the same directory. + Examples (10G generic PHY): nixge0: ethernet@40000000 { + compatible = "ni,xge-enet-3.00"; + reg = <0x40000000 0x4000 + 0x41002000 0x2000>; + reg-names = "dma", "ctrl"; + + nvmem-cells = <ð1_addr>; + nvmem-cell-names = "address"; + + interrupts = <0 29 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, <0 30 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + interrupt-names = "rx", "tx"; + interrupt-parent = <&intc>; + + phy-mode = "xgmii"; + phy-handle = <ðernet_phy1>; + + mdio { + ethernet_phy1: ethernet-phy@4 { + compatible = "ethernet-phy-ieee802.3-c45"; + reg = <4>; + }; + }; + }; + +Examples (10G generic PHY, no MDIO): + nixge0: ethernet@40000000 { compatible = "ni,xge-enet-2.00"; reg = <0x40000000 0x6000>; @@ -24,9 +60,33 @@ Examples (10G generic PHY): phy-mode = "xgmii"; phy-handle = <ðernet_phy1>; + }; + +Examples (1G generic fixed-link + MDIO): + nixge0: ethernet@40000000 { + compatible = "ni,xge-enet-2.00"; + reg = <0x40000000 0x6000>; - ethernet_phy1: ethernet-phy@4 { - compatible = "ethernet-phy-ieee802.3-c45"; - reg = <4>; + nvmem-cells = <ð1_addr>; + nvmem-cell-names = "address"; + + interrupts = <0 29 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, <0 30 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + interrupt-names = "rx", "tx"; + interrupt-parent = <&intc>; + + phy-mode = "xgmii"; + + fixed-link { + speed = <1000>; + pause; + link-gpios = <&gpio0 63 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + }; + + mdio { + ethernet_phy1: ethernet-phy@4 { + compatible = "ethernet-phy-ieee802.3-c22"; + reg = <4>; + }; }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/qcom,ethqos.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/qcom,ethqos.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..fcf5035810b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/qcom,ethqos.txt @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +Qualcomm Ethernet ETHQOS device + +This documents dwmmac based ethernet device which supports Gigabit +ethernet for version v2.3.0 onwards. + +This device has following properties: + +Required properties: + +- compatible: Should be qcom,qcs404-ethqos" + +- reg: Address and length of the register set for the device + +- reg-names: Should contain register names "stmmaceth", "rgmii" + +- clocks: Should contain phandle to clocks + +- clock-names: Should contain clock names "stmmaceth", "pclk", + "ptp_ref", "rgmii" + +- interrupts: Should contain phandle to interrupts + +- interrupt-names: Should contain interrupt names "macirq", "eth_lpi" + +Rest of the properties are defined in stmmac.txt file in same directory + + +Example: + +ethernet: ethernet@7a80000 { + compatible = "qcom,qcs404-ethqos"; + reg = <0x07a80000 0x10000>, + <0x07a96000 0x100>; + reg-names = "stmmaceth", "rgmii"; + clock-names = "stmmaceth", "pclk", "ptp_ref", "rgmii"; + clocks = <&gcc GCC_ETH_AXI_CLK>, + <&gcc GCC_ETH_SLAVE_AHB_CLK>, + <&gcc GCC_ETH_PTP_CLK>, + <&gcc GCC_ETH_RGMII_CLK>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 56 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 55 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + interrupt-names = "macirq", "eth_lpi"; + snps,reset-gpio = <&tlmm 60 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + snps,reset-active-low; + + snps,txpbl = <8>; + snps,rxpbl = <2>; + snps,aal; + snps,tso; + + phy-handle = <&phy1>; + phy-mode = "rgmii"; + + mdio { + #address-cells = <0x1>; + #size-cells = <0x0>; + compatible = "snps,dwmac-mdio"; + phy1: phy@4 { + device_type = "ethernet-phy"; + reg = <0x4>; + }; + }; + +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/stm32-dwmac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/stm32-dwmac.txt index 1341012722aa..a90eef11dc46 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/stm32-dwmac.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/stm32-dwmac.txt @@ -14,8 +14,7 @@ Required properties: - clock-names: Should be "stmmaceth" for the host clock. Should be "mac-clk-tx" for the MAC TX clock. Should be "mac-clk-rx" for the MAC RX clock. - For MPU family need to add also "ethstp" for power mode clock and, - "syscfg-clk" for SYSCFG clock. + For MPU family need to add also "ethstp" for power mode clock - interrupt-names: Should contain a list of interrupt names corresponding to the interrupts in the interrupts property, if available. Should be "macirq" for the main MAC IRQ @@ -24,9 +23,9 @@ Required properties: encompases the glue register, and the offset of the control register. Optional properties: -- clock-names: For MPU family "mac-clk-ck" for PHY without quartz -- st,int-phyclk (boolean) : valid only where PHY do not have quartz and need to be clock - by RCC +- clock-names: For MPU family "eth-ck" for PHY without quartz +- st,eth-clk-sel (boolean) : set this property in RGMII PHY when you want to select RCC clock instead of ETH_CLK125. +- st,eth-ref-clk-sel (boolean) : set this property in RMII mode when you have PHY without crystal 50MHz and want to select RCC clock instead of ETH_REF_CLK. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/mediatek,mt76.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/mediatek,mt76.txt index 0c17a0ec9b7b..7b9a776230c0 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/mediatek,mt76.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/mediatek,mt76.txt @@ -4,6 +4,13 @@ This node provides properties for configuring the MediaTek mt76xx wireless device. The node is expected to be specified as a child node of the PCI controller to which the wireless chip is connected. +Alternatively, it can specify the wireless part of the MT7628/MT7688 SoC. +For SoC, use the compatible string "mediatek,mt7628-wmac" and the following +properties: + +- reg: Address and length of the register set for the device. +- interrupts: Main device interrupt + Optional properties: - mac-address: See ethernet.txt in the parent directory @@ -30,3 +37,15 @@ Optional nodes: }; }; }; + +MT7628 example: + +wmac: wmac@10300000 { + compatible = "mediatek,mt7628-wmac"; + reg = <0x10300000 0x100000>; + + interrupt-parent = <&cpuintc>; + interrupts = <6>; + + mediatek,mtd-eeprom = <&factory 0x0000>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/imx-ocotp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/imx-ocotp.txt index 792bc5fafeb9..7a999a135e56 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/imx-ocotp.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/imx-ocotp.txt @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ Freescale i.MX6 On-Chip OTP Controller (OCOTP) device tree bindings This binding represents the on-chip eFuse OTP controller found on -i.MX6Q/D, i.MX6DL/S, i.MX6SL, i.MX6SX, i.MX6UL and i.MX6SLL SoCs. +i.MX6Q/D, i.MX6DL/S, i.MX6SL, i.MX6SX, i.MX6UL, i.MX6ULL/ULZ and i.MX6SLL SoCs. Required properties: - compatible: should be one of @@ -9,8 +9,10 @@ Required properties: "fsl,imx6sl-ocotp" (i.MX6SL), or "fsl,imx6sx-ocotp" (i.MX6SX), "fsl,imx6ul-ocotp" (i.MX6UL), + "fsl,imx6ull-ocotp" (i.MX6ULL/ULZ), "fsl,imx7d-ocotp" (i.MX7D/S), "fsl,imx6sll-ocotp" (i.MX6SLL), + "fsl,imx7ulp-ocotp" (i.MX7ULP), followed by "syscon". - #address-cells : Should be 1 - #size-cells : Should be 1 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/xlnx,zynqmp-nvmem.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/xlnx,zynqmp-nvmem.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4881561b3a02 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/xlnx,zynqmp-nvmem.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +-------------------------------------------------------------------------- += Zynq UltraScale+ MPSoC nvmem firmware driver binding = +-------------------------------------------------------------------------- +The nvmem_firmware node provides access to the hardware related data +like soc revision, IDCODE... etc, By using the firmware interface. + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be "xlnx,zynqmp-nvmem-fw" + += Data cells = +Are child nodes of silicon id, bindings of which as described in +bindings/nvmem/nvmem.txt + +------- + Example +------- +firmware { + zynqmp_firmware: zynqmp-firmware { + compatible = "xlnx,zynqmp-firmware"; + method = "smc"; + + nvmem_firmware { + compatible = "xlnx,zynqmp-nvmem-fw"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + + /* Data cells */ + soc_revision: soc_revision { + reg = <0x0 0x4>; + }; + }; + }; +}; + += Data consumers = +Are device nodes which consume nvmem data cells. + +For example: + pcap { + ... + + nvmem-cells = <&soc_revision>; + nvmem-cell-names = "soc_revision"; + + ... + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/opp/opp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/opp/opp.txt index c396c4c0af92..76b6c79604a5 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/opp/opp.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/opp/opp.txt @@ -129,6 +129,9 @@ Optional properties: - opp-microamp-<name>: Named opp-microamp property. Similar to opp-microvolt-<name> property, but for microamp instead. +- opp-level: A value representing the performance level of the device, + expressed as a 32-bit integer. + - clock-latency-ns: Specifies the maximum possible transition latency (in nanoseconds) for switching to this OPP from any other OPP. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/altera-pcie.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/altera-pcie.txt index 6c396f17c91a..816b244a221e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/altera-pcie.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/altera-pcie.txt @@ -1,11 +1,13 @@ * Altera PCIe controller Required properties: -- compatible : should contain "altr,pcie-root-port-1.0" +- compatible : should contain "altr,pcie-root-port-1.0" or "altr,pcie-root-port-2.0" - reg: a list of physical base address and length for TXS and CRA. + For "altr,pcie-root-port-2.0", additional HIP base address and length. - reg-names: must include the following entries: "Txs": TX slave port region "Cra": Control register access region + "Hip": Hard IP region (if "altr,pcie-root-port-2.0") - interrupts: specifies the interrupt source of the parent interrupt controller. The format of the interrupt specifier depends on the parent interrupt controller. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/fsl,imx6q-pcie.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/fsl,imx6q-pcie.txt index d514c1f2365f..a7f5f5afa0e6 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/fsl,imx6q-pcie.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/fsl,imx6q-pcie.txt @@ -9,6 +9,7 @@ Required properties: - "fsl,imx6sx-pcie", - "fsl,imx6qp-pcie" - "fsl,imx7d-pcie" + - "fsl,imx8mq-pcie" - reg: base address and length of the PCIe controller - interrupts: A list of interrupt outputs of the controller. Must contain an entry for each entry in the interrupt-names property. @@ -45,7 +46,7 @@ Additional required properties for imx6sx-pcie: PCIE_PHY power domains - power-domain-names: Must be "pcie", "pcie_phy" -Additional required properties for imx7d-pcie: +Additional required properties for imx7d-pcie and imx8mq-pcie: - power-domains: Must be set to a phandle pointing to PCIE_PHY power domain - resets: Must contain phandles to PCIe-related reset lines exposed by SRC IP block @@ -53,6 +54,11 @@ Additional required properties for imx7d-pcie: - "pciephy" - "apps" - "turnoff" +- fsl,imx7d-pcie-phy: A phandle to an fsl,imx7d-pcie-phy node. + +Additional required properties for imx8mq-pcie: +- clock-names: Must include the following additional entries: + - "pcie_aux" Example: @@ -79,3 +85,13 @@ Example: clocks = <&clks 144>, <&clks 206>, <&clks 189>; clock-names = "pcie", "pcie_bus", "pcie_phy"; }; + +* Freescale i.MX7d PCIe PHY + +This is the PHY associated with the IMX7d PCIe controller. It's used by the +PCI-e controller via the fsl,imx7d-pcie-phy phandle. + +Required properties: +- compatible: + - "fsl,imx7d-pcie-phy" +- reg: base address and length of the PCIe PHY controller diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/layerscape-pci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/layerscape-pci.txt index 9b2b8d66d1f4..e20ceaab9b38 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/layerscape-pci.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/layerscape-pci.txt @@ -13,6 +13,7 @@ information. Required properties: - compatible: should contain the platform identifier such as: + RC mode: "fsl,ls1021a-pcie" "fsl,ls2080a-pcie", "fsl,ls2085a-pcie" "fsl,ls2088a-pcie" @@ -20,6 +21,8 @@ Required properties: "fsl,ls1046a-pcie" "fsl,ls1043a-pcie" "fsl,ls1012a-pcie" + EP mode: + "fsl,ls1046a-pcie-ep", "fsl,ls-pcie-ep" - reg: base addresses and lengths of the PCIe controller register blocks. - interrupts: A list of interrupt outputs of the controller. Must contain an entry for each entry in the interrupt-names property. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/rcar-pci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/rcar-pci.txt index 976ef7bfff93..6904882a0e94 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/rcar-pci.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/rcar-pci.txt @@ -3,6 +3,7 @@ Required properties: compatible: "renesas,pcie-r8a7743" for the R8A7743 SoC; "renesas,pcie-r8a7744" for the R8A7744 SoC; + "renesas,pcie-r8a774c0" for the R8A774C0 SoC; "renesas,pcie-r8a7779" for the R8A7779 SoC; "renesas,pcie-r8a7790" for the R8A7790 SoC; "renesas,pcie-r8a7791" for the R8A7791 SoC; @@ -13,7 +14,8 @@ compatible: "renesas,pcie-r8a7743" for the R8A7743 SoC; "renesas,pcie-r8a77990" for the R8A77990 SoC; "renesas,pcie-rcar-gen2" for a generic R-Car Gen2 or RZ/G1 compatible device. - "renesas,pcie-rcar-gen3" for a generic R-Car Gen3 compatible device. + "renesas,pcie-rcar-gen3" for a generic R-Car Gen3 or + RZ/G2 compatible device. When compatible with the generic version, nodes must list the SoC-specific version corresponding to the platform first diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/ti-pci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/ti-pci.txt index 452fe48c4fdd..d5cbfe6b0d89 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/ti-pci.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/ti-pci.txt @@ -1,14 +1,21 @@ TI PCI Controllers PCIe DesignWare Controller - - compatible: Should be "ti,dra7-pcie" for RC - Should be "ti,dra7-pcie-ep" for EP + - compatible: Should be "ti,dra7-pcie" for RC (deprecated) + Should be "ti,dra7-pcie-ep" for EP (deprecated) + Should be "ti,dra746-pcie-rc" for dra74x/dra76 in RC mode + Should be "ti,dra746-pcie-ep" for dra74x/dra76 in EP mode + Should be "ti,dra726-pcie-rc" for dra72x in RC mode + Should be "ti,dra726-pcie-ep" for dra72x in EP mode - phys : list of PHY specifiers (used by generic PHY framework) - phy-names : must be "pcie-phy0", "pcie-phy1", "pcie-phyN".. based on the number of PHYs as specified in *phys* property. - ti,hwmods : Name of the hwmod associated to the pcie, "pcie<X>", where <X> is the instance number of the pcie from the HW spec. - num-lanes as specified in ../designware-pcie.txt + - ti,syscon-lane-sel : phandle/offset pair. Phandle to the system control + module and the register offset to specify lane + selection. HOST MODE ========= diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/cdns,dphy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/cdns,dphy.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1095bc4e72d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/cdns,dphy.txt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +Cadence DPHY +============ + +Cadence DPHY block. + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be set to "cdns,dphy". +- reg: physical base address and length of the DPHY registers. +- clocks: DPHY reference clocks. +- clock-names: must contain "psm" and "pll_ref". +- #phy-cells: must be set to 0. + +Example: + dphy0: dphy@fd0e0000{ + compatible = "cdns,dphy"; + reg = <0x0 0xfd0e0000 0x0 0x1000>; + clocks = <&psm_clk>, <&pll_ref_clk>; + clock-names = "psm", "pll_ref"; + #phy-cells = <0>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-armada38x-comphy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-armada38x-comphy.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ad49e5c01334 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-armada38x-comphy.txt @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +mvebu armada 38x comphy driver +------------------------------ + +This comphy controller can be found on Marvell Armada 38x. It provides a +number of shared PHYs used by various interfaces (network, sata, usb, +PCIe...). + +Required properties: + +- compatible: should be "marvell,armada-380-comphy" +- reg: should contain the comphy register location and length. +- #address-cells: should be 1. +- #size-cells: should be 0. + +A sub-node is required for each comphy lane provided by the comphy. + +Required properties (child nodes): + +- reg: comphy lane number. +- #phy-cells : from the generic phy bindings, must be 1. Defines the + input port to use for a given comphy lane. + +Example: + + comphy: phy@18300 { + compatible = "marvell,armada-380-comphy"; + reg = <0x18300 0x100>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + cpm_comphy0: phy@0 { + reg = <0>; + #phy-cells = <1>; + }; + + cpm_comphy1: phy@1 { + reg = <1>; + #phy-cells = <1>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-mvebu-comphy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-mvebu-comphy.txt index bfcf80341657..cf2cd86db267 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-mvebu-comphy.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-mvebu-comphy.txt @@ -1,16 +1,27 @@ -mvebu comphy driver -------------------- +MVEBU comphy drivers +-------------------- -A comphy controller can be found on Marvell Armada 7k/8k on the CP110. It -provides a number of shared PHYs used by various interfaces (network, sata, -usb, PCIe...). +COMPHY controllers can be found on the following Marvell MVEBU SoCs: +* Armada 7k/8k (on the CP110) +* Armada 3700 +It provides a number of shared PHYs used by various interfaces (network, SATA, +USB, PCIe...). Required properties: -- compatible: should be "marvell,comphy-cp110" -- reg: should contain the comphy register location and length. -- marvell,system-controller: should contain a phandle to the - system controller node. +- compatible: should be one of: + * "marvell,comphy-cp110" for Armada 7k/8k + * "marvell,comphy-a3700" for Armada 3700 +- reg: should contain the COMPHY register(s) location(s) and length(s). + * 1 entry for Armada 7k/8k + * 4 entries for Armada 3700 along with the corresponding reg-names + properties, memory areas are: + * Generic COMPHY registers + * Lane 1 (PCIe/GbE) + * Lane 0 (USB3/GbE) + * Lane 2 (SATA/USB3) +- marvell,system-controller: should contain a phandle to the system + controller node (only for Armada 7k/8k) - #address-cells: should be 1. - #size-cells: should be 0. @@ -18,11 +29,11 @@ A sub-node is required for each comphy lane provided by the comphy. Required properties (child nodes): -- reg: comphy lane number. -- #phy-cells : from the generic phy bindings, must be 1. Defines the +- reg: COMPHY lane number. +- #phy-cells : from the generic PHY bindings, must be 1. Defines the input port to use for a given comphy lane. -Example: +Examples: cpm_comphy: phy@120000 { compatible = "marvell,comphy-cp110"; @@ -41,3 +52,33 @@ Example: #phy-cells = <1>; }; }; + + comphy: phy@18300 { + compatible = "marvell,comphy-a3700"; + reg = <0x18300 0x300>, + <0x1F000 0x400>, + <0x5C000 0x400>, + <0xe0178 0x8>; + reg-names = "comphy", + "lane1_pcie_gbe", + "lane0_usb3_gbe", + "lane2_sata_usb3"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + + comphy0: phy@0 { + reg = <0>; + #phy-cells = <1>; + }; + + comphy1: phy@1 { + reg = <1>; + #phy-cells = <1>; + }; + + comphy2: phy@2 { + reg = <2>; + #phy-cells = <1>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-mvebu-utmi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-mvebu-utmi.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..aa99ceec73b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-mvebu-utmi.txt @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +MVEBU A3700 UTMI PHY +-------------------- + +USB2 UTMI+ PHY controllers can be found on the following Marvell MVEBU SoCs: +* Armada 3700 + +On Armada 3700, there are two USB controllers, one is compatible with the USB2 +and USB3 specifications and supports OTG. The other one is USB2 compliant and +only supports host mode. Both of these controllers come with a slightly +different UTMI PHY. + +Required Properties: + +- compatible: Should be one of: + * "marvell,a3700-utmi-host-phy" for the PHY connected to + the USB2 host-only controller. + * "marvell,a3700-utmi-otg-phy" for the PHY connected to + the USB3 and USB2 OTG capable controller. +- reg: PHY IP register range. +- marvell,usb-misc-reg: handle on the "USB miscellaneous registers" shared + region covering registers related to both the host + controller and the PHY. +- #phy-cells: Standard property (Documentation: phy-bindings.txt) Should be 0. + + +Example: + + usb2_utmi_host_phy: phy@5f000 { + compatible = "marvell,armada-3700-utmi-host-phy"; + reg = <0x5f000 0x800>; + marvell,usb-misc-reg = <&usb2_syscon>; + #phy-cells = <0>; + }; + + usb2_syscon: system-controller@5f800 { + compatible = "marvell,armada-3700-usb2-host-misc", "syscon"; + reg = <0x5f800 0x800>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-rockchip-inno-usb2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-rockchip-inno-usb2.txt index 074a7b3b0425..00639baae74a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-rockchip-inno-usb2.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-rockchip-inno-usb2.txt @@ -23,6 +23,8 @@ Optional properties: register files". When set driver will request its phandle as one companion-grf for some special SoCs (e.g RV1108). + - extcon : phandle to the extcon device providing the cable state for + the otg phy. Required nodes : a sub-node is required for each port the phy provides. The sub-node name is used to identify host or otg port, diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/qcom-qmp-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/qcom-qmp-phy.txt index 41a1074228ba..5d181fc3cc18 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/qcom-qmp-phy.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/qcom-qmp-phy.txt @@ -9,6 +9,8 @@ Required properties: "qcom,ipq8074-qmp-pcie-phy" for PCIe phy on IPQ8074 "qcom,msm8996-qmp-pcie-phy" for 14nm PCIe phy on msm8996, "qcom,msm8996-qmp-usb3-phy" for 14nm USB3 phy on msm8996, + "qcom,msm8998-qmp-usb3-phy" for USB3 QMP V3 phy on msm8998, + "qcom,msm8998-qmp-ufs-phy" for UFS QMP phy on msm8998, "qcom,sdm845-qmp-usb3-phy" for USB3 QMP V3 phy on sdm845, "qcom,sdm845-qmp-usb3-uni-phy" for USB3 QMP V3 UNI phy on sdm845, "qcom,sdm845-qmp-ufs-phy" for UFS QMP phy on sdm845. @@ -42,6 +44,10 @@ Required properties: "aux", "cfg_ahb", "ref". For "qcom,msm8996-qmp-usb3-phy" must contain: "aux", "cfg_ahb", "ref". + For "qcom,msm8998-qmp-usb3-phy" must contain: + "aux", "cfg_ahb", "ref". + For "qcom,msm8998-qmp-ufs-phy" must contain: + "ref", "ref_aux". For "qcom,sdm845-qmp-usb3-phy" must contain: "aux", "cfg_ahb", "ref", "com_aux". For "qcom,sdm845-qmp-usb3-uni-phy" must contain: @@ -61,6 +67,9 @@ Required properties: "phy", "common", "cfg". For "qcom,msm8996-qmp-usb3-phy" must contain "phy", "common". + For "qcom,msm8998-qmp-usb3-phy" must contain + "phy", "common". + For "qcom,msm8998-qmp-ufs-phy": no resets are listed. For "qcom,sdm845-qmp-usb3-phy" must contain: "phy", "common". For "qcom,sdm845-qmp-usb3-uni-phy" must contain: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/qcom-qusb2-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/qcom-qusb2-phy.txt index 03025d97998b..fe29f9e0af6d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/qcom-qusb2-phy.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/qcom-qusb2-phy.txt @@ -6,6 +6,7 @@ QUSB2 controller supports LS/FS/HS usb connectivity on Qualcomm chipsets. Required properties: - compatible: compatible list, contains "qcom,msm8996-qusb2-phy" for 14nm PHY on msm8996, + "qcom,msm8998-qusb2-phy" for 10nm PHY on msm8998, "qcom,sdm845-qusb2-phy" for 10nm PHY on sdm845. - reg: offset and length of the PHY register set. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rcar-gen3-phy-usb2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rcar-gen3-phy-usb2.txt index de7b5393c163..ad9c290d8f15 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rcar-gen3-phy-usb2.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rcar-gen3-phy-usb2.txt @@ -6,6 +6,8 @@ This file provides information on what the device node for the R-Car generation Required properties: - compatible: "renesas,usb2-phy-r8a774a1" if the device is a part of an R8A774A1 SoC. + "renesas,usb2-phy-r8a774c0" if the device is a part of an R8A774C0 + SoC. "renesas,usb2-phy-r8a7795" if the device is a part of an R8A7795 SoC. "renesas,usb2-phy-r8a7796" if the device is a part of an R8A7796 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/ti-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/ti-phy.txt index 57dfda8a7a1d..8f93c3b694a7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/ti-phy.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/ti-phy.txt @@ -35,6 +35,7 @@ Required properties: DRA7x Should be "ti,dra7x-usb2-phy2" for the 2nd instance of USB2 PHY in DRA7x + Should be "ti,am654-usb2" for the USB2 PHYs on AM654. - reg : Address and length of the register set for the device. - #phy-cells: determine the number of cells that should be given in the phandle while referencing this phy. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/atmel,at91-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/atmel,at91-pinctrl.txt index 3e23fece99da..eb39f5051159 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/atmel,at91-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/atmel,at91-pinctrl.txt @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ such as pull-up, multi drive, etc. Required properties for iomux controller: - compatible: "atmel,at91rm9200-pinctrl" or "atmel,at91sam9x5-pinctrl" - or "atmel,sama5d3-pinctrl" + or "atmel,sama5d3-pinctrl" or "microchip,sam9x60-pinctrl" - atmel,mux-mask: array of mask (periph per bank) to describe if a pin can be configured in this periph mode. All the periph and bank need to be describe. @@ -100,6 +100,7 @@ DRIVE_STRENGTH (3 << 5): indicate the drive strength of the pin using the 11 - High OUTPUT (1 << 7): indicate this pin need to be configured as an output. OUTPUT_VAL (1 << 8): output val (1 = high, 0 = low) +SLEWRATE (1 << 9): slew rate of the pin: 0 = disable, 1 = enable DEBOUNCE (1 << 16): indicate this pin needs debounce. DEBOUNCE_VAL (0x3fff << 17): debounce value. @@ -116,6 +117,19 @@ Some requirements for using atmel,at91rm9200-pinctrl binding: configurations by referring to the phandle of that pin configuration node. 4. The gpio controller must be describe in the pinctrl simple-bus. +For each bank the required properties are: +- compatible: "atmel,at91sam9x5-gpio" or "atmel,at91rm9200-gpio" or + "microchip,sam9x60-gpio" +- reg: physical base address and length of the controller's registers +- interrupts: interrupt outputs from the controller +- interrupt-controller: marks the device node as an interrupt controller +- #interrupt-cells: should be 2; refer to ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt + for more details. +- gpio-controller +- #gpio-cells: should be 2; the first cell is the GPIO number and the second + cell specifies GPIO flags as defined in <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h>. +- clocks: bank clock + Examples: pinctrl@fffff400 { @@ -125,6 +139,17 @@ pinctrl@fffff400 { compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-pinctrl", "simple-bus"; reg = <0xfffff400 0x600>; + pioA: gpio@fffff400 { + compatible = "atmel,at91sam9x5-gpio"; + reg = <0xfffff400 0x200>; + interrupts = <2 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH 1>; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + gpio-controller; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + clocks = <&pmc PMC_TYPE_PERIPHERAL 2>; + }; + atmel,mux-mask = < /* A B */ 0xffffffff 0xffc00c3b /* pioA */ diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx50-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx50-pinctrl.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6da01d619d33 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx50-pinctrl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +* Freescale IMX50 IOMUX Controller + +Please refer to fsl,imx-pinctrl.txt in this directory for common binding part +and usage. + +Required properties: +- compatible: "fsl,imx50-iomuxc" +- fsl,pins: two integers array, represents a group of pins mux and config + setting. The format is fsl,pins = <PIN_FUNC_ID CONFIG>, PIN_FUNC_ID is a + pin working on a specific function, CONFIG is the pad setting value like + pull-up for this pin. Please refer to imx50 datasheet for the valid pad + config settings. + +CONFIG bits definition: +PAD_CTL_HVE (1 << 13) +PAD_CTL_HYS (1 << 8) +PAD_CTL_PKE (1 << 7) +PAD_CTL_PUE (1 << 6) +PAD_CTL_PUS_100K_DOWN (0 << 4) +PAD_CTL_PUS_47K_UP (1 << 4) +PAD_CTL_PUS_100K_UP (2 << 4) +PAD_CTL_PUS_22K_UP (3 << 4) +PAD_CTL_ODE (1 << 3) +PAD_CTL_DSE_LOW (0 << 1) +PAD_CTL_DSE_MED (1 << 1) +PAD_CTL_DSE_HIGH (2 << 1) +PAD_CTL_DSE_MAX (3 << 1) +PAD_CTL_SRE_FAST (1 << 0) +PAD_CTL_SRE_SLOW (0 << 0) + +Refer to imx50-pinfunc.h in device tree source folder for all available +imx50 PIN_FUNC_ID. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx8mm-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx8mm-pinctrl.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..524a16fca666 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx8mm-pinctrl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +* Freescale IMX8MM IOMUX Controller + +Please refer to fsl,imx-pinctrl.txt and pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory +for common binding part and usage. + +Required properties: +- compatible: "fsl,imx8mm-iomuxc" +- reg: should contain the base physical address and size of the iomuxc + registers. + +Required properties in sub-nodes: +- fsl,pins: each entry consists of 6 integers and represents the mux and config + setting for one pin. The first 5 integers <mux_reg conf_reg input_reg mux_val + input_val> are specified using a PIN_FUNC_ID macro, which can be found in + <dt-bindings/pinctrl/imx8mm-pinfunc.h>. The last integer CONFIG is + the pad setting value like pull-up on this pin. Please refer to i.MX8M Mini + Reference Manual for detailed CONFIG settings. + +Examples: + +&uart1 { + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_uart1>; +}; + +iomuxc: pinctrl@30330000 { + compatible = "fsl,imx8mm-iomuxc"; + reg = <0x0 0x30330000 0x0 0x10000>; + + pinctrl_uart1: uart1grp { + fsl,pins = < + MX8MM_IOMUXC_UART1_RXD_UART1_DCE_RX 0x140 + MX8MM_IOMUXC_UART1_TXD_UART1_DCE_TX 0x140 + >; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,armada-37xx-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,armada-37xx-pinctrl.txt index c7c088d2dd50..38dc56a57760 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,armada-37xx-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,armada-37xx-pinctrl.txt @@ -58,11 +58,11 @@ group pwm3 - functions pwm, gpio group pmic1 - - pin 17 + - pin 7 - functions pmic, gpio group pmic0 - - pin 16 + - pin 6 - functions pmic, gpio group i2c2 @@ -112,19 +112,31 @@ group usb2_drvvbus1 - functions drvbus, gpio group sdio_sb - - pins 60-64 + - pins 60-65 - functions sdio, gpio group rgmii - - pins 42-55 + - pins 42-53 - functions mii, gpio group pcie1 - - pins 39-40 + - pins 39 + - functions pcie, gpio + +group pcie1_clkreq + - pins 40 - functions pcie, gpio +group pcie1_wakeup + - pins 41 + - functions pcie, gpio + +group smi + - pins 54-55 + - functions smi, gpio + group ptp - - pins 56-58 + - pins 56 - functions ptp, gpio group ptp_clk diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/meson,pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/meson,pinctrl.txt index 82ead40311f6..a47dd990a8d3 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/meson,pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/meson,pinctrl.txt @@ -23,11 +23,11 @@ The GPIO bank for the controller is represented as a sub-node and it acts as a GPIO controller. Required properties for sub-nodes are: - - reg: should contain address and size for mux, pull-enable, pull and - gpio register sets - - reg-names: an array of strings describing the "reg" entries. Must - contain "mux", "pull" and "gpio". "pull-enable" is optional and - when it is missing the "pull" registers are used instead + - reg: should contain a list of address and size, one tuple for each entry + in reg-names. + - reg-names: an array of strings describing the "reg" entries. + Must contain "mux" and "gpio". + May contain "pull", "pull-enable" and "ds" when appropriate. - gpio-controller: identifies the node as a gpio controller - #gpio-cells: must be 2 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,pmic-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,pmic-gpio.txt index 759aa1732e48..7f64a7e92c28 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,pmic-gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,pmic-gpio.txt @@ -19,6 +19,7 @@ PMIC's from Qualcomm. "qcom,pm8998-gpio" "qcom,pma8084-gpio" "qcom,pmi8994-gpio" + "qcom,pmi8998-gpio" "qcom,pms405-gpio" And must contain either "qcom,spmi-gpio" or "qcom,ssbi-gpio" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/fsl,imx-gpcv2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/fsl,imx-gpcv2.txt index 7c947a996df1..7c7e972aaa42 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/fsl,imx-gpcv2.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/fsl,imx-gpcv2.txt @@ -32,6 +32,9 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - power-supply: Power supply used to power the domain +- clocks: a number of phandles to clocks that need to be enabled during + domain power-up sequencing to ensure reset propagation into devices + located inside this power domain Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/qcom,rpmpd.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/qcom,rpmpd.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..980e5413d18f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/qcom,rpmpd.txt @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ +Qualcomm RPM/RPMh Power domains + +For RPM/RPMh Power domains, we communicate a performance state to RPM/RPMh +which then translates it into a corresponding voltage on a rail + +Required Properties: + - compatible: Should be one of the following + * qcom,msm8996-rpmpd: RPM Power domain for the msm8996 family of SoC + * qcom,sdm845-rpmhpd: RPMh Power domain for the sdm845 family of SoC + - #power-domain-cells: number of cells in Power domain specifier + must be 1. + - operating-points-v2: Phandle to the OPP table for the Power domain. + Refer to Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/power_domain.txt + and Documentation/devicetree/bindings/opp/opp.txt for more details + +Refer to <dt-bindings/power/qcom-rpmpd.h> for the level values for +various OPPs for different platforms as well as Power domain indexes + +Example: rpmh power domain controller and OPP table + +#include <dt-bindings/power/qcom-rpmhpd.h> + +opp-level values specified in the OPP tables for RPMh power domains +should use the RPMH_REGULATOR_LEVEL_* constants from +<dt-bindings/power/qcom-rpmhpd.h> + + rpmhpd: power-controller { + compatible = "qcom,sdm845-rpmhpd"; + #power-domain-cells = <1>; + operating-points-v2 = <&rpmhpd_opp_table>; + + rpmhpd_opp_table: opp-table { + compatible = "operating-points-v2"; + + rpmhpd_opp_ret: opp1 { + opp-level = <RPMH_REGULATOR_LEVEL_RETENTION>; + }; + + rpmhpd_opp_min_svs: opp2 { + opp-level = <RPMH_REGULATOR_LEVEL_MIN_SVS>; + }; + + rpmhpd_opp_low_svs: opp3 { + opp-level = <RPMH_REGULATOR_LEVEL_LOW_SVS>; + }; + + rpmhpd_opp_svs: opp4 { + opp-level = <RPMH_REGULATOR_LEVEL_SVS>; + }; + + rpmhpd_opp_svs_l1: opp5 { + opp-level = <RPMH_REGULATOR_LEVEL_SVS_L1>; + }; + + rpmhpd_opp_nom: opp6 { + opp-level = <RPMH_REGULATOR_LEVEL_NOM>; + }; + + rpmhpd_opp_nom_l1: opp7 { + opp-level = <RPMH_REGULATOR_LEVEL_NOM_L1>; + }; + + rpmhpd_opp_nom_l2: opp8 { + opp-level = <RPMH_REGULATOR_LEVEL_NOM_L2>; + }; + + rpmhpd_opp_turbo: opp9 { + opp-level = <RPMH_REGULATOR_LEVEL_TURBO>; + }; + + rpmhpd_opp_turbo_l1: opp10 { + opp-level = <RPMH_REGULATOR_LEVEL_TURBO_L1>; + }; + }; + }; + +Example: rpm power domain controller and OPP table + + rpmpd: power-controller { + compatible = "qcom,msm8996-rpmpd"; + #power-domain-cells = <1>; + operating-points-v2 = <&rpmpd_opp_table>; + + rpmpd_opp_table: opp-table { + compatible = "operating-points-v2"; + + rpmpd_opp_low: opp1 { + opp-level = <1>; + }; + + rpmpd_opp_ret: opp2 { + opp-level = <2>; + }; + + rpmpd_opp_svs: opp3 { + opp-level = <3>; + }; + + rpmpd_opp_normal: opp4 { + opp-level = <4>; + }; + + rpmpd_opp_high: opp5 { + opp-level = <5>; + }; + + rpmpd_opp_turbo: opp6 { + opp-level = <6>; + }; + }; + }; + +Example: Client/Consumer device using OPP table + + leaky-device0@12350000 { + compatible = "foo,i-leak-current"; + reg = <0x12350000 0x1000>; + power-domains = <&rpmhpd SDM845_MX>; + operating-points-v2 = <&leaky_opp_table>; + }; + + + leaky_opp_table: opp-table { + compatible = "operating-points-v2"; + + opp1 { + opp-hz = /bits/ 64 <144000>; + required-opps = <&rpmhpd_opp_low>; + }; + + opp2 { + opp-hz = /bits/ 64 <400000>; + required-opps = <&rpmhpd_opp_ret>; + }; + + opp3 { + opp-hz = /bits/ 64 <20000000>; + required-opps = <&rpmpd_opp_svs>; + }; + + opp4 { + opp-hz = /bits/ 64 <25000000>; + required-opps = <&rpmpd_opp_normal>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/reset/xlnx,zynqmp-power.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/reset/xlnx,zynqmp-power.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d366f1eb623a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/reset/xlnx,zynqmp-power.txt @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +-------------------------------------------------------------------- +Device Tree Bindings for the Xilinx Zynq MPSoC Power Management +-------------------------------------------------------------------- +The zynqmp-power node describes the power management configurations. +It will control remote suspend/shutdown interfaces. + +Required properties: + - compatible: Must contain: "xlnx,zynqmp-power" + - interrupts: Interrupt specifier + +------- +Example +------- + +firmware { + zynqmp_firmware: zynqmp-firmware { + compatible = "xlnx,zynqmp-firmware"; + method = "smc"; + + zynqmp_power: zynqmp-power { + compatible = "xlnx,zynqmp-power"; + interrupts = <0 35 4>; + }; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/battery.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/battery.txt index 89871ab8c704..5c913d4cf36c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/battery.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/battery.txt @@ -16,6 +16,7 @@ Required Properties: Optional Properties: - voltage-min-design-microvolt: drained battery voltage + - voltage-max-design-microvolt: fully charged battery voltage - energy-full-design-microwatt-hours: battery design energy - charge-full-design-microamp-hours: battery design capacity - precharge-current-microamp: current for pre-charge phase @@ -48,6 +49,7 @@ Example: bat: battery { compatible = "simple-battery"; voltage-min-design-microvolt = <3200000>; + voltage-max-design-microvolt = <4200000>; energy-full-design-microwatt-hours = <5290000>; charge-full-design-microamp-hours = <1430000>; precharge-current-microamp = <256000>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/sc27xx-fg.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/sc27xx-fg.txt index fc35ac577401..0a5705b8b592 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/sc27xx-fg.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/sc27xx-fg.txt @@ -9,8 +9,8 @@ Required properties: "sprd,sc2731-fgu". - reg: The address offset of fuel gauge unit. - battery-detect-gpios: GPIO for battery detection. -- io-channels: Specify the IIO ADC channel to get temperature. -- io-channel-names: Should be "bat-temp". +- io-channels: Specify the IIO ADC channels to get temperature and charge voltage. +- io-channel-names: Should be "bat-temp" or "charge-vol". - nvmem-cells: A phandle to the calibration cells provided by eFuse device. - nvmem-cell-names: Should be "fgu_calib". - monitored-battery: Phandle of battery characteristics devicetree node. @@ -47,8 +47,8 @@ Example: compatible = "sprd,sc2731-fgu"; reg = <0xa00>; battery-detect-gpios = <&pmic_eic 9 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; - io-channels = <&pmic_adc 5>; - io-channel-names = "bat-temp"; + io-channels = <&pmic_adc 5>, <&pmic_adc 14>; + io-channel-names = "bat-temp", "charge-vol"; nvmem-cells = <&fgu_calib>; nvmem-cell-names = "fgu_calib"; monitored-battery = <&bat>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/xlnx,zynqmp-genpd.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/xlnx,zynqmp-genpd.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8d1b8200ebd0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/xlnx,zynqmp-genpd.txt @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +----------------------------------------------------------- +Device Tree Bindings for the Xilinx Zynq MPSoC PM domains +----------------------------------------------------------- +The binding for zynqmp-power-controller follow the common +generic PM domain binding[1]. + +[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/power_domain.txt + +== Zynq MPSoC Generic PM Domain Node == + +Required property: + - Below property should be in zynqmp-firmware node. + - #power-domain-cells: Number of cells in a PM domain specifier. Must be 1. + +Power domain ID indexes are mentioned in +include/dt-bindings/power/xlnx-zynqmp-power.h. + +------- +Example +------- + +firmware { + zynqmp_firmware: zynqmp-firmware { + ... + #power-domain-cells = <1>; + ... + }; +}; + +sata { + ... + power-domains = <&zynqmp_firmware 28>; + ... +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/property-units.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/property-units.txt index 45ce054d844d..bfd33734faca 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/property-units.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/property-units.txt @@ -31,6 +31,7 @@ Electricity -microwatt-hours: micro Watt-hours -microvolt : micro volts -picofarads : picofarads +-femtofarads : femtofarads Temperature ---------------------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ptp/ptp-qoriq.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ptp/ptp-qoriq.txt index c5d0e7998e2b..454c937076a2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ptp/ptp-qoriq.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ptp/ptp-qoriq.txt @@ -17,6 +17,11 @@ Clock Properties: - fsl,tmr-fiper1 Fixed interval period pulse generator. - fsl,tmr-fiper2 Fixed interval period pulse generator. - fsl,max-adj Maximum frequency adjustment in parts per billion. + - fsl,extts-fifo The presence of this property indicates hardware + support for the external trigger stamp FIFO. + - little-endian The presence of this property indicates the 1588 timer + IP block is little-endian mode. The default endian mode + is big-endian. These properties set the operational parameters for the PTP clock. You must choose these carefully for the clock to work right. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/atmel-pwm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/atmel-pwm.txt index c8c831d7b0d1..591ecdd39c7b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/atmel-pwm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/atmel-pwm.txt @@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ Required properties: - "atmel,at91sam9rl-pwm" - "atmel,sama5d3-pwm" - "atmel,sama5d2-pwm" + - "microchip,sam9x60-pwm" - reg: physical base address and length of the controller's registers - #pwm-cells: Should be 3. See pwm.txt in this directory for a description of the cells format. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-hibvt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-hibvt.txt index fa7849d67836..daedfef09bb6 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-hibvt.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-hibvt.txt @@ -5,6 +5,8 @@ Required properties: The SoC specific strings supported including: "hisilicon,hi3516cv300-pwm" "hisilicon,hi3519v100-pwm" + "hisilicon,hi3559v100-shub-pwm" + "hisilicon,hi3559v100-pwm - reg: physical base address and length of the controller's registers. - clocks: phandle and clock specifier of the PWM reference clock. - resets: phandle and reset specifier for the PWM controller reset. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/fan53555.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/fan53555.txt index 54a3f2c80e3a..e7fc045281d1 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/fan53555.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/fan53555.txt @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ Binding for Fairchild FAN53555 regulators Required properties: - - compatible: one of "fcs,fan53555", "silergy,syr827", "silergy,syr828" + - compatible: one of "fcs,fan53555", "fcs,fan53526", "silergy,syr827" or + "silergy,syr828" - reg: I2C address Optional properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/fixed-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/fixed-regulator.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 0c2a6c8a1536..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/fixed-regulator.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ -Fixed Voltage regulators - -Required properties: -- compatible: Must be "regulator-fixed"; -- regulator-name: Defined in regulator.txt as optional, but required here. - -Optional properties: -- gpio: gpio to use for enable control -- startup-delay-us: startup time in microseconds -- enable-active-high: Polarity of GPIO is Active high -If this property is missing, the default assumed is Active low. -- gpio-open-drain: GPIO is open drain type. - If this property is missing then default assumption is false. --vin-supply: Input supply name. - -Any property defined as part of the core regulator -binding, defined in regulator.txt, can also be used. -However a fixed voltage regulator is expected to have the -regulator-min-microvolt and regulator-max-microvolt -to be the same. - -Example: - - abc: fixedregulator@0 { - compatible = "regulator-fixed"; - regulator-name = "fixed-supply"; - regulator-min-microvolt = <1800000>; - regulator-max-microvolt = <1800000>; - gpio = <&gpio1 16 0>; - startup-delay-us = <70000>; - enable-active-high; - regulator-boot-on; - gpio-open-drain; - vin-supply = <&parent_reg>; - }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/fixed-regulator.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/fixed-regulator.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d289c2f7455a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/fixed-regulator.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/regulator/fixed-regulator.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Fixed Voltage regulators + +maintainers: + - Liam Girdwood <lgirdwood@gmail.com> + - Mark Brown <broonie@kernel.org> + +description: + Any property defined as part of the core regulator binding, defined in + regulator.txt, can also be used. However a fixed voltage regulator is + expected to have the regulator-min-microvolt and regulator-max-microvolt + to be the same. + +properties: + compatible: + const: regulator-fixed + + regulator-name: true + + gpio: + description: gpio to use for enable control + maxItems: 1 + + startup-delay-us: + description: startup time in microseconds + $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + + enable-active-high: + description: + Polarity of GPIO is Active high. If this property is missing, + the default assumed is Active low. + type: boolean + + gpio-open-drain: + description: + GPIO is open drain type. If this property is missing then default + assumption is false. + type: boolean + + vin-supply: + description: Input supply phandle. + $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/phandle + +required: + - compatible + - regulator-name + +examples: + - | + reg_1v8: regulator-1v8 { + compatible = "regulator-fixed"; + regulator-name = "1v8"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1800000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1800000>; + gpio = <&gpio1 16 0>; + startup-delay-us = <70000>; + enable-active-high; + regulator-boot-on; + gpio-open-drain; + vin-supply = <&parent_reg>; + }; +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max77650-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max77650-regulator.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f1cbe813c30f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max77650-regulator.txt @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +Regulator driver for MAX77650 PMIC from Maxim Integrated. + +This module is part of the MAX77650 MFD device. For more details +see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77650.txt. + +The regulator controller is represented as a sub-node of the PMIC node +on the device tree. + +The device has a single LDO regulator and a SIMO buck-boost regulator with +three independent power rails. + +Required properties: +-------------------- +- compatible: Must be "maxim,max77650-regulator" + +Each rail must be instantiated under the regulators subnode of the top PMIC +node. Up to four regulators can be defined. For standard regulator properties +refer to Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt. + +Available regulator compatible strings are: "ldo", "sbb0", "sbb1", "sbb2". + +Example: +-------- + + regulators { + compatible = "maxim,max77650-regulator"; + + max77650_ldo: regulator@0 { + regulator-compatible = "ldo"; + regulator-name = "max77650-ldo"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1350000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <2937500>; + }; + + max77650_sbb0: regulator@1 { + regulator-compatible = "sbb0"; + regulator-name = "max77650-sbb0"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <800000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1587500>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/pfuze100.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/pfuze100.txt index f9be1acf891c..4d3b12b92cb3 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/pfuze100.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/pfuze100.txt @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ Optional properties: - fsl,pfuze-support-disable-sw: Boolean, if present disable all unused switch regulators to save power consumption. Attention, ensure that all important regulators (e.g. DDR ref, DDR supply) has set the "regulator-always-on" - property. If not present, the switched regualtors are always on and can't be + property. If not present, the switched regulators are always on and can't be disabled. This binding is a workaround to keep backward compatibility with old dtb's which rely on the fact that the switched regulators are always on and don't mark them explicit as "regulator-always-on". diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/rohm,bd70528-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/rohm,bd70528-regulator.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..698cfc3bc3dd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/rohm,bd70528-regulator.txt @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +ROHM BD70528 Power Management Integrated Circuit regulator bindings + +Required properties: + - regulator-name: should be "buck1", "buck2", "buck3", "ldo1", "ldo2", "ldo3", + "led_ldo1", "led_ldo2" + +List of regulators provided by this controller. BD70528 regulators node +should be sub node of the BD70528 MFD node. See BD70528 MFD bindings at +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/rohm,bd70528-pmic.txt + +The valid names for BD70528 regulator nodes are: +BUCK1, BUCK2, BUCK3, LDO1, LDO2, LDO3, LED_LDO1, LED_LDO2 + +Optional properties: +- Any optional property defined in bindings/regulator/regulator.txt + +Example: +regulators { + buck1: BUCK1 { + regulator-name = "buck1"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1200000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <3400000>; + regulator-boot-on; + regulator-ramp-delay = <125>; + }; + buck2: BUCK2 { + regulator-name = "buck2"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1200000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>; + regulator-boot-on; + regulator-ramp-delay = <125>; + }; + buck3: BUCK3 { + regulator-name = "buck3"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <800000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1800000>; + regulator-boot-on; + regulator-ramp-delay = <250>; + }; + ldo1: LDO1 { + regulator-name = "ldo1"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1650000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>; + regulator-boot-on; + }; + ldo2: LDO2 { + regulator-name = "ldo2"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1650000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>; + regulator-boot-on; + }; + + ldo3: LDO3 { + regulator-name = "ldo3"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1650000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>; + }; + led_ldo1: LED_LDO1 { + regulator-name = "led_ldo1"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <200000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <300000>; + }; + led_ldo2: LED_LDO2 { + regulator-name = "led_ldo2"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <200000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <300000>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/rohm,bd71837-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/rohm,bd71837-regulator.txt index 4b98ca26e61a..cbce62c22b60 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/rohm,bd71837-regulator.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/rohm,bd71837-regulator.txt @@ -27,8 +27,38 @@ BUCK1, BUCK2, BUCK3, BUCK4, BUCK5, BUCK6 LDO1, LDO2, LDO3, LDO4, LDO5, LDO6 Optional properties: +- rohm,dvs-run-voltage : PMIC default "RUN" state voltage in uV. + See below table for bucks which support this. +- rohm,dvs-idle-voltage : PMIC default "IDLE" state voltage in uV. + See below table for bucks which support this. +- rohm,dvs-suspend-voltage : PMIC default "SUSPEND" state voltage in uV. + See below table for bucks which support this. - Any optional property defined in bindings/regulator/regulator.txt +Supported default DVS states: + +BD71837: +buck | dvs-run-voltage | dvs-idle-voltage | dvs-suspend-voltage +----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +1 | supported | supported | supported +---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +2 | supported | supported | not supported +---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +3 | supported | not supported | not supported +---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +4 | supported | not supported | not supported +---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +rest | not supported | not supported | not supported + +BD71847: +buck | dvs-run-voltage | dvs-idle-voltage | dvs-suspend-voltage +----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +1 | supported | supported | supported +---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +2 | supported | supported | not supported +---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +rest | not supported | not supported | not supported + Example: regulators { buck1: BUCK1 { @@ -36,7 +66,11 @@ regulators { regulator-min-microvolt = <700000>; regulator-max-microvolt = <1300000>; regulator-boot-on; + regulator-always-on; regulator-ramp-delay = <1250>; + rohm,dvs-run-voltage = <900000>; + rohm,dvs-idle-voltage = <850000>; + rohm,dvs-suspend-voltage = <800000>; }; buck2: BUCK2 { regulator-name = "buck2"; @@ -45,18 +79,22 @@ regulators { regulator-boot-on; regulator-always-on; regulator-ramp-delay = <1250>; + rohm,dvs-run-voltage = <1000000>; + rohm,dvs-idle-voltage = <900000>; }; buck3: BUCK3 { regulator-name = "buck3"; regulator-min-microvolt = <700000>; regulator-max-microvolt = <1300000>; regulator-boot-on; + rohm,dvs-run-voltage = <1000000>; }; buck4: BUCK4 { regulator-name = "buck4"; regulator-min-microvolt = <700000>; regulator-max-microvolt = <1300000>; regulator-boot-on; + rohm,dvs-run-voltage = <1000000>; }; buck5: BUCK5 { regulator-name = "buck5"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stpmic1-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stpmic1-regulator.txt index a3f476240565..6189df71ea98 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stpmic1-regulator.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stpmic1-regulator.txt @@ -23,16 +23,14 @@ Switches are fixed voltage regulators with only enable/disable capability. Optional properties: - st,mask-reset: mask reset for this regulator: the regulator configuration is maintained during pmic reset. -- regulator-pull-down: enable high pull down - if not specified light pull down is used - regulator-over-current-protection: if set, all regulators are switched off in case of over-current detection on this regulator, if not set, the driver only sends an over-current event. -- interrupt-parent: phandle to the parent interrupt controller - interrupts: index of current limit detection interrupt - <regulator>-supply: phandle to the parent supply/regulator node each regulator supply can be described except vref_ddr. +- regulator-active-discharge: can be used on pwr_sw1 and pwr_sw2. Example: regulators { @@ -43,7 +41,6 @@ regulators { vdd_core: buck1 { regulator-name = "vdd_core"; interrupts = <IT_CURLIM_BUCK1 0>; - interrupt-parent = <&pmic>; st,mask-reset; regulator-pull-down; regulator-min-microvolt = <700000>; @@ -53,7 +50,6 @@ regulators { v3v3: buck4 { regulator-name = "v3v3"; interrupts = <IT_CURLIM_BUCK4 0>; - interrupt-parent = <&mypmic>; regulator-min-microvolt = <3300000>; regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps65218.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps65218.txt index 02f0e9bbfbf8..54aded3b78e2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps65218.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps65218.txt @@ -71,8 +71,13 @@ tps65218: tps65218@24 { regulator-always-on; }; + ls2: regulator-ls2 { + regulator-min-microamp = <100000>; + regulator-max-microamp = <1000000>; + }; + ls3: regulator-ls3 { - regulator-min-microvolt = <100000>; - regulator-max-microvolt = <1000000>; + regulator-min-microamp = <100000>; + regulator-max-microamp = <1000000>; }; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,adsp-pil.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,adsp-pil.txt index a842a782b557..66af2c30944f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,adsp-pil.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,adsp-pil.txt @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ on the Qualcomm Technology Inc. ADSP Hexagon core. Value type: <stringlist> Definition: List of clock input name strings sorted in the same order as the clocks property. Definition must have - "xo", "sway_cbcr", "lpass_aon", "lpass_ahbs_aon_cbcr", + "xo", "sway_cbcr", "lpass_ahbs_aon_cbcr", "lpass_ahbm_aon_cbcr", "qdsp6ss_xo", "qdsp6ss_sleep" and "qdsp6ss_core". @@ -100,13 +100,12 @@ ADSP, as it is found on SDM845 boards. clocks = <&rpmhcc RPMH_CXO_CLK>, <&gcc GCC_LPASS_SWAY_CLK>, - <&lpasscc LPASS_AUDIO_WRAPPER_AON_CLK>, <&lpasscc LPASS_Q6SS_AHBS_AON_CLK>, <&lpasscc LPASS_Q6SS_AHBM_AON_CLK>, <&lpasscc LPASS_QDSP6SS_XO_CLK>, <&lpasscc LPASS_QDSP6SS_SLEEP_CLK>, <&lpasscc LPASS_QDSP6SS_CORE_CLK>; - clock-names = "xo", "sway_cbcr", "lpass_aon", + clock-names = "xo", "sway_cbcr", "lpass_ahbs_aon_cbcr", "lpass_ahbm_aon_cbcr", "qdsp6ss_xo", "qdsp6ss_sleep", "qdsp6ss_core"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,adsp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,adsp.txt index 9c0cff3a5ed8..292dfda9770d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,adsp.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,adsp.txt @@ -19,13 +19,30 @@ on the Qualcomm ADSP Hexagon core. - interrupts-extended: Usage: required Value type: <prop-encoded-array> - Definition: must list the watchdog, fatal IRQs ready, handover and - stop-ack IRQs + Definition: reference to the interrupts that match interrupt-names - interrupt-names: Usage: required Value type: <stringlist> - Definition: must be "wdog", "fatal", "ready", "handover", "stop-ack" + Definition: The interrupts needed depends on the compatible + string: + qcom,msm8974-adsp-pil: + qcom,msm8996-adsp-pil: + qcom,msm8996-slpi-pil: + qcom,qcs404-adsp-pas: + qcom,qcs404-cdsp-pas: + qcom,sdm845-adsp-pas: + qcom,sdm845-cdsp-pas: + must be "wdog", "fatal", "ready", "handover", "stop-ack" + qcom,qcs404-wcss-pas: + must be "wdog", "fatal", "ready", "handover", "stop-ack", + "shutdown-ack" + +- firmware-name: + Usage: optional + Value type: <string> + Definition: must list the relative firmware image path for the + Hexagon Core. - clocks: Usage: required diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,q6v5.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,q6v5.txt index 9ff5b0309417..41ca5df5be5a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,q6v5.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,q6v5.txt @@ -28,24 +28,51 @@ on the Qualcomm Hexagon core. - interrupts-extended: Usage: required Value type: <prop-encoded-array> - Definition: must list the watchdog, fatal IRQs ready, handover and - stop-ack IRQs + Definition: reference to the interrupts that match interrupt-names - interrupt-names: Usage: required Value type: <stringlist> - Definition: must be "wdog", "fatal", "ready", "handover", "stop-ack" + Definition: The interrupts needed depends on the the compatible + string: + qcom,q6v5-pil: + qcom,ipq8074-wcss-pil: + qcom,msm8916-mss-pil: + qcom,msm8974-mss-pil: + must be "wdog", "fatal", "ready", "handover", "stop-ack" + qcom,msm8996-mss-pil: + qcom,sdm845-mss-pil: + must be "wdog", "fatal", "ready", "handover", "stop-ack", + "shutdown-ack" + +- firmware-name: + Usage: optional + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: must list the relative firmware image paths for mba and + modem. They are used for booting and authenticating the + Hexagon core. - clocks: Usage: required Value type: <phandle> - Definition: reference to the iface, bus and mem clocks to be held on - behalf of the booting of the Hexagon core + Definition: reference to the clocks that match clock-names - clock-names: Usage: required Value type: <stringlist> - Definition: must be "iface", "bus", "mem" + Definition: The clocks needed depend on the compatible string: + qcom,ipq8074-wcss-pil: + no clock names required + qcom,q6v5-pil: + qcom,msm8916-mss-pil: + qcom,msm8974-mss-pil: + must be "iface", "bus", "mem", "xo" + qcom,msm8996-mss-pil: + must be "iface", "bus", "mem", "xo", "gpll0_mss", + "snoc_axi", "mnoc_axi", "pnoc", "qdss" + qcom,sdm845-mss-pil: + must be "iface", "bus", "mem", "xo", "gpll0_mss", + "snoc_axi", "mnoc_axi", "prng" - resets: Usage: required @@ -65,6 +92,19 @@ on the Qualcomm Hexagon core. must be "mss_restart", "pdc_reset" for the modem sub-system on SDM845 SoCs +For the compatible strings below the following supplies are required: + "qcom,q6v5-pil" + "qcom,msm8916-mss-pil", +- cx-supply: +- mx-supply: +- pll-supply: + Usage: required + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: reference to the regulators to be held on behalf of the + booting of the Hexagon core + +For the compatible string below the following supplies are required: + "qcom,msm8974-mss-pil" - cx-supply: - mss-supply: - mx-supply: @@ -74,6 +114,33 @@ on the Qualcomm Hexagon core. Definition: reference to the regulators to be held on behalf of the booting of the Hexagon core +For the compatible string below the following supplies are required: + "qcom,msm8996-mss-pil" +- pll-supply: + Usage: required + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: reference to the regulators to be held on behalf of the + booting of the Hexagon core + +- power-domains: + Usage: required + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: reference to power-domains that match power-domain-names + +- power-domain-names: + Usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: The power-domains needed depend on the compatible string: + qcom,q6v5-pil: + qcom,ipq8074-wcss-pil: + qcom,msm8916-mss-pil: + qcom,msm8974-mss-pil: + no power-domain names required + qcom,msm8996-mss-pil: + must be "cx", "mx" + qcom,sdm845-mss-pil: + must be "cx", "mx", "mss", "load_state" + - qcom,smem-states: Usage: required Value type: <phandle> diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/brcm,brcmstb-reset.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/brcm,brcmstb-reset.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6e5341b4f891 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/brcm,brcmstb-reset.txt @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +Broadcom STB SW_INIT-style reset controller +=========================================== + +Broadcom STB SoCs have a SW_INIT-style reset controller with separate +SET/CLEAR/STATUS registers and possibly multiple banks, each of 32 bit +reset lines. + +Please also refer to reset.txt in this directory for common reset +controller binding usage. + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be brcm,brcmstb-reset +- reg: register base and length +- #reset-cells: must be set to 1 + +Example: + + reset: reset-controller@8404318 { + compatible = "brcm,brcmstb-reset"; + reg = <0x8404318 0x30>; + #reset-cells = <1>; + }; + + ðernet_switch { + resets = <&reset>; + reset-names = "switch"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/fsl,imx7-src.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/fsl,imx7-src.txt index 1ab1d109318e..2ecf33815d18 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/fsl,imx7-src.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/fsl,imx7-src.txt @@ -5,7 +5,9 @@ Please also refer to reset.txt in this directory for common reset controller binding usage. Required properties: -- compatible: Should be "fsl,imx7d-src", "syscon" +- compatible: + - For i.MX7 SoCs should be "fsl,imx7d-src", "syscon" + - For i.MX8MQ SoCs should be "fsl,imx8mq-src", "syscon" - reg: should be register base and length as documented in the datasheet - interrupts: Should contain SRC interrupt @@ -44,4 +46,5 @@ Example: For list of all valid reset indicies see -<dt-bindings/reset/imx7-reset.h> +<dt-bindings/reset/imx7-reset.h> for i.MX7 and +<dt-bindings/reset/imx8mq-reset.h> for i.MX8MQ diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/xlnx,zynqmp-reset.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/xlnx,zynqmp-reset.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..27a45fe5ecf1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/xlnx,zynqmp-reset.txt @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +-------------------------------------------------------------------------- + = Zynq UltraScale+ MPSoC reset driver binding = +-------------------------------------------------------------------------- +The Zynq UltraScale+ MPSoC has several different resets. + +See Chapter 36 of the Zynq UltraScale+ MPSoC TRM (UG) for more information +about zynqmp resets. + +Please also refer to reset.txt in this directory for common reset +controller binding usage. + +Required Properties: +- compatible: "xlnx,zynqmp-reset" +- #reset-cells: Specifies the number of cells needed to encode reset + line, should be 1 + +------- +Example +------- + +firmware { + zynqmp_firmware: zynqmp-firmware { + compatible = "xlnx,zynqmp-firmware"; + method = "smc"; + + zynqmp_reset: reset-controller { + compatible = "xlnx,zynqmp-reset"; + #reset-cells = <1>; + }; + }; +}; + +Specifying reset lines connected to IP modules +============================================== + +Device nodes that need access to reset lines should +specify them as a reset phandle in their corresponding node as +specified in reset.txt. + +For list of all valid reset indicies see +<dt-bindings/reset/xlnx-zynqmp-resets.h> + +Example: + +serdes: zynqmp_phy@fd400000 { + ... + + resets = <&zynqmp_reset ZYNQMP_RESET_SATA>; + reset-names = "sata_rst"; + + ... +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/abracon,abx80x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/abracon,abx80x.txt index 18b892d010d8..2405e35a1bc0 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/abracon,abx80x.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/abracon,abx80x.txt @@ -16,6 +16,7 @@ Required properties: "abracon,ab1803" "abracon,ab1804" "abracon,ab1805" + "microcrystal,rv1805" Using "abracon,abx80x" will enable chip autodetection. - "reg": I2C bus address of the device diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/cdns,rtc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/cdns,rtc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..14a04487b432 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/cdns,rtc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +Cadence Real Time Clock + +The Cadence RTC controller with date, time and alarm capabilities. +The alarm may wake the system from low-power state. + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be "cdns,rtc-r109v3" +- reg: Specifies base physical address and size of the register area. +- interrupts: A single interrupt specifier. +- clocks: Must contain two entries: + - pclk: APB registers clock + - ref_clk: reference 1Hz or 100Hz clock, depending on IP configuration + See ../clocks/clock-bindings.txt for details. + +Example: + rtc0: rtc@fd080000 { + compatible = "cdns,rtc-r109v3"; + reg = <0xfd080000 0x1000>; + + clock-names = "pclk", "ref_clk"; + clocks = <&sysclock>, <&refclock>; + + interrupt-parent = <&gic>; + interrupts = <0 6 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/isil,isl1208.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/isil,isl1208.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..51f003006f04 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/isil,isl1208.txt @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +Intersil ISL1209/19 I2C RTC/Alarm chip with event in + +ISL12X9 have additional pins EVIN and #EVDET for tamper detection, while the +ISL1208 and ISL1218 do not. They are all use the same driver with the bindings +described here, with chip specific properties as noted. + +Required properties supported by the device: + - "compatible": Should be one of the following: + - "isil,isl1208" + - "isil,isl1209" + - "isil,isl1218" + - "isil,isl1219" + - "reg": I2C bus address of the device + +Optional properties: + - "interrupt-names": list which may contains "irq" and "evdet" + evdet applies to isl1209 and isl1219 only + - "interrupts": list of interrupts for "irq" and "evdet" + evdet applies to isl1209 and isl1219 only + - "isil,ev-evienb": Enable or disable internal pull on EVIN pin + Applies to isl1209 and isl1219 only + Possible values are 0 and 1 + Value 0 enables internal pull-up on evin pin, 1 disables it. + Default will leave the non-volatile configuration of the pullup + as is. + +Example isl1219 node with #IRQ pin connected to SoC gpio1 pin12 and #EVDET pin +connected to SoC gpio2 pin 24 and internal pull-up enabled in EVIN pin. + + isl1219: rtc@68 { + compatible = "isil,isl1219"; + reg = <0x68>; + interrupt-names = "irq", "evdet"; + interrupts-extended = <&gpio1 12 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>, + <&gpio2 24 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>; + isil,ev-evienb = <1>; + }; + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/isil,isl1219.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/isil,isl1219.txt deleted file mode 100644 index c3efd48e91c2..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/isil,isl1219.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ -Intersil ISL1219 I2C RTC/Alarm chip with event in - -ISL1219 has additional pins EVIN and #EVDET for tamper detection. - -Required properties supported by the device: - - - "compatible": must be "isil,isl1219" - - "reg": I2C bus address of the device - -Optional properties: - - - "interrupt-names": list which may contains "irq" and "evdet" - - "interrupts": list of interrupts for "irq" and "evdet" - - "isil,ev-evienb": if present EV.EVIENB bit is set to the specified - value for proper operation. - - -Example isl1219 node with #IRQ pin connected to SoC gpio1 pin12 - and #EVDET pin connected to SoC gpio2 pin 24: - - isl1219: rtc@68 { - compatible = "isil,isl1219"; - reg = <0x68>; - interrupt-names = "irq", "evdet"; - interrupts-extended = <&gpio1 12 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>, - <&gpio2 24 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>; - isil,ev-evienb = <1>; - }; - diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/nxp,pcf85063.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/nxp,pcf85063.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d3e380ad712d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/nxp,pcf85063.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +* NXP PCF85063 Real Time Clock + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should contain "nxp,pcf85063". +- reg: I2C address for chip. + +Optional property: +- quartz-load-femtofarads: The capacitive load of the quartz(x-tal), + expressed in femto Farad (fF). Valid values are 7000 and 12500. + Default value (if no value is specified) is 7000fF. + +Example: + +pcf85063: rtc@51 { + compatible = "nxp,pcf85063"; + reg = <0x51>; + quartz-load-femtofarads = <12500>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/nxp,pcf8523.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/nxp,pcf8523.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0b1080c60f63 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/nxp,pcf8523.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +* NXP PCF8523 Real Time Clock + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should contain "nxp,pcf8523". +- reg: I2C address for chip. + +Optional property: +- quartz-load-femtofarads: The capacitive load of the quartz(x-tal), + expressed in femto Farad (fF). Valid values are 7000 and 12500. + Default value (if no value is specified) is 12500fF. + +Example: + +pcf8523: rtc@68 { + compatible = "nxp,pcf8523"; + reg = <0x68>; + quartz-load-femtofarads = <7000>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-meson.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-meson.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e921fe66a362 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-meson.txt @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +* Amlogic Meson6, Meson8, Meson8b and Meson8m2 RTC + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be one of the following describing the hardware: + * "amlogic,meson6-rtc" + * "amlogic,meson8-rtc" + * "amlogic,meson8b-rtc" + * "amlogic,meson8m2-rtc" + +- reg: physical register space for the controller's memory mapped registers. +- interrupts: the interrupt line of the RTC block. +- clocks: reference to the external 32.768kHz crystal oscillator. +- vdd-supply: reference to the power supply of the RTC block. +- resets: reset controller reference to allow reset of the controller + +Optional properties for the battery-backed non-volatile memory: +- #address-cells: should be 1 to address the battery-backed non-volatile memory +- #size-cells: should be 1 to reference the battery-backed non-volatile memory + +Optional child nodes: +- see ../nvmem/nvmem.txt + +Example: + + rtc: rtc@740 { + compatible = "amlogic,meson6-rtc"; + reg = <0x740 0x14>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 72 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>; + clocks = <&rtc32k_xtal>; + vdd-supply = <&rtc_vdd>; + resets = <&reset RESET_RTC>; + + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc.txt index 7c8da6926095..f4687c68c08c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc.txt @@ -21,12 +21,16 @@ Optional properties The following properties may not be supported by all drivers. However, if a driver wants to support one of the below features, it should adapt the bindings below. -- trickle-resistor-ohms : Selected resistor for trickle charger. Should be given - if trickle charger should be enabled -- trickle-diode-disable : Do not use internal trickle charger diode Should be - given if internal trickle charger diode should be - disabled -- wakeup-source : Enables wake up of host system on alarm +- trickle-resistor-ohms : Selected resistor for trickle charger. Should be given + if trickle charger should be enabled +- trickle-diode-disable : Do not use internal trickle charger diode Should be + given if internal trickle charger diode should be + disabled +- wakeup-source : Enables wake up of host system on alarm +- quartz-load-femtofarads : The capacitive load of the quartz(x-tal), + expressed in femto Farad (fF). + The default value shall be listed (if optional), + and likewise all valid values. Trivial RTCs ------------ @@ -39,21 +43,23 @@ possibly an interrupt line. Compatible Vendor / Chip ========== ============= abracon,abb5zes3 AB-RTCMC-32.768kHz-B5ZE-S3: Real Time Clock/Calendar Module with I2C Interface +abracon,abeoz9 AB-RTCMC-32.768kHz-EOZ9: Real Time Clock/Calendar Module with I2C Interface dallas,ds1374 I2C, 32-Bit Binary Counter Watchdog RTC with Trickle Charger and Reset Input/Output dallas,ds1672 Dallas DS1672 Real-time Clock dallas,ds3232 Extremely Accurate I²C RTC with Integrated Crystal and SRAM epson,rx8010 I2C-BUS INTERFACE REAL TIME CLOCK MODULE +epson,rx8571 I2C-BUS INTERFACE REAL TIME CLOCK MODULE with Battery Backed RAM epson,rx8581 I2C-BUS INTERFACE REAL TIME CLOCK MODULE emmicro,em3027 EM Microelectronic EM3027 Real-time Clock isil,isl1208 Intersil ISL1208 Low Power RTC with Battery Backed SRAM isil,isl1218 Intersil ISL1218 Low Power RTC with Battery Backed SRAM isil,isl12022 Intersil ISL12022 Real-time Clock +microcrystal,rv3028 Real Time Clock Module with I2C-Bus microcrystal,rv3029 Real Time Clock Module with I2C-Bus +microcrystal,rv8523 Real Time Clock nxp,pcf2127 Real-time clock nxp,pcf2129 Real-time clock -nxp,pcf8523 Real-time Clock nxp,pcf8563 Real-time clock/calendar -nxp,pcf85063 Tiny Real-Time Clock pericom,pt7c4338 Real-time Clock Module ricoh,r2025sd I2C bus SERIAL INTERFACE REAL-TIME CLOCK IC ricoh,r2221tl I2C bus SERIAL INTERFACE REAL-TIME CLOCK IC @@ -62,3 +68,4 @@ ricoh,rs5c372b I2C bus SERIAL INTERFACE REAL-TIME CLOCK IC ricoh,rv5c386 I2C bus SERIAL INTERFACE REAL-TIME CLOCK IC ricoh,rv5c387a I2C bus SERIAL INTERFACE REAL-TIME CLOCK IC sii,s35390a 2-wire CMOS real-time clock +whwave,sd3078 I2C bus SERIAL INTERFACE REAL-TIME CLOCK IC diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/8250.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/8250.txt index da50321da34d..3cba12f855b7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/8250.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/8250.txt @@ -21,6 +21,7 @@ Required properties: - "altr,16550-FIFO128" - "fsl,16550-FIFO64" - "fsl,ns16550" + - "intel,xscale-uart" - "ti,da830-uart" - "aspeed,ast2400-vuart" - "aspeed,ast2500-vuart" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/ingenic,uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/ingenic,uart.txt index c3c6406d5cfe..24ed8769f4af 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/ingenic,uart.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/ingenic,uart.txt @@ -6,7 +6,8 @@ Required properties: - "ingenic,jz4760-uart", - "ingenic,jz4770-uart", - "ingenic,jz4775-uart", - - "ingenic,jz4780-uart". + - "ingenic,jz4780-uart", + - "ingenic,x1000-uart". - reg : offset and length of the register set for the device. - interrupts : should contain uart interrupt. - clocks : phandles to the module & baud clocks. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/milbeaut-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/milbeaut-uart.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..3d2fb1a7ba94 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/milbeaut-uart.txt @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +Socionext Milbeaut UART controller + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be "socionext,milbeaut-usio-uart". +- reg: offset and length of the register set for the device. +- interrupts: two interrupts specifier. +- interrupt-names: should be "rx", "tx". +- clocks: phandle to the input clock. + +Optional properties: +- auto-flow-control: flow control enable. + +Example: + usio1: usio_uart@1e700010 { + compatible = "socionext,milbeaut-usio-uart"; + reg = <0x1e700010 0x10>; + interrupts = <0 141 0x4>, <0 149 0x4>; + interrupt-names = "rx", "tx"; + clocks = <&clk 2>; + auto-flow-control; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/nvidia,tegra194-tcu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/nvidia,tegra194-tcu.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..085a8591accd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/nvidia,tegra194-tcu.txt @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +NVIDIA Tegra Combined UART (TCU) + +The TCU is a system for sharing a hardware UART instance among multiple +systems within the Tegra SoC. It is implemented through a mailbox- +based protocol where each "virtual UART" has a pair of mailboxes, one +for transmitting and one for receiving, that is used to communicate +with the hardware implementing the TCU. + +Required properties: +- name : Should be tcu +- compatible + Array of strings + One of: + - "nvidia,tegra194-tcu" +- mbox-names: + "rx" - Mailbox for receiving data from hardware UART + "tx" - Mailbox for transmitting data to hardware UART +- mboxes: Mailboxes corresponding to the mbox-names. + +This node is a mailbox consumer. See the following files for details of +the mailbox subsystem, and the specifiers implemented by the relevant +provider(s): + +- .../mailbox/mailbox.txt +- .../mailbox/nvidia,tegra186-hsp.txt + +Example bindings: +----------------- + +tcu: tcu { + compatible = "nvidia,tegra194-tcu"; + mboxes = <&hsp_top0 TEGRA_HSP_MBOX_TYPE_SM 0>, + <&hsp_aon TEGRA_HSP_MBOX_TYPE_SM 1>; + mbox-names = "rx", "tx"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/omap_serial.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/omap_serial.txt index c35d5ece1156..0a9b5444f4e6 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/omap_serial.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/omap_serial.txt @@ -22,6 +22,8 @@ Optional properties: - dma-names : "rx" for receive channel, "tx" for transmit channel. - rs485-rts-delay, rs485-rx-during-tx, linux,rs485-enabled-at-boot-time: see rs485.txt - rs485-rts-active-high: drive RTS high when sending (default is low). +- clocks: phandle to the functional clock as per + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/pl011.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/pl011.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 77863aefe9ef..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/pl011.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ -* ARM AMBA Primecell PL011 serial UART - -Required properties: -- compatible: must be "arm,primecell", "arm,pl011", "zte,zx296702-uart" -- reg: exactly one register range with length 0x1000 -- interrupts: exactly one interrupt specifier - -Optional properties: -- pinctrl: - When present, must have one state named "default", - and may contain a second name named "sleep". The former - state sets up pins for ordinary operation whereas - the latter state will put the associated pins to sleep - when the UART is unused -- clocks: - When present, the first clock listed must correspond to - the clock named UARTCLK on the IP block, i.e. the clock - to the external serial line, whereas the second clock - must correspond to the PCLK clocking the internal logic - of the block. Just listing one clock (the first one) is - deprecated. -- clock-names: - When present, the first clock listed must be named - "uartclk" and the second clock listed must be named - "apb_pclk" -- dmas: - When present, may have one or two dma channels. - The first one must be named "rx", the second one - must be named "tx". -- auto-poll: - Enables polling when using RX DMA. -- poll-rate-ms: - Rate at which poll occurs when auto-poll is set, - default 100ms. -- poll-timeout-ms: - Poll timeout when auto-poll is set, default - 3000ms. - -See also bindings/arm/primecell.txt - -Example: - -uart@80120000 { - compatible = "arm,pl011", "arm,primecell"; - reg = <0x80120000 0x1000>; - interrupts = <0 11 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; - dmas = <&dma 13 0 0x2>, <&dma 13 0 0x0>; - dma-names = "rx", "tx"; - clocks = <&foo_clk>, <&bar_clk>; - clock-names = "uartclk", "apb_pclk"; -}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/pl011.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/pl011.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1a64d59152aa --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/pl011.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/serial/pl011.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: ARM AMBA Primecell PL011 serial UART + +maintainers: + - Rob Herring <robh@kernel.org> + +allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/serial.yaml# + +# Need a custom select here or 'arm,primecell' will match on lots of nodes +select: + properties: + compatible: + contains: + enum: + - arm,pl011 + - zte,zx296702-uart + required: + - compatible + +properties: + compatible: + oneOf: + - items: + - const: arm,pl011 + - const: arm,primecell + - items: + - const: zte,zx296702-uart + - const: arm,primecell + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + interrupts: + maxItems: 1 + + pinctrl-0: true + pinctrl-1: true + + pinctrl-names: + description: + When present, must have one state named "default", + and may contain a second name named "sleep". The former + state sets up pins for ordinary operation whereas + the latter state will put the associated pins to sleep + when the UART is unused + minItems: 1 + items: + - const: default + - const: sleep + + clocks: + description: + When present, the first clock listed must correspond to + the clock named UARTCLK on the IP block, i.e. the clock + to the external serial line, whereas the second clock + must correspond to the PCLK clocking the internal logic + of the block. Just listing one clock (the first one) is + deprecated. + maxItems: 2 + + clock-names: + items: + - const: uartclk + - const: apb_pclk + + dmas: + minItems: 1 + maxItems: 2 + + dma-names: + minItems: 1 + items: + - const: rx + - const: tx + + auto-poll: + description: + Enables polling when using RX DMA. + type: boolean + + poll-rate-ms: + description: + Rate at which poll occurs when auto-poll is set. + default 100ms. + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + - default: 100 + + poll-timeout-ms: + description: + Poll timeout when auto-poll is set, default + 3000ms. + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + - default: 3000 + +required: + - compatible + - reg + - interrupts + +dependencies: + poll-rate-ms: [ auto-poll ] + poll-timeout-ms: [ auto-poll ] + +additionalProperties: false + +examples: + - | + serial@80120000 { + compatible = "arm,pl011", "arm,primecell"; + reg = <0x80120000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <0 11 4>; + dmas = <&dma 13 0 0x2>, <&dma 13 0 0x0>; + dma-names = "rx", "tx"; + clocks = <&foo_clk>, <&bar_clk>; + clock-names = "uartclk", "apb_pclk"; + }; + +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,rzn1-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,rzn1-uart.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 8b9e0d4dc2e4..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,rzn1-uart.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,10 +0,0 @@ -Renesas RZ/N1 UART - -This controller is based on the Synopsys DesignWare ABP UART and inherits all -properties defined in snps-dw-apb-uart.txt except for the compatible property. - -Required properties: -- compatible : The device specific string followed by the generic RZ/N1 string. - Therefore it must be one of: - "renesas,r9a06g032-uart", "renesas,rzn1-uart" - "renesas,r9a06g033-uart", "renesas,rzn1-uart" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,sci-serial.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,sci-serial.txt index 20232ad05d89..dd63151dc8b6 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,sci-serial.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,sci-serial.txt @@ -29,7 +29,9 @@ Required properties: - "renesas,scif-r8a774c0" for R8A774C0 (RZ/G2E) SCIF compatible UART. - "renesas,hscif-r8a774c0" for R8A774C0 (RZ/G2E) HSCIF compatible UART. - "renesas,scif-r8a7778" for R8A7778 (R-Car M1) SCIF compatible UART. + - "renesas,hscif-r8a7778" for R8A7778 (R-Car M1) HSCIF compatible UART. - "renesas,scif-r8a7779" for R8A7779 (R-Car H1) SCIF compatible UART. + - "renesas,hscif-r8a7779" for R8A7779 (R-Car H1) HSCIF compatible UART. - "renesas,scif-r8a7790" for R8A7790 (R-Car H2) SCIF compatible UART. - "renesas,scifa-r8a7790" for R8A7790 (R-Car H2) SCIFA compatible UART. - "renesas,scifb-r8a7790" for R8A7790 (R-Car H2) SCIFB compatible UART. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 12bbe9f22560..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,76 +0,0 @@ -* Synopsys DesignWare ABP UART - -Required properties: -- compatible : "snps,dw-apb-uart" -- reg : offset and length of the register set for the device. -- interrupts : should contain uart interrupt. - -Clock handling: -The clock rate of the input clock needs to be supplied by one of -- clock-frequency : the input clock frequency for the UART. -- clocks : phandle to the input clock - -The supplying peripheral clock can also be handled, needing a second property -- clock-names: tuple listing input clock names. - Required elements: "baudclk", "apb_pclk" - -Optional properties: -- snps,uart-16550-compatible : reflects the value of UART_16550_COMPATIBLE - configuration parameter. Define this if your UART does not implement the busy - functionality. -- resets : phandle to the parent reset controller. -- reg-shift : quantity to shift the register offsets by. If this property is - not present then the register offsets are not shifted. -- reg-io-width : the size (in bytes) of the IO accesses that should be - performed on the device. If this property is not present then single byte - accesses are used. -- dcd-override : Override the DCD modem status signal. This signal will always - be reported as active instead of being obtained from the modem status - register. Define this if your serial port does not use this pin. -- dsr-override : Override the DTS modem status signal. This signal will always - be reported as active instead of being obtained from the modem status - register. Define this if your serial port does not use this pin. -- cts-override : Override the CTS modem status signal. This signal will always - be reported as active instead of being obtained from the modem status - register. Define this if your serial port does not use this pin. -- ri-override : Override the RI modem status signal. This signal will always be - reported as inactive instead of being obtained from the modem status register. - Define this if your serial port does not use this pin. - -Example: - - uart@80230000 { - compatible = "snps,dw-apb-uart"; - reg = <0x80230000 0x100>; - clock-frequency = <3686400>; - interrupts = <10>; - reg-shift = <2>; - reg-io-width = <4>; - dcd-override; - dsr-override; - cts-override; - ri-override; - }; - -Example with one clock: - - uart@80230000 { - compatible = "snps,dw-apb-uart"; - reg = <0x80230000 0x100>; - clocks = <&baudclk>; - interrupts = <10>; - reg-shift = <2>; - reg-io-width = <4>; - }; - -Example with two clocks: - - uart@80230000 { - compatible = "snps,dw-apb-uart"; - reg = <0x80230000 0x100>; - clocks = <&baudclk>, <&apb_pclk>; - clock-names = "baudclk", "apb_pclk"; - interrupts = <10>; - reg-shift = <2>; - reg-io-width = <4>; - }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b42002542690 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,140 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Synopsys DesignWare ABP UART + +maintainers: + - Rob Herring <robh@kernel.org> + +allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/serial.yaml# + +properties: + compatible: + oneOf: + - items: + - enum: + - renesas,r9a06g032-uart + - renesas,r9a06g033-uart + - const: renesas,rzn1-uart + - items: + - enum: + - rockchip,px30-uart + - rockchip,rk3036-uart + - rockchip,rk3066-uart + - rockchip,rk3188-uart + - rockchip,rk3288-uart + - rockchip,rk3328-uart + - rockchip,rk3368-uart + - rockchip,rk3399-uart + - rockchip,rv1108-uart + - const: snps,dw-apb-uart + - items: + - enum: + - brcm,bcm11351-dw-apb-uart + - brcm,bcm21664-dw-apb-uart + - const: snps,dw-apb-uart + - const: snps,dw-apb-uart + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + interrupts: + maxItems: 1 + + clock-frequency: true + + clocks: + minItems: 1 + maxItems: 2 + + clock-names: + items: + - const: baudclk + - const: apb_pclk + + snps,uart-16550-compatible: + description: reflects the value of UART_16550_COMPATIBLE configuration + parameter. Define this if your UART does not implement the busy functionality. + type: boolean + + resets: + maxItems: 1 + + reg-shift: true + + reg-io-width: true + + dcd-override: + description: Override the DCD modem status signal. This signal will + always be reported as active instead of being obtained from the modem + status register. Define this if your serial port does not use this + pin. + type: boolean + + dsr-override: + description: Override the DTS modem status signal. This signal will + always be reported as active instead of being obtained from the modem + status register. Define this if your serial port does not use this + pin. + type: boolean + + cts-override: + description: Override the CTS modem status signal. This signal will + always be reported as active instead of being obtained from the modem + status register. Define this if your serial port does not use this + pin. + type: boolean + + ri-override: + description: Override the RI modem status signal. This signal will always + be reported as inactive instead of being obtained from the modem status + register. Define this if your serial port does not use this pin. + type: boolean + +required: + - compatible + - reg + - interrupts + +examples: + - | + serial@80230000 { + compatible = "snps,dw-apb-uart"; + reg = <0x80230000 0x100>; + clock-frequency = <3686400>; + interrupts = <10>; + reg-shift = <2>; + reg-io-width = <4>; + dcd-override; + dsr-override; + cts-override; + ri-override; + }; + + - | + // Example with one clock: + serial@80230000 { + compatible = "snps,dw-apb-uart"; + reg = <0x80230000 0x100>; + clocks = <&baudclk>; + interrupts = <10>; + reg-shift = <2>; + reg-io-width = <4>; + }; + + - | + // Example with two clocks: + serial@80230000 { + compatible = "snps,dw-apb-uart"; + reg = <0x80230000 0x100>; + clocks = <&baudclk>, <&apb_pclk>; + clock-names = "baudclk", "apb_pclk"; + interrupts = <10>; + reg-shift = <2>; + reg-io-width = <4>; + }; +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/olpc,ap-sp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/olpc,ap-sp.txt index 36603419d6f8..0e72183f52bc 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/olpc,ap-sp.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/olpc,ap-sp.txt @@ -4,14 +4,10 @@ Required properties: - compatible : "olpc,ap-sp" - reg : base address and length of SoC's WTM registers - interrupts : SP-AP interrupt -- clocks : phandle + clock-specifier for the clock that drives the WTM -- clock-names: should be "sp" Example: ap-sp@d4290000 { compatible = "olpc,ap-sp"; reg = <0xd4290000 0x1000>; interrupts = <40>; - clocks = <&soc_clocks MMP2_CLK_SP>; - clock-names = "sp"; } diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/amlogic/clk-measure.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/amlogic/clk-measure.txt index 205a54bcd7c7..6bf6b43f8dd8 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/amlogic/clk-measure.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/amlogic/clk-measure.txt @@ -9,6 +9,8 @@ Required properties: "amlogic,meson-gx-clk-measure" for GX SoCs "amlogic,meson8-clk-measure" for Meson8 SoCs "amlogic,meson8b-clk-measure" for Meson8b SoCs + "amlogic,meson-axg-clk-measure" for AXG SoCs + "amlogic,meson-g12a-clk-measure" for G12a SoCs - reg: base address and size of the Clock Measurer register space. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/bcm/brcm,bcm2835-pm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/bcm/brcm,bcm2835-pm.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..3b7d32956391 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/bcm/brcm,bcm2835-pm.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +BCM2835 PM (Power domains, watchdog) + +The PM block controls power domains and some reset lines, and includes +a watchdog timer. This binding supersedes the brcm,bcm2835-pm-wdt +binding which covered some of PM's register range and functionality. + +Required properties: + +- compatible: Should be "brcm,bcm2835-pm" +- reg: Specifies base physical address and size of the two + register ranges ("PM" and "ASYNC_BRIDGE" in that + order) +- clocks: a) v3d: The V3D clock from CPRMAN + b) peri_image: The PERI_IMAGE clock from CPRMAN + c) h264: The H264 clock from CPRMAN + d) isp: The ISP clock from CPRMAN +- #reset-cells: Should be 1. This property follows the reset controller + bindings[1]. +- #power-domain-cells: Should be 1. This property follows the power domain + bindings[2]. + +Optional properties: + +- timeout-sec: Contains the watchdog timeout in seconds +- system-power-controller: Whether the watchdog is controlling the + system power. This node follows the power controller bindings[3]. + +[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/reset.txt +[2] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/power_domain.txt +[3] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/power-controller.txt + +Example: + +pm { + compatible = "brcm,bcm2835-pm", "brcm,bcm2835-pm-wdt"; + #power-domain-cells = <1>; + #reset-cells = <1>; + reg = <0x7e100000 0x114>, + <0x7e00a000 0x24>; + clocks = <&clocks BCM2835_CLOCK_V3D>, + <&clocks BCM2835_CLOCK_PERI_IMAGE>, + <&clocks BCM2835_CLOCK_H264>, + <&clocks BCM2835_CLOCK_ISP>; + clock-names = "v3d", "peri_image", "h264", "isp"; + system-power-controller; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/qcom/qcom,smd-rpm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/qcom/qcom,smd-rpm.txt index ec95705ba692..f3fa313963d5 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/qcom/qcom,smd-rpm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/qcom/qcom,smd-rpm.txt @@ -23,6 +23,7 @@ resources. "qcom,rpm-msm8916" "qcom,rpm-msm8974" "qcom,rpm-msm8998" + "qcom,rpm-sdm660" "qcom,rpm-qcs404" - qcom,smd-channels: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/adi,adau1977.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/adi,adau1977.txt index e79aeef73f28..9225472c80b4 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/adi,adau1977.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/adi,adau1977.txt @@ -17,12 +17,18 @@ Required properties: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt Optional properties: - - reset-gpio: the reset pin for the chip, for more details consult + - reset-gpios: the reset pin for the chip, for more details consult Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt - DVDD-supply: supply voltage for the digital core, please consult Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt +- adi,micbias: configures the voltage setting for the MICBIAS pin. + Select 0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 to specify MICBIAS voltage + 5V/5.5V/6V/6.5V/7V/7.5V/8V/8.5V/9V + If not specified the default value will be "7" meaning 8.5 Volts. + This property is only valid for the ADAU1977 + For required properties on SPI, please consult Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt @@ -40,7 +46,8 @@ Examples: AVDD-supply = <®ulator>; DVDD-supply = <®ulator_digital>; - reset_gpio = <&gpio 10 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + adi,micbias = <3>; + reset-gpios = <&gpio 10 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; }; adau1977_i2c: adau1977@11 { @@ -50,5 +57,5 @@ Examples: AVDD-supply = <®ulator>; DVDD-supply = <®ulator_digital>; - reset_gpio = <&gpio 10 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + reset-gpios = <&gpio 10 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4458.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4458.txt index 7839be78448d..e5820235e0d5 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4458.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4458.txt @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ This device supports I2C mode. Required properties: -- compatible : "asahi-kasei,ak4458" +- compatible : "asahi-kasei,ak4458" or "asahi-kasei,ak4497" - reg : The I2C address of the device for I2C Optional properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/audio-graph-scu-card.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/audio-graph-scu-card.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 62d42768a00b..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/audio-graph-scu-card.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,123 +0,0 @@ -Audio-Graph-SCU-Card: - -Audio-Graph-SCU-Card is "Audio-Graph-Card" + "ALSA DPCM". - -It is based on common bindings for device graphs. -see ${LINUX}/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/graph.txt - -Basically, Audio-Graph-SCU-Card property is same as -Simple-Card / Simple-SCU-Card / Audio-Graph-Card. -see ${LINUX}/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-card.txt - ${LINUX}/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-scu-card.txt - ${LINUX}/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/audio-graph-card.txt - -Below are same as Simple-Card / Audio-Graph-Card. - -- label -- dai-format -- frame-master -- bitclock-master -- bitclock-inversion -- frame-inversion -- dai-tdm-slot-num -- dai-tdm-slot-width -- clocks / system-clock-frequency - -Below are same as Simple-SCU-Card. - -- convert-rate -- convert-channels -- prefix -- routing - -Required properties: - -- compatible : "audio-graph-scu-card"; -- dais : list of CPU DAI port{s} - -Example 1. Sampling Rate Conversion - - sound_card { - compatible = "audio-graph-scu-card"; - - label = "sound-card"; - prefix = "codec"; - routing = "codec Playback", "DAI0 Playback", - "DAI0 Capture", "codec Capture"; - convert-rate = <48000>; - - dais = <&cpu_port>; - }; - - audio-codec { - ... - - port { - codec_endpoint: endpoint { - remote-endpoint = <&cpu_endpoint>; - }; - }; - }; - - dai-controller { - ... - cpu_port: port { - cpu_endpoint: endpoint { - remote-endpoint = <&codec_endpoint>; - - dai-format = "left_j"; - ... - }; - }; - }; - -Example 2. 2 CPU 1 Codec (Mixing) - - sound_card { - compatible = "audio-graph-scu-card"; - - label = "sound-card"; - routing = "codec Playback", "DAI0 Playback", - "codec Playback", "DAI1 Playback", - "DAI0 Capture", "codec Capture"; - - dais = <&cpu_port0 - &cpu_port1>; - }; - - audio-codec { - ... - - audio-graph-card,prefix = "codec"; - audio-graph-card,convert-rate = <48000>; - port { - codec_endpoint0: endpoint { - remote-endpoint = <&cpu_endpoint0>; - }; - codec_endpoint1: endpoint { - remote-endpoint = <&cpu_endpoint1>; - }; - }; - }; - - dai-controller { - ... - ports { - cpu_port0: port { - cpu_endpoint0: endpoint { - remote-endpoint = <&codec_endpoint0>; - - dai-format = "left_j"; - ... - }; - }; - cpu_port1: port { - cpu_endpoint1: endpoint { - remote-endpoint = <&codec_endpoint1>; - - dai-format = "left_j"; - ... - }; - }; - }; - }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs35l36.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs35l36.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..912bd162b477 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs35l36.txt @@ -0,0 +1,168 @@ +CS35L36 Speaker Amplifier + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "cirrus,cs35l36" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C + + - VA-supply, VP-supply : power supplies for the device, + as covered in + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt. + + - cirrus,boost-ctl-millivolt : Boost Voltage Value. Configures the boost + converter's output voltage in mV. The range is from 2550mV to 12000mV with + increments of 50mV. + (Default) VP + + - cirrus,boost-peak-milliamp : Boost-converter peak current limit in mA. + Configures the peak current by monitoring the current through the boost FET. + Range starts at 1600mA and goes to a maximum of 4500mA with increments of + 50mA. + (Default) 4.50 Amps + + - cirrus,boost-ind-nanohenry : Inductor estimation LBST reference value. + Seeds the digital boost converter's inductor estimation block with the initial + inductance value to reference. + + 1000 = 1uH (Default) + 1200 = 1.2uH + +Optional properties: + - cirrus,multi-amp-mode : Boolean to determine if there are more than + one amplifier in the system. If more than one it is best to Hi-Z the ASP + port to prevent bus contention on the output signal + + - cirrus,boost-ctl-select : Boost conerter control source selection. + Selects the source of the BST_CTL target VBST voltage for the boost + converter to generate. + 0x00 - Control Port Value + 0x01 - Class H Tracking (Default) + 0x10 - MultiDevice Sync Value + + - cirrus,amp-pcm-inv : Boolean to determine Amplifier will invert incoming + PCM data + + - cirrus,imon-pol-inv : Boolean to determine Amplifier will invert the + polarity of outbound IMON feedback data + + - cirrus,vmon-pol-inv : Boolean to determine Amplifier will invert the + polarity of outbound VMON feedback data + + - cirrus,dcm-mode-enable : Boost converter automatic DCM Mode enable. + This enables the digital boost converter to operate in a low power + (Discontinuous Conduction) mode during low loading conditions. + + - cirrus,weak-fet-disable : Boolean : The strength of the output drivers is + reduced when operating in a Weak-FET Drive Mode and must not be used to drive + a large load. + + - cirrus,classh-wk-fet-delay : Weak-FET entry delay. Controls the delay + (in ms) before the Class H algorithm switches to the weak-FET voltage + (after the audio falls and remains below the value specified in WKFET_AMP_THLD). + + 0 = 0ms + 1 = 5ms + 2 = 10ms + 3 = 50ms + 4 = 100ms (Default) + 5 = 200ms + 6 = 500ms + 7 = 1000ms + + - cirrus,classh-weak-fet-thld-millivolt : Weak-FET amplifier drive threshold. + Configures the signal threshold at which the PWM output stage enters + weak-FET operation. The range is 50mV to 700mV in 50mV increments. + + - cirrus,temp-warn-threshold : Amplifier overtemperature warning threshold. + Configures the threshold at which the overtemperature warning condition occurs. + When the threshold is met, the overtemperature warning attenuation is applied + and the TEMP_WARN_EINT interrupt status bit is set. + If TEMP_WARN_MASK = 0, INTb is asserted. + + 0 = 105C + 1 = 115C + 2 = 125C (Default) + 3 = 135C + + - cirrus,irq-drive-select : Selects the driver type of the selected interrupt + output. + + 0 = Open-drain + 1 = Push-pull (Default) + + - cirrus,irq-gpio-select : Selects the pin to serve as the programmable + interrupt output. + + 0 = PDM_DATA / SWIRE_SD / INT (Default) + 1 = GPIO + +Optional properties for the "cirrus,vpbr-config" Sub-node + + - cirrus,vpbr-en : VBST brownout prevention enable. Configures whether the + VBST brownout prevention algorithm is enabled or disabled. + + 0 = VBST brownout prevention disabled (default) + 1 = VBST brownout prevention enabled + + See Section 7.31.1 VPBR Config for configuration options & further details + + - cirrus,vpbr-thld : Initial VPBR threshold. Configures the VP brownout + threshold voltage + + - cirrus,cirrus,vpbr-atk-rate : Attenuation attack step rate. Configures the + amount delay between consecutive volume attenuation steps when a brownout + condition is present and the VP brownout condition is in an attacking state. + + - cirrus,vpbr-atk-vol : VP brownout prevention step size. Configures the VP + brownout prevention attacking attenuation step size when operating in either + digital volume or analog gain modes. + + - cirrus,vpbr-max-attn : Maximum attenuation that the VP brownout prevention + can apply to the audio signal. + + - cirrus,vpbr-wait : Configures the delay time between a brownout condition + no longer being present and the VP brownout prevention entering an attenuation + release state. + + - cirrus,vpbr-rel-rate : Attenuation release step rate. Configures the delay + between consecutive volume attenuation release steps when a brownout condition + is not longer present and the VP brownout is in an attenuation release state. + + - cirrus,vpbr-mute-en : During the attack state, if the vpbr-max-attn value + is reached, the error condition still remains, and this bit is set, the audio + is muted. + +Example: + +cs35l36: cs35l36@40 { + compatible = "cirrus,cs35l36"; + reg = <0x40>; + VA-supply = <&dummy_vreg>; + VP-supply = <&dummy_vreg>; + reset-gpios = <&gpio0 54 0>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio8>; + interrupts = <3 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>; + + cirrus,boost-ind-nanohenry = <1000>; + cirrus,boost-ctl-millivolt = <10000>; + cirrus,boost-peak-milliamp = <4500>; + cirrus,boost-ctl-select = <0x00>; + cirrus,weak-fet-delay = <0x04>; + cirrus,weak-fet-thld = <0x01>; + cirrus,temp-warn-threshold = <0x01>; + cirrus,multi-amp-mode; + cirrus,irq-drive-select = <0x01>; + cirrus,irq-gpio-select = <0x01>; + + cirrus,vpbr-config { + cirrus,vpbr-en = <0x00>; + cirrus,vpbr-thld = <0x05>; + cirrus,vpbr-atk-rate = <0x02>; + cirrus,vpbr-atk-vol = <0x01>; + cirrus,vpbr-max-attn = <0x09>; + cirrus,vpbr-wait = <0x01>; + cirrus,vpbr-rel-rate = <0x05>; + cirrus,vpbr-mute-en = <0x00>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs4341.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs4341.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..12b4aa8ef0db --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs4341.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +Cirrus Logic CS4341 audio DAC + +This device supports both I2C and SPI (configured with pin strapping +on the board). + +Required properties: + - compatible: "cirrus,cs4341a" + - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C, the chip select + number for SPI. + +For required properties on I2C-bus, please consult +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c.txt +For required properties on SPI-bus, please consult +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt + +Example: + codec: cs4341@0 { + #sound-dai-cells = <0>; + compatible = "cirrus,cs4341a"; + reg = <0>; + spi-max-frequency = <6000000>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-mcasp-audio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-mcasp-audio.txt index b279b6072bd5..a58f79f5345c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-mcasp-audio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-mcasp-audio.txt @@ -45,6 +45,23 @@ Optional properties: - fck_parent : Should contain a valid clock name which will be used as parent for the McASP fck +Optional GPIO support: +If any McASP pin need to be used as GPIO then the McASP node must have: +... + gpio-controller + #gpio-cells = <2>; +... + +When requesting a GPIO, the first parameter is the PIN index in McASP_P* +registers. +For example to request the AXR2 pin of mcasp8: +function-gpios = <&mcasp8 2 0>; + +Or to request the ACLKR pin of mcasp8: +function-gpios = <&mcasp8 29 0>; + +For generic gpio information, please refer to bindings/gpio/gpio.txt + Example: mcasp0: mcasp0@1d00000 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,micfil.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,micfil.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..53e227b15277 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,micfil.txt @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +NXP MICFIL Digital Audio Interface (MICFIL). + +The MICFIL digital interface provides a 16-bit audio signal from a PDM +microphone bitstream in a configurable output sampling rate. + +Required properties: + + - compatible : Compatible list, contains "fsl,imx8mm-micfil" + + - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device. + + - interrupts : Contains the micfil interrupts. + + - clocks : Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names. + + - clock-names : Must include the "ipg_clk" for register access and + "ipg_clk_app" for internal micfil clock. + + - dmas : Generic dma devicetree binding as described in + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt. + +Example: +micfil: micfil@30080000 { + compatible = "fsl,imx8mm-micfil"; + reg = <0x0 0x30080000 0x0 0x10000>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 109 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 110 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clocks = <&clk IMX8MM_CLK_PDM_IPG>, + <&clk IMX8MM_CLK_PDM_ROOT>; + clock-names = "ipg_clk", "ipg_clk_app"; + dmas = <&sdma2 24 26 0x80000000>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/google,cros-ec-codec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/google,cros-ec-codec.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1084f7f22eea --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/google,cros-ec-codec.txt @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +* Audio codec controlled by ChromeOS EC + +Google's ChromeOS EC codec is a digital mic codec provided by the +Embedded Controller (EC) and is controlled via a host-command interface. + +An EC codec node should only be found as a sub-node of the EC node (see +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/cros-ec.txt). + +Required properties: +- compatible: Must contain "google,cros-ec-codec" +- #sound-dai-cells: Should be 1. The cell specifies number of DAIs. +- max-dmic-gain: A number for maximum gain in dB on digital microphone. + +Example: + +cros-ec@0 { + compatible = "google,cros-ec-spi"; + + ... + + cros_ec_codec: ec-codec { + compatible = "google,cros-ec-codec"; + #sound-dai-cells = <1>; + max-dmic-gain = <43>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ingenic,jz4725b-codec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ingenic,jz4725b-codec.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..05adc0d47b13 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ingenic,jz4725b-codec.txt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +Ingenic JZ4725B codec controller + +Required properties: +- compatible : "ingenic,jz4725b-codec" +- reg : codec registers location and length +- clocks : phandle to the AIC clock. +- clock-names: must be set to "aic". +- #sound-dai-cells: Must be set to 0. + +Example: + +codec: audio-codec@100200a4 { + compatible = "ingenic,jz4725b-codec"; + reg = <0x100200a4 0x8>; + + #sound-dai-cells = <0>; + + clocks = <&cgu JZ4725B_CLK_AIC>; + clock-names = "aic"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ingenic,jz4740-codec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ingenic,jz4740-codec.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1ffcade87e7b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ingenic,jz4740-codec.txt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +Ingenic JZ4740 codec controller + +Required properties: +- compatible : "ingenic,jz4740-codec" +- reg : codec registers location and length +- clocks : phandle to the AIC clock. +- clock-names: must be set to "aic". +- #sound-dai-cells: Must be set to 0. + +Example: + +codec: audio-codec@10020080 { + compatible = "ingenic,jz4740-codec"; + reg = <0x10020080 0x8>; + + #sound-dai-cells = <0>; + + clocks = <&cgu JZ4740_CLK_AIC>; + clock-names = "aic"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mt6358.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mt6358.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5465730013a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mt6358.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +Mediatek MT6358 Audio Codec + +The communication between MT6358 and SoC is through Mediatek PMIC wrapper. +For more detail, please visit Mediatek PMIC wrapper documentation. + +Must be a child node of PMIC wrapper. + +Required properties: + +- compatible : "mediatek,mt6358-sound". +- Avdd-supply : power source of AVDD + +Example: + +mt6358_snd { + compatible = "mediatek,mt6358-sound"; + Avdd-supply = <&mt6358_vaud28_reg>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mt8183-afe-pcm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mt8183-afe-pcm.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..396ba38619f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mt8183-afe-pcm.txt @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +Mediatek AFE PCM controller for mt8183 + +Required properties: +- compatible = "mediatek,mt68183-audio"; +- reg: register location and size +- interrupts: should contain AFE interrupt +- power-domains: should define the power domain +- clocks: Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names +- clock-names: should have these clock names: + "infra_sys_audio_clk", + "mtkaif_26m_clk", + "top_mux_audio", + "top_mux_aud_intbus", + "top_sys_pll3_d4", + "top_clk26m_clk"; + +Example: + + afe: mt8183-afe-pcm@11220000 { + compatible = "mediatek,mt8183-audio"; + reg = <0 0x11220000 0 0x1000>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 161 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>; + power-domains = <&scpsys MT8183_POWER_DOMAIN_AUDIO>; + clocks = <&infrasys CLK_INFRA_AUDIO>, + <&infrasys CLK_INFRA_AUDIO_26M_BCLK>, + <&topckgen CLK_TOP_MUX_AUDIO>, + <&topckgen CLK_TOP_MUX_AUD_INTBUS>, + <&topckgen CLK_TOP_SYSPLL_D2_D4>, + <&clk26m>; + clock-names = "infra_sys_audio_clk", + "mtkaif_26m_clk", + "top_mux_audio", + "top_mux_aud_intbus", + "top_sys_pll_d2_d4", + "top_clk26m_clk"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mtk-btcvsd-snd.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mtk-btcvsd-snd.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..679e44839b48 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mtk-btcvsd-snd.txt @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +Mediatek ALSA BT SCO CVSD/MSBC Driver + +Required properties: +- compatible = "mediatek,mtk-btcvsd-snd"; +- reg: register location and size of PKV and SRAM_BANK2 +- interrupts: should contain BTSCO interrupt +- mediatek,infracfg: the phandles of INFRASYS +- mediatek,offset: Array contains of register offset and mask + infra_misc_offset, + infra_conn_bt_cvsd_mask, + cvsd_mcu_read_offset, + cvsd_mcu_write_offset, + cvsd_packet_indicator_offset + +Example: + + mtk-btcvsd-snd@18000000 { + compatible = "mediatek,mtk-btcvsd-snd"; + reg=<0 0x18000000 0 0x1000>, + <0 0x18080000 0 0x8000>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 286 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>; + mediatek,infracfg = <&infrasys>; + mediatek,offset = <0xf00 0x800 0xfd0 0xfd4 0xfd8>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra30-hda.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra30-hda.txt index 44d27456e8a4..21cd310963b1 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra30-hda.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra30-hda.txt @@ -13,6 +13,10 @@ Required properties: See ../reset/reset.txt for details. - reset-names : Must include the following entries: hda, hda2hdmi, hda2codec_2x +Optional properties: +- nvidia,model : The user-visible name of this sound complex. Since the property + is optional, legacy boards can use default name provided in hda driver. + Example: hda@70030000 { @@ -27,4 +31,5 @@ hda@70030000 { <&tegra_car 128>, /* hda2hdmi */ <&tegra_car 111>; /* hda2codec_2x */ reset-names = "hda", "hda2hdmi", "hda2codec_2x"; + nvidia,model = "jetson-tk1-hda"; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,msm8916-wcd-analog.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,msm8916-wcd-analog.txt index fdcea3d12ee5..e7d17dda55db 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,msm8916-wcd-analog.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,msm8916-wcd-analog.txt @@ -30,6 +30,7 @@ Required properties - vdd-cdc-io-supply: phandle to VDD_CDC_IO regulator DT node. - vdd-cdc-tx-rx-cx-supply: phandle to VDD_CDC_TX/RX/CX regulator DT node. - vdd-micbias-supply: phandle of VDD_MICBIAS supply's regulator DT node. + Optional Properties: - qcom,mbhc-vthreshold-low: Array of 5 threshold voltages in mV for 5 buttons detection on headset when the mbhc is powered up @@ -92,9 +93,9 @@ spmi_bus { "cdc_ear_cnp_int", "cdc_hphr_cnp_int", "cdc_hphl_cnp_int"; - VDD-CDC-IO-supply = <&pm8916_l5>; - VDD-CDC-TX-RX-CX-supply = <&pm8916_l5>; - VDD-MICBIAS-supply = <&pm8916_l13>; + vdd-cdc-io-supply = <&pm8916_l5>; + vdd-cdc-tx-rx-cx-supply = <&pm8916_l5>; + vdd-micbias-supply = <&pm8916_l13>; #sound-dai-cells = <1>; }; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,wcd9335.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,wcd9335.txt index 1d8d49e30af7..5d6ea66a863f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,wcd9335.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,wcd9335.txt @@ -34,12 +34,12 @@ Required properties with SLIMbus Interface: Definition: Interrupt names of WCD INTR1 and INTR2 Should be: "intr1", "intr2" -- reset-gpio: +- reset-gpios: Usage: required Value type: <String Array> Definition: Reset gpio line -- qcom,ifd: +- slim-ifc-dev: Usage: required Value type: <phandle> Definition: SLIM interface device @@ -104,13 +104,13 @@ Required properties with SLIMbus Interface: Value type: <u32> Definition: Must be 1 -codec@1{ +audio-codec@1{ compatible = "slim217,1a0"; reg = <1 0>; interrupts = <&msmgpio 54 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; interrupt-names = "intr2" - reset-gpio = <&msmgpio 64 0>; - qcom,ifd = <&wc9335_ifd>; + reset-gpios = <&msmgpio 64 0>; + slim-ifc-dev = <&wc9335_ifd>; clock-names = "mclk", "native"; clocks = <&rpmcc RPM_SMD_DIV_CLK1>, <&rpmcc RPM_SMD_BB_CLK1>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rockchip,rk3328-codec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rockchip,rk3328-codec.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2469588c7ccb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rockchip,rk3328-codec.txt @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +* Rockchip Rk3328 internal codec + +Required properties: + +- compatible: "rockchip,rk3328-codec" +- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped + region. +- rockchip,grf: the phandle of the syscon node for GRF register. +- clocks: a list of phandle + clock-specifer pairs, one for each entry in clock-names. +- clock-names: should be "pclk". +- spk-depop-time-ms: speak depop time msec. + +Example for rk3328 internal codec: + +codec: codec@ff410000 { + compatible = "rockchip,rk3328-codec"; + reg = <0x0 0xff410000 0x0 0x1000>; + rockchip,grf = <&grf>; + clocks = <&cru PCLK_ACODEC>; + clock-names = "pclk"; + spk-depop-time-ms = 100; + status = "disabled"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sgtl5000.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sgtl5000.txt index 9c58f724396a..9d9ff5184939 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sgtl5000.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sgtl5000.txt @@ -37,6 +37,15 @@ VDDIO 1.8V 2.5V 3.3V 2 = 3.33 mA 5.74 mA 8.03 mA 3 = 4.99 mA 8.61 mA 12.05 mA +- sclk-strength: the SCLK pad strength. Possible values are: +0, 1, 2 and 3 as per the table below: + +VDDIO 1.8V 2.5V 3.3V +0 = Disable +1 = 1.66 mA 2.87 mA 4.02 mA +2 = 3.33 mA 5.74 mA 8.03 mA +3 = 4.99 mA 8.61 mA 12.05 mA + Example: sgtl5000: codec@a { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-scu-card.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-scu-card.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 3a2f71616cda..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-scu-card.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,94 +0,0 @@ -ASoC Simple SCU Sound Card - -Simple SCU Sound Card is "Simple Sound Card" + "ALSA DPCM". -For example, you can use this driver if you want to exchange sampling rate convert, -Mixing, etc... - -Required properties: - -- compatible : "simple-scu-audio-card" - "renesas,rsrc-card" -Optional properties: - -- simple-audio-card,name : see simple-audio-card.txt -- simple-audio-card,cpu : see simple-audio-card.txt -- simple-audio-card,codec : see simple-audio-card.txt - -Optional subnode properties: - -- simple-audio-card,format : see simple-audio-card.txt -- simple-audio-card,frame-master : see simple-audio-card.txt -- simple-audio-card,bitclock-master : see simple-audio-card.txt -- simple-audio-card,bitclock-inversion : see simple-audio-card.txt -- simple-audio-card,frame-inversion : see simple-audio-card.txt -- simple-audio-card,convert-rate : platform specified sampling rate convert -- simple-audio-card,convert-channels : platform specified converted channel size (2 - 8 ch) -- simple-audio-card,prefix : see routing -- simple-audio-card,widgets : Please refer to widgets.txt. -- simple-audio-card,routing : A list of the connections between audio components. - Each entry is a pair of strings, the first being the connection's sink, - the second being the connection's source. Valid names for sources. - use audio-prefix if some components is using same sink/sources naming. - it can be used if compatible was "renesas,rsrc-card"; - -Required CPU/CODEC subnodes properties: - -- sound-dai : see simple-audio-card.txt - -Optional CPU/CODEC subnodes properties: - -- clocks / system-clock-frequency : see simple-audio-card.txt - -Example 1. Sampling Rate Conversion - -sound { - compatible = "simple-scu-audio-card"; - - simple-audio-card,name = "rsnd-ak4643"; - simple-audio-card,format = "left_j"; - simple-audio-card,bitclock-master = <&sndcodec>; - simple-audio-card,frame-master = <&sndcodec>; - - simple-audio-card,convert-rate = <48000>; - - simple-audio-card,prefix = "ak4642"; - simple-audio-card,routing = "ak4642 Playback", "DAI0 Playback", - "DAI0 Capture", "ak4642 Capture"; - - sndcpu: simple-audio-card,cpu { - sound-dai = <&rcar_sound>; - }; - - sndcodec: simple-audio-card,codec { - sound-dai = <&ak4643>; - system-clock-frequency = <11289600>; - }; -}; - -Example 2. 2 CPU 1 Codec (Mixing) - -sound { - compatible = "simple-scu-audio-card"; - - simple-audio-card,name = "rsnd-ak4643"; - simple-audio-card,format = "left_j"; - simple-audio-card,bitclock-master = <&dpcmcpu>; - simple-audio-card,frame-master = <&dpcmcpu>; - - simple-audio-card,routing = "ak4642 Playback", "DAI0 Playback", - "ak4642 Playback", "DAI1 Playback"; - - dpcmcpu: cpu@0 { - sound-dai = <&rcar_sound 0>; - }; - - cpu@1 { - sound-dai = <&rcar_sound 1>; - }; - - codec { - prefix = "ak4642"; - sound-dai = <&ak4643>; - clocks = <&audio_clock>; - }; -}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sprd-pcm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sprd-pcm.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4b23e84b2e57 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sprd-pcm.txt @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +* Spreadtrum DMA platfrom bindings + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be "sprd,pcm-platform". +- dmas: Specify the list of DMA controller phandle and DMA request line ordered pairs. +- dma-names: Identifier string for each DMA request line in the dmas property. + These strings correspond 1:1 with the ordered pairs in dmas. + +Example: + + audio_platform:platform@0 { + compatible = "sprd,pcm-platform"; + dmas = <&agcp_dma 1 1>, <&agcp_dma 2 2>, + <&agcp_dma 3 3>, <&agcp_dma 4 4>, + <&agcp_dma 5 5>, <&agcp_dma 6 6>, + <&agcp_dma 7 7>, <&agcp_dma 8 8>, + <&agcp_dma 9 9>, <&agcp_dma 10 10>; + dma-names = "normal_p_l", "normal_p_r", + "normal_c_l", "normal_c_r", + "voice_c", "fast_p", + "loop_c", "loop_p", + "voip_c", "voip_p"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/xlnx,audio-formatter.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/xlnx,audio-formatter.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..cbc93c8f4963 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/xlnx,audio-formatter.txt @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +Device-Tree bindings for Xilinx PL audio formatter + +The IP core supports DMA, data formatting(AES<->PCM conversion) +of audio samples. + +Required properties: + - compatible: "xlnx,audio-formatter-1.0" + - interrupt-names: Names specified to list of interrupts in same + order mentioned under "interrupts". + List of supported interrupt names are: + "irq_mm2s" : interrupt from MM2S block + "irq_s2mm" : interrupt from S2MM block + - interrupts-parent: Phandle for interrupt controller. + - interrupts: List of Interrupt numbers. + - reg: Base address and size of the IP core instance. + - clock-names: List of input clocks. + Required elements: "s_axi_lite_aclk", "aud_mclk" + - clocks: Input clock specifier. Refer to common clock bindings. + +Example: + audio_ss_0_audio_formatter_0: audio_formatter@80010000 { + compatible = "xlnx,audio-formatter-1.0"; + interrupt-names = "irq_mm2s", "irq_s2mm"; + interrupt-parent = <&gic>; + interrupts = <0 104 4>, <0 105 4>; + reg = <0x0 0x80010000 0x0 0x1000>; + clock-names = "s_axi_lite_aclk", "aud_mclk"; + clocks = <&clk 71>, <&clk_wiz_1 0>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/xlnx,spdif.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/xlnx,spdif.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..15c2d64d247c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/xlnx,spdif.txt @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +Device-Tree bindings for Xilinx SPDIF IP + +The IP supports playback and capture of SPDIF audio + +Required properties: + - compatible: "xlnx,spdif-2.0" + - clock-names: List of input clocks. + Required elements: "s_axi_aclk", "aud_clk_i" + - clocks: Input clock specifier. Refer to common clock bindings. + - reg: Base address and address length of the IP core instance. + - interrupts-parent: Phandle for interrupt controller. + - interrupts: List of Interrupt numbers. + - xlnx,spdif-mode: 0 :- receiver mode + 1 :- transmitter mode + - xlnx,aud_clk_i: input audio clock value. + +Example: + spdif_0: spdif@80010000 { + clock-names = "aud_clk_i", "s_axi_aclk"; + clocks = <&misc_clk_0>, <&clk 71>; + compatible = "xlnx,spdif-2.0"; + interrupt-names = "spdif_interrupt"; + interrupt-parent = <&gic>; + interrupts = <0 91 4>; + reg = <0x0 0x80010000 0x0 0x10000>; + xlnx,spdif-mode = <1>; + xlnx,aud_clk_i = <49152913>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/atmel-quadspi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/atmel-quadspi.txt index b93c1e2f25dd..7c40ea694352 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/atmel-quadspi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/atmel-quadspi.txt @@ -1,14 +1,19 @@ * Atmel Quad Serial Peripheral Interface (QSPI) Required properties: -- compatible: Should be "atmel,sama5d2-qspi". +- compatible: Should be one of the following: + - "atmel,sama5d2-qspi" + - "microchip,sam9x60-qspi" - reg: Should contain the locations and lengths of the base registers and the mapped memory. - reg-names: Should contain the resource reg names: - qspi_base: configuration register address space - qspi_mmap: memory mapped address space - interrupts: Should contain the interrupt for the device. -- clocks: The phandle of the clock needed by the QSPI controller. +- clocks: Should reference the peripheral clock and the QSPI system + clock if available. +- clock-names: Should contain "pclk" for the peripheral clock and "qspick" + for the system clock when available. - #address-cells: Should be <1>. - #size-cells: Should be <0>. @@ -19,7 +24,8 @@ spi@f0020000 { reg = <0xf0020000 0x100>, <0xd0000000 0x8000000>; reg-names = "qspi_base", "qspi_mmap"; interrupts = <52 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH 7>; - clocks = <&spi0_clk>; + clocks = <&pmc PMC_TYPE_PERIPHERAL 52>; + clock-names = "pclk"; #address-cells = <1>; #size-cells = <0>; pinctrl-names = "default"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-imx-cspi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-imx-cspi.txt index e3c48b20b1a6..2d3264140cc5 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-imx-cspi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-imx-cspi.txt @@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ Required properties: - "fsl,imx35-cspi" for SPI compatible with the one integrated on i.MX35 - "fsl,imx51-ecspi" for SPI compatible with the one integrated on i.MX51 - "fsl,imx53-ecspi" for SPI compatible with the one integrated on i.MX53 and later Soc + - "fsl,imx8mq-ecspi" for SPI compatible with the one integrated on i.MX8M - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device - interrupts : Should contain CSPI/eCSPI interrupt - clocks : Clock specifiers for both ipg and per clocks. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsl-quadspi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-fsl-qspi.txt index 483e9cfac1b1..e8f1d627d288 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsl-quadspi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-fsl-qspi.txt @@ -14,15 +14,13 @@ Required properties: - clocks : The clocks needed by the QuadSPI controller - clock-names : Should contain the name of the clocks: "qspi_en" and "qspi". -Optional properties: - - fsl,qspi-has-second-chip: The controller has two buses, bus A and bus B. - Each bus can be connected with two NOR flashes. - Most of the time, each bus only has one NOR flash - connected, this is the default case. - But if there are two NOR flashes connected to the - bus, you should enable this property. - (Please check the board's schematic.) - - big-endian : That means the IP register is big endian +Required SPI slave node properties: + - reg: There are two buses (A and B) with two chip selects each. + This encodes to which bus and CS the flash is connected: + <0>: Bus A, CS 0 + <1>: Bus A, CS 1 + <2>: Bus B, CS 0 + <3>: Bus B, CS 1 Example: @@ -40,7 +38,7 @@ qspi0: quadspi@40044000 { }; }; -Example showing the usage of two SPI NOR devices: +Example showing the usage of two SPI NOR devices on bus A: &qspi2 { pinctrl-names = "default"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-nxp-fspi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-nxp-fspi.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2cd67eb727d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-nxp-fspi.txt @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +* NXP Flex Serial Peripheral Interface (FSPI) + +Required properties: + - compatible : Should be "nxp,lx2160a-fspi" + - reg : First contains the register location and length, + Second contains the memory mapping address and length + - reg-names : Should contain the resource reg names: + - fspi_base: configuration register address space + - fspi_mmap: memory mapped address space + - interrupts : Should contain the interrupt for the device + +Required SPI slave node properties: + - reg : There are two buses (A and B) with two chip selects each. + This encodes to which bus and CS the flash is connected: + - <0>: Bus A, CS 0 + - <1>: Bus A, CS 1 + - <2>: Bus B, CS 0 + - <3>: Bus B, CS 1 + +Example showing the usage of two SPI NOR slave devices on bus A: + +fspi0: spi@20c0000 { + compatible = "nxp,lx2160a-fspi"; + reg = <0x0 0x20c0000 0x0 0x10000>, <0x0 0x20000000 0x0 0x10000000>; + reg-names = "fspi_base", "fspi_mmap"; + interrupts = <0 25 0x4>; /* Level high type */ + clocks = <&clockgen 4 3>, <&clockgen 4 3>; + clock-names = "fspi_en", "fspi"; + + mt35xu512aba0: flash@0 { + reg = <0>; + .... + }; + + mt35xu512aba1: flash@1 { + reg = <1>; + .... + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-sifive.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-sifive.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..3f5c6e438972 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-sifive.txt @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +SiFive SPI controller Device Tree Bindings +------------------------------------------ + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be "sifive,<chip>-spi" and "sifive,spi<version>". + Supported compatible strings are: + "sifive,fu540-c000-spi" for the SiFive SPI v0 as integrated + onto the SiFive FU540 chip, and "sifive,spi0" for the SiFive + SPI v0 IP block with no chip integration tweaks. + Please refer to sifive-blocks-ip-versioning.txt for details +- reg : Physical base address and size of SPI registers map + A second (optional) range can indicate memory mapped flash +- interrupts : Must contain one entry +- interrupt-parent : Must be core interrupt controller +- clocks : Must reference the frequency given to the controller +- #address-cells : Must be '1', indicating which CS to use +- #size-cells : Must be '0' + +Optional properties: +- sifive,fifo-depth : Depth of hardware queues; defaults to 8 +- sifive,max-bits-per-word : Maximum bits per word; defaults to 8 + +SPI RTL that corresponds to the IP block version numbers can be found here: +https://github.com/sifive/sifive-blocks/tree/master/src/main/scala/devices/spi + +Example: + spi: spi@10040000 { + compatible = "sifive,fu540-c000-spi", "sifive,spi0"; + reg = <0x0 0x10040000 0x0 0x1000 0x0 0x20000000 0x0 0x10000000>; + interrupt-parent = <&plic>; + interrupts = <51>; + clocks = <&tlclk>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + sifive,fifo-depth = <8>; + sifive,max-bits-per-word = <8>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-sprd.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-sprd.txt index bad211a19da4..3c7eacce0ee3 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-sprd.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-sprd.txt @@ -14,6 +14,11 @@ Required properties: address on the SPI bus. Should be set to 1. - #size-cells: Should be set to 0. +Optional properties: +dma-names: Should contain names of the SPI used DMA channel. +dmas: Should contain DMA channels and DMA slave ids which the SPI used + sorted in the same order as the dma-names property. + Example: spi0: spi@70a00000{ compatible = "sprd,sc9860-spi"; @@ -21,6 +26,8 @@ spi0: spi@70a00000{ interrupts = <GIC_SPI 7 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; clock-names = "spi", "source","enable"; clocks = <&clk_spi0>, <&ext_26m>, <&clk_ap_apb_gates 5>; + dma-names = "rx_chn", "tx_chn"; + dmas = <&apdma 11 11>, <&apdma 12 12>; #address-cells = <1>; #size-cells = <0>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-stm32.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-stm32.txt index 1b3fa2c119d5..d82755c63eaf 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-stm32.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-stm32.txt @@ -7,7 +7,9 @@ from 4 to 32-bit data size. Although it can be configured as master or slave, only master is supported by the driver. Required properties: -- compatible: Must be "st,stm32h7-spi". +- compatible: Should be one of: + "st,stm32h7-spi" + "st,stm32f4-spi" - reg: Offset and length of the device's register set. - interrupts: Must contain the interrupt id. - clocks: Must contain an entry for spiclk (which feeds the internal clock @@ -30,8 +32,9 @@ Child nodes represent devices on the SPI bus See ../spi/spi-bus.txt Optional properties: -- st,spi-midi-ns: (Master Inter-Data Idleness) minimum time delay in - nanoseconds inserted between two consecutive data frames. +- st,spi-midi-ns: Only for STM32H7, (Master Inter-Data Idleness) minimum time + delay in nanoseconds inserted between two consecutive data + frames. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sram/milbeaut-smp-sram.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sram/milbeaut-smp-sram.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..194f6a3c1c1e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sram/milbeaut-smp-sram.txt @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +Milbeaut SRAM for smp bringup + +Milbeaut SoCs use a part of the sram for the bringup of the secondary cores. +Once they get powered up in the bootloader, they stay at the specific part +of the sram. +Therefore the part needs to be added as the sub-node of mmio-sram. + +Required sub-node properties: +- compatible : should be "socionext,milbeaut-smp-sram" + +Example: + + sram: sram@0 { + compatible = "mmio-sram"; + reg = <0x0 0x10000>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges = <0 0x0 0x10000>; + + smp-sram@f100 { + compatible = "socionext,milbeaut-smp-sram"; + reg = <0xf100 0x20>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sram/sunxi-sram.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sram/sunxi-sram.txt index ab5a70bb9a64..380246a805f2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sram/sunxi-sram.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sram/sunxi-sram.txt @@ -63,6 +63,7 @@ The valid sections compatible for H5 are: The valid sections compatible for H6 are: - allwinner,sun50i-h6-sram-c, allwinner,sun50i-a64-sram-c + - allwinner,sun50i-h6-sram-c1, allwinner,sun4i-a10-sram-c1 The valid sections compatible for F1C100s are: - allwinner,suniv-f1c100s-sram-d, allwinner,sun4i-a10-sram-d diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/brcm,sr-thermal.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/brcm,sr-thermal.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..3ab330219d45 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/brcm,sr-thermal.txt @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ +* Broadcom Stingray Thermal + +This binding describes thermal sensors that is part of Stingray SoCs. + +Required properties: +- compatible : Must be "brcm,sr-thermal" +- reg : Memory where tmon data will be available. +- brcm,tmon-mask: A one cell bit mask of valid TMON sources. + Each bit represents single TMON source. +- #thermal-sensor-cells : Thermal sensor phandler +- polling-delay: Max number of milliseconds to wait between polls. +- thermal-sensors: A list of thermal sensor phandles and specifier. + specifier value is tmon ID and it should be + in correspond with brcm,tmon-mask. +- temperature: trip temperature threshold in millicelsius. + +Example: + tmons { + compatible = "simple-bus"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges = <0x0 0x0 0x8f100000 0x100>; + + tmon: tmon@0 { + compatible = "brcm,sr-thermal"; + reg = <0x0 0x40>; + brcm,tmon-mask = <0x3f>; + #thermal-sensor-cells = <1>; + }; + }; + + thermal-zones { + ihost0_thermal: ihost0-thermal { + polling-delay-passive = <0>; + polling-delay = <1000>; + thermal-sensors = <&tmon 0>; + trips { + cpu-crit { + temperature = <105000>; + hysteresis = <0>; + type = "critical"; + }; + }; + }; + ihost1_thermal: ihost1-thermal { + polling-delay-passive = <0>; + polling-delay = <1000>; + thermal-sensors = <&tmon 1>; + trips { + cpu-crit { + temperature = <105000>; + hysteresis = <0>; + type = "critical"; + }; + }; + }; + ihost2_thermal: ihost2-thermal { + polling-delay-passive = <0>; + polling-delay = <1000>; + thermal-sensors = <&tmon 2>; + trips { + cpu-crit { + temperature = <105000>; + hysteresis = <0>; + type = "critical"; + }; + }; + }; + ihost3_thermal: ihost3-thermal { + polling-delay-passive = <0>; + polling-delay = <1000>; + thermal-sensors = <&tmon 3>; + trips { + cpu-crit { + temperature = <105000>; + hysteresis = <0>; + type = "critical"; + }; + }; + }; + crmu_thermal: crmu-thermal { + polling-delay-passive = <0>; + polling-delay = <1000>; + thermal-sensors = <&tmon 4>; + trips { + cpu-crit { + temperature = <105000>; + hysteresis = <0>; + type = "critical"; + }; + }; + }; + nitro_thermal: nitro-thermal { + polling-delay-passive = <0>; + polling-delay = <1000>; + thermal-sensors = <&tmon 5>; + trips { + cpu-crit { + temperature = <105000>; + hysteresis = <0>; + type = "critical"; + }; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/mediatek-thermal.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/mediatek-thermal.txt index 41d6a443ad66..f8d7831f3974 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/mediatek-thermal.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/mediatek-thermal.txt @@ -13,6 +13,7 @@ Required properties: - "mediatek,mt2701-thermal" : For MT2701 family of SoCs - "mediatek,mt2712-thermal" : For MT2712 family of SoCs - "mediatek,mt7622-thermal" : For MT7622 SoC + - "mediatek,mt8183-thermal" : For MT8183 family of SoCs - reg: Address range of the thermal controller - interrupts: IRQ for the thermal controller - clocks, clock-names: Clocks needed for the thermal controller. required diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/fsl,imxgpt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/fsl,imxgpt.txt index 9809b11f7180..5d8fd5b52598 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/fsl,imxgpt.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/fsl,imxgpt.txt @@ -2,17 +2,44 @@ Freescale i.MX General Purpose Timer (GPT) Required properties: -- compatible : should be "fsl,<soc>-gpt" -- reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers. -- interrupts : A list of 4 interrupts; one per timer channel. -- clocks : The clocks provided by the SoC to drive the timer. +- compatible : should be one of following: + for i.MX1: + - "fsl,imx1-gpt"; + for i.MX21: + - "fsl,imx21-gpt"; + for i.MX27: + - "fsl,imx27-gpt", "fsl,imx21-gpt"; + for i.MX31: + - "fsl,imx31-gpt"; + for i.MX25: + - "fsl,imx25-gpt", "fsl,imx31-gpt"; + for i.MX50: + - "fsl,imx50-gpt", "fsl,imx31-gpt"; + for i.MX51: + - "fsl,imx51-gpt", "fsl,imx31-gpt"; + for i.MX53: + - "fsl,imx53-gpt", "fsl,imx31-gpt"; + for i.MX6Q: + - "fsl,imx6q-gpt", "fsl,imx31-gpt"; + for i.MX6DL: + - "fsl,imx6dl-gpt"; + for i.MX6SL: + - "fsl,imx6sl-gpt", "fsl,imx6dl-gpt"; + for i.MX6SX: + - "fsl,imx6sx-gpt", "fsl,imx6dl-gpt"; +- reg : specifies base physical address and size of the registers. +- interrupts : should be the gpt interrupt. +- clocks : the clocks provided by the SoC to drive the timer, must contain + an entry for each entry in clock-names. +- clock-names : must include "ipg" entry first, then "per" entry. Example: gpt1: timer@10003000 { - compatible = "fsl,imx27-gpt", "fsl,imx1-gpt"; + compatible = "fsl,imx27-gpt", "fsl,imx21-gpt"; reg = <0x10003000 0x1000>; interrupts = <26>; - clocks = <&clks 46>, <&clks 61>; + clocks = <&clks IMX27_CLK_GPT1_IPG_GATE>, + <&clks IMX27_CLK_PER1_GATE>; clock-names = "ipg", "per"; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/mediatek,mtk-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/mediatek,mtk-timer.txt index 18d4d0166c76..ff7c567a7972 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/mediatek,mtk-timer.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/mediatek,mtk-timer.txt @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ -Mediatek Timers +MediaTek Timers --------------- -Mediatek SoCs have two different timers on different platforms, +MediaTek SoCs have two different timers on different platforms, - GPT (General Purpose Timer) - SYST (System Timer) @@ -9,6 +9,7 @@ The proper timer will be selected automatically by driver. Required properties: - compatible should contain: + For those SoCs that use GPT * "mediatek,mt2701-timer" for MT2701 compatible timers (GPT) * "mediatek,mt6580-timer" for MT6580 compatible timers (GPT) * "mediatek,mt6589-timer" for MT6589 compatible timers (GPT) @@ -17,7 +18,11 @@ Required properties: * "mediatek,mt8135-timer" for MT8135 compatible timers (GPT) * "mediatek,mt8173-timer" for MT8173 compatible timers (GPT) * "mediatek,mt6577-timer" for MT6577 and all above compatible timers (GPT) - * "mediatek,mt6765-timer" for MT6765 compatible timers (SYST) + + For those SoCs that use SYST + * "mediatek,mt7629-timer" for MT7629 compatible timers (SYST) + * "mediatek,mt6765-timer" for MT6765 and all above compatible timers (SYST) + - reg: Should contain location and length for timer register. - clocks: Should contain system clock. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/nvidia,tegra210-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/nvidia,tegra210-timer.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..032cda96fe0d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/nvidia,tegra210-timer.txt @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +NVIDIA Tegra210 timer + +The Tegra210 timer provides fourteen 29-bit timer counters and one 32-bit +timestamp counter. The TMRs run at either a fixed 1 MHz clock rate derived +from the oscillator clock (TMR0-TMR9) or directly at the oscillator clock +(TMR10-TMR13). Each TMR can be programmed to generate one-shot, periodic, +or watchdog interrupts. + +Required properties: +- compatible : "nvidia,tegra210-timer". +- reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers. +- interrupts : A list of 14 interrupts; one per each timer channels 0 through + 13. +- clocks : Must contain one entry, for the module clock. + See ../clocks/clock-bindings.txt for details. + +timer@60005000 { + compatible = "nvidia,tegra210-timer"; + reg = <0x0 0x60005000 0x0 0x400>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 156 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 0 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 1 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 41 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 42 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 121 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 152 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 153 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 154 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 155 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 176 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 177 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 178 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 179 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clocks = <&tegra_car TEGRA210_CLK_TIMER>; + clock-names = "timer"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,cmt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,cmt.txt index 862a80f0380a..c0594450e9ef 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,cmt.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,cmt.txt @@ -32,6 +32,8 @@ Required Properties: - "renesas,r8a77470-cmt1" for the 48-bit CMT1 device included in r8a77470. - "renesas,r8a774a1-cmt0" for the 32-bit CMT0 device included in r8a774a1. - "renesas,r8a774a1-cmt1" for the 48-bit CMT1 device included in r8a774a1. + - "renesas,r8a774c0-cmt0" for the 32-bit CMT0 device included in r8a774c0. + - "renesas,r8a774c0-cmt1" for the 48-bit CMT1 device included in r8a774c0. - "renesas,r8a7790-cmt0" for the 32-bit CMT0 device included in r8a7790. - "renesas,r8a7790-cmt1" for the 48-bit CMT1 device included in r8a7790. - "renesas,r8a7791-cmt0" for the 32-bit CMT0 device included in r8a7791. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,tmu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,tmu.txt index 4ddff85837da..13ad07416bdd 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,tmu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,tmu.txt @@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ Required Properties: - compatible: must contain one or more of the following: - "renesas,tmu-r8a7740" for the r8a7740 TMU + - "renesas,tmu-r8a774c0" for the r8a774C0 TMU - "renesas,tmu-r8a7778" for the r8a7778 TMU - "renesas,tmu-r8a7779" for the r8a7779 TMU - "renesas,tmu-r8a77970" for the r8a77970 TMU diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/socionext,milbeaut-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/socionext,milbeaut-timer.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ac44c4b67530 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/socionext,milbeaut-timer.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +Milbeaut SoCs Timer Controller + +Required properties: + +- compatible : should be "socionext,milbeaut-timer". +- reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers. +- interrupts : The interrupt of the first timer. +- clocks: phandle to the input clk. + +Example: + +timer { + compatible = "socionext,milbeaut-timer"; + reg = <0x1e000050 0x20> + interrupts = <0 91 4>; + clocks = <&clk 4>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/trivial-devices.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/trivial-devices.yaml index cc64ec63a6ad..d79fb22bde39 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/trivial-devices.yaml +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/trivial-devices.yaml @@ -322,6 +322,8 @@ properties: - ti,ads7830 # Temperature Monitoring and Fan Control - ti,amc6821 + # Temperature sensor with integrated fan control + - ti,lm96000 # I2C Touch-Screen Controller - ti,tsc2003 # Low Power Digital Temperature Sensor with SMBUS/Two Wire Serial Interface diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufs-hisi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufs-hisi.txt index a48c44817367..0b83df1a5418 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufs-hisi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufs-hisi.txt @@ -6,9 +6,10 @@ Each UFS Host Controller should have its own node. Required properties: - compatible : compatible list, contains one of the following - "hisilicon,hi3660-ufs", "jedec,ufs-1.1" for hisi ufs - host controller present on Hi36xx chipset. + host controller present on Hi3660 chipset. + "hisilicon,hi3670-ufs", "jedec,ufs-2.1" for hisi ufs + host controller present on Hi3670 chipset. - reg : should contain UFS register address space & UFS SYS CTRL register address, -- interrupt-parent : interrupt device - interrupts : interrupt number - clocks : List of phandle and clock specifier pairs - clock-names : List of clock input name strings sorted in the same diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufshcd-pltfrm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufshcd-pltfrm.txt index 8cf59452c675..5111e9130bc3 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufshcd-pltfrm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufshcd-pltfrm.txt @@ -4,11 +4,14 @@ UFSHC nodes are defined to describe on-chip UFS host controllers. Each UFS controller instance should have its own node. Required properties: -- compatible : must contain "jedec,ufs-1.1" or "jedec,ufs-2.0", may - also list one or more of the following: - "qcom,msm8994-ufshc" - "qcom,msm8996-ufshc" - "qcom,ufshc" +- compatible : must contain "jedec,ufs-1.1" or "jedec,ufs-2.0" + + For Qualcomm SoCs must contain, as below, an + SoC-specific compatible along with "qcom,ufshc" and + the appropriate jedec string: + "qcom,msm8994-ufshc", "qcom,ufshc", "jedec,ufs-2.0" + "qcom,msm8996-ufshc", "qcom,ufshc", "jedec,ufs-2.0" + "qcom,sdm845-ufshc", "qcom,ufshc", "jedec,ufs-2.0" - interrupts : <interrupt mapping for UFS host controller IRQ> - reg : <registers mapping> diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ci-hdrc-usb2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ci-hdrc-usb2.txt index adae82385dd6..a254386a91ad 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ci-hdrc-usb2.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ci-hdrc-usb2.txt @@ -93,6 +93,7 @@ i.mx specific properties - over-current-active-low: over current signal polarity is active low. - over-current-active-high: over current signal polarity is active high. It's recommended to specify the over current polarity. +- power-active-high: power signal polarity is active high - external-vbus-divider: enables off-chip resistor divider for Vbus Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ingenic,jz4740-musb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ingenic,jz4740-musb.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..620355cee63f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ingenic,jz4740-musb.txt @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +Ingenic JZ4740 MUSB driver + +Required properties: + +- compatible: Must be "ingenic,jz4740-musb" +- reg: Address range of the UDC register set +- interrupts: IRQ number related to the UDC hardware +- interrupt-names: must be "mc" +- clocks: phandle to the "udc" clock +- clock-names: must be "udc" + +Example: + +udc: usb@13040000 { + compatible = "ingenic,jz4740-musb"; + reg = <0x13040000 0x10000>; + + interrupt-parent = <&intc>; + interrupts = <24>; + interrupt-names = "mc"; + + clocks = <&cgu JZ4740_CLK_UDC>; + clock-names = "udc"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/keystone-usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/keystone-usb.txt index f96e09f784cc..77df82e36138 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/keystone-usb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/keystone-usb.txt @@ -3,7 +3,9 @@ TI Keystone Soc USB Controller DWC3 GLUE Required properties: - - compatible: should be "ti,keystone-dwc3". + - compatible: should be + "ti,keystone-dwc3" for Keystone 2 SoCs + "ti,am654-dwc3" for AM654 SoC - #address-cells, #size-cells : should be '1' if the device has sub-nodes with 'reg' property. - reg : Address and length of the register set for the USB subsystem on @@ -21,7 +23,7 @@ SoCs only: - clock-names: Must be "usb". -The following are mandatory properties for Keystone 2 66AK2G SoCs only: +The following are mandatory properties for 66AK2G and AM654: - power-domains: Should contain a phandle to a PM domain provider node and an args specifier containing the USB device id diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/qcom,dwc3.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/qcom,dwc3.txt index 95afdcf3c337..cb695aa3fba4 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/qcom,dwc3.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/qcom,dwc3.txt @@ -4,6 +4,7 @@ Required properties: - compatible: Compatible list, contains "qcom,dwc3" "qcom,msm8996-dwc3" for msm8996 SOC. + "qcom,msm8998-dwc3" for msm8998 SOC. "qcom,sdm845-dwc3" for sdm845 SOC. - reg: Offset and length of register set for QSCRATCH wrapper - power-domains: specifies a phandle to PM domain provider node diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/renesas_usb3.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/renesas_usb3.txt index d366555166d0..35039e720515 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/renesas_usb3.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/renesas_usb3.txt @@ -3,6 +3,7 @@ Renesas Electronics USB3.0 Peripheral driver Required properties: - compatible: Must contain one of the following: - "renesas,r8a774a1-usb3-peri" + - "renesas,r8a774c0-usb3-peri" - "renesas,r8a7795-usb3-peri" - "renesas,r8a7796-usb3-peri" - "renesas,r8a77965-usb3-peri" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/renesas_usbhs.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/renesas_usbhs.txt index 90719f501852..d93b6a1504f2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/renesas_usbhs.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/renesas_usbhs.txt @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ Required properties: - "renesas,usbhs-r8a7744" for r8a7744 (RZ/G1N) compatible device - "renesas,usbhs-r8a7745" for r8a7745 (RZ/G1E) compatible device - "renesas,usbhs-r8a774a1" for r8a774a1 (RZ/G2M) compatible device + - "renesas,usbhs-r8a774c0" for r8a774c0 (RZ/G2E) compatible device - "renesas,usbhs-r8a7790" for r8a7790 (R-Car H2) compatible device - "renesas,usbhs-r8a7791" for r8a7791 (R-Car M2-W) compatible device - "renesas,usbhs-r8a7792" for r8a7792 (R-Car V2H) compatible device diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb251xb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb251xb.txt index 168ff819e827..17915f64b8ee 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb251xb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb251xb.txt @@ -64,6 +64,8 @@ Optional properties : - power-on-time-ms : Specifies the time it takes from the time the host initiates the power-on sequence to a port until the port has adequate power. The value is given in ms in a 0 - 510 range (default is 100ms). + - swap-dx-lanes : Specifies the ports which will swap the differential-pair + (D+/D-), default is not-swapped. Examples: usb2512b@2c { @@ -81,4 +83,6 @@ Examples: manufacturer = "Foo"; product = "Foo-Bar"; serial = "1234567890A"; + /* correct misplaced usb connectors on port 1,2 */ + swap-dx-lanes = <1 2>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt index 389508584f48..8162b0eb4b50 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt @@ -24,6 +24,7 @@ amarula Amarula Solutions amazon Amazon.com, Inc. amcc Applied Micro Circuits Corporation (APM, formally AMCC) amd Advanced Micro Devices (AMD), Inc. +amediatech Shenzhen Amediatech Technology Co., Ltd amlogic Amlogic, Inc. ampire Ampire Co., Ltd. ams AMS AG @@ -65,6 +66,7 @@ bticino Bticino International calxeda Calxeda capella Capella Microsystems, Inc cascoda Cascoda, Ltd. +catalyst Catalyst Semiconductor, Inc. cavium Cavium, Inc. cdns Cadence Design Systems Inc. cdtech CDTech(H.K.) Electronics Limited @@ -108,11 +110,13 @@ dongwoon Dongwoon Anatech dptechnics DPTechnics dragino Dragino Technology Co., Limited ea Embedded Artists AB +ebs-systart EBS-SYSTART GmbH ebv EBV Elektronik eckelmann Eckelmann AG edt Emerging Display Technologies eeti eGalax_eMPIA Technology Inc elan Elan Microelectronic Corp. +elgin Elgin S/A. embest Shenzhen Embest Technology Co., Ltd. emlid Emlid, Ltd. emmicro EM Microelectronic @@ -136,11 +140,13 @@ fairphone Fairphone B.V. faraday Faraday Technology Corporation fastrax Fastrax Oy fcs Fairchild Semiconductor +feiyang Shenzhen Fly Young Technology Co.,LTD. firefly Firefly focaltech FocalTech Systems Co.,Ltd friendlyarm Guangzhou FriendlyARM Computer Tech Co., Ltd fsl Freescale Semiconductor fujitsu Fujitsu Ltd. +gateworks Gateworks Corporation gcw Game Consoles Worldwide ge General Electric Company geekbuying GeekBuying @@ -150,6 +156,7 @@ geniatech Geniatech, Inc. giantec Giantec Semiconductor, Inc. giantplus Giantplus Technology Co., Ltd. globalscale Globalscale Technologies, Inc. +globaltop GlobalTop Technology, Inc. gmt Global Mixed-mode Technology, Inc. goodix Shenzhen Huiding Technology Co., Ltd. google Google, Inc. @@ -211,6 +218,7 @@ laird Laird PLC lantiq Lantiq Semiconductor lattice Lattice Semiconductor lego LEGO Systems A/S +lemaker Shenzhen LeMaker Technology Co., Ltd. lenovo Lenovo Group Ltd. lg LG Corporation libretech Shenzhen Libre Technology Co., Ltd @@ -273,6 +281,7 @@ nintendo Nintendo nlt NLT Technologies, Ltd. nokia Nokia nordic Nordic Semiconductor +novtech NovTech, Inc. nutsboard NutsBoard nuvoton Nuvoton Technology Corporation nvd New Vision Display @@ -297,6 +306,7 @@ ovti OmniVision Technologies oxsemi Oxford Semiconductor, Ltd. panasonic Panasonic Corporation parade Parade Technologies Inc. +pda Precision Design Associates, Inc. pericom Pericom Technology Inc. pervasive Pervasive Displays, Inc. phicomm PHICOMM Co., Ltd. @@ -304,6 +314,7 @@ phytec PHYTEC Messtechnik GmbH picochip Picochip Ltd pine64 Pine64 pixcir PIXCIR MICROELECTRONICS Co., Ltd +plantower Plantower Co., Ltd plathome Plat'Home Co., Ltd. plda PLDA plx Broadcom Corporation (formerly PLX Technology) @@ -390,6 +401,7 @@ tcl Toby Churchill Ltd. technexion TechNexion technologic Technologic Systems tempo Tempo Semiconductor +techstar Shenzhen Techstar Electronics Co., Ltd. terasic Terasic Inc. thine THine Electronics, Inc. ti Texas Instruments @@ -430,6 +442,7 @@ vot Vision Optical Technology Co., Ltd. wd Western Digital Corp. wetek WeTek Electronics, limited. wexler Wexler +whwave Shenzhen whwave Electronics, Inc. wi2wi Wi2Wi, Inc. winbond Winbond Electronics corp. winstar Winstar Display Corp. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/renesas-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/renesas-wdt.txt index ef2b97b72e08..9f365c1a3399 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/renesas-wdt.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/renesas-wdt.txt @@ -8,6 +8,7 @@ Required properties: - "renesas,r8a7743-wdt" (RZ/G1M) - "renesas,r8a7744-wdt" (RZ/G1N) - "renesas,r8a7745-wdt" (RZ/G1E) + - "renesas,r8a77470-wdt" (RZ/G1C) - "renesas,r8a774a1-wdt" (RZ/G2M) - "renesas,r8a774c0-wdt" (RZ/G2E) - "renesas,r8a7790-wdt" (R-Car H2) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/st,stpmic1-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/st,stpmic1-wdt.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7cc1407f15cb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/st,stpmic1-wdt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +STMicroelectronics STPMIC1 Watchdog + +Required properties: + +- compatible : should be "st,stpmic1-wdt" + +Example: + +watchdog { + compatible = "st,stpmic1-wdt"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/doc-guide/kernel-doc.rst b/Documentation/doc-guide/kernel-doc.rst index 51be62aa4385..f96059767c8c 100644 --- a/Documentation/doc-guide/kernel-doc.rst +++ b/Documentation/doc-guide/kernel-doc.rst @@ -490,7 +490,7 @@ doc: *title* functions: *[ function ...]* Include documentation for each *function* in *source*. - If no *function* if specified, the documentaion for all functions + If no *function* is specified, the documentation for all functions and types in the *source* will be included. Examples:: @@ -517,4 +517,17 @@ How to use kernel-doc to generate man pages If you just want to use kernel-doc to generate man pages you can do this from the kernel git tree:: - $ scripts/kernel-doc -man $(git grep -l '/\*\*' -- :^Documentation :^tools) | scripts/split-man.pl /tmp/man + $ scripts/kernel-doc -man \ + $(git grep -l '/\*\*' -- :^Documentation :^tools) \ + | scripts/split-man.pl /tmp/man + +Some older versions of git do not support some of the variants of syntax for +path exclusion. One of the following commands may work for those versions:: + + $ scripts/kernel-doc -man \ + $(git grep -l '/\*\*' -- . ':!Documentation' ':!tools') \ + | scripts/split-man.pl /tmp/man + + $ scripts/kernel-doc -man \ + $(git grep -l '/\*\*' -- . ":(exclude)Documentation" ":(exclude)tools") \ + | scripts/split-man.pl /tmp/man diff --git a/Documentation/doc-guide/sphinx.rst b/Documentation/doc-guide/sphinx.rst index 02605ee1d876..c039224b404e 100644 --- a/Documentation/doc-guide/sphinx.rst +++ b/Documentation/doc-guide/sphinx.rst @@ -27,8 +27,8 @@ Sphinx Install ============== The ReST markups currently used by the Documentation/ files are meant to be -built with ``Sphinx`` version 1.3 or upper. If you're desiring to build -PDF outputs, it is recommended to use version 1.4.6 or upper. +built with ``Sphinx`` version 1.3 or higher. If you desire to build +PDF output, it is recommended to use version 1.4.6 or higher. There's a script that checks for the Sphinx requirements. Please see :ref:`sphinx-pre-install` for further details. @@ -37,15 +37,15 @@ Most distributions are shipped with Sphinx, but its toolchain is fragile, and it is not uncommon that upgrading it or some other Python packages on your machine would cause the documentation build to break. -A way to get rid of that is to use a different version than the one shipped -on your distributions. In order to do that, it is recommended to install +A way to avoid that is to use a different version than the one shipped +with your distributions. In order to do so, it is recommended to install Sphinx inside a virtual environment, using ``virtualenv-3`` or ``virtualenv``, depending on how your distribution packaged Python 3. .. note:: #) Sphinx versions below 1.5 don't work properly with Python's - docutils version 0.13.1 or upper. So, if you're willing to use + docutils version 0.13.1 or higher. So, if you're willing to use those versions, you should run ``pip install 'docutils==0.12'``. #) It is recommended to use the RTD theme for html output. Depending @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ output. PDF and LaTeX builds -------------------- -Such builds are currently supported only with Sphinx versions 1.4 and upper. +Such builds are currently supported only with Sphinx versions 1.4 and higher. For PDF and LaTeX output, you'll also need ``XeLaTeX`` version 3.14159265. diff --git a/Documentation/dontdiff b/Documentation/dontdiff index 2228fcc8e29f..ef25a066d952 100644 --- a/Documentation/dontdiff +++ b/Documentation/dontdiff @@ -106,7 +106,6 @@ compile.h* conf config config-* -config_data.h* config.mak config.mak.autogen conmakehash diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/80211/mac80211.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/80211/mac80211.rst index 85a8335e80b6..eab40bcf3987 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/80211/mac80211.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/80211/mac80211.rst @@ -126,6 +126,9 @@ functions/definitions :functions: ieee80211_rx_status .. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h + :functions: mac80211_rx_encoding_flags + +.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h :functions: mac80211_rx_flags .. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/component.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/component.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2da4a8f20607 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/component.rst @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +====================================== +Component Helper for Aggregate Drivers +====================================== + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/base/component.c + :doc: overview + + +API +=== + +.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/component.h + :internal: + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/base/component.c + :export: + diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/device_link.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/device_link.rst index d6763272e747..ae1e3d0394b0 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/device_link.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/device_link.rst @@ -1,6 +1,9 @@ .. |struct dev_pm_domain| replace:: :c:type:`struct dev_pm_domain <dev_pm_domain>` .. |struct generic_pm_domain| replace:: :c:type:`struct generic_pm_domain <generic_pm_domain>` + +.. _device_link: + ============ Device links ============ @@ -25,8 +28,8 @@ suspend/resume and shutdown ordering. Device links allow representation of such dependencies in the driver core. -In its standard form, a device link combines *both* dependency types: -It guarantees correct suspend/resume and shutdown ordering between a +In its standard or *managed* form, a device link combines *both* dependency +types: It guarantees correct suspend/resume and shutdown ordering between a "supplier" device and its "consumer" devices, and it guarantees driver presence on the supplier. The consumer devices are not probed before the supplier is bound to a driver, and they're unbound before the supplier @@ -59,18 +62,24 @@ device ``->probe`` callback or a boot-time PCI quirk. Another example for an inconsistent state would be a device link that represents a driver presence dependency, yet is added from the consumer's -``->probe`` callback while the supplier hasn't probed yet: Had the driver -core known about the device link earlier, it wouldn't have probed the +``->probe`` callback while the supplier hasn't started to probe yet: Had the +driver core known about the device link earlier, it wouldn't have probed the consumer in the first place. The onus is thus on the consumer to check presence of the supplier after adding the link, and defer probing on -non-presence. - -If a device link is added in the ``->probe`` callback of the supplier or -consumer driver, it is typically deleted in its ``->remove`` callback for -symmetry. That way, if the driver is compiled as a module, the device -link is added on module load and orderly deleted on unload. The same -restrictions that apply to device link addition (e.g. exclusion of a -parallel suspend/resume transition) apply equally to deletion. +non-presence. [Note that it is valid to create a link from the consumer's +``->probe`` callback while the supplier is still probing, but the consumer must +know that the supplier is functional already at the link creation time (that is +the case, for instance, if the consumer has just acquired some resources that +would not have been available had the supplier not been functional then).] + +If a device link with ``DL_FLAG_STATELESS`` set (i.e. a stateless device link) +is added in the ``->probe`` callback of the supplier or consumer driver, it is +typically deleted in its ``->remove`` callback for symmetry. That way, if the +driver is compiled as a module, the device link is added on module load and +orderly deleted on unload. The same restrictions that apply to device link +addition (e.g. exclusion of a parallel suspend/resume transition) apply equally +to deletion. Device links with ``DL_FLAG_STATELESS`` unset (i.e. managed +device links) are deleted automatically by the driver core. Several flags may be specified on device link addition, two of which have already been mentioned above: ``DL_FLAG_STATELESS`` to express that no @@ -80,25 +89,55 @@ integration is desired. Two other flags are specifically targeted at use cases where the device link is added from the consumer's ``->probe`` callback: ``DL_FLAG_RPM_ACTIVE`` -can be specified to runtime resume the supplier upon addition of the -device link. ``DL_FLAG_AUTOREMOVE_CONSUMER`` causes the device link to be -automatically purged when the consumer fails to probe or later unbinds. -This obviates the need to explicitly delete the link in the ``->remove`` -callback or in the error path of the ``->probe`` callback. +can be specified to runtime resume the supplier and prevent it from suspending +before the consumer is runtime suspended. ``DL_FLAG_AUTOREMOVE_CONSUMER`` +causes the device link to be automatically purged when the consumer fails to +probe or later unbinds. Similarly, when the device link is added from supplier's ``->probe`` callback, ``DL_FLAG_AUTOREMOVE_SUPPLIER`` causes the device link to be automatically purged when the supplier fails to probe or later unbinds. +If neither ``DL_FLAG_AUTOREMOVE_CONSUMER`` nor ``DL_FLAG_AUTOREMOVE_SUPPLIER`` +is set, ``DL_FLAG_AUTOPROBE_CONSUMER`` can be used to request the driver core +to probe for a driver for the consumer driver on the link automatically after +a driver has been bound to the supplier device. + +Note, however, that any combinations of ``DL_FLAG_AUTOREMOVE_CONSUMER``, +``DL_FLAG_AUTOREMOVE_SUPPLIER`` or ``DL_FLAG_AUTOPROBE_CONSUMER`` with +``DL_FLAG_STATELESS`` are invalid and cannot be used. + Limitations =========== -Driver authors should be aware that a driver presence dependency (i.e. when -``DL_FLAG_STATELESS`` is not specified on link addition) may cause probing of -the consumer to be deferred indefinitely. This can become a problem if the -consumer is required to probe before a certain initcall level is reached. -Worse, if the supplier driver is blacklisted or missing, the consumer will -never be probed. +Driver authors should be aware that a driver presence dependency for managed +device links (i.e. when ``DL_FLAG_STATELESS`` is not specified on link addition) +may cause probing of the consumer to be deferred indefinitely. This can become +a problem if the consumer is required to probe before a certain initcall level +is reached. Worse, if the supplier driver is blacklisted or missing, the +consumer will never be probed. + +Moreover, managed device links cannot be deleted directly. They are deleted +by the driver core when they are not necessary any more in accordance with the +``DL_FLAG_AUTOREMOVE_CONSUMER`` and ``DL_FLAG_AUTOREMOVE_SUPPLIER`` flags. +However, stateless device links (i.e. device links with ``DL_FLAG_STATELESS`` +set) are expected to be removed by whoever called :c:func:`device_link_add()` +to add them with the help of either :c:func:`device_link_del()` or +:c:func:`device_link_remove()`. + +Passing ``DL_FLAG_RPM_ACTIVE`` along with ``DL_FLAG_STATELESS`` to +:c:func:`device_link_add()` may cause the PM-runtime usage counter of the +supplier device to remain nonzero after a subsequent invocation of either +:c:func:`device_link_del()` or :c:func:`device_link_remove()` to remove the +device link returned by it. This happens if :c:func:`device_link_add()` is +called twice in a row for the same consumer-supplier pair without removing the +link between these calls, in which case allowing the PM-runtime usage counter +of the supplier to drop on an attempt to remove the link may cause it to be +suspended while the consumer is still PM-runtime-active and that has to be +avoided. [To work around this limitation it is sufficient to let the consumer +runtime suspend at least once, or call :c:func:`pm_runtime_set_suspended()` for +it with PM-runtime disabled, between the :c:func:`device_link_add()` and +:c:func:`device_link_del()` or :c:func:`device_link_remove()` calls.] Sometimes drivers depend on optional resources. They are able to operate in a degraded mode (reduced feature set or performance) when those resources @@ -282,4 +321,4 @@ API === .. kernel-doc:: drivers/base/core.c - :functions: device_link_add device_link_del + :functions: device_link_add device_link_del device_link_remove diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/dmaengine/client.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/dmaengine/client.rst index fbbb2831f29f..45953f171500 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/dmaengine/client.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/dmaengine/client.rst @@ -168,6 +168,13 @@ The details of these operations are: dmaengine_submit() will not start the DMA operation, it merely adds it to the pending queue. For this, see step 5, dma_async_issue_pending. + .. note:: + + After calling ``dmaengine_submit()`` the submitted transfer descriptor + (``struct dma_async_tx_descriptor``) belongs to the DMA engine. + Consequently, the client must consider invalid the pointer to that + descriptor. + 5. Issue pending DMA requests and wait for callback notification The transactions in the pending queue can be activated by calling the diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/dmaengine/dmatest.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/dmaengine/dmatest.rst index 8d81f1a7169b..e78d070bb468 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/dmaengine/dmatest.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/dmaengine/dmatest.rst @@ -59,6 +59,7 @@ parameter, that specific channel is requested using the dmaengine and a thread is created with the existing parameters. This thread is set as pending and will be executed once run is set to 1. Any parameters set after the thread is created are not applied. + .. hint:: available channel list could be extracted by running the following command:: diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/board.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/board.rst index a0f294e2e250..b37f3f7b8926 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/board.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/board.rst @@ -204,6 +204,7 @@ between a caller and a respective .get/set_multiple() callback of a GPIO chip. In order to qualify for fast bitmap processing, the array must meet the following requirements: + - pin hardware number of array member 0 must also be 0, - pin hardware numbers of consecutive array members which belong to the same chip as member 0 does must also match their array indexes. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/driver.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/driver.rst index a92d8837b62b..3043167fc557 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/driver.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/driver.rst @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ This configuration is normally used as a way to achieve one of two things: - inverse wire-OR on an I/O line, for example a GPIO line, making it possible for any driving stage on the line to drive it low even if any other output to the same line is simultaneously driving it high. A special case of this - is driving the SCL and SCA lines of an I2C bus, which is by definition a + is driving the SCL and SDA lines of an I2C bus, which is by definition a wire-OR bus. Both usecases require that the line be equipped with a pull-up resistor. This diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/legacy.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/legacy.rst index 5e9421e05f1d..9bc34ba697d9 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/legacy.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/legacy.rst @@ -690,11 +690,10 @@ and have the following read/write attributes: and if it has been configured to generate interrupts (see the description of "edge"), you can poll(2) on that file and poll(2) will return whenever the interrupt was triggered. If - you use poll(2), set the events POLLPRI and POLLERR. If you - use select(2), set the file descriptor in exceptfds. After - poll(2) returns, either lseek(2) to the beginning of the sysfs - file and read the new value or close the file and re-open it - to read the value. + you use poll(2), set the events POLLPRI. If you use select(2), + set the file descriptor in exceptfds. After poll(2) returns, + either lseek(2) to the beginning of the sysfs file and read the + new value or close the file and re-open it to read the value. "edge" ... reads as either "none", "rising", "falling", or "both". Write these strings to select the signal edge(s) diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/iio/buffers.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/iio/buffers.rst index 02c99a6bee18..e9036ef9f8f4 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/iio/buffers.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/iio/buffers.rst @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ IIO buffer setup ================ The meta information associated with a channel reading placed in a buffer is -called a scan element . The important bits configuring scan elements are +called a scan element. The important bits configuring scan elements are exposed to userspace applications via the :file:`/sys/bus/iio/iio:device{X}/scan_elements/*` directory. This file contains attributes of the following form: diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/iio/core.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/iio/core.rst index 9a34ae03b679..b0bc0c028cc5 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/iio/core.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/iio/core.rst @@ -2,8 +2,8 @@ Core elements ============= -The Industrial I/O core offers a unified framework for writing drivers for -many different types of embedded sensors. a standard interface to user space +The Industrial I/O core offers both a unified framework for writing drivers for +many different types of embedded sensors and a standard interface to user space applications manipulating sensors. The implementation can be found under :file:`drivers/iio/industrialio-*` @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ Industrial I/O Devices ---------------------- * struct :c:type:`iio_dev` - industrial I/O device -* :c:func:`iio_device_alloc()` - alocate an :c:type:`iio_dev` from a driver +* :c:func:`iio_device_alloc()` - allocate an :c:type:`iio_dev` from a driver * :c:func:`iio_device_free()` - free an :c:type:`iio_dev` from a driver * :c:func:`iio_device_register()` - register a device with the IIO subsystem * :c:func:`iio_device_unregister()` - unregister a device from the IIO diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/iio/hw-consumer.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/iio/hw-consumer.rst index 8facce6a6733..e0fe0b98230e 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/iio/hw-consumer.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/iio/hw-consumer.rst @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ =========== HW consumer =========== -An IIO device can be directly connected to another device in hardware. in this +An IIO device can be directly connected to another device in hardware. In this case the buffers between IIO provider and IIO consumer are handled by hardware. The Industrial I/O HW consumer offers a way to bond these IIO devices without software buffer for data. The implementation can be found under diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/iio/triggers.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/iio/triggers.rst index f89d37e7dd82..5c2156de6284 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/iio/triggers.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/iio/triggers.rst @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ There are two locations in sysfs related to triggers: * :file:`/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:device{X}/trigger/*`, this directory is created once the device supports a triggered buffer. We can associate a - trigger with our device by writing the trigger's name in the + trigger with our device by writing the trigger's name in the :file:`current_trigger` file. IIO trigger setup diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/index.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/index.rst index ab38ced66a44..c0b600ed9961 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/index.rst @@ -22,6 +22,7 @@ available subsections can be seen below. device_connection dma-buf device_link + component message-based sound frame-buffer diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/pinctl.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/pinctl.rst index 6cb68d67fa75..2bb1bc484278 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/pinctl.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/pinctl.rst @@ -274,15 +274,6 @@ configuration in the pin controller ops like this:: .confops = &foo_pconf_ops, }; -Since some controllers have special logic for handling entire groups of pins -they can exploit the special whole-group pin control function. The -pin_config_group_set() callback is allowed to return the error code -EAGAIN, -for groups it does not want to handle, or if it just wants to do some -group-level handling and then fall through to iterate over all pins, in which -case each individual pin will be treated by separate pin_config_set() calls as -well. - - Interaction with the GPIO subsystem =================================== diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/pm/cpuidle.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/pm/cpuidle.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5842ab621a58 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/pm/cpuidle.rst @@ -0,0 +1,282 @@ +.. |struct cpuidle_governor| replace:: :c:type:`struct cpuidle_governor <cpuidle_governor>` +.. |struct cpuidle_device| replace:: :c:type:`struct cpuidle_device <cpuidle_device>` +.. |struct cpuidle_driver| replace:: :c:type:`struct cpuidle_driver <cpuidle_driver>` +.. |struct cpuidle_state| replace:: :c:type:`struct cpuidle_state <cpuidle_state>` + +======================== +CPU Idle Time Management +======================== + +:: + + Copyright (c) 2019 Intel Corp., Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com> + + +CPU Idle Time Management Subsystem +================================== + +Every time one of the logical CPUs in the system (the entities that appear to +fetch and execute instructions: hardware threads, if present, or processor +cores) is idle after an interrupt or equivalent wakeup event, which means that +there are no tasks to run on it except for the special "idle" task associated +with it, there is an opportunity to save energy for the processor that it +belongs to. That can be done by making the idle logical CPU stop fetching +instructions from memory and putting some of the processor's functional units +depended on by it into an idle state in which they will draw less power. + +However, there may be multiple different idle states that can be used in such a +situation in principle, so it may be necessary to find the most suitable one +(from the kernel perspective) and ask the processor to use (or "enter") that +particular idle state. That is the role of the CPU idle time management +subsystem in the kernel, called ``CPUIdle``. + +The design of ``CPUIdle`` is modular and based on the code duplication avoidance +principle, so the generic code that in principle need not depend on the hardware +or platform design details in it is separate from the code that interacts with +the hardware. It generally is divided into three categories of functional +units: *governors* responsible for selecting idle states to ask the processor +to enter, *drivers* that pass the governors' decisions on to the hardware and +the *core* providing a common framework for them. + + +CPU Idle Time Governors +======================= + +A CPU idle time (``CPUIdle``) governor is a bundle of policy code invoked when +one of the logical CPUs in the system turns out to be idle. Its role is to +select an idle state to ask the processor to enter in order to save some energy. + +``CPUIdle`` governors are generic and each of them can be used on any hardware +platform that the Linux kernel can run on. For this reason, data structures +operated on by them cannot depend on any hardware architecture or platform +design details as well. + +The governor itself is represented by a |struct cpuidle_governor| object +containing four callback pointers, :c:member:`enable`, :c:member:`disable`, +:c:member:`select`, :c:member:`reflect`, a :c:member:`rating` field described +below, and a name (string) used for identifying it. + +For the governor to be available at all, that object needs to be registered +with the ``CPUIdle`` core by calling :c:func:`cpuidle_register_governor()` with +a pointer to it passed as the argument. If successful, that causes the core to +add the governor to the global list of available governors and, if it is the +only one in the list (that is, the list was empty before) or the value of its +:c:member:`rating` field is greater than the value of that field for the +governor currently in use, or the name of the new governor was passed to the +kernel as the value of the ``cpuidle.governor=`` command line parameter, the new +governor will be used from that point on (there can be only one ``CPUIdle`` +governor in use at a time). Also, if ``cpuidle_sysfs_switch`` is passed to the +kernel in the command line, user space can choose the ``CPUIdle`` governor to +use at run time via ``sysfs``. + +Once registered, ``CPUIdle`` governors cannot be unregistered, so it is not +practical to put them into loadable kernel modules. + +The interface between ``CPUIdle`` governors and the core consists of four +callbacks: + +:c:member:`enable` + :: + + int (*enable) (struct cpuidle_driver *drv, struct cpuidle_device *dev); + + The role of this callback is to prepare the governor for handling the + (logical) CPU represented by the |struct cpuidle_device| object pointed + to by the ``dev`` argument. The |struct cpuidle_driver| object pointed + to by the ``drv`` argument represents the ``CPUIdle`` driver to be used + with that CPU (among other things, it should contain the list of + |struct cpuidle_state| objects representing idle states that the + processor holding the given CPU can be asked to enter). + + It may fail, in which case it is expected to return a negative error + code, and that causes the kernel to run the architecture-specific + default code for idle CPUs on the CPU in question instead of ``CPUIdle`` + until the ``->enable()`` governor callback is invoked for that CPU + again. + +:c:member:`disable` + :: + + void (*disable) (struct cpuidle_driver *drv, struct cpuidle_device *dev); + + Called to make the governor stop handling the (logical) CPU represented + by the |struct cpuidle_device| object pointed to by the ``dev`` + argument. + + It is expected to reverse any changes made by the ``->enable()`` + callback when it was last invoked for the target CPU, free all memory + allocated by that callback and so on. + +:c:member:`select` + :: + + int (*select) (struct cpuidle_driver *drv, struct cpuidle_device *dev, + bool *stop_tick); + + Called to select an idle state for the processor holding the (logical) + CPU represented by the |struct cpuidle_device| object pointed to by the + ``dev`` argument. + + The list of idle states to take into consideration is represented by the + :c:member:`states` array of |struct cpuidle_state| objects held by the + |struct cpuidle_driver| object pointed to by the ``drv`` argument (which + represents the ``CPUIdle`` driver to be used with the CPU at hand). The + value returned by this callback is interpreted as an index into that + array (unless it is a negative error code). + + The ``stop_tick`` argument is used to indicate whether or not to stop + the scheduler tick before asking the processor to enter the selected + idle state. When the ``bool`` variable pointed to by it (which is set + to ``true`` before invoking this callback) is cleared to ``false``, the + processor will be asked to enter the selected idle state without + stopping the scheduler tick on the given CPU (if the tick has been + stopped on that CPU already, however, it will not be restarted before + asking the processor to enter the idle state). + + This callback is mandatory (i.e. the :c:member:`select` callback pointer + in |struct cpuidle_governor| must not be ``NULL`` for the registration + of the governor to succeed). + +:c:member:`reflect` + :: + + void (*reflect) (struct cpuidle_device *dev, int index); + + Called to allow the governor to evaluate the accuracy of the idle state + selection made by the ``->select()`` callback (when it was invoked last + time) and possibly use the result of that to improve the accuracy of + idle state selections in the future. + +In addition, ``CPUIdle`` governors are required to take power management +quality of service (PM QoS) constraints on the processor wakeup latency into +account when selecting idle states. In order to obtain the current effective +PM QoS wakeup latency constraint for a given CPU, a ``CPUIdle`` governor is +expected to pass the number of the CPU to +:c:func:`cpuidle_governor_latency_req()`. Then, the governor's ``->select()`` +callback must not return the index of an indle state whose +:c:member:`exit_latency` value is greater than the number returned by that +function. + + +CPU Idle Time Management Drivers +================================ + +CPU idle time management (``CPUIdle``) drivers provide an interface between the +other parts of ``CPUIdle`` and the hardware. + +First of all, a ``CPUIdle`` driver has to populate the :c:member:`states` array +of |struct cpuidle_state| objects included in the |struct cpuidle_driver| object +representing it. Going forward this array will represent the list of available +idle states that the processor hardware can be asked to enter shared by all of +the logical CPUs handled by the given driver. + +The entries in the :c:member:`states` array are expected to be sorted by the +value of the :c:member:`target_residency` field in |struct cpuidle_state| in +the ascending order (that is, index 0 should correspond to the idle state with +the minimum value of :c:member:`target_residency`). [Since the +:c:member:`target_residency` value is expected to reflect the "depth" of the +idle state represented by the |struct cpuidle_state| object holding it, this +sorting order should be the same as the ascending sorting order by the idle +state "depth".] + +Three fields in |struct cpuidle_state| are used by the existing ``CPUIdle`` +governors for computations related to idle state selection: + +:c:member:`target_residency` + Minimum time to spend in this idle state including the time needed to + enter it (which may be substantial) to save more energy than could + be saved by staying in a shallower idle state for the same amount of + time, in microseconds. + +:c:member:`exit_latency` + Maximum time it will take a CPU asking the processor to enter this idle + state to start executing the first instruction after a wakeup from it, + in microseconds. + +:c:member:`flags` + Flags representing idle state properties. Currently, governors only use + the ``CPUIDLE_FLAG_POLLING`` flag which is set if the given object + does not represent a real idle state, but an interface to a software + "loop" that can be used in order to avoid asking the processor to enter + any idle state at all. [There are other flags used by the ``CPUIdle`` + core in special situations.] + +The :c:member:`enter` callback pointer in |struct cpuidle_state|, which must not +be ``NULL``, points to the routine to execute in order to ask the processor to +enter this particular idle state: + +:: + + void (*enter) (struct cpuidle_device *dev, struct cpuidle_driver *drv, + int index); + +The first two arguments of it point to the |struct cpuidle_device| object +representing the logical CPU running this callback and the +|struct cpuidle_driver| object representing the driver itself, respectively, +and the last one is an index of the |struct cpuidle_state| entry in the driver's +:c:member:`states` array representing the idle state to ask the processor to +enter. + +The analogous ``->enter_s2idle()`` callback in |struct cpuidle_state| is used +only for implementing the suspend-to-idle system-wide power management feature. +The difference between in and ``->enter()`` is that it must not re-enable +interrupts at any point (even temporarily) or attempt to change the states of +clock event devices, which the ``->enter()`` callback may do sometimes. + +Once the :c:member:`states` array has been populated, the number of valid +entries in it has to be stored in the :c:member:`state_count` field of the +|struct cpuidle_driver| object representing the driver. Moreover, if any +entries in the :c:member:`states` array represent "coupled" idle states (that +is, idle states that can only be asked for if multiple related logical CPUs are +idle), the :c:member:`safe_state_index` field in |struct cpuidle_driver| needs +to be the index of an idle state that is not "coupled" (that is, one that can be +asked for if only one logical CPU is idle). + +In addition to that, if the given ``CPUIdle`` driver is only going to handle a +subset of logical CPUs in the system, the :c:member:`cpumask` field in its +|struct cpuidle_driver| object must point to the set (mask) of CPUs that will be +handled by it. + +A ``CPUIdle`` driver can only be used after it has been registered. If there +are no "coupled" idle state entries in the driver's :c:member:`states` array, +that can be accomplished by passing the driver's |struct cpuidle_driver| object +to :c:func:`cpuidle_register_driver()`. Otherwise, :c:func:`cpuidle_register()` +should be used for this purpose. + +However, it also is necessary to register |struct cpuidle_device| objects for +all of the logical CPUs to be handled by the given ``CPUIdle`` driver with the +help of :c:func:`cpuidle_register_device()` after the driver has been registered +and :c:func:`cpuidle_register_driver()`, unlike :c:func:`cpuidle_register()`, +does not do that automatically. For this reason, the drivers that use +:c:func:`cpuidle_register_driver()` to register themselves must also take care +of registering the |struct cpuidle_device| objects as needed, so it is generally +recommended to use :c:func:`cpuidle_register()` for ``CPUIdle`` driver +registration in all cases. + +The registration of a |struct cpuidle_device| object causes the ``CPUIdle`` +``sysfs`` interface to be created and the governor's ``->enable()`` callback to +be invoked for the logical CPU represented by it, so it must take place after +registering the driver that will handle the CPU in question. + +``CPUIdle`` drivers and |struct cpuidle_device| objects can be unregistered +when they are not necessary any more which allows some resources associated with +them to be released. Due to dependencies between them, all of the +|struct cpuidle_device| objects representing CPUs handled by the given +``CPUIdle`` driver must be unregistered, with the help of +:c:func:`cpuidle_unregister_device()`, before calling +:c:func:`cpuidle_unregister_driver()` to unregister the driver. Alternatively, +:c:func:`cpuidle_unregister()` can be called to unregister a ``CPUIdle`` driver +along with all of the |struct cpuidle_device| objects representing CPUs handled +by it. + +``CPUIdle`` drivers can respond to runtime system configuration changes that +lead to modifications of the list of available processor idle states (which can +happen, for example, when the system's power source is switched from AC to +battery or the other way around). Upon a notification of such a change, +a ``CPUIdle`` driver is expected to call :c:func:`cpuidle_pause_and_lock()` to +turn ``CPUIdle`` off temporarily and then :c:func:`cpuidle_disable_device()` for +all of the |struct cpuidle_device| objects representing CPUs affected by that +change. Next, it can update its :c:member:`states` array in accordance with +the new configuration of the system, call :c:func:`cpuidle_enable_device()` for +all of the relevant |struct cpuidle_device| objects and invoke +:c:func:`cpuidle_resume_and_unlock()` to allow ``CPUIdle`` to be used again. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/pm/index.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/pm/index.rst index 2f6d0e9cf6b7..56975c6bc789 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/pm/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/pm/index.rst @@ -1,9 +1,10 @@ -======================= -Device Power Management -======================= +=============================== +CPU and Device Power Management +=============================== .. toctree:: + cpuidle devices notifiers types diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt index b277cafce71e..d7d6f01e81ff 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt +++ b/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt @@ -242,9 +242,11 @@ certainly invest a bit more effort into libata core layer). CLOCK devm_clk_get() + devm_clk_get_optional() devm_clk_put() devm_clk_hw_register() devm_of_clk_add_hw_provider() + devm_clk_hw_register_clkdev() DMA dmaenginem_async_device_register() diff --git a/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt b/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt index 4d1b7b4ccfaf..a17517a083c3 100644 --- a/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt +++ b/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ o #include <linux/fault-inject.h> o define the fault attributes - DECLARE_FAULT_INJECTION(name); + DECLARE_FAULT_ATTR(name); Please see the definition of struct fault_attr in fault-inject.h for details. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/api-summary.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/api-summary.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..aa51ffcfa029 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/api-summary.rst @@ -0,0 +1,150 @@ +============================= +Linux Filesystems API summary +============================= + +This section contains API-level documentation, mostly taken from the source +code itself. + +The Linux VFS +============= + +The Filesystem types +-------------------- + +.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/fs.h + :internal: + +The Directory Cache +------------------- + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/dcache.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/dcache.h + :internal: + +Inode Handling +-------------- + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/inode.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/bad_inode.c + :export: + +Registration and Superblocks +---------------------------- + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/super.c + :export: + +File Locks +---------- + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/locks.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/locks.c + :internal: + +Other Functions +--------------- + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/mpage.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/namei.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/buffer.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: block/bio.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/seq_file.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/filesystems.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/fs-writeback.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/block_dev.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/anon_inodes.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/attr.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/d_path.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/dax.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/direct-io.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/file_table.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/libfs.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/posix_acl.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/stat.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/sync.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/xattr.c + :export: + +The proc filesystem +=================== + +sysctl interface +---------------- + +.. kernel-doc:: kernel/sysctl.c + :export: + +proc filesystem interface +------------------------- + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/proc/base.c + :internal: + +Events based on file descriptors +================================ + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/eventfd.c + :export: + +The Filesystem for Exporting Kernel Objects +=========================================== + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/sysfs/file.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/sysfs/symlink.c + :export: + +The debugfs filesystem +====================== + +debugfs interface +----------------- + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/debugfs/inode.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/debugfs/file.c + :export: diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/binderfs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/binderfs.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c009671f8434 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/binderfs.rst @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +The Android binderfs Filesystem +=============================== + +Android binderfs is a filesystem for the Android binder IPC mechanism. It +allows to dynamically add and remove binder devices at runtime. Binder devices +located in a new binderfs instance are independent of binder devices located in +other binderfs instances. Mounting a new binderfs instance makes it possible +to get a set of private binder devices. + +Mounting binderfs +----------------- + +Android binderfs can be mounted with:: + + mkdir /dev/binderfs + mount -t binder binder /dev/binderfs + +at which point a new instance of binderfs will show up at ``/dev/binderfs``. +In a fresh instance of binderfs no binder devices will be present. There will +only be a ``binder-control`` device which serves as the request handler for +binderfs. Mounting another binderfs instance at a different location will +create a new and separate instance from all other binderfs mounts. This is +identical to the behavior of e.g. ``devpts`` and ``tmpfs``. The Android +binderfs filesystem can be mounted in user namespaces. + +Options +------- +max + binderfs instances can be mounted with a limit on the number of binder + devices that can be allocated. The ``max=<count>`` mount option serves as + a per-instance limit. If ``max=<count>`` is set then only ``<count>`` number + of binder devices can be allocated in this binderfs instance. + +Allocating binder Devices +------------------------- + +.. _ioctl: http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man2/ioctl.2.html + +To allocate a new binder device in a binderfs instance a request needs to be +sent through the ``binder-control`` device node. A request is sent in the form +of an `ioctl() <ioctl_>`_. + +What a program needs to do is to open the ``binder-control`` device node and +send a ``BINDER_CTL_ADD`` request to the kernel. Users of binderfs need to +tell the kernel which name the new binder device should get. By default a name +can only contain up to ``BINDERFS_MAX_NAME`` chars including the terminating +zero byte. + +Once the request is made via an `ioctl() <ioctl_>`_ passing a ``struct +binder_device`` with the name to the kernel it will allocate a new binder +device and return the major and minor number of the new device in the struct +(This is necessary because binderfs allocates a major device number +dynamically.). After the `ioctl() <ioctl_>`_ returns there will be a new +binder device located under /dev/binderfs with the chosen name. + +Deleting binder Devices +----------------------- + +.. _unlink: http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man2/unlink.2.html +.. _rm: http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/rm.1.html + +Binderfs binder devices can be deleted via `unlink() <unlink_>`_. This means +that the `rm() <rm_>`_ tool can be used to delete them. Note that the +``binder-control`` device cannot be deleted since this would make the binderfs +instance unuseable. The ``binder-control`` device will be deleted when the +binderfs instance is unmounted and all references to it have been dropped. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ceph.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ceph.txt index 1177052701e1..d2c6a5ccf0f5 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ceph.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ceph.txt @@ -22,9 +22,7 @@ In contrast to cluster filesystems like GFS, OCFS2, and GPFS that rely on symmetric access by all clients to shared block devices, Ceph separates data and metadata management into independent server clusters, similar to Lustre. Unlike Lustre, however, metadata and -storage nodes run entirely as user space daemons. Storage nodes -utilize btrfs to store data objects, leveraging its advanced features -(checksumming, metadata replication, etc.). File data is striped +storage nodes run entirely as user space daemons. File data is striped across storage nodes in large chunks to distribute workload and facilitate high throughputs. When storage nodes fail, data is re-replicated in a distributed fashion by the storage nodes themselves @@ -118,6 +116,10 @@ Mount Options of a non-responsive Ceph file system. The default is 30 seconds. + caps_max=X + Specify the maximum number of caps to hold. Unused caps are released + when number of caps exceeds the limit. The default is 0 (no limit) + rbytes When stat() is called on a directory, set st_size to 'rbytes', the summation of file sizes over all files nested beneath that @@ -160,11 +162,11 @@ More Information ================ For more information on Ceph, see the home page at - http://ceph.newdream.net/ + https://ceph.com/ The Linux kernel client source tree is available at - git://ceph.newdream.net/git/ceph-client.git + https://github.com/ceph/ceph-client.git git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/sage/ceph-client.git and the source for the full system is at - git://ceph.newdream.net/git/ceph.git + https://github.com/ceph/ceph.git diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/TODO b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/TODO index 66b3f54aa6dc..9267f3fb131f 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/TODO +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/TODO @@ -111,7 +111,8 @@ negotiated size) and send larger write sizes to modern servers. 5) Continue to extend the smb3 "buildbot" which does automated xfstesting against Windows, Samba and Azure currently - to add additional tests and -to allow the buildbot to execute the tests faster. +to allow the buildbot to execute the tests faster. The URL for the +buildbot is: http://smb3-test-rhel-75.southcentralus.cloudapp.azure.com 6) Address various coverity warnings (most are not bugs per-se, but the more warnings are addressed, the easier it is to spot real diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/cifs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/cifs.txt index 67756607246e..1be3d21c286e 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/cifs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/cifs.txt @@ -1,16 +1,21 @@ This is the client VFS module for the SMB3 NAS protocol as well - older dialects such as the Common Internet File System (CIFS) + as for older dialects such as the Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocol which was the successor to the Server Message Block (SMB) protocol, the native file sharing mechanism for most early PC operating systems. New and improved versions of CIFS are now - called SMB2 and SMB3. These dialects are also supported by the - CIFS VFS module. CIFS is fully supported by network - file servers such as Windows 2000, 2003, 2008, 2012 and 2016 - as well by Samba (which provides excellent CIFS - server support for Linux and many other operating systems), Apple - systems, as well as most Network Attached Storage vendors, so - this network filesystem client can mount to a wide variety of - servers. + called SMB2 and SMB3. Use of SMB3 (and later, including SMB3.1.1) + is strongly preferred over using older dialects like CIFS due to + security reaasons. All modern dialects, including the most recent, + SMB3.1.1 are supported by the CIFS VFS module. The SMB3 protocol + is implemented and supported by all major file servers + such as all modern versions of Windows (including Windows 2016 + Server), as well as by Samba (which provides excellent + CIFS/SMB2/SMB3 server support and tools for Linux and many other + operating systems). Apple systems also support SMB3 well, as + do most Network Attached Storage vendors, so this network + filesystem client can mount to a wide variety of systems. + It also supports mounting to the cloud (for example + Microsoft Azure), including the necessary security features. The intent of this module is to provide the most advanced network file system function for SMB3 compliant servers, including advanced @@ -24,12 +29,17 @@ cluster file systems for fileserving in some Linux to Linux environments, not just in Linux to Windows (or Linux to Mac) environments. - This filesystem has an mount utility (mount.cifs) that can be obtained from + This filesystem has a mount utility (mount.cifs) and various user space + tools (including smbinfo and setcifsacl) that can be obtained from - https://ftp.samba.org/pub/linux-cifs/cifs-utils/ + https://git.samba.org/?p=cifs-utils.git + or + git://git.samba.org/cifs-utils.git - It must be installed in the directory with the other mount helpers. + mount.cifs should be installed in the directory with the other mount helpers. For more information on the module see the project wiki page at + https://wiki.samba.org/index.php/LinuxCIFS + and https://wiki.samba.org/index.php/LinuxCIFS_utils diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/exofs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/exofs.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 23583a136975..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/exofs.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,185 +0,0 @@ -=============================================================================== -WHAT IS EXOFS? -=============================================================================== - -exofs is a file system that uses an OSD and exports the API of a normal Linux -file system. Users access exofs like any other local file system, and exofs -will in turn issue commands to the local OSD initiator. - -OSD is a new T10 command set that views storage devices not as a large/flat -array of sectors but as a container of objects, each having a length, quota, -time attributes and more. Each object is addressed by a 64bit ID, and is -contained in a 64bit ID partition. Each object has associated attributes -attached to it, which are integral part of the object and provide metadata about -the object. The standard defines some common obligatory attributes, but user -attributes can be added as needed. - -=============================================================================== -ENVIRONMENT -=============================================================================== - -To use this file system, you need to have an object store to run it on. You -may download a target from: -http://open-osd.org - -See Documentation/scsi/osd.txt for how to setup a working osd environment. - -=============================================================================== -USAGE -=============================================================================== - -1. Download and compile exofs and open-osd initiator: - You need an external Kernel source tree or kernel headers from your - distribution. (anything based on 2.6.26 or later). - - a. download open-osd including exofs source using: - [parent-directory]$ git clone git://git.open-osd.org/open-osd.git - - b. Build the library module like this: - [parent-directory]$ make -C KSRC=$(KER_DIR) open-osd - - This will build both the open-osd initiator as well as the exofs kernel - module. Use whatever parameters you compiled your Kernel with and - $(KER_DIR) above pointing to the Kernel you compile against. See the file - open-osd/top-level-Makefile for an example. - -2. Get the OSD initiator and target set up properly, and login to the target. - See Documentation/scsi/osd.txt for farther instructions. Also see ./do-osd - for example script that does all these steps. - -3. Insmod the exofs.ko module: - [exofs]$ insmod exofs.ko - -4. Make sure the directory where you want to mount exists. If not, create it. - (For example, mkdir /mnt/exofs) - -5. At first run you will need to invoke the mkfs.exofs application - - As an example, this will create the file system on: - /dev/osd0 partition ID 65536 - - mkfs.exofs --pid=65536 --format /dev/osd0 - - The --format is optional. If not specified, no OSD_FORMAT will be - performed and a clean file system will be created in the specified pid, - in the available space of the target. (Use --format=size_in_meg to limit - the total LUN space available) - - If pid already exists, it will be deleted and a new one will be created in - its place. Be careful. - - An exofs lives inside a single OSD partition. You can create multiple exofs - filesystems on the same device using multiple pids. - - (run mkfs.exofs without any parameters for usage help message) - -6. Mount the file system. - - For example, to mount /dev/osd0, partition ID 0x10000 on /mnt/exofs: - - mount -t exofs -o pid=65536 /dev/osd0 /mnt/exofs/ - -7. For reference (See do-exofs example script): - do-exofs start - an example of how to perform the above steps. - do-exofs stop - an example of how to unmount the file system. - do-exofs format - an example of how to format and mkfs a new exofs. - -8. Extra compilation flags (uncomment in fs/exofs/Kbuild): - CONFIG_EXOFS_DEBUG - for debug messages and extra checks. - -=============================================================================== -exofs mount options -=============================================================================== -Similar to any mount command: - mount -t exofs -o exofs_options /dev/osdX mount_exofs_directory - -Where: - -t exofs: specifies the exofs file system - - /dev/osdX: X is a decimal number. /dev/osdX was created after a successful - login into an OSD target. - - mount_exofs_directory: The directory to mount the file system on - - exofs specific options: Options are separated by commas (,) - pid=<integer> - The partition number to mount/create as - container of the filesystem. - This option is mandatory. integer can be - Hex by pre-pending an 0x to the number. - osdname=<id> - Mount by a device's osdname. - osdname is usually a 36 character uuid of the - form "d2683732-c906-4ee1-9dbd-c10c27bb40df". - It is one of the device's uuid specified in the - mkfs.exofs format command. - If this option is specified then the /dev/osdX - above can be empty and is ignored. - to=<integer> - Timeout in ticks for a single command. - default is (60 * HZ) [for debugging only] - -=============================================================================== -DESIGN -=============================================================================== - -* The file system control block (AKA on-disk superblock) resides in an object - with a special ID (defined in common.h). - Information included in the file system control block is used to fill the - in-memory superblock structure at mount time. This object is created before - the file system is used by mkexofs.c. It contains information such as: - - The file system's magic number - - The next inode number to be allocated - -* Each file resides in its own object and contains the data (and it will be - possible to extend the file over multiple objects, though this has not been - implemented yet). - -* A directory is treated as a file, and essentially contains a list of <file - name, inode #> pairs for files that are found in that directory. The object - IDs correspond to the files' inode numbers and will be allocated according to - a bitmap (stored in a separate object). Now they are allocated using a - counter. - -* Each file's control block (AKA on-disk inode) is stored in its object's - attributes. This applies to both regular files and other types (directories, - device files, symlinks, etc.). - -* Credentials are generated per object (inode and superblock) when they are - created in memory (read from disk or created). The credential works for all - operations and is used as long as the object remains in memory. - -* Async OSD operations are used whenever possible, but the target may execute - them out of order. The operations that concern us are create, delete, - readpage, writepage, update_inode, and truncate. The following pairs of - operations should execute in the order written, and we need to prevent them - from executing in reverse order: - - The following are handled with the OBJ_CREATED and OBJ_2BCREATED - flags. OBJ_CREATED is set when we know the object exists on the OSD - - in create's callback function, and when we successfully do a - read_inode. - OBJ_2BCREATED is set in the beginning of the create function, so we - know that we should wait. - - create/delete: delete should wait until the object is created - on the OSD. - - create/readpage: readpage should be able to return a page - full of zeroes in this case. If there was a write already - en-route (i.e. create, writepage, readpage) then the page - would be locked, and so it would really be the same as - create/writepage. - - create/writepage: if writepage is called for a sync write, it - should wait until the object is created on the OSD. - Otherwise, it should just return. - - create/truncate: truncate should wait until the object is - created on the OSD. - - create/update_inode: update_inode should wait until the - object is created on the OSD. - - Handled by VFS locks: - - readpage/delete: shouldn't happen because of page lock. - - writepage/delete: shouldn't happen because of page lock. - - readpage/writepage: shouldn't happen because of page lock. - -=============================================================================== -LICENSE/COPYRIGHT -=============================================================================== -The exofs file system is based on ext2 v0.5b (distributed with the Linux kernel -version 2.6.10). All files include the original copyrights, and the license -is GPL version 2 (only version 2, as is true for the Linux kernel). The -Linux kernel can be downloaded from www.kernel.org. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt index e46c2147ddf8..f7b5e4ff0de3 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt @@ -126,6 +126,8 @@ disable_ext_identify Disable the extension list configured by mkfs, so f2fs does not aware of cold files such as media files. inline_xattr Enable the inline xattrs feature. noinline_xattr Disable the inline xattrs feature. +inline_xattr_size=%u Support configuring inline xattr size, it depends on + flexible inline xattr feature. inline_data Enable the inline data feature: New created small(<~3.4k) files can be written into inode block. inline_dentry Enable the inline dir feature: data in new created diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/fscrypt.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/fscrypt.rst index 3a7b60521b94..08c23b60e016 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/fscrypt.rst +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/fscrypt.rst @@ -343,9 +343,9 @@ FS_IOC_SET_ENCRYPTION_POLICY can fail with the following errors: - ``ENOTEMPTY``: the file is unencrypted and is a nonempty directory - ``ENOTTY``: this type of filesystem does not implement encryption - ``EOPNOTSUPP``: the kernel was not configured with encryption - support for this filesystem, or the filesystem superblock has not + support for filesystems, or the filesystem superblock has not had encryption enabled on it. (For example, to use encryption on an - ext4 filesystem, CONFIG_EXT4_ENCRYPTION must be enabled in the + ext4 filesystem, CONFIG_FS_ENCRYPTION must be enabled in the kernel config, and the superblock must have had the "encrypt" feature flag enabled using ``tune2fs -O encrypt`` or ``mkfs.ext4 -O encrypt``.) @@ -451,10 +451,18 @@ astute users may notice some differences in behavior: - Unencrypted files, or files encrypted with a different encryption policy (i.e. different key, modes, or flags), cannot be renamed or linked into an encrypted directory; see `Encryption policy - enforcement`_. Attempts to do so will fail with EPERM. However, + enforcement`_. Attempts to do so will fail with EXDEV. However, encrypted files can be renamed within an encrypted directory, or into an unencrypted directory. + Note: "moving" an unencrypted file into an encrypted directory, e.g. + with the `mv` program, is implemented in userspace by a copy + followed by a delete. Be aware that the original unencrypted data + may remain recoverable from free space on the disk; prefer to keep + all files encrypted from the very beginning. The `shred` program + may be used to overwrite the source files but isn't guaranteed to be + effective on all filesystems and storage devices. + - Direct I/O is not supported on encrypted files. Attempts to use direct I/O on such files will fall back to buffered I/O. @@ -541,7 +549,7 @@ not be encrypted. Except for those special files, it is forbidden to have unencrypted files, or files encrypted with a different encryption policy, in an encrypted directory tree. Attempts to link or rename such a file into -an encrypted directory will fail with EPERM. This is also enforced +an encrypted directory will fail with EXDEV. This is also enforced during ->lookup() to provide limited protection against offline attacks that try to disable or downgrade encryption in known locations where applications may later write sensitive data. It is recommended diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/index.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/index.rst index 605befab300b..1131c34d77f6 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/index.rst @@ -1,382 +1,43 @@ -===================== -Linux Filesystems API -===================== +=============================== +Filesystems in the Linux kernel +=============================== -The Linux VFS -============= +This under-development manual will, some glorious day, provide +comprehensive information on how the Linux virtual filesystem (VFS) layer +works, along with the filesystems that sit below it. For now, what we have +can be found below. -The Filesystem types --------------------- - -.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/fs.h - :internal: - -The Directory Cache -------------------- - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/dcache.c - :export: - -.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/dcache.h - :internal: - -Inode Handling --------------- - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/inode.c - :export: - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/bad_inode.c - :export: - -Registration and Superblocks ----------------------------- - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/super.c - :export: - -File Locks ----------- - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/locks.c - :export: - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/locks.c - :internal: - -Other Functions ---------------- - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/mpage.c - :export: - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/namei.c - :export: - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/buffer.c - :export: - -.. kernel-doc:: block/bio.c - :export: - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/seq_file.c - :export: - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/filesystems.c - :export: - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/fs-writeback.c - :export: - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/block_dev.c - :export: - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/anon_inodes.c - :export: - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/attr.c - :export: - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/d_path.c - :export: - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/dax.c - :export: - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/direct-io.c - :export: - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/file_table.c - :export: - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/libfs.c - :export: - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/posix_acl.c - :export: - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/stat.c - :export: - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/sync.c - :export: - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/xattr.c - :export: - -The proc filesystem -=================== - -sysctl interface ----------------- - -.. kernel-doc:: kernel/sysctl.c - :export: - -proc filesystem interface -------------------------- - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/proc/base.c - :internal: - -Events based on file descriptors -================================ - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/eventfd.c - :export: - -The Filesystem for Exporting Kernel Objects -=========================================== - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/sysfs/file.c - :export: - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/sysfs/symlink.c - :export: - -The debugfs filesystem +Core VFS documentation ====================== -debugfs interface ------------------ +See these manuals for documentation about the VFS layer itself and how its +algorithms work. -.. kernel-doc:: fs/debugfs/inode.c - :export: +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 2 -.. kernel-doc:: fs/debugfs/file.c - :export: + path-lookup.rst + api-summary + splice -The Linux Journalling API +Filesystem support layers ========================= -Overview --------- - -Details -~~~~~~~ - -The journalling layer is easy to use. You need to first of all create a -journal_t data structure. There are two calls to do this dependent on -how you decide to allocate the physical media on which the journal -resides. The :c:func:`jbd2_journal_init_inode` call is for journals stored in -filesystem inodes, or the :c:func:`jbd2_journal_init_dev` call can be used -for journal stored on a raw device (in a continuous range of blocks). A -journal_t is a typedef for a struct pointer, so when you are finally -finished make sure you call :c:func:`jbd2_journal_destroy` on it to free up -any used kernel memory. - -Once you have got your journal_t object you need to 'mount' or load the -journal file. The journalling layer expects the space for the journal -was already allocated and initialized properly by the userspace tools. -When loading the journal you must call :c:func:`jbd2_journal_load` to process -journal contents. If the client file system detects the journal contents -does not need to be processed (or even need not have valid contents), it -may call :c:func:`jbd2_journal_wipe` to clear the journal contents before -calling :c:func:`jbd2_journal_load`. - -Note that jbd2_journal_wipe(..,0) calls -:c:func:`jbd2_journal_skip_recovery` for you if it detects any outstanding -transactions in the journal and similarly :c:func:`jbd2_journal_load` will -call :c:func:`jbd2_journal_recover` if necessary. I would advise reading -:c:func:`ext4_load_journal` in fs/ext4/super.c for examples on this stage. - -Now you can go ahead and start modifying the underlying filesystem. -Almost. - -You still need to actually journal your filesystem changes, this is done -by wrapping them into transactions. Additionally you also need to wrap -the modification of each of the buffers with calls to the journal layer, -so it knows what the modifications you are actually making are. To do -this use :c:func:`jbd2_journal_start` which returns a transaction handle. - -:c:func:`jbd2_journal_start` and its counterpart :c:func:`jbd2_journal_stop`, -which indicates the end of a transaction are nestable calls, so you can -reenter a transaction if necessary, but remember you must call -:c:func:`jbd2_journal_stop` the same number of times as -:c:func:`jbd2_journal_start` before the transaction is completed (or more -accurately leaves the update phase). Ext4/VFS makes use of this feature to -simplify handling of inode dirtying, quota support, etc. - -Inside each transaction you need to wrap the modifications to the -individual buffers (blocks). Before you start to modify a buffer you -need to call :c:func:`jbd2_journal_get_create_access()` / -:c:func:`jbd2_journal_get_write_access()` / -:c:func:`jbd2_journal_get_undo_access()` as appropriate, this allows the -journalling layer to copy the unmodified -data if it needs to. After all the buffer may be part of a previously -uncommitted transaction. At this point you are at last ready to modify a -buffer, and once you are have done so you need to call -:c:func:`jbd2_journal_dirty_metadata`. Or if you've asked for access to a -buffer you now know is now longer required to be pushed back on the -device you can call :c:func:`jbd2_journal_forget` in much the same way as you -might have used :c:func:`bforget` in the past. - -A :c:func:`jbd2_journal_flush` may be called at any time to commit and -checkpoint all your transactions. - -Then at umount time , in your :c:func:`put_super` you can then call -:c:func:`jbd2_journal_destroy` to clean up your in-core journal object. - -Unfortunately there a couple of ways the journal layer can cause a -deadlock. The first thing to note is that each task can only have a -single outstanding transaction at any one time, remember nothing commits -until the outermost :c:func:`jbd2_journal_stop`. This means you must complete -the transaction at the end of each file/inode/address etc. operation you -perform, so that the journalling system isn't re-entered on another -journal. Since transactions can't be nested/batched across differing -journals, and another filesystem other than yours (say ext4) may be -modified in a later syscall. - -The second case to bear in mind is that :c:func:`jbd2_journal_start` can block -if there isn't enough space in the journal for your transaction (based -on the passed nblocks param) - when it blocks it merely(!) needs to wait -for transactions to complete and be committed from other tasks, so -essentially we are waiting for :c:func:`jbd2_journal_stop`. So to avoid -deadlocks you must treat :c:func:`jbd2_journal_start` / -:c:func:`jbd2_journal_stop` as if they were semaphores and include them in -your semaphore ordering rules to prevent -deadlocks. Note that :c:func:`jbd2_journal_extend` has similar blocking -behaviour to :c:func:`jbd2_journal_start` so you can deadlock here just as -easily as on :c:func:`jbd2_journal_start`. - -Try to reserve the right number of blocks the first time. ;-). This will -be the maximum number of blocks you are going to touch in this -transaction. I advise having a look at at least ext4_jbd.h to see the -basis on which ext4 uses to make these decisions. - -Another wriggle to watch out for is your on-disk block allocation -strategy. Why? Because, if you do a delete, you need to ensure you -haven't reused any of the freed blocks until the transaction freeing -these blocks commits. If you reused these blocks and crash happens, -there is no way to restore the contents of the reallocated blocks at the -end of the last fully committed transaction. One simple way of doing -this is to mark blocks as free in internal in-memory block allocation -structures only after the transaction freeing them commits. Ext4 uses -journal commit callback for this purpose. - -With journal commit callbacks you can ask the journalling layer to call -a callback function when the transaction is finally committed to disk, -so that you can do some of your own management. You ask the journalling -layer for calling the callback by simply setting -``journal->j_commit_callback`` function pointer and that function is -called after each transaction commit. You can also use -``transaction->t_private_list`` for attaching entries to a transaction -that need processing when the transaction commits. - -JBD2 also provides a way to block all transaction updates via -:c:func:`jbd2_journal_lock_updates()` / -:c:func:`jbd2_journal_unlock_updates()`. Ext4 uses this when it wants a -window with a clean and stable fs for a moment. E.g. - -:: - - - jbd2_journal_lock_updates() //stop new stuff happening.. - jbd2_journal_flush() // checkpoint everything. - ..do stuff on stable fs - jbd2_journal_unlock_updates() // carry on with filesystem use. - -The opportunities for abuse and DOS attacks with this should be obvious, -if you allow unprivileged userspace to trigger codepaths containing -these calls. - -Summary -~~~~~~~ - -Using the journal is a matter of wrapping the different context changes, -being each mount, each modification (transaction) and each changed -buffer to tell the journalling layer about them. - -Data Types ----------- - -The journalling layer uses typedefs to 'hide' the concrete definitions -of the structures used. As a client of the JBD2 layer you can just rely -on the using the pointer as a magic cookie of some sort. Obviously the -hiding is not enforced as this is 'C'. - -Structures -~~~~~~~~~~ - -.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/jbd2.h - :internal: - -Functions ---------- - -The functions here are split into two groups those that affect a journal -as a whole, and those which are used to manage transactions - -Journal Level -~~~~~~~~~~~~~ - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/jbd2/journal.c - :export: - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/jbd2/recovery.c - :internal: - -Transasction Level -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/jbd2/transaction.c - -See also --------- - -`Journaling the Linux ext2fs Filesystem, LinuxExpo 98, Stephen -Tweedie <http://kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/sct/ext3/journal-design.ps.gz>`__ - -`Ext3 Journalling FileSystem, OLS 2000, Dr. Stephen -Tweedie <http://olstrans.sourceforge.net/release/OLS2000-ext3/OLS2000-ext3.html>`__ - -splice API -========== - -splice is a method for moving blocks of data around inside the kernel, -without continually transferring them between the kernel and user space. - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/splice.c - -pipes API -========= - -Pipe interfaces are all for in-kernel (builtin image) use. They are not -exported for use by modules. - -.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/pipe_fs_i.h - :internal: - -.. kernel-doc:: fs/pipe.c - -Encryption API -============== - -A library which filesystems can hook into to support transparent -encryption of files and directories. +Documentation for the support code within the filesystem layer for use in +filesystem implementations. .. toctree:: - :maxdepth: 2 - - fscrypt - -Pathname lookup -=============== - - -This write-up is based on three articles published at lwn.net: + :maxdepth: 2 -- <https://lwn.net/Articles/649115/> Pathname lookup in Linux -- <https://lwn.net/Articles/649729/> RCU-walk: faster pathname lookup in Linux -- <https://lwn.net/Articles/650786/> A walk among the symlinks + journalling + fscrypt -Written by Neil Brown with help from Al Viro and Jon Corbet. -It has subsequently been updated to reflect changes in the kernel -including: +Filesystem-specific documentation +================================= -- per-directory parallel name lookup. +Documentation for individual filesystem types can be found here. .. toctree:: :maxdepth: 2 - path-lookup.rst + binderfs.rst diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/journalling.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/journalling.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..58ce6b395206 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/journalling.rst @@ -0,0 +1,184 @@ +The Linux Journalling API +========================= + +Overview +-------- + +Details +~~~~~~~ + +The journalling layer is easy to use. You need to first of all create a +journal_t data structure. There are two calls to do this dependent on +how you decide to allocate the physical media on which the journal +resides. The :c:func:`jbd2_journal_init_inode` call is for journals stored in +filesystem inodes, or the :c:func:`jbd2_journal_init_dev` call can be used +for journal stored on a raw device (in a continuous range of blocks). A +journal_t is a typedef for a struct pointer, so when you are finally +finished make sure you call :c:func:`jbd2_journal_destroy` on it to free up +any used kernel memory. + +Once you have got your journal_t object you need to 'mount' or load the +journal file. The journalling layer expects the space for the journal +was already allocated and initialized properly by the userspace tools. +When loading the journal you must call :c:func:`jbd2_journal_load` to process +journal contents. If the client file system detects the journal contents +does not need to be processed (or even need not have valid contents), it +may call :c:func:`jbd2_journal_wipe` to clear the journal contents before +calling :c:func:`jbd2_journal_load`. + +Note that jbd2_journal_wipe(..,0) calls +:c:func:`jbd2_journal_skip_recovery` for you if it detects any outstanding +transactions in the journal and similarly :c:func:`jbd2_journal_load` will +call :c:func:`jbd2_journal_recover` if necessary. I would advise reading +:c:func:`ext4_load_journal` in fs/ext4/super.c for examples on this stage. + +Now you can go ahead and start modifying the underlying filesystem. +Almost. + +You still need to actually journal your filesystem changes, this is done +by wrapping them into transactions. Additionally you also need to wrap +the modification of each of the buffers with calls to the journal layer, +so it knows what the modifications you are actually making are. To do +this use :c:func:`jbd2_journal_start` which returns a transaction handle. + +:c:func:`jbd2_journal_start` and its counterpart :c:func:`jbd2_journal_stop`, +which indicates the end of a transaction are nestable calls, so you can +reenter a transaction if necessary, but remember you must call +:c:func:`jbd2_journal_stop` the same number of times as +:c:func:`jbd2_journal_start` before the transaction is completed (or more +accurately leaves the update phase). Ext4/VFS makes use of this feature to +simplify handling of inode dirtying, quota support, etc. + +Inside each transaction you need to wrap the modifications to the +individual buffers (blocks). Before you start to modify a buffer you +need to call :c:func:`jbd2_journal_get_create_access()` / +:c:func:`jbd2_journal_get_write_access()` / +:c:func:`jbd2_journal_get_undo_access()` as appropriate, this allows the +journalling layer to copy the unmodified +data if it needs to. After all the buffer may be part of a previously +uncommitted transaction. At this point you are at last ready to modify a +buffer, and once you are have done so you need to call +:c:func:`jbd2_journal_dirty_metadata`. Or if you've asked for access to a +buffer you now know is now longer required to be pushed back on the +device you can call :c:func:`jbd2_journal_forget` in much the same way as you +might have used :c:func:`bforget` in the past. + +A :c:func:`jbd2_journal_flush` may be called at any time to commit and +checkpoint all your transactions. + +Then at umount time , in your :c:func:`put_super` you can then call +:c:func:`jbd2_journal_destroy` to clean up your in-core journal object. + +Unfortunately there a couple of ways the journal layer can cause a +deadlock. The first thing to note is that each task can only have a +single outstanding transaction at any one time, remember nothing commits +until the outermost :c:func:`jbd2_journal_stop`. This means you must complete +the transaction at the end of each file/inode/address etc. operation you +perform, so that the journalling system isn't re-entered on another +journal. Since transactions can't be nested/batched across differing +journals, and another filesystem other than yours (say ext4) may be +modified in a later syscall. + +The second case to bear in mind is that :c:func:`jbd2_journal_start` can block +if there isn't enough space in the journal for your transaction (based +on the passed nblocks param) - when it blocks it merely(!) needs to wait +for transactions to complete and be committed from other tasks, so +essentially we are waiting for :c:func:`jbd2_journal_stop`. So to avoid +deadlocks you must treat :c:func:`jbd2_journal_start` / +:c:func:`jbd2_journal_stop` as if they were semaphores and include them in +your semaphore ordering rules to prevent +deadlocks. Note that :c:func:`jbd2_journal_extend` has similar blocking +behaviour to :c:func:`jbd2_journal_start` so you can deadlock here just as +easily as on :c:func:`jbd2_journal_start`. + +Try to reserve the right number of blocks the first time. ;-). This will +be the maximum number of blocks you are going to touch in this +transaction. I advise having a look at at least ext4_jbd.h to see the +basis on which ext4 uses to make these decisions. + +Another wriggle to watch out for is your on-disk block allocation +strategy. Why? Because, if you do a delete, you need to ensure you +haven't reused any of the freed blocks until the transaction freeing +these blocks commits. If you reused these blocks and crash happens, +there is no way to restore the contents of the reallocated blocks at the +end of the last fully committed transaction. One simple way of doing +this is to mark blocks as free in internal in-memory block allocation +structures only after the transaction freeing them commits. Ext4 uses +journal commit callback for this purpose. + +With journal commit callbacks you can ask the journalling layer to call +a callback function when the transaction is finally committed to disk, +so that you can do some of your own management. You ask the journalling +layer for calling the callback by simply setting +``journal->j_commit_callback`` function pointer and that function is +called after each transaction commit. You can also use +``transaction->t_private_list`` for attaching entries to a transaction +that need processing when the transaction commits. + +JBD2 also provides a way to block all transaction updates via +:c:func:`jbd2_journal_lock_updates()` / +:c:func:`jbd2_journal_unlock_updates()`. Ext4 uses this when it wants a +window with a clean and stable fs for a moment. E.g. + +:: + + + jbd2_journal_lock_updates() //stop new stuff happening.. + jbd2_journal_flush() // checkpoint everything. + ..do stuff on stable fs + jbd2_journal_unlock_updates() // carry on with filesystem use. + +The opportunities for abuse and DOS attacks with this should be obvious, +if you allow unprivileged userspace to trigger codepaths containing +these calls. + +Summary +~~~~~~~ + +Using the journal is a matter of wrapping the different context changes, +being each mount, each modification (transaction) and each changed +buffer to tell the journalling layer about them. + +Data Types +---------- + +The journalling layer uses typedefs to 'hide' the concrete definitions +of the structures used. As a client of the JBD2 layer you can just rely +on the using the pointer as a magic cookie of some sort. Obviously the +hiding is not enforced as this is 'C'. + +Structures +~~~~~~~~~~ + +.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/jbd2.h + :internal: + +Functions +--------- + +The functions here are split into two groups those that affect a journal +as a whole, and those which are used to manage transactions + +Journal Level +~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/jbd2/journal.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/jbd2/recovery.c + :internal: + +Transasction Level +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/jbd2/transaction.c + +See also +-------- + +`Journaling the Linux ext2fs Filesystem, LinuxExpo 98, Stephen +Tweedie <http://kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/sct/ext3/journal-design.ps.gz>`__ + +`Ext3 Journalling FileSystem, OLS 2000, Dr. Stephen +Tweedie <http://olstrans.sourceforge.net/release/OLS2000-ext3/OLS2000-ext3.html>`__ + diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/mount_api.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/mount_api.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..944d1965e917 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/mount_api.txt @@ -0,0 +1,709 @@ + ==================== + FILESYSTEM MOUNT API + ==================== + +CONTENTS + + (1) Overview. + + (2) The filesystem context. + + (3) The filesystem context operations. + + (4) Filesystem context security. + + (5) VFS filesystem context operations. + + (6) Parameter description. + + (7) Parameter helper functions. + + +======== +OVERVIEW +======== + +The creation of new mounts is now to be done in a multistep process: + + (1) Create a filesystem context. + + (2) Parse the parameters and attach them to the context. Parameters are + expected to be passed individually from userspace, though legacy binary + parameters can also be handled. + + (3) Validate and pre-process the context. + + (4) Get or create a superblock and mountable root. + + (5) Perform the mount. + + (6) Return an error message attached to the context. + + (7) Destroy the context. + +To support this, the file_system_type struct gains a new field: + + int (*init_fs_context)(struct fs_context *fc); + +which is invoked to set up the filesystem-specific parts of a filesystem +context, including the additional space. + +Note that security initialisation is done *after* the filesystem is called so +that the namespaces may be adjusted first. + + +====================== +THE FILESYSTEM CONTEXT +====================== + +The creation and reconfiguration of a superblock is governed by a filesystem +context. This is represented by the fs_context structure: + + struct fs_context { + const struct fs_context_operations *ops; + struct file_system_type *fs_type; + void *fs_private; + struct dentry *root; + struct user_namespace *user_ns; + struct net *net_ns; + const struct cred *cred; + char *source; + char *subtype; + void *security; + void *s_fs_info; + unsigned int sb_flags; + unsigned int sb_flags_mask; + enum fs_context_purpose purpose:8; + bool sloppy:1; + bool silent:1; + ... + }; + +The fs_context fields are as follows: + + (*) const struct fs_context_operations *ops + + These are operations that can be done on a filesystem context (see + below). This must be set by the ->init_fs_context() file_system_type + operation. + + (*) struct file_system_type *fs_type + + A pointer to the file_system_type of the filesystem that is being + constructed or reconfigured. This retains a reference on the type owner. + + (*) void *fs_private + + A pointer to the file system's private data. This is where the filesystem + will need to store any options it parses. + + (*) struct dentry *root + + A pointer to the root of the mountable tree (and indirectly, the + superblock thereof). This is filled in by the ->get_tree() op. If this + is set, an active reference on root->d_sb must also be held. + + (*) struct user_namespace *user_ns + (*) struct net *net_ns + + There are a subset of the namespaces in use by the invoking process. They + retain references on each namespace. The subscribed namespaces may be + replaced by the filesystem to reflect other sources, such as the parent + mount superblock on an automount. + + (*) const struct cred *cred + + The mounter's credentials. This retains a reference on the credentials. + + (*) char *source + + This specifies the source. It may be a block device (e.g. /dev/sda1) or + something more exotic, such as the "host:/path" that NFS desires. + + (*) char *subtype + + This is a string to be added to the type displayed in /proc/mounts to + qualify it (used by FUSE). This is available for the filesystem to set if + desired. + + (*) void *security + + A place for the LSMs to hang their security data for the superblock. The + relevant security operations are described below. + + (*) void *s_fs_info + + The proposed s_fs_info for a new superblock, set in the superblock by + sget_fc(). This can be used to distinguish superblocks. + + (*) unsigned int sb_flags + (*) unsigned int sb_flags_mask + + Which bits SB_* flags are to be set/cleared in super_block::s_flags. + + (*) enum fs_context_purpose + + This indicates the purpose for which the context is intended. The + available values are: + + FS_CONTEXT_FOR_MOUNT, -- New superblock for explicit mount + FS_CONTEXT_FOR_SUBMOUNT -- New automatic submount of extant mount + FS_CONTEXT_FOR_RECONFIGURE -- Change an existing mount + + (*) bool sloppy + (*) bool silent + + These are set if the sloppy or silent mount options are given. + + [NOTE] sloppy is probably unnecessary when userspace passes over one + option at a time since the error can just be ignored if userspace deems it + to be unimportant. + + [NOTE] silent is probably redundant with sb_flags & SB_SILENT. + +The mount context is created by calling vfs_new_fs_context() or +vfs_dup_fs_context() and is destroyed with put_fs_context(). Note that the +structure is not refcounted. + +VFS, security and filesystem mount options are set individually with +vfs_parse_mount_option(). Options provided by the old mount(2) system call as +a page of data can be parsed with generic_parse_monolithic(). + +When mounting, the filesystem is allowed to take data from any of the pointers +and attach it to the superblock (or whatever), provided it clears the pointer +in the mount context. + +The filesystem is also allowed to allocate resources and pin them with the +mount context. For instance, NFS might pin the appropriate protocol version +module. + + +================================= +THE FILESYSTEM CONTEXT OPERATIONS +================================= + +The filesystem context points to a table of operations: + + struct fs_context_operations { + void (*free)(struct fs_context *fc); + int (*dup)(struct fs_context *fc, struct fs_context *src_fc); + int (*parse_param)(struct fs_context *fc, + struct struct fs_parameter *param); + int (*parse_monolithic)(struct fs_context *fc, void *data); + int (*get_tree)(struct fs_context *fc); + int (*reconfigure)(struct fs_context *fc); + }; + +These operations are invoked by the various stages of the mount procedure to +manage the filesystem context. They are as follows: + + (*) void (*free)(struct fs_context *fc); + + Called to clean up the filesystem-specific part of the filesystem context + when the context is destroyed. It should be aware that parts of the + context may have been removed and NULL'd out by ->get_tree(). + + (*) int (*dup)(struct fs_context *fc, struct fs_context *src_fc); + + Called when a filesystem context has been duplicated to duplicate the + filesystem-private data. An error may be returned to indicate failure to + do this. + + [!] Note that even if this fails, put_fs_context() will be called + immediately thereafter, so ->dup() *must* make the + filesystem-private data safe for ->free(). + + (*) int (*parse_param)(struct fs_context *fc, + struct struct fs_parameter *param); + + Called when a parameter is being added to the filesystem context. param + points to the key name and maybe a value object. VFS-specific options + will have been weeded out and fc->sb_flags updated in the context. + Security options will also have been weeded out and fc->security updated. + + The parameter can be parsed with fs_parse() and fs_lookup_param(). Note + that the source(s) are presented as parameters named "source". + + If successful, 0 should be returned or a negative error code otherwise. + + (*) int (*parse_monolithic)(struct fs_context *fc, void *data); + + Called when the mount(2) system call is invoked to pass the entire data + page in one go. If this is expected to be just a list of "key[=val]" + items separated by commas, then this may be set to NULL. + + The return value is as for ->parse_param(). + + If the filesystem (e.g. NFS) needs to examine the data first and then + finds it's the standard key-val list then it may pass it off to + generic_parse_monolithic(). + + (*) int (*get_tree)(struct fs_context *fc); + + Called to get or create the mountable root and superblock, using the + information stored in the filesystem context (reconfiguration goes via a + different vector). It may detach any resources it desires from the + filesystem context and transfer them to the superblock it creates. + + On success it should set fc->root to the mountable root and return 0. In + the case of an error, it should return a negative error code. + + The phase on a userspace-driven context will be set to only allow this to + be called once on any particular context. + + (*) int (*reconfigure)(struct fs_context *fc); + + Called to effect reconfiguration of a superblock using information stored + in the filesystem context. It may detach any resources it desires from + the filesystem context and transfer them to the superblock. The + superblock can be found from fc->root->d_sb. + + On success it should return 0. In the case of an error, it should return + a negative error code. + + [NOTE] reconfigure is intended as a replacement for remount_fs. + + +=========================== +FILESYSTEM CONTEXT SECURITY +=========================== + +The filesystem context contains a security pointer that the LSMs can use for +building up a security context for the superblock to be mounted. There are a +number of operations used by the new mount code for this purpose: + + (*) int security_fs_context_alloc(struct fs_context *fc, + struct dentry *reference); + + Called to initialise fc->security (which is preset to NULL) and allocate + any resources needed. It should return 0 on success or a negative error + code on failure. + + reference will be non-NULL if the context is being created for superblock + reconfiguration (FS_CONTEXT_FOR_RECONFIGURE) in which case it indicates + the root dentry of the superblock to be reconfigured. It will also be + non-NULL in the case of a submount (FS_CONTEXT_FOR_SUBMOUNT) in which case + it indicates the automount point. + + (*) int security_fs_context_dup(struct fs_context *fc, + struct fs_context *src_fc); + + Called to initialise fc->security (which is preset to NULL) and allocate + any resources needed. The original filesystem context is pointed to by + src_fc and may be used for reference. It should return 0 on success or a + negative error code on failure. + + (*) void security_fs_context_free(struct fs_context *fc); + + Called to clean up anything attached to fc->security. Note that the + contents may have been transferred to a superblock and the pointer cleared + during get_tree. + + (*) int security_fs_context_parse_param(struct fs_context *fc, + struct fs_parameter *param); + + Called for each mount parameter, including the source. The arguments are + as for the ->parse_param() method. It should return 0 to indicate that + the parameter should be passed on to the filesystem, 1 to indicate that + the parameter should be discarded or an error to indicate that the + parameter should be rejected. + + The value pointed to by param may be modified (if a string) or stolen + (provided the value pointer is NULL'd out). If it is stolen, 1 must be + returned to prevent it being passed to the filesystem. + + (*) int security_fs_context_validate(struct fs_context *fc); + + Called after all the options have been parsed to validate the collection + as a whole and to do any necessary allocation so that + security_sb_get_tree() and security_sb_reconfigure() are less likely to + fail. It should return 0 or a negative error code. + + In the case of reconfiguration, the target superblock will be accessible + via fc->root. + + (*) int security_sb_get_tree(struct fs_context *fc); + + Called during the mount procedure to verify that the specified superblock + is allowed to be mounted and to transfer the security data there. It + should return 0 or a negative error code. + + (*) void security_sb_reconfigure(struct fs_context *fc); + + Called to apply any reconfiguration to an LSM's context. It must not + fail. Error checking and resource allocation must be done in advance by + the parameter parsing and validation hooks. + + (*) int security_sb_mountpoint(struct fs_context *fc, struct path *mountpoint, + unsigned int mnt_flags); + + Called during the mount procedure to verify that the root dentry attached + to the context is permitted to be attached to the specified mountpoint. + It should return 0 on success or a negative error code on failure. + + +================================= +VFS FILESYSTEM CONTEXT OPERATIONS +================================= + +There are four operations for creating a filesystem context and +one for destroying a context: + + (*) struct fs_context *vfs_new_fs_context(struct file_system_type *fs_type, + struct dentry *reference, + unsigned int sb_flags, + unsigned int sb_flags_mask, + enum fs_context_purpose purpose); + + Create a filesystem context for a given filesystem type and purpose. This + allocates the filesystem context, sets the superblock flags, initialises + the security and calls fs_type->init_fs_context() to initialise the + filesystem private data. + + reference can be NULL or it may indicate the root dentry of a superblock + that is going to be reconfigured (FS_CONTEXT_FOR_RECONFIGURE) or + the automount point that triggered a submount (FS_CONTEXT_FOR_SUBMOUNT). + This is provided as a source of namespace information. + + (*) struct fs_context *vfs_dup_fs_context(struct fs_context *src_fc); + + Duplicate a filesystem context, copying any options noted and duplicating + or additionally referencing any resources held therein. This is available + for use where a filesystem has to get a mount within a mount, such as NFS4 + does by internally mounting the root of the target server and then doing a + private pathwalk to the target directory. + + The purpose in the new context is inherited from the old one. + + (*) void put_fs_context(struct fs_context *fc); + + Destroy a filesystem context, releasing any resources it holds. This + calls the ->free() operation. This is intended to be called by anyone who + created a filesystem context. + + [!] filesystem contexts are not refcounted, so this causes unconditional + destruction. + +In all the above operations, apart from the put op, the return is a mount +context pointer or a negative error code. + +For the remaining operations, if an error occurs, a negative error code will be +returned. + + (*) int vfs_get_tree(struct fs_context *fc); + + Get or create the mountable root and superblock, using the parameters in + the filesystem context to select/configure the superblock. This invokes + the ->validate() op and then the ->get_tree() op. + + [NOTE] ->validate() could perhaps be rolled into ->get_tree() and + ->reconfigure(). + + (*) struct vfsmount *vfs_create_mount(struct fs_context *fc); + + Create a mount given the parameters in the specified filesystem context. + Note that this does not attach the mount to anything. + + (*) int vfs_parse_fs_param(struct fs_context *fc, + struct fs_parameter *param); + + Supply a single mount parameter to the filesystem context. This include + the specification of the source/device which is specified as the "source" + parameter (which may be specified multiple times if the filesystem + supports that). + + param specifies the parameter key name and the value. The parameter is + first checked to see if it corresponds to a standard mount flag (in which + case it is used to set an SB_xxx flag and consumed) or a security option + (in which case the LSM consumes it) before it is passed on to the + filesystem. + + The parameter value is typed and can be one of: + + fs_value_is_flag, Parameter not given a value. + fs_value_is_string, Value is a string + fs_value_is_blob, Value is a binary blob + fs_value_is_filename, Value is a filename* + dirfd + fs_value_is_filename_empty, Value is a filename* + dirfd + AT_EMPTY_PATH + fs_value_is_file, Value is an open file (file*) + + If there is a value, that value is stored in a union in the struct in one + of param->{string,blob,name,file}. Note that the function may steal and + clear the pointer, but then becomes responsible for disposing of the + object. + + (*) int vfs_parse_fs_string(struct fs_context *fc, char *key, + const char *value, size_t v_size); + + A wrapper around vfs_parse_fs_param() that just passes a constant string. + + (*) int generic_parse_monolithic(struct fs_context *fc, void *data); + + Parse a sys_mount() data page, assuming the form to be a text list + consisting of key[=val] options separated by commas. Each item in the + list is passed to vfs_mount_option(). This is the default when the + ->parse_monolithic() operation is NULL. + + +===================== +PARAMETER DESCRIPTION +===================== + +Parameters are described using structures defined in linux/fs_parser.h. +There's a core description struct that links everything together: + + struct fs_parameter_description { + const char name[16]; + u8 nr_params; + u8 nr_alt_keys; + u8 nr_enums; + bool ignore_unknown; + bool no_source; + const char *const *keys; + const struct constant_table *alt_keys; + const struct fs_parameter_spec *specs; + const struct fs_parameter_enum *enums; + }; + +For example: + + enum afs_param { + Opt_autocell, + Opt_bar, + Opt_dyn, + Opt_foo, + Opt_source, + nr__afs_params + }; + + static const struct fs_parameter_description afs_fs_parameters = { + .name = "kAFS", + .nr_params = nr__afs_params, + .nr_alt_keys = ARRAY_SIZE(afs_param_alt_keys), + .nr_enums = ARRAY_SIZE(afs_param_enums), + .keys = afs_param_keys, + .alt_keys = afs_param_alt_keys, + .specs = afs_param_specs, + .enums = afs_param_enums, + }; + +The members are as follows: + + (1) const char name[16]; + + The name to be used in error messages generated by the parse helper + functions. + + (2) u8 nr_params; + + The number of discrete parameter identifiers. This indicates the number + of elements in the ->types[] array and also limits the values that may be + used in the values that the ->keys[] array maps to. + + It is expected that, for example, two parameters that are related, say + "acl" and "noacl" with have the same ID, but will be flagged to indicate + that one is the inverse of the other. The value can then be picked out + from the parse result. + + (3) const struct fs_parameter_specification *specs; + + Table of parameter specifications, where the entries are of type: + + struct fs_parameter_type { + enum fs_parameter_spec type:8; + u8 flags; + }; + + and the parameter identifier is the index to the array. 'type' indicates + the desired value type and must be one of: + + TYPE NAME EXPECTED VALUE RESULT IN + ======================= ======================= ===================== + fs_param_is_flag No value n/a + fs_param_is_bool Boolean value result->boolean + fs_param_is_u32 32-bit unsigned int result->uint_32 + fs_param_is_u32_octal 32-bit octal int result->uint_32 + fs_param_is_u32_hex 32-bit hex int result->uint_32 + fs_param_is_s32 32-bit signed int result->int_32 + fs_param_is_enum Enum value name result->uint_32 + fs_param_is_string Arbitrary string param->string + fs_param_is_blob Binary blob param->blob + fs_param_is_blockdev Blockdev path * Needs lookup + fs_param_is_path Path * Needs lookup + fs_param_is_fd File descriptor param->file + + And each parameter can be qualified with 'flags': + + fs_param_v_optional The value is optional + fs_param_neg_with_no If key name is prefixed with "no", it is false + fs_param_neg_with_empty If value is "", it is false + fs_param_deprecated The parameter is deprecated. + + For example: + + static const struct fs_parameter_spec afs_param_specs[nr__afs_params] = { + [Opt_autocell] = { fs_param_is flag }, + [Opt_bar] = { fs_param_is_enum }, + [Opt_dyn] = { fs_param_is flag }, + [Opt_foo] = { fs_param_is_bool, fs_param_neg_with_no }, + [Opt_source] = { fs_param_is_string }, + }; + + Note that if the value is of fs_param_is_bool type, fs_parse() will try + to match any string value against "0", "1", "no", "yes", "false", "true". + + [!] NOTE that the table must be sorted according to primary key name so + that ->keys[] is also sorted. + + (4) const char *const *keys; + + Table of primary key names for the parameters. There must be one entry + per defined parameter. The table is optional if ->nr_params is 0. The + table is just an array of names e.g.: + + static const char *const afs_param_keys[nr__afs_params] = { + [Opt_autocell] = "autocell", + [Opt_bar] = "bar", + [Opt_dyn] = "dyn", + [Opt_foo] = "foo", + [Opt_source] = "source", + }; + + [!] NOTE that the table must be sorted such that the table can be searched + with bsearch() using strcmp(). This means that the Opt_* values must + correspond to the entries in this table. + + (5) const struct constant_table *alt_keys; + u8 nr_alt_keys; + + Table of additional key names and their mappings to parameter ID plus the + number of elements in the table. This is optional. The table is just an + array of { name, integer } pairs, e.g.: + + static const struct constant_table afs_param_keys[] = { + { "baz", Opt_bar }, + { "dynamic", Opt_dyn }, + }; + + [!] NOTE that the table must be sorted such that strcmp() can be used with + bsearch() to search the entries. + + The parameter ID can also be fs_param_key_removed to indicate that a + deprecated parameter has been removed and that an error will be given. + This differs from fs_param_deprecated where the parameter may still have + an effect. + + Further, the behaviour of the parameter may differ when an alternate name + is used (for instance with NFS, "v3", "v4.2", etc. are alternate names). + + (6) const struct fs_parameter_enum *enums; + u8 nr_enums; + + Table of enum value names to integer mappings and the number of elements + stored therein. This is of type: + + struct fs_parameter_enum { + u8 param_id; + char name[14]; + u8 value; + }; + + Where the array is an unsorted list of { parameter ID, name }-keyed + elements that indicate the value to map to, e.g.: + + static const struct fs_parameter_enum afs_param_enums[] = { + { Opt_bar, "x", 1}, + { Opt_bar, "y", 23}, + { Opt_bar, "z", 42}, + }; + + If a parameter of type fs_param_is_enum is encountered, fs_parse() will + try to look the value up in the enum table and the result will be stored + in the parse result. + + (7) bool no_source; + + If this is set, fs_parse() will ignore any "source" parameter and not + pass it to the filesystem. + +The parser should be pointed to by the parser pointer in the file_system_type +struct as this will provide validation on registration (if +CONFIG_VALIDATE_FS_PARSER=y) and will allow the description to be queried from +userspace using the fsinfo() syscall. + + +========================== +PARAMETER HELPER FUNCTIONS +========================== + +A number of helper functions are provided to help a filesystem or an LSM +process the parameters it is given. + + (*) int lookup_constant(const struct constant_table tbl[], + const char *name, int not_found); + + Look up a constant by name in a table of name -> integer mappings. The + table is an array of elements of the following type: + + struct constant_table { + const char *name; + int value; + }; + + and it must be sorted such that it can be searched using bsearch() using + strcmp(). If a match is found, the corresponding value is returned. If a + match isn't found, the not_found value is returned instead. + + (*) bool validate_constant_table(const struct constant_table *tbl, + size_t tbl_size, + int low, int high, int special); + + Validate a constant table. Checks that all the elements are appropriately + ordered, that there are no duplicates and that the values are between low + and high inclusive, though provision is made for one allowable special + value outside of that range. If no special value is required, special + should just be set to lie inside the low-to-high range. + + If all is good, true is returned. If the table is invalid, errors are + logged to dmesg, the stack is dumped and false is returned. + + (*) int fs_parse(struct fs_context *fc, + const struct fs_param_parser *parser, + struct fs_parameter *param, + struct fs_param_parse_result *result); + + This is the main interpreter of parameters. It uses the parameter + description (parser) to look up the name of the parameter to use and to + convert that to a parameter ID (stored in result->key). + + If successful, and if the parameter type indicates the result is a + boolean, integer or enum type, the value is converted by this function and + the result stored in result->{boolean,int_32,uint_32}. + + If a match isn't initially made, the key is prefixed with "no" and no + value is present then an attempt will be made to look up the key with the + prefix removed. If this matches a parameter for which the type has flag + fs_param_neg_with_no set, then a match will be made and the value will be + set to false/0/NULL. + + If the parameter is successfully matched and, optionally, parsed + correctly, 1 is returned. If the parameter isn't matched and + parser->ignore_unknown is set, then 0 is returned. Otherwise -EINVAL is + returned. + + (*) bool fs_validate_description(const struct fs_parameter_description *desc); + + This is validates the parameter description. It returns true if the + description is good and false if it is not. + + (*) int fs_lookup_param(struct fs_context *fc, + struct fs_parameter *value, + bool want_bdev, + struct path *_path); + + This takes a parameter that carries a string or filename type and attempts + to do a path lookup on it. If the parameter expects a blockdev, a check + is made that the inode actually represents one. + + Returns 0 if successful and *_path will be set; returns a negative error + code if not. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.rst index 9d6b68853f5b..434a07b0002b 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.rst +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.rst @@ -1,3 +1,18 @@ +=============== +Pathname lookup +=============== + +This write-up is based on three articles published at lwn.net: + +- <https://lwn.net/Articles/649115/> Pathname lookup in Linux +- <https://lwn.net/Articles/649729/> RCU-walk: faster pathname lookup in Linux +- <https://lwn.net/Articles/650786/> A walk among the symlinks + +Written by Neil Brown with help from Al Viro and Jon Corbet. +It has subsequently been updated to reflect changes in the kernel +including: + +- per-directory parallel name lookup. Introduction to pathname lookup =============================== @@ -344,7 +359,7 @@ In particular it is held while scanning chains in the dcache hash table, and the mount point hash table. Bringing it together with ``struct nameidata`` --------------------------------------------- +---------------------------------------------- .. _First edition Unix: http://minnie.tuhs.org/cgi-bin/utree.pl?file=V1/u2.s @@ -355,7 +370,7 @@ converts a "name" to an "inode". ``struct nameidata`` contains (among other fields): ``struct path path`` -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ A ``path`` contains a ``struct vfsmount`` (which is embedded in a ``struct mount``) and a ``struct dentry``. Together these @@ -366,13 +381,13 @@ step. A reference through ``d_lockref`` and ``mnt_count`` is always held. ``struct qstr last`` -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ This is a string together with a length (i.e. _not_ ``nul`` terminated) that is the "next" component in the pathname. ``int last_type`` -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ This is one of ``LAST_NORM``, ``LAST_ROOT``, ``LAST_DOT``, ``LAST_DOTDOT``, or ``LAST_BIND``. The ``last`` field is only valid if the type is @@ -381,7 +396,7 @@ components of the symlink have been processed yet. Others should be fairly self-explanatory. ``struct path root`` -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ This is used to hold a reference to the effective root of the filesystem. Often that reference won't be needed, so this field is @@ -510,7 +525,7 @@ potentially interesting things about these dentries corresponding to three different flags that might be set in ``dentry->d_flags``: ``DCACHE_MANAGE_TRANSIT`` -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ If this flag has been set, then the filesystem has requested that the ``d_manage()`` dentry operation be called before handling any possible @@ -529,7 +544,7 @@ filesystem, which will then give it a special pass through ``d_manage()`` by returning ``-EISDIR``. ``DCACHE_MOUNTED`` -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ This flag is set on every dentry that is mounted on. As Linux supports multiple filesystem namespaces, it is possible that the @@ -542,7 +557,7 @@ If this flag is set, and ``d_manage()`` didn't return ``-EISDIR``, and a new ``dentry`` (both with counted references). ``DCACHE_NEED_AUTOMOUNT`` -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ If ``d_manage()`` allowed us to get this far, and ``lookup_mnt()`` didn't find a mount point, then this flag causes the ``d_automount()`` dentry @@ -698,7 +713,7 @@ With that little refresher on seqlocks out of the way we can look at the bigger picture of how RCU-walk uses seqlocks. ``mount_lock`` and ``nd->m_seq`` -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ We already met the ``mount_lock`` seqlock when REF-walk used it to ensure that crossing a mount point is performed safely. RCU-walk uses @@ -727,7 +742,7 @@ results would have been the same. This ensures the invariant holds, at least for vfsmount structures. ``dentry->d_seq`` and ``nd->seq`` -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ In place of taking a count or lock on ``d_reflock``, RCU-walk samples the per-dentry ``d_seq`` seqlock, and stores the sequence number in the @@ -774,7 +789,7 @@ getting a counted reference to the new dentry before dropping that for the old dentry which we saw in REF-walk. No ``inode->i_rwsem`` or even ``rename_lock`` -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ A semaphore is a fairly heavyweight lock that can only be taken when it is permissible to sleep. As ``rcu_read_lock()`` forbids sleeping, @@ -796,7 +811,7 @@ locking. This neatly handles all cases, so adding extra checks on rename_lock would bring no significant value. ``unlazy walk()`` and ``complete_walk()`` -------------------------------------- +----------------------------------------- That "dropping down to REF-walk" typically involves a call to ``unlazy_walk()``, so named because "RCU-walk" is also sometimes diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/splice.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/splice.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..edd874808472 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/splice.rst @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +================ +splice and pipes +================ + +splice API +========== + +splice is a method for moving blocks of data around inside the kernel, +without continually transferring them between the kernel and user space. + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/splice.c + +pipes API +========= + +Pipe interfaces are all for in-kernel (builtin image) use. They are not +exported for use by modules. + +.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/pipe_fs_i.h + :internal: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/pipe.c diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt index 41411b0c60a3..5b5311f9358d 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt @@ -116,6 +116,27 @@ static struct device_attribute dev_attr_foo = { .store = store_foo, }; +Note as stated in include/linux/kernel.h "OTHER_WRITABLE? Generally +considered a bad idea." so trying to set a sysfs file writable for +everyone will fail reverting to RO mode for "Others". + +For the common cases sysfs.h provides convenience macros to make +defining attributes easier as well as making code more concise and +readable. The above case could be shortened to: + +static struct device_attribute dev_attr_foo = __ATTR_RW(foo); + +the list of helpers available to define your wrapper function is: +__ATTR_RO(name): assumes default name_show and mode 0444 +__ATTR_WO(name): assumes a name_store only and is restricted to mode + 0200 that is root write access only. +__ATTR_RO_MODE(name, mode): fore more restrictive RO access currently + only use case is the EFI System Resource Table + (see drivers/firmware/efi/esrt.c) +__ATTR_RW(name): assumes default name_show, name_store and setting + mode to 0644. +__ATTR_NULL: which sets the name to NULL and is used as end of list + indicator (see: kernel/workqueue.c) Subsystem-Specific Callbacks ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt index 8dc8e9c2913f..761c6fd24a53 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt @@ -857,6 +857,7 @@ struct file_operations { ssize_t (*write) (struct file *, const char __user *, size_t, loff_t *); ssize_t (*read_iter) (struct kiocb *, struct iov_iter *); ssize_t (*write_iter) (struct kiocb *, struct iov_iter *); + int (*iopoll)(struct kiocb *kiocb, bool spin); int (*iterate) (struct file *, struct dir_context *); int (*iterate_shared) (struct file *, struct dir_context *); __poll_t (*poll) (struct file *, struct poll_table_struct *); @@ -902,6 +903,8 @@ otherwise noted. write_iter: possibly asynchronous write with iov_iter as source + iopoll: called when aio wants to poll for completions on HIPRI iocbs + iterate: called when the VFS needs to read the directory contents iterate_shared: called when the VFS needs to read the directory contents diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt index 9ccfd1bc6201..a5cbb5e0e3db 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ The following sysctls are available for the XFS filesystem: XFS_ERRLEVEL_LOW: 1 XFS_ERRLEVEL_HIGH: 5 - fs.xfs.panic_mask (Min: 0 Default: 0 Max: 255) + fs.xfs.panic_mask (Min: 0 Default: 0 Max: 256) Causes certain error conditions to call BUG(). Value is a bitmask; OR together the tags which represent errors which should cause panics: @@ -285,6 +285,7 @@ The following sysctls are available for the XFS filesystem: XFS_PTAG_SHUTDOWN_IOERROR 0x00000020 XFS_PTAG_SHUTDOWN_LOGERROR 0x00000040 XFS_PTAG_FSBLOCK_ZERO 0x00000080 + XFS_PTAG_VERIFIER_ERROR 0x00000100 This option is intended for debugging only. diff --git a/Documentation/flexible-arrays.txt b/Documentation/flexible-arrays.txt deleted file mode 100644 index a0f2989dd804..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/flexible-arrays.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,123 +0,0 @@ -=================================== -Using flexible arrays in the kernel -=================================== - -:Updated: Last updated for 2.6.32 -:Author: Jonathan Corbet <corbet@lwn.net> - -Large contiguous memory allocations can be unreliable in the Linux kernel. -Kernel programmers will sometimes respond to this problem by allocating -pages with vmalloc(). This solution not ideal, though. On 32-bit systems, -memory from vmalloc() must be mapped into a relatively small address space; -it's easy to run out. On SMP systems, the page table changes required by -vmalloc() allocations can require expensive cross-processor interrupts on -all CPUs. And, on all systems, use of space in the vmalloc() range -increases pressure on the translation lookaside buffer (TLB), reducing the -performance of the system. - -In many cases, the need for memory from vmalloc() can be eliminated by -piecing together an array from smaller parts; the flexible array library -exists to make this task easier. - -A flexible array holds an arbitrary (within limits) number of fixed-sized -objects, accessed via an integer index. Sparse arrays are handled -reasonably well. Only single-page allocations are made, so memory -allocation failures should be relatively rare. The down sides are that the -arrays cannot be indexed directly, individual object size cannot exceed the -system page size, and putting data into a flexible array requires a copy -operation. It's also worth noting that flexible arrays do no internal -locking at all; if concurrent access to an array is possible, then the -caller must arrange for appropriate mutual exclusion. - -The creation of a flexible array is done with:: - - #include <linux/flex_array.h> - - struct flex_array *flex_array_alloc(int element_size, - unsigned int total, - gfp_t flags); - -The individual object size is provided by element_size, while total is the -maximum number of objects which can be stored in the array. The flags -argument is passed directly to the internal memory allocation calls. With -the current code, using flags to ask for high memory is likely to lead to -notably unpleasant side effects. - -It is also possible to define flexible arrays at compile time with:: - - DEFINE_FLEX_ARRAY(name, element_size, total); - -This macro will result in a definition of an array with the given name; the -element size and total will be checked for validity at compile time. - -Storing data into a flexible array is accomplished with a call to:: - - int flex_array_put(struct flex_array *array, unsigned int element_nr, - void *src, gfp_t flags); - -This call will copy the data from src into the array, in the position -indicated by element_nr (which must be less than the maximum specified when -the array was created). If any memory allocations must be performed, flags -will be used. The return value is zero on success, a negative error code -otherwise. - -There might possibly be a need to store data into a flexible array while -running in some sort of atomic context; in this situation, sleeping in the -memory allocator would be a bad thing. That can be avoided by using -GFP_ATOMIC for the flags value, but, often, there is a better way. The -trick is to ensure that any needed memory allocations are done before -entering atomic context, using:: - - int flex_array_prealloc(struct flex_array *array, unsigned int start, - unsigned int nr_elements, gfp_t flags); - -This function will ensure that memory for the elements indexed in the range -defined by start and nr_elements has been allocated. Thereafter, a -flex_array_put() call on an element in that range is guaranteed not to -block. - -Getting data back out of the array is done with:: - - void *flex_array_get(struct flex_array *fa, unsigned int element_nr); - -The return value is a pointer to the data element, or NULL if that -particular element has never been allocated. - -Note that it is possible to get back a valid pointer for an element which -has never been stored in the array. Memory for array elements is allocated -one page at a time; a single allocation could provide memory for several -adjacent elements. Flexible array elements are normally initialized to the -value FLEX_ARRAY_FREE (defined as 0x6c in <linux/poison.h>), so errors -involving that number probably result from use of unstored array entries. -Note that, if array elements are allocated with __GFP_ZERO, they will be -initialized to zero and this poisoning will not happen. - -Individual elements in the array can be cleared with:: - - int flex_array_clear(struct flex_array *array, unsigned int element_nr); - -This function will set the given element to FLEX_ARRAY_FREE and return -zero. If storage for the indicated element is not allocated for the array, -flex_array_clear() will return -EINVAL instead. Note that clearing an -element does not release the storage associated with it; to reduce the -allocated size of an array, call:: - - int flex_array_shrink(struct flex_array *array); - -The return value will be the number of pages of memory actually freed. -This function works by scanning the array for pages containing nothing but -FLEX_ARRAY_FREE bytes, so (1) it can be expensive, and (2) it will not work -if the array's pages are allocated with __GFP_ZERO. - -It is possible to remove all elements of an array with a call to:: - - void flex_array_free_parts(struct flex_array *array); - -This call frees all elements, but leaves the array itself in place. -Freeing the entire array is done with:: - - void flex_array_free(struct flex_array *array); - -As of this writing, there are no users of flexible arrays in the mainline -kernel. The functions described here are also not exported to modules; -that will probably be fixed when somebody comes up with a need for it. diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/afbc.rst b/Documentation/gpu/afbc.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4d38dc49d105 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/gpu/afbc.rst @@ -0,0 +1,235 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ + +=================================== + Arm Framebuffer Compression (AFBC) +=================================== + +AFBC is a proprietary lossless image compression protocol and format. +It provides fine-grained random access and minimizes the amount of +data transferred between IP blocks. + +AFBC can be enabled on drivers which support it via use of the AFBC +format modifiers defined in drm_fourcc.h. See DRM_FORMAT_MOD_ARM_AFBC(*). + +All users of the AFBC modifiers must follow the usage guidelines laid +out in this document, to ensure compatibility across different AFBC +producers and consumers. + +Components and Ordering +======================= + +AFBC streams can contain several components - where a component +corresponds to a color channel (i.e. R, G, B, X, A, Y, Cb, Cr). +The assignment of input/output color channels must be consistent +between the encoder and the decoder for correct operation, otherwise +the consumer will interpret the decoded data incorrectly. + +Furthermore, when the lossless colorspace transform is used +(AFBC_FORMAT_MOD_YTR, which should be enabled for RGB buffers for +maximum compression efficiency), the component order must be: + + * Component 0: R + * Component 1: G + * Component 2: B + +The component ordering is communicated via the fourcc code in the +fourcc:modifier pair. In general, component '0' is considered to +reside in the least-significant bits of the corresponding linear +format. For example, COMP(bits): + + * DRM_FORMAT_ABGR8888 + + * Component 0: R(8) + * Component 1: G(8) + * Component 2: B(8) + * Component 3: A(8) + + * DRM_FORMAT_BGR888 + + * Component 0: R(8) + * Component 1: G(8) + * Component 2: B(8) + + * DRM_FORMAT_YUYV + + * Component 0: Y(8) + * Component 1: Cb(8, 2x1 subsampled) + * Component 2: Cr(8, 2x1 subsampled) + +In AFBC, 'X' components are not treated any differently from any other +component. Therefore, an AFBC buffer with fourcc DRM_FORMAT_XBGR8888 +encodes with 4 components, like so: + + * DRM_FORMAT_XBGR8888 + + * Component 0: R(8) + * Component 1: G(8) + * Component 2: B(8) + * Component 3: X(8) + +Please note, however, that the inclusion of a "wasted" 'X' channel is +bad for compression efficiency, and so it's recommended to avoid +formats containing 'X' bits. If a fourth component is +required/expected by the encoder/decoder, then it is recommended to +instead use an equivalent format with alpha, setting all alpha bits to +'1'. If there is no requirement for a fourth component, then a format +which doesn't include alpha can be used, e.g. DRM_FORMAT_BGR888. + +Number of Planes +================ + +Formats which are typically multi-planar in linear layouts (e.g. YUV +420), can be encoded into one, or multiple, AFBC planes. As with +component order, the encoder and decoder must agree about the number +of planes in order to correctly decode the buffer. The fourcc code is +used to determine the number of encoded planes in an AFBC buffer, +matching the number of planes for the linear (unmodified) format. +Within each plane, the component ordering also follows the fourcc +code: + +For example: + + * DRM_FORMAT_YUYV: nplanes = 1 + + * Plane 0: + + * Component 0: Y(8) + * Component 1: Cb(8, 2x1 subsampled) + * Component 2: Cr(8, 2x1 subsampled) + + * DRM_FORMAT_NV12: nplanes = 2 + + * Plane 0: + + * Component 0: Y(8) + + * Plane 1: + + * Component 0: Cb(8, 2x1 subsampled) + * Component 1: Cr(8, 2x1 subsampled) + +Cross-device interoperability +============================= + +For maximum compatibility across devices, the table below defines +canonical formats for use between AFBC-enabled devices. Formats which +are listed here must be used exactly as specified when using the AFBC +modifiers. Formats which are not listed should be avoided. + +.. flat-table:: AFBC formats + + * - Fourcc code + - Description + - Planes/Components + + * - DRM_FORMAT_ABGR2101010 + - 10-bit per component RGB, with 2-bit alpha + - Plane 0: 4 components + * Component 0: R(10) + * Component 1: G(10) + * Component 2: B(10) + * Component 3: A(2) + + * - DRM_FORMAT_ABGR8888 + - 8-bit per component RGB, with 8-bit alpha + - Plane 0: 4 components + * Component 0: R(8) + * Component 1: G(8) + * Component 2: B(8) + * Component 3: A(8) + + * - DRM_FORMAT_BGR888 + - 8-bit per component RGB + - Plane 0: 3 components + * Component 0: R(8) + * Component 1: G(8) + * Component 2: B(8) + + * - DRM_FORMAT_BGR565 + - 5/6-bit per component RGB + - Plane 0: 3 components + * Component 0: R(5) + * Component 1: G(6) + * Component 2: B(5) + + * - DRM_FORMAT_ABGR1555 + - 5-bit per component RGB, with 1-bit alpha + - Plane 0: 4 components + * Component 0: R(5) + * Component 1: G(5) + * Component 2: B(5) + * Component 3: A(1) + + * - DRM_FORMAT_VUY888 + - 8-bit per component YCbCr 444, single plane + - Plane 0: 3 components + * Component 0: Y(8) + * Component 1: Cb(8) + * Component 2: Cr(8) + + * - DRM_FORMAT_VUY101010 + - 10-bit per component YCbCr 444, single plane + - Plane 0: 3 components + * Component 0: Y(10) + * Component 1: Cb(10) + * Component 2: Cr(10) + + * - DRM_FORMAT_YUYV + - 8-bit per component YCbCr 422, single plane + - Plane 0: 3 components + * Component 0: Y(8) + * Component 1: Cb(8, 2x1 subsampled) + * Component 2: Cr(8, 2x1 subsampled) + + * - DRM_FORMAT_NV16 + - 8-bit per component YCbCr 422, two plane + - Plane 0: 1 component + * Component 0: Y(8) + Plane 1: 2 components + * Component 0: Cb(8, 2x1 subsampled) + * Component 1: Cr(8, 2x1 subsampled) + + * - DRM_FORMAT_Y210 + - 10-bit per component YCbCr 422, single plane + - Plane 0: 3 components + * Component 0: Y(10) + * Component 1: Cb(10, 2x1 subsampled) + * Component 2: Cr(10, 2x1 subsampled) + + * - DRM_FORMAT_P210 + - 10-bit per component YCbCr 422, two plane + - Plane 0: 1 component + * Component 0: Y(10) + Plane 1: 2 components + * Component 0: Cb(10, 2x1 subsampled) + * Component 1: Cr(10, 2x1 subsampled) + + * - DRM_FORMAT_YUV420_8BIT + - 8-bit per component YCbCr 420, single plane + - Plane 0: 3 components + * Component 0: Y(8) + * Component 1: Cb(8, 2x2 subsampled) + * Component 2: Cr(8, 2x2 subsampled) + + * - DRM_FORMAT_YUV420_10BIT + - 10-bit per component YCbCr 420, single plane + - Plane 0: 3 components + * Component 0: Y(10) + * Component 1: Cb(10, 2x2 subsampled) + * Component 2: Cr(10, 2x2 subsampled) + + * - DRM_FORMAT_NV12 + - 8-bit per component YCbCr 420, two plane + - Plane 0: 1 component + * Component 0: Y(8) + Plane 1: 2 components + * Component 0: Cb(8, 2x2 subsampled) + * Component 1: Cr(8, 2x2 subsampled) + + * - DRM_FORMAT_P010 + - 10-bit per component YCbCr 420, two plane + - Plane 0: 1 component + * Component 0: Y(10) + Plane 1: 2 components + * Component 0: Cb(10, 2x2 subsampled) + * Component 1: Cr(10, 2x2 subsampled) diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/dp-mst/topology-figure-1.dot b/Documentation/gpu/dp-mst/topology-figure-1.dot new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..157e17c7e0b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/gpu/dp-mst/topology-figure-1.dot @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +digraph T { + /* Make sure our payloads are always drawn below the driver node */ + subgraph cluster_driver { + fillcolor = grey; + style = filled; + driver -> {payload1, payload2} [dir=none]; + } + + /* Driver malloc references */ + edge [style=dashed]; + driver -> port1; + driver -> port2; + driver -> port3:e; + driver -> port4; + + payload1:s -> port1:e; + payload2:s -> port3:e; + edge [style=""]; + + subgraph cluster_topology { + label="Topology Manager"; + labelloc=bottom; + + /* Topology references */ + mstb1 -> {port1, port2}; + port1 -> mstb2; + port2 -> mstb3 -> {port3, port4}; + port3 -> mstb4; + + /* Malloc references */ + edge [style=dashed;dir=back]; + mstb1 -> {port1, port2}; + port1 -> mstb2; + port2 -> mstb3 -> {port3, port4}; + port3 -> mstb4; + } + + driver [label="DRM driver";style=filled;shape=box;fillcolor=lightblue]; + + payload1 [label="Payload #1";style=filled;shape=box;fillcolor=lightblue]; + payload2 [label="Payload #2";style=filled;shape=box;fillcolor=lightblue]; + + mstb1 [label="MSTB #1";style=filled;fillcolor=palegreen;shape=oval]; + mstb2 [label="MSTB #2";style=filled;fillcolor=palegreen;shape=oval]; + mstb3 [label="MSTB #3";style=filled;fillcolor=palegreen;shape=oval]; + mstb4 [label="MSTB #4";style=filled;fillcolor=palegreen;shape=oval]; + + port1 [label="Port #1";shape=oval]; + port2 [label="Port #2";shape=oval]; + port3 [label="Port #3";shape=oval]; + port4 [label="Port #4";shape=oval]; +} diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/dp-mst/topology-figure-2.dot b/Documentation/gpu/dp-mst/topology-figure-2.dot new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4243dd1737cb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/gpu/dp-mst/topology-figure-2.dot @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +digraph T { + /* Make sure our payloads are always drawn below the driver node */ + subgraph cluster_driver { + fillcolor = grey; + style = filled; + driver -> {payload1, payload2} [dir=none]; + } + + /* Driver malloc references */ + edge [style=dashed]; + driver -> port1; + driver -> port2; + driver -> port3:e; + driver -> port4 [color=red]; + + payload1:s -> port1:e; + payload2:s -> port3:e; + edge [style=""]; + + subgraph cluster_topology { + label="Topology Manager"; + labelloc=bottom; + + /* Topology references */ + mstb1 -> {port1, port2}; + port1 -> mstb2; + edge [color=red]; + port2 -> mstb3 -> {port3, port4}; + port3 -> mstb4; + edge [color=""]; + + /* Malloc references */ + edge [style=dashed;dir=back]; + mstb1 -> {port1, port2}; + port1 -> mstb2; + port2 -> mstb3 -> port3; + edge [color=red]; + mstb3 -> port4; + port3 -> mstb4; + } + + mstb1 [label="MSTB #1";style=filled;fillcolor=palegreen]; + mstb2 [label="MSTB #2";style=filled;fillcolor=palegreen]; + mstb3 [label="MSTB #3";style=filled;fillcolor=palegreen]; + mstb4 [label="MSTB #4";style=filled;fillcolor=grey]; + + port1 [label="Port #1"]; + port2 [label="Port #2"]; + port3 [label="Port #3"]; + port4 [label="Port #4";style=filled;fillcolor=grey]; + + driver [label="DRM driver";style=filled;shape=box;fillcolor=lightblue]; + + payload1 [label="Payload #1";style=filled;shape=box;fillcolor=lightblue]; + payload2 [label="Payload #2";style=filled;shape=box;fillcolor=lightblue]; +} diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/dp-mst/topology-figure-3.dot b/Documentation/gpu/dp-mst/topology-figure-3.dot new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6cd78d06778b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/gpu/dp-mst/topology-figure-3.dot @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ +digraph T { + /* Make sure our payloads are always drawn below the driver node */ + subgraph cluster_driver { + fillcolor = grey; + style = filled; + edge [dir=none]; + driver -> payload1; + driver -> payload2 [penwidth=3]; + edge [dir=""]; + } + + /* Driver malloc references */ + edge [style=dashed]; + driver -> port1; + driver -> port2; + driver -> port3:e; + driver -> port4 [color=grey]; + payload1:s -> port1:e; + payload2:s -> port3:e [penwidth=3]; + edge [style=""]; + + subgraph cluster_topology { + label="Topology Manager"; + labelloc=bottom; + + /* Topology references */ + mstb1 -> {port1, port2}; + port1 -> mstb2; + edge [color=grey]; + port2 -> mstb3 -> {port3, port4}; + port3 -> mstb4; + edge [color=""]; + + /* Malloc references */ + edge [style=dashed;dir=back]; + mstb1 -> {port1, port2}; + port1 -> mstb2; + port2 -> mstb3 [penwidth=3]; + mstb3 -> port3 [penwidth=3]; + edge [color=grey]; + mstb3 -> port4; + port3 -> mstb4; + } + + mstb1 [label="MSTB #1";style=filled;fillcolor=palegreen]; + mstb2 [label="MSTB #2";style=filled;fillcolor=palegreen]; + mstb3 [label="MSTB #3";style=filled;fillcolor=palegreen;penwidth=3]; + mstb4 [label="MSTB #4";style=filled;fillcolor=grey]; + + port1 [label="Port #1"]; + port2 [label="Port #2";penwidth=5]; + port3 [label="Port #3";penwidth=3]; + port4 [label="Port #4";style=filled;fillcolor=grey]; + + driver [label="DRM driver";style=filled;shape=box;fillcolor=lightblue]; + + payload1 [label="Payload #1";style=filled;shape=box;fillcolor=lightblue]; + payload2 [label="Payload #2";style=filled;shape=box;fillcolor=lightblue;penwidth=3]; +} diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/drivers.rst b/Documentation/gpu/drivers.rst index 7c1672118a73..044a7025477c 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpu/drivers.rst +++ b/Documentation/gpu/drivers.rst @@ -17,6 +17,8 @@ GPU Driver Documentation vkms bridge/dw-hdmi xen-front + afbc + komeda-kms .. only:: subproject and html diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/drm-internals.rst b/Documentation/gpu/drm-internals.rst index 5ee9674fb9e9..3ae23a5454ac 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpu/drm-internals.rst +++ b/Documentation/gpu/drm-internals.rst @@ -39,68 +39,6 @@ sections. Driver Information ------------------ -Driver Features -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ - -Drivers inform the DRM core about their requirements and supported -features by setting appropriate flags in the driver_features field. -Since those flags influence the DRM core behaviour since registration -time, most of them must be set to registering the :c:type:`struct -drm_driver <drm_driver>` instance. - -u32 driver_features; - -DRIVER_USE_AGP - Driver uses AGP interface, the DRM core will manage AGP resources. - -DRIVER_LEGACY - Denote a legacy driver using shadow attach. Don't use. - -DRIVER_KMS_LEGACY_CONTEXT - Used only by nouveau for backwards compatibility with existing userspace. - Don't use. - -DRIVER_PCI_DMA - Driver is capable of PCI DMA, mapping of PCI DMA buffers to - userspace will be enabled. Deprecated. - -DRIVER_SG - Driver can perform scatter/gather DMA, allocation and mapping of - scatter/gather buffers will be enabled. Deprecated. - -DRIVER_HAVE_DMA - Driver supports DMA, the userspace DMA API will be supported. - Deprecated. - -DRIVER_HAVE_IRQ; DRIVER_IRQ_SHARED - DRIVER_HAVE_IRQ indicates whether the driver has an IRQ handler - managed by the DRM Core. The core will support simple IRQ handler - installation when the flag is set. The installation process is - described in ?. - - DRIVER_IRQ_SHARED indicates whether the device & handler support - shared IRQs (note that this is required of PCI drivers). - -DRIVER_GEM - Driver use the GEM memory manager. - -DRIVER_MODESET - Driver supports mode setting interfaces (KMS). - -DRIVER_PRIME - Driver implements DRM PRIME buffer sharing. - -DRIVER_RENDER - Driver supports dedicated render nodes. - -DRIVER_ATOMIC - Driver supports atomic properties. In this case the driver must - implement appropriate obj->atomic_get_property() vfuncs for any - modeset objects with driver specific properties. - -DRIVER_SYNCOBJ - Driver support drm sync objects. - Major, Minor and Patchlevel ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ @@ -143,6 +81,9 @@ Device Instance and Driver Handling .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_drv.c :doc: driver instance overview +.. kernel-doc:: include/drm/drm_device.h + :internal: + .. kernel-doc:: include/drm/drm_drv.h :internal: @@ -230,6 +171,15 @@ Printer .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_print.c :export: +Utilities +--------- + +.. kernel-doc:: include/drm/drm_util.h + :doc: drm utils + +.. kernel-doc:: include/drm/drm_util.h + :internal: + Legacy Support Code =================== diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/drm-kms-helpers.rst b/Documentation/gpu/drm-kms-helpers.rst index b422eb8edf16..17ca7f8bf3d3 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpu/drm-kms-helpers.rst +++ b/Documentation/gpu/drm-kms-helpers.rst @@ -116,8 +116,6 @@ Framebuffer CMA Helper Functions Reference .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_fb_cma_helper.c :export: -.. _drm_bridges: - Framebuffer GEM Helper Reference ================================ @@ -127,6 +125,8 @@ Framebuffer GEM Helper Reference .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_gem_framebuffer_helper.c :export: +.. _drm_bridges: + Bridges ======= @@ -208,18 +208,40 @@ Display Port Dual Mode Adaptor Helper Functions Reference .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_dp_dual_mode_helper.c :export: -Display Port MST Helper Functions Reference -=========================================== +Display Port MST Helpers +======================== + +Overview +-------- .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_dp_mst_topology.c :doc: dp mst helper +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_dp_mst_topology.c + :doc: Branch device and port refcounting + +Functions Reference +------------------- + .. kernel-doc:: include/drm/drm_dp_mst_helper.h :internal: .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_dp_mst_topology.c :export: +Topology Lifetime Internals +--------------------------- + +These functions aren't exported to drivers, but are documented here to help make +the MST topology helpers easier to understand + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_dp_mst_topology.c + :functions: drm_dp_mst_topology_try_get_mstb drm_dp_mst_topology_get_mstb + drm_dp_mst_topology_put_mstb + drm_dp_mst_topology_try_get_port drm_dp_mst_topology_get_port + drm_dp_mst_topology_put_port + drm_dp_mst_get_mstb_malloc drm_dp_mst_put_mstb_malloc + MIPI DSI Helper Functions Reference =================================== @@ -274,18 +296,6 @@ SCDC Helper Functions Reference .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_scdc_helper.c :export: -Rectangle Utilities Reference -============================= - -.. kernel-doc:: include/drm/drm_rect.h - :doc: rect utils - -.. kernel-doc:: include/drm/drm_rect.h - :internal: - -.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_rect.c - :export: - HDMI Infoframes Helper Reference ================================ @@ -300,6 +310,18 @@ libraries and hence is also included here. .. kernel-doc:: drivers/video/hdmi.c :export: +Rectangle Utilities Reference +============================= + +.. kernel-doc:: include/drm/drm_rect.h + :doc: rect utils + +.. kernel-doc:: include/drm/drm_rect.h + :internal: + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_rect.c + :export: + Flip-work Helper Reference ========================== diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/drm-kms.rst b/Documentation/gpu/drm-kms.rst index 75c882e09fee..23a3c986ef6d 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpu/drm-kms.rst +++ b/Documentation/gpu/drm-kms.rst @@ -410,102 +410,6 @@ Encoder Functions Reference .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_encoder.c :export: -KMS Initialization and Cleanup -============================== - -A KMS device is abstracted and exposed as a set of planes, CRTCs, -encoders and connectors. KMS drivers must thus create and initialize all -those objects at load time after initializing mode setting. - -CRTCs (:c:type:`struct drm_crtc <drm_crtc>`) --------------------------------------------- - -A CRTC is an abstraction representing a part of the chip that contains a -pointer to a scanout buffer. Therefore, the number of CRTCs available -determines how many independent scanout buffers can be active at any -given time. The CRTC structure contains several fields to support this: -a pointer to some video memory (abstracted as a frame buffer object), a -display mode, and an (x, y) offset into the video memory to support -panning or configurations where one piece of video memory spans multiple -CRTCs. - -CRTC Initialization -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ - -A KMS device must create and register at least one struct -:c:type:`struct drm_crtc <drm_crtc>` instance. The instance is -allocated and zeroed by the driver, possibly as part of a larger -structure, and registered with a call to :c:func:`drm_crtc_init()` -with a pointer to CRTC functions. - - -Cleanup -------- - -The DRM core manages its objects' lifetime. When an object is not needed -anymore the core calls its destroy function, which must clean up and -free every resource allocated for the object. Every -:c:func:`drm_\*_init()` call must be matched with a corresponding -:c:func:`drm_\*_cleanup()` call to cleanup CRTCs -(:c:func:`drm_crtc_cleanup()`), planes -(:c:func:`drm_plane_cleanup()`), encoders -(:c:func:`drm_encoder_cleanup()`) and connectors -(:c:func:`drm_connector_cleanup()`). Furthermore, connectors that -have been added to sysfs must be removed by a call to -:c:func:`drm_connector_unregister()` before calling -:c:func:`drm_connector_cleanup()`. - -Connectors state change detection must be cleanup up with a call to -:c:func:`drm_kms_helper_poll_fini()`. - -Output discovery and initialization example -------------------------------------------- - -.. code-block:: c - - void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) - { - struct drm_connector *connector; - struct intel_output *intel_output; - - intel_output = kzalloc(sizeof(struct intel_output), GFP_KERNEL); - if (!intel_output) - return; - - connector = &intel_output->base; - drm_connector_init(dev, &intel_output->base, - &intel_crt_connector_funcs, DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_VGA); - - drm_encoder_init(dev, &intel_output->enc, &intel_crt_enc_funcs, - DRM_MODE_ENCODER_DAC); - - drm_connector_attach_encoder(&intel_output->base, - &intel_output->enc); - - /* Set up the DDC bus. */ - intel_output->ddc_bus = intel_i2c_create(dev, GPIOA, "CRTDDC_A"); - if (!intel_output->ddc_bus) { - dev_printk(KERN_ERR, &dev->pdev->dev, "DDC bus registration " - "failed.\n"); - return; - } - - intel_output->type = INTEL_OUTPUT_ANALOG; - connector->interlace_allowed = 0; - connector->doublescan_allowed = 0; - - drm_encoder_helper_add(&intel_output->enc, &intel_crt_helper_funcs); - drm_connector_helper_add(connector, &intel_crt_connector_helper_funcs); - - drm_connector_register(connector); - } - -In the example above (taken from the i915 driver), a CRTC, connector and -encoder combination is created. A device-specific i2c bus is also -created for fetching EDID data and performing monitor detection. Once -the process is complete, the new connector is registered with sysfs to -make its properties available to applications. - KMS Locking =========== diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/drm-uapi.rst b/Documentation/gpu/drm-uapi.rst index a752aa561ea4..c9fd23efd957 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpu/drm-uapi.rst +++ b/Documentation/gpu/drm-uapi.rst @@ -238,6 +238,14 @@ DRM specific patterns. Note that ENOTTY has the slightly unintuitive meaning of Testing and validation ====================== +Testing Requirements for userspace API +-------------------------------------- + +New cross-driver userspace interface extensions, like new IOCTL, new KMS +properties, new files in sysfs or anything else that constitutes an API change +should have driver-agnostic testcases in IGT for that feature, if such a test +can be reasonably made using IGT for the target hardware. + Validating changes with IGT --------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/komeda-kms.rst b/Documentation/gpu/komeda-kms.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b08da1cffecc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/gpu/komeda-kms.rst @@ -0,0 +1,488 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +============================== + drm/komeda Arm display driver +============================== + +The drm/komeda driver supports the Arm display processor D71 and later products, +this document gives a brief overview of driver design: how it works and why +design it like that. + +Overview of D71 like display IPs +================================ + +From D71, Arm display IP begins to adopt a flexible and modularized +architecture. A display pipeline is made up of multiple individual and +functional pipeline stages called components, and every component has some +specific capabilities that can give the flowed pipeline pixel data a +particular processing. + +Typical D71 components: + +Layer +----- +Layer is the first pipeline stage, which prepares the pixel data for the next +stage. It fetches the pixel from memory, decodes it if it's AFBC, rotates the +source image, unpacks or converts YUV pixels to the device internal RGB pixels, +then adjusts the color_space of pixels if needed. + +Scaler +------ +As its name suggests, scaler takes responsibility for scaling, and D71 also +supports image enhancements by scaler. +The usage of scaler is very flexible and can be connected to layer output +for layer scaling, or connected to compositor and scale the whole display +frame and then feed the output data into wb_layer which will then write it +into memory. + +Compositor (compiz) +------------------- +Compositor blends multiple layers or pixel data flows into one single display +frame. its output frame can be fed into post image processor for showing it on +the monitor or fed into wb_layer and written to memory at the same time. +user can also insert a scaler between compositor and wb_layer to down scale +the display frame first and and then write to memory. + +Writeback Layer (wb_layer) +-------------------------- +Writeback layer does the opposite things of Layer, which connects to compiz +and writes the composition result to memory. + +Post image processor (improc) +----------------------------- +Post image processor adjusts frame data like gamma and color space to fit the +requirements of the monitor. + +Timing controller (timing_ctrlr) +-------------------------------- +Final stage of display pipeline, Timing controller is not for the pixel +handling, but only for controlling the display timing. + +Merger +------ +D71 scaler mostly only has the half horizontal input/output capabilities +compared with Layer, like if Layer supports 4K input size, the scaler only can +support 2K input/output in the same time. To achieve the ful frame scaling, D71 +introduces Layer Split, which splits the whole image to two half parts and feeds +them to two Layers A and B, and does the scaling independently. After scaling +the result need to be fed to merger to merge two part images together, and then +output merged result to compiz. + +Splitter +-------- +Similar to Layer Split, but Splitter is used for writeback, which splits the +compiz result to two parts and then feed them to two scalers. + +Possible D71 Pipeline usage +=========================== + +Benefitting from the modularized architecture, D71 pipelines can be easily +adjusted to fit different usages. And D71 has two pipelines, which support two +types of working mode: + +- Dual display mode + Two pipelines work independently and separately to drive two display outputs. + +- Single display mode + Two pipelines work together to drive only one display output. + + On this mode, pipeline_B doesn't work indenpendently, but outputs its + composition result into pipeline_A, and its pixel timing also derived from + pipeline_A.timing_ctrlr. The pipeline_B works just like a "slave" of + pipeline_A(master) + +Single pipeline data flow +------------------------- + +.. kernel-render:: DOT + :alt: Single pipeline digraph + :caption: Single pipeline data flow + + digraph single_ppl { + rankdir=LR; + + subgraph { + "Memory"; + "Monitor"; + } + + subgraph cluster_pipeline { + style=dashed + node [shape=box] + { + node [bgcolor=grey style=dashed] + "Scaler-0"; + "Scaler-1"; + "Scaler-0/1" + } + + node [bgcolor=grey style=filled] + "Layer-0" -> "Scaler-0" + "Layer-1" -> "Scaler-0" + "Layer-2" -> "Scaler-1" + "Layer-3" -> "Scaler-1" + + "Layer-0" -> "Compiz" + "Layer-1" -> "Compiz" + "Layer-2" -> "Compiz" + "Layer-3" -> "Compiz" + "Scaler-0" -> "Compiz" + "Scaler-1" -> "Compiz" + + "Compiz" -> "Scaler-0/1" -> "Wb_layer" + "Compiz" -> "Improc" -> "Timing Controller" + } + + "Wb_layer" -> "Memory" + "Timing Controller" -> "Monitor" + } + +Dual pipeline with Slave enabled +-------------------------------- + +.. kernel-render:: DOT + :alt: Slave pipeline digraph + :caption: Slave pipeline enabled data flow + + digraph slave_ppl { + rankdir=LR; + + subgraph { + "Memory"; + "Monitor"; + } + node [shape=box] + subgraph cluster_pipeline_slave { + style=dashed + label="Slave Pipeline_B" + node [shape=box] + { + node [bgcolor=grey style=dashed] + "Slave.Scaler-0"; + "Slave.Scaler-1"; + } + + node [bgcolor=grey style=filled] + "Slave.Layer-0" -> "Slave.Scaler-0" + "Slave.Layer-1" -> "Slave.Scaler-0" + "Slave.Layer-2" -> "Slave.Scaler-1" + "Slave.Layer-3" -> "Slave.Scaler-1" + + "Slave.Layer-0" -> "Slave.Compiz" + "Slave.Layer-1" -> "Slave.Compiz" + "Slave.Layer-2" -> "Slave.Compiz" + "Slave.Layer-3" -> "Slave.Compiz" + "Slave.Scaler-0" -> "Slave.Compiz" + "Slave.Scaler-1" -> "Slave.Compiz" + } + + subgraph cluster_pipeline_master { + style=dashed + label="Master Pipeline_A" + node [shape=box] + { + node [bgcolor=grey style=dashed] + "Scaler-0"; + "Scaler-1"; + "Scaler-0/1" + } + + node [bgcolor=grey style=filled] + "Layer-0" -> "Scaler-0" + "Layer-1" -> "Scaler-0" + "Layer-2" -> "Scaler-1" + "Layer-3" -> "Scaler-1" + + "Slave.Compiz" -> "Compiz" + "Layer-0" -> "Compiz" + "Layer-1" -> "Compiz" + "Layer-2" -> "Compiz" + "Layer-3" -> "Compiz" + "Scaler-0" -> "Compiz" + "Scaler-1" -> "Compiz" + + "Compiz" -> "Scaler-0/1" -> "Wb_layer" + "Compiz" -> "Improc" -> "Timing Controller" + } + + "Wb_layer" -> "Memory" + "Timing Controller" -> "Monitor" + } + +Sub-pipelines for input and output +---------------------------------- + +A complete display pipeline can be easily divided into three sub-pipelines +according to the in/out usage. + +Layer(input) pipeline +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +.. kernel-render:: DOT + :alt: Layer data digraph + :caption: Layer (input) data flow + + digraph layer_data_flow { + rankdir=LR; + node [shape=box] + + { + node [bgcolor=grey style=dashed] + "Scaler-n"; + } + + "Layer-n" -> "Scaler-n" -> "Compiz" + } + +.. kernel-render:: DOT + :alt: Layer Split digraph + :caption: Layer Split pipeline + + digraph layer_data_flow { + rankdir=LR; + node [shape=box] + + "Layer-0/1" -> "Scaler-0" -> "Merger" + "Layer-2/3" -> "Scaler-1" -> "Merger" + "Merger" -> "Compiz" + } + +Writeback(output) pipeline +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +.. kernel-render:: DOT + :alt: writeback digraph + :caption: Writeback(output) data flow + + digraph writeback_data_flow { + rankdir=LR; + node [shape=box] + + { + node [bgcolor=grey style=dashed] + "Scaler-n"; + } + + "Compiz" -> "Scaler-n" -> "Wb_layer" + } + +.. kernel-render:: DOT + :alt: split writeback digraph + :caption: Writeback(output) Split data flow + + digraph writeback_data_flow { + rankdir=LR; + node [shape=box] + + "Compiz" -> "Splitter" + "Splitter" -> "Scaler-0" -> "Merger" + "Splitter" -> "Scaler-1" -> "Merger" + "Merger" -> "Wb_layer" + } + +Display output pipeline +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +.. kernel-render:: DOT + :alt: display digraph + :caption: display output data flow + + digraph single_ppl { + rankdir=LR; + node [shape=box] + + "Compiz" -> "Improc" -> "Timing Controller" + } + +In the following section we'll see these three sub-pipelines will be handled +by KMS-plane/wb_conn/crtc respectively. + +Komeda Resource abstraction +=========================== + +struct komeda_pipeline/component +-------------------------------- + +To fully utilize and easily access/configure the HW, the driver side also uses +a similar architecture: Pipeline/Component to describe the HW features and +capabilities, and a specific component includes two parts: + +- Data flow controlling. +- Specific component capabilities and features. + +So the driver defines a common header struct komeda_component to describe the +data flow control and all specific components are a subclass of this base +structure. + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/arm/display/komeda/komeda_pipeline.h + :internal: + +Resource discovery and initialization +===================================== + +Pipeline and component are used to describe how to handle the pixel data. We +still need a @struct komeda_dev to describe the whole view of the device, and +the control-abilites of device. + +We have &komeda_dev, &komeda_pipeline, &komeda_component. Now fill devices with +pipelines. Since komeda is not for D71 only but also intended for later products, +of course we’d better share as much as possible between different products. To +achieve this, split the komeda device into two layers: CORE and CHIP. + +- CORE: for common features and capabilities handling. +- CHIP: for register programing and HW specific feature (limitation) handling. + +CORE can access CHIP by three chip function structures: + +- struct komeda_dev_funcs +- struct komeda_pipeline_funcs +- struct komeda_component_funcs + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/arm/display/komeda/komeda_dev.h + :internal: + +Format handling +=============== + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/arm/display/komeda/komeda_format_caps.h + :internal: +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/arm/display/komeda/komeda_framebuffer.h + :internal: + +Attach komeda_dev to DRM-KMS +============================ + +Komeda abstracts resources by pipeline/component, but DRM-KMS uses +crtc/plane/connector. One KMS-obj cannot represent only one single component, +since the requirements of a single KMS object cannot simply be achieved by a +single component, usually that needs multiple components to fit the requirement. +Like set mode, gamma, ctm for KMS all target on CRTC-obj, but komeda needs +compiz, improc and timing_ctrlr to work together to fit these requirements. +And a KMS-Plane may require multiple komeda resources: layer/scaler/compiz. + +So, one KMS-Obj represents a sub-pipeline of komeda resources. + +- Plane: `Layer(input) pipeline`_ +- Wb_connector: `Writeback(output) pipeline`_ +- Crtc: `Display output pipeline`_ + +So, for komeda, we treat KMS crtc/plane/connector as users of pipeline and +component, and at any one time a pipeline/component only can be used by one +user. And pipeline/component will be treated as private object of DRM-KMS; the +state will be managed by drm_atomic_state as well. + +How to map plane to Layer(input) pipeline +----------------------------------------- + +Komeda has multiple Layer input pipelines, see: +- `Single pipeline data flow`_ +- `Dual pipeline with Slave enabled`_ + +The easiest way is binding a plane to a fixed Layer pipeline, but consider the +komeda capabilities: + +- Layer Split, See `Layer(input) pipeline`_ + + Layer_Split is quite complicated feature, which splits a big image into two + parts and handles it by two layers and two scalers individually. But it + imports an edge problem or effect in the middle of the image after the split. + To avoid such a problem, it needs a complicated Split calculation and some + special configurations to the layer and scaler. We'd better hide such HW + related complexity to user mode. + +- Slave pipeline, See `Dual pipeline with Slave enabled`_ + + Since the compiz component doesn't output alpha value, the slave pipeline + only can be used for bottom layers composition. The komeda driver wants to + hide this limitation to the user. The way to do this is to pick a suitable + Layer according to plane_state->zpos. + +So for komeda, the KMS-plane doesn't represent a fixed komeda layer pipeline, +but multiple Layers with same capabilities. Komeda will select one or more +Layers to fit the requirement of one KMS-plane. + +Make component/pipeline to be drm_private_obj +--------------------------------------------- + +Add :c:type:`drm_private_obj` to :c:type:`komeda_component`, :c:type:`komeda_pipeline` + +.. code-block:: c + + struct komeda_component { + struct drm_private_obj obj; + ... + } + + struct komeda_pipeline { + struct drm_private_obj obj; + ... + } + +Tracking component_state/pipeline_state by drm_atomic_state +----------------------------------------------------------- + +Add :c:type:`drm_private_state` and user to :c:type:`komeda_component_state`, +:c:type:`komeda_pipeline_state` + +.. code-block:: c + + struct komeda_component_state { + struct drm_private_state obj; + void *binding_user; + ... + } + + struct komeda_pipeline_state { + struct drm_private_state obj; + struct drm_crtc *crtc; + ... + } + +komeda component validation +--------------------------- + +Komeda has multiple types of components, but the process of validation are +similar, usually including the following steps: + +.. code-block:: c + + int komeda_xxxx_validate(struct komeda_component_xxx xxx_comp, + struct komeda_component_output *input_dflow, + struct drm_plane/crtc/connector *user, + struct drm_plane/crtc/connector_state, *user_state) + { + setup 1: check if component is needed, like the scaler is optional depending + on the user_state; if unneeded, just return, and the caller will + put the data flow into next stage. + Setup 2: check user_state with component features and capabilities to see + if requirements can be met; if not, return fail. + Setup 3: get component_state from drm_atomic_state, and try set to set + user to component; fail if component has been assigned to another + user already. + Setup 3: configure the component_state, like set its input component, + convert user_state to component specific state. + Setup 4: adjust the input_dflow and prepare it for the next stage. + } + +komeda_kms Abstraction +---------------------- + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/arm/display/komeda/komeda_kms.h + :internal: + +komde_kms Functions +------------------- +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/arm/display/komeda/komeda_crtc.c + :internal: +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/arm/display/komeda/komeda_plane.c + :internal: + +Build komeda to be a Linux module driver +======================================== + +Now we have two level devices: + +- komeda_dev: describes the real display hardware. +- komeda_kms_dev: attachs or connects komeda_dev to DRM-KMS. + +All komeda operations are supplied or operated by komeda_dev or komeda_kms_dev, +the module driver is only a simple wrapper to pass the Linux command +(probe/remove/pm) into komeda_dev or komeda_kms_dev. diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/todo.rst b/Documentation/gpu/todo.rst index 14191b64446d..159a4aba49e6 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpu/todo.rst +++ b/Documentation/gpu/todo.rst @@ -82,30 +82,6 @@ events for atomic commits correctly. But fixing these bugs is good anyway. Contact: Daniel Vetter, respective driver maintainers -Better manual-upload support for atomic ---------------------------------------- - -This would be especially useful for tinydrm: - -- Add a struct drm_rect dirty_clip to drm_crtc_state. When duplicating the - crtc state, clear that to the max values, x/y = 0 and w/h = MAX_INT, in - __drm_atomic_helper_crtc_duplicate_state(). - -- Move tinydrm_merge_clips into drm_framebuffer.c, dropping the tinydrm\_ - prefix ofc and using drm_fb\_. drm_framebuffer.c makes sense since this - is a function useful to implement the fb->dirty function. - -- Create a new drm_fb_dirty function which does essentially what e.g. - mipi_dbi_fb_dirty does. You can use e.g. drm_atomic_helper_update_plane as the - template. But instead of doing a simple full-screen plane update, this new - helper also sets crtc_state->dirty_clip to the right coordinates. And of - course it needs to check whether the fb is actually active (and maybe where), - so there's some book-keeping involved. There's also some good fun involved in - scaling things appropriately. For that case we might simply give up and - declare the entire area covered by the plane as dirty. - -Contact: Noralf Trønnes, Daniel Vetter - Fallout from atomic KMS ----------------------- @@ -209,6 +185,36 @@ Would be great to refactor this all into a set of small common helpers. Contact: Daniel Vetter +Generic fbdev defio support +--------------------------- + +The defio support code in the fbdev core has some very specific requirements, +which means drivers need to have a special framebuffer for fbdev. Which prevents +us from using the generic fbdev emulation code everywhere. The main issue is +that it uses some fields in struct page itself, which breaks shmem gem objects +(and other things). + +Possible solution would be to write our own defio mmap code in the drm fbdev +emulation. It would need to fully wrap the existing mmap ops, forwarding +everything after it has done the write-protect/mkwrite trickery: + +- In the drm_fbdev_fb_mmap helper, if we need defio, change the + default page prots to write-protected with something like this:: + + vma->vm_page_prot = pgprot_wrprotect(vma->vm_page_prot); + +- Set the mkwrite and fsync callbacks with similar implementions to the core + fbdev defio stuff. These should all work on plain ptes, they don't actually + require a struct page. uff. These should all work on plain ptes, they don't + actually require a struct page. + +- Track the dirty pages in a separate structure (bitfield with one bit per page + should work) to avoid clobbering struct page. + +Might be good to also have some igt testcases for this. + +Contact: Daniel Vetter, Noralf Tronnes + Put a reservation_object into drm_gem_object -------------------------------------------- @@ -256,6 +262,44 @@ As a reference, take a look at the conversions already completed in drm core. Contact: Sean Paul, respective driver maintainers +Rename CMA helpers to DMA helpers +--------------------------------- + +CMA (standing for contiguous memory allocator) is really a bit an accident of +what these were used for first, a much better name would be DMA helpers. In the +text these should even be called coherent DMA memory helpers (so maybe CDM, but +no one knows what that means) since underneath they just use dma_alloc_coherent. + +Contact: Laurent Pinchart, Daniel Vetter + +Convert direct mode.vrefresh accesses to use drm_mode_vrefresh() +---------------------------------------------------------------- + +drm_display_mode.vrefresh isn't guaranteed to be populated. As such, using it +is risky and has been known to cause div-by-zero bugs. Fortunately, drm core +has helper which will use mode.vrefresh if it's !0 and will calculate it from +the timings when it's 0. + +Use simple search/replace, or (more fun) cocci to replace instances of direct +vrefresh access with a call to the helper. Check out +https://lists.freedesktop.org/archives/dri-devel/2019-January/205186.html for +inspiration. + +Once all instances of vrefresh have been converted, remove vrefresh from +drm_display_mode to avoid future use. + +Contact: Sean Paul + +Remove drm_display_mode.hsync +----------------------------- + +We have drm_mode_hsync() to calculate this from hsync_start/end, since drivers +shouldn't/don't use this, remove this member to avoid any temptations to use it +in the future. If there is any debug code using drm_display_mode.hsync, convert +it to use drm_mode_hsync() instead. + +Contact: Sean Paul + Core refactorings ================= @@ -354,13 +398,6 @@ KMS cleanups Some of these date from the very introduction of KMS in 2008 ... -- drm_mode_config.crtc_idr is misnamed, since it contains all KMS object. Should - be renamed to drm_mode_config.object_idr. - -- drm_display_mode doesn't need to be derived from drm_mode_object. That's - leftovers from older (never merged into upstream) KMS designs where modes - where set using their ID, including support to add/remove modes. - - Make ->funcs and ->helper_private vtables optional. There's a bunch of empty function tables in drivers, but before we can remove them we need to make sure that all the users in helpers and drivers do correctly check for a NULL @@ -432,21 +469,10 @@ those drivers as simple as possible, so lots of room for refactoring: one of the ideas for having a shared dsi/dbi helper, abstracting away the transport details more. -- tinydrm_gem_cma_prime_import_sg_table should probably go into the cma - helpers, as a _vmapped variant (since not every driver needs the vmap). - And tinydrm_gem_cma_free_object could the be merged into - drm_gem_cma_free_object(). - -- tinydrm_fb_create we could move into drm_simple_pipe, only need to add - the fb_create hook to drm_simple_pipe_funcs, which would again simplify a - bunch of things (since it gives you a one-stop vfunc for simple drivers). - - Quick aside: The unregister devm stuff is kinda getting the lifetimes of a drm_device wrong. Doesn't matter, since everyone else gets it wrong too :-) -- also rework the drm_framebuffer_funcs->dirty hook wire-up, see above. - Contact: Noralf Trønnes, Daniel Vetter AMD DC Display Driver diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/vkms.rst b/Documentation/gpu/vkms.rst index 7dfc349a4508..61586fc861bb 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpu/vkms.rst +++ b/Documentation/gpu/vkms.rst @@ -23,17 +23,6 @@ CRC API Improvements - Add igt test to check extreme alpha values i.e. fully opaque and fully transparent (intermediate values are affected by hw-specific rounding modes). -Vblank issues -------------- - -Some IGT test cases are failing. Need to analyze why and fix the issues: - -- plain-flip-fb-recreate -- plain-flip-ts-check -- flip-vs-blocking-wf-vblank -- plain-flip-fb-recreate-interruptible -- flip-vs-wf_vblank-interruptible - Runtime Configuration --------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg b/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg index de91c0db5846..4c3cb8377d74 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Note that the lowest numbered temperature zone trip point corresponds to to the border between the highest and one but highest temperature zones, and vica versa. So the temperature zone trip points 1-4 (or 1-2) go from high temp to low temp! This is how things are implemented in the IC, and the driver -mimicks this. +mimics this. There are 2 modes to specify the speed of the fan, PWM duty cycle (or DC voltage) mode, where 0-100% duty cycle (0-100% of 12V) is specified. And RPM diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 index 7c49feaa79d2..2329c383efe4 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 @@ -3,9 +3,13 @@ Kernel driver lm85 Supported chips: * National Semiconductor LM85 (B and C versions) - Prefix: 'lm85' + Prefix: 'lm85b' or 'lm85c' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM85.html + * Texas Instruments LM96000 + Prefix: 'lm9600' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e + Datasheet: http://www.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/lm96000.pdf * Analog Devices ADM1027 Prefix: 'adm1027' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e @@ -136,6 +140,9 @@ of voltage and temperature channels. SMSC EMC6D103S is similar to EMC6D103, but does not support pwm#_auto_pwm_minctl and temp#_auto_temp_off. +The LM96000 supports additional high frequency PWM modes (22.5 kHz, 24 kHz, +25.7 kHz, 27.7 kHz and 30 kHz), which can be configured on a per-PWM basis. + Hardware Configurations ----------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/fault-codes b/Documentation/i2c/fault-codes index 47c25abb7d52..0cee0fc545b4 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/fault-codes +++ b/Documentation/i2c/fault-codes @@ -112,6 +112,10 @@ EPROTO case is when the length of an SMBus block data response (from the SMBus slave) is outside the range 1-32 bytes. +ESHUTDOWN + Returned when a transfer was requested using an adapter + which is already suspended. + ETIMEDOUT This is returned by drivers when an operation took too much time, and was aborted before it completed. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/gpio-fault-injection b/Documentation/i2c/gpio-fault-injection index a4ce62090fd5..c87f416d53dd 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/gpio-fault-injection +++ b/Documentation/i2c/gpio-fault-injection @@ -1,3 +1,4 @@ +========================= Linux I2C fault injection ========================= @@ -13,6 +14,9 @@ mounted at /sys/kernel/debug. There will be a separate subdirectory per GPIO driven I2C bus. Each subdirectory will contain files to trigger the fault injection. They will be described now along with their intended use-cases. +Wire states +=========== + "scl" ----- @@ -34,10 +38,10 @@ I2C specification version 4, section 3.1.16) using the helpers of the Linux I2C core (see 'struct bus_recovery_info'). However, the bus recovery will not succeed because SDA is still pinned low until you manually release it again with "echo 1 > sda". A test with an automatic release can be done with the -following class of fault injectors. +"incomplete transfers" class of fault injectors. -Introduction to incomplete transfers ------------------------------------- +Incomplete transfers +==================== The following fault injectors create situations where SDA will be held low by a device. Bus recovery should be able to fix these situations. But please note: @@ -79,3 +83,54 @@ This is why bus recovery (up to 9 clock pulses) must either check SDA or send additional STOP conditions to ensure the bus has been released. Otherwise random data will be written to a device! +Lost arbitration +================ + +Here, we want to simulate the condition where the master under test loses the +bus arbitration against another master in a multi-master setup. + +"lose_arbitration" +------------------ + +This file is write only and you need to write the duration of the arbitration +intereference (in µs, maximum is 100ms). The calling process will then sleep +and wait for the next bus clock. The process is interruptible, though. + +Arbitration lost is achieved by waiting for SCL going down by the master under +test and then pulling SDA low for some time. So, the I2C address sent out +should be corrupted and that should be detected properly. That means that the +address sent out should have a lot of '1' bits to be able to detect corruption. +There doesn't need to be a device at this address because arbitration lost +should be detected beforehand. Also note, that SCL going down is monitored +using interrupts, so the interrupt latency might cause the first bits to be not +corrupted. A good starting point for using this fault injector on an otherwise +idle bus is: + +# echo 200 > lose_arbitration & +# i2cget -y <bus_to_test> 0x3f + +Panic during transfer +===================== + +This fault injector will create a Kernel panic once the master under test +started a transfer. This usually means that the state machine of the bus master +driver will be ungracefully interrupted and the bus may end up in an unusual +state. Use this to check if your shutdown/reboot/boot code can handle this +scenario. + +"inject_panic" +-------------- + +This file is write only and you need to write the delay between the detected +start of a transmission and the induced Kernel panic (in µs, maximum is 100ms). +The calling process will then sleep and wait for the next bus clock. The +process is interruptible, though. + +Start of a transfer is detected by waiting for SCL going down by the master +under test. A good starting point for using this fault injector is: + +# echo 0 > inject_panic & +# i2cget -y <bus_to_test> <some_address> + +Note that there doesn't need to be a device listening to the address you are +using. Results may vary depending on that, though. diff --git a/Documentation/index.rst b/Documentation/index.rst index c858c2e66e36..80a421cb935e 100644 --- a/Documentation/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/index.rst @@ -90,6 +90,7 @@ needed). filesystems/index vm/index bpf/index + misc-devices/index Architecture-specific documentation ----------------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/infiniband/user_verbs.txt b/Documentation/infiniband/user_verbs.txt index df049b9f5b6e..47ebf2f80b2b 100644 --- a/Documentation/infiniband/user_verbs.txt +++ b/Documentation/infiniband/user_verbs.txt @@ -46,11 +46,11 @@ Memory pinning I/O targets be kept resident at the same physical address. The ib_uverbs module manages pinning and unpinning memory regions via get_user_pages() and put_page() calls. It also accounts for the - amount of memory pinned in the process's locked_vm, and checks that + amount of memory pinned in the process's pinned_vm, and checks that unprivileged processes do not exceed their RLIMIT_MEMLOCK limit. Pages that are pinned multiple times are counted each time they are - pinned, so the value of locked_vm may be an overestimate of the + pinned, so the value of pinned_vm may be an overestimate of the number of pages pinned by a process. /dev files diff --git a/Documentation/input/devices/xpad.rst b/Documentation/input/devices/xpad.rst index b8bd65962dd8..173c2acda9fd 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/devices/xpad.rst +++ b/Documentation/input/devices/xpad.rst @@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ References .. [1] http://euc.jp/periphs/xbox-controller.ja.html (ITO Takayuki) .. [2] http://xpad.xbox-scene.com/ .. [3] http://www.markosweb.com/www/xboxhackz.com/ -.. [4] http://lxr.free-electrons.com/ident?i=xpad_device +.. [4] https://elixir.bootlin.com/linux/latest/ident/xpad_device Historic Edits diff --git a/Documentation/interconnect/interconnect.rst b/Documentation/interconnect/interconnect.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b8107dcc4cd3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/interconnect/interconnect.rst @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +===================================== +GENERIC SYSTEM INTERCONNECT SUBSYSTEM +===================================== + +Introduction +------------ + +This framework is designed to provide a standard kernel interface to control +the settings of the interconnects on an SoC. These settings can be throughput, +latency and priority between multiple interconnected devices or functional +blocks. This can be controlled dynamically in order to save power or provide +maximum performance. + +The interconnect bus is hardware with configurable parameters, which can be +set on a data path according to the requests received from various drivers. +An example of interconnect buses are the interconnects between various +components or functional blocks in chipsets. There can be multiple interconnects +on an SoC that can be multi-tiered. + +Below is a simplified diagram of a real-world SoC interconnect bus topology. + +:: + + +----------------+ +----------------+ + | HW Accelerator |--->| M NoC |<---------------+ + +----------------+ +----------------+ | + | | +------------+ + +-----+ +-------------+ V +------+ | | + | DDR | | +--------+ | PCIe | | | + +-----+ | | Slaves | +------+ | | + ^ ^ | +--------+ | | C NoC | + | | V V | | + +------------------+ +------------------------+ | | +-----+ + | |-->| |-->| |-->| CPU | + | |-->| |<--| | +-----+ + | Mem NoC | | S NoC | +------------+ + | |<--| |---------+ | + | |<--| |<------+ | | +--------+ + +------------------+ +------------------------+ | | +-->| Slaves | + ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ | | +--------+ + | | | | | | V + +------+ | +-----+ +-----+ +---------+ +----------------+ +--------+ + | CPUs | | | GPU | | DSP | | Masters |-->| P NoC |-->| Slaves | + +------+ | +-----+ +-----+ +---------+ +----------------+ +--------+ + | + +-------+ + | Modem | + +-------+ + +Terminology +----------- + +Interconnect provider is the software definition of the interconnect hardware. +The interconnect providers on the above diagram are M NoC, S NoC, C NoC, P NoC +and Mem NoC. + +Interconnect node is the software definition of the interconnect hardware +port. Each interconnect provider consists of multiple interconnect nodes, +which are connected to other SoC components including other interconnect +providers. The point on the diagram where the CPUs connect to the memory is +called an interconnect node, which belongs to the Mem NoC interconnect provider. + +Interconnect endpoints are the first or the last element of the path. Every +endpoint is a node, but not every node is an endpoint. + +Interconnect path is everything between two endpoints including all the nodes +that have to be traversed to reach from a source to destination node. It may +include multiple master-slave pairs across several interconnect providers. + +Interconnect consumers are the entities which make use of the data paths exposed +by the providers. The consumers send requests to providers requesting various +throughput, latency and priority. Usually the consumers are device drivers, that +send request based on their needs. An example for a consumer is a video decoder +that supports various formats and image sizes. + +Interconnect providers +---------------------- + +Interconnect provider is an entity that implements methods to initialize and +configure interconnect bus hardware. The interconnect provider drivers should +be registered with the interconnect provider core. + +.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/interconnect-provider.h + +Interconnect consumers +---------------------- + +Interconnect consumers are the clients which use the interconnect APIs to +get paths between endpoints and set their bandwidth/latency/QoS requirements +for these interconnect paths. + +.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/interconnect.h diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt index c9e3d93e7a89..8a3830b39c7d 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt @@ -232,17 +232,12 @@ KBUILD_LDS -------------------------------------------------- The linker script with full path. Assigned by the top-level Makefile. -KBUILD_VMLINUX_INIT +KBUILD_VMLINUX_OBJS -------------------------------------------------- -All object files for the init (first) part of vmlinux. -Files specified with KBUILD_VMLINUX_INIT are linked first. - -KBUILD_VMLINUX_MAIN --------------------------------------------------- -All object files for the main part of vmlinux. +All object files for vmlinux. They are linked to vmlinux in the same +order as listed in KBUILD_VMLINUX_OBJS. KBUILD_VMLINUX_LIBS -------------------------------------------------- -All .a "lib" files for vmlinux. -KBUILD_VMLINUX_INIT, KBUILD_VMLINUX_MAIN, and KBUILD_VMLINUX_LIBS together -specify all the object files used to link vmlinux. +All .a "lib" files for vmlinux. KBUILD_VMLINUX_OBJS and KBUILD_VMLINUX_LIBS +together specify all the object files used to link vmlinux. diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt index bf28c47bfd72..f124be6e4c3a 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt @@ -154,13 +154,8 @@ more details, with real examples. Kbuild compiles all the $(obj-y) files. It then calls "$(AR) rcSTP" to merge these files into one built-in.a file. - This is a thin archive without a symbol table, which makes it - unsuitable as a linker input. - - The scripts/link-vmlinux.sh script later makes an aggregate - built-in.a with "${AR} rcsTP", which creates the thin archive - with a symbol table and an index, making it a valid input for - the final vmlinux link passes. + This is a thin archive without a symbol table. It will be later + linked into vmlinux by scripts/link-vmlinux.sh The order of files in $(obj-y) is significant. Duplicates in the lists are allowed: the first instance will be linked into @@ -504,23 +499,6 @@ more details, with real examples. In the above example, -Wno-unused-but-set-variable will be added to KBUILD_CFLAGS only if gcc really accepts it. - cc-version - cc-version returns a numerical version of the $(CC) compiler version. - The format is <major><minor> where both are two digits. So for example - gcc 3.41 would return 0341. - cc-version is useful when a specific $(CC) version is faulty in one - area, for example -mregparm=3 was broken in some gcc versions - even though the option was accepted by gcc. - - Example: - #arch/x86/Makefile - cflags-y += $(shell \ - if [ $(cc-version) -ge 0300 ] ; then \ - echo "-mregparm=3"; fi ;) - - In the above example, -mregparm=3 is only used for gcc version greater - than or equal to gcc 3.0. - cc-ifversion cc-ifversion tests the version of $(CC) and equals the fourth parameter if version expression is true, or the fifth (if given) if the version diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt index 3fb39e0116b4..80295c613e37 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ executed to make module versioning work. make -C $KDIR M=$PWD bar.lst make -C $KDIR M=$PWD baz.o make -C $KDIR M=$PWD foo.ko - make -C $KDIR M=$PWD / + make -C $KDIR M=$PWD ./ === 3. Creating a Kbuild File for an External Module diff --git a/Documentation/kdump/vmcoreinfo.txt b/Documentation/kdump/vmcoreinfo.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..bb94a4bd597a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/kdump/vmcoreinfo.txt @@ -0,0 +1,495 @@ +================================================================ + VMCOREINFO +================================================================ + +=========== +What is it? +=========== + +VMCOREINFO is a special ELF note section. It contains various +information from the kernel like structure size, page size, symbol +values, field offsets, etc. These data are packed into an ELF note +section and used by user-space tools like crash and makedumpfile to +analyze a kernel's memory layout. + +================ +Common variables +================ + +init_uts_ns.name.release +------------------------ + +The version of the Linux kernel. Used to find the corresponding source +code from which the kernel has been built. For example, crash uses it to +find the corresponding vmlinux in order to process vmcore. + +PAGE_SIZE +--------- + +The size of a page. It is the smallest unit of data used by the memory +management facilities. It is usually 4096 bytes of size and a page is +aligned on 4096 bytes. Used for computing page addresses. + +init_uts_ns +----------- + +The UTS namespace which is used to isolate two specific elements of the +system that relate to the uname(2) system call. It is named after the +data structure used to store information returned by the uname(2) system +call. + +User-space tools can get the kernel name, host name, kernel release +number, kernel version, architecture name and OS type from it. + +node_online_map +--------------- + +An array node_states[N_ONLINE] which represents the set of online nodes +in a system, one bit position per node number. Used to keep track of +which nodes are in the system and online. + +swapper_pg_dir +------------- + +The global page directory pointer of the kernel. Used to translate +virtual to physical addresses. + +_stext +------ + +Defines the beginning of the text section. In general, _stext indicates +the kernel start address. Used to convert a virtual address from the +direct kernel map to a physical address. + +vmap_area_list +-------------- + +Stores the virtual area list. makedumpfile gets the vmalloc start value +from this variable and its value is necessary for vmalloc translation. + +mem_map +------- + +Physical addresses are translated to struct pages by treating them as +an index into the mem_map array. Right-shifting a physical address +PAGE_SHIFT bits converts it into a page frame number which is an index +into that mem_map array. + +Used to map an address to the corresponding struct page. + +contig_page_data +---------------- + +Makedumpfile gets the pglist_data structure from this symbol, which is +used to describe the memory layout. + +User-space tools use this to exclude free pages when dumping memory. + +mem_section|(mem_section, NR_SECTION_ROOTS)|(mem_section, section_mem_map) +-------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +The address of the mem_section array, its length, structure size, and +the section_mem_map offset. + +It exists in the sparse memory mapping model, and it is also somewhat +similar to the mem_map variable, both of them are used to translate an +address. + +page +---- + +The size of a page structure. struct page is an important data structure +and it is widely used to compute contiguous memory. + +pglist_data +----------- + +The size of a pglist_data structure. This value is used to check if the +pglist_data structure is valid. It is also used for checking the memory +type. + +zone +---- + +The size of a zone structure. This value is used to check if the zone +structure has been found. It is also used for excluding free pages. + +free_area +--------- + +The size of a free_area structure. It indicates whether the free_area +structure is valid or not. Useful when excluding free pages. + +list_head +--------- + +The size of a list_head structure. Used when iterating lists in a +post-mortem analysis session. + +nodemask_t +---------- + +The size of a nodemask_t type. Used to compute the number of online +nodes. + +(page, flags|_refcount|mapping|lru|_mapcount|private|compound_dtor| + compound_order|compound_head) +------------------------------------------------------------------- + +User-space tools compute their values based on the offset of these +variables. The variables are used when excluding unnecessary pages. + +(pglist_data, node_zones|nr_zones|node_mem_map|node_start_pfn|node_ + spanned_pages|node_id) +------------------------------------------------------------------- + +On NUMA machines, each NUMA node has a pg_data_t to describe its memory +layout. On UMA machines there is a single pglist_data which describes the +whole memory. + +These values are used to check the memory type and to compute the +virtual address for memory map. + +(zone, free_area|vm_stat|spanned_pages) +--------------------------------------- + +Each node is divided into a number of blocks called zones which +represent ranges within memory. A zone is described by a structure zone. + +User-space tools compute required values based on the offset of these +variables. + +(free_area, free_list) +---------------------- + +Offset of the free_list's member. This value is used to compute the number +of free pages. + +Each zone has a free_area structure array called free_area[MAX_ORDER]. +The free_list represents a linked list of free page blocks. + +(list_head, next|prev) +---------------------- + +Offsets of the list_head's members. list_head is used to define a +circular linked list. User-space tools need these in order to traverse +lists. + +(vmap_area, va_start|list) +-------------------------- + +Offsets of the vmap_area's members. They carry vmalloc-specific +information. Makedumpfile gets the start address of the vmalloc region +from this. + +(zone.free_area, MAX_ORDER) +--------------------------- + +Free areas descriptor. User-space tools use this value to iterate the +free_area ranges. MAX_ORDER is used by the zone buddy allocator. + +log_first_idx +------------- + +Index of the first record stored in the buffer log_buf. Used by +user-space tools to read the strings in the log_buf. + +log_buf +------- + +Console output is written to the ring buffer log_buf at index +log_first_idx. Used to get the kernel log. + +log_buf_len +----------- + +log_buf's length. + +clear_idx +--------- + +The index that the next printk() record to read after the last clear +command. It indicates the first record after the last SYSLOG_ACTION +_CLEAR, like issued by 'dmesg -c'. Used by user-space tools to dump +the dmesg log. + +log_next_idx +------------ + +The index of the next record to store in the buffer log_buf. Used to +compute the index of the current buffer position. + +printk_log +---------- + +The size of a structure printk_log. Used to compute the size of +messages, and extract dmesg log. It encapsulates header information for +log_buf, such as timestamp, syslog level, etc. + +(printk_log, ts_nsec|len|text_len|dict_len) +------------------------------------------- + +It represents field offsets in struct printk_log. User space tools +parse it and check whether the values of printk_log's members have been +changed. + +(free_area.free_list, MIGRATE_TYPES) +------------------------------------ + +The number of migrate types for pages. The free_list is described by the +array. Used by tools to compute the number of free pages. + +NR_FREE_PAGES +------------- + +On linux-2.6.21 or later, the number of free pages is in +vm_stat[NR_FREE_PAGES]. Used to get the number of free pages. + +PG_lru|PG_private|PG_swapcache|PG_swapbacked|PG_slab|PG_hwpoision +|PG_head_mask|PAGE_BUDDY_MAPCOUNT_VALUE(~PG_buddy) +|PAGE_OFFLINE_MAPCOUNT_VALUE(~PG_offline) +----------------------------------------------------------------- + +Page attributes. These flags are used to filter various unnecessary for +dumping pages. + +HUGETLB_PAGE_DTOR +----------------- + +The HUGETLB_PAGE_DTOR flag denotes hugetlbfs pages. Makedumpfile +excludes these pages. + +====== +x86_64 +====== + +phys_base +--------- + +Used to convert the virtual address of an exported kernel symbol to its +corresponding physical address. + +init_top_pgt +------------ + +Used to walk through the whole page table and convert virtual addresses +to physical addresses. The init_top_pgt is somewhat similar to +swapper_pg_dir, but it is only used in x86_64. + +pgtable_l5_enabled +------------------ + +User-space tools need to know whether the crash kernel was in 5-level +paging mode. + +node_data +--------- + +This is a struct pglist_data array and stores all NUMA nodes +information. Makedumpfile gets the pglist_data structure from it. + +(node_data, MAX_NUMNODES) +------------------------- + +The maximum number of nodes in system. + +KERNELOFFSET +------------ + +The kernel randomization offset. Used to compute the page offset. If +KASLR is disabled, this value is zero. + +KERNEL_IMAGE_SIZE +----------------- + +Currently unused by Makedumpfile. Used to compute the module virtual +address by Crash. + +sme_mask +-------- + +AMD-specific with SME support: it indicates the secure memory encryption +mask. Makedumpfile tools need to know whether the crash kernel was +encrypted. If SME is enabled in the first kernel, the crash kernel's +page table entries (pgd/pud/pmd/pte) contain the memory encryption +mask. This is used to remove the SME mask and obtain the true physical +address. + +Currently, sme_mask stores the value of the C-bit position. If needed, +additional SME-relevant info can be placed in that variable. + +For example: +[ misc ][ enc bit ][ other misc SME info ] +0000_0000_0000_0000_1000_0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_..._0000 +63 59 55 51 47 43 39 35 31 27 ... 3 + +====== +x86_32 +====== + +X86_PAE +------- + +Denotes whether physical address extensions are enabled. It has the cost +of a higher page table lookup overhead, and also consumes more page +table space per process. Used to check whether PAE was enabled in the +crash kernel when converting virtual addresses to physical addresses. + +==== +ia64 +==== + +pgdat_list|(pgdat_list, MAX_NUMNODES) +------------------------------------- + +pg_data_t array storing all NUMA nodes information. MAX_NUMNODES +indicates the number of the nodes. + +node_memblk|(node_memblk, NR_NODE_MEMBLKS) +------------------------------------------ + +List of node memory chunks. Filled when parsing the SRAT table to obtain +information about memory nodes. NR_NODE_MEMBLKS indicates the number of +node memory chunks. + +These values are used to compute the number of nodes the crashed kernel used. + +node_memblk_s|(node_memblk_s, start_paddr)|(node_memblk_s, size) +---------------------------------------------------------------- + +The size of a struct node_memblk_s and the offsets of the +node_memblk_s's members. Used to compute the number of nodes. + +PGTABLE_3|PGTABLE_4 +------------------- + +User-space tools need to know whether the crash kernel was in 3-level or +4-level paging mode. Used to distinguish the page table. + +===== +ARM64 +===== + +VA_BITS +------- + +The maximum number of bits for virtual addresses. Used to compute the +virtual memory ranges. + +kimage_voffset +-------------- + +The offset between the kernel virtual and physical mappings. Used to +translate virtual to physical addresses. + +PHYS_OFFSET +----------- + +Indicates the physical address of the start of memory. Similar to +kimage_voffset, which is used to translate virtual to physical +addresses. + +KERNELOFFSET +------------ + +The kernel randomization offset. Used to compute the page offset. If +KASLR is disabled, this value is zero. + +==== +arm +==== + +ARM_LPAE +-------- + +It indicates whether the crash kernel supports large physical address +extensions. Used to translate virtual to physical addresses. + +==== +s390 +==== + +lowcore_ptr +---------- + +An array with a pointer to the lowcore of every CPU. Used to print the +psw and all registers information. + +high_memory +----------- + +Used to get the vmalloc_start address from the high_memory symbol. + +(lowcore_ptr, NR_CPUS) +---------------------- + +The maximum number of CPUs. + +======= +powerpc +======= + + +node_data|(node_data, MAX_NUMNODES) +----------------------------------- + +See above. + +contig_page_data +---------------- + +See above. + +vmemmap_list +------------ + +The vmemmap_list maintains the entire vmemmap physical mapping. Used +to get vmemmap list count and populated vmemmap regions info. If the +vmemmap address translation information is stored in the crash kernel, +it is used to translate vmemmap kernel virtual addresses. + +mmu_vmemmap_psize +----------------- + +The size of a page. Used to translate virtual to physical addresses. + +mmu_psize_defs +-------------- + +Page size definitions, i.e. 4k, 64k, or 16M. + +Used to make vtop translations. + +vmemmap_backing|(vmemmap_backing, list)|(vmemmap_backing, phys)| +(vmemmap_backing, virt_addr) +---------------------------------------------------------------- + +The vmemmap virtual address space management does not have a traditional +page table to track which virtual struct pages are backed by a physical +mapping. The virtual to physical mappings are tracked in a simple linked +list format. + +User-space tools need to know the offset of list, phys and virt_addr +when computing the count of vmemmap regions. + +mmu_psize_def|(mmu_psize_def, shift) +------------------------------------ + +The size of a struct mmu_psize_def and the offset of mmu_psize_def's +member. + +Used in vtop translations. + +== +sh +== + +node_data|(node_data, MAX_NUMNODES) +----------------------------------- + +See above. + +X2TLB +----- + +Indicates whether the crashed kernel enabled SH extended mode. diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/lg-laptop.rst b/Documentation/laptops/lg-laptop.rst index e486fe7ddc35..aa503ee9b3bc 100644 --- a/Documentation/laptops/lg-laptop.rst +++ b/Documentation/laptops/lg-laptop.rst @@ -1,4 +1,5 @@ .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ + LG Gram laptop extra features ============================= @@ -9,6 +10,7 @@ Hotkeys ------- The following FN keys are ignored by the kernel without this driver: + - FN-F1 (LG control panel) - Generates F15 - FN-F5 (Touchpad toggle) - Generates F13 - FN-F6 (Airplane mode) - Generates RFKILL @@ -16,7 +18,7 @@ The following FN keys are ignored by the kernel without this driver: This key also changes keyboard backlight mode. - FN-F9 (Reader mode) - Generates F14 -The rest of the FN key work without a need for a special driver. +The rest of the FN keys work without a need for a special driver. Reader mode diff --git a/Documentation/livepatch/callbacks.txt b/Documentation/livepatch/callbacks.txt index c9776f48e458..182e31d4abce 100644 --- a/Documentation/livepatch/callbacks.txt +++ b/Documentation/livepatch/callbacks.txt @@ -118,488 +118,9 @@ similar change to their hw_features value. (Client functions of the value may need to be updated accordingly.) -Test cases -========== - -What follows is not an exhaustive test suite of every possible livepatch -pre/post-(un)patch combination, but a selection that demonstrates a few -important concepts. Each test case uses the kernel modules located in -the samples/livepatch/ and assumes that no livepatches are loaded at the -beginning of the test. - - -Test 1 ------- - -Test a combination of loading a kernel module and a livepatch that -patches a function in the first module. (Un)load the target module -before the livepatch module: - -- load target module -- load livepatch -- disable livepatch -- unload target module -- unload livepatch - -First load a target module: - - % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko - [ 34.475708] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_init - -On livepatch enable, before the livepatch transition starts, pre-patch -callbacks are executed for vmlinux and livepatch_callbacks_mod (those -klp_objects currently loaded). After klp_objects are patched according -to the klp_patch, their post-patch callbacks run and the transition -completes: - - % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko - [ 36.503719] livepatch: enabling patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' - [ 36.504213] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing patching transition - [ 36.504238] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: vmlinux - [ 36.504721] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state - [ 36.505849] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting patching transition - [ 37.727133] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing patching transition - [ 37.727232] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_patch_callback: vmlinux - [ 37.727860] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state - [ 37.728792] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': patching complete - -Similarly, on livepatch disable, pre-patch callbacks run before the -unpatching transition starts. klp_objects are reverted, post-patch -callbacks execute and the transition completes: - - % echo 0 > /sys/kernel/livepatch/livepatch_callbacks_demo/enabled - [ 38.510209] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing unpatching transition - [ 38.510234] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_unpatch_callback: vmlinux - [ 38.510982] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state - [ 38.512209] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting unpatching transition - [ 39.711132] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing unpatching transition - [ 39.711210] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: vmlinux - [ 39.711779] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state - [ 39.712735] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': unpatching complete - - % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko - % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko - [ 42.534183] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_exit - - -Test 2 ------- - -This test is similar to the previous test, but (un)load the livepatch -module before the target kernel module. This tests the livepatch core's -module_coming handler: - -- load livepatch -- load target module -- disable livepatch -- unload livepatch -- unload target module - - -On livepatch enable, only pre/post-patch callbacks are executed for -currently loaded klp_objects, in this case, vmlinux: - - % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko - [ 44.553328] livepatch: enabling patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' - [ 44.553997] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing patching transition - [ 44.554049] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: vmlinux - [ 44.554845] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting patching transition - [ 45.727128] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing patching transition - [ 45.727212] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_patch_callback: vmlinux - [ 45.727961] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': patching complete - -When a targeted module is subsequently loaded, only its pre/post-patch -callbacks are executed: - - % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko - [ 46.560845] livepatch: applying patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' to loading module 'livepatch_callbacks_mod' - [ 46.561988] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_COMING] Full formed, running module_init - [ 46.563452] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_COMING] Full formed, running module_init - [ 46.565495] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_init - -On livepatch disable, all currently loaded klp_objects' (vmlinux and -livepatch_callbacks_mod) pre/post-unpatch callbacks are executed: - - % echo 0 > /sys/kernel/livepatch/livepatch_callbacks_demo/enabled - [ 48.568885] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing unpatching transition - [ 48.568910] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_unpatch_callback: vmlinux - [ 48.569441] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state - [ 48.570502] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting unpatching transition - [ 49.759091] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing unpatching transition - [ 49.759171] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: vmlinux - [ 49.759742] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state - [ 49.760690] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': unpatching complete - - % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko - % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko - [ 52.592283] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_exit - - -Test 3 ------- - -Test loading the livepatch after a targeted kernel module, then unload -the kernel module before disabling the livepatch. This tests the -livepatch core's module_going handler: - -- load target module -- load livepatch -- unload target module -- disable livepatch -- unload livepatch - -First load a target module, then the livepatch: - - % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko - [ 54.607948] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_init - - % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko - [ 56.613919] livepatch: enabling patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' - [ 56.614411] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing patching transition - [ 56.614436] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: vmlinux - [ 56.614818] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state - [ 56.615656] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting patching transition - [ 57.759070] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing patching transition - [ 57.759147] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_patch_callback: vmlinux - [ 57.759621] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state - [ 57.760307] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': patching complete - -When a target module is unloaded, the livepatch is only reverted from -that klp_object (livepatch_callbacks_mod). As such, only its pre and -post-unpatch callbacks are executed when this occurs: - - % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko - [ 58.623409] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_exit - [ 58.623903] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_GOING] Going away - [ 58.624658] livepatch: reverting patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' on unloading module 'livepatch_callbacks_mod' - [ 58.625305] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_GOING] Going away - -When the livepatch is disabled, pre and post-unpatch callbacks are run -for the remaining klp_object, vmlinux: - - % echo 0 > /sys/kernel/livepatch/livepatch_callbacks_demo/enabled - [ 60.638420] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing unpatching transition - [ 60.638444] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_unpatch_callback: vmlinux - [ 60.638996] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting unpatching transition - [ 61.727088] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing unpatching transition - [ 61.727165] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: vmlinux - [ 61.727985] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': unpatching complete - - % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko - - -Test 4 ------- - -This test is similar to the previous test, however the livepatch is -loaded first. This tests the livepatch core's module_coming and -module_going handlers: - -- load livepatch -- load target module -- unload target module -- disable livepatch -- unload livepatch - -First load the livepatch: - - % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko - [ 64.661552] livepatch: enabling patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' - [ 64.662147] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing patching transition - [ 64.662175] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: vmlinux - [ 64.662850] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting patching transition - [ 65.695056] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing patching transition - [ 65.695147] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_patch_callback: vmlinux - [ 65.695561] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': patching complete - -When a targeted kernel module is subsequently loaded, only its -pre/post-patch callbacks are executed: - - % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko - [ 66.669196] livepatch: applying patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' to loading module 'livepatch_callbacks_mod' - [ 66.669882] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_COMING] Full formed, running module_init - [ 66.670744] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_COMING] Full formed, running module_init - [ 66.672873] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_init - -When the target module is unloaded, the livepatch is only reverted from -the livepatch_callbacks_mod klp_object. As such, only pre and -post-unpatch callbacks are executed when this occurs: - - % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko - [ 68.680065] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_exit - [ 68.680688] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_GOING] Going away - [ 68.681452] livepatch: reverting patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' on unloading module 'livepatch_callbacks_mod' - [ 68.682094] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_GOING] Going away - - % echo 0 > /sys/kernel/livepatch/livepatch_callbacks_demo/enabled - [ 70.689225] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing unpatching transition - [ 70.689256] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_unpatch_callback: vmlinux - [ 70.689882] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting unpatching transition - [ 71.711080] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing unpatching transition - [ 71.711481] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: vmlinux - [ 71.711988] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': unpatching complete - - % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko - - -Test 5 ------- - -A simple test of loading a livepatch without one of its patch target -klp_objects ever loaded (livepatch_callbacks_mod): - -- load livepatch -- disable livepatch -- unload livepatch - -Load the livepatch: - - % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko - [ 74.711081] livepatch: enabling patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' - [ 74.711595] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing patching transition - [ 74.711639] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: vmlinux - [ 74.712272] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting patching transition - [ 75.743137] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing patching transition - [ 75.743219] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_patch_callback: vmlinux - [ 75.743867] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': patching complete - -As expected, only pre/post-(un)patch handlers are executed for vmlinux: - - % echo 0 > /sys/kernel/livepatch/livepatch_callbacks_demo/enabled - [ 76.716254] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing unpatching transition - [ 76.716278] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_unpatch_callback: vmlinux - [ 76.716666] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting unpatching transition - [ 77.727089] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing unpatching transition - [ 77.727194] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: vmlinux - [ 77.727907] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': unpatching complete +Other Examples +============== - % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko - - -Test 6 ------- - -Test a scenario where a vmlinux pre-patch callback returns a non-zero -status (ie, failure): - -- load target module -- load livepatch -ENODEV -- unload target module - -First load a target module: - - % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko - [ 80.740520] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_init - -Load the livepatch module, setting its 'pre_patch_ret' value to -19 -(-ENODEV). When its vmlinux pre-patch callback executed, this status -code will propagate back to the module-loading subsystem. The result is -that the insmod command refuses to load the livepatch module: - - % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko pre_patch_ret=-19 - [ 82.747326] livepatch: enabling patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' - [ 82.747743] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing patching transition - [ 82.747767] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: vmlinux - [ 82.748237] livepatch: pre-patch callback failed for object 'vmlinux' - [ 82.748637] livepatch: failed to enable patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' - [ 82.749059] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': canceling transition, going to unpatch - [ 82.749060] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing unpatching transition - [ 82.749868] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': unpatching complete - [ 82.765809] insmod: ERROR: could not insert module samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko: No such device - - % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko - [ 84.774238] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_exit - - -Test 7 ------- - -Similar to the previous test, setup a livepatch such that its vmlinux -pre-patch callback returns success. However, when a targeted kernel -module is later loaded, have the livepatch return a failing status code: - -- load livepatch -- setup -ENODEV -- load target module -- disable livepatch -- unload livepatch - -Load the livepatch, notice vmlinux pre-patch callback succeeds: - - % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko - [ 86.787845] livepatch: enabling patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' - [ 86.788325] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing patching transition - [ 86.788427] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: vmlinux - [ 86.788821] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting patching transition - [ 87.711069] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing patching transition - [ 87.711143] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_patch_callback: vmlinux - [ 87.711886] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': patching complete - -Set a trap so subsequent pre-patch callbacks to this livepatch will -return -ENODEV: - - % echo -19 > /sys/module/livepatch_callbacks_demo/parameters/pre_patch_ret - -The livepatch pre-patch callback for subsequently loaded target modules -will return failure, so the module loader refuses to load the kernel -module. Notice that no post-patch or pre/post-unpatch callbacks are -executed for this klp_object: - - % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko - [ 90.796976] livepatch: applying patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' to loading module 'livepatch_callbacks_mod' - [ 90.797834] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_COMING] Full formed, running module_init - [ 90.798900] livepatch: pre-patch callback failed for object 'livepatch_callbacks_mod' - [ 90.799652] livepatch: patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' failed for module 'livepatch_callbacks_mod', refusing to load module 'livepatch_callbacks_mod' - [ 90.819737] insmod: ERROR: could not insert module samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko: No such device - -However, pre/post-unpatch callbacks run for the vmlinux klp_object: - - % echo 0 > /sys/kernel/livepatch/livepatch_callbacks_demo/enabled - [ 92.823547] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing unpatching transition - [ 92.823573] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_unpatch_callback: vmlinux - [ 92.824331] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting unpatching transition - [ 93.727128] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing unpatching transition - [ 93.727327] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: vmlinux - [ 93.727861] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': unpatching complete - - % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko - - -Test 8 ------- - -Test loading multiple targeted kernel modules. This test-case is -mainly for comparing with the next test-case. - -- load busy target module (0s sleep), -- load livepatch -- load target module -- unload target module -- disable livepatch -- unload livepatch -- unload busy target module - - -Load a target "busy" kernel module which kicks off a worker function -that immediately exits: - - % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-busymod.ko sleep_secs=0 - [ 96.910107] livepatch_callbacks_busymod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_init - [ 96.910600] livepatch_callbacks_busymod: busymod_work_func, sleeping 0 seconds ... - [ 96.913024] livepatch_callbacks_busymod: busymod_work_func exit - -Proceed with loading the livepatch and another ordinary target module, -notice that the post-patch callbacks are executed and the transition -completes quickly: - - % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko - [ 98.917892] livepatch: enabling patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' - [ 98.918426] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing patching transition - [ 98.918453] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: vmlinux - [ 98.918955] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_busymod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state - [ 98.923835] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting patching transition - [ 99.743104] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing patching transition - [ 99.743156] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_patch_callback: vmlinux - [ 99.743679] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_busymod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state - [ 99.744616] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': patching complete - - % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko - [ 100.930955] livepatch: applying patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' to loading module 'livepatch_callbacks_mod' - [ 100.931668] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_COMING] Full formed, running module_init - [ 100.932645] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_COMING] Full formed, running module_init - [ 100.934125] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_init - - % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko - [ 102.942805] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_exit - [ 102.943640] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_GOING] Going away - [ 102.944585] livepatch: reverting patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' on unloading module 'livepatch_callbacks_mod' - [ 102.945455] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_GOING] Going away - - % echo 0 > /sys/kernel/livepatch/livepatch_callbacks_demo/enabled - [ 104.953815] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing unpatching transition - [ 104.953838] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_unpatch_callback: vmlinux - [ 104.954431] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_busymod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state - [ 104.955426] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting unpatching transition - [ 106.719073] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing unpatching transition - [ 106.722633] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: vmlinux - [ 106.723282] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_busymod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state - [ 106.724279] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': unpatching complete - - % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko - % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-busymod.ko - [ 108.975660] livepatch_callbacks_busymod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_exit - - -Test 9 ------- - -A similar test as the previous one, but force the "busy" kernel module -to do longer work. - -The livepatching core will refuse to patch a task that is currently -executing a to-be-patched function -- the consistency model stalls the -current patch transition until this safety-check is met. Test a -scenario where one of a livepatch's target klp_objects sits on such a -function for a long time. Meanwhile, load and unload other target -kernel modules while the livepatch transition is in progress. - -- load busy target module (30s sleep) -- load livepatch -- load target module -- unload target module -- disable livepatch -- unload livepatch -- unload busy target module - - -Load the "busy" kernel module, this time make it do 30 seconds worth of -work: - - % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-busymod.ko sleep_secs=30 - [ 110.993362] livepatch_callbacks_busymod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_init - [ 110.994059] livepatch_callbacks_busymod: busymod_work_func, sleeping 30 seconds ... - -Meanwhile, the livepatch is loaded. Notice that the patch transition -does not complete as the targeted "busy" module is sitting on a -to-be-patched function: - - % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko - [ 113.000309] livepatch: enabling patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' - [ 113.000764] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing patching transition - [ 113.000791] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: vmlinux - [ 113.001289] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_busymod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state - [ 113.005208] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting patching transition - -Load a second target module (this one is an ordinary idle kernel -module). Note that *no* post-patch callbacks will be executed while the -livepatch is still in transition: - - % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko - [ 115.012740] livepatch: applying patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' to loading module 'livepatch_callbacks_mod' - [ 115.013406] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_COMING] Full formed, running module_init - [ 115.015315] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_init - -Request an unload of the simple kernel module. The patch is still -transitioning, so its pre-unpatch callbacks are skipped: - - % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko - [ 117.022626] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_exit - [ 117.023376] livepatch: reverting patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' on unloading module 'livepatch_callbacks_mod' - [ 117.024533] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_GOING] Going away - -Finally the livepatch is disabled. Since none of the patch's -klp_object's post-patch callbacks executed, the remaining klp_object's -pre-unpatch callbacks are skipped: - - % echo 0 > /sys/kernel/livepatch/livepatch_callbacks_demo/enabled - [ 119.035408] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': reversing transition from patching to unpatching - [ 119.035485] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting unpatching transition - [ 119.711166] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing unpatching transition - [ 119.714179] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: vmlinux - [ 119.714653] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_busymod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state - [ 119.715437] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': unpatching complete - - % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko - % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-busymod.ko - [ 141.279111] livepatch_callbacks_busymod: busymod_work_func exit - [ 141.279760] livepatch_callbacks_busymod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_exit +Sample livepatch modules demonstrating the callback API can be found in +samples/livepatch/ directory. These samples were modified for use in +kselftests and can be found in the lib/livepatch directory. diff --git a/Documentation/livepatch/cumulative-patches.txt b/Documentation/livepatch/cumulative-patches.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0012808e8d44 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/livepatch/cumulative-patches.txt @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +=================================== +Atomic Replace & Cumulative Patches +=================================== + +There might be dependencies between livepatches. If multiple patches need +to do different changes to the same function(s) then we need to define +an order in which the patches will be installed. And function implementations +from any newer livepatch must be done on top of the older ones. + +This might become a maintenance nightmare. Especially when more patches +modified the same function in different ways. + +An elegant solution comes with the feature called "Atomic Replace". It allows +creation of so called "Cumulative Patches". They include all wanted changes +from all older livepatches and completely replace them in one transition. + +Usage +----- + +The atomic replace can be enabled by setting "replace" flag in struct klp_patch, +for example: + + static struct klp_patch patch = { + .mod = THIS_MODULE, + .objs = objs, + .replace = true, + }; + +All processes are then migrated to use the code only from the new patch. +Once the transition is finished, all older patches are automatically +disabled. + +Ftrace handlers are transparently removed from functions that are no +longer modified by the new cumulative patch. + +As a result, the livepatch authors might maintain sources only for one +cumulative patch. It helps to keep the patch consistent while adding or +removing various fixes or features. + +Users could keep only the last patch installed on the system after +the transition to has finished. It helps to clearly see what code is +actually in use. Also the livepatch might then be seen as a "normal" +module that modifies the kernel behavior. The only difference is that +it can be updated at runtime without breaking its functionality. + + +Features +-------- + +The atomic replace allows: + + + Atomically revert some functions in a previous patch while + upgrading other functions. + + + Remove eventual performance impact caused by core redirection + for functions that are no longer patched. + + + Decrease user confusion about dependencies between livepatches. + + +Limitations: +------------ + + + Once the operation finishes, there is no straightforward way + to reverse it and restore the replaced patches atomically. + + A good practice is to set .replace flag in any released livepatch. + Then re-adding an older livepatch is equivalent to downgrading + to that patch. This is safe as long as the livepatches do _not_ do + extra modifications in (un)patching callbacks or in the module_init() + or module_exit() functions, see below. + + Also note that the replaced patch can be removed and loaded again + only when the transition was not forced. + + + + Only the (un)patching callbacks from the _new_ cumulative livepatch are + executed. Any callbacks from the replaced patches are ignored. + + In other words, the cumulative patch is responsible for doing any actions + that are necessary to properly replace any older patch. + + As a result, it might be dangerous to replace newer cumulative patches by + older ones. The old livepatches might not provide the necessary callbacks. + + This might be seen as a limitation in some scenarios. But it makes life + easier in many others. Only the new cumulative livepatch knows what + fixes/features are added/removed and what special actions are necessary + for a smooth transition. + + In any case, it would be a nightmare to think about the order of + the various callbacks and their interactions if the callbacks from all + enabled patches were called. + + + + There is no special handling of shadow variables. Livepatch authors + must create their own rules how to pass them from one cumulative + patch to the other. Especially that they should not blindly remove + them in module_exit() functions. + + A good practice might be to remove shadow variables in the post-unpatch + callback. It is called only when the livepatch is properly disabled. diff --git a/Documentation/livepatch/livepatch.txt b/Documentation/livepatch/livepatch.txt index 2d7ed09dbd59..4627b41ff02e 100644 --- a/Documentation/livepatch/livepatch.txt +++ b/Documentation/livepatch/livepatch.txt @@ -12,12 +12,12 @@ Table of Contents: 4. Livepatch module 4.1. New functions 4.2. Metadata - 4.3. Livepatch module handling 5. Livepatch life-cycle - 5.1. Registration + 5.1. Loading 5.2. Enabling - 5.3. Disabling - 5.4. Unregistration + 5.3. Replacing + 5.4. Disabling + 5.5. Removing 6. Sysfs 7. Limitations @@ -143,9 +143,9 @@ without HAVE_RELIABLE_STACKTRACE are not considered fully supported by the kernel livepatching. The /sys/kernel/livepatch/<patch>/transition file shows whether a patch -is in transition. Only a single patch (the topmost patch on the stack) -can be in transition at a given time. A patch can remain in transition -indefinitely, if any of the tasks are stuck in the initial patch state. +is in transition. Only a single patch can be in transition at a given +time. A patch can remain in transition indefinitely, if any of the tasks +are stuck in the initial patch state. A transition can be reversed and effectively canceled by writing the opposite value to the /sys/kernel/livepatch/<patch>/enabled file while @@ -158,12 +158,11 @@ If a patch is in transition, this file shows 0 to indicate the task is unpatched and 1 to indicate it's patched. Otherwise, if no patch is in transition, it shows -1. Any tasks which are blocking the transition can be signaled with SIGSTOP and SIGCONT to force them to change their -patched state. This may be harmful to the system though. -/sys/kernel/livepatch/<patch>/signal attribute provides a better alternative. -Writing 1 to the attribute sends a fake signal to all remaining blocking -tasks. No proper signal is actually delivered (there is no data in signal -pending structures). Tasks are interrupted or woken up, and forced to change -their patched state. +patched state. This may be harmful to the system though. Sending a fake signal +to all remaining blocking tasks is a better alternative. No proper signal is +actually delivered (there is no data in signal pending structures). Tasks are +interrupted or woken up, and forced to change their patched state. The fake +signal is automatically sent every 15 seconds. Administrator can also affect a transition through /sys/kernel/livepatch/<patch>/force attribute. Writing 1 there clears @@ -298,117 +297,110 @@ into three levels: see the "Consistency model" section. -4.3. Livepatch module handling ------------------------------- - -The usual behavior is that the new functions will get used when -the livepatch module is loaded. For this, the module init() function -has to register the patch (struct klp_patch) and enable it. See the -section "Livepatch life-cycle" below for more details about these -two operations. - -Module removal is only safe when there are no users of the underlying -functions. This is the reason why the force feature permanently disables -the removal. The forced tasks entered the functions but we cannot say -that they returned back. Therefore it cannot be decided when the -livepatch module can be safely removed. When the system is successfully -transitioned to a new patch state (patched/unpatched) without being -forced it is guaranteed that no task sleeps or runs in the old code. - - 5. Livepatch life-cycle ======================= -Livepatching defines four basic operations that define the life cycle of each -live patch: registration, enabling, disabling and unregistration. There are -several reasons why it is done this way. +Livepatching can be described by five basic operations: +loading, enabling, replacing, disabling, removing. -First, the patch is applied only when all patched symbols for already -loaded objects are found. The error handling is much easier if this -check is done before particular functions get redirected. +Where the replacing and the disabling operations are mutually +exclusive. They have the same result for the given patch but +not for the system. -Second, it might take some time until the entire system is migrated with -the hybrid consistency model being used. The patch revert might block -the livepatch module removal for too long. Therefore it is useful to -revert the patch using a separate operation that might be called -explicitly. But it does not make sense to remove all information until -the livepatch module is really removed. +5.1. Loading +------------ -5.1. Registration ------------------ +The only reasonable way is to enable the patch when the livepatch kernel +module is being loaded. For this, klp_enable_patch() has to be called +in the module_init() callback. There are two main reasons: -Each patch first has to be registered using klp_register_patch(). This makes -the patch known to the livepatch framework. Also it does some preliminary -computing and checks. +First, only the module has an easy access to the related struct klp_patch. -In particular, the patch is added into the list of known patches. The -addresses of the patched functions are found according to their names. -The special relocations, mentioned in the section "New functions", are -applied. The relevant entries are created under -/sys/kernel/livepatch/<name>. The patch is rejected when any operation -fails. +Second, the error code might be used to refuse loading the module when +the patch cannot get enabled. 5.2. Enabling ------------- -Registered patches might be enabled either by calling klp_enable_patch() or -by writing '1' to /sys/kernel/livepatch/<name>/enabled. The system will -start using the new implementation of the patched functions at this stage. +The livepatch gets enabled by calling klp_enable_patch() from +the module_init() callback. The system will start using the new +implementation of the patched functions at this stage. -When a patch is enabled, livepatch enters into a transition state where -tasks are converging to the patched state. This is indicated by a value -of '1' in /sys/kernel/livepatch/<name>/transition. Once all tasks have -been patched, the 'transition' value changes to '0'. For more -information about this process, see the "Consistency model" section. +First, the addresses of the patched functions are found according to their +names. The special relocations, mentioned in the section "New functions", +are applied. The relevant entries are created under +/sys/kernel/livepatch/<name>. The patch is rejected when any above +operation fails. -If an original function is patched for the first time, a function -specific struct klp_ops is created and an universal ftrace handler is -registered. +Second, livepatch enters into a transition state where tasks are converging +to the patched state. If an original function is patched for the first +time, a function specific struct klp_ops is created and an universal +ftrace handler is registered[*]. This stage is indicated by a value of '1' +in /sys/kernel/livepatch/<name>/transition. For more information about +this process, see the "Consistency model" section. -Functions might be patched multiple times. The ftrace handler is registered -only once for the given function. Further patches just add an entry to the -list (see field `func_stack`) of the struct klp_ops. The last added -entry is chosen by the ftrace handler and becomes the active function -replacement. +Finally, once all tasks have been patched, the 'transition' value changes +to '0'. -Note that the patches might be enabled in a different order than they were -registered. +[*] Note that functions might be patched multiple times. The ftrace handler + is registered only once for a given function. Further patches just add + an entry to the list (see field `func_stack`) of the struct klp_ops. + The right implementation is selected by the ftrace handler, see + the "Consistency model" section. + That said, it is highly recommended to use cumulative livepatches + because they help keeping the consistency of all changes. In this case, + functions might be patched two times only during the transition period. -5.3. Disabling + +5.3. Replacing -------------- -Enabled patches might get disabled either by calling klp_disable_patch() or -by writing '0' to /sys/kernel/livepatch/<name>/enabled. At this stage -either the code from the previously enabled patch or even the original -code gets used. +All enabled patches might get replaced by a cumulative patch that +has the .replace flag set. + +Once the new patch is enabled and the 'transition' finishes then +all the functions (struct klp_func) associated with the replaced +patches are removed from the corresponding struct klp_ops. Also +the ftrace handler is unregistered and the struct klp_ops is +freed when the related function is not modified by the new patch +and func_stack list becomes empty. + +See Documentation/livepatch/cumulative-patches.txt for more details. -When a patch is disabled, livepatch enters into a transition state where -tasks are converging to the unpatched state. This is indicated by a -value of '1' in /sys/kernel/livepatch/<name>/transition. Once all tasks -have been unpatched, the 'transition' value changes to '0'. For more -information about this process, see the "Consistency model" section. -Here all the functions (struct klp_func) associated with the to-be-disabled +5.4. Disabling +-------------- + +Enabled patches might get disabled by writing '0' to +/sys/kernel/livepatch/<name>/enabled. + +First, livepatch enters into a transition state where tasks are converging +to the unpatched state. The system starts using either the code from +the previously enabled patch or even the original one. This stage is +indicated by a value of '1' in /sys/kernel/livepatch/<name>/transition. +For more information about this process, see the "Consistency model" +section. + +Second, once all tasks have been unpatched, the 'transition' value changes +to '0'. All the functions (struct klp_func) associated with the to-be-disabled patch are removed from the corresponding struct klp_ops. The ftrace handler is unregistered and the struct klp_ops is freed when the func_stack list becomes empty. -Patches must be disabled in exactly the reverse order in which they were -enabled. It makes the problem and the implementation much easier. - +Third, the sysfs interface is destroyed. -5.4. Unregistration -------------------- -Disabled patches might be unregistered by calling klp_unregister_patch(). -This can be done only when the patch is disabled and the code is no longer -used. It must be called before the livepatch module gets unloaded. +5.5. Removing +------------- -At this stage, all the relevant sys-fs entries are removed and the patch -is removed from the list of known patches. +Module removal is only safe when there are no users of functions provided +by the module. This is the reason why the force feature permanently +disables the removal. Only when the system is successfully transitioned +to a new patch state (patched/unpatched) without being forced it is +guaranteed that no task sleeps or runs in the old code. 6. Sysfs @@ -418,8 +410,8 @@ Information about the registered patches can be found under /sys/kernel/livepatch. The patches could be enabled and disabled by writing there. -/sys/kernel/livepatch/<patch>/signal and /sys/kernel/livepatch/<patch>/force -attributes allow administrator to affect a patching operation. +/sys/kernel/livepatch/<patch>/force attributes allow administrator to affect a +patching operation. See Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-livepatch for more details. diff --git a/Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.txt b/Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.txt index 49f58a07ee7b..39fae143c9cb 100644 --- a/Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.txt +++ b/Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.txt @@ -45,10 +45,10 @@ When locking rules are violated, these state bits are presented in the locking error messages, inside curlies. A contrived example: modprobe/2287 is trying to acquire lock: - (&sio_locks[i].lock){-.-...}, at: [<c02867fd>] mutex_lock+0x21/0x24 + (&sio_locks[i].lock){-.-.}, at: [<c02867fd>] mutex_lock+0x21/0x24 but task is already holding lock: - (&sio_locks[i].lock){-.-...}, at: [<c02867fd>] mutex_lock+0x21/0x24 + (&sio_locks[i].lock){-.-.}, at: [<c02867fd>] mutex_lock+0x21/0x24 The bit position indicates STATE, STATE-read, for each of the states listed diff --git a/Documentation/lzo.txt b/Documentation/lzo.txt index 6fa6a93d0949..f79934225d8d 100644 --- a/Documentation/lzo.txt +++ b/Documentation/lzo.txt @@ -78,16 +78,34 @@ Description is an implementation design choice independent on the algorithm or encoding. +Versions + +0: Original version +1: LZO-RLE + +Version 1 of LZO implements an extension to encode runs of zeros using run +length encoding. This improves speed for data with many zeros, which is a +common case for zram. This modifies the bitstream in a backwards compatible way +(v1 can correctly decompress v0 compressed data, but v0 cannot read v1 data). + +For maximum compatibility, both versions are available under different names +(lzo and lzo-rle). Differences in the encoding are noted in this document with +e.g.: version 1 only. + Byte sequences ============== First byte encoding:: - 0..17 : follow regular instruction encoding, see below. It is worth - noting that codes 16 and 17 will represent a block copy from - the dictionary which is empty, and that they will always be + 0..16 : follow regular instruction encoding, see below. It is worth + noting that code 16 will represent a block copy from the + dictionary which is empty, and that it will always be invalid at this place. + 17 : bitstream version. If the first byte is 17, the next byte + gives the bitstream version (version 1 only). If the first byte + is not 17, the bitstream version is 0. + 18..21 : copy 0..3 literals state = (byte - 17) = 0..3 [ copy <state> literals ] skip byte @@ -140,6 +158,11 @@ Byte sequences state = S (copy S literals after this block) End of stream is reached if distance == 16384 + In version 1 only, this instruction is also used to encode a run of + zeros if distance = 0xbfff, i.e. H = 1 and the D bits are all 1. + In this case, it is followed by a fourth byte, X. + run length = ((X << 3) | (0 0 0 0 0 L L L)) + 4. + 0 0 1 L L L L L (32..63) Copy of small block within 16kB distance (preferably less than 34B) length = 2 + (L ?: 31 + (zero_bytes * 255) + non_zero_byte) @@ -165,7 +188,9 @@ Authors ======= This document was written by Willy Tarreau <w@1wt.eu> on 2014/07/19 during an - analysis of the decompression code available in Linux 3.16-rc5. The code is - tricky, it is possible that this document contains mistakes or that a few - corner cases were overlooked. In any case, please report any doubt, fix, or - proposed updates to the author(s) so that the document can be updated. + analysis of the decompression code available in Linux 3.16-rc5, and updated + by Dave Rodgman <dave.rodgman@arm.com> on 2018/10/30 to introduce run-length + encoding. The code is tricky, it is possible that this document contains + mistakes or that a few corner cases were overlooked. In any case, please + report any doubt, fix, or proposed updates to the author(s) so that the + document can be updated. diff --git a/Documentation/media/dvb-drivers/dvb-usb.rst b/Documentation/media/dvb-drivers/dvb-usb.rst index 6679191819aa..b2d5d9e62b30 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/dvb-drivers/dvb-usb.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/dvb-drivers/dvb-usb.rst @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ https://linuxtv.org/wiki/index.php/DVB_USB 2004-12-26 - - refactored the dibusb-driver, splitted into separate files + - refactored the dibusb-driver, split into separate files - i2c-probing enabled 2004-12-06 diff --git a/Documentation/media/kapi/dtv-core.rst b/Documentation/media/kapi/dtv-core.rst index 17454a2cf6b0..ac005b46f23e 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/kapi/dtv-core.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/kapi/dtv-core.rst @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ Digital TV devices are implemented by several different drivers: - Frontend drivers that are usually implemented as two separate drivers: - A tuner driver that implements the logic with commands the part of the - hardware with is reponsible to tune into a digital TV transponder or + hardware with is responsible to tune into a digital TV transponder or physical channel. The output of a tuner is usually a baseband or Intermediate Frequency (IF) signal; diff --git a/Documentation/media/kapi/dtv-frontend.rst b/Documentation/media/kapi/dtv-frontend.rst index 8ea64742c7ba..fbc5517c8d5a 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/kapi/dtv-frontend.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/kapi/dtv-frontend.rst @@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ Statistics collect On almost all frontend hardware, the bit and byte counts are stored by the hardware after a certain amount of time or after the total bit/block -counter reaches a certain value (usually programable), for example, on +counter reaches a certain value (usually programmable), for example, on every 1000 ms or after receiving 1,000,000 bits. So, if you read the registers too soon, you'll end by reading the same diff --git a/Documentation/media/kapi/mc-core.rst b/Documentation/media/kapi/mc-core.rst index 0bcfeadbc52d..f930725e0d6b 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/kapi/mc-core.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/kapi/mc-core.rst @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ Drivers initialize entity pads by calling Drivers register entities with a media device by calling :c:func:`media_device_register_entity()` -and unregistred by calling +and unregistered by calling :c:func:`media_device_unregister_entity()`. Interfaces diff --git a/Documentation/media/kapi/v4l2-device.rst b/Documentation/media/kapi/v4l2-device.rst index c4311f0421be..5e25bf182c18 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/kapi/v4l2-device.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/kapi/v4l2-device.rst @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ You can iterate over all registered devices as follows: int err; /* Find driver 'ivtv' on the PCI bus. - pci_bus_type is a global. For USB busses use usb_bus_type. */ + pci_bus_type is a global. For USB buses use usb_bus_type. */ drv = driver_find("ivtv", &pci_bus_type); /* iterate over all ivtv device instances */ err = driver_for_each_device(drv, NULL, p, callback); diff --git a/Documentation/media/kapi/v4l2-intro.rst b/Documentation/media/kapi/v4l2-intro.rst index cea3e263e48b..4d54fa9d7a12 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/kapi/v4l2-intro.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/kapi/v4l2-intro.rst @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ hardware: most devices have multiple ICs, export multiple device nodes in Especially the fact that V4L2 drivers have to setup supporting ICs to do audio/video muxing/encoding/decoding makes it more complex than most. Usually these ICs are connected to the main bridge driver through one or -more I2C busses, but other busses can also be used. Such devices are +more I2C buses, but other buses can also be used. Such devices are called 'sub-devices'. For a long time the framework was limited to the video_device struct for diff --git a/Documentation/media/kapi/v4l2-subdev.rst b/Documentation/media/kapi/v4l2-subdev.rst index be4970909f40..29e07e23f888 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/kapi/v4l2-subdev.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/kapi/v4l2-subdev.rst @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ device data. You also need a way to go from the low-level struct to :c:type:`v4l2_subdev`. For the common i2c_client struct the i2c_set_clientdata() call is used to store -a :c:type:`v4l2_subdev` pointer, for other busses you may have to use other +a :c:type:`v4l2_subdev` pointer, for other buses you may have to use other methods. Bridges might also need to store per-subdev private data, such as a pointer to @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ provides host private data for that purpose that can be accessed with From the bridge driver perspective, you load the sub-device module and somehow obtain the :c:type:`v4l2_subdev` pointer. For i2c devices this is easy: you call -``i2c_get_clientdata()``. For other busses something similar needs to be done. +``i2c_get_clientdata()``. For other buses something similar needs to be done. Helper functions exists for sub-devices on an I2C bus that do most of this tricky work for you. diff --git a/Documentation/media/lirc.h.rst.exceptions b/Documentation/media/lirc.h.rst.exceptions index 379b9e7df5d0..7a8b8ff4f076 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/lirc.h.rst.exceptions +++ b/Documentation/media/lirc.h.rst.exceptions @@ -60,6 +60,9 @@ ignore symbol RC_PROTO_SHARP ignore symbol RC_PROTO_XMP ignore symbol RC_PROTO_CEC ignore symbol RC_PROTO_IMON +ignore symbol RC_PROTO_RCMM12 +ignore symbol RC_PROTO_RCMM24 +ignore symbol RC_PROTO_RCMM32 # Undocumented macros diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio-set-bypass-mode.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio-set-bypass-mode.rst index d537da90acf5..d68f05d48d12 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio-set-bypass-mode.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio-set-bypass-mode.rst @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ Description This ioctl call asks the Audio Device to bypass the Audio decoder and forward the stream without decoding. This mode shall be used if streams -that can’t be handled by the Digial TV system shall be decoded. Dolby +that can’t be handled by the Digital TV system shall be decoded. Dolby DigitalTM streams are automatically forwarded by the Digital TV subsystem if the hardware can handle it. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/ca-set-descr.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/ca-set-descr.rst index 22c8b8f94c7e..d36464ba2317 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/ca-set-descr.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/ca-set-descr.rst @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ Description ----------- CA_SET_DESCR is used for feeding descrambler CA slots with descrambling -keys (refered as control words). +keys (referred as control words). Return Value ------------ diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/dmx-qbuf.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/dmx-qbuf.rst index 9a1d85147c25..9dc845daa59d 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/dmx-qbuf.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/dmx-qbuf.rst @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ the device is closed. Applications call the ``DMX_DQBUF`` ioctl to dequeue a filled (capturing) buffer from the driver's outgoing queue. -They just set the ``index`` field withe the buffer ID to be queued. +They just set the ``index`` field with the buffer ID to be queued. When ``DMX_DQBUF`` is called with a pointer to struct :c:type:`dmx_buffer`, the driver fills the remaining fields or returns an error code. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/dvbproperty.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/dvbproperty.rst index 371c72bb9419..0c4f5598f2be 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/dvbproperty.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/dvbproperty.rst @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ with supports all digital TV delivery systems. struct :c:type:`dvb_frontend_parameters`. 2. Don't use DVB API version 3 calls on hardware with supports - newer standards. Such API provides no suport or a very limited + newer standards. Such API provides no support or a very limited support to new standards and/or new hardware. 3. Nowadays, most frontends support multiple delivery systems. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video_types.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video_types.rst index 2ed8aad84003..479942ce6fb8 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video_types.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video_types.rst @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ If video_blank is set video will be blanked out if the channel is changed or if playback is stopped. Otherwise, the last picture will be displayed. play_state indicates if the video is currently frozen, stopped, or being played back. The stream_source corresponds to the -seleted source for the video stream. It can come either from the +selected source for the video stream. It can come either from the demultiplexer or from memory. The video_format indicates the aspect ratio (one of 4:3 or 16:9) of the currently played video stream. Finally, display_format corresponds to the selected cropping mode in diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst index f8dc85d3939c..9316b8617502 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst @@ -363,7 +363,7 @@ various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects. -You may extract a single document from such a collection, and dispbibute +You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-types.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-types.rst index 8627587b7075..3af6a414b501 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-types.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-types.rst @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Types and flags used to represent the media graph elements * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_PROC_VIDEO_PIXEL_ENC_CONV`` - Video pixel encoding converter. An entity capable of pixel - enconding conversion must have at least one sink pad and one + encoding conversion must have at least one sink pad and one source pad, and convert the encoding of pixels received on its sink pad(s) to a different encoding output on its source pad(s). Pixel encoding conversion includes but isn't limited diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/request-api.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/request-api.rst index 4b25ad03f45a..1ad631e549fe 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/request-api.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/request-api.rst @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ A request must contain at least one buffer, otherwise ``ENOENT`` is returned. A queued request cannot be modified anymore. .. caution:: - For :ref:`memory-to-memory devices <codec>` you can use requests only for + For :ref:`memory-to-memory devices <mem2mem>` you can use requests only for output buffers, not for capture buffers. Attempting to add a capture buffer to a request will result in an ``EACCES`` error. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ if it had just been allocated. Example for a Codec Device -------------------------- -For use-cases such as :ref:`codecs <codec>`, the request API can be used +For use-cases such as :ref:`codecs <mem2mem>`, the request API can be used to associate specific controls to be applied by the driver for the OUTPUT buffer, allowing user-space to queue many such buffers in advance. It can also take advantage of requests' diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/rc/rc-tables.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/rc/rc-tables.rst index cb670d10998b..f460031d8531 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/rc/rc-tables.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/rc/rc-tables.rst @@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ the remote via /dev/input/event devices. - ``KEY_CHANNELDOWN`` - - Decrease channel sequencially + - Decrease channel sequentially - CHANNEL - / CHANNEL DOWN / DOWN @@ -393,7 +393,7 @@ the remote via /dev/input/event devices. - ``KEY_CHANNELUP`` - - Increase channel sequencially + - Increase channel sequentially - CHANNEL + / CHANNEL UP / UP diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/buffer.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/buffer.rst index 86878bb0087f..81ffdcb89057 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/buffer.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/buffer.rst @@ -230,8 +230,7 @@ struct v4l2_buffer * - struct :c:type:`v4l2_timecode` - ``timecode`` - - - When ``type`` is ``V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE`` and the - ``V4L2_BUF_FLAG_TIMECODE`` flag is set in ``flags``, this + - When the ``V4L2_BUF_FLAG_TIMECODE`` flag is set in ``flags``, this structure contains a frame timecode. In :c:type:`V4L2_FIELD_ALTERNATE <v4l2_field>` mode the top and bottom field contain the same timecode. Timecodes are intended to @@ -714,10 +713,10 @@ enum v4l2_memory Timecodes ========= -The struct :c:type:`v4l2_timecode` structure is designed to hold a -:ref:`smpte12m` or similar timecode. (struct -struct :c:type:`timeval` timestamps are stored in struct -:c:type:`v4l2_buffer` field ``timestamp``.) +The :c:type:`v4l2_buffer_timecode` structure is designed to hold a +:ref:`smpte12m` or similar timecode. +(struct :c:type:`timeval` timestamps are stored in the struct +:c:type:`v4l2_buffer` ``timestamp`` field.) .. c:type:: v4l2_timecode diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/common.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/common.rst index 889f2f2632a1..5e87ae24e4b4 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/common.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/common.rst @@ -46,6 +46,17 @@ applicable to all devices. dv-timings control extended-controls + ext-ctrls-camera + ext-ctrls-flash + ext-ctrls-image-source + ext-ctrls-image-process + ext-ctrls-codec + ext-ctrls-jpeg + ext-ctrls-dv + ext-ctrls-rf-tuner + ext-ctrls-fm-tx + ext-ctrls-fm-rx + ext-ctrls-detect format planar-apis selection-api diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/control.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/control.rst index 0d46526b5935..71417bba028c 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/control.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/control.rst @@ -499,7 +499,7 @@ Example: Changing controls .. [#f1] The use of ``V4L2_CID_PRIVATE_BASE`` is problematic because different drivers may use the same ``V4L2_CID_PRIVATE_BASE`` ID for different - controls. This makes it hard to programatically set such controls + controls. This makes it hard to programmatically set such controls since the meaning of the control with that ID is driver dependent. In order to resolve this drivers use unique IDs and the ``V4L2_CID_PRIVATE_BASE`` IDs are mapped to those unique IDs by the diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-effect.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-effect.rst deleted file mode 100644 index b165e2c20910..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-effect.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ -.. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this -.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, -.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software -.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts -.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at -.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst. -.. -.. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections - -.. _effect: - -************************ -Effect Devices Interface -************************ - -.. note:: - This interface has been be suspended from the V4L2 API. - The implementation for such effects should be done - via mem2mem devices. - -A V4L2 video effect device can do image effects, filtering, or combine -two or more images or image streams. For example video transitions or -wipes. Applications send data to be processed and receive the result -data either with :ref:`read() <func-read>` and -:ref:`write() <func-write>` functions, or through the streaming I/O -mechanism. - -[to do] diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-codec.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-mem2mem.rst index b5e017c17834..67a980818dc8 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-codec.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-mem2mem.rst @@ -7,37 +7,36 @@ .. .. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections -.. _codec: +.. _mem2mem: -*************** -Codec Interface -*************** +******************************** +Video Memory-To-Memory Interface +******************************** -A V4L2 codec can compress, decompress, transform, or otherwise convert -video data from one format into another format, in memory. Typically -such devices are memory-to-memory devices (i.e. devices with the -``V4L2_CAP_VIDEO_M2M`` or ``V4L2_CAP_VIDEO_M2M_MPLANE`` capability set). +A V4L2 memory-to-memory device can compress, decompress, transform, or +otherwise convert video data from one format into another format, in memory. +Such memory-to-memory devices set the ``V4L2_CAP_VIDEO_M2M`` or +``V4L2_CAP_VIDEO_M2M_MPLANE`` capability. Examples of memory-to-memory +devices are codecs, scalers, deinterlacers or format converters (i.e. +converting from YUV to RGB). A memory-to-memory video node acts just like a normal video node, but it -supports both output (sending frames from memory to the codec hardware) -and capture (receiving the processed frames from the codec hardware into +supports both output (sending frames from memory to the hardware) +and capture (receiving the processed frames from the hardware into memory) stream I/O. An application will have to setup the stream I/O for both sides and finally call :ref:`VIDIOC_STREAMON <VIDIOC_STREAMON>` -for both capture and output to start the codec. - -Video compression codecs use the MPEG controls to setup their codec -parameters - -.. note:: - - The MPEG controls actually support many more codecs than - just MPEG. See :ref:`mpeg-controls`. +for both capture and output to start the hardware. Memory-to-memory devices function as a shared resource: you can open the video node multiple times, each application setting up their -own codec properties that are local to the file handle, and each can use +own properties that are local to the file handle, and each can use it independently from the others. The driver will arbitrate access to -the codec and reprogram it whenever another file handler gets access. +the hardware and reprogram it whenever another file handler gets access. This is different from the usual video node behavior where the video properties are global to the device (i.e. changing something through one file handle is visible through another file handle). + +One of the most common memory-to-memory device is the codec. Codecs +are more complicated than most and require additional setup for +their codec parameters. This is done through codec controls. +See :ref:`mpeg-controls`. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-teletext.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-teletext.rst deleted file mode 100644 index 35e8c4b35458..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-teletext.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ -.. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this -.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, -.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software -.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts -.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at -.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst. -.. -.. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections - -.. _ttx: - -****************** -Teletext Interface -****************** - -This interface was aimed at devices receiving and demodulating Teletext -data [:ref:`ets300706`, :ref:`itu653`], evaluating the Teletext -packages and storing formatted pages in cache memory. Such devices are -usually implemented as microcontrollers with serial interface -(I\ :sup:`2`\ C) and could be found on old TV cards, dedicated Teletext -decoding cards and home-brew devices connected to the PC parallel port. - -The Teletext API was designed by Martin Buck. It was defined in the -kernel header file ``linux/videotext.h``, the specification is available -from -`ftp://ftp.gwdg.de/pub/linux/misc/videotext/ <ftp://ftp.gwdg.de/pub/linux/misc/videotext/>`__. -(Videotext is the name of the German public television Teletext -service.) - -Eventually the Teletext API was integrated into the V4L API with -character device file names ``/dev/vtx0`` to ``/dev/vtx31``, device -major number 81, minor numbers 192 to 223. - -However, teletext decoders were quickly replaced by more generic VBI -demodulators and those dedicated teletext decoders no longer exist. For -many years the vtx devices were still around, even though nobody used -them. So the decision was made to finally remove support for the -Teletext API in kernel 2.6.37. - -Modern devices all use the :ref:`raw <raw-vbi>` or -:ref:`sliced` VBI API. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/devices.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/devices.rst index 5dbe9d13b6e6..07f8d047662b 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/devices.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/devices.rst @@ -21,11 +21,9 @@ Interfaces dev-overlay dev-output dev-osd - dev-codec - dev-effect + dev-mem2mem dev-raw-vbi dev-sliced-vbi - dev-teletext dev-radio dev-rds dev-sdr diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-camera.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-camera.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d3a553cd86c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-camera.rst @@ -0,0 +1,508 @@ +.. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this +.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, +.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software +.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts +.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at +.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst. +.. +.. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections + +.. _camera-controls: + +************************ +Camera Control Reference +************************ + +The Camera class includes controls for mechanical (or equivalent +digital) features of a device such as controllable lenses or sensors. + + +.. _camera-control-id: + +Camera Control IDs +================== + +``V4L2_CID_CAMERA_CLASS (class)`` + The Camera class descriptor. Calling + :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will + return a description of this control class. + +.. _v4l2-exposure-auto-type: + +``V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_AUTO`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_exposure_auto_type - + Enables automatic adjustments of the exposure time and/or iris + aperture. The effect of manual changes of the exposure time or iris + aperture while these features are enabled is undefined, drivers + should ignore such requests. Possible values are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_AUTO`` + - Automatic exposure time, automatic iris aperture. + * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_MANUAL`` + - Manual exposure time, manual iris. + * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_SHUTTER_PRIORITY`` + - Manual exposure time, auto iris. + * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_APERTURE_PRIORITY`` + - Auto exposure time, manual iris. + + + +``V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_ABSOLUTE (integer)`` + Determines the exposure time of the camera sensor. The exposure time + is limited by the frame interval. Drivers should interpret the + values as 100 µs units, where the value 1 stands for 1/10000th of a + second, 10000 for 1 second and 100000 for 10 seconds. + +``V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_AUTO_PRIORITY (boolean)`` + When ``V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_AUTO`` is set to ``AUTO`` or + ``APERTURE_PRIORITY``, this control determines if the device may + dynamically vary the frame rate. By default this feature is disabled + (0) and the frame rate must remain constant. + +``V4L2_CID_AUTO_EXPOSURE_BIAS (integer menu)`` + Determines the automatic exposure compensation, it is effective only + when ``V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_AUTO`` control is set to ``AUTO``, + ``SHUTTER_PRIORITY`` or ``APERTURE_PRIORITY``. It is expressed in + terms of EV, drivers should interpret the values as 0.001 EV units, + where the value 1000 stands for +1 EV. + + Increasing the exposure compensation value is equivalent to + decreasing the exposure value (EV) and will increase the amount of + light at the image sensor. The camera performs the exposure + compensation by adjusting absolute exposure time and/or aperture. + +.. _v4l2-exposure-metering: + +``V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_METERING`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_exposure_metering - + Determines how the camera measures the amount of light available for + the frame exposure. Possible values are: + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{8.5cm}|p{9.0cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_METERING_AVERAGE`` + - Use the light information coming from the entire frame and average + giving no weighting to any particular portion of the metered area. + * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_METERING_CENTER_WEIGHTED`` + - Average the light information coming from the entire frame giving + priority to the center of the metered area. + * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_METERING_SPOT`` + - Measure only very small area at the center of the frame. + * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_METERING_MATRIX`` + - A multi-zone metering. The light intensity is measured in several + points of the frame and the results are combined. The algorithm of + the zones selection and their significance in calculating the + final value is device dependent. + + + +``V4L2_CID_PAN_RELATIVE (integer)`` + This control turns the camera horizontally by the specified amount. + The unit is undefined. A positive value moves the camera to the + right (clockwise when viewed from above), a negative value to the + left. A value of zero does not cause motion. This is a write-only + control. + +``V4L2_CID_TILT_RELATIVE (integer)`` + This control turns the camera vertically by the specified amount. + The unit is undefined. A positive value moves the camera up, a + negative value down. A value of zero does not cause motion. This is + a write-only control. + +``V4L2_CID_PAN_RESET (button)`` + When this control is set, the camera moves horizontally to the + default position. + +``V4L2_CID_TILT_RESET (button)`` + When this control is set, the camera moves vertically to the default + position. + +``V4L2_CID_PAN_ABSOLUTE (integer)`` + This control turns the camera horizontally to the specified + position. Positive values move the camera to the right (clockwise + when viewed from above), negative values to the left. Drivers should + interpret the values as arc seconds, with valid values between -180 + * 3600 and +180 * 3600 inclusive. + +``V4L2_CID_TILT_ABSOLUTE (integer)`` + This control turns the camera vertically to the specified position. + Positive values move the camera up, negative values down. Drivers + should interpret the values as arc seconds, with valid values + between -180 * 3600 and +180 * 3600 inclusive. + +``V4L2_CID_FOCUS_ABSOLUTE (integer)`` + This control sets the focal point of the camera to the specified + position. The unit is undefined. Positive values set the focus + closer to the camera, negative values towards infinity. + +``V4L2_CID_FOCUS_RELATIVE (integer)`` + This control moves the focal point of the camera by the specified + amount. The unit is undefined. Positive values move the focus closer + to the camera, negative values towards infinity. This is a + write-only control. + +``V4L2_CID_FOCUS_AUTO (boolean)`` + Enables continuous automatic focus adjustments. The effect of manual + focus adjustments while this feature is enabled is undefined, + drivers should ignore such requests. + +``V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_START (button)`` + Starts single auto focus process. The effect of setting this control + when ``V4L2_CID_FOCUS_AUTO`` is set to ``TRUE`` (1) is undefined, + drivers should ignore such requests. + +``V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_STOP (button)`` + Aborts automatic focusing started with ``V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_START`` + control. It is effective only when the continuous autofocus is + disabled, that is when ``V4L2_CID_FOCUS_AUTO`` control is set to + ``FALSE`` (0). + +.. _v4l2-auto-focus-status: + +``V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS (bitmask)`` + The automatic focus status. This is a read-only control. + + Setting ``V4L2_LOCK_FOCUS`` lock bit of the ``V4L2_CID_3A_LOCK`` + control may stop updates of the ``V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS`` + control value. + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.5cm}|p{11.0cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS_IDLE`` + - Automatic focus is not active. + * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS_BUSY`` + - Automatic focusing is in progress. + * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS_REACHED`` + - Focus has been reached. + * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS_FAILED`` + - Automatic focus has failed, the driver will not transition from + this state until another action is performed by an application. + + + +.. _v4l2-auto-focus-range: + +``V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_auto_focus_range - + Determines auto focus distance range for which lens may be adjusted. + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.5cm}|p{11.0cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE_AUTO`` + - The camera automatically selects the focus range. + * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE_NORMAL`` + - Normal distance range, limited for best automatic focus + performance. + * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE_MACRO`` + - Macro (close-up) auto focus. The camera will use its minimum + possible distance for auto focus. + * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE_INFINITY`` + - The lens is set to focus on an object at infinite distance. + + + +``V4L2_CID_ZOOM_ABSOLUTE (integer)`` + Specify the objective lens focal length as an absolute value. The + zoom unit is driver-specific and its value should be a positive + integer. + +``V4L2_CID_ZOOM_RELATIVE (integer)`` + Specify the objective lens focal length relatively to the current + value. Positive values move the zoom lens group towards the + telephoto direction, negative values towards the wide-angle + direction. The zoom unit is driver-specific. This is a write-only + control. + +``V4L2_CID_ZOOM_CONTINUOUS (integer)`` + Move the objective lens group at the specified speed until it + reaches physical device limits or until an explicit request to stop + the movement. A positive value moves the zoom lens group towards the + telephoto direction. A value of zero stops the zoom lens group + movement. A negative value moves the zoom lens group towards the + wide-angle direction. The zoom speed unit is driver-specific. + +``V4L2_CID_IRIS_ABSOLUTE (integer)`` + This control sets the camera's aperture to the specified value. The + unit is undefined. Larger values open the iris wider, smaller values + close it. + +``V4L2_CID_IRIS_RELATIVE (integer)`` + This control modifies the camera's aperture by the specified amount. + The unit is undefined. Positive values open the iris one step + further, negative values close it one step further. This is a + write-only control. + +``V4L2_CID_PRIVACY (boolean)`` + Prevent video from being acquired by the camera. When this control + is set to ``TRUE`` (1), no image can be captured by the camera. + Common means to enforce privacy are mechanical obturation of the + sensor and firmware image processing, but the device is not + restricted to these methods. Devices that implement the privacy + control must support read access and may support write access. + +``V4L2_CID_BAND_STOP_FILTER (integer)`` + Switch the band-stop filter of a camera sensor on or off, or specify + its strength. Such band-stop filters can be used, for example, to + filter out the fluorescent light component. + +.. _v4l2-auto-n-preset-white-balance: + +``V4L2_CID_AUTO_N_PRESET_WHITE_BALANCE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_auto_n_preset_white_balance - + Sets white balance to automatic, manual or a preset. The presets + determine color temperature of the light as a hint to the camera for + white balance adjustments resulting in most accurate color + representation. The following white balance presets are listed in + order of increasing color temperature. + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.0 cm}|p{10.5cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_MANUAL`` + - Manual white balance. + * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_AUTO`` + - Automatic white balance adjustments. + * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_INCANDESCENT`` + - White balance setting for incandescent (tungsten) lighting. It + generally cools down the colors and corresponds approximately to + 2500...3500 K color temperature range. + * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_FLUORESCENT`` + - White balance preset for fluorescent lighting. It corresponds + approximately to 4000...5000 K color temperature. + * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_FLUORESCENT_H`` + - With this setting the camera will compensate for fluorescent H + lighting. + * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_HORIZON`` + - White balance setting for horizon daylight. It corresponds + approximately to 5000 K color temperature. + * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_DAYLIGHT`` + - White balance preset for daylight (with clear sky). It corresponds + approximately to 5000...6500 K color temperature. + * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_FLASH`` + - With this setting the camera will compensate for the flash light. + It slightly warms up the colors and corresponds roughly to + 5000...5500 K color temperature. + * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_CLOUDY`` + - White balance preset for moderately overcast sky. This option + corresponds approximately to 6500...8000 K color temperature + range. + * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_SHADE`` + - White balance preset for shade or heavily overcast sky. It + corresponds approximately to 9000...10000 K color temperature. + + + +.. _v4l2-wide-dynamic-range: + +``V4L2_CID_WIDE_DYNAMIC_RANGE (boolean)`` + Enables or disables the camera's wide dynamic range feature. This + feature allows to obtain clear images in situations where intensity + of the illumination varies significantly throughout the scene, i.e. + there are simultaneously very dark and very bright areas. It is most + commonly realized in cameras by combining two subsequent frames with + different exposure times. [#f1]_ + +.. _v4l2-image-stabilization: + +``V4L2_CID_IMAGE_STABILIZATION (boolean)`` + Enables or disables image stabilization. + +``V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY (integer menu)`` + Determines ISO equivalent of an image sensor indicating the sensor's + sensitivity to light. The numbers are expressed in arithmetic scale, + as per :ref:`iso12232` standard, where doubling the sensor + sensitivity is represented by doubling the numerical ISO value. + Applications should interpret the values as standard ISO values + multiplied by 1000, e.g. control value 800 stands for ISO 0.8. + Drivers will usually support only a subset of standard ISO values. + The effect of setting this control while the + ``V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_AUTO`` control is set to a value other + than ``V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_MANUAL`` is undefined, drivers + should ignore such requests. + +.. _v4l2-iso-sensitivity-auto-type: + +``V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_AUTO`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_iso_sensitivity_type - + Enables or disables automatic ISO sensitivity adjustments. + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_MANUAL`` + - Manual ISO sensitivity. + * - ``V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_AUTO`` + - Automatic ISO sensitivity adjustments. + + + +.. _v4l2-scene-mode: + +``V4L2_CID_SCENE_MODE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_scene_mode - + This control allows to select scene programs as the camera automatic + modes optimized for common shooting scenes. Within these modes the + camera determines best exposure, aperture, focusing, light metering, + white balance and equivalent sensitivity. The controls of those + parameters are influenced by the scene mode control. An exact + behavior in each mode is subject to the camera specification. + + When the scene mode feature is not used, this control should be set + to ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_NONE`` to make sure the other possibly related + controls are accessible. The following scene programs are defined: + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.0cm}|p{11.5cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_NONE`` + - The scene mode feature is disabled. + * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_BACKLIGHT`` + - Backlight. Compensates for dark shadows when light is coming from + behind a subject, also by automatically turning on the flash. + * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_BEACH_SNOW`` + - Beach and snow. This mode compensates for all-white or bright + scenes, which tend to look gray and low contrast, when camera's + automatic exposure is based on an average scene brightness. To + compensate, this mode automatically slightly overexposes the + frames. The white balance may also be adjusted to compensate for + the fact that reflected snow looks bluish rather than white. + * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_CANDLELIGHT`` + - Candle light. The camera generally raises the ISO sensitivity and + lowers the shutter speed. This mode compensates for relatively + close subject in the scene. The flash is disabled in order to + preserve the ambiance of the light. + * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_DAWN_DUSK`` + - Dawn and dusk. Preserves the colors seen in low natural light + before dusk and after down. The camera may turn off the flash, and + automatically focus at infinity. It will usually boost saturation + and lower the shutter speed. + * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_FALL_COLORS`` + - Fall colors. Increases saturation and adjusts white balance for + color enhancement. Pictures of autumn leaves get saturated reds + and yellows. + * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_FIREWORKS`` + - Fireworks. Long exposure times are used to capture the expanding + burst of light from a firework. The camera may invoke image + stabilization. + * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_LANDSCAPE`` + - Landscape. The camera may choose a small aperture to provide deep + depth of field and long exposure duration to help capture detail + in dim light conditions. The focus is fixed at infinity. Suitable + for distant and wide scenery. + * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_NIGHT`` + - Night, also known as Night Landscape. Designed for low light + conditions, it preserves detail in the dark areas without blowing + out bright objects. The camera generally sets itself to a + medium-to-high ISO sensitivity, with a relatively long exposure + time, and turns flash off. As such, there will be increased image + noise and the possibility of blurred image. + * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_PARTY_INDOOR`` + - Party and indoor. Designed to capture indoor scenes that are lit + by indoor background lighting as well as the flash. The camera + usually increases ISO sensitivity, and adjusts exposure for the + low light conditions. + * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_PORTRAIT`` + - Portrait. The camera adjusts the aperture so that the depth of + field is reduced, which helps to isolate the subject against a + smooth background. Most cameras recognize the presence of faces in + the scene and focus on them. The color hue is adjusted to enhance + skin tones. The intensity of the flash is often reduced. + * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_SPORTS`` + - Sports. Significantly increases ISO and uses a fast shutter speed + to freeze motion of rapidly-moving subjects. Increased image noise + may be seen in this mode. + * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_SUNSET`` + - Sunset. Preserves deep hues seen in sunsets and sunrises. It bumps + up the saturation. + * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_TEXT`` + - Text. It applies extra contrast and sharpness, it is typically a + black-and-white mode optimized for readability. Automatic focus + may be switched to close-up mode and this setting may also involve + some lens-distortion correction. + + + +``V4L2_CID_3A_LOCK (bitmask)`` + This control locks or unlocks the automatic focus, exposure and + white balance. The automatic adjustments can be paused independently + by setting the corresponding lock bit to 1. The camera then retains + the settings until the lock bit is cleared. The following lock bits + are defined: + + When a given algorithm is not enabled, drivers should ignore + requests to lock it and should return no error. An example might be + an application setting bit ``V4L2_LOCK_WHITE_BALANCE`` when the + ``V4L2_CID_AUTO_WHITE_BALANCE`` control is set to ``FALSE``. The + value of this control may be changed by exposure, white balance or + focus controls. + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_LOCK_EXPOSURE`` + - Automatic exposure adjustments lock. + * - ``V4L2_LOCK_WHITE_BALANCE`` + - Automatic white balance adjustments lock. + * - ``V4L2_LOCK_FOCUS`` + - Automatic focus lock. + + + +``V4L2_CID_PAN_SPEED (integer)`` + This control turns the camera horizontally at the specific speed. + The unit is undefined. A positive value moves the camera to the + right (clockwise when viewed from above), a negative value to the + left. A value of zero stops the motion if one is in progress and has + no effect otherwise. + +``V4L2_CID_TILT_SPEED (integer)`` + This control turns the camera vertically at the specified speed. The + unit is undefined. A positive value moves the camera up, a negative + value down. A value of zero stops the motion if one is in progress + and has no effect otherwise. + +.. [#f1] + This control may be changed to a menu control in the future, if more + options are required. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-codec.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-codec.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c97fb7923be5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-codec.rst @@ -0,0 +1,2451 @@ +.. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this +.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, +.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software +.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts +.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at +.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst. +.. +.. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections + +.. _mpeg-controls: + +*********************** +Codec Control Reference +*********************** + +Below all controls within the Codec control class are described. First +the generic controls, then controls specific for certain hardware. + +.. note:: + + These controls are applicable to all codecs and not just MPEG. The + defines are prefixed with V4L2_CID_MPEG/V4L2_MPEG as the controls + were originally made for MPEG codecs and later extended to cover all + encoding formats. + + +Generic Codec Controls +====================== + + +.. _mpeg-control-id: + +Codec Control IDs +----------------- + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CLASS (class)`` + The Codec class descriptor. Calling + :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will + return a description of this control class. This description can be + used as the caption of a Tab page in a GUI, for example. + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-stream-type: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_stream_type - + The MPEG-1, -2 or -4 output stream type. One cannot assume anything + here. Each hardware MPEG encoder tends to support different subsets + of the available MPEG stream types. This control is specific to + multiplexed MPEG streams. The currently defined stream types are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE_MPEG2_PS`` + - MPEG-2 program stream + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE_MPEG2_TS`` + - MPEG-2 transport stream + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE_MPEG1_SS`` + - MPEG-1 system stream + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE_MPEG2_DVD`` + - MPEG-2 DVD-compatible stream + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE_MPEG1_VCD`` + - MPEG-1 VCD-compatible stream + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE_MPEG2_SVCD`` + - MPEG-2 SVCD-compatible stream + + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_PID_PMT (integer)`` + Program Map Table Packet ID for the MPEG transport stream (default + 16) + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_PID_AUDIO (integer)`` + Audio Packet ID for the MPEG transport stream (default 256) + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_PID_VIDEO (integer)`` + Video Packet ID for the MPEG transport stream (default 260) + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_PID_PCR (integer)`` + Packet ID for the MPEG transport stream carrying PCR fields (default + 259) + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_PES_ID_AUDIO (integer)`` + Audio ID for MPEG PES + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_PES_ID_VIDEO (integer)`` + Video ID for MPEG PES + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-stream-vbi-fmt: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_VBI_FMT`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_stream_vbi_fmt - + Some cards can embed VBI data (e. g. Closed Caption, Teletext) into + the MPEG stream. This control selects whether VBI data should be + embedded, and if so, what embedding method should be used. The list + of possible VBI formats depends on the driver. The currently defined + VBI format types are: + + + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6 cm}|p{11.5cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_VBI_FMT_NONE`` + - No VBI in the MPEG stream + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_VBI_FMT_IVTV`` + - VBI in private packets, IVTV format (documented in the kernel + sources in the file + ``Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/cx2341x.rst``) + + + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-sampling-freq: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_SAMPLING_FREQ`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_sampling_freq - + MPEG Audio sampling frequency. Possible values are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_SAMPLING_FREQ_44100`` + - 44.1 kHz + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_SAMPLING_FREQ_48000`` + - 48 kHz + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_SAMPLING_FREQ_32000`` + - 32 kHz + + + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-encoding: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_ENCODING`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_encoding - + MPEG Audio encoding. This control is specific to multiplexed MPEG + streams. Possible values are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_ENCODING_LAYER_1`` + - MPEG-1/2 Layer I encoding + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_ENCODING_LAYER_2`` + - MPEG-1/2 Layer II encoding + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_ENCODING_LAYER_3`` + - MPEG-1/2 Layer III encoding + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_ENCODING_AAC`` + - MPEG-2/4 AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_ENCODING_AC3`` + - AC-3 aka ATSC A/52 encoding + + + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-l1-bitrate: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_l1_bitrate - + MPEG-1/2 Layer I bitrate. Possible values are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_32K`` + - 32 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_64K`` + - 64 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_96K`` + - 96 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_128K`` + - 128 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_160K`` + - 160 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_192K`` + - 192 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_224K`` + - 224 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_256K`` + - 256 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_288K`` + - 288 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_320K`` + - 320 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_352K`` + - 352 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_384K`` + - 384 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_416K`` + - 416 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_448K`` + - 448 kbit/s + + + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-l2-bitrate: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_l2_bitrate - + MPEG-1/2 Layer II bitrate. Possible values are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_32K`` + - 32 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_48K`` + - 48 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_56K`` + - 56 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_64K`` + - 64 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_80K`` + - 80 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_96K`` + - 96 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_112K`` + - 112 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_128K`` + - 128 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_160K`` + - 160 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_192K`` + - 192 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_224K`` + - 224 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_256K`` + - 256 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_320K`` + - 320 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_384K`` + - 384 kbit/s + + + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-l3-bitrate: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_l3_bitrate - + MPEG-1/2 Layer III bitrate. Possible values are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_32K`` + - 32 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_40K`` + - 40 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_48K`` + - 48 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_56K`` + - 56 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_64K`` + - 64 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_80K`` + - 80 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_96K`` + - 96 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_112K`` + - 112 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_128K`` + - 128 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_160K`` + - 160 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_192K`` + - 192 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_224K`` + - 224 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_256K`` + - 256 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_320K`` + - 320 kbit/s + + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_AAC_BITRATE (integer)`` + AAC bitrate in bits per second. + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-ac3-bitrate: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_ac3_bitrate - + AC-3 bitrate. Possible values are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_32K`` + - 32 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_40K`` + - 40 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_48K`` + - 48 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_56K`` + - 56 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_64K`` + - 64 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_80K`` + - 80 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_96K`` + - 96 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_112K`` + - 112 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_128K`` + - 128 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_160K`` + - 160 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_192K`` + - 192 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_224K`` + - 224 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_256K`` + - 256 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_320K`` + - 320 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_384K`` + - 384 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_448K`` + - 448 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_512K`` + - 512 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_576K`` + - 576 kbit/s + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_640K`` + - 640 kbit/s + + + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-mode: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_mode - + MPEG Audio mode. Possible values are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_STEREO`` + - Stereo + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_JOINT_STEREO`` + - Joint Stereo + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_DUAL`` + - Bilingual + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_MONO`` + - Mono + + + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-mode-extension: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_EXTENSION`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_mode_extension - + Joint Stereo audio mode extension. In Layer I and II they indicate + which subbands are in intensity stereo. All other subbands are coded + in stereo. Layer III is not (yet) supported. Possible values are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_EXTENSION_BOUND_4`` + - Subbands 4-31 in intensity stereo + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_EXTENSION_BOUND_8`` + - Subbands 8-31 in intensity stereo + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_EXTENSION_BOUND_12`` + - Subbands 12-31 in intensity stereo + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_EXTENSION_BOUND_16`` + - Subbands 16-31 in intensity stereo + + + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-emphasis: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_EMPHASIS`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_emphasis - + Audio Emphasis. Possible values are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_EMPHASIS_NONE`` + - None + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_EMPHASIS_50_DIV_15_uS`` + - 50/15 microsecond emphasis + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_EMPHASIS_CCITT_J17`` + - CCITT J.17 + + + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-crc: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_CRC`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_crc - + CRC method. Possible values are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_CRC_NONE`` + - None + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_CRC_CRC16`` + - 16 bit parity check + + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_MUTE (boolean)`` + Mutes the audio when capturing. This is not done by muting audio + hardware, which can still produce a slight hiss, but in the encoder + itself, guaranteeing a fixed and reproducible audio bitstream. 0 = + unmuted, 1 = muted. + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-dec-playback: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_dec_playback - + Determines how monolingual audio should be played back. Possible + values are: + + + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.5cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_AUTO`` + - Automatically determines the best playback mode. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_STEREO`` + - Stereo playback. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_LEFT`` + - Left channel playback. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_RIGHT`` + - Right channel playback. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_MONO`` + - Mono playback. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_SWAPPED_STEREO`` + - Stereo playback with swapped left and right channels. + + + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-dec-multilingual-playback: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_MULTILINGUAL_PLAYBACK`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_dec_playback - + Determines how multilingual audio should be played back. + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-encoding: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_ENCODING`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_encoding - + MPEG Video encoding method. This control is specific to multiplexed + MPEG streams. Possible values are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ENCODING_MPEG_1`` + - MPEG-1 Video encoding + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ENCODING_MPEG_2`` + - MPEG-2 Video encoding + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ENCODING_MPEG_4_AVC`` + - MPEG-4 AVC (H.264) Video encoding + + + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-aspect: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_ASPECT`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_aspect - + Video aspect. Possible values are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ASPECT_1x1`` + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ASPECT_4x3`` + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ASPECT_16x9`` + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ASPECT_221x100`` + + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_B_FRAMES (integer)`` + Number of B-Frames (default 2) + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_GOP_SIZE (integer)`` + GOP size (default 12) + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_GOP_CLOSURE (boolean)`` + GOP closure (default 1) + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_PULLDOWN (boolean)`` + Enable 3:2 pulldown (default 0) + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-bitrate-mode: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_BITRATE_MODE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_bitrate_mode - + Video bitrate mode. Possible values are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_BITRATE_MODE_VBR`` + - Variable bitrate + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_BITRATE_MODE_CBR`` + - Constant bitrate + + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_BITRATE (integer)`` + Video bitrate in bits per second. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_BITRATE_PEAK (integer)`` + Peak video bitrate in bits per second. Must be larger or equal to + the average video bitrate. It is ignored if the video bitrate mode + is set to constant bitrate. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_TEMPORAL_DECIMATION (integer)`` + For every captured frame, skip this many subsequent frames (default + 0). + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MUTE (boolean)`` + "Mutes" the video to a fixed color when capturing. This is useful + for testing, to produce a fixed video bitstream. 0 = unmuted, 1 = + muted. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MUTE_YUV (integer)`` + Sets the "mute" color of the video. The supplied 32-bit integer is + interpreted as follows (bit 0 = least significant bit): + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - Bit 0:7 + - V chrominance information + * - Bit 8:15 + - U chrominance information + * - Bit 16:23 + - Y luminance information + * - Bit 24:31 + - Must be zero. + + + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-dec-pts: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_DEC_PTS (integer64)`` + This read-only control returns the 33-bit video Presentation Time + Stamp as defined in ITU T-REC-H.222.0 and ISO/IEC 13818-1 of the + currently displayed frame. This is the same PTS as is used in + :ref:`VIDIOC_DECODER_CMD`. + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-dec-frame: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_DEC_FRAME (integer64)`` + This read-only control returns the frame counter of the frame that + is currently displayed (decoded). This value is reset to 0 whenever + the decoder is started. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_DECODER_SLICE_INTERFACE (boolean)`` + If enabled the decoder expects to receive a single slice per buffer, + otherwise the decoder expects a single frame in per buffer. + Applicable to the decoder, all codecs. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_ENABLE (boolean)`` + Enable writing sample aspect ratio in the Video Usability + Information. Applicable to the H264 encoder. + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-vui-sar-idc: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_vui_sar_idc - + VUI sample aspect ratio indicator for H.264 encoding. The value is + defined in the table E-1 in the standard. Applicable to the H264 + encoder. + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_UNSPECIFIED`` + - Unspecified + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_1x1`` + - 1x1 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_12x11`` + - 12x11 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_10x11`` + - 10x11 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_16x11`` + - 16x11 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_40x33`` + - 40x33 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_24x11`` + - 24x11 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_20x11`` + - 20x11 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_32x11`` + - 32x11 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_80x33`` + - 80x33 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_18x11`` + - 18x11 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_15x11`` + - 15x11 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_64x33`` + - 64x33 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_160x99`` + - 160x99 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_4x3`` + - 4x3 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_3x2`` + - 3x2 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_2x1`` + - 2x1 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_EXTENDED`` + - Extended SAR + + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_EXT_SAR_WIDTH (integer)`` + Extended sample aspect ratio width for H.264 VUI encoding. + Applicable to the H264 encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_EXT_SAR_HEIGHT (integer)`` + Extended sample aspect ratio height for H.264 VUI encoding. + Applicable to the H264 encoder. + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-level: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_level - + The level information for the H264 video elementary stream. + Applicable to the H264 encoder. Possible values are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_1_0`` + - Level 1.0 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_1B`` + - Level 1B + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_1_1`` + - Level 1.1 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_1_2`` + - Level 1.2 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_1_3`` + - Level 1.3 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_2_0`` + - Level 2.0 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_2_1`` + - Level 2.1 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_2_2`` + - Level 2.2 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_3_0`` + - Level 3.0 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_3_1`` + - Level 3.1 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_3_2`` + - Level 3.2 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_4_0`` + - Level 4.0 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_4_1`` + - Level 4.1 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_4_2`` + - Level 4.2 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_5_0`` + - Level 5.0 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_5_1`` + - Level 5.1 + + + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-mpeg4-level: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_mpeg4_level - + The level information for the MPEG4 elementary stream. Applicable to + the MPEG4 encoder. Possible values are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_0`` + - Level 0 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_0B`` + - Level 0b + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_1`` + - Level 1 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_2`` + - Level 2 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_3`` + - Level 3 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_3B`` + - Level 3b + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_4`` + - Level 4 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_5`` + - Level 5 + + + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-profile: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_profile - + The profile information for H264. Applicable to the H264 encoder. + Possible values are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_BASELINE`` + - Baseline profile + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_CONSTRAINED_BASELINE`` + - Constrained Baseline profile + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_MAIN`` + - Main profile + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_EXTENDED`` + - Extended profile + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH`` + - High profile + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH_10`` + - High 10 profile + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH_422`` + - High 422 profile + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH_444_PREDICTIVE`` + - High 444 Predictive profile + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH_10_INTRA`` + - High 10 Intra profile + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH_422_INTRA`` + - High 422 Intra profile + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH_444_INTRA`` + - High 444 Intra profile + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_CAVLC_444_INTRA`` + - CAVLC 444 Intra profile + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_SCALABLE_BASELINE`` + - Scalable Baseline profile + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_SCALABLE_HIGH`` + - Scalable High profile + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_SCALABLE_HIGH_INTRA`` + - Scalable High Intra profile + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_STEREO_HIGH`` + - Stereo High profile + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_MULTIVIEW_HIGH`` + - Multiview High profile + + + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-mpeg4-profile: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_PROFILE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_mpeg4_profile - + The profile information for MPEG4. Applicable to the MPEG4 encoder. + Possible values are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_PROFILE_SIMPLE`` + - Simple profile + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_PROFILE_ADVANCED_SIMPLE`` + - Advanced Simple profile + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_PROFILE_CORE`` + - Core profile + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_PROFILE_SIMPLE_SCALABLE`` + - Simple Scalable profile + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_PROFILE_ADVANCED_CODING_EFFICIENCY`` + - + + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MAX_REF_PIC (integer)`` + The maximum number of reference pictures used for encoding. + Applicable to the encoder. + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-multi-slice-mode: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_multi_slice_mode - + Determines how the encoder should handle division of frame into + slices. Applicable to the encoder. Possible values are: + + + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{8.7cm}|p{8.8cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE_SINGLE`` + - Single slice per frame. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE_MAX_MB`` + - Multiple slices with set maximum number of macroblocks per slice. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE_MAX_BYTES`` + - Multiple slice with set maximum size in bytes per slice. + + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MAX_MB (integer)`` + The maximum number of macroblocks in a slice. Used when + ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE`` is set to + ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE_MAX_MB``. Applicable to the + encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MAX_BYTES (integer)`` + The maximum size of a slice in bytes. Used when + ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE`` is set to + ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE_MAX_BYTES``. Applicable to the + encoder. + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-loop-filter-mode: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LOOP_FILTER_MODE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_loop_filter_mode - + Loop filter mode for H264 encoder. Possible values are: + + + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{14.0cm}|p{3.5cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LOOP_FILTER_MODE_ENABLED`` + - Loop filter is enabled. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LOOP_FILTER_MODE_DISABLED`` + - Loop filter is disabled. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LOOP_FILTER_MODE_DISABLED_AT_SLICE_BOUNDARY`` + - Loop filter is disabled at the slice boundary. + + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LOOP_FILTER_ALPHA (integer)`` + Loop filter alpha coefficient, defined in the H264 standard. + This value corresponds to the slice_alpha_c0_offset_div2 slice header + field, and should be in the range of -6 to +6, inclusive. The actual alpha + offset FilterOffsetA is twice this value. + Applicable to the H264 encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LOOP_FILTER_BETA (integer)`` + Loop filter beta coefficient, defined in the H264 standard. + This corresponds to the slice_beta_offset_div2 slice header field, and + should be in the range of -6 to +6, inclusive. The actual beta offset + FilterOffsetB is twice this value. + Applicable to the H264 encoder. + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-entropy-mode: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_ENTROPY_MODE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_entropy_mode - + Entropy coding mode for H264 - CABAC/CAVALC. Applicable to the H264 + encoder. Possible values are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_ENTROPY_MODE_CAVLC`` + - Use CAVLC entropy coding. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_ENTROPY_MODE_CABAC`` + - Use CABAC entropy coding. + + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_8X8_TRANSFORM (boolean)`` + Enable 8X8 transform for H264. Applicable to the H264 encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_CONSTRAINED_INTRA_PREDICTION (boolean)`` + Enable constrained intra prediction for H264. Applicable to the H264 + encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_CHROMA_QP_INDEX_OFFSET (integer)`` + Specify the offset that should be added to the luma quantization + parameter to determine the chroma quantization parameter. Applicable + to the H264 encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_CYCLIC_INTRA_REFRESH_MB (integer)`` + Cyclic intra macroblock refresh. This is the number of continuous + macroblocks refreshed every frame. Each frame a successive set of + macroblocks is refreshed until the cycle completes and starts from + the top of the frame. Applicable to H264, H263 and MPEG4 encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_FRAME_RC_ENABLE (boolean)`` + Frame level rate control enable. If this control is disabled then + the quantization parameter for each frame type is constant and set + with appropriate controls (e.g. + ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_I_FRAME_QP``). If frame rate control is + enabled then quantization parameter is adjusted to meet the chosen + bitrate. Minimum and maximum value for the quantization parameter + can be set with appropriate controls (e.g. + ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_MIN_QP``). Applicable to encoders. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MB_RC_ENABLE (boolean)`` + Macroblock level rate control enable. Applicable to the MPEG4 and + H264 encoders. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_QPEL (boolean)`` + Quarter pixel motion estimation for MPEG4. Applicable to the MPEG4 + encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_I_FRAME_QP (integer)`` + Quantization parameter for an I frame for H263. Valid range: from 1 + to 31. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_MIN_QP (integer)`` + Minimum quantization parameter for H263. Valid range: from 1 to 31. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_MAX_QP (integer)`` + Maximum quantization parameter for H263. Valid range: from 1 to 31. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_P_FRAME_QP (integer)`` + Quantization parameter for an P frame for H263. Valid range: from 1 + to 31. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_B_FRAME_QP (integer)`` + Quantization parameter for an B frame for H263. Valid range: from 1 + to 31. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_I_FRAME_QP (integer)`` + Quantization parameter for an I frame for H264. Valid range: from 0 + to 51. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_MIN_QP (integer)`` + Minimum quantization parameter for H264. Valid range: from 0 to 51. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_MAX_QP (integer)`` + Maximum quantization parameter for H264. Valid range: from 0 to 51. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_P_FRAME_QP (integer)`` + Quantization parameter for an P frame for H264. Valid range: from 0 + to 51. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_B_FRAME_QP (integer)`` + Quantization parameter for an B frame for H264. Valid range: from 0 + to 51. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_I_FRAME_QP (integer)`` + Quantization parameter for an I frame for MPEG4. Valid range: from 1 + to 31. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_MIN_QP (integer)`` + Minimum quantization parameter for MPEG4. Valid range: from 1 to 31. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_MAX_QP (integer)`` + Maximum quantization parameter for MPEG4. Valid range: from 1 to 31. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_P_FRAME_QP (integer)`` + Quantization parameter for an P frame for MPEG4. Valid range: from 1 + to 31. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_B_FRAME_QP (integer)`` + Quantization parameter for an B frame for MPEG4. Valid range: from 1 + to 31. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VBV_SIZE (integer)`` + The Video Buffer Verifier size in kilobytes, it is used as a + limitation of frame skip. The VBV is defined in the standard as a + mean to verify that the produced stream will be successfully + decoded. The standard describes it as "Part of a hypothetical + decoder that is conceptually connected to the output of the encoder. + Its purpose is to provide a constraint on the variability of the + data rate that an encoder or editing process may produce.". + Applicable to the MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG4 encoders. + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-vbv-delay: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VBV_DELAY (integer)`` + Sets the initial delay in milliseconds for VBV buffer control. + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-hor-search-range: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MV_H_SEARCH_RANGE (integer)`` + Horizontal search range defines maximum horizontal search area in + pixels to search and match for the present Macroblock (MB) in the + reference picture. This V4L2 control macro is used to set horizontal + search range for motion estimation module in video encoder. + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-vert-search-range: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MV_V_SEARCH_RANGE (integer)`` + Vertical search range defines maximum vertical search area in pixels + to search and match for the present Macroblock (MB) in the reference + picture. This V4L2 control macro is used to set vertical search + range for motion estimation module in video encoder. + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-force-key-frame: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_FORCE_KEY_FRAME (button)`` + Force a key frame for the next queued buffer. Applicable to + encoders. This is a general, codec-agnostic keyframe control. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_CPB_SIZE (integer)`` + The Coded Picture Buffer size in kilobytes, it is used as a + limitation of frame skip. The CPB is defined in the H264 standard as + a mean to verify that the produced stream will be successfully + decoded. Applicable to the H264 encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_I_PERIOD (integer)`` + Period between I-frames in the open GOP for H264. In case of an open + GOP this is the period between two I-frames. The period between IDR + (Instantaneous Decoding Refresh) frames is taken from the GOP_SIZE + control. An IDR frame, which stands for Instantaneous Decoding + Refresh is an I-frame after which no prior frames are referenced. + This means that a stream can be restarted from an IDR frame without + the need to store or decode any previous frames. Applicable to the + H264 encoder. + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-header-mode: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEADER_MODE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_header_mode - + Determines whether the header is returned as the first buffer or is + it returned together with the first frame. Applicable to encoders. + Possible values are: + + + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{10.3cm}|p{7.2cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEADER_MODE_SEPARATE`` + - The stream header is returned separately in the first buffer. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEADER_MODE_JOINED_WITH_1ST_FRAME`` + - The stream header is returned together with the first encoded + frame. + + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_REPEAT_SEQ_HEADER (boolean)`` + Repeat the video sequence headers. Repeating these headers makes + random access to the video stream easier. Applicable to the MPEG1, 2 + and 4 encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_DECODER_MPEG4_DEBLOCK_FILTER (boolean)`` + Enabled the deblocking post processing filter for MPEG4 decoder. + Applicable to the MPEG4 decoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_VOP_TIME_RES (integer)`` + vop_time_increment_resolution value for MPEG4. Applicable to the + MPEG4 encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_VOP_TIME_INC (integer)`` + vop_time_increment value for MPEG4. Applicable to the MPEG4 + encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FRAME_PACKING (boolean)`` + Enable generation of frame packing supplemental enhancement + information in the encoded bitstream. The frame packing SEI message + contains the arrangement of L and R planes for 3D viewing. + Applicable to the H264 encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_CURRENT_FRAME_0 (boolean)`` + Sets current frame as frame0 in frame packing SEI. Applicable to the + H264 encoder. + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-sei-fp-arrangement-type: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_sei_fp_arrangement_type - + Frame packing arrangement type for H264 SEI. Applicable to the H264 + encoder. Possible values are: + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{12cm}|p{5.5cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_CHEKERBOARD`` + - Pixels are alternatively from L and R. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_COLUMN`` + - L and R are interlaced by column. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_ROW`` + - L and R are interlaced by row. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_SIDE_BY_SIDE`` + - L is on the left, R on the right. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_TOP_BOTTOM`` + - L is on top, R on bottom. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_TEMPORAL`` + - One view per frame. + + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO (boolean)`` + Enables flexible macroblock ordering in the encoded bitstream. It is + a technique used for restructuring the ordering of macroblocks in + pictures. Applicable to the H264 encoder. + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-fmo-map-type: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_fmo_map_type - + When using FMO, the map type divides the image in different scan + patterns of macroblocks. Applicable to the H264 encoder. Possible + values are: + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{12.5cm}|p{5.0cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_INTERLEAVED_SLICES`` + - Slices are interleaved one after other with macroblocks in run + length order. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_SCATTERED_SLICES`` + - Scatters the macroblocks based on a mathematical function known to + both encoder and decoder. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_FOREGROUND_WITH_LEFT_OVER`` + - Macroblocks arranged in rectangular areas or regions of interest. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_BOX_OUT`` + - Slice groups grow in a cyclic way from centre to outwards. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_RASTER_SCAN`` + - Slice groups grow in raster scan pattern from left to right. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_WIPE_SCAN`` + - Slice groups grow in wipe scan pattern from top to bottom. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_EXPLICIT`` + - User defined map type. + + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_SLICE_GROUP (integer)`` + Number of slice groups in FMO. Applicable to the H264 encoder. + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-fmo-change-direction: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_CHANGE_DIRECTION`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_fmo_change_dir - + Specifies a direction of the slice group change for raster and wipe + maps. Applicable to the H264 encoder. Possible values are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_CHANGE_DIR_RIGHT`` + - Raster scan or wipe right. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_CHANGE_DIR_LEFT`` + - Reverse raster scan or wipe left. + + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_CHANGE_RATE (integer)`` + Specifies the size of the first slice group for raster and wipe map. + Applicable to the H264 encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_RUN_LENGTH (integer)`` + Specifies the number of consecutive macroblocks for the interleaved + map. Applicable to the H264 encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_ASO (boolean)`` + Enables arbitrary slice ordering in encoded bitstream. Applicable to + the H264 encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_ASO_SLICE_ORDER (integer)`` + Specifies the slice order in ASO. Applicable to the H264 encoder. + The supplied 32-bit integer is interpreted as follows (bit 0 = least + significant bit): + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - Bit 0:15 + - Slice ID + * - Bit 16:32 + - Slice position or order + + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING (boolean)`` + Enables H264 hierarchical coding. Applicable to the H264 encoder. + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-hierarchical-coding-type: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_TYPE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_hierarchical_coding_type - + Specifies the hierarchical coding type. Applicable to the H264 + encoder. Possible values are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_B`` + - Hierarchical B coding. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_P`` + - Hierarchical P coding. + + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_LAYER (integer)`` + Specifies the number of hierarchical coding layers. Applicable to + the H264 encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_LAYER_QP (integer)`` + Specifies a user defined QP for each layer. Applicable to the H264 + encoder. The supplied 32-bit integer is interpreted as follows (bit + 0 = least significant bit): + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - Bit 0:15 + - QP value + * - Bit 16:32 + - Layer number + + + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-mpeg2: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG2_SLICE_PARAMS (struct)`` + Specifies the slice parameters (as extracted from the bitstream) for the + associated MPEG-2 slice data. This includes the necessary parameters for + configuring a stateless hardware decoding pipeline for MPEG-2. + The bitstream parameters are defined according to :ref:`mpeg2part2`. + + .. note:: + + This compound control is not yet part of the public kernel API and + it is expected to change. + +.. c:type:: v4l2_ctrl_mpeg2_slice_params + +.. cssclass:: longtable + +.. flat-table:: struct v4l2_ctrl_mpeg2_slice_params + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + :widths: 1 1 2 + + * - __u32 + - ``bit_size`` + - Size (in bits) of the current slice data. + * - __u32 + - ``data_bit_offset`` + - Offset (in bits) to the video data in the current slice data. + * - struct :c:type:`v4l2_mpeg2_sequence` + - ``sequence`` + - Structure with MPEG-2 sequence metadata, merging relevant fields from + the sequence header and sequence extension parts of the bitstream. + * - struct :c:type:`v4l2_mpeg2_picture` + - ``picture`` + - Structure with MPEG-2 picture metadata, merging relevant fields from + the picture header and picture coding extension parts of the bitstream. + * - __u64 + - ``backward_ref_ts`` + - Timestamp of the V4L2 capture buffer to use as backward reference, used + with B-coded and P-coded frames. The timestamp refers to the + ``timestamp`` field in struct :c:type:`v4l2_buffer`. Use the + :c:func:`v4l2_timeval_to_ns()` function to convert the struct + :c:type:`timeval` in struct :c:type:`v4l2_buffer` to a __u64. + * - __u64 + - ``forward_ref_ts`` + - Timestamp for the V4L2 capture buffer to use as forward reference, used + with B-coded frames. The timestamp refers to the ``timestamp`` field in + struct :c:type:`v4l2_buffer`. Use the :c:func:`v4l2_timeval_to_ns()` + function to convert the struct :c:type:`timeval` in struct + :c:type:`v4l2_buffer` to a __u64. + * - __u32 + - ``quantiser_scale_code`` + - Code used to determine the quantization scale to use for the IDCT. + +.. c:type:: v4l2_mpeg2_sequence + +.. cssclass:: longtable + +.. flat-table:: struct v4l2_mpeg2_sequence + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + :widths: 1 1 2 + + * - __u16 + - ``horizontal_size`` + - The width of the displayable part of the frame's luminance component. + * - __u16 + - ``vertical_size`` + - The height of the displayable part of the frame's luminance component. + * - __u32 + - ``vbv_buffer_size`` + - Used to calculate the required size of the video buffering verifier, + defined (in bits) as: 16 * 1024 * vbv_buffer_size. + * - __u16 + - ``profile_and_level_indication`` + - The current profile and level indication as extracted from the + bitstream. + * - __u8 + - ``progressive_sequence`` + - Indication that all the frames for the sequence are progressive instead + of interlaced. + * - __u8 + - ``chroma_format`` + - The chrominance sub-sampling format (1: 4:2:0, 2: 4:2:2, 3: 4:4:4). + +.. c:type:: v4l2_mpeg2_picture + +.. cssclass:: longtable + +.. flat-table:: struct v4l2_mpeg2_picture + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + :widths: 1 1 2 + + * - __u8 + - ``picture_coding_type`` + - Picture coding type for the frame covered by the current slice + (V4L2_MPEG2_PICTURE_CODING_TYPE_I, V4L2_MPEG2_PICTURE_CODING_TYPE_P or + V4L2_MPEG2_PICTURE_CODING_TYPE_B). + * - __u8 + - ``f_code[2][2]`` + - Motion vector codes. + * - __u8 + - ``intra_dc_precision`` + - Precision of Discrete Cosine transform (0: 8 bits precision, + 1: 9 bits precision, 2: 10 bits precision, 3: 11 bits precision). + * - __u8 + - ``picture_structure`` + - Picture structure (1: interlaced top field, 2: interlaced bottom field, + 3: progressive frame). + * - __u8 + - ``top_field_first`` + - If set to 1 and interlaced stream, top field is output first. + * - __u8 + - ``frame_pred_frame_dct`` + - If set to 1, only frame-DCT and frame prediction are used. + * - __u8 + - ``concealment_motion_vectors`` + - If set to 1, motion vectors are coded for intra macroblocks. + * - __u8 + - ``q_scale_type`` + - This flag affects the inverse quantization process. + * - __u8 + - ``intra_vlc_format`` + - This flag affects the decoding of transform coefficient data. + * - __u8 + - ``alternate_scan`` + - This flag affects the decoding of transform coefficient data. + * - __u8 + - ``repeat_first_field`` + - This flag affects the decoding process of progressive frames. + * - __u16 + - ``progressive_frame`` + - Indicates whether the current frame is progressive. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG2_QUANTIZATION (struct)`` + Specifies quantization matrices (as extracted from the bitstream) for the + associated MPEG-2 slice data. + + .. note:: + + This compound control is not yet part of the public kernel API and + it is expected to change. + +.. c:type:: v4l2_ctrl_mpeg2_quantization + +.. cssclass:: longtable + +.. flat-table:: struct v4l2_ctrl_mpeg2_quantization + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + :widths: 1 1 2 + + * - __u8 + - ``load_intra_quantiser_matrix`` + - One bit to indicate whether to load the ``intra_quantiser_matrix`` data. + * - __u8 + - ``load_non_intra_quantiser_matrix`` + - One bit to indicate whether to load the ``non_intra_quantiser_matrix`` + data. + * - __u8 + - ``load_chroma_intra_quantiser_matrix`` + - One bit to indicate whether to load the + ``chroma_intra_quantiser_matrix`` data, only relevant for non-4:2:0 YUV + formats. + * - __u8 + - ``load_chroma_non_intra_quantiser_matrix`` + - One bit to indicate whether to load the + ``chroma_non_intra_quantiser_matrix`` data, only relevant for non-4:2:0 + YUV formats. + * - __u8 + - ``intra_quantiser_matrix[64]`` + - The quantization matrix coefficients for intra-coded frames, in zigzag + scanning order. It is relevant for both luma and chroma components, + although it can be superseded by the chroma-specific matrix for + non-4:2:0 YUV formats. + * - __u8 + - ``non_intra_quantiser_matrix[64]`` + - The quantization matrix coefficients for non-intra-coded frames, in + zigzag scanning order. It is relevant for both luma and chroma + components, although it can be superseded by the chroma-specific matrix + for non-4:2:0 YUV formats. + * - __u8 + - ``chroma_intra_quantiser_matrix[64]`` + - The quantization matrix coefficients for the chominance component of + intra-coded frames, in zigzag scanning order. Only relevant for + non-4:2:0 YUV formats. + * - __u8 + - ``chroma_non_intra_quantiser_matrix[64]`` + - The quantization matrix coefficients for the chrominance component of + non-intra-coded frames, in zigzag scanning order. Only relevant for + non-4:2:0 YUV formats. + +MFC 5.1 MPEG Controls +===================== + +The following MPEG class controls deal with MPEG decoding and encoding +settings that are specific to the Multi Format Codec 5.1 device present +in the S5P family of SoCs by Samsung. + + +.. _mfc51-control-id: + +MFC 5.1 Control IDs +------------------- + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_DECODER_H264_DISPLAY_DELAY_ENABLE (boolean)`` + If the display delay is enabled then the decoder is forced to return + a CAPTURE buffer (decoded frame) after processing a certain number + of OUTPUT buffers. The delay can be set through + ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_DECODER_H264_DISPLAY_DELAY``. This + feature can be used for example for generating thumbnails of videos. + Applicable to the H264 decoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_DECODER_H264_DISPLAY_DELAY (integer)`` + Display delay value for H264 decoder. The decoder is forced to + return a decoded frame after the set 'display delay' number of + frames. If this number is low it may result in frames returned out + of display order, in addition the hardware may still be using the + returned buffer as a reference picture for subsequent frames. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_H264_NUM_REF_PIC_FOR_P (integer)`` + The number of reference pictures used for encoding a P picture. + Applicable to the H264 encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_PADDING (boolean)`` + Padding enable in the encoder - use a color instead of repeating + border pixels. Applicable to encoders. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_PADDING_YUV (integer)`` + Padding color in the encoder. Applicable to encoders. The supplied + 32-bit integer is interpreted as follows (bit 0 = least significant + bit): + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - Bit 0:7 + - V chrominance information + * - Bit 8:15 + - U chrominance information + * - Bit 16:23 + - Y luminance information + * - Bit 24:31 + - Must be zero. + + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_RC_REACTION_COEFF (integer)`` + Reaction coefficient for MFC rate control. Applicable to encoders. + + .. note:: + + #. Valid only when the frame level RC is enabled. + + #. For tight CBR, this field must be small (ex. 2 ~ 10). For + VBR, this field must be large (ex. 100 ~ 1000). + + #. It is not recommended to use the greater number than + FRAME_RATE * (10^9 / BIT_RATE). + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_H264_ADAPTIVE_RC_DARK (boolean)`` + Adaptive rate control for dark region. Valid only when H.264 and + macroblock level RC is enabled + (``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MB_RC_ENABLE``). Applicable to the H264 + encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_H264_ADAPTIVE_RC_SMOOTH (boolean)`` + Adaptive rate control for smooth region. Valid only when H.264 and + macroblock level RC is enabled + (``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MB_RC_ENABLE``). Applicable to the H264 + encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_H264_ADAPTIVE_RC_STATIC (boolean)`` + Adaptive rate control for static region. Valid only when H.264 and + macroblock level RC is enabled + (``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MB_RC_ENABLE``). Applicable to the H264 + encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_H264_ADAPTIVE_RC_ACTIVITY (boolean)`` + Adaptive rate control for activity region. Valid only when H.264 and + macroblock level RC is enabled + (``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MB_RC_ENABLE``). Applicable to the H264 + encoder. + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-mfc51-video-frame-skip-mode: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_FRAME_SKIP_MODE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_mfc51_video_frame_skip_mode - + Indicates in what conditions the encoder should skip frames. If + encoding a frame would cause the encoded stream to be larger then a + chosen data limit then the frame will be skipped. Possible values + are: + + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.5cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_MFC51_FRAME_SKIP_MODE_DISABLED`` + - Frame skip mode is disabled. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_MFC51_FRAME_SKIP_MODE_LEVEL_LIMIT`` + - Frame skip mode enabled and buffer limit is set by the chosen + level and is defined by the standard. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_MFC51_FRAME_SKIP_MODE_BUF_LIMIT`` + - Frame skip mode enabled and buffer limit is set by the VBV + (MPEG1/2/4) or CPB (H264) buffer size control. + + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_RC_FIXED_TARGET_BIT (integer)`` + Enable rate-control with fixed target bit. If this setting is + enabled, then the rate control logic of the encoder will calculate + the average bitrate for a GOP and keep it below or equal the set + bitrate target. Otherwise the rate control logic calculates the + overall average bitrate for the stream and keeps it below or equal + to the set bitrate. In the first case the average bitrate for the + whole stream will be smaller then the set bitrate. This is caused + because the average is calculated for smaller number of frames, on + the other hand enabling this setting will ensure that the stream + will meet tight bandwidth constraints. Applicable to encoders. + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-mfc51-video-force-frame-type: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_FORCE_FRAME_TYPE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_mfc51_video_force_frame_type - + Force a frame type for the next queued buffer. Applicable to + encoders. Possible values are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_MFC51_FORCE_FRAME_TYPE_DISABLED`` + - Forcing a specific frame type disabled. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_MFC51_FORCE_FRAME_TYPE_I_FRAME`` + - Force an I-frame. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_MFC51_FORCE_FRAME_TYPE_NOT_CODED`` + - Force a non-coded frame. + + + + +CX2341x MPEG Controls +===================== + +The following MPEG class controls deal with MPEG encoding settings that +are specific to the Conexant CX23415 and CX23416 MPEG encoding chips. + + +.. _cx2341x-control-id: + +CX2341x Control IDs +------------------- + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-cx2341x-video-spatial-filter-mode: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_SPATIAL_FILTER_MODE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_cx2341x_video_spatial_filter_mode - + Sets the Spatial Filter mode (default ``MANUAL``). Possible values + are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_SPATIAL_FILTER_MODE_MANUAL`` + - Choose the filter manually + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_SPATIAL_FILTER_MODE_AUTO`` + - Choose the filter automatically + + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_SPATIAL_FILTER (integer (0-15))`` + The setting for the Spatial Filter. 0 = off, 15 = maximum. (Default + is 0.) + +.. _luma-spatial-filter-type: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_cx2341x_video_luma_spatial_filter_type - + Select the algorithm to use for the Luma Spatial Filter (default + ``1D_HOR``). Possible values: + + + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{14.5cm}|p{3.0cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_OFF`` + - No filter + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_1D_HOR`` + - One-dimensional horizontal + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_1D_VERT`` + - One-dimensional vertical + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_2D_HV_SEPARABLE`` + - Two-dimensional separable + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_2D_SYM_NON_SEPARABLE`` + - Two-dimensional symmetrical non-separable + + + +.. _chroma-spatial-filter-type: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_CHROMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_cx2341x_video_chroma_spatial_filter_type - + Select the algorithm for the Chroma Spatial Filter (default + ``1D_HOR``). Possible values are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_CHROMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_OFF`` + - No filter + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_CHROMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_1D_HOR`` + - One-dimensional horizontal + + + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-cx2341x-video-temporal-filter-mode: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_TEMPORAL_FILTER_MODE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_cx2341x_video_temporal_filter_mode - + Sets the Temporal Filter mode (default ``MANUAL``). Possible values + are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_TEMPORAL_FILTER_MODE_MANUAL`` + - Choose the filter manually + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_TEMPORAL_FILTER_MODE_AUTO`` + - Choose the filter automatically + + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_TEMPORAL_FILTER (integer (0-31))`` + The setting for the Temporal Filter. 0 = off, 31 = maximum. (Default + is 8 for full-scale capturing and 0 for scaled capturing.) + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-cx2341x-video-median-filter-type: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_MEDIAN_FILTER_TYPE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_cx2341x_video_median_filter_type - + Median Filter Type (default ``OFF``). Possible values are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_MEDIAN_FILTER_TYPE_OFF`` + - No filter + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_MEDIAN_FILTER_TYPE_HOR`` + - Horizontal filter + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_MEDIAN_FILTER_TYPE_VERT`` + - Vertical filter + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_MEDIAN_FILTER_TYPE_HOR_VERT`` + - Horizontal and vertical filter + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_MEDIAN_FILTER_TYPE_DIAG`` + - Diagonal filter + + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_MEDIAN_FILTER_BOTTOM (integer (0-255))`` + Threshold above which the luminance median filter is enabled + (default 0) + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_MEDIAN_FILTER_TOP (integer (0-255))`` + Threshold below which the luminance median filter is enabled + (default 255) + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_CHROMA_MEDIAN_FILTER_BOTTOM (integer (0-255))`` + Threshold above which the chroma median filter is enabled (default + 0) + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_CHROMA_MEDIAN_FILTER_TOP (integer (0-255))`` + Threshold below which the chroma median filter is enabled (default + 255) + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_STREAM_INSERT_NAV_PACKETS (boolean)`` + The CX2341X MPEG encoder can insert one empty MPEG-2 PES packet into + the stream between every four video frames. The packet size is 2048 + bytes, including the packet_start_code_prefix and stream_id + fields. The stream_id is 0xBF (private stream 2). The payload + consists of 0x00 bytes, to be filled in by the application. 0 = do + not insert, 1 = insert packets. + + +VPX Control Reference +===================== + +The VPX controls include controls for encoding parameters of VPx video +codec. + + +.. _vpx-control-id: + +VPX Control IDs +--------------- + +.. _v4l2-vpx-num-partitions: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_NUM_PARTITIONS`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_vp8_num_partitions - + The number of token partitions to use in VP8 encoder. Possible + values are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_1_PARTITION`` + - 1 coefficient partition + * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_2_PARTITIONS`` + - 2 coefficient partitions + * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_4_PARTITIONS`` + - 4 coefficient partitions + * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_8_PARTITIONS`` + - 8 coefficient partitions + + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_IMD_DISABLE_4X4 (boolean)`` + Setting this prevents intra 4x4 mode in the intra mode decision. + +.. _v4l2-vpx-num-ref-frames: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_NUM_REF_FRAMES`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_vp8_num_ref_frames - + The number of reference pictures for encoding P frames. Possible + values are: + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.9cm}|p{9.6cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_1_REF_FRAME`` + - Last encoded frame will be searched + * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_2_REF_FRAME`` + - Two frames will be searched among the last encoded frame, the + golden frame and the alternate reference (altref) frame. The + encoder implementation will decide which two are chosen. + * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_3_REF_FRAME`` + - The last encoded frame, the golden frame and the altref frame will + be searched. + + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_FILTER_LEVEL (integer)`` + Indicates the loop filter level. The adjustment of the loop filter + level is done via a delta value against a baseline loop filter + value. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_FILTER_SHARPNESS (integer)`` + This parameter affects the loop filter. Anything above zero weakens + the deblocking effect on the loop filter. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_GOLDEN_FRAME_REF_PERIOD (integer)`` + Sets the refresh period for the golden frame. The period is defined + in number of frames. For a value of 'n', every nth frame starting + from the first key frame will be taken as a golden frame. For eg. + for encoding sequence of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 where the golden + frame refresh period is set as 4, the frames 0, 4, 8 etc will be + taken as the golden frames as frame 0 is always a key frame. + +.. _v4l2-vpx-golden-frame-sel: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_GOLDEN_FRAME_SEL`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_vp8_golden_frame_sel - + Selects the golden frame for encoding. Possible values are: + +.. raw:: latex + + \footnotesize + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.0cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_GOLDEN_FRAME_USE_PREV`` + - Use the (n-2)th frame as a golden frame, current frame index being + 'n'. + * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_GOLDEN_FRAME_USE_REF_PERIOD`` + - Use the previous specific frame indicated by + ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_GOLDEN_FRAME_REF_PERIOD`` as a + golden frame. + +.. raw:: latex + + \normalsize + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_MIN_QP (integer)`` + Minimum quantization parameter for VP8. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_MAX_QP (integer)`` + Maximum quantization parameter for VP8. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_I_FRAME_QP (integer)`` + Quantization parameter for an I frame for VP8. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_P_FRAME_QP (integer)`` + Quantization parameter for a P frame for VP8. + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-vp8-profile: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VP8_PROFILE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_vp8_profile - + This control allows selecting the profile for VP8 encoder. + This is also used to enumerate supported profiles by VP8 encoder or decoder. + Possible values are: + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP8_PROFILE_0`` + - Profile 0 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP8_PROFILE_1`` + - Profile 1 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP8_PROFILE_2`` + - Profile 2 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP8_PROFILE_3`` + - Profile 3 + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-vp9-profile: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VP9_PROFILE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_vp9_profile - + This control allows selecting the profile for VP9 encoder. + This is also used to enumerate supported profiles by VP9 encoder or decoder. + Possible values are: + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP9_PROFILE_0`` + - Profile 0 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP9_PROFILE_1`` + - Profile 1 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP9_PROFILE_2`` + - Profile 2 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP9_PROFILE_3`` + - Profile 3 + + +High Efficiency Video Coding (HEVC/H.265) Control Reference +=========================================================== + +The HEVC/H.265 controls include controls for encoding parameters of HEVC/H.265 +video codec. + + +.. _hevc-control-id: + +HEVC/H.265 Control IDs +---------------------- + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP (integer)`` + Minimum quantization parameter for HEVC. + Valid range: from 0 to 51. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP (integer)`` + Maximum quantization parameter for HEVC. + Valid range: from 0 to 51. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_I_FRAME_QP (integer)`` + Quantization parameter for an I frame for HEVC. + Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP, + V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP]. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_P_FRAME_QP (integer)`` + Quantization parameter for a P frame for HEVC. + Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP, + V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP]. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_B_FRAME_QP (integer)`` + Quantization parameter for a B frame for HEVC. + Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP, + V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP]. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_QP (boolean)`` + HIERARCHICAL_QP allows the host to specify the quantization parameter + values for each temporal layer through HIERARCHICAL_QP_LAYER. This is + valid only if HIERARCHICAL_CODING_LAYER is greater than 1. Setting the + control value to 1 enables setting of the QP values for the layers. + +.. _v4l2-hevc-hier-coding-type: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_TYPE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_hier_coding_type - + Selects the hierarchical coding type for encoding. Possible values are: + +.. raw:: latex + + \footnotesize + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.0cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_B`` + - Use the B frame for hierarchical coding. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_P`` + - Use the P frame for hierarchical coding. + +.. raw:: latex + + \normalsize + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_LAYER (integer)`` + Selects the hierarchical coding layer. In normal encoding + (non-hierarchial coding), it should be zero. Possible values are [0, 6]. + 0 indicates HIERARCHICAL CODING LAYER 0, 1 indicates HIERARCHICAL CODING + LAYER 1 and so on. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L0_QP (integer)`` + Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 0. + Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP, + V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP]. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L1_QP (integer)`` + Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 1. + Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP, + V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP]. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L2_QP (integer)`` + Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 2. + Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP, + V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP]. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L3_QP (integer)`` + Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 3. + Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP, + V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP]. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L4_QP (integer)`` + Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 4. + Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP, + V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP]. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L5_QP (integer)`` + Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 5. + Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP, + V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP]. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L6_QP (integer)`` + Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 6. + Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP, + V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP]. + +.. _v4l2-hevc-profile: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_PROFILE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_profile - + Select the desired profile for HEVC encoder. + +.. raw:: latex + + \footnotesize + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.0cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_PROFILE_MAIN`` + - Main profile. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_PROFILE_MAIN_STILL_PICTURE`` + - Main still picture profile. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_PROFILE_MAIN_10`` + - Main 10 profile. + +.. raw:: latex + + \normalsize + + +.. _v4l2-hevc-level: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_level - + Selects the desired level for HEVC encoder. + +.. raw:: latex + + \footnotesize + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.0cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_1`` + - Level 1.0 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_2`` + - Level 2.0 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_2_1`` + - Level 2.1 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_3`` + - Level 3.0 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_3_1`` + - Level 3.1 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_4`` + - Level 4.0 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_4_1`` + - Level 4.1 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_5`` + - Level 5.0 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_5_1`` + - Level 5.1 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_5_2`` + - Level 5.2 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_6`` + - Level 6.0 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_6_1`` + - Level 6.1 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_6_2`` + - Level 6.2 + +.. raw:: latex + + \normalsize + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_FRAME_RATE_RESOLUTION (integer)`` + Indicates the number of evenly spaced subintervals, called ticks, within + one second. This is a 16 bit unsigned integer and has a maximum value up to + 0xffff and a minimum value of 1. + +.. _v4l2-hevc-tier: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_TIER`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_tier - + TIER_FLAG specifies tiers information of the HEVC encoded picture. Tier + were made to deal with applications that differ in terms of maximum bit + rate. Setting the flag to 0 selects HEVC tier as Main tier and setting + this flag to 1 indicates High tier. High tier is for applications requiring + high bit rates. + +.. raw:: latex + + \footnotesize + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.0cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_TIER_MAIN`` + - Main tier. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_TIER_HIGH`` + - High tier. + +.. raw:: latex + + \normalsize + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_PARTITION_DEPTH (integer)`` + Selects HEVC maximum coding unit depth. + +.. _v4l2-hevc-loop-filter-mode: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LOOP_FILTER_MODE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_loop_filter_mode - + Loop filter mode for HEVC encoder. Possible values are: + +.. raw:: latex + + \footnotesize + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{10.7cm}|p{6.3cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LOOP_FILTER_MODE_DISABLED`` + - Loop filter is disabled. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LOOP_FILTER_MODE_ENABLED`` + - Loop filter is enabled. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LOOP_FILTER_MODE_DISABLED_AT_SLICE_BOUNDARY`` + - Loop filter is disabled at the slice boundary. + +.. raw:: latex + + \normalsize + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LF_BETA_OFFSET_DIV2 (integer)`` + Selects HEVC loop filter beta offset. The valid range is [-6, +6]. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LF_TC_OFFSET_DIV2 (integer)`` + Selects HEVC loop filter tc offset. The valid range is [-6, +6]. + +.. _v4l2-hevc-refresh-type: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_REFRESH_TYPE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_hier_refresh_type - + Selects refresh type for HEVC encoder. + Host has to specify the period into + V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_REFRESH_PERIOD. + +.. raw:: latex + + \footnotesize + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{8.0cm}|p{9.0cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_REFRESH_NONE`` + - Use the B frame for hierarchical coding. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_REFRESH_CRA`` + - Use CRA (Clean Random Access Unit) picture encoding. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_REFRESH_IDR`` + - Use IDR (Instantaneous Decoding Refresh) picture encoding. + +.. raw:: latex + + \normalsize + + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_REFRESH_PERIOD (integer)`` + Selects the refresh period for HEVC encoder. + This specifies the number of I pictures between two CRA/IDR pictures. + This is valid only if REFRESH_TYPE is not 0. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LOSSLESS_CU (boolean)`` + Indicates HEVC lossless encoding. Setting it to 0 disables lossless + encoding. Setting it to 1 enables lossless encoding. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_CONST_INTRA_PRED (boolean)`` + Indicates constant intra prediction for HEVC encoder. Specifies the + constrained intra prediction in which intra largest coding unit (LCU) + prediction is performed by using residual data and decoded samples of + neighboring intra LCU only. Setting the value to 1 enables constant intra + prediction and setting the value to 0 disables constant intra prediction. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_WAVEFRONT (boolean)`` + Indicates wavefront parallel processing for HEVC encoder. Setting it to 0 + disables the feature and setting it to 1 enables the wavefront parallel + processing. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_GENERAL_PB (boolean)`` + Setting the value to 1 enables combination of P and B frame for HEVC + encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_TEMPORAL_ID (boolean)`` + Indicates temporal identifier for HEVC encoder which is enabled by + setting the value to 1. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_STRONG_SMOOTHING (boolean)`` + Indicates bi-linear interpolation is conditionally used in the intra + prediction filtering process in the CVS when set to 1. Indicates bi-linear + interpolation is not used in the CVS when set to 0. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_NUM_MERGE_MV_MINUS1 (integer)`` + Indicates maximum number of merge candidate motion vectors. + Values are from 0 to 4. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_TMV_PREDICTION (boolean)`` + Indicates temporal motion vector prediction for HEVC encoder. Setting it to + 1 enables the prediction. Setting it to 0 disables the prediction. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_WITHOUT_STARTCODE (boolean)`` + Specifies if HEVC generates a stream with a size of the length field + instead of start code pattern. The size of the length field is configurable + through the V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_SIZE_OF_LENGTH_FIELD control. Setting + the value to 0 disables encoding without startcode pattern. Setting the + value to 1 will enables encoding without startcode pattern. + +.. _v4l2-hevc-size-of-length-field: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_SIZE_OF_LENGTH_FIELD`` +(enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_size_of_length_field - + Indicates the size of length field. + This is valid when encoding WITHOUT_STARTCODE_ENABLE is enabled. + +.. raw:: latex + + \footnotesize + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.0cm}|p{11.0cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_SIZE_0`` + - Generate start code pattern (Normal). + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_SIZE_1`` + - Generate size of length field instead of start code pattern and length is 1. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_SIZE_2`` + - Generate size of length field instead of start code pattern and length is 2. + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_SIZE_4`` + - Generate size of length field instead of start code pattern and length is 4. + +.. raw:: latex + + \normalsize + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L0_BR (integer)`` + Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 0 for HEVC encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L1_BR (integer)`` + Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 1 for HEVC encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L2_BR (integer)`` + Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 2 for HEVC encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L3_BR (integer)`` + Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 3 for HEVC encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L4_BR (integer)`` + Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 4 for HEVC encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L5_BR (integer)`` + Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 5 for HEVC encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L6_BR (integer)`` + Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 6 for HEVC encoder. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_REF_NUMBER_FOR_PFRAMES (integer)`` + Selects number of P reference pictures required for HEVC encoder. + P-Frame can use 1 or 2 frames for reference. + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_PREPEND_SPSPPS_TO_IDR (integer)`` + Indicates whether to generate SPS and PPS at every IDR. Setting it to 0 + disables generating SPS and PPS at every IDR. Setting it to one enables + generating SPS and PPS at every IDR. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-detect.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-detect.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8a45ce642829 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-detect.rst @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +.. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this +.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, +.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software +.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts +.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at +.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst. +.. +.. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections + +.. _detect-controls: + +************************ +Detect Control Reference +************************ + +The Detect class includes controls for common features of various motion +or object detection capable devices. + + +.. _detect-control-id: + +Detect Control IDs +================== + +``V4L2_CID_DETECT_CLASS (class)`` + The Detect class descriptor. Calling + :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will + return a description of this control class. + +``V4L2_CID_DETECT_MD_MODE (menu)`` + Sets the motion detection mode. + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.5cm}|p{10.0cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_DISABLED`` + - Disable motion detection. + * - ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_GLOBAL`` + - Use a single motion detection threshold. + * - ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_THRESHOLD_GRID`` + - The image is divided into a grid, each cell with its own motion + detection threshold. These thresholds are set through the + ``V4L2_CID_DETECT_MD_THRESHOLD_GRID`` matrix control. + * - ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_REGION_GRID`` + - The image is divided into a grid, each cell with its own region + value that specifies which per-region motion detection thresholds + should be used. Each region has its own thresholds. How these + per-region thresholds are set up is driver-specific. The region + values for the grid are set through the + ``V4L2_CID_DETECT_MD_REGION_GRID`` matrix control. + + + +``V4L2_CID_DETECT_MD_GLOBAL_THRESHOLD (integer)`` + Sets the global motion detection threshold to be used with the + ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_GLOBAL`` motion detection mode. + +``V4L2_CID_DETECT_MD_THRESHOLD_GRID (__u16 matrix)`` + Sets the motion detection thresholds for each cell in the grid. To + be used with the ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_THRESHOLD_GRID`` motion + detection mode. Matrix element (0, 0) represents the cell at the + top-left of the grid. + +``V4L2_CID_DETECT_MD_REGION_GRID (__u8 matrix)`` + Sets the motion detection region value for each cell in the grid. To + be used with the ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_REGION_GRID`` motion + detection mode. Matrix element (0, 0) represents the cell at the + top-left of the grid. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-dv.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-dv.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..57edf211875c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-dv.rst @@ -0,0 +1,166 @@ +.. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this +.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, +.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software +.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts +.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at +.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst. +.. +.. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections + +.. _dv-controls: + +******************************* +Digital Video Control Reference +******************************* + +The Digital Video control class is intended to control receivers and +transmitters for `VGA <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vga>`__, +`DVI <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Digital_Visual_Interface>`__ +(Digital Visual Interface), HDMI (:ref:`hdmi`) and DisplayPort +(:ref:`dp`). These controls are generally expected to be private to +the receiver or transmitter subdevice that implements them, so they are +only exposed on the ``/dev/v4l-subdev*`` device node. + +.. note:: + + Note that these devices can have multiple input or output pads which are + hooked up to e.g. HDMI connectors. Even though the subdevice will + receive or transmit video from/to only one of those pads, the other pads + can still be active when it comes to EDID (Extended Display + Identification Data, :ref:`vesaedid`) and HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital + Content Protection System, :ref:`hdcp`) processing, allowing the + device to do the fairly slow EDID/HDCP handling in advance. This allows + for quick switching between connectors. + +These pads appear in several of the controls in this section as +bitmasks, one bit for each pad. Bit 0 corresponds to pad 0, bit 1 to pad +1, etc. The maximum value of the control is the set of valid pads. + + +.. _dv-control-id: + +Digital Video Control IDs +========================= + +``V4L2_CID_DV_CLASS (class)`` + The Digital Video class descriptor. + +``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_HOTPLUG (bitmask)`` + Many connectors have a hotplug pin which is high if EDID information + is available from the source. This control shows the state of the + hotplug pin as seen by the transmitter. Each bit corresponds to an + output pad on the transmitter. If an output pad does not have an + associated hotplug pin, then the bit for that pad will be 0. This + read-only control is applicable to DVI-D, HDMI and DisplayPort + connectors. + +``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_RXSENSE (bitmask)`` + Rx Sense is the detection of pull-ups on the TMDS clock lines. This + normally means that the sink has left/entered standby (i.e. the + transmitter can sense that the receiver is ready to receive video). + Each bit corresponds to an output pad on the transmitter. If an + output pad does not have an associated Rx Sense, then the bit for + that pad will be 0. This read-only control is applicable to DVI-D + and HDMI devices. + +``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_EDID_PRESENT (bitmask)`` + When the transmitter sees the hotplug signal from the receiver it + will attempt to read the EDID. If set, then the transmitter has read + at least the first block (= 128 bytes). Each bit corresponds to an + output pad on the transmitter. If an output pad does not support + EDIDs, then the bit for that pad will be 0. This read-only control + is applicable to VGA, DVI-A/D, HDMI and DisplayPort connectors. + +``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_MODE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_dv_tx_mode - + HDMI transmitters can transmit in DVI-D mode (just video) or in HDMI + mode (video + audio + auxiliary data). This control selects which + mode to use: V4L2_DV_TX_MODE_DVI_D or V4L2_DV_TX_MODE_HDMI. + This control is applicable to HDMI connectors. + +``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_RGB_RANGE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_dv_rgb_range - + Select the quantization range for RGB output. V4L2_DV_RANGE_AUTO + follows the RGB quantization range specified in the standard for the + video interface (ie. :ref:`cea861` for HDMI). + V4L2_DV_RANGE_LIMITED and V4L2_DV_RANGE_FULL override the + standard to be compatible with sinks that have not implemented the + standard correctly (unfortunately quite common for HDMI and DVI-D). + Full range allows all possible values to be used whereas limited + range sets the range to (16 << (N-8)) - (235 << (N-8)) where N is + the number of bits per component. This control is applicable to VGA, + DVI-A/D, HDMI and DisplayPort connectors. + +``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_IT_CONTENT_TYPE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_dv_it_content_type - + Configures the IT Content Type of the transmitted video. This + information is sent over HDMI and DisplayPort connectors as part of + the AVI InfoFrame. The term 'IT Content' is used for content that + originates from a computer as opposed to content from a TV broadcast + or an analog source. The enum v4l2_dv_it_content_type defines + the possible content types: + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.0cm}|p{10.5cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_DV_IT_CONTENT_TYPE_GRAPHICS`` + - Graphics content. Pixel data should be passed unfiltered and + without analog reconstruction. + * - ``V4L2_DV_IT_CONTENT_TYPE_PHOTO`` + - Photo content. The content is derived from digital still pictures. + The content should be passed through with minimal scaling and + picture enhancements. + * - ``V4L2_DV_IT_CONTENT_TYPE_CINEMA`` + - Cinema content. + * - ``V4L2_DV_IT_CONTENT_TYPE_GAME`` + - Game content. Audio and video latency should be minimized. + * - ``V4L2_DV_IT_CONTENT_TYPE_NO_ITC`` + - No IT Content information is available and the ITC bit in the AVI + InfoFrame is set to 0. + + + +``V4L2_CID_DV_RX_POWER_PRESENT (bitmask)`` + Detects whether the receiver receives power from the source (e.g. + HDMI carries 5V on one of the pins). This is often used to power an + eeprom which contains EDID information, such that the source can + read the EDID even if the sink is in standby/power off. Each bit + corresponds to an input pad on the receiver. If an input pad + cannot detect whether power is present, then the bit for that pad + will be 0. This read-only control is applicable to DVI-D, HDMI and + DisplayPort connectors. + +``V4L2_CID_DV_RX_RGB_RANGE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_dv_rgb_range - + Select the quantization range for RGB input. V4L2_DV_RANGE_AUTO + follows the RGB quantization range specified in the standard for the + video interface (ie. :ref:`cea861` for HDMI). + V4L2_DV_RANGE_LIMITED and V4L2_DV_RANGE_FULL override the + standard to be compatible with sources that have not implemented the + standard correctly (unfortunately quite common for HDMI and DVI-D). + Full range allows all possible values to be used whereas limited + range sets the range to (16 << (N-8)) - (235 << (N-8)) where N is + the number of bits per component. This control is applicable to VGA, + DVI-A/D, HDMI and DisplayPort connectors. + +``V4L2_CID_DV_RX_IT_CONTENT_TYPE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_dv_it_content_type - + Reads the IT Content Type of the received video. This information is + sent over HDMI and DisplayPort connectors as part of the AVI + InfoFrame. The term 'IT Content' is used for content that originates + from a computer as opposed to content from a TV broadcast or an + analog source. See ``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_IT_CONTENT_TYPE`` for the + available content types. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-flash.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-flash.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5f30791c35b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-flash.rst @@ -0,0 +1,192 @@ +.. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this +.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, +.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software +.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts +.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at +.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst. +.. +.. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections + +.. _flash-controls: + +*********************** +Flash Control Reference +*********************** + +The V4L2 flash controls are intended to provide generic access to flash +controller devices. Flash controller devices are typically used in +digital cameras. + +The interface can support both LED and xenon flash devices. As of +writing this, there is no xenon flash driver using this interface. + + +.. _flash-controls-use-cases: + +Supported use cases +=================== + + +Unsynchronised LED flash (software strobe) +------------------------------------------ + +Unsynchronised LED flash is controlled directly by the host as the +sensor. The flash must be enabled by the host before the exposure of the +image starts and disabled once it ends. The host is fully responsible +for the timing of the flash. + +Example of such device: Nokia N900. + + +Synchronised LED flash (hardware strobe) +---------------------------------------- + +The synchronised LED flash is pre-programmed by the host (power and +timeout) but controlled by the sensor through a strobe signal from the +sensor to the flash. + +The sensor controls the flash duration and timing. This information +typically must be made available to the sensor. + + +LED flash as torch +------------------ + +LED flash may be used as torch in conjunction with another use case +involving camera or individually. + + +.. _flash-control-id: + +Flash Control IDs +----------------- + +``V4L2_CID_FLASH_CLASS (class)`` + The FLASH class descriptor. + +``V4L2_CID_FLASH_LED_MODE (menu)`` + Defines the mode of the flash LED, the high-power white LED attached + to the flash controller. Setting this control may not be possible in + presence of some faults. See V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT. + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_NONE`` + - Off. + * - ``V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_FLASH`` + - Flash mode. + * - ``V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_TORCH`` + - Torch mode. See V4L2_CID_FLASH_TORCH_INTENSITY. + + + +``V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE (menu)`` + Defines the source of the flash LED strobe. + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.0cm}|p{10.5cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE_SOFTWARE`` + - The flash strobe is triggered by using the + V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE control. + * - ``V4L2_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE_EXTERNAL`` + - The flash strobe is triggered by an external source. Typically + this is a sensor, which makes it possible to synchronises the + flash strobe start to exposure start. + + + +``V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE (button)`` + Strobe flash. Valid when V4L2_CID_FLASH_LED_MODE is set to + V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_FLASH and V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE + is set to V4L2_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE_SOFTWARE. Setting this + control may not be possible in presence of some faults. See + V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT. + +``V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_STOP (button)`` + Stop flash strobe immediately. + +``V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_STATUS (boolean)`` + Strobe status: whether the flash is strobing at the moment or not. + This is a read-only control. + +``V4L2_CID_FLASH_TIMEOUT (integer)`` + Hardware timeout for flash. The flash strobe is stopped after this + period of time has passed from the start of the strobe. + +``V4L2_CID_FLASH_INTENSITY (integer)`` + Intensity of the flash strobe when the flash LED is in flash mode + (V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_FLASH). The unit should be milliamps (mA) + if possible. + +``V4L2_CID_FLASH_TORCH_INTENSITY (integer)`` + Intensity of the flash LED in torch mode + (V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_TORCH). The unit should be milliamps (mA) + if possible. Setting this control may not be possible in presence of + some faults. See V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT. + +``V4L2_CID_FLASH_INDICATOR_INTENSITY (integer)`` + Intensity of the indicator LED. The indicator LED may be fully + independent of the flash LED. The unit should be microamps (uA) if + possible. + +``V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT (bitmask)`` + Faults related to the flash. The faults tell about specific problems + in the flash chip itself or the LEDs attached to it. Faults may + prevent further use of some of the flash controls. In particular, + V4L2_CID_FLASH_LED_MODE is set to V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_NONE + if the fault affects the flash LED. Exactly which faults have such + an effect is chip dependent. Reading the faults resets the control + and returns the chip to a usable state if possible. + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{8.0cm}|p{9.5cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_OVER_VOLTAGE`` + - Flash controller voltage to the flash LED has exceeded the limit + specific to the flash controller. + * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_TIMEOUT`` + - The flash strobe was still on when the timeout set by the user --- + V4L2_CID_FLASH_TIMEOUT control --- has expired. Not all flash + controllers may set this in all such conditions. + * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_OVER_TEMPERATURE`` + - The flash controller has overheated. + * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_SHORT_CIRCUIT`` + - The short circuit protection of the flash controller has been + triggered. + * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_OVER_CURRENT`` + - Current in the LED power supply has exceeded the limit specific to + the flash controller. + * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_INDICATOR`` + - The flash controller has detected a short or open circuit + condition on the indicator LED. + * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_UNDER_VOLTAGE`` + - Flash controller voltage to the flash LED has been below the + minimum limit specific to the flash controller. + * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_INPUT_VOLTAGE`` + - The input voltage of the flash controller is below the limit under + which strobing the flash at full current will not be possible.The + condition persists until this flag is no longer set. + * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_LED_OVER_TEMPERATURE`` + - The temperature of the LED has exceeded its allowed upper limit. + + + +``V4L2_CID_FLASH_CHARGE (boolean)`` + Enable or disable charging of the xenon flash capacitor. + +``V4L2_CID_FLASH_READY (boolean)`` + Is the flash ready to strobe? Xenon flashes require their capacitors + charged before strobing. LED flashes often require a cooldown period + after strobe during which another strobe will not be possible. This + is a read-only control. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-fm-rx.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-fm-rx.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..3ed6dd7f586d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-fm-rx.rst @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +.. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this +.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, +.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software +.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts +.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at +.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst. +.. +.. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections + +.. _fm-rx-controls: + +***************************** +FM Receiver Control Reference +***************************** + +The FM Receiver (FM_RX) class includes controls for common features of +FM Reception capable devices. + + +.. _fm-rx-control-id: + +FM_RX Control IDs +================= + +``V4L2_CID_FM_RX_CLASS (class)`` + The FM_RX class descriptor. Calling + :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will + return a description of this control class. + +``V4L2_CID_RDS_RECEPTION (boolean)`` + Enables/disables RDS reception by the radio tuner + +``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_PTY (integer)`` + Gets RDS Programme Type field. This encodes up to 31 pre-defined + programme types. + +``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_PS_NAME (string)`` + Gets the Programme Service name (PS_NAME). It is intended for + static display on a receiver. It is the primary aid to listeners in + programme service identification and selection. In Annex E of + :ref:`iec62106`, the RDS specification, there is a full + description of the correct character encoding for Programme Service + name strings. Also from RDS specification, PS is usually a single + eight character text. However, it is also possible to find receivers + which can scroll strings sized as 8 x N characters. So, this control + must be configured with steps of 8 characters. The result is it must + always contain a string with size multiple of 8. + +``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_RADIO_TEXT (string)`` + Gets the Radio Text info. It is a textual description of what is + being broadcasted. RDS Radio Text can be applied when broadcaster + wishes to transmit longer PS names, programme-related information or + any other text. In these cases, RadioText can be used in addition to + ``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_PS_NAME``. The encoding for Radio Text strings is + also fully described in Annex E of :ref:`iec62106`. The length of + Radio Text strings depends on which RDS Block is being used to + transmit it, either 32 (2A block) or 64 (2B block). However, it is + also possible to find receivers which can scroll strings sized as 32 + x N or 64 x N characters. So, this control must be configured with + steps of 32 or 64 characters. The result is it must always contain a + string with size multiple of 32 or 64. + +``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_TRAFFIC_ANNOUNCEMENT (boolean)`` + If set, then a traffic announcement is in progress. + +``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_TRAFFIC_PROGRAM (boolean)`` + If set, then the tuned programme carries traffic announcements. + +``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_MUSIC_SPEECH (boolean)`` + If set, then this channel broadcasts music. If cleared, then it + broadcasts speech. If the transmitter doesn't make this distinction, + then it will be set. + +``V4L2_CID_TUNE_DEEMPHASIS`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_deemphasis - + Configures the de-emphasis value for reception. A de-emphasis filter + is applied to the broadcast to accentuate the high audio + frequencies. Depending on the region, a time constant of either 50 + or 75 useconds is used. The enum v4l2_deemphasis defines possible + values for de-emphasis. Here they are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_DEEMPHASIS_DISABLED`` + - No de-emphasis is applied. + * - ``V4L2_DEEMPHASIS_50_uS`` + - A de-emphasis of 50 uS is used. + * - ``V4L2_DEEMPHASIS_75_uS`` + - A de-emphasis of 75 uS is used. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-fm-tx.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-fm-tx.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..db88346d99fd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-fm-tx.rst @@ -0,0 +1,188 @@ +.. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this +.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, +.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software +.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts +.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at +.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst. +.. +.. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections + +.. _fm-tx-controls: + +******************************** +FM Transmitter Control Reference +******************************** + +The FM Transmitter (FM_TX) class includes controls for common features +of FM transmissions capable devices. Currently this class includes +parameters for audio compression, pilot tone generation, audio deviation +limiter, RDS transmission and tuning power features. + + +.. _fm-tx-control-id: + +FM_TX Control IDs +================= + +``V4L2_CID_FM_TX_CLASS (class)`` + The FM_TX class descriptor. Calling + :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will + return a description of this control class. + +``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_DEVIATION (integer)`` + Configures RDS signal frequency deviation level in Hz. The range and + step are driver-specific. + +``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_PI (integer)`` + Sets the RDS Programme Identification field for transmission. + +``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_PTY (integer)`` + Sets the RDS Programme Type field for transmission. This encodes up + to 31 pre-defined programme types. + +``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_PS_NAME (string)`` + Sets the Programme Service name (PS_NAME) for transmission. It is + intended for static display on a receiver. It is the primary aid to + listeners in programme service identification and selection. In + Annex E of :ref:`iec62106`, the RDS specification, there is a full + description of the correct character encoding for Programme Service + name strings. Also from RDS specification, PS is usually a single + eight character text. However, it is also possible to find receivers + which can scroll strings sized as 8 x N characters. So, this control + must be configured with steps of 8 characters. The result is it must + always contain a string with size multiple of 8. + +``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_RADIO_TEXT (string)`` + Sets the Radio Text info for transmission. It is a textual + description of what is being broadcasted. RDS Radio Text can be + applied when broadcaster wishes to transmit longer PS names, + programme-related information or any other text. In these cases, + RadioText should be used in addition to ``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_PS_NAME``. + The encoding for Radio Text strings is also fully described in Annex + E of :ref:`iec62106`. The length of Radio Text strings depends on + which RDS Block is being used to transmit it, either 32 (2A block) + or 64 (2B block). However, it is also possible to find receivers + which can scroll strings sized as 32 x N or 64 x N characters. So, + this control must be configured with steps of 32 or 64 characters. + The result is it must always contain a string with size multiple of + 32 or 64. + +``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_MONO_STEREO (boolean)`` + Sets the Mono/Stereo bit of the Decoder Identification code. If set, + then the audio was recorded as stereo. + +``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_ARTIFICIAL_HEAD (boolean)`` + Sets the + `Artificial Head <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Artificial_head>`__ + bit of the Decoder Identification code. If set, then the audio was + recorded using an artificial head. + +``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_COMPRESSED (boolean)`` + Sets the Compressed bit of the Decoder Identification code. If set, + then the audio is compressed. + +``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_DYNAMIC_PTY (boolean)`` + Sets the Dynamic PTY bit of the Decoder Identification code. If set, + then the PTY code is dynamically switched. + +``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_TRAFFIC_ANNOUNCEMENT (boolean)`` + If set, then a traffic announcement is in progress. + +``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_TRAFFIC_PROGRAM (boolean)`` + If set, then the tuned programme carries traffic announcements. + +``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_MUSIC_SPEECH (boolean)`` + If set, then this channel broadcasts music. If cleared, then it + broadcasts speech. If the transmitter doesn't make this distinction, + then it should be set. + +``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_ALT_FREQS_ENABLE (boolean)`` + If set, then transmit alternate frequencies. + +``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_ALT_FREQS (__u32 array)`` + The alternate frequencies in kHz units. The RDS standard allows for + up to 25 frequencies to be defined. Drivers may support fewer + frequencies so check the array size. + +``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_LIMITER_ENABLED (boolean)`` + Enables or disables the audio deviation limiter feature. The limiter + is useful when trying to maximize the audio volume, minimize + receiver-generated distortion and prevent overmodulation. + +``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_LIMITER_RELEASE_TIME (integer)`` + Sets the audio deviation limiter feature release time. Unit is in + useconds. Step and range are driver-specific. + +``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_LIMITER_DEVIATION (integer)`` + Configures audio frequency deviation level in Hz. The range and step + are driver-specific. + +``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_COMPRESSION_ENABLED (boolean)`` + Enables or disables the audio compression feature. This feature + amplifies signals below the threshold by a fixed gain and compresses + audio signals above the threshold by the ratio of Threshold/(Gain + + Threshold). + +``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_COMPRESSION_GAIN (integer)`` + Sets the gain for audio compression feature. It is a dB value. The + range and step are driver-specific. + +``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_COMPRESSION_THRESHOLD (integer)`` + Sets the threshold level for audio compression freature. It is a dB + value. The range and step are driver-specific. + +``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_COMPRESSION_ATTACK_TIME (integer)`` + Sets the attack time for audio compression feature. It is a useconds + value. The range and step are driver-specific. + +``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_COMPRESSION_RELEASE_TIME (integer)`` + Sets the release time for audio compression feature. It is a + useconds value. The range and step are driver-specific. + +``V4L2_CID_PILOT_TONE_ENABLED (boolean)`` + Enables or disables the pilot tone generation feature. + +``V4L2_CID_PILOT_TONE_DEVIATION (integer)`` + Configures pilot tone frequency deviation level. Unit is in Hz. The + range and step are driver-specific. + +``V4L2_CID_PILOT_TONE_FREQUENCY (integer)`` + Configures pilot tone frequency value. Unit is in Hz. The range and + step are driver-specific. + +``V4L2_CID_TUNE_PREEMPHASIS`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_preemphasis - + Configures the pre-emphasis value for broadcasting. A pre-emphasis + filter is applied to the broadcast to accentuate the high audio + frequencies. Depending on the region, a time constant of either 50 + or 75 useconds is used. The enum v4l2_preemphasis defines possible + values for pre-emphasis. Here they are: + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_PREEMPHASIS_DISABLED`` + - No pre-emphasis is applied. + * - ``V4L2_PREEMPHASIS_50_uS`` + - A pre-emphasis of 50 uS is used. + * - ``V4L2_PREEMPHASIS_75_uS`` + - A pre-emphasis of 75 uS is used. + + + +``V4L2_CID_TUNE_POWER_LEVEL (integer)`` + Sets the output power level for signal transmission. Unit is in + dBuV. Range and step are driver-specific. + +``V4L2_CID_TUNE_ANTENNA_CAPACITOR (integer)`` + This selects the value of antenna tuning capacitor manually or + automatically if set to zero. Unit, range and step are + driver-specific. + +For more details about RDS specification, refer to :ref:`iec62106` +document, from CENELEC. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-image-process.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-image-process.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..22fc2d3e433d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-image-process.rst @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +.. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this +.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, +.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software +.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts +.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at +.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst. +.. +.. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections + +.. _image-process-controls: + +******************************* +Image Process Control Reference +******************************* + +The Image Process control class is intended for low-level control of +image processing functions. Unlike ``V4L2_CID_IMAGE_SOURCE_CLASS``, the +controls in this class affect processing the image, and do not control +capturing of it. + + +.. _image-process-control-id: + +Image Process Control IDs +========================= + +``V4L2_CID_IMAGE_PROC_CLASS (class)`` + The IMAGE_PROC class descriptor. + +``V4L2_CID_LINK_FREQ (integer menu)`` + Data bus frequency. Together with the media bus pixel code, bus type + (clock cycles per sample), the data bus frequency defines the pixel + rate (``V4L2_CID_PIXEL_RATE``) in the pixel array (or possibly + elsewhere, if the device is not an image sensor). The frame rate can + be calculated from the pixel clock, image width and height and + horizontal and vertical blanking. While the pixel rate control may + be defined elsewhere than in the subdev containing the pixel array, + the frame rate cannot be obtained from that information. This is + because only on the pixel array it can be assumed that the vertical + and horizontal blanking information is exact: no other blanking is + allowed in the pixel array. The selection of frame rate is performed + by selecting the desired horizontal and vertical blanking. The unit + of this control is Hz. + +``V4L2_CID_PIXEL_RATE (64-bit integer)`` + Pixel rate in the source pads of the subdev. This control is + read-only and its unit is pixels / second. + +``V4L2_CID_TEST_PATTERN (menu)`` + Some capture/display/sensor devices have the capability to generate + test pattern images. These hardware specific test patterns can be + used to test if a device is working properly. + +``V4L2_CID_DEINTERLACING_MODE (menu)`` + The video deinterlacing mode (such as Bob, Weave, ...). The menu items are + driver specific and are documented in :ref:`v4l-drivers`. + +``V4L2_CID_DIGITAL_GAIN (integer)`` + Digital gain is the value by which all colour components + are multiplied by. Typically the digital gain applied is the + control value divided by e.g. 0x100, meaning that to get no + digital gain the control value needs to be 0x100. The no-gain + configuration is also typically the default. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-image-source.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-image-source.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2c3ab5796d76 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-image-source.rst @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +.. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this +.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, +.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software +.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts +.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at +.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst. +.. +.. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections + +.. _image-source-controls: + +****************************** +Image Source Control Reference +****************************** + +The Image Source control class is intended for low-level control of +image source devices such as image sensors. The devices feature an +analogue to digital converter and a bus transmitter to transmit the +image data out of the device. + + +.. _image-source-control-id: + +Image Source Control IDs +======================== + +``V4L2_CID_IMAGE_SOURCE_CLASS (class)`` + The IMAGE_SOURCE class descriptor. + +``V4L2_CID_VBLANK (integer)`` + Vertical blanking. The idle period after every frame during which no + image data is produced. The unit of vertical blanking is a line. + Every line has length of the image width plus horizontal blanking at + the pixel rate defined by ``V4L2_CID_PIXEL_RATE`` control in the + same sub-device. + +``V4L2_CID_HBLANK (integer)`` + Horizontal blanking. The idle period after every line of image data + during which no image data is produced. The unit of horizontal + blanking is pixels. + +``V4L2_CID_ANALOGUE_GAIN (integer)`` + Analogue gain is gain affecting all colour components in the pixel + matrix. The gain operation is performed in the analogue domain + before A/D conversion. + +``V4L2_CID_TEST_PATTERN_RED (integer)`` + Test pattern red colour component. + +``V4L2_CID_TEST_PATTERN_GREENR (integer)`` + Test pattern green (next to red) colour component. + +``V4L2_CID_TEST_PATTERN_BLUE (integer)`` + Test pattern blue colour component. + +``V4L2_CID_TEST_PATTERN_GREENB (integer)`` + Test pattern green (next to blue) colour component. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-jpeg.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-jpeg.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..cf9cd8a9f9b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-jpeg.rst @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ +.. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this +.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, +.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software +.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts +.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at +.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst. +.. +.. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections + +.. _jpeg-controls: + +********************** +JPEG Control Reference +********************** + +The JPEG class includes controls for common features of JPEG encoders +and decoders. Currently it includes features for codecs implementing +progressive baseline DCT compression process with Huffman entrophy +coding. + + +.. _jpeg-control-id: + +JPEG Control IDs +================ + +``V4L2_CID_JPEG_CLASS (class)`` + The JPEG class descriptor. Calling + :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will + return a description of this control class. + +``V4L2_CID_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING (menu)`` + The chroma subsampling factors describe how each component of an + input image is sampled, in respect to maximum sample rate in each + spatial dimension. See :ref:`itu-t81`, clause A.1.1. for more + details. The ``V4L2_CID_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING`` control determines + how Cb and Cr components are downsampled after converting an input + image from RGB to Y'CbCr color space. + +.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.0cm}|p{10.5cm}| + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_444`` + - No chroma subsampling, each pixel has Y, Cr and Cb values. + * - ``V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_422`` + - Horizontally subsample Cr, Cb components by a factor of 2. + * - ``V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_420`` + - Subsample Cr, Cb components horizontally and vertically by 2. + * - ``V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_411`` + - Horizontally subsample Cr, Cb components by a factor of 4. + * - ``V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_410`` + - Subsample Cr, Cb components horizontally by 4 and vertically by 2. + * - ``V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_GRAY`` + - Use only luminance component. + + + +``V4L2_CID_JPEG_RESTART_INTERVAL (integer)`` + The restart interval determines an interval of inserting RSTm + markers (m = 0..7). The purpose of these markers is to additionally + reinitialize the encoder process, in order to process blocks of an + image independently. For the lossy compression processes the restart + interval unit is MCU (Minimum Coded Unit) and its value is contained + in DRI (Define Restart Interval) marker. If + ``V4L2_CID_JPEG_RESTART_INTERVAL`` control is set to 0, DRI and RSTm + markers will not be inserted. + +.. _jpeg-quality-control: + +``V4L2_CID_JPEG_COMPRESSION_QUALITY (integer)`` + ``V4L2_CID_JPEG_COMPRESSION_QUALITY`` control determines trade-off + between image quality and size. It provides simpler method for + applications to control image quality, without a need for direct + reconfiguration of luminance and chrominance quantization tables. In + cases where a driver uses quantization tables configured directly by + an application, using interfaces defined elsewhere, + ``V4L2_CID_JPEG_COMPRESSION_QUALITY`` control should be set by + driver to 0. + + The value range of this control is driver-specific. Only positive, + non-zero values are meaningful. The recommended range is 1 - 100, + where larger values correspond to better image quality. + +.. _jpeg-active-marker-control: + +``V4L2_CID_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER (bitmask)`` + Specify which JPEG markers are included in compressed stream. This + control is valid only for encoders. + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER_APP0`` + - Application data segment APP\ :sub:`0`. + * - ``V4L2_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER_APP1`` + - Application data segment APP\ :sub:`1`. + * - ``V4L2_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER_COM`` + - Comment segment. + * - ``V4L2_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER_DQT`` + - Quantization tables segment. + * - ``V4L2_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER_DHT`` + - Huffman tables segment. + + + +For more details about JPEG specification, refer to :ref:`itu-t81`, +:ref:`jfif`, :ref:`w3c-jpeg-jfif`. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-rf-tuner.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-rf-tuner.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0fb85ba878dd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-rf-tuner.rst @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ +.. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this +.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, +.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software +.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts +.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at +.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst. +.. +.. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections + +.. _rf-tuner-controls: + +************************** +RF Tuner Control Reference +************************** + +The RF Tuner (RF_TUNER) class includes controls for common features of +devices having RF tuner. + +In this context, RF tuner is radio receiver circuit between antenna and +demodulator. It receives radio frequency (RF) from the antenna and +converts that received signal to lower intermediate frequency (IF) or +baseband frequency (BB). Tuners that could do baseband output are often +called Zero-IF tuners. Older tuners were typically simple PLL tuners +inside a metal box, while newer ones are highly integrated chips +without a metal box "silicon tuners". These controls are mostly +applicable for new feature rich silicon tuners, just because older +tuners does not have much adjustable features. + +For more information about RF tuners see +`Tuner (radio) <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tuner_%28radio%29>`__ +and `RF front end <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/RF_front_end>`__ +from Wikipedia. + + +.. _rf-tuner-control-id: + +RF_TUNER Control IDs +==================== + +``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_CLASS (class)`` + The RF_TUNER class descriptor. Calling + :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will + return a description of this control class. + +``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_BANDWIDTH_AUTO (boolean)`` + Enables/disables tuner radio channel bandwidth configuration. In + automatic mode bandwidth configuration is performed by the driver. + +``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_BANDWIDTH (integer)`` + Filter(s) on tuner signal path are used to filter signal according + to receiving party needs. Driver configures filters to fulfill + desired bandwidth requirement. Used when + V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_BANDWIDTH_AUTO is not set. Unit is in Hz. The + range and step are driver-specific. + +``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_LNA_GAIN_AUTO (boolean)`` + Enables/disables LNA automatic gain control (AGC) + +``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_MIXER_GAIN_AUTO (boolean)`` + Enables/disables mixer automatic gain control (AGC) + +``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_IF_GAIN_AUTO (boolean)`` + Enables/disables IF automatic gain control (AGC) + +``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_RF_GAIN (integer)`` + The RF amplifier is the very first amplifier on the receiver signal + path, just right after the antenna input. The difference between the + LNA gain and the RF gain in this document is that the LNA gain is + integrated in the tuner chip while the RF gain is a separate chip. + There may be both RF and LNA gain controls in the same device. The + range and step are driver-specific. + +``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_LNA_GAIN (integer)`` + LNA (low noise amplifier) gain is first gain stage on the RF tuner + signal path. It is located very close to tuner antenna input. Used + when ``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_LNA_GAIN_AUTO`` is not set. See + ``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_RF_GAIN`` to understand how RF gain and LNA gain + differs from the each others. The range and step are + driver-specific. + +``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_MIXER_GAIN (integer)`` + Mixer gain is second gain stage on the RF tuner signal path. It is + located inside mixer block, where RF signal is down-converted by the + mixer. Used when ``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_MIXER_GAIN_AUTO`` is not set. + The range and step are driver-specific. + +``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_IF_GAIN (integer)`` + IF gain is last gain stage on the RF tuner signal path. It is + located on output of RF tuner. It controls signal level of + intermediate frequency output or baseband output. Used when + ``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_IF_GAIN_AUTO`` is not set. The range and step + are driver-specific. + +``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_PLL_LOCK (boolean)`` + Is synthesizer PLL locked? RF tuner is receiving given frequency + when that control is set. This is a read-only control. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/extended-controls.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/extended-controls.rst index 286a2dd7ec36..24274b398e63 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/extended-controls.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/extended-controls.rst @@ -9,9 +9,9 @@ .. _extended-controls: -***************** -Extended Controls -***************** +********************* +Extended Controls API +********************* Introduction @@ -181,3902 +181,3 @@ The flags field of struct :ref:`v4l2_queryctrl <v4l2-queryctrl>` also contains hints on the behavior of the control. See the :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` documentation for more details. - - -.. _mpeg-controls: - -Codec Control Reference -======================= - -Below all controls within the Codec control class are described. First -the generic controls, then controls specific for certain hardware. - -.. note:: - - These controls are applicable to all codecs and not just MPEG. The - defines are prefixed with V4L2_CID_MPEG/V4L2_MPEG as the controls - were originally made for MPEG codecs and later extended to cover all - encoding formats. - - -Generic Codec Controls ----------------------- - - -.. _mpeg-control-id: - -Codec Control IDs -^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CLASS (class)`` - The Codec class descriptor. Calling - :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will - return a description of this control class. This description can be - used as the caption of a Tab page in a GUI, for example. - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-stream-type: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_stream_type - - The MPEG-1, -2 or -4 output stream type. One cannot assume anything - here. Each hardware MPEG encoder tends to support different subsets - of the available MPEG stream types. This control is specific to - multiplexed MPEG streams. The currently defined stream types are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE_MPEG2_PS`` - - MPEG-2 program stream - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE_MPEG2_TS`` - - MPEG-2 transport stream - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE_MPEG1_SS`` - - MPEG-1 system stream - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE_MPEG2_DVD`` - - MPEG-2 DVD-compatible stream - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE_MPEG1_VCD`` - - MPEG-1 VCD-compatible stream - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE_MPEG2_SVCD`` - - MPEG-2 SVCD-compatible stream - - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_PID_PMT (integer)`` - Program Map Table Packet ID for the MPEG transport stream (default - 16) - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_PID_AUDIO (integer)`` - Audio Packet ID for the MPEG transport stream (default 256) - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_PID_VIDEO (integer)`` - Video Packet ID for the MPEG transport stream (default 260) - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_PID_PCR (integer)`` - Packet ID for the MPEG transport stream carrying PCR fields (default - 259) - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_PES_ID_AUDIO (integer)`` - Audio ID for MPEG PES - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_PES_ID_VIDEO (integer)`` - Video ID for MPEG PES - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-stream-vbi-fmt: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_VBI_FMT`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_stream_vbi_fmt - - Some cards can embed VBI data (e. g. Closed Caption, Teletext) into - the MPEG stream. This control selects whether VBI data should be - embedded, and if so, what embedding method should be used. The list - of possible VBI formats depends on the driver. The currently defined - VBI format types are: - - - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6 cm}|p{11.5cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_VBI_FMT_NONE`` - - No VBI in the MPEG stream - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_VBI_FMT_IVTV`` - - VBI in private packets, IVTV format (documented in the kernel - sources in the file - ``Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/cx2341x.rst``) - - - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-sampling-freq: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_SAMPLING_FREQ`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_sampling_freq - - MPEG Audio sampling frequency. Possible values are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_SAMPLING_FREQ_44100`` - - 44.1 kHz - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_SAMPLING_FREQ_48000`` - - 48 kHz - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_SAMPLING_FREQ_32000`` - - 32 kHz - - - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-encoding: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_ENCODING`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_encoding - - MPEG Audio encoding. This control is specific to multiplexed MPEG - streams. Possible values are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_ENCODING_LAYER_1`` - - MPEG-1/2 Layer I encoding - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_ENCODING_LAYER_2`` - - MPEG-1/2 Layer II encoding - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_ENCODING_LAYER_3`` - - MPEG-1/2 Layer III encoding - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_ENCODING_AAC`` - - MPEG-2/4 AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_ENCODING_AC3`` - - AC-3 aka ATSC A/52 encoding - - - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-l1-bitrate: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_l1_bitrate - - MPEG-1/2 Layer I bitrate. Possible values are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_32K`` - - 32 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_64K`` - - 64 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_96K`` - - 96 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_128K`` - - 128 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_160K`` - - 160 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_192K`` - - 192 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_224K`` - - 224 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_256K`` - - 256 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_288K`` - - 288 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_320K`` - - 320 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_352K`` - - 352 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_384K`` - - 384 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_416K`` - - 416 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_448K`` - - 448 kbit/s - - - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-l2-bitrate: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_l2_bitrate - - MPEG-1/2 Layer II bitrate. Possible values are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_32K`` - - 32 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_48K`` - - 48 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_56K`` - - 56 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_64K`` - - 64 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_80K`` - - 80 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_96K`` - - 96 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_112K`` - - 112 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_128K`` - - 128 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_160K`` - - 160 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_192K`` - - 192 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_224K`` - - 224 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_256K`` - - 256 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_320K`` - - 320 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_384K`` - - 384 kbit/s - - - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-l3-bitrate: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_l3_bitrate - - MPEG-1/2 Layer III bitrate. Possible values are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_32K`` - - 32 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_40K`` - - 40 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_48K`` - - 48 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_56K`` - - 56 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_64K`` - - 64 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_80K`` - - 80 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_96K`` - - 96 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_112K`` - - 112 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_128K`` - - 128 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_160K`` - - 160 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_192K`` - - 192 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_224K`` - - 224 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_256K`` - - 256 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_320K`` - - 320 kbit/s - - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_AAC_BITRATE (integer)`` - AAC bitrate in bits per second. - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-ac3-bitrate: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_ac3_bitrate - - AC-3 bitrate. Possible values are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_32K`` - - 32 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_40K`` - - 40 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_48K`` - - 48 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_56K`` - - 56 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_64K`` - - 64 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_80K`` - - 80 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_96K`` - - 96 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_112K`` - - 112 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_128K`` - - 128 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_160K`` - - 160 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_192K`` - - 192 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_224K`` - - 224 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_256K`` - - 256 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_320K`` - - 320 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_384K`` - - 384 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_448K`` - - 448 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_512K`` - - 512 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_576K`` - - 576 kbit/s - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_640K`` - - 640 kbit/s - - - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-mode: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_mode - - MPEG Audio mode. Possible values are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_STEREO`` - - Stereo - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_JOINT_STEREO`` - - Joint Stereo - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_DUAL`` - - Bilingual - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_MONO`` - - Mono - - - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-mode-extension: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_EXTENSION`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_mode_extension - - Joint Stereo audio mode extension. In Layer I and II they indicate - which subbands are in intensity stereo. All other subbands are coded - in stereo. Layer III is not (yet) supported. Possible values are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_EXTENSION_BOUND_4`` - - Subbands 4-31 in intensity stereo - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_EXTENSION_BOUND_8`` - - Subbands 8-31 in intensity stereo - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_EXTENSION_BOUND_12`` - - Subbands 12-31 in intensity stereo - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_EXTENSION_BOUND_16`` - - Subbands 16-31 in intensity stereo - - - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-emphasis: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_EMPHASIS`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_emphasis - - Audio Emphasis. Possible values are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_EMPHASIS_NONE`` - - None - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_EMPHASIS_50_DIV_15_uS`` - - 50/15 microsecond emphasis - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_EMPHASIS_CCITT_J17`` - - CCITT J.17 - - - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-crc: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_CRC`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_crc - - CRC method. Possible values are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_CRC_NONE`` - - None - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_CRC_CRC16`` - - 16 bit parity check - - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_MUTE (boolean)`` - Mutes the audio when capturing. This is not done by muting audio - hardware, which can still produce a slight hiss, but in the encoder - itself, guaranteeing a fixed and reproducible audio bitstream. 0 = - unmuted, 1 = muted. - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-dec-playback: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_dec_playback - - Determines how monolingual audio should be played back. Possible - values are: - - - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.5cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_AUTO`` - - Automatically determines the best playback mode. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_STEREO`` - - Stereo playback. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_LEFT`` - - Left channel playback. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_RIGHT`` - - Right channel playback. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_MONO`` - - Mono playback. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_SWAPPED_STEREO`` - - Stereo playback with swapped left and right channels. - - - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-dec-multilingual-playback: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_MULTILINGUAL_PLAYBACK`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_dec_playback - - Determines how multilingual audio should be played back. - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-encoding: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_ENCODING`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_video_encoding - - MPEG Video encoding method. This control is specific to multiplexed - MPEG streams. Possible values are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ENCODING_MPEG_1`` - - MPEG-1 Video encoding - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ENCODING_MPEG_2`` - - MPEG-2 Video encoding - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ENCODING_MPEG_4_AVC`` - - MPEG-4 AVC (H.264) Video encoding - - - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-aspect: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_ASPECT`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_video_aspect - - Video aspect. Possible values are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ASPECT_1x1`` - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ASPECT_4x3`` - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ASPECT_16x9`` - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ASPECT_221x100`` - - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_B_FRAMES (integer)`` - Number of B-Frames (default 2) - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_GOP_SIZE (integer)`` - GOP size (default 12) - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_GOP_CLOSURE (boolean)`` - GOP closure (default 1) - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_PULLDOWN (boolean)`` - Enable 3:2 pulldown (default 0) - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-bitrate-mode: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_BITRATE_MODE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_video_bitrate_mode - - Video bitrate mode. Possible values are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_BITRATE_MODE_VBR`` - - Variable bitrate - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_BITRATE_MODE_CBR`` - - Constant bitrate - - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_BITRATE (integer)`` - Video bitrate in bits per second. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_BITRATE_PEAK (integer)`` - Peak video bitrate in bits per second. Must be larger or equal to - the average video bitrate. It is ignored if the video bitrate mode - is set to constant bitrate. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_TEMPORAL_DECIMATION (integer)`` - For every captured frame, skip this many subsequent frames (default - 0). - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MUTE (boolean)`` - "Mutes" the video to a fixed color when capturing. This is useful - for testing, to produce a fixed video bitstream. 0 = unmuted, 1 = - muted. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MUTE_YUV (integer)`` - Sets the "mute" color of the video. The supplied 32-bit integer is - interpreted as follows (bit 0 = least significant bit): - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - Bit 0:7 - - V chrominance information - * - Bit 8:15 - - U chrominance information - * - Bit 16:23 - - Y luminance information - * - Bit 24:31 - - Must be zero. - - - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-dec-pts: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_DEC_PTS (integer64)`` - This read-only control returns the 33-bit video Presentation Time - Stamp as defined in ITU T-REC-H.222.0 and ISO/IEC 13818-1 of the - currently displayed frame. This is the same PTS as is used in - :ref:`VIDIOC_DECODER_CMD`. - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-dec-frame: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_DEC_FRAME (integer64)`` - This read-only control returns the frame counter of the frame that - is currently displayed (decoded). This value is reset to 0 whenever - the decoder is started. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_DECODER_SLICE_INTERFACE (boolean)`` - If enabled the decoder expects to receive a single slice per buffer, - otherwise the decoder expects a single frame in per buffer. - Applicable to the decoder, all codecs. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_ENABLE (boolean)`` - Enable writing sample aspect ratio in the Video Usability - Information. Applicable to the H264 encoder. - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-vui-sar-idc: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_vui_sar_idc - - VUI sample aspect ratio indicator for H.264 encoding. The value is - defined in the table E-1 in the standard. Applicable to the H264 - encoder. - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_UNSPECIFIED`` - - Unspecified - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_1x1`` - - 1x1 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_12x11`` - - 12x11 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_10x11`` - - 10x11 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_16x11`` - - 16x11 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_40x33`` - - 40x33 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_24x11`` - - 24x11 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_20x11`` - - 20x11 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_32x11`` - - 32x11 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_80x33`` - - 80x33 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_18x11`` - - 18x11 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_15x11`` - - 15x11 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_64x33`` - - 64x33 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_160x99`` - - 160x99 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_4x3`` - - 4x3 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_3x2`` - - 3x2 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_2x1`` - - 2x1 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_EXTENDED`` - - Extended SAR - - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_EXT_SAR_WIDTH (integer)`` - Extended sample aspect ratio width for H.264 VUI encoding. - Applicable to the H264 encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_EXT_SAR_HEIGHT (integer)`` - Extended sample aspect ratio height for H.264 VUI encoding. - Applicable to the H264 encoder. - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-level: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_level - - The level information for the H264 video elementary stream. - Applicable to the H264 encoder. Possible values are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_1_0`` - - Level 1.0 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_1B`` - - Level 1B - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_1_1`` - - Level 1.1 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_1_2`` - - Level 1.2 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_1_3`` - - Level 1.3 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_2_0`` - - Level 2.0 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_2_1`` - - Level 2.1 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_2_2`` - - Level 2.2 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_3_0`` - - Level 3.0 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_3_1`` - - Level 3.1 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_3_2`` - - Level 3.2 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_4_0`` - - Level 4.0 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_4_1`` - - Level 4.1 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_4_2`` - - Level 4.2 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_5_0`` - - Level 5.0 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_5_1`` - - Level 5.1 - - - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-mpeg4-level: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_video_mpeg4_level - - The level information for the MPEG4 elementary stream. Applicable to - the MPEG4 encoder. Possible values are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_0`` - - Level 0 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_0B`` - - Level 0b - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_1`` - - Level 1 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_2`` - - Level 2 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_3`` - - Level 3 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_3B`` - - Level 3b - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_4`` - - Level 4 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_5`` - - Level 5 - - - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-profile: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_profile - - The profile information for H264. Applicable to the H264 encoder. - Possible values are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_BASELINE`` - - Baseline profile - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_CONSTRAINED_BASELINE`` - - Constrained Baseline profile - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_MAIN`` - - Main profile - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_EXTENDED`` - - Extended profile - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH`` - - High profile - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH_10`` - - High 10 profile - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH_422`` - - High 422 profile - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH_444_PREDICTIVE`` - - High 444 Predictive profile - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH_10_INTRA`` - - High 10 Intra profile - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH_422_INTRA`` - - High 422 Intra profile - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH_444_INTRA`` - - High 444 Intra profile - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_CAVLC_444_INTRA`` - - CAVLC 444 Intra profile - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_SCALABLE_BASELINE`` - - Scalable Baseline profile - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_SCALABLE_HIGH`` - - Scalable High profile - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_SCALABLE_HIGH_INTRA`` - - Scalable High Intra profile - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_STEREO_HIGH`` - - Stereo High profile - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_MULTIVIEW_HIGH`` - - Multiview High profile - - - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-mpeg4-profile: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_PROFILE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_video_mpeg4_profile - - The profile information for MPEG4. Applicable to the MPEG4 encoder. - Possible values are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_PROFILE_SIMPLE`` - - Simple profile - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_PROFILE_ADVANCED_SIMPLE`` - - Advanced Simple profile - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_PROFILE_CORE`` - - Core profile - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_PROFILE_SIMPLE_SCALABLE`` - - Simple Scalable profile - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_PROFILE_ADVANCED_CODING_EFFICIENCY`` - - - - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MAX_REF_PIC (integer)`` - The maximum number of reference pictures used for encoding. - Applicable to the encoder. - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-multi-slice-mode: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_video_multi_slice_mode - - Determines how the encoder should handle division of frame into - slices. Applicable to the encoder. Possible values are: - - - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{8.7cm}|p{8.8cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE_SINGLE`` - - Single slice per frame. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE_MAX_MB`` - - Multiple slices with set maximum number of macroblocks per slice. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE_MAX_BYTES`` - - Multiple slice with set maximum size in bytes per slice. - - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MAX_MB (integer)`` - The maximum number of macroblocks in a slice. Used when - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE`` is set to - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE_MAX_MB``. Applicable to the - encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MAX_BYTES (integer)`` - The maximum size of a slice in bytes. Used when - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE`` is set to - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE_MAX_BYTES``. Applicable to the - encoder. - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-loop-filter-mode: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LOOP_FILTER_MODE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_loop_filter_mode - - Loop filter mode for H264 encoder. Possible values are: - - - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{14.0cm}|p{3.5cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LOOP_FILTER_MODE_ENABLED`` - - Loop filter is enabled. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LOOP_FILTER_MODE_DISABLED`` - - Loop filter is disabled. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LOOP_FILTER_MODE_DISABLED_AT_SLICE_BOUNDARY`` - - Loop filter is disabled at the slice boundary. - - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LOOP_FILTER_ALPHA (integer)`` - Loop filter alpha coefficient, defined in the H264 standard. - This value corresponds to the slice_alpha_c0_offset_div2 slice header - field, and should be in the range of -6 to +6, inclusive. The actual alpha - offset FilterOffsetA is twice this value. - Applicable to the H264 encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LOOP_FILTER_BETA (integer)`` - Loop filter beta coefficient, defined in the H264 standard. - This corresponds to the slice_beta_offset_div2 slice header field, and - should be in the range of -6 to +6, inclusive. The actual beta offset - FilterOffsetB is twice this value. - Applicable to the H264 encoder. - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-entropy-mode: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_ENTROPY_MODE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_entropy_mode - - Entropy coding mode for H264 - CABAC/CAVALC. Applicable to the H264 - encoder. Possible values are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_ENTROPY_MODE_CAVLC`` - - Use CAVLC entropy coding. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_ENTROPY_MODE_CABAC`` - - Use CABAC entropy coding. - - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_8X8_TRANSFORM (boolean)`` - Enable 8X8 transform for H264. Applicable to the H264 encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_CYCLIC_INTRA_REFRESH_MB (integer)`` - Cyclic intra macroblock refresh. This is the number of continuous - macroblocks refreshed every frame. Each frame a successive set of - macroblocks is refreshed until the cycle completes and starts from - the top of the frame. Applicable to H264, H263 and MPEG4 encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_FRAME_RC_ENABLE (boolean)`` - Frame level rate control enable. If this control is disabled then - the quantization parameter for each frame type is constant and set - with appropriate controls (e.g. - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_I_FRAME_QP``). If frame rate control is - enabled then quantization parameter is adjusted to meet the chosen - bitrate. Minimum and maximum value for the quantization parameter - can be set with appropriate controls (e.g. - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_MIN_QP``). Applicable to encoders. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MB_RC_ENABLE (boolean)`` - Macroblock level rate control enable. Applicable to the MPEG4 and - H264 encoders. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_QPEL (boolean)`` - Quarter pixel motion estimation for MPEG4. Applicable to the MPEG4 - encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_I_FRAME_QP (integer)`` - Quantization parameter for an I frame for H263. Valid range: from 1 - to 31. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_MIN_QP (integer)`` - Minimum quantization parameter for H263. Valid range: from 1 to 31. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_MAX_QP (integer)`` - Maximum quantization parameter for H263. Valid range: from 1 to 31. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_P_FRAME_QP (integer)`` - Quantization parameter for an P frame for H263. Valid range: from 1 - to 31. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_B_FRAME_QP (integer)`` - Quantization parameter for an B frame for H263. Valid range: from 1 - to 31. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_I_FRAME_QP (integer)`` - Quantization parameter for an I frame for H264. Valid range: from 0 - to 51. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_MIN_QP (integer)`` - Minimum quantization parameter for H264. Valid range: from 0 to 51. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_MAX_QP (integer)`` - Maximum quantization parameter for H264. Valid range: from 0 to 51. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_P_FRAME_QP (integer)`` - Quantization parameter for an P frame for H264. Valid range: from 0 - to 51. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_B_FRAME_QP (integer)`` - Quantization parameter for an B frame for H264. Valid range: from 0 - to 51. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_I_FRAME_QP (integer)`` - Quantization parameter for an I frame for MPEG4. Valid range: from 1 - to 31. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_MIN_QP (integer)`` - Minimum quantization parameter for MPEG4. Valid range: from 1 to 31. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_MAX_QP (integer)`` - Maximum quantization parameter for MPEG4. Valid range: from 1 to 31. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_P_FRAME_QP (integer)`` - Quantization parameter for an P frame for MPEG4. Valid range: from 1 - to 31. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_B_FRAME_QP (integer)`` - Quantization parameter for an B frame for MPEG4. Valid range: from 1 - to 31. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VBV_SIZE (integer)`` - The Video Buffer Verifier size in kilobytes, it is used as a - limitation of frame skip. The VBV is defined in the standard as a - mean to verify that the produced stream will be successfully - decoded. The standard describes it as "Part of a hypothetical - decoder that is conceptually connected to the output of the encoder. - Its purpose is to provide a constraint on the variability of the - data rate that an encoder or editing process may produce.". - Applicable to the MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG4 encoders. - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-vbv-delay: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VBV_DELAY (integer)`` - Sets the initial delay in milliseconds for VBV buffer control. - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-hor-search-range: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MV_H_SEARCH_RANGE (integer)`` - Horizontal search range defines maximum horizontal search area in - pixels to search and match for the present Macroblock (MB) in the - reference picture. This V4L2 control macro is used to set horizontal - search range for motion estimation module in video encoder. - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-vert-search-range: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MV_V_SEARCH_RANGE (integer)`` - Vertical search range defines maximum vertical search area in pixels - to search and match for the present Macroblock (MB) in the reference - picture. This V4L2 control macro is used to set vertical search - range for motion estimation module in video encoder. - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-force-key-frame: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_FORCE_KEY_FRAME (button)`` - Force a key frame for the next queued buffer. Applicable to - encoders. This is a general, codec-agnostic keyframe control. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_CPB_SIZE (integer)`` - The Coded Picture Buffer size in kilobytes, it is used as a - limitation of frame skip. The CPB is defined in the H264 standard as - a mean to verify that the produced stream will be successfully - decoded. Applicable to the H264 encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_I_PERIOD (integer)`` - Period between I-frames in the open GOP for H264. In case of an open - GOP this is the period between two I-frames. The period between IDR - (Instantaneous Decoding Refresh) frames is taken from the GOP_SIZE - control. An IDR frame, which stands for Instantaneous Decoding - Refresh is an I-frame after which no prior frames are referenced. - This means that a stream can be restarted from an IDR frame without - the need to store or decode any previous frames. Applicable to the - H264 encoder. - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-header-mode: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEADER_MODE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_video_header_mode - - Determines whether the header is returned as the first buffer or is - it returned together with the first frame. Applicable to encoders. - Possible values are: - - - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{10.3cm}|p{7.2cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEADER_MODE_SEPARATE`` - - The stream header is returned separately in the first buffer. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEADER_MODE_JOINED_WITH_1ST_FRAME`` - - The stream header is returned together with the first encoded - frame. - - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_REPEAT_SEQ_HEADER (boolean)`` - Repeat the video sequence headers. Repeating these headers makes - random access to the video stream easier. Applicable to the MPEG1, 2 - and 4 encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_DECODER_MPEG4_DEBLOCK_FILTER (boolean)`` - Enabled the deblocking post processing filter for MPEG4 decoder. - Applicable to the MPEG4 decoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_VOP_TIME_RES (integer)`` - vop_time_increment_resolution value for MPEG4. Applicable to the - MPEG4 encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_VOP_TIME_INC (integer)`` - vop_time_increment value for MPEG4. Applicable to the MPEG4 - encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FRAME_PACKING (boolean)`` - Enable generation of frame packing supplemental enhancement - information in the encoded bitstream. The frame packing SEI message - contains the arrangement of L and R planes for 3D viewing. - Applicable to the H264 encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_CURRENT_FRAME_0 (boolean)`` - Sets current frame as frame0 in frame packing SEI. Applicable to the - H264 encoder. - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-sei-fp-arrangement-type: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_sei_fp_arrangement_type - - Frame packing arrangement type for H264 SEI. Applicable to the H264 - encoder. Possible values are: - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{12cm}|p{5.5cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_CHEKERBOARD`` - - Pixels are alternatively from L and R. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_COLUMN`` - - L and R are interlaced by column. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_ROW`` - - L and R are interlaced by row. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_SIDE_BY_SIDE`` - - L is on the left, R on the right. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_TOP_BOTTOM`` - - L is on top, R on bottom. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_TEMPORAL`` - - One view per frame. - - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO (boolean)`` - Enables flexible macroblock ordering in the encoded bitstream. It is - a technique used for restructuring the ordering of macroblocks in - pictures. Applicable to the H264 encoder. - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-fmo-map-type: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_fmo_map_type - - When using FMO, the map type divides the image in different scan - patterns of macroblocks. Applicable to the H264 encoder. Possible - values are: - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{12.5cm}|p{5.0cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_INTERLEAVED_SLICES`` - - Slices are interleaved one after other with macroblocks in run - length order. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_SCATTERED_SLICES`` - - Scatters the macroblocks based on a mathematical function known to - both encoder and decoder. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_FOREGROUND_WITH_LEFT_OVER`` - - Macroblocks arranged in rectangular areas or regions of interest. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_BOX_OUT`` - - Slice groups grow in a cyclic way from centre to outwards. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_RASTER_SCAN`` - - Slice groups grow in raster scan pattern from left to right. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_WIPE_SCAN`` - - Slice groups grow in wipe scan pattern from top to bottom. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_EXPLICIT`` - - User defined map type. - - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_SLICE_GROUP (integer)`` - Number of slice groups in FMO. Applicable to the H264 encoder. - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-fmo-change-direction: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_CHANGE_DIRECTION`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_fmo_change_dir - - Specifies a direction of the slice group change for raster and wipe - maps. Applicable to the H264 encoder. Possible values are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_CHANGE_DIR_RIGHT`` - - Raster scan or wipe right. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_CHANGE_DIR_LEFT`` - - Reverse raster scan or wipe left. - - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_CHANGE_RATE (integer)`` - Specifies the size of the first slice group for raster and wipe map. - Applicable to the H264 encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_RUN_LENGTH (integer)`` - Specifies the number of consecutive macroblocks for the interleaved - map. Applicable to the H264 encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_ASO (boolean)`` - Enables arbitrary slice ordering in encoded bitstream. Applicable to - the H264 encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_ASO_SLICE_ORDER (integer)`` - Specifies the slice order in ASO. Applicable to the H264 encoder. - The supplied 32-bit integer is interpreted as follows (bit 0 = least - significant bit): - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - Bit 0:15 - - Slice ID - * - Bit 16:32 - - Slice position or order - - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING (boolean)`` - Enables H264 hierarchical coding. Applicable to the H264 encoder. - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-hierarchical-coding-type: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_TYPE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_hierarchical_coding_type - - Specifies the hierarchical coding type. Applicable to the H264 - encoder. Possible values are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_B`` - - Hierarchical B coding. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_P`` - - Hierarchical P coding. - - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_LAYER (integer)`` - Specifies the number of hierarchical coding layers. Applicable to - the H264 encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_LAYER_QP (integer)`` - Specifies a user defined QP for each layer. Applicable to the H264 - encoder. The supplied 32-bit integer is interpreted as follows (bit - 0 = least significant bit): - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - Bit 0:15 - - QP value - * - Bit 16:32 - - Layer number - - - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-mpeg2: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG2_SLICE_PARAMS (struct)`` - Specifies the slice parameters (as extracted from the bitstream) for the - associated MPEG-2 slice data. This includes the necessary parameters for - configuring a stateless hardware decoding pipeline for MPEG-2. - The bitstream parameters are defined according to :ref:`mpeg2part2`. - - .. note:: - - This compound control is not yet part of the public kernel API and - it is expected to change. - -.. c:type:: v4l2_ctrl_mpeg2_slice_params - -.. cssclass:: longtable - -.. flat-table:: struct v4l2_ctrl_mpeg2_slice_params - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - :widths: 1 1 2 - - * - __u32 - - ``bit_size`` - - Size (in bits) of the current slice data. - * - __u32 - - ``data_bit_offset`` - - Offset (in bits) to the video data in the current slice data. - * - struct :c:type:`v4l2_mpeg2_sequence` - - ``sequence`` - - Structure with MPEG-2 sequence metadata, merging relevant fields from - the sequence header and sequence extension parts of the bitstream. - * - struct :c:type:`v4l2_mpeg2_picture` - - ``picture`` - - Structure with MPEG-2 picture metadata, merging relevant fields from - the picture header and picture coding extension parts of the bitstream. - * - __u8 - - ``quantiser_scale_code`` - - Code used to determine the quantization scale to use for the IDCT. - * - __u8 - - ``backward_ref_index`` - - Index for the V4L2 buffer to use as backward reference, used with - B-coded and P-coded frames. - * - __u8 - - ``forward_ref_index`` - - Index for the V4L2 buffer to use as forward reference, used with - B-coded frames. - -.. c:type:: v4l2_mpeg2_sequence - -.. cssclass:: longtable - -.. flat-table:: struct v4l2_mpeg2_sequence - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - :widths: 1 1 2 - - * - __u16 - - ``horizontal_size`` - - The width of the displayable part of the frame's luminance component. - * - __u16 - - ``vertical_size`` - - The height of the displayable part of the frame's luminance component. - * - __u32 - - ``vbv_buffer_size`` - - Used to calculate the required size of the video buffering verifier, - defined (in bits) as: 16 * 1024 * vbv_buffer_size. - * - __u8 - - ``profile_and_level_indication`` - - The current profile and level indication as extracted from the - bitstream. - * - __u8 - - ``progressive_sequence`` - - Indication that all the frames for the sequence are progressive instead - of interlaced. - * - __u8 - - ``chroma_format`` - - The chrominance sub-sampling format (1: 4:2:0, 2: 4:2:2, 3: 4:4:4). - -.. c:type:: v4l2_mpeg2_picture - -.. cssclass:: longtable - -.. flat-table:: struct v4l2_mpeg2_picture - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - :widths: 1 1 2 - - * - __u8 - - ``picture_coding_type`` - - Picture coding type for the frame covered by the current slice - (V4L2_MPEG2_PICTURE_CODING_TYPE_I, V4L2_MPEG2_PICTURE_CODING_TYPE_P or - V4L2_MPEG2_PICTURE_CODING_TYPE_B). - * - __u8 - - ``f_code[2][2]`` - - Motion vector codes. - * - __u8 - - ``intra_dc_precision`` - - Precision of Discrete Cosine transform (0: 8 bits precision, - 1: 9 bits precision, 2: 10 bits precision, 3: 11 bits precision). - * - __u8 - - ``picture_structure`` - - Picture structure (1: interlaced top field, 2: interlaced bottom field, - 3: progressive frame). - * - __u8 - - ``top_field_first`` - - If set to 1 and interlaced stream, top field is output first. - * - __u8 - - ``frame_pred_frame_dct`` - - If set to 1, only frame-DCT and frame prediction are used. - * - __u8 - - ``concealment_motion_vectors`` - - If set to 1, motion vectors are coded for intra macroblocks. - * - __u8 - - ``q_scale_type`` - - This flag affects the inverse quantization process. - * - __u8 - - ``intra_vlc_format`` - - This flag affects the decoding of transform coefficient data. - * - __u8 - - ``alternate_scan`` - - This flag affects the decoding of transform coefficient data. - * - __u8 - - ``repeat_first_field`` - - This flag affects the decoding process of progressive frames. - * - __u8 - - ``progressive_frame`` - - Indicates whether the current frame is progressive. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG2_QUANTIZATION (struct)`` - Specifies quantization matrices (as extracted from the bitstream) for the - associated MPEG-2 slice data. - - .. note:: - - This compound control is not yet part of the public kernel API and - it is expected to change. - -.. c:type:: v4l2_ctrl_mpeg2_quantization - -.. cssclass:: longtable - -.. flat-table:: struct v4l2_ctrl_mpeg2_quantization - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - :widths: 1 1 2 - - * - __u8 - - ``load_intra_quantiser_matrix`` - - One bit to indicate whether to load the ``intra_quantiser_matrix`` data. - * - __u8 - - ``load_non_intra_quantiser_matrix`` - - One bit to indicate whether to load the ``non_intra_quantiser_matrix`` - data. - * - __u8 - - ``load_chroma_intra_quantiser_matrix`` - - One bit to indicate whether to load the - ``chroma_intra_quantiser_matrix`` data, only relevant for non-4:2:0 YUV - formats. - * - __u8 - - ``load_chroma_non_intra_quantiser_matrix`` - - One bit to indicate whether to load the - ``chroma_non_intra_quantiser_matrix`` data, only relevant for non-4:2:0 - YUV formats. - * - __u8 - - ``intra_quantiser_matrix[64]`` - - The quantization matrix coefficients for intra-coded frames, in zigzag - scanning order. It is relevant for both luma and chroma components, - although it can be superseded by the chroma-specific matrix for - non-4:2:0 YUV formats. - * - __u8 - - ``non_intra_quantiser_matrix[64]`` - - The quantization matrix coefficients for non-intra-coded frames, in - zigzag scanning order. It is relevant for both luma and chroma - components, although it can be superseded by the chroma-specific matrix - for non-4:2:0 YUV formats. - * - __u8 - - ``chroma_intra_quantiser_matrix[64]`` - - The quantization matrix coefficients for the chominance component of - intra-coded frames, in zigzag scanning order. Only relevant for - non-4:2:0 YUV formats. - * - __u8 - - ``chroma_non_intra_quantiser_matrix[64]`` - - The quantization matrix coefficients for the chrominance component of - non-intra-coded frames, in zigzag scanning order. Only relevant for - non-4:2:0 YUV formats. - -MFC 5.1 MPEG Controls ---------------------- - -The following MPEG class controls deal with MPEG decoding and encoding -settings that are specific to the Multi Format Codec 5.1 device present -in the S5P family of SoCs by Samsung. - - -.. _mfc51-control-id: - -MFC 5.1 Control IDs -^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_DECODER_H264_DISPLAY_DELAY_ENABLE (boolean)`` - If the display delay is enabled then the decoder is forced to return - a CAPTURE buffer (decoded frame) after processing a certain number - of OUTPUT buffers. The delay can be set through - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_DECODER_H264_DISPLAY_DELAY``. This - feature can be used for example for generating thumbnails of videos. - Applicable to the H264 decoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_DECODER_H264_DISPLAY_DELAY (integer)`` - Display delay value for H264 decoder. The decoder is forced to - return a decoded frame after the set 'display delay' number of - frames. If this number is low it may result in frames returned out - of dispaly order, in addition the hardware may still be using the - returned buffer as a reference picture for subsequent frames. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_H264_NUM_REF_PIC_FOR_P (integer)`` - The number of reference pictures used for encoding a P picture. - Applicable to the H264 encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_PADDING (boolean)`` - Padding enable in the encoder - use a color instead of repeating - border pixels. Applicable to encoders. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_PADDING_YUV (integer)`` - Padding color in the encoder. Applicable to encoders. The supplied - 32-bit integer is interpreted as follows (bit 0 = least significant - bit): - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - Bit 0:7 - - V chrominance information - * - Bit 8:15 - - U chrominance information - * - Bit 16:23 - - Y luminance information - * - Bit 24:31 - - Must be zero. - - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_RC_REACTION_COEFF (integer)`` - Reaction coefficient for MFC rate control. Applicable to encoders. - - .. note:: - - #. Valid only when the frame level RC is enabled. - - #. For tight CBR, this field must be small (ex. 2 ~ 10). For - VBR, this field must be large (ex. 100 ~ 1000). - - #. It is not recommended to use the greater number than - FRAME_RATE * (10^9 / BIT_RATE). - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_H264_ADAPTIVE_RC_DARK (boolean)`` - Adaptive rate control for dark region. Valid only when H.264 and - macroblock level RC is enabled - (``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MB_RC_ENABLE``). Applicable to the H264 - encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_H264_ADAPTIVE_RC_SMOOTH (boolean)`` - Adaptive rate control for smooth region. Valid only when H.264 and - macroblock level RC is enabled - (``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MB_RC_ENABLE``). Applicable to the H264 - encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_H264_ADAPTIVE_RC_STATIC (boolean)`` - Adaptive rate control for static region. Valid only when H.264 and - macroblock level RC is enabled - (``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MB_RC_ENABLE``). Applicable to the H264 - encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_H264_ADAPTIVE_RC_ACTIVITY (boolean)`` - Adaptive rate control for activity region. Valid only when H.264 and - macroblock level RC is enabled - (``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MB_RC_ENABLE``). Applicable to the H264 - encoder. - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-mfc51-video-frame-skip-mode: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_FRAME_SKIP_MODE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_mfc51_video_frame_skip_mode - - Indicates in what conditions the encoder should skip frames. If - encoding a frame would cause the encoded stream to be larger then a - chosen data limit then the frame will be skipped. Possible values - are: - - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.5cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_MFC51_FRAME_SKIP_MODE_DISABLED`` - - Frame skip mode is disabled. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_MFC51_FRAME_SKIP_MODE_LEVEL_LIMIT`` - - Frame skip mode enabled and buffer limit is set by the chosen - level and is defined by the standard. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_MFC51_FRAME_SKIP_MODE_BUF_LIMIT`` - - Frame skip mode enabled and buffer limit is set by the VBV - (MPEG1/2/4) or CPB (H264) buffer size control. - - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_RC_FIXED_TARGET_BIT (integer)`` - Enable rate-control with fixed target bit. If this setting is - enabled, then the rate control logic of the encoder will calculate - the average bitrate for a GOP and keep it below or equal the set - bitrate target. Otherwise the rate control logic calculates the - overall average bitrate for the stream and keeps it below or equal - to the set bitrate. In the first case the average bitrate for the - whole stream will be smaller then the set bitrate. This is caused - because the average is calculated for smaller number of frames, on - the other hand enabling this setting will ensure that the stream - will meet tight bandwidth constraints. Applicable to encoders. - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-mfc51-video-force-frame-type: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_FORCE_FRAME_TYPE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_mfc51_video_force_frame_type - - Force a frame type for the next queued buffer. Applicable to - encoders. Possible values are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_MFC51_FORCE_FRAME_TYPE_DISABLED`` - - Forcing a specific frame type disabled. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_MFC51_FORCE_FRAME_TYPE_I_FRAME`` - - Force an I-frame. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_MFC51_FORCE_FRAME_TYPE_NOT_CODED`` - - Force a non-coded frame. - - - - -CX2341x MPEG Controls ---------------------- - -The following MPEG class controls deal with MPEG encoding settings that -are specific to the Conexant CX23415 and CX23416 MPEG encoding chips. - - -.. _cx2341x-control-id: - -CX2341x Control IDs -^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-cx2341x-video-spatial-filter-mode: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_SPATIAL_FILTER_MODE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_cx2341x_video_spatial_filter_mode - - Sets the Spatial Filter mode (default ``MANUAL``). Possible values - are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_SPATIAL_FILTER_MODE_MANUAL`` - - Choose the filter manually - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_SPATIAL_FILTER_MODE_AUTO`` - - Choose the filter automatically - - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_SPATIAL_FILTER (integer (0-15))`` - The setting for the Spatial Filter. 0 = off, 15 = maximum. (Default - is 0.) - -.. _luma-spatial-filter-type: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_cx2341x_video_luma_spatial_filter_type - - Select the algorithm to use for the Luma Spatial Filter (default - ``1D_HOR``). Possible values: - - - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{14.5cm}|p{3.0cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_OFF`` - - No filter - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_1D_HOR`` - - One-dimensional horizontal - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_1D_VERT`` - - One-dimensional vertical - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_2D_HV_SEPARABLE`` - - Two-dimensional separable - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_2D_SYM_NON_SEPARABLE`` - - Two-dimensional symmetrical non-separable - - - -.. _chroma-spatial-filter-type: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_CHROMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_cx2341x_video_chroma_spatial_filter_type - - Select the algorithm for the Chroma Spatial Filter (default - ``1D_HOR``). Possible values are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_CHROMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_OFF`` - - No filter - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_CHROMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_1D_HOR`` - - One-dimensional horizontal - - - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-cx2341x-video-temporal-filter-mode: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_TEMPORAL_FILTER_MODE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_cx2341x_video_temporal_filter_mode - - Sets the Temporal Filter mode (default ``MANUAL``). Possible values - are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_TEMPORAL_FILTER_MODE_MANUAL`` - - Choose the filter manually - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_TEMPORAL_FILTER_MODE_AUTO`` - - Choose the filter automatically - - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_TEMPORAL_FILTER (integer (0-31))`` - The setting for the Temporal Filter. 0 = off, 31 = maximum. (Default - is 8 for full-scale capturing and 0 for scaled capturing.) - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-cx2341x-video-median-filter-type: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_MEDIAN_FILTER_TYPE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_cx2341x_video_median_filter_type - - Median Filter Type (default ``OFF``). Possible values are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_MEDIAN_FILTER_TYPE_OFF`` - - No filter - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_MEDIAN_FILTER_TYPE_HOR`` - - Horizontal filter - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_MEDIAN_FILTER_TYPE_VERT`` - - Vertical filter - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_MEDIAN_FILTER_TYPE_HOR_VERT`` - - Horizontal and vertical filter - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_MEDIAN_FILTER_TYPE_DIAG`` - - Diagonal filter - - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_MEDIAN_FILTER_BOTTOM (integer (0-255))`` - Threshold above which the luminance median filter is enabled - (default 0) - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_MEDIAN_FILTER_TOP (integer (0-255))`` - Threshold below which the luminance median filter is enabled - (default 255) - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_CHROMA_MEDIAN_FILTER_BOTTOM (integer (0-255))`` - Threshold above which the chroma median filter is enabled (default - 0) - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_CHROMA_MEDIAN_FILTER_TOP (integer (0-255))`` - Threshold below which the chroma median filter is enabled (default - 255) - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_STREAM_INSERT_NAV_PACKETS (boolean)`` - The CX2341X MPEG encoder can insert one empty MPEG-2 PES packet into - the stream between every four video frames. The packet size is 2048 - bytes, including the packet_start_code_prefix and stream_id - fields. The stream_id is 0xBF (private stream 2). The payload - consists of 0x00 bytes, to be filled in by the application. 0 = do - not insert, 1 = insert packets. - - -VPX Control Reference ---------------------- - -The VPX controls include controls for encoding parameters of VPx video -codec. - - -.. _vpx-control-id: - -VPX Control IDs -^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ - -.. _v4l2-vpx-num-partitions: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_NUM_PARTITIONS`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_vp8_num_partitions - - The number of token partitions to use in VP8 encoder. Possible - values are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_1_PARTITION`` - - 1 coefficient partition - * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_2_PARTITIONS`` - - 2 coefficient partitions - * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_4_PARTITIONS`` - - 4 coefficient partitions - * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_8_PARTITIONS`` - - 8 coefficient partitions - - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_IMD_DISABLE_4X4 (boolean)`` - Setting this prevents intra 4x4 mode in the intra mode decision. - -.. _v4l2-vpx-num-ref-frames: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_NUM_REF_FRAMES`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_vp8_num_ref_frames - - The number of reference pictures for encoding P frames. Possible - values are: - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.9cm}|p{9.6cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_1_REF_FRAME`` - - Last encoded frame will be searched - * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_2_REF_FRAME`` - - Two frames will be searched among the last encoded frame, the - golden frame and the alternate reference (altref) frame. The - encoder implementation will decide which two are chosen. - * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_3_REF_FRAME`` - - The last encoded frame, the golden frame and the altref frame will - be searched. - - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_FILTER_LEVEL (integer)`` - Indicates the loop filter level. The adjustment of the loop filter - level is done via a delta value against a baseline loop filter - value. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_FILTER_SHARPNESS (integer)`` - This parameter affects the loop filter. Anything above zero weakens - the deblocking effect on the loop filter. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_GOLDEN_FRAME_REF_PERIOD (integer)`` - Sets the refresh period for the golden frame. The period is defined - in number of frames. For a value of 'n', every nth frame starting - from the first key frame will be taken as a golden frame. For eg. - for encoding sequence of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 where the golden - frame refresh period is set as 4, the frames 0, 4, 8 etc will be - taken as the golden frames as frame 0 is always a key frame. - -.. _v4l2-vpx-golden-frame-sel: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_GOLDEN_FRAME_SEL`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_vp8_golden_frame_sel - - Selects the golden frame for encoding. Possible values are: - -.. raw:: latex - - \footnotesize - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.0cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_GOLDEN_FRAME_USE_PREV`` - - Use the (n-2)th frame as a golden frame, current frame index being - 'n'. - * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_GOLDEN_FRAME_USE_REF_PERIOD`` - - Use the previous specific frame indicated by - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_GOLDEN_FRAME_REF_PERIOD`` as a - golden frame. - -.. raw:: latex - - \normalsize - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_MIN_QP (integer)`` - Minimum quantization parameter for VP8. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_MAX_QP (integer)`` - Maximum quantization parameter for VP8. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_I_FRAME_QP (integer)`` - Quantization parameter for an I frame for VP8. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_P_FRAME_QP (integer)`` - Quantization parameter for a P frame for VP8. - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-vp8-profile: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VP8_PROFILE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_video_vp8_profile - - This control allows selecting the profile for VP8 encoder. - This is also used to enumerate supported profiles by VP8 encoder or decoder. - Possible values are: - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP8_PROFILE_0`` - - Profile 0 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP8_PROFILE_1`` - - Profile 1 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP8_PROFILE_2`` - - Profile 2 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP8_PROFILE_3`` - - Profile 3 - -.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-vp9-profile: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VP9_PROFILE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_video_vp9_profile - - This control allows selecting the profile for VP9 encoder. - This is also used to enumerate supported profiles by VP9 encoder or decoder. - Possible values are: - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP9_PROFILE_0`` - - Profile 0 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP9_PROFILE_1`` - - Profile 1 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP9_PROFILE_2`` - - Profile 2 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP9_PROFILE_3`` - - Profile 3 - - -High Efficiency Video Coding (HEVC/H.265) Control Reference ------------------------------------------------------------ - -The HEVC/H.265 controls include controls for encoding parameters of HEVC/H.265 -video codec. - - -.. _hevc-control-id: - -HEVC/H.265 Control IDs -^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP (integer)`` - Minimum quantization parameter for HEVC. - Valid range: from 0 to 51. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP (integer)`` - Maximum quantization parameter for HEVC. - Valid range: from 0 to 51. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_I_FRAME_QP (integer)`` - Quantization parameter for an I frame for HEVC. - Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP, - V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP]. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_P_FRAME_QP (integer)`` - Quantization parameter for a P frame for HEVC. - Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP, - V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP]. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_B_FRAME_QP (integer)`` - Quantization parameter for a B frame for HEVC. - Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP, - V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP]. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_QP (boolean)`` - HIERARCHICAL_QP allows the host to specify the quantization parameter - values for each temporal layer through HIERARCHICAL_QP_LAYER. This is - valid only if HIERARCHICAL_CODING_LAYER is greater than 1. Setting the - control value to 1 enables setting of the QP values for the layers. - -.. _v4l2-hevc-hier-coding-type: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_TYPE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_hier_coding_type - - Selects the hierarchical coding type for encoding. Possible values are: - -.. raw:: latex - - \footnotesize - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.0cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_B`` - - Use the B frame for hierarchical coding. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_P`` - - Use the P frame for hierarchical coding. - -.. raw:: latex - - \normalsize - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_LAYER (integer)`` - Selects the hierarchical coding layer. In normal encoding - (non-hierarchial coding), it should be zero. Possible values are [0, 6]. - 0 indicates HIERARCHICAL CODING LAYER 0, 1 indicates HIERARCHICAL CODING - LAYER 1 and so on. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L0_QP (integer)`` - Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 0. - Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP, - V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP]. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L1_QP (integer)`` - Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 1. - Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP, - V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP]. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L2_QP (integer)`` - Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 2. - Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP, - V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP]. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L3_QP (integer)`` - Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 3. - Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP, - V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP]. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L4_QP (integer)`` - Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 4. - Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP, - V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP]. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L5_QP (integer)`` - Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 5. - Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP, - V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP]. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L6_QP (integer)`` - Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 6. - Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP, - V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP]. - -.. _v4l2-hevc-profile: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_PROFILE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_profile - - Select the desired profile for HEVC encoder. - -.. raw:: latex - - \footnotesize - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.0cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_PROFILE_MAIN`` - - Main profile. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_PROFILE_MAIN_STILL_PICTURE`` - - Main still picture profile. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_PROFILE_MAIN_10`` - - Main 10 profile. - -.. raw:: latex - - \normalsize - - -.. _v4l2-hevc-level: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_level - - Selects the desired level for HEVC encoder. - -.. raw:: latex - - \footnotesize - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.0cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_1`` - - Level 1.0 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_2`` - - Level 2.0 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_2_1`` - - Level 2.1 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_3`` - - Level 3.0 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_3_1`` - - Level 3.1 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_4`` - - Level 4.0 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_4_1`` - - Level 4.1 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_5`` - - Level 5.0 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_5_1`` - - Level 5.1 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_5_2`` - - Level 5.2 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_6`` - - Level 6.0 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_6_1`` - - Level 6.1 - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_6_2`` - - Level 6.2 - -.. raw:: latex - - \normalsize - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_FRAME_RATE_RESOLUTION (integer)`` - Indicates the number of evenly spaced subintervals, called ticks, within - one second. This is a 16 bit unsigned integer and has a maximum value up to - 0xffff and a minimum value of 1. - -.. _v4l2-hevc-tier: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_TIER`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_tier - - TIER_FLAG specifies tiers information of the HEVC encoded picture. Tier - were made to deal with applications that differ in terms of maximum bit - rate. Setting the flag to 0 selects HEVC tier as Main tier and setting - this flag to 1 indicates High tier. High tier is for applications requiring - high bit rates. - -.. raw:: latex - - \footnotesize - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.0cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_TIER_MAIN`` - - Main tier. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_TIER_HIGH`` - - High tier. - -.. raw:: latex - - \normalsize - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_PARTITION_DEPTH (integer)`` - Selects HEVC maximum coding unit depth. - -.. _v4l2-hevc-loop-filter-mode: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LOOP_FILTER_MODE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_loop_filter_mode - - Loop filter mode for HEVC encoder. Possible values are: - -.. raw:: latex - - \footnotesize - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{10.7cm}|p{6.3cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LOOP_FILTER_MODE_DISABLED`` - - Loop filter is disabled. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LOOP_FILTER_MODE_ENABLED`` - - Loop filter is enabled. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LOOP_FILTER_MODE_DISABLED_AT_SLICE_BOUNDARY`` - - Loop filter is disabled at the slice boundary. - -.. raw:: latex - - \normalsize - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LF_BETA_OFFSET_DIV2 (integer)`` - Selects HEVC loop filter beta offset. The valid range is [-6, +6]. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LF_TC_OFFSET_DIV2 (integer)`` - Selects HEVC loop filter tc offset. The valid range is [-6, +6]. - -.. _v4l2-hevc-refresh-type: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_REFRESH_TYPE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_hier_refresh_type - - Selects refresh type for HEVC encoder. - Host has to specify the period into - V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_REFRESH_PERIOD. - -.. raw:: latex - - \footnotesize - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{8.0cm}|p{9.0cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_REFRESH_NONE`` - - Use the B frame for hierarchical coding. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_REFRESH_CRA`` - - Use CRA (Clean Random Access Unit) picture encoding. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_REFRESH_IDR`` - - Use IDR (Instantaneous Decoding Refresh) picture encoding. - -.. raw:: latex - - \normalsize - - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_REFRESH_PERIOD (integer)`` - Selects the refresh period for HEVC encoder. - This specifies the number of I pictures between two CRA/IDR pictures. - This is valid only if REFRESH_TYPE is not 0. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LOSSLESS_CU (boolean)`` - Indicates HEVC lossless encoding. Setting it to 0 disables lossless - encoding. Setting it to 1 enables lossless encoding. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_CONST_INTRA_PRED (boolean)`` - Indicates constant intra prediction for HEVC encoder. Specifies the - constrained intra prediction in which intra largest coding unit (LCU) - prediction is performed by using residual data and decoded samples of - neighboring intra LCU only. Setting the value to 1 enables constant intra - prediction and setting the value to 0 disables constant intra prediction. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_WAVEFRONT (boolean)`` - Indicates wavefront parallel processing for HEVC encoder. Setting it to 0 - disables the feature and setting it to 1 enables the wavefront parallel - processing. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_GENERAL_PB (boolean)`` - Setting the value to 1 enables combination of P and B frame for HEVC - encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_TEMPORAL_ID (boolean)`` - Indicates temporal identifier for HEVC encoder which is enabled by - setting the value to 1. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_STRONG_SMOOTHING (boolean)`` - Indicates bi-linear interpolation is conditionally used in the intra - prediction filtering process in the CVS when set to 1. Indicates bi-linear - interpolation is not used in the CVS when set to 0. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_NUM_MERGE_MV_MINUS1 (integer)`` - Indicates maximum number of merge candidate motion vectors. - Values are from 0 to 4. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_TMV_PREDICTION (boolean)`` - Indicates temporal motion vector prediction for HEVC encoder. Setting it to - 1 enables the prediction. Setting it to 0 disables the prediction. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_WITHOUT_STARTCODE (boolean)`` - Specifies if HEVC generates a stream with a size of the length field - instead of start code pattern. The size of the length field is configurable - through the V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_SIZE_OF_LENGTH_FIELD control. Setting - the value to 0 disables encoding without startcode pattern. Setting the - value to 1 will enables encoding without startcode pattern. - -.. _v4l2-hevc-size-of-length-field: - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_SIZE_OF_LENGTH_FIELD`` -(enum) - -enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_size_of_length_field - - Indicates the size of length field. - This is valid when encoding WITHOUT_STARTCODE_ENABLE is enabled. - -.. raw:: latex - - \footnotesize - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.0cm}|p{11.0cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_SIZE_0`` - - Generate start code pattern (Normal). - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_SIZE_1`` - - Generate size of length field instead of start code pattern and length is 1. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_SIZE_2`` - - Generate size of length field instead of start code pattern and length is 2. - * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_SIZE_4`` - - Generate size of length field instead of start code pattern and length is 4. - -.. raw:: latex - - \normalsize - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L0_BR (integer)`` - Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 0 for HEVC encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L1_BR (integer)`` - Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 1 for HEVC encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L2_BR (integer)`` - Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 2 for HEVC encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L3_BR (integer)`` - Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 3 for HEVC encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L4_BR (integer)`` - Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 4 for HEVC encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L5_BR (integer)`` - Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 5 for HEVC encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L6_BR (integer)`` - Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 6 for HEVC encoder. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_REF_NUMBER_FOR_PFRAMES (integer)`` - Selects number of P reference pictures required for HEVC encoder. - P-Frame can use 1 or 2 frames for reference. - -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_PREPEND_SPSPPS_TO_IDR (integer)`` - Indicates whether to generate SPS and PPS at every IDR. Setting it to 0 - disables generating SPS and PPS at every IDR. Setting it to one enables - generating SPS and PPS at every IDR. - - -.. _camera-controls: - -Camera Control Reference -======================== - -The Camera class includes controls for mechanical (or equivalent -digital) features of a device such as controllable lenses or sensors. - - -.. _camera-control-id: - -Camera Control IDs ------------------- - -``V4L2_CID_CAMERA_CLASS (class)`` - The Camera class descriptor. Calling - :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will - return a description of this control class. - -.. _v4l2-exposure-auto-type: - -``V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_AUTO`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_exposure_auto_type - - Enables automatic adjustments of the exposure time and/or iris - aperture. The effect of manual changes of the exposure time or iris - aperture while these features are enabled is undefined, drivers - should ignore such requests. Possible values are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_AUTO`` - - Automatic exposure time, automatic iris aperture. - * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_MANUAL`` - - Manual exposure time, manual iris. - * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_SHUTTER_PRIORITY`` - - Manual exposure time, auto iris. - * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_APERTURE_PRIORITY`` - - Auto exposure time, manual iris. - - - -``V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_ABSOLUTE (integer)`` - Determines the exposure time of the camera sensor. The exposure time - is limited by the frame interval. Drivers should interpret the - values as 100 µs units, where the value 1 stands for 1/10000th of a - second, 10000 for 1 second and 100000 for 10 seconds. - -``V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_AUTO_PRIORITY (boolean)`` - When ``V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_AUTO`` is set to ``AUTO`` or - ``APERTURE_PRIORITY``, this control determines if the device may - dynamically vary the frame rate. By default this feature is disabled - (0) and the frame rate must remain constant. - -``V4L2_CID_AUTO_EXPOSURE_BIAS (integer menu)`` - Determines the automatic exposure compensation, it is effective only - when ``V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_AUTO`` control is set to ``AUTO``, - ``SHUTTER_PRIORITY`` or ``APERTURE_PRIORITY``. It is expressed in - terms of EV, drivers should interpret the values as 0.001 EV units, - where the value 1000 stands for +1 EV. - - Increasing the exposure compensation value is equivalent to - decreasing the exposure value (EV) and will increase the amount of - light at the image sensor. The camera performs the exposure - compensation by adjusting absolute exposure time and/or aperture. - -.. _v4l2-exposure-metering: - -``V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_METERING`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_exposure_metering - - Determines how the camera measures the amount of light available for - the frame exposure. Possible values are: - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{8.5cm}|p{9.0cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_METERING_AVERAGE`` - - Use the light information coming from the entire frame and average - giving no weighting to any particular portion of the metered area. - * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_METERING_CENTER_WEIGHTED`` - - Average the light information coming from the entire frame giving - priority to the center of the metered area. - * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_METERING_SPOT`` - - Measure only very small area at the center of the frame. - * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_METERING_MATRIX`` - - A multi-zone metering. The light intensity is measured in several - points of the frame and the results are combined. The algorithm of - the zones selection and their significance in calculating the - final value is device dependent. - - - -``V4L2_CID_PAN_RELATIVE (integer)`` - This control turns the camera horizontally by the specified amount. - The unit is undefined. A positive value moves the camera to the - right (clockwise when viewed from above), a negative value to the - left. A value of zero does not cause motion. This is a write-only - control. - -``V4L2_CID_TILT_RELATIVE (integer)`` - This control turns the camera vertically by the specified amount. - The unit is undefined. A positive value moves the camera up, a - negative value down. A value of zero does not cause motion. This is - a write-only control. - -``V4L2_CID_PAN_RESET (button)`` - When this control is set, the camera moves horizontally to the - default position. - -``V4L2_CID_TILT_RESET (button)`` - When this control is set, the camera moves vertically to the default - position. - -``V4L2_CID_PAN_ABSOLUTE (integer)`` - This control turns the camera horizontally to the specified - position. Positive values move the camera to the right (clockwise - when viewed from above), negative values to the left. Drivers should - interpret the values as arc seconds, with valid values between -180 - * 3600 and +180 * 3600 inclusive. - -``V4L2_CID_TILT_ABSOLUTE (integer)`` - This control turns the camera vertically to the specified position. - Positive values move the camera up, negative values down. Drivers - should interpret the values as arc seconds, with valid values - between -180 * 3600 and +180 * 3600 inclusive. - -``V4L2_CID_FOCUS_ABSOLUTE (integer)`` - This control sets the focal point of the camera to the specified - position. The unit is undefined. Positive values set the focus - closer to the camera, negative values towards infinity. - -``V4L2_CID_FOCUS_RELATIVE (integer)`` - This control moves the focal point of the camera by the specified - amount. The unit is undefined. Positive values move the focus closer - to the camera, negative values towards infinity. This is a - write-only control. - -``V4L2_CID_FOCUS_AUTO (boolean)`` - Enables continuous automatic focus adjustments. The effect of manual - focus adjustments while this feature is enabled is undefined, - drivers should ignore such requests. - -``V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_START (button)`` - Starts single auto focus process. The effect of setting this control - when ``V4L2_CID_FOCUS_AUTO`` is set to ``TRUE`` (1) is undefined, - drivers should ignore such requests. - -``V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_STOP (button)`` - Aborts automatic focusing started with ``V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_START`` - control. It is effective only when the continuous autofocus is - disabled, that is when ``V4L2_CID_FOCUS_AUTO`` control is set to - ``FALSE`` (0). - -.. _v4l2-auto-focus-status: - -``V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS (bitmask)`` - The automatic focus status. This is a read-only control. - - Setting ``V4L2_LOCK_FOCUS`` lock bit of the ``V4L2_CID_3A_LOCK`` - control may stop updates of the ``V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS`` - control value. - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.5cm}|p{11.0cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS_IDLE`` - - Automatic focus is not active. - * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS_BUSY`` - - Automatic focusing is in progress. - * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS_REACHED`` - - Focus has been reached. - * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS_FAILED`` - - Automatic focus has failed, the driver will not transition from - this state until another action is performed by an application. - - - -.. _v4l2-auto-focus-range: - -``V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_auto_focus_range - - Determines auto focus distance range for which lens may be adjusted. - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.5cm}|p{11.0cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE_AUTO`` - - The camera automatically selects the focus range. - * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE_NORMAL`` - - Normal distance range, limited for best automatic focus - performance. - * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE_MACRO`` - - Macro (close-up) auto focus. The camera will use its minimum - possible distance for auto focus. - * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE_INFINITY`` - - The lens is set to focus on an object at infinite distance. - - - -``V4L2_CID_ZOOM_ABSOLUTE (integer)`` - Specify the objective lens focal length as an absolute value. The - zoom unit is driver-specific and its value should be a positive - integer. - -``V4L2_CID_ZOOM_RELATIVE (integer)`` - Specify the objective lens focal length relatively to the current - value. Positive values move the zoom lens group towards the - telephoto direction, negative values towards the wide-angle - direction. The zoom unit is driver-specific. This is a write-only - control. - -``V4L2_CID_ZOOM_CONTINUOUS (integer)`` - Move the objective lens group at the specified speed until it - reaches physical device limits or until an explicit request to stop - the movement. A positive value moves the zoom lens group towards the - telephoto direction. A value of zero stops the zoom lens group - movement. A negative value moves the zoom lens group towards the - wide-angle direction. The zoom speed unit is driver-specific. - -``V4L2_CID_IRIS_ABSOLUTE (integer)`` - This control sets the camera's aperture to the specified value. The - unit is undefined. Larger values open the iris wider, smaller values - close it. - -``V4L2_CID_IRIS_RELATIVE (integer)`` - This control modifies the camera's aperture by the specified amount. - The unit is undefined. Positive values open the iris one step - further, negative values close it one step further. This is a - write-only control. - -``V4L2_CID_PRIVACY (boolean)`` - Prevent video from being acquired by the camera. When this control - is set to ``TRUE`` (1), no image can be captured by the camera. - Common means to enforce privacy are mechanical obturation of the - sensor and firmware image processing, but the device is not - restricted to these methods. Devices that implement the privacy - control must support read access and may support write access. - -``V4L2_CID_BAND_STOP_FILTER (integer)`` - Switch the band-stop filter of a camera sensor on or off, or specify - its strength. Such band-stop filters can be used, for example, to - filter out the fluorescent light component. - -.. _v4l2-auto-n-preset-white-balance: - -``V4L2_CID_AUTO_N_PRESET_WHITE_BALANCE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_auto_n_preset_white_balance - - Sets white balance to automatic, manual or a preset. The presets - determine color temperature of the light as a hint to the camera for - white balance adjustments resulting in most accurate color - representation. The following white balance presets are listed in - order of increasing color temperature. - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.0 cm}|p{10.5cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_MANUAL`` - - Manual white balance. - * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_AUTO`` - - Automatic white balance adjustments. - * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_INCANDESCENT`` - - White balance setting for incandescent (tungsten) lighting. It - generally cools down the colors and corresponds approximately to - 2500...3500 K color temperature range. - * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_FLUORESCENT`` - - White balance preset for fluorescent lighting. It corresponds - approximately to 4000...5000 K color temperature. - * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_FLUORESCENT_H`` - - With this setting the camera will compensate for fluorescent H - lighting. - * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_HORIZON`` - - White balance setting for horizon daylight. It corresponds - approximately to 5000 K color temperature. - * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_DAYLIGHT`` - - White balance preset for daylight (with clear sky). It corresponds - approximately to 5000...6500 K color temperature. - * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_FLASH`` - - With this setting the camera will compensate for the flash light. - It slightly warms up the colors and corresponds roughly to - 5000...5500 K color temperature. - * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_CLOUDY`` - - White balance preset for moderately overcast sky. This option - corresponds approximately to 6500...8000 K color temperature - range. - * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_SHADE`` - - White balance preset for shade or heavily overcast sky. It - corresponds approximately to 9000...10000 K color temperature. - - - -.. _v4l2-wide-dynamic-range: - -``V4L2_CID_WIDE_DYNAMIC_RANGE (boolean)`` - Enables or disables the camera's wide dynamic range feature. This - feature allows to obtain clear images in situations where intensity - of the illumination varies significantly throughout the scene, i.e. - there are simultaneously very dark and very bright areas. It is most - commonly realized in cameras by combining two subsequent frames with - different exposure times. [#f1]_ - -.. _v4l2-image-stabilization: - -``V4L2_CID_IMAGE_STABILIZATION (boolean)`` - Enables or disables image stabilization. - -``V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY (integer menu)`` - Determines ISO equivalent of an image sensor indicating the sensor's - sensitivity to light. The numbers are expressed in arithmetic scale, - as per :ref:`iso12232` standard, where doubling the sensor - sensitivity is represented by doubling the numerical ISO value. - Applications should interpret the values as standard ISO values - multiplied by 1000, e.g. control value 800 stands for ISO 0.8. - Drivers will usually support only a subset of standard ISO values. - The effect of setting this control while the - ``V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_AUTO`` control is set to a value other - than ``V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_MANUAL`` is undefined, drivers - should ignore such requests. - -.. _v4l2-iso-sensitivity-auto-type: - -``V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_AUTO`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_iso_sensitivity_type - - Enables or disables automatic ISO sensitivity adjustments. - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_MANUAL`` - - Manual ISO sensitivity. - * - ``V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_AUTO`` - - Automatic ISO sensitivity adjustments. - - - -.. _v4l2-scene-mode: - -``V4L2_CID_SCENE_MODE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_scene_mode - - This control allows to select scene programs as the camera automatic - modes optimized for common shooting scenes. Within these modes the - camera determines best exposure, aperture, focusing, light metering, - white balance and equivalent sensitivity. The controls of those - parameters are influenced by the scene mode control. An exact - behavior in each mode is subject to the camera specification. - - When the scene mode feature is not used, this control should be set - to ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_NONE`` to make sure the other possibly related - controls are accessible. The following scene programs are defined: - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.0cm}|p{11.5cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_NONE`` - - The scene mode feature is disabled. - * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_BACKLIGHT`` - - Backlight. Compensates for dark shadows when light is coming from - behind a subject, also by automatically turning on the flash. - * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_BEACH_SNOW`` - - Beach and snow. This mode compensates for all-white or bright - scenes, which tend to look gray and low contrast, when camera's - automatic exposure is based on an average scene brightness. To - compensate, this mode automatically slightly overexposes the - frames. The white balance may also be adjusted to compensate for - the fact that reflected snow looks bluish rather than white. - * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_CANDLELIGHT`` - - Candle light. The camera generally raises the ISO sensitivity and - lowers the shutter speed. This mode compensates for relatively - close subject in the scene. The flash is disabled in order to - preserve the ambiance of the light. - * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_DAWN_DUSK`` - - Dawn and dusk. Preserves the colors seen in low natural light - before dusk and after down. The camera may turn off the flash, and - automatically focus at infinity. It will usually boost saturation - and lower the shutter speed. - * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_FALL_COLORS`` - - Fall colors. Increases saturation and adjusts white balance for - color enhancement. Pictures of autumn leaves get saturated reds - and yellows. - * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_FIREWORKS`` - - Fireworks. Long exposure times are used to capture the expanding - burst of light from a firework. The camera may invoke image - stabilization. - * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_LANDSCAPE`` - - Landscape. The camera may choose a small aperture to provide deep - depth of field and long exposure duration to help capture detail - in dim light conditions. The focus is fixed at infinity. Suitable - for distant and wide scenery. - * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_NIGHT`` - - Night, also known as Night Landscape. Designed for low light - conditions, it preserves detail in the dark areas without blowing - out bright objects. The camera generally sets itself to a - medium-to-high ISO sensitivity, with a relatively long exposure - time, and turns flash off. As such, there will be increased image - noise and the possibility of blurred image. - * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_PARTY_INDOOR`` - - Party and indoor. Designed to capture indoor scenes that are lit - by indoor background lighting as well as the flash. The camera - usually increases ISO sensitivity, and adjusts exposure for the - low light conditions. - * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_PORTRAIT`` - - Portrait. The camera adjusts the aperture so that the depth of - field is reduced, which helps to isolate the subject against a - smooth background. Most cameras recognize the presence of faces in - the scene and focus on them. The color hue is adjusted to enhance - skin tones. The intensity of the flash is often reduced. - * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_SPORTS`` - - Sports. Significantly increases ISO and uses a fast shutter speed - to freeze motion of rapidly-moving subjects. Increased image noise - may be seen in this mode. - * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_SUNSET`` - - Sunset. Preserves deep hues seen in sunsets and sunrises. It bumps - up the saturation. - * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_TEXT`` - - Text. It applies extra contrast and sharpness, it is typically a - black-and-white mode optimized for readability. Automatic focus - may be switched to close-up mode and this setting may also involve - some lens-distortion correction. - - - -``V4L2_CID_3A_LOCK (bitmask)`` - This control locks or unlocks the automatic focus, exposure and - white balance. The automatic adjustments can be paused independently - by setting the corresponding lock bit to 1. The camera then retains - the settings until the lock bit is cleared. The following lock bits - are defined: - - When a given algorithm is not enabled, drivers should ignore - requests to lock it and should return no error. An example might be - an application setting bit ``V4L2_LOCK_WHITE_BALANCE`` when the - ``V4L2_CID_AUTO_WHITE_BALANCE`` control is set to ``FALSE``. The - value of this control may be changed by exposure, white balance or - focus controls. - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_LOCK_EXPOSURE`` - - Automatic exposure adjustments lock. - * - ``V4L2_LOCK_WHITE_BALANCE`` - - Automatic white balance adjustments lock. - * - ``V4L2_LOCK_FOCUS`` - - Automatic focus lock. - - - -``V4L2_CID_PAN_SPEED (integer)`` - This control turns the camera horizontally at the specific speed. - The unit is undefined. A positive value moves the camera to the - right (clockwise when viewed from above), a negative value to the - left. A value of zero stops the motion if one is in progress and has - no effect otherwise. - -``V4L2_CID_TILT_SPEED (integer)`` - This control turns the camera vertically at the specified speed. The - unit is undefined. A positive value moves the camera up, a negative - value down. A value of zero stops the motion if one is in progress - and has no effect otherwise. - - -.. _fm-tx-controls: - -FM Transmitter Control Reference -================================ - -The FM Transmitter (FM_TX) class includes controls for common features -of FM transmissions capable devices. Currently this class includes -parameters for audio compression, pilot tone generation, audio deviation -limiter, RDS transmission and tuning power features. - - -.. _fm-tx-control-id: - -FM_TX Control IDs ------------------ - -``V4L2_CID_FM_TX_CLASS (class)`` - The FM_TX class descriptor. Calling - :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will - return a description of this control class. - -``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_DEVIATION (integer)`` - Configures RDS signal frequency deviation level in Hz. The range and - step are driver-specific. - -``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_PI (integer)`` - Sets the RDS Programme Identification field for transmission. - -``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_PTY (integer)`` - Sets the RDS Programme Type field for transmission. This encodes up - to 31 pre-defined programme types. - -``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_PS_NAME (string)`` - Sets the Programme Service name (PS_NAME) for transmission. It is - intended for static display on a receiver. It is the primary aid to - listeners in programme service identification and selection. In - Annex E of :ref:`iec62106`, the RDS specification, there is a full - description of the correct character encoding for Programme Service - name strings. Also from RDS specification, PS is usually a single - eight character text. However, it is also possible to find receivers - which can scroll strings sized as 8 x N characters. So, this control - must be configured with steps of 8 characters. The result is it must - always contain a string with size multiple of 8. - -``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_RADIO_TEXT (string)`` - Sets the Radio Text info for transmission. It is a textual - description of what is being broadcasted. RDS Radio Text can be - applied when broadcaster wishes to transmit longer PS names, - programme-related information or any other text. In these cases, - RadioText should be used in addition to ``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_PS_NAME``. - The encoding for Radio Text strings is also fully described in Annex - E of :ref:`iec62106`. The length of Radio Text strings depends on - which RDS Block is being used to transmit it, either 32 (2A block) - or 64 (2B block). However, it is also possible to find receivers - which can scroll strings sized as 32 x N or 64 x N characters. So, - this control must be configured with steps of 32 or 64 characters. - The result is it must always contain a string with size multiple of - 32 or 64. - -``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_MONO_STEREO (boolean)`` - Sets the Mono/Stereo bit of the Decoder Identification code. If set, - then the audio was recorded as stereo. - -``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_ARTIFICIAL_HEAD (boolean)`` - Sets the - `Artificial Head <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Artificial_head>`__ - bit of the Decoder Identification code. If set, then the audio was - recorded using an artificial head. - -``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_COMPRESSED (boolean)`` - Sets the Compressed bit of the Decoder Identification code. If set, - then the audio is compressed. - -``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_DYNAMIC_PTY (boolean)`` - Sets the Dynamic PTY bit of the Decoder Identification code. If set, - then the PTY code is dynamically switched. - -``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_TRAFFIC_ANNOUNCEMENT (boolean)`` - If set, then a traffic announcement is in progress. - -``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_TRAFFIC_PROGRAM (boolean)`` - If set, then the tuned programme carries traffic announcements. - -``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_MUSIC_SPEECH (boolean)`` - If set, then this channel broadcasts music. If cleared, then it - broadcasts speech. If the transmitter doesn't make this distinction, - then it should be set. - -``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_ALT_FREQS_ENABLE (boolean)`` - If set, then transmit alternate frequencies. - -``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_ALT_FREQS (__u32 array)`` - The alternate frequencies in kHz units. The RDS standard allows for - up to 25 frequencies to be defined. Drivers may support fewer - frequencies so check the array size. - -``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_LIMITER_ENABLED (boolean)`` - Enables or disables the audio deviation limiter feature. The limiter - is useful when trying to maximize the audio volume, minimize - receiver-generated distortion and prevent overmodulation. - -``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_LIMITER_RELEASE_TIME (integer)`` - Sets the audio deviation limiter feature release time. Unit is in - useconds. Step and range are driver-specific. - -``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_LIMITER_DEVIATION (integer)`` - Configures audio frequency deviation level in Hz. The range and step - are driver-specific. - -``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_COMPRESSION_ENABLED (boolean)`` - Enables or disables the audio compression feature. This feature - amplifies signals below the threshold by a fixed gain and compresses - audio signals above the threshold by the ratio of Threshold/(Gain + - Threshold). - -``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_COMPRESSION_GAIN (integer)`` - Sets the gain for audio compression feature. It is a dB value. The - range and step are driver-specific. - -``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_COMPRESSION_THRESHOLD (integer)`` - Sets the threshold level for audio compression freature. It is a dB - value. The range and step are driver-specific. - -``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_COMPRESSION_ATTACK_TIME (integer)`` - Sets the attack time for audio compression feature. It is a useconds - value. The range and step are driver-specific. - -``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_COMPRESSION_RELEASE_TIME (integer)`` - Sets the release time for audio compression feature. It is a - useconds value. The range and step are driver-specific. - -``V4L2_CID_PILOT_TONE_ENABLED (boolean)`` - Enables or disables the pilot tone generation feature. - -``V4L2_CID_PILOT_TONE_DEVIATION (integer)`` - Configures pilot tone frequency deviation level. Unit is in Hz. The - range and step are driver-specific. - -``V4L2_CID_PILOT_TONE_FREQUENCY (integer)`` - Configures pilot tone frequency value. Unit is in Hz. The range and - step are driver-specific. - -``V4L2_CID_TUNE_PREEMPHASIS`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_preemphasis - - Configures the pre-emphasis value for broadcasting. A pre-emphasis - filter is applied to the broadcast to accentuate the high audio - frequencies. Depending on the region, a time constant of either 50 - or 75 useconds is used. The enum v4l2_preemphasis defines possible - values for pre-emphasis. Here they are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_PREEMPHASIS_DISABLED`` - - No pre-emphasis is applied. - * - ``V4L2_PREEMPHASIS_50_uS`` - - A pre-emphasis of 50 uS is used. - * - ``V4L2_PREEMPHASIS_75_uS`` - - A pre-emphasis of 75 uS is used. - - - -``V4L2_CID_TUNE_POWER_LEVEL (integer)`` - Sets the output power level for signal transmission. Unit is in - dBuV. Range and step are driver-specific. - -``V4L2_CID_TUNE_ANTENNA_CAPACITOR (integer)`` - This selects the value of antenna tuning capacitor manually or - automatically if set to zero. Unit, range and step are - driver-specific. - -For more details about RDS specification, refer to :ref:`iec62106` -document, from CENELEC. - - -.. _flash-controls: - -Flash Control Reference -======================= - -The V4L2 flash controls are intended to provide generic access to flash -controller devices. Flash controller devices are typically used in -digital cameras. - -The interface can support both LED and xenon flash devices. As of -writing this, there is no xenon flash driver using this interface. - - -.. _flash-controls-use-cases: - -Supported use cases -------------------- - - -Unsynchronised LED flash (software strobe) -^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ - -Unsynchronised LED flash is controlled directly by the host as the -sensor. The flash must be enabled by the host before the exposure of the -image starts and disabled once it ends. The host is fully responsible -for the timing of the flash. - -Example of such device: Nokia N900. - - -Synchronised LED flash (hardware strobe) -^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ - -The synchronised LED flash is pre-programmed by the host (power and -timeout) but controlled by the sensor through a strobe signal from the -sensor to the flash. - -The sensor controls the flash duration and timing. This information -typically must be made available to the sensor. - - -LED flash as torch -^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ - -LED flash may be used as torch in conjunction with another use case -involving camera or individually. - - -.. _flash-control-id: - -Flash Control IDs -""""""""""""""""" - -``V4L2_CID_FLASH_CLASS (class)`` - The FLASH class descriptor. - -``V4L2_CID_FLASH_LED_MODE (menu)`` - Defines the mode of the flash LED, the high-power white LED attached - to the flash controller. Setting this control may not be possible in - presence of some faults. See V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT. - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_NONE`` - - Off. - * - ``V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_FLASH`` - - Flash mode. - * - ``V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_TORCH`` - - Torch mode. See V4L2_CID_FLASH_TORCH_INTENSITY. - - - -``V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE (menu)`` - Defines the source of the flash LED strobe. - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.0cm}|p{10.5cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE_SOFTWARE`` - - The flash strobe is triggered by using the - V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE control. - * - ``V4L2_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE_EXTERNAL`` - - The flash strobe is triggered by an external source. Typically - this is a sensor, which makes it possible to synchronises the - flash strobe start to exposure start. - - - -``V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE (button)`` - Strobe flash. Valid when V4L2_CID_FLASH_LED_MODE is set to - V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_FLASH and V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE - is set to V4L2_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE_SOFTWARE. Setting this - control may not be possible in presence of some faults. See - V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT. - -``V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_STOP (button)`` - Stop flash strobe immediately. - -``V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_STATUS (boolean)`` - Strobe status: whether the flash is strobing at the moment or not. - This is a read-only control. - -``V4L2_CID_FLASH_TIMEOUT (integer)`` - Hardware timeout for flash. The flash strobe is stopped after this - period of time has passed from the start of the strobe. - -``V4L2_CID_FLASH_INTENSITY (integer)`` - Intensity of the flash strobe when the flash LED is in flash mode - (V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_FLASH). The unit should be milliamps (mA) - if possible. - -``V4L2_CID_FLASH_TORCH_INTENSITY (integer)`` - Intensity of the flash LED in torch mode - (V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_TORCH). The unit should be milliamps (mA) - if possible. Setting this control may not be possible in presence of - some faults. See V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT. - -``V4L2_CID_FLASH_INDICATOR_INTENSITY (integer)`` - Intensity of the indicator LED. The indicator LED may be fully - independent of the flash LED. The unit should be microamps (uA) if - possible. - -``V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT (bitmask)`` - Faults related to the flash. The faults tell about specific problems - in the flash chip itself or the LEDs attached to it. Faults may - prevent further use of some of the flash controls. In particular, - V4L2_CID_FLASH_LED_MODE is set to V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_NONE - if the fault affects the flash LED. Exactly which faults have such - an effect is chip dependent. Reading the faults resets the control - and returns the chip to a usable state if possible. - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{8.0cm}|p{9.5cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_OVER_VOLTAGE`` - - Flash controller voltage to the flash LED has exceeded the limit - specific to the flash controller. - * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_TIMEOUT`` - - The flash strobe was still on when the timeout set by the user --- - V4L2_CID_FLASH_TIMEOUT control --- has expired. Not all flash - controllers may set this in all such conditions. - * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_OVER_TEMPERATURE`` - - The flash controller has overheated. - * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_SHORT_CIRCUIT`` - - The short circuit protection of the flash controller has been - triggered. - * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_OVER_CURRENT`` - - Current in the LED power supply has exceeded the limit specific to - the flash controller. - * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_INDICATOR`` - - The flash controller has detected a short or open circuit - condition on the indicator LED. - * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_UNDER_VOLTAGE`` - - Flash controller voltage to the flash LED has been below the - minimum limit specific to the flash controller. - * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_INPUT_VOLTAGE`` - - The input voltage of the flash controller is below the limit under - which strobing the flash at full current will not be possible.The - condition persists until this flag is no longer set. - * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_LED_OVER_TEMPERATURE`` - - The temperature of the LED has exceeded its allowed upper limit. - - - -``V4L2_CID_FLASH_CHARGE (boolean)`` - Enable or disable charging of the xenon flash capacitor. - -``V4L2_CID_FLASH_READY (boolean)`` - Is the flash ready to strobe? Xenon flashes require their capacitors - charged before strobing. LED flashes often require a cooldown period - after strobe during which another strobe will not be possible. This - is a read-only control. - - -.. _jpeg-controls: - -JPEG Control Reference -====================== - -The JPEG class includes controls for common features of JPEG encoders -and decoders. Currently it includes features for codecs implementing -progressive baseline DCT compression process with Huffman entrophy -coding. - - -.. _jpeg-control-id: - -JPEG Control IDs ----------------- - -``V4L2_CID_JPEG_CLASS (class)`` - The JPEG class descriptor. Calling - :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will - return a description of this control class. - -``V4L2_CID_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING (menu)`` - The chroma subsampling factors describe how each component of an - input image is sampled, in respect to maximum sample rate in each - spatial dimension. See :ref:`itu-t81`, clause A.1.1. for more - details. The ``V4L2_CID_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING`` control determines - how Cb and Cr components are downsampled after converting an input - image from RGB to Y'CbCr color space. - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.0cm}|p{10.5cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_444`` - - No chroma subsampling, each pixel has Y, Cr and Cb values. - * - ``V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_422`` - - Horizontally subsample Cr, Cb components by a factor of 2. - * - ``V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_420`` - - Subsample Cr, Cb components horizontally and vertically by 2. - * - ``V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_411`` - - Horizontally subsample Cr, Cb components by a factor of 4. - * - ``V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_410`` - - Subsample Cr, Cb components horizontally by 4 and vertically by 2. - * - ``V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_GRAY`` - - Use only luminance component. - - - -``V4L2_CID_JPEG_RESTART_INTERVAL (integer)`` - The restart interval determines an interval of inserting RSTm - markers (m = 0..7). The purpose of these markers is to additionally - reinitialize the encoder process, in order to process blocks of an - image independently. For the lossy compression processes the restart - interval unit is MCU (Minimum Coded Unit) and its value is contained - in DRI (Define Restart Interval) marker. If - ``V4L2_CID_JPEG_RESTART_INTERVAL`` control is set to 0, DRI and RSTm - markers will not be inserted. - -.. _jpeg-quality-control: - -``V4L2_CID_JPEG_COMPRESSION_QUALITY (integer)`` - ``V4L2_CID_JPEG_COMPRESSION_QUALITY`` control determines trade-off - between image quality and size. It provides simpler method for - applications to control image quality, without a need for direct - reconfiguration of luminance and chrominance quantization tables. In - cases where a driver uses quantization tables configured directly by - an application, using interfaces defined elsewhere, - ``V4L2_CID_JPEG_COMPRESSION_QUALITY`` control should be set by - driver to 0. - - The value range of this control is driver-specific. Only positive, - non-zero values are meaningful. The recommended range is 1 - 100, - where larger values correspond to better image quality. - -.. _jpeg-active-marker-control: - -``V4L2_CID_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER (bitmask)`` - Specify which JPEG markers are included in compressed stream. This - control is valid only for encoders. - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER_APP0`` - - Application data segment APP\ :sub:`0`. - * - ``V4L2_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER_APP1`` - - Application data segment APP\ :sub:`1`. - * - ``V4L2_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER_COM`` - - Comment segment. - * - ``V4L2_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER_DQT`` - - Quantization tables segment. - * - ``V4L2_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER_DHT`` - - Huffman tables segment. - - - -For more details about JPEG specification, refer to :ref:`itu-t81`, -:ref:`jfif`, :ref:`w3c-jpeg-jfif`. - - -.. _image-source-controls: - -Image Source Control Reference -============================== - -The Image Source control class is intended for low-level control of -image source devices such as image sensors. The devices feature an -analogue to digital converter and a bus transmitter to transmit the -image data out of the device. - - -.. _image-source-control-id: - -Image Source Control IDs ------------------------- - -``V4L2_CID_IMAGE_SOURCE_CLASS (class)`` - The IMAGE_SOURCE class descriptor. - -``V4L2_CID_VBLANK (integer)`` - Vertical blanking. The idle period after every frame during which no - image data is produced. The unit of vertical blanking is a line. - Every line has length of the image width plus horizontal blanking at - the pixel rate defined by ``V4L2_CID_PIXEL_RATE`` control in the - same sub-device. - -``V4L2_CID_HBLANK (integer)`` - Horizontal blanking. The idle period after every line of image data - during which no image data is produced. The unit of horizontal - blanking is pixels. - -``V4L2_CID_ANALOGUE_GAIN (integer)`` - Analogue gain is gain affecting all colour components in the pixel - matrix. The gain operation is performed in the analogue domain - before A/D conversion. - -``V4L2_CID_TEST_PATTERN_RED (integer)`` - Test pattern red colour component. - -``V4L2_CID_TEST_PATTERN_GREENR (integer)`` - Test pattern green (next to red) colour component. - -``V4L2_CID_TEST_PATTERN_BLUE (integer)`` - Test pattern blue colour component. - -``V4L2_CID_TEST_PATTERN_GREENB (integer)`` - Test pattern green (next to blue) colour component. - - -.. _image-process-controls: - -Image Process Control Reference -=============================== - -The Image Process control class is intended for low-level control of -image processing functions. Unlike ``V4L2_CID_IMAGE_SOURCE_CLASS``, the -controls in this class affect processing the image, and do not control -capturing of it. - - -.. _image-process-control-id: - -Image Process Control IDs -------------------------- - -``V4L2_CID_IMAGE_PROC_CLASS (class)`` - The IMAGE_PROC class descriptor. - -``V4L2_CID_LINK_FREQ (integer menu)`` - Data bus frequency. Together with the media bus pixel code, bus type - (clock cycles per sample), the data bus frequency defines the pixel - rate (``V4L2_CID_PIXEL_RATE``) in the pixel array (or possibly - elsewhere, if the device is not an image sensor). The frame rate can - be calculated from the pixel clock, image width and height and - horizontal and vertical blanking. While the pixel rate control may - be defined elsewhere than in the subdev containing the pixel array, - the frame rate cannot be obtained from that information. This is - because only on the pixel array it can be assumed that the vertical - and horizontal blanking information is exact: no other blanking is - allowed in the pixel array. The selection of frame rate is performed - by selecting the desired horizontal and vertical blanking. The unit - of this control is Hz. - -``V4L2_CID_PIXEL_RATE (64-bit integer)`` - Pixel rate in the source pads of the subdev. This control is - read-only and its unit is pixels / second. - -``V4L2_CID_TEST_PATTERN (menu)`` - Some capture/display/sensor devices have the capability to generate - test pattern images. These hardware specific test patterns can be - used to test if a device is working properly. - -``V4L2_CID_DEINTERLACING_MODE (menu)`` - The video deinterlacing mode (such as Bob, Weave, ...). The menu items are - driver specific and are documented in :ref:`v4l-drivers`. - -``V4L2_CID_DIGITAL_GAIN (integer)`` - Digital gain is the value by which all colour components - are multiplied by. Typically the digital gain applied is the - control value divided by e.g. 0x100, meaning that to get no - digital gain the control value needs to be 0x100. The no-gain - configuration is also typically the default. - - -.. _dv-controls: - -Digital Video Control Reference -=============================== - -The Digital Video control class is intended to control receivers and -transmitters for `VGA <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vga>`__, -`DVI <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Digital_Visual_Interface>`__ -(Digital Visual Interface), HDMI (:ref:`hdmi`) and DisplayPort -(:ref:`dp`). These controls are generally expected to be private to -the receiver or transmitter subdevice that implements them, so they are -only exposed on the ``/dev/v4l-subdev*`` device node. - -.. note:: - - Note that these devices can have multiple input or output pads which are - hooked up to e.g. HDMI connectors. Even though the subdevice will - receive or transmit video from/to only one of those pads, the other pads - can still be active when it comes to EDID (Extended Display - Identification Data, :ref:`vesaedid`) and HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital - Content Protection System, :ref:`hdcp`) processing, allowing the - device to do the fairly slow EDID/HDCP handling in advance. This allows - for quick switching between connectors. - -These pads appear in several of the controls in this section as -bitmasks, one bit for each pad. Bit 0 corresponds to pad 0, bit 1 to pad -1, etc. The maximum value of the control is the set of valid pads. - - -.. _dv-control-id: - -Digital Video Control IDs -------------------------- - -``V4L2_CID_DV_CLASS (class)`` - The Digital Video class descriptor. - -``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_HOTPLUG (bitmask)`` - Many connectors have a hotplug pin which is high if EDID information - is available from the source. This control shows the state of the - hotplug pin as seen by the transmitter. Each bit corresponds to an - output pad on the transmitter. If an output pad does not have an - associated hotplug pin, then the bit for that pad will be 0. This - read-only control is applicable to DVI-D, HDMI and DisplayPort - connectors. - -``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_RXSENSE (bitmask)`` - Rx Sense is the detection of pull-ups on the TMDS clock lines. This - normally means that the sink has left/entered standby (i.e. the - transmitter can sense that the receiver is ready to receive video). - Each bit corresponds to an output pad on the transmitter. If an - output pad does not have an associated Rx Sense, then the bit for - that pad will be 0. This read-only control is applicable to DVI-D - and HDMI devices. - -``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_EDID_PRESENT (bitmask)`` - When the transmitter sees the hotplug signal from the receiver it - will attempt to read the EDID. If set, then the transmitter has read - at least the first block (= 128 bytes). Each bit corresponds to an - output pad on the transmitter. If an output pad does not support - EDIDs, then the bit for that pad will be 0. This read-only control - is applicable to VGA, DVI-A/D, HDMI and DisplayPort connectors. - -``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_MODE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_dv_tx_mode - - HDMI transmitters can transmit in DVI-D mode (just video) or in HDMI - mode (video + audio + auxiliary data). This control selects which - mode to use: V4L2_DV_TX_MODE_DVI_D or V4L2_DV_TX_MODE_HDMI. - This control is applicable to HDMI connectors. - -``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_RGB_RANGE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_dv_rgb_range - - Select the quantization range for RGB output. V4L2_DV_RANGE_AUTO - follows the RGB quantization range specified in the standard for the - video interface (ie. :ref:`cea861` for HDMI). - V4L2_DV_RANGE_LIMITED and V4L2_DV_RANGE_FULL override the - standard to be compatible with sinks that have not implemented the - standard correctly (unfortunately quite common for HDMI and DVI-D). - Full range allows all possible values to be used whereas limited - range sets the range to (16 << (N-8)) - (235 << (N-8)) where N is - the number of bits per component. This control is applicable to VGA, - DVI-A/D, HDMI and DisplayPort connectors. - -``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_IT_CONTENT_TYPE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_dv_it_content_type - - Configures the IT Content Type of the transmitted video. This - information is sent over HDMI and DisplayPort connectors as part of - the AVI InfoFrame. The term 'IT Content' is used for content that - originates from a computer as opposed to content from a TV broadcast - or an analog source. The enum v4l2_dv_it_content_type defines - the possible content types: - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.0cm}|p{10.5cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_DV_IT_CONTENT_TYPE_GRAPHICS`` - - Graphics content. Pixel data should be passed unfiltered and - without analog reconstruction. - * - ``V4L2_DV_IT_CONTENT_TYPE_PHOTO`` - - Photo content. The content is derived from digital still pictures. - The content should be passed through with minimal scaling and - picture enhancements. - * - ``V4L2_DV_IT_CONTENT_TYPE_CINEMA`` - - Cinema content. - * - ``V4L2_DV_IT_CONTENT_TYPE_GAME`` - - Game content. Audio and video latency should be minimized. - * - ``V4L2_DV_IT_CONTENT_TYPE_NO_ITC`` - - No IT Content information is available and the ITC bit in the AVI - InfoFrame is set to 0. - - - -``V4L2_CID_DV_RX_POWER_PRESENT (bitmask)`` - Detects whether the receiver receives power from the source (e.g. - HDMI carries 5V on one of the pins). This is often used to power an - eeprom which contains EDID information, such that the source can - read the EDID even if the sink is in standby/power off. Each bit - corresponds to an input pad on the receiver. If an input pad - cannot detect whether power is present, then the bit for that pad - will be 0. This read-only control is applicable to DVI-D, HDMI and - DisplayPort connectors. - -``V4L2_CID_DV_RX_RGB_RANGE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_dv_rgb_range - - Select the quantization range for RGB input. V4L2_DV_RANGE_AUTO - follows the RGB quantization range specified in the standard for the - video interface (ie. :ref:`cea861` for HDMI). - V4L2_DV_RANGE_LIMITED and V4L2_DV_RANGE_FULL override the - standard to be compatible with sources that have not implemented the - standard correctly (unfortunately quite common for HDMI and DVI-D). - Full range allows all possible values to be used whereas limited - range sets the range to (16 << (N-8)) - (235 << (N-8)) where N is - the number of bits per component. This control is applicable to VGA, - DVI-A/D, HDMI and DisplayPort connectors. - -``V4L2_CID_DV_RX_IT_CONTENT_TYPE`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_dv_it_content_type - - Reads the IT Content Type of the received video. This information is - sent over HDMI and DisplayPort connectors as part of the AVI - InfoFrame. The term 'IT Content' is used for content that originates - from a computer as opposed to content from a TV broadcast or an - analog source. See ``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_IT_CONTENT_TYPE`` for the - available content types. - - -.. _fm-rx-controls: - -FM Receiver Control Reference -============================= - -The FM Receiver (FM_RX) class includes controls for common features of -FM Reception capable devices. - - -.. _fm-rx-control-id: - -FM_RX Control IDs ------------------ - -``V4L2_CID_FM_RX_CLASS (class)`` - The FM_RX class descriptor. Calling - :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will - return a description of this control class. - -``V4L2_CID_RDS_RECEPTION (boolean)`` - Enables/disables RDS reception by the radio tuner - -``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_PTY (integer)`` - Gets RDS Programme Type field. This encodes up to 31 pre-defined - programme types. - -``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_PS_NAME (string)`` - Gets the Programme Service name (PS_NAME). It is intended for - static display on a receiver. It is the primary aid to listeners in - programme service identification and selection. In Annex E of - :ref:`iec62106`, the RDS specification, there is a full - description of the correct character encoding for Programme Service - name strings. Also from RDS specification, PS is usually a single - eight character text. However, it is also possible to find receivers - which can scroll strings sized as 8 x N characters. So, this control - must be configured with steps of 8 characters. The result is it must - always contain a string with size multiple of 8. - -``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_RADIO_TEXT (string)`` - Gets the Radio Text info. It is a textual description of what is - being broadcasted. RDS Radio Text can be applied when broadcaster - wishes to transmit longer PS names, programme-related information or - any other text. In these cases, RadioText can be used in addition to - ``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_PS_NAME``. The encoding for Radio Text strings is - also fully described in Annex E of :ref:`iec62106`. The length of - Radio Text strings depends on which RDS Block is being used to - transmit it, either 32 (2A block) or 64 (2B block). However, it is - also possible to find receivers which can scroll strings sized as 32 - x N or 64 x N characters. So, this control must be configured with - steps of 32 or 64 characters. The result is it must always contain a - string with size multiple of 32 or 64. - -``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_TRAFFIC_ANNOUNCEMENT (boolean)`` - If set, then a traffic announcement is in progress. - -``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_TRAFFIC_PROGRAM (boolean)`` - If set, then the tuned programme carries traffic announcements. - -``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_MUSIC_SPEECH (boolean)`` - If set, then this channel broadcasts music. If cleared, then it - broadcasts speech. If the transmitter doesn't make this distinction, - then it will be set. - -``V4L2_CID_TUNE_DEEMPHASIS`` - (enum) - -enum v4l2_deemphasis - - Configures the de-emphasis value for reception. A de-emphasis filter - is applied to the broadcast to accentuate the high audio - frequencies. Depending on the region, a time constant of either 50 - or 75 useconds is used. The enum v4l2_deemphasis defines possible - values for de-emphasis. Here they are: - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_DEEMPHASIS_DISABLED`` - - No de-emphasis is applied. - * - ``V4L2_DEEMPHASIS_50_uS`` - - A de-emphasis of 50 uS is used. - * - ``V4L2_DEEMPHASIS_75_uS`` - - A de-emphasis of 75 uS is used. - - - - -.. _detect-controls: - -Detect Control Reference -======================== - -The Detect class includes controls for common features of various motion -or object detection capable devices. - - -.. _detect-control-id: - -Detect Control IDs ------------------- - -``V4L2_CID_DETECT_CLASS (class)`` - The Detect class descriptor. Calling - :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will - return a description of this control class. - -``V4L2_CID_DETECT_MD_MODE (menu)`` - Sets the motion detection mode. - -.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.5cm}|p{10.0cm}| - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - * - ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_DISABLED`` - - Disable motion detection. - * - ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_GLOBAL`` - - Use a single motion detection threshold. - * - ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_THRESHOLD_GRID`` - - The image is divided into a grid, each cell with its own motion - detection threshold. These thresholds are set through the - ``V4L2_CID_DETECT_MD_THRESHOLD_GRID`` matrix control. - * - ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_REGION_GRID`` - - The image is divided into a grid, each cell with its own region - value that specifies which per-region motion detection thresholds - should be used. Each region has its own thresholds. How these - per-region thresholds are set up is driver-specific. The region - values for the grid are set through the - ``V4L2_CID_DETECT_MD_REGION_GRID`` matrix control. - - - -``V4L2_CID_DETECT_MD_GLOBAL_THRESHOLD (integer)`` - Sets the global motion detection threshold to be used with the - ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_GLOBAL`` motion detection mode. - -``V4L2_CID_DETECT_MD_THRESHOLD_GRID (__u16 matrix)`` - Sets the motion detection thresholds for each cell in the grid. To - be used with the ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_THRESHOLD_GRID`` motion - detection mode. Matrix element (0, 0) represents the cell at the - top-left of the grid. - -``V4L2_CID_DETECT_MD_REGION_GRID (__u8 matrix)`` - Sets the motion detection region value for each cell in the grid. To - be used with the ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_REGION_GRID`` motion - detection mode. Matrix element (0, 0) represents the cell at the - top-left of the grid. - - -.. _rf-tuner-controls: - -RF Tuner Control Reference -========================== - -The RF Tuner (RF_TUNER) class includes controls for common features of -devices having RF tuner. - -In this context, RF tuner is radio receiver circuit between antenna and -demodulator. It receives radio frequency (RF) from the antenna and -converts that received signal to lower intermediate frequency (IF) or -baseband frequency (BB). Tuners that could do baseband output are often -called Zero-IF tuners. Older tuners were typically simple PLL tuners -inside a metal box, while newer ones are highly integrated chips -without a metal box "silicon tuners". These controls are mostly -applicable for new feature rich silicon tuners, just because older -tuners does not have much adjustable features. - -For more information about RF tuners see -`Tuner (radio) <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tuner_%28radio%29>`__ -and `RF front end <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/RF_front_end>`__ -from Wikipedia. - - -.. _rf-tuner-control-id: - -RF_TUNER Control IDs --------------------- - -``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_CLASS (class)`` - The RF_TUNER class descriptor. Calling - :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will - return a description of this control class. - -``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_BANDWIDTH_AUTO (boolean)`` - Enables/disables tuner radio channel bandwidth configuration. In - automatic mode bandwidth configuration is performed by the driver. - -``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_BANDWIDTH (integer)`` - Filter(s) on tuner signal path are used to filter signal according - to receiving party needs. Driver configures filters to fulfill - desired bandwidth requirement. Used when - V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_BANDWIDTH_AUTO is not set. Unit is in Hz. The - range and step are driver-specific. - -``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_LNA_GAIN_AUTO (boolean)`` - Enables/disables LNA automatic gain control (AGC) - -``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_MIXER_GAIN_AUTO (boolean)`` - Enables/disables mixer automatic gain control (AGC) - -``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_IF_GAIN_AUTO (boolean)`` - Enables/disables IF automatic gain control (AGC) - -``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_RF_GAIN (integer)`` - The RF amplifier is the very first amplifier on the receiver signal - path, just right after the antenna input. The difference between the - LNA gain and the RF gain in this document is that the LNA gain is - integrated in the tuner chip while the RF gain is a separate chip. - There may be both RF and LNA gain controls in the same device. The - range and step are driver-specific. - -``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_LNA_GAIN (integer)`` - LNA (low noise amplifier) gain is first gain stage on the RF tuner - signal path. It is located very close to tuner antenna input. Used - when ``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_LNA_GAIN_AUTO`` is not set. See - ``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_RF_GAIN`` to understand how RF gain and LNA gain - differs from the each others. The range and step are - driver-specific. - -``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_MIXER_GAIN (integer)`` - Mixer gain is second gain stage on the RF tuner signal path. It is - located inside mixer block, where RF signal is down-converted by the - mixer. Used when ``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_MIXER_GAIN_AUTO`` is not set. - The range and step are driver-specific. - -``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_IF_GAIN (integer)`` - IF gain is last gain stage on the RF tuner signal path. It is - located on output of RF tuner. It controls signal level of - intermediate frequency output or baseband output. Used when - ``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_IF_GAIN_AUTO`` is not set. The range and step - are driver-specific. - -``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_PLL_LOCK (boolean)`` - Is synthesizer PLL locked? RF tuner is receiving given frequency - when that control is set. This is a read-only control. - -.. [#f1] - This control may be changed to a menu control in the future, if more - options are required. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/meta-formats.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/meta-formats.rst index 5f956fa784b7..b10ca9ee3968 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/meta-formats.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/meta-formats.rst @@ -19,8 +19,8 @@ These formats are used for the :ref:`metadata` interface only. .. toctree:: :maxdepth: 1 - pixfmt-meta-intel-ipu3 pixfmt-meta-d4xx + pixfmt-meta-intel-ipu3 pixfmt-meta-uvc pixfmt-meta-vsp1-hgo pixfmt-meta-vsp1-hgt diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-compressed.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-compressed.rst index e4c5e456df59..2675bef3eefe 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-compressed.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-compressed.rst @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Compressed Formats - 'MG2S' - MPEG-2 parsed slice data, as extracted from the MPEG-2 bitstream. This format is adapted for stateless video decoders that implement a - MPEG-2 pipeline (using the :ref:`codec` and :ref:`media-request-api`). + MPEG-2 pipeline (using the :ref:`mem2mem` and :ref:`media-request-api`). Metadata associated with the frame to decode is required to be passed through the ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG2_SLICE_PARAMS`` control and quantization matrices can optionally be specified through the diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-meta-intel-ipu3.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-meta-intel-ipu3.rst index dc871006b41a..7fb54339f4a7 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-meta-intel-ipu3.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-meta-intel-ipu3.rst @@ -1,4 +1,27 @@ -.. -*- coding: utf-8; mode: rst -*- +.. This file is dual-licensed: you can use it either under the terms +.. of the GPL 2.0 or the GFDL 1.1+ license, at your option. Note that this +.. dual licensing only applies to this file, and not this project as a +.. whole. +.. +.. a) This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or +.. modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version +.. 2.0 as published by the Free Software Foundation. +.. +.. This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +.. but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +.. MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +.. GNU General Public License version 2.0 for more details. +.. +.. Or, alternatively, +.. +.. b) Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this +.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, +.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software +.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts +.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at +.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst. +.. +.. TODO: replace it to GPL-2.0 OR GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections .. _v4l2-meta-fmt-params: .. _v4l2-meta-fmt-stat-3a: @@ -7,21 +30,22 @@ V4L2_META_FMT_IPU3_PARAMS ('ip3p'), V4L2_META_FMT_IPU3_3A ('ip3s') ****************************************************************** -.. c:type:: ipu3_uapi_stats_3a +.. ipu3_uapi_stats_3a 3A statistics ============= -For IPU3 ImgU, the 3A statistics accelerators collect different statistics over -an input bayer frame. Those statistics, defined in data struct :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_stats_3a`, -are obtained from "ipu3-imgu 3a stat" metadata capture video node, which are then -passed to user space for statistics analysis using :c:type:`v4l2_meta_format` interface. +The IPU3 ImgU 3A statistics accelerators collect different statistics over +an input Bayer frame. Those statistics are obtained from the "ipu3-imgu [01] 3a +stat" metadata capture video nodes, using the :c:type:`v4l2_meta_format` +interface. They are formatted as described by the :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_stats_3a` +structure. The statistics collected are AWB (Auto-white balance) RGBS (Red, Green, Blue and Saturation measure) cells, AWB filter response, AF (Auto-focus) filter response, and AE (Auto-exposure) histogram. -struct :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_4a_config` saves configurable parameters for all above. +The struct :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_4a_config` saves all configurable parameters. .. code-block:: c @@ -37,105 +61,14 @@ struct :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_4a_config` saves configurable parameters for all above struct ipu3_uapi_ff_status stats_3a_status; }; -.. c:type:: ipu3_uapi_params +.. ipu3_uapi_params Pipeline parameters =================== -IPU3 pipeline has a number of image processing stages, each of which takes a -set of parameters as input. The major stages of pipelines are shown here: - -Raw pixels -> Bayer Downscaling -> Optical Black Correction -> - -Linearization -> Lens Shading Correction -> White Balance / Exposure / - -Focus Apply -> Bayer Noise Reduction -> ANR -> Demosaicing -> Color - -Correction Matrix -> Gamma correction -> Color Space Conversion -> - -Chroma Down Scaling -> Chromatic Noise Reduction -> Total Color - -Correction -> XNR3 -> TNR -> DDR - -The table below presents a description of the above algorithms. - -======================== ======================================================= -Name Description -======================== ======================================================= -Optical Black Correction Optical Black Correction block subtracts a pre-defined - value from the respective pixel values to obtain better - image quality. - Defined in :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_obgrid_param`. -Linearization This algo block uses linearization parameters to - address non-linearity sensor effects. The Lookup table - table is defined in - :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_isp_lin_vmem_params`. -SHD Lens shading correction is used to correct spatial - non-uniformity of the pixel response due to optical - lens shading. This is done by applying a different gain - for each pixel. The gain, black level etc are - configured in :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_shd_config_static`. -BNR Bayer noise reduction block removes image noise by - applying a bilateral filter. - See :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_bnr_static_config` for details. -ANR Advanced Noise Reduction is a block based algorithm - that performs noise reduction in the Bayer domain. The - convolution matrix etc can be found in - :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_anr_config`. -Demosaicing Demosaicing converts raw sensor data in Bayer format - into RGB (Red, Green, Blue) presentation. Then add - outputs of estimation of Y channel for following stream - processing by Firmware. The struct is defined as - :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_dm_config`. (TODO) -Color Correction Color Correction algo transforms sensor specific color - space to the standard "sRGB" color space. This is done - by applying 3x3 matrix defined in - :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_ccm_mat_config`. -Gamma correction Gamma correction :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_gamma_config` is a - basic non-linear tone mapping correction that is - applied per pixel for each pixel component. -CSC Color space conversion transforms each pixel from the - RGB primary presentation to YUV (Y: brightness, - UV: Luminance) presentation. This is done by applying - a 3x3 matrix defined in - :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_csc_mat_config` -CDS Chroma down sampling - After the CSC is performed, the Chroma Down Sampling - is applied for a UV plane down sampling by a factor - of 2 in each direction for YUV 4:2:0 using a 4x2 - configurable filter :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_cds_params`. -CHNR Chroma noise reduction - This block processes only the chrominance pixels and - performs noise reduction by cleaning the high - frequency noise. - See struct :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_yuvp1_chnr_config`. -TCC Total color correction as defined in struct - :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_yuvp2_tcc_static_config`. -XNR3 eXtreme Noise Reduction V3 is the third revision of - noise reduction algorithm used to improve image - quality. This removes the low frequency noise in the - captured image. Two related structs are being defined, - :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_isp_xnr3_params` for ISP data memory - and :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_isp_xnr3_vmem_params` for vector - memory. -TNR Temporal Noise Reduction block compares successive - frames in time to remove anomalies / noise in pixel - values. :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_isp_tnr3_vmem_params` and - :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_isp_tnr3_params` are defined for ISP - vector and data memory respectively. -======================== ======================================================= - -A few stages of the pipeline will be executed by firmware running on the ISP -processor, while many others will use a set of fixed hardware blocks also -called accelerator cluster (ACC) to crunch pixel data and produce statistics. - -ACC parameters of individual algorithms, as defined by -:c:type:`ipu3_uapi_acc_param`, can be chosen to be applied by the user -space through struct :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_flags` embedded in -:c:type:`ipu3_uapi_params` structure. For parameters that are configured as -not enabled by the user space, the corresponding structs are ignored by the -driver, in which case the existing configuration of the algorithm will be -preserved. +The pipeline parameters are passed to the "ipu3-imgu [01] parameters" metadata +output video nodes, using the :c:type:`v4l2_meta_format` interface. They are +formatted as described by the :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_params` structure. Both 3A statistics and pipeline parameters described here are closely tied to the underlying camera sub-system (CSS) APIs. They are usually consumed and @@ -143,13 +76,6 @@ produced by dedicated user space libraries that comprise the important tuning tools, thus freeing the developers from being bothered with the low level hardware and algorithm details. -It should be noted that IPU3 DMA operations require the addresses of all data -structures (that includes both input and output) to be aligned on 32 byte -boundaries. - -The meta data :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_params` will be sent to "ipu3-imgu parameters" -video node in ``V4L2_BUF_TYPE_META_CAPTURE`` format. - .. code-block:: c struct ipu3_uapi_params { diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-packed-yuv.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-packed-yuv.rst index f53e8f57a003..7fcee1c11ac4 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-packed-yuv.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-packed-yuv.rst @@ -190,6 +190,170 @@ component of each pixel in one 16 or 32 bit word. - Cr\ :sub:`2` - Cr\ :sub:`1` - Cr\ :sub:`0` + - + * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-AYUV32: + + - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_AYUV32`` + - 'AYUV' + + - a\ :sub:`7` + - a\ :sub:`6` + - a\ :sub:`5` + - a\ :sub:`4` + - a\ :sub:`3` + - a\ :sub:`2` + - a\ :sub:`1` + - a\ :sub:`0` + + - Y'\ :sub:`7` + - Y'\ :sub:`6` + - Y'\ :sub:`5` + - Y'\ :sub:`4` + - Y'\ :sub:`3` + - Y'\ :sub:`2` + - Y'\ :sub:`1` + - Y'\ :sub:`0` + + - Cb\ :sub:`7` + - Cb\ :sub:`6` + - Cb\ :sub:`5` + - Cb\ :sub:`4` + - Cb\ :sub:`3` + - Cb\ :sub:`2` + - Cb\ :sub:`1` + - Cb\ :sub:`0` + + - Cr\ :sub:`7` + - Cr\ :sub:`6` + - Cr\ :sub:`5` + - Cr\ :sub:`4` + - Cr\ :sub:`3` + - Cr\ :sub:`2` + - Cr\ :sub:`1` + - Cr\ :sub:`0` + - + * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-XYUV32: + + - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_XYUV32`` + - 'XYUV' + + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + + - Y'\ :sub:`7` + - Y'\ :sub:`6` + - Y'\ :sub:`5` + - Y'\ :sub:`4` + - Y'\ :sub:`3` + - Y'\ :sub:`2` + - Y'\ :sub:`1` + - Y'\ :sub:`0` + + - Cb\ :sub:`7` + - Cb\ :sub:`6` + - Cb\ :sub:`5` + - Cb\ :sub:`4` + - Cb\ :sub:`3` + - Cb\ :sub:`2` + - Cb\ :sub:`1` + - Cb\ :sub:`0` + + - Cr\ :sub:`7` + - Cr\ :sub:`6` + - Cr\ :sub:`5` + - Cr\ :sub:`4` + - Cr\ :sub:`3` + - Cr\ :sub:`2` + - Cr\ :sub:`1` + - Cr\ :sub:`0` + - + * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-VUYA32: + + - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_VUYA32`` + - 'VUYA' + + - Cr\ :sub:`7` + - Cr\ :sub:`6` + - Cr\ :sub:`5` + - Cr\ :sub:`4` + - Cr\ :sub:`3` + - Cr\ :sub:`2` + - Cr\ :sub:`1` + - Cr\ :sub:`0` + + - Cb\ :sub:`7` + - Cb\ :sub:`6` + - Cb\ :sub:`5` + - Cb\ :sub:`4` + - Cb\ :sub:`3` + - Cb\ :sub:`2` + - Cb\ :sub:`1` + - Cb\ :sub:`0` + + - Y'\ :sub:`7` + - Y'\ :sub:`6` + - Y'\ :sub:`5` + - Y'\ :sub:`4` + - Y'\ :sub:`3` + - Y'\ :sub:`2` + - Y'\ :sub:`1` + - Y'\ :sub:`0` + + - a\ :sub:`7` + - a\ :sub:`6` + - a\ :sub:`5` + - a\ :sub:`4` + - a\ :sub:`3` + - a\ :sub:`2` + - a\ :sub:`1` + - a\ :sub:`0` + - + * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-VUYX32: + + - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_VUYX32`` + - 'VUYX' + + - Cr\ :sub:`7` + - Cr\ :sub:`6` + - Cr\ :sub:`5` + - Cr\ :sub:`4` + - Cr\ :sub:`3` + - Cr\ :sub:`2` + - Cr\ :sub:`1` + - Cr\ :sub:`0` + + - Cb\ :sub:`7` + - Cb\ :sub:`6` + - Cb\ :sub:`5` + - Cb\ :sub:`4` + - Cb\ :sub:`3` + - Cb\ :sub:`2` + - Cb\ :sub:`1` + - Cb\ :sub:`0` + + - Y'\ :sub:`7` + - Y'\ :sub:`6` + - Y'\ :sub:`5` + - Y'\ :sub:`4` + - Y'\ :sub:`3` + - Y'\ :sub:`2` + - Y'\ :sub:`1` + - Y'\ :sub:`0` + + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - .. raw:: latex @@ -202,4 +366,8 @@ component of each pixel in one 16 or 32 bit word. #) The value of a = alpha bits is undefined when reading from the driver, ignored when writing to the driver, except when alpha blending has been negotiated for a :ref:`Video Overlay <overlay>` or - :ref:`Video Output Overlay <osd>`. + :ref:`Video Output Overlay <osd>` for the formats Y444, YUV555 and + YUV4. However, for formats AYUV32 and VUYA32, the alpha component is + expected to contain a meaningful value that can be used by drivers + and applications. And, the formats XYUV32 and VUYX32 contain undefined + alpha values that must be ignored by all applications and drivers. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/subdev-formats.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/subdev-formats.rst index ff4b2a972fd2..f5440d55d510 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/subdev-formats.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/subdev-formats.rst @@ -75,15 +75,15 @@ Media Bus Pixel Codes --------------------- The media bus pixel codes describe image formats as flowing over -physical busses (both between separate physical components and inside +physical buses (both between separate physical components and inside SoC devices). This should not be confused with the V4L2 pixel formats that describe, using four character codes, image formats as stored in memory. -While there is a relationship between image formats on busses and image +While there is a relationship between image formats on buses and image formats in memory (a raw Bayer image won't be magically converted to JPEG just by storing it to memory), there is no one-to-one -correspondance between them. +correspondence between them. Packed RGB Formats diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-g-parm.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-g-parm.rst index 0d2593176c90..d9d5d97848d3 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-g-parm.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-g-parm.rst @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ union holding separate parameters for input and output devices. .. _parm-caps: -.. flat-table:: Streaming Parameters Capabilites +.. flat-table:: Streaming Parameters Capabilities :header-rows: 0 :stub-columns: 0 :widths: 3 1 4 diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-prepare-buf.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-prepare-buf.rst index 60986710967b..7c6b5f4e1011 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-prepare-buf.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-prepare-buf.rst @@ -43,10 +43,7 @@ Applications can optionally call the :ref:`VIDIOC_PREPARE_BUF` ioctl to pass ownership of the buffer to the driver before actually enqueuing it, using the :ref:`VIDIOC_QBUF <VIDIOC_QBUF>` ioctl, and to prepare it for future I/O. Such preparations may include cache invalidation or cleaning. Performing them -in advance saves time during the actual I/O. In case such cache -operations are not required, the application can use one of -``V4L2_BUF_FLAG_NO_CACHE_INVALIDATE`` and -``V4L2_BUF_FLAG_NO_CACHE_CLEAN`` flags to skip the respective step. +in advance saves time during the actual I/O. The struct :c:type:`v4l2_buffer` structure is specified in :ref:`buffer`. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-qbuf.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-qbuf.rst index 3259168a7358..c138d149faea 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-qbuf.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-qbuf.rst @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ then ``EINVAL`` will be returned. :ref:`VIDIOC_STREAMOFF <VIDIOC_STREAMON>` or calling :ref:`VIDIOC_REQBUFS` the check for this will be reset. - For :ref:`memory-to-memory devices <codec>` you can specify the + For :ref:`memory-to-memory devices <mem2mem>` you can specify the ``request_fd`` only for output buffers, not for capture buffers. Attempting to specify this for a capture buffer will result in an ``EACCES`` error. diff --git a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/bttv.rst b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/bttv.rst index d72a0f8fd267..f956ee264099 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/bttv.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/bttv.rst @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ same card listens there is much higher... For problems with sound: There are a lot of different systems used for TV sound all over the world. And there are also different chips which decode the audio signal. Reports about sound problems ("stereo -does'nt work") are pretty useless unless you include some details +doesn't work") are pretty useless unless you include some details about your hardware and the TV sound scheme used in your country (or at least the country you are living in). @@ -771,7 +771,7 @@ Identifying: - Lifeview.com.tw states (Feb. 2002): "The FlyVideo2000 and FlyVideo2000s product name have renamed to FlyVideo98." Their Bt8x8 cards are listed as discontinued. - - Flyvideo 2000S was probably sold as Flyvideo 3000 in some contries(Europe?). + - Flyvideo 2000S was probably sold as Flyvideo 3000 in some countries(Europe?). The new Flyvideo 2000/3000 are SAA7130/SAA7134 based. "Flyvideo II" had been the name for the 848 cards, nowadays (in Germany) diff --git a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/imx.rst b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/imx.rst index 6922dde4a82b..1d7eb8c7bd5c 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/imx.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/imx.rst @@ -24,12 +24,12 @@ memory. Various dedicated DMA channels exist for both video capture and display paths. During transfer, the IDMAC is also capable of vertical image flip, 8x8 block transfer (see IRT description), pixel component re-ordering (for example UYVY to YUYV) within the same colorspace, and -even packed <--> planar conversion. It can also perform a simple -de-interlacing by interleaving even and odd lines during transfer +packed <--> planar conversion. The IDMAC can also perform a simple +de-interlacing by interweaving even and odd lines during transfer (without motion compensation which requires the VDIC). The CSI is the backend capture unit that interfaces directly with -camera sensors over Parallel, BT.656/1120, and MIPI CSI-2 busses. +camera sensors over Parallel, BT.656/1120, and MIPI CSI-2 buses. The IC handles color-space conversion, resizing (downscaling and upscaling), horizontal flip, and 90/270 degree rotation operations. @@ -175,15 +175,21 @@ via the SMFC and an IDMAC channel, bypassing IC pre-processing. This source pad is routed to a capture device node, with a node name of the format "ipuX_csiY capture". -Note that since the IDMAC source pad makes use of an IDMAC channel, it -can do pixel reordering within the same colorspace. For example, the -sink pad can take UYVY2X8, but the IDMAC source pad can output YUYV2X8. -If the sink pad is receiving YUV, the output at the capture device can -also be converted to a planar YUV format such as YUV420. - -It will also perform simple de-interlace without motion compensation, -which is activated if the sink pad's field type is an interlaced type, -and the IDMAC source pad field type is set to none. +Note that since the IDMAC source pad makes use of an IDMAC channel, +pixel reordering within the same colorspace can be carried out by the +IDMAC channel. For example, if the CSI sink pad is receiving in UYVY +order, the capture device linked to the IDMAC source pad can capture +in YUYV order. Also, if the CSI sink pad is receiving a packed YUV +format, the capture device can capture a planar YUV format such as +YUV420. + +The IDMAC channel at the IDMAC source pad also supports simple +interweave without motion compensation, which is activated if the source +pad's field type is sequential top-bottom or bottom-top, and the +requested capture interface field type is set to interlaced (t-b, b-t, +or unqualified interlaced). The capture interface will enforce the same +field order as the source pad field order (interlaced-bt if source pad +is seq-bt, interlaced-tb if source pad is seq-tb). This subdev can generate the following event when enabling the second IDMAC source pad: @@ -201,7 +207,7 @@ The CSI supports cropping the incoming raw sensor frames. This is implemented in the ipuX_csiY entities at the sink pad, using the crop selection subdev API. -The CSI also supports fixed divide-by-two downscaling indepently in +The CSI also supports fixed divide-by-two downscaling independently in width and height. This is implemented in the ipuX_csiY entities at the sink pad, using the compose selection subdev API. @@ -325,14 +331,14 @@ ipuX_vdic The VDIC carries out motion compensated de-interlacing, with three motion compensation modes: low, medium, and high motion. The mode is -specified with the menu control V4L2_CID_DEINTERLACING_MODE. It has -two sink pads and a single source pad. +specified with the menu control V4L2_CID_DEINTERLACING_MODE. The VDIC +has two sink pads and a single source pad. The direct sink pad receives from an ipuX_csiY direct pad. With this link the VDIC can only operate in high motion mode. When the IDMAC sink pad is activated, it receives from an output -or mem2mem device node. With this pipeline, it can also operate +or mem2mem device node. With this pipeline, the VDIC can also operate in low and medium modes, because these modes require receiving frames from memory buffers. Note that an output or mem2mem device is not implemented yet, so this sink pad currently has no links. @@ -345,8 +351,8 @@ ipuX_ic_prp This is the IC pre-processing entity. It acts as a router, routing data from its sink pad to one or both of its source pads. -It has a single sink pad. The sink pad can receive from the ipuX_csiY -direct pad, or from ipuX_vdic. +This entity has a single sink pad. The sink pad can receive from the +ipuX_csiY direct pad, or from ipuX_vdic. This entity has two source pads. One source pad routes to the pre-process encode task entity (ipuX_ic_prpenc), the other to the @@ -369,8 +375,8 @@ color-space conversion, resizing (downscaling and upscaling), horizontal and vertical flip, and 90/270 degree rotation. Flip and rotation are provided via standard V4L2 controls. -Like the ipuX_csiY IDMAC source, it can also perform simple de-interlace -without motion compensation, and pixel reordering. +Like the ipuX_csiY IDMAC source, this entity also supports simple +de-interlace without motion compensation, and pixel reordering. ipuX_ic_prpvf ------------- @@ -380,18 +386,18 @@ pad from ipuX_ic_prp, and a single source pad. The source pad is routed to a capture device node, with a node name of the format "ipuX_ic_prpvf capture". -It is identical in operation to ipuX_ic_prpenc, with the same resizing -and CSC operations and flip/rotation controls. It will receive and -process de-interlaced frames from the ipuX_vdic if ipuX_ic_prp is +This entity is identical in operation to ipuX_ic_prpenc, with the same +resizing and CSC operations and flip/rotation controls. It will receive +and process de-interlaced frames from the ipuX_vdic if ipuX_ic_prp is receiving from ipuX_vdic. -Like the ipuX_csiY IDMAC source, it can perform simple de-interlace -without motion compensation. However, note that if the ipuX_vdic is -included in the pipeline (ipuX_ic_prp is receiving from ipuX_vdic), -it's not possible to use simple de-interlace in ipuX_ic_prpvf, since -the ipuX_vdic has already carried out de-interlacing (with motion -compensation) and therefore the field type output from ipuX_ic_prp can -only be none. +Like the ipuX_csiY IDMAC source, this entity supports simple +interweaving without motion compensation. However, note that if the +ipuX_vdic is included in the pipeline (ipuX_ic_prp is receiving from +ipuX_vdic), it's not possible to use interweave in ipuX_ic_prpvf, +since the ipuX_vdic has already carried out de-interlacing (with +motion compensation) and therefore the field type output from +ipuX_vdic can only be none (progressive). Capture Pipelines ----------------- @@ -516,10 +522,33 @@ On the SabreAuto, an on-board ADV7180 SD decoder is connected to the parallel bus input on the internal video mux to IPU1 CSI0. The following example configures a pipeline to capture from the ADV7180 -video decoder, assuming NTSC 720x480 input signals, with Motion -Compensated de-interlacing. Pad field types assume the adv7180 outputs -"interlaced". $outputfmt can be any format supported by the ipu1_ic_prpvf -entity at its output pad: +video decoder, assuming NTSC 720x480 input signals, using simple +interweave (unconverted and without motion compensation). The adv7180 +must output sequential or alternating fields (field type 'seq-bt' for +NTSC, or 'alternate'): + +.. code-block:: none + + # Setup links + media-ctl -l "'adv7180 3-0021':0 -> 'ipu1_csi0_mux':1[1]" + media-ctl -l "'ipu1_csi0_mux':2 -> 'ipu1_csi0':0[1]" + media-ctl -l "'ipu1_csi0':2 -> 'ipu1_csi0 capture':0[1]" + # Configure pads + media-ctl -V "'adv7180 3-0021':0 [fmt:UYVY2X8/720x480 field:seq-bt]" + media-ctl -V "'ipu1_csi0_mux':2 [fmt:UYVY2X8/720x480]" + media-ctl -V "'ipu1_csi0':2 [fmt:AYUV32/720x480]" + # Configure "ipu1_csi0 capture" interface (assumed at /dev/video4) + v4l2-ctl -d4 --set-fmt-video=field=interlaced_bt + +Streaming can then begin on /dev/video4. The v4l2-ctl tool can also be +used to select any supported YUV pixelformat on /dev/video4. + +This example configures a pipeline to capture from the ADV7180 +video decoder, assuming PAL 720x576 input signals, with Motion +Compensated de-interlacing. The adv7180 must output sequential or +alternating fields (field type 'seq-tb' for PAL, or 'alternate'). +$outputfmt can be any format supported by the ipu1_ic_prpvf entity +at its output pad: .. code-block:: none @@ -531,11 +560,11 @@ entity at its output pad: media-ctl -l "'ipu1_ic_prp':2 -> 'ipu1_ic_prpvf':0[1]" media-ctl -l "'ipu1_ic_prpvf':1 -> 'ipu1_ic_prpvf capture':0[1]" # Configure pads - media-ctl -V "'adv7180 3-0021':0 [fmt:UYVY2X8/720x480]" - media-ctl -V "'ipu1_csi0_mux':2 [fmt:UYVY2X8/720x480 field:interlaced]" - media-ctl -V "'ipu1_csi0':1 [fmt:AYUV32/720x480 field:interlaced]" - media-ctl -V "'ipu1_vdic':2 [fmt:AYUV32/720x480 field:none]" - media-ctl -V "'ipu1_ic_prp':2 [fmt:AYUV32/720x480 field:none]" + media-ctl -V "'adv7180 3-0021':0 [fmt:UYVY2X8/720x576 field:seq-tb]" + media-ctl -V "'ipu1_csi0_mux':2 [fmt:UYVY2X8/720x576]" + media-ctl -V "'ipu1_csi0':1 [fmt:AYUV32/720x576]" + media-ctl -V "'ipu1_vdic':2 [fmt:AYUV32/720x576 field:none]" + media-ctl -V "'ipu1_ic_prp':2 [fmt:AYUV32/720x576 field:none]" media-ctl -V "'ipu1_ic_prpvf':1 [fmt:$outputfmt field:none]" Streaming can then begin on the capture device node at diff --git a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/imx7.rst b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/imx7.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..fe411f65c01c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/imx7.rst @@ -0,0 +1,162 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +i.MX7 Video Capture Driver +========================== + +Introduction +------------ + +The i.MX7 contrary to the i.MX5/6 family does not contain an Image Processing +Unit (IPU); because of that the capabilities to perform operations or +manipulation of the capture frames are less feature rich. + +For image capture the i.MX7 has three units: +- CMOS Sensor Interface (CSI) +- Video Multiplexer +- MIPI CSI-2 Receiver + +.. code-block:: none + + MIPI Camera Input ---> MIPI CSI-2 --- > |\ + | \ + | \ + | M | + | U | ------> CSI ---> Capture + | X | + | / + Parallel Camera Input ----------------> | / + |/ + +For additional information, please refer to the latest versions of the i.MX7 +reference manual [#f1]_. + +Entities +-------- + +imx7-mipi-csi2 +-------------- + +This is the MIPI CSI-2 receiver entity. It has one sink pad to receive the pixel +data from MIPI CSI-2 camera sensor. It has one source pad, corresponding to the +virtual channel 0. This module is compliant to previous version of Samsung +D-phy, and supports two D-PHY Rx Data lanes. + +csi_mux +------- + +This is the video multiplexer. It has two sink pads to select from either camera +sensor with a parallel interface or from MIPI CSI-2 virtual channel 0. It has +a single source pad that routes to the CSI. + +csi +--- + +The CSI enables the chip to connect directly to external CMOS image sensor. CSI +can interface directly with Parallel and MIPI CSI-2 buses. It has 256 x 64 FIFO +to store received image pixel data and embedded DMA controllers to transfer data +from the FIFO through AHB bus. + +This entity has one sink pad that receives from the csi_mux entity and a single +source pad that routes video frames directly to memory buffers. This pad is +routed to a capture device node. + +Usage Notes +----------- + +To aid in configuration and for backward compatibility with V4L2 applications +that access controls only from video device nodes, the capture device interfaces +inherit controls from the active entities in the current pipeline, so controls +can be accessed either directly from the subdev or from the active capture +device interface. For example, the sensor controls are available either from the +sensor subdevs or from the active capture device. + +Warp7 with OV2680 +----------------- + +On this platform an OV2680 MIPI CSI-2 module is connected to the internal MIPI +CSI-2 receiver. The following example configures a video capture pipeline with +an output of 800x600, and BGGR 10 bit bayer format: + +.. code-block:: none + + # Setup links + media-ctl -l "'ov2680 1-0036':0 -> 'imx7-mipi-csis.0':0[1]" + media-ctl -l "'imx7-mipi-csis.0':1 -> 'csi_mux':1[1]" + media-ctl -l "'csi_mux':2 -> 'csi':0[1]" + media-ctl -l "'csi':1 -> 'csi capture':0[1]" + + # Configure pads for pipeline + media-ctl -V "'ov2680 1-0036':0 [fmt:SBGGR10_1X10/800x600 field:none]" + media-ctl -V "'csi_mux':1 [fmt:SBGGR10_1X10/800x600 field:none]" + media-ctl -V "'csi_mux':2 [fmt:SBGGR10_1X10/800x600 field:none]" + media-ctl -V "'imx7-mipi-csis.0':0 [fmt:SBGGR10_1X10/800x600 field:none]" + media-ctl -V "'csi':0 [fmt:SBGGR10_1X10/800x600 field:none]" + +After this streaming can start. The v4l2-ctl tool can be used to select any of +the resolutions supported by the sensor. + +.. code-block:: none + + root@imx7s-warp:~# media-ctl -p + Media controller API version 4.17.0 + + Media device information + ------------------------ + driver imx-media + model imx-media + serial + bus info + hw revision 0x0 + driver version 4.17.0 + + Device topology + - entity 1: csi (2 pads, 2 links) + type V4L2 subdev subtype Unknown flags 0 + device node name /dev/v4l-subdev0 + pad0: Sink + [fmt:SBGGR10_1X10/800x600 field:none] + <- "csi_mux":2 [ENABLED] + pad1: Source + [fmt:SBGGR10_1X10/800x600 field:none] + -> "csi capture":0 [ENABLED] + + - entity 4: csi capture (1 pad, 1 link) + type Node subtype V4L flags 0 + device node name /dev/video0 + pad0: Sink + <- "csi":1 [ENABLED] + + - entity 10: csi_mux (3 pads, 2 links) + type V4L2 subdev subtype Unknown flags 0 + device node name /dev/v4l-subdev1 + pad0: Sink + [fmt:unknown/0x0] + pad1: Sink + [fmt:unknown/800x600 field:none] + <- "imx7-mipi-csis.0":1 [ENABLED] + pad2: Source + [fmt:unknown/800x600 field:none] + -> "csi":0 [ENABLED] + + - entity 14: imx7-mipi-csis.0 (2 pads, 2 links) + type V4L2 subdev subtype Unknown flags 0 + device node name /dev/v4l-subdev2 + pad0: Sink + [fmt:SBGGR10_1X10/800x600 field:none] + <- "ov2680 1-0036":0 [ENABLED] + pad1: Source + [fmt:SBGGR10_1X10/800x600 field:none] + -> "csi_mux":1 [ENABLED] + + - entity 17: ov2680 1-0036 (1 pad, 1 link) + type V4L2 subdev subtype Sensor flags 0 + device node name /dev/v4l-subdev3 + pad0: Source + [fmt:SBGGR10_1X10/800x600 field:none] + -> "imx7-mipi-csis.0":0 [ENABLED] + + +References +---------- + +.. [#f1] https://www.nxp.com/docs/en/reference-manual/IMX7SRM.pdf diff --git a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/index.rst b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/index.rst index f28570ec9e42..dfd4b205937c 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/index.rst @@ -44,6 +44,7 @@ For more details see the file COPYING in the source distribution of Linux. davinci-vpbe fimc imx + imx7 ipu3 ivtv max2175 diff --git a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/ipu3.rst b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/ipu3.rst index f89b51dafadd..c9f780404eee 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/ipu3.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/ipu3.rst @@ -1,3 +1,5 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + .. include:: <isonum.txt> =============================================================== @@ -355,10 +357,157 @@ https://chromium.googlesource.com/chromiumos/platform/arc-camera/+/master/ The source can be located under hal/intel directory. +Overview of IPU3 pipeline +========================= + +IPU3 pipeline has a number of image processing stages, each of which takes a +set of parameters as input. The major stages of pipelines are shown here: + +.. kernel-render:: DOT + :alt: IPU3 ImgU Pipeline + :caption: IPU3 ImgU Pipeline Diagram + + digraph "IPU3 ImgU" { + node [shape=box] + splines="ortho" + rankdir="LR" + + a [label="Raw pixels"] + b [label="Bayer Downscaling"] + c [label="Optical Black Correction"] + d [label="Linearization"] + e [label="Lens Shading Correction"] + f [label="White Balance / Exposure / Focus Apply"] + g [label="Bayer Noise Reduction"] + h [label="ANR"] + i [label="Demosaicing"] + j [label="Color Correction Matrix"] + k [label="Gamma correction"] + l [label="Color Space Conversion"] + m [label="Chroma Down Scaling"] + n [label="Chromatic Noise Reduction"] + o [label="Total Color Correction"] + p [label="XNR3"] + q [label="TNR"] + r [label="DDR"] + + { rank=same; a -> b -> c -> d -> e -> f } + { rank=same; g -> h -> i -> j -> k -> l } + { rank=same; m -> n -> o -> p -> q -> r } + + a -> g -> m [style=invis, weight=10] + + f -> g + l -> m + } + +The table below presents a description of the above algorithms. + +======================== ======================================================= +Name Description +======================== ======================================================= +Optical Black Correction Optical Black Correction block subtracts a pre-defined + value from the respective pixel values to obtain better + image quality. + Defined in :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_obgrid_param`. +Linearization This algo block uses linearization parameters to + address non-linearity sensor effects. The Lookup table + table is defined in + :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_isp_lin_vmem_params`. +SHD Lens shading correction is used to correct spatial + non-uniformity of the pixel response due to optical + lens shading. This is done by applying a different gain + for each pixel. The gain, black level etc are + configured in :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_shd_config_static`. +BNR Bayer noise reduction block removes image noise by + applying a bilateral filter. + See :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_bnr_static_config` for details. +ANR Advanced Noise Reduction is a block based algorithm + that performs noise reduction in the Bayer domain. The + convolution matrix etc can be found in + :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_anr_config`. +DM Demosaicing converts raw sensor data in Bayer format + into RGB (Red, Green, Blue) presentation. Then add + outputs of estimation of Y channel for following stream + processing by Firmware. The struct is defined as + :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_dm_config`. +Color Correction Color Correction algo transforms sensor specific color + space to the standard "sRGB" color space. This is done + by applying 3x3 matrix defined in + :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_ccm_mat_config`. +Gamma correction Gamma correction :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_gamma_config` is a + basic non-linear tone mapping correction that is + applied per pixel for each pixel component. +CSC Color space conversion transforms each pixel from the + RGB primary presentation to YUV (Y: brightness, + UV: Luminance) presentation. This is done by applying + a 3x3 matrix defined in + :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_csc_mat_config` +CDS Chroma down sampling + After the CSC is performed, the Chroma Down Sampling + is applied for a UV plane down sampling by a factor + of 2 in each direction for YUV 4:2:0 using a 4x2 + configurable filter :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_cds_params`. +CHNR Chroma noise reduction + This block processes only the chrominance pixels and + performs noise reduction by cleaning the high + frequency noise. + See struct :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_yuvp1_chnr_config`. +TCC Total color correction as defined in struct + :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_yuvp2_tcc_static_config`. +XNR3 eXtreme Noise Reduction V3 is the third revision of + noise reduction algorithm used to improve image + quality. This removes the low frequency noise in the + captured image. Two related structs are being defined, + :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_isp_xnr3_params` for ISP data memory + and :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_isp_xnr3_vmem_params` for vector + memory. +TNR Temporal Noise Reduction block compares successive + frames in time to remove anomalies / noise in pixel + values. :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_isp_tnr3_vmem_params` and + :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_isp_tnr3_params` are defined for ISP + vector and data memory respectively. +======================== ======================================================= + +Other often encountered acronyms not listed in above table: + + ACC + Accelerator cluster + AWB_FR + Auto white balance filter response statistics + BDS + Bayer downscaler parameters + CCM + Color correction matrix coefficients + IEFd + Image enhancement filter directed + Obgrid + Optical black level compensation + OSYS + Output system configuration + ROI + Region of interest + YDS + Y down sampling + YTM + Y-tone mapping + +A few stages of the pipeline will be executed by firmware running on the ISP +processor, while many others will use a set of fixed hardware blocks also +called accelerator cluster (ACC) to crunch pixel data and produce statistics. + +ACC parameters of individual algorithms, as defined by +:c:type:`ipu3_uapi_acc_param`, can be chosen to be applied by the user +space through struct :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_flags` embedded in +:c:type:`ipu3_uapi_params` structure. For parameters that are configured as +not enabled by the user space, the corresponding structs are ignored by the +driver, in which case the existing configuration of the algorithm will be +preserved. + References ========== -.. [#f5] include/uapi/linux/intel-ipu3.h +.. [#f5] drivers/staging/media/ipu3/include/intel-ipu3.h .. [#f1] https://github.com/intel/nvt diff --git a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/pxa_camera.rst b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/pxa_camera.rst index e4fbca755e1a..ee1bd96b66dd 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/pxa_camera.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/pxa_camera.rst @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Global video workflow --------------------- a) QCI stopped - Initialy, the QCI interface is stopped. + Initially, the QCI interface is stopped. When a buffer is queued (pxa_videobuf_ops->buf_queue), the QCI starts. b) QCI started diff --git a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/qcom_camss.rst b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/qcom_camss.rst index 6b15385b12b3..a72e17d09cb7 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/qcom_camss.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/qcom_camss.rst @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ The considerations to split the driver in this particular way are as follows: - representing CSIPHY and CSID modules by a separate sub-device for each module allows to model the hardware links between these modules; - representing VFE by a separate sub-devices for each input interface allows - to use the input interfaces concurently and independently as this is + to use the input interfaces concurrently and independently as this is supported by the hardware; - representing ISPIF by a number of sub-devices equal to the number of CSID sub-devices allows to create linear media controller pipelines when using two diff --git a/Documentation/misc-devices/ibmvmc.rst b/Documentation/misc-devices/ibmvmc.rst index 46ded79554d4..b46df4ea2b81 100644 --- a/Documentation/misc-devices/ibmvmc.rst +++ b/Documentation/misc-devices/ibmvmc.rst @@ -1,4 +1,5 @@ .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ + ====================================================== IBM Virtual Management Channel Kernel Driver (IBMVMC) ====================================================== diff --git a/Documentation/misc-devices/index.rst b/Documentation/misc-devices/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..dfd1f45a3127 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/misc-devices/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +============================================ +Assorted Miscellaneous Devices Documentation +============================================ + +This documentation contains information for assorted devices that do not +fit into other categories. + +.. class:: toc-title + + Table of contents + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 2 + + ibmvmc diff --git a/Documentation/networking/af_xdp.rst b/Documentation/networking/af_xdp.rst index 4ae4f9d8f8fe..e14d7d40fc75 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/af_xdp.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/af_xdp.rst @@ -295,6 +295,41 @@ using:: For XDP_SKB mode, use the switch "-S" instead of "-N" and all options can be displayed with "-h", as usual. +FAQ +======= + +Q: I am not seeing any traffic on the socket. What am I doing wrong? + +A: When a netdev of a physical NIC is initialized, Linux usually + allocates one Rx and Tx queue pair per core. So on a 8 core system, + queue ids 0 to 7 will be allocated, one per core. In the AF_XDP + bind call or the xsk_socket__create libbpf function call, you + specify a specific queue id to bind to and it is only the traffic + towards that queue you are going to get on you socket. So in the + example above, if you bind to queue 0, you are NOT going to get any + traffic that is distributed to queues 1 through 7. If you are + lucky, you will see the traffic, but usually it will end up on one + of the queues you have not bound to. + + There are a number of ways to solve the problem of getting the + traffic you want to the queue id you bound to. If you want to see + all the traffic, you can force the netdev to only have 1 queue, queue + id 0, and then bind to queue 0. You can use ethtool to do this:: + + sudo ethtool -L <interface> combined 1 + + If you want to only see part of the traffic, you can program the + NIC through ethtool to filter out your traffic to a single queue id + that you can bind your XDP socket to. Here is one example in which + UDP traffic to and from port 4242 are sent to queue 2:: + + sudo ethtool -N <interface> rx-flow-hash udp4 fn + sudo ethtool -N <interface> flow-type udp4 src-port 4242 dst-port \ + 4242 action 2 + + A number of other ways are possible all up to the capabilitites of + the NIC you have. + Credits ======= @@ -309,4 +344,3 @@ Credits - Michael S. Tsirkin - Qi Z Zhang - Willem de Bruijn - diff --git a/Documentation/networking/checksum-offloads.rst b/Documentation/networking/checksum-offloads.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..905c8a84b103 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/checksum-offloads.rst @@ -0,0 +1,143 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +================= +Checksum Offloads +================= + + +Introduction +============ + +This document describes a set of techniques in the Linux networking stack to +take advantage of checksum offload capabilities of various NICs. + +The following technologies are described: + +* TX Checksum Offload +* LCO: Local Checksum Offload +* RCO: Remote Checksum Offload + +Things that should be documented here but aren't yet: + +* RX Checksum Offload +* CHECKSUM_UNNECESSARY conversion + + +TX Checksum Offload +=================== + +The interface for offloading a transmit checksum to a device is explained in +detail in comments near the top of include/linux/skbuff.h. + +In brief, it allows to request the device fill in a single ones-complement +checksum defined by the sk_buff fields skb->csum_start and skb->csum_offset. +The device should compute the 16-bit ones-complement checksum (i.e. the +'IP-style' checksum) from csum_start to the end of the packet, and fill in the +result at (csum_start + csum_offset). + +Because csum_offset cannot be negative, this ensures that the previous value of +the checksum field is included in the checksum computation, thus it can be used +to supply any needed corrections to the checksum (such as the sum of the +pseudo-header for UDP or TCP). + +This interface only allows a single checksum to be offloaded. Where +encapsulation is used, the packet may have multiple checksum fields in +different header layers, and the rest will have to be handled by another +mechanism such as LCO or RCO. + +CRC32c can also be offloaded using this interface, by means of filling +skb->csum_start and skb->csum_offset as described above, and setting +skb->csum_not_inet: see skbuff.h comment (section 'D') for more details. + +No offloading of the IP header checksum is performed; it is always done in +software. This is OK because when we build the IP header, we obviously have it +in cache, so summing it isn't expensive. It's also rather short. + +The requirements for GSO are more complicated, because when segmenting an +encapsulated packet both the inner and outer checksums may need to be edited or +recomputed for each resulting segment. See the skbuff.h comment (section 'E') +for more details. + +A driver declares its offload capabilities in netdev->hw_features; see +Documentation/networking/netdev-features.txt for more. Note that a device +which only advertises NETIF_F_IP[V6]_CSUM must still obey the csum_start and +csum_offset given in the SKB; if it tries to deduce these itself in hardware +(as some NICs do) the driver should check that the values in the SKB match +those which the hardware will deduce, and if not, fall back to checksumming in +software instead (with skb_csum_hwoffload_help() or one of the +skb_checksum_help() / skb_crc32c_csum_help functions, as mentioned in +include/linux/skbuff.h). + +The stack should, for the most part, assume that checksum offload is supported +by the underlying device. The only place that should check is +validate_xmit_skb(), and the functions it calls directly or indirectly. That +function compares the offload features requested by the SKB (which may include +other offloads besides TX Checksum Offload) and, if they are not supported or +enabled on the device (determined by netdev->features), performs the +corresponding offload in software. In the case of TX Checksum Offload, that +means calling skb_csum_hwoffload_help(skb, features). + + +LCO: Local Checksum Offload +=========================== + +LCO is a technique for efficiently computing the outer checksum of an +encapsulated datagram when the inner checksum is due to be offloaded. + +The ones-complement sum of a correctly checksummed TCP or UDP packet is equal +to the complement of the sum of the pseudo header, because everything else gets +'cancelled out' by the checksum field. This is because the sum was +complemented before being written to the checksum field. + +More generally, this holds in any case where the 'IP-style' ones complement +checksum is used, and thus any checksum that TX Checksum Offload supports. + +That is, if we have set up TX Checksum Offload with a start/offset pair, we +know that after the device has filled in that checksum, the ones complement sum +from csum_start to the end of the packet will be equal to the complement of +whatever value we put in the checksum field beforehand. This allows us to +compute the outer checksum without looking at the payload: we simply stop +summing when we get to csum_start, then add the complement of the 16-bit word +at (csum_start + csum_offset). + +Then, when the true inner checksum is filled in (either by hardware or by +skb_checksum_help()), the outer checksum will become correct by virtue of the +arithmetic. + +LCO is performed by the stack when constructing an outer UDP header for an +encapsulation such as VXLAN or GENEVE, in udp_set_csum(). Similarly for the +IPv6 equivalents, in udp6_set_csum(). + +It is also performed when constructing an IPv4 GRE header, in +net/ipv4/ip_gre.c:build_header(). It is *not* currently performed when +constructing an IPv6 GRE header; the GRE checksum is computed over the whole +packet in net/ipv6/ip6_gre.c:ip6gre_xmit2(), but it should be possible to use +LCO here as IPv6 GRE still uses an IP-style checksum. + +All of the LCO implementations use a helper function lco_csum(), in +include/linux/skbuff.h. + +LCO can safely be used for nested encapsulations; in this case, the outer +encapsulation layer will sum over both its own header and the 'middle' header. +This does mean that the 'middle' header will get summed multiple times, but +there doesn't seem to be a way to avoid that without incurring bigger costs +(e.g. in SKB bloat). + + +RCO: Remote Checksum Offload +============================ + +RCO is a technique for eliding the inner checksum of an encapsulated datagram, +allowing the outer checksum to be offloaded. It does, however, involve a +change to the encapsulation protocols, which the receiver must also support. +For this reason, it is disabled by default. + +RCO is detailed in the following Internet-Drafts: + +* https://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-herbert-remotecsumoffload-00 +* https://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-herbert-vxlan-rco-00 + +In Linux, RCO is implemented individually in each encapsulation protocol, and +most tunnel types have flags controlling its use. For instance, VXLAN has the +flag VXLAN_F_REMCSUM_TX (per struct vxlan_rdst) to indicate that RCO should be +used when transmitting to a given remote destination. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/checksum-offloads.txt b/Documentation/networking/checksum-offloads.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 27bc09cfcf6d..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/checksum-offloads.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,122 +0,0 @@ -Checksum Offloads in the Linux Networking Stack - - -Introduction -============ - -This document describes a set of techniques in the Linux networking stack - to take advantage of checksum offload capabilities of various NICs. - -The following technologies are described: - * TX Checksum Offload - * LCO: Local Checksum Offload - * RCO: Remote Checksum Offload - -Things that should be documented here but aren't yet: - * RX Checksum Offload - * CHECKSUM_UNNECESSARY conversion - - -TX Checksum Offload -=================== - -The interface for offloading a transmit checksum to a device is explained - in detail in comments near the top of include/linux/skbuff.h. -In brief, it allows to request the device fill in a single ones-complement - checksum defined by the sk_buff fields skb->csum_start and - skb->csum_offset. The device should compute the 16-bit ones-complement - checksum (i.e. the 'IP-style' checksum) from csum_start to the end of the - packet, and fill in the result at (csum_start + csum_offset). -Because csum_offset cannot be negative, this ensures that the previous - value of the checksum field is included in the checksum computation, thus - it can be used to supply any needed corrections to the checksum (such as - the sum of the pseudo-header for UDP or TCP). -This interface only allows a single checksum to be offloaded. Where - encapsulation is used, the packet may have multiple checksum fields in - different header layers, and the rest will have to be handled by another - mechanism such as LCO or RCO. -CRC32c can also be offloaded using this interface, by means of filling - skb->csum_start and skb->csum_offset as described above, and setting - skb->csum_not_inet: see skbuff.h comment (section 'D') for more details. -No offloading of the IP header checksum is performed; it is always done in - software. This is OK because when we build the IP header, we obviously - have it in cache, so summing it isn't expensive. It's also rather short. -The requirements for GSO are more complicated, because when segmenting an - encapsulated packet both the inner and outer checksums may need to be - edited or recomputed for each resulting segment. See the skbuff.h comment - (section 'E') for more details. - -A driver declares its offload capabilities in netdev->hw_features; see - Documentation/networking/netdev-features.txt for more. Note that a device - which only advertises NETIF_F_IP[V6]_CSUM must still obey the csum_start - and csum_offset given in the SKB; if it tries to deduce these itself in - hardware (as some NICs do) the driver should check that the values in the - SKB match those which the hardware will deduce, and if not, fall back to - checksumming in software instead (with skb_csum_hwoffload_help() or one of - the skb_checksum_help() / skb_crc32c_csum_help functions, as mentioned in - include/linux/skbuff.h). - -The stack should, for the most part, assume that checksum offload is - supported by the underlying device. The only place that should check is - validate_xmit_skb(), and the functions it calls directly or indirectly. - That function compares the offload features requested by the SKB (which - may include other offloads besides TX Checksum Offload) and, if they are - not supported or enabled on the device (determined by netdev->features), - performs the corresponding offload in software. In the case of TX - Checksum Offload, that means calling skb_csum_hwoffload_help(skb, features). - - -LCO: Local Checksum Offload -=========================== - -LCO is a technique for efficiently computing the outer checksum of an - encapsulated datagram when the inner checksum is due to be offloaded. -The ones-complement sum of a correctly checksummed TCP or UDP packet is - equal to the complement of the sum of the pseudo header, because everything - else gets 'cancelled out' by the checksum field. This is because the sum was - complemented before being written to the checksum field. -More generally, this holds in any case where the 'IP-style' ones complement - checksum is used, and thus any checksum that TX Checksum Offload supports. -That is, if we have set up TX Checksum Offload with a start/offset pair, we - know that after the device has filled in that checksum, the ones - complement sum from csum_start to the end of the packet will be equal to - the complement of whatever value we put in the checksum field beforehand. - This allows us to compute the outer checksum without looking at the payload: - we simply stop summing when we get to csum_start, then add the complement of - the 16-bit word at (csum_start + csum_offset). -Then, when the true inner checksum is filled in (either by hardware or by - skb_checksum_help()), the outer checksum will become correct by virtue of - the arithmetic. - -LCO is performed by the stack when constructing an outer UDP header for an - encapsulation such as VXLAN or GENEVE, in udp_set_csum(). Similarly for - the IPv6 equivalents, in udp6_set_csum(). -It is also performed when constructing an IPv4 GRE header, in - net/ipv4/ip_gre.c:build_header(). It is *not* currently performed when - constructing an IPv6 GRE header; the GRE checksum is computed over the - whole packet in net/ipv6/ip6_gre.c:ip6gre_xmit2(), but it should be - possible to use LCO here as IPv6 GRE still uses an IP-style checksum. -All of the LCO implementations use a helper function lco_csum(), in - include/linux/skbuff.h. - -LCO can safely be used for nested encapsulations; in this case, the outer - encapsulation layer will sum over both its own header and the 'middle' - header. This does mean that the 'middle' header will get summed multiple - times, but there doesn't seem to be a way to avoid that without incurring - bigger costs (e.g. in SKB bloat). - - -RCO: Remote Checksum Offload -============================ - -RCO is a technique for eliding the inner checksum of an encapsulated - datagram, allowing the outer checksum to be offloaded. It does, however, - involve a change to the encapsulation protocols, which the receiver must - also support. For this reason, it is disabled by default. -RCO is detailed in the following Internet-Drafts: -https://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-herbert-remotecsumoffload-00 -https://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-herbert-vxlan-rco-00 -In Linux, RCO is implemented individually in each encapsulation protocol, - and most tunnel types have flags controlling its use. For instance, VXLAN - has the flag VXLAN_F_REMCSUM_TX (per struct vxlan_rdst) to indicate that - RCO should be used when transmitting to a given remote destination. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/dpio-driver.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/dpio-driver.rst index a188466b6698..5045df990a4c 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/dpio-driver.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/dpio-driver.rst @@ -27,11 +27,12 @@ Driver Overview The DPIO driver is bound to DPIO objects discovered on the fsl-mc bus and provides services that: - A) allow other drivers, such as the Ethernet driver, to enqueue and dequeue + + A. allow other drivers, such as the Ethernet driver, to enqueue and dequeue frames for their respective objects - B) allow drivers to register callbacks for data availability notifications + B. allow drivers to register callbacks for data availability notifications when data becomes available on a queue or channel - C) allow drivers to manage hardware buffer pools + C. allow drivers to manage hardware buffer pools The Linux DPIO driver consists of 3 primary components-- DPIO object driver-- fsl-mc driver that manages the DPIO object @@ -140,11 +141,10 @@ QBman portal interface (qbman-portal.c) The qbman-portal component provides APIs to do the low level hardware bit twiddling for operations such as: - -initializing Qman software portals - - -building and sending portal commands - -portal interrupt configuration and processing + - initializing Qman software portals + - building and sending portal commands + - portal interrupt configuration and processing The qbman-portal APIs are not public to other drivers, and are only used by dpio-service. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e100.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e100.rst index 5e2839b4ec92..2b9f4887beda 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e100.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e100.rst @@ -1,5 +1,6 @@ .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ +============================================================== Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/100 Family of Adapters ============================================================== diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e1000.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e1000.rst index 6379d4d20771..956560b6e745 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e1000.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e1000.rst @@ -1,5 +1,6 @@ .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ +=========================================================== Linux* Base Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection =========================================================== diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e1000e.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e1000e.rst index 33554e5416c5..01999f05509c 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e1000e.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e1000e.rst @@ -1,5 +1,6 @@ .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ +====================================================== Linux* Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection ====================================================== diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/fm10k.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/fm10k.rst index bf5e5942f28d..ac3269e34f55 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/fm10k.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/fm10k.rst @@ -1,5 +1,6 @@ .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ +============================================================== Linux* Base Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Multi-host Controller ============================================================== diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/i40e.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/i40e.rst index 0cc16c525d10..848fd388fa6e 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/i40e.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/i40e.rst @@ -1,5 +1,6 @@ .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ +================================================================== Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 700 Series ================================================================== diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/iavf.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/iavf.rst index f8b42b64eb28..2d0c3baa1752 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/iavf.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/iavf.rst @@ -1,5 +1,6 @@ .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ +================================================================== Linux* Base Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Adaptive Virtual Function ================================================================== diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ice.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ice.rst index 4d118b827bbb..c220aa2711c6 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ice.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ice.rst @@ -1,5 +1,6 @@ .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ +=================================================================== Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) Ethernet Connection E800 Series =================================================================== diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/igb.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/igb.rst index e87a4a72ea2d..fc8cfaa5dcfa 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/igb.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/igb.rst @@ -1,5 +1,6 @@ .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ +=========================================================== Linux* Base Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection =========================================================== diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/igbvf.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/igbvf.rst index a8a9ffa4f8d3..9cddabe8108e 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/igbvf.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/igbvf.rst @@ -1,5 +1,6 @@ .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ +============================================================ Linux* Base Virtual Function Driver for Intel(R) 1G Ethernet ============================================================ diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgb.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgb.rst index 8bd80e27843d..945018207a92 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgb.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgb.rst @@ -1,5 +1,6 @@ .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ +===================================================================== Linux Base Driver for 10 Gigabit Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection ===================================================================== diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgbe.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgbe.rst index 86d887a63606..c7d25483fedb 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgbe.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgbe.rst @@ -1,5 +1,6 @@ .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ +============================================================================= Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) Ethernet 10 Gigabit PCI Express Adapters ============================================================================= diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgbevf.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgbevf.rst index 56cde6366c2f..5d4977360157 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgbevf.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgbevf.rst @@ -1,5 +1,6 @@ .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ +============================================================= Linux* Base Virtual Function Driver for Intel(R) 10G Ethernet ============================================================= diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/stmicro/stmmac.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/stmicro/stmmac.txt index 2bb07078f535..1ae979fd90d2 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/stmicro/stmmac.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/stmicro/stmmac.txt @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ static struct fixed_phy_status stmmac0_fixed_phy_status = { During the board's device_init we can configure the first MAC for fixed_link by calling: - fixed_phy_add(PHY_POLL, 1, &stmmac0_fixed_phy_status, -1); + fixed_phy_add(PHY_POLL, 1, &stmmac0_fixed_phy_status); and the second one, with a real PHY device attached to the bus, by using the stmmac_mdio_bus_data structure (to provide the id, the reset procedure etc). diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink-health.txt b/Documentation/networking/devlink-health.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1db3fbea0831 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/devlink-health.txt @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ +The health mechanism is targeted for Real Time Alerting, in order to know when +something bad had happened to a PCI device +- Provide alert debug information +- Self healing +- If problem needs vendor support, provide a way to gather all needed debugging + information. + +The main idea is to unify and centralize driver health reports in the +generic devlink instance and allow the user to set different +attributes of the health reporting and recovery procedures. + +The devlink health reporter: +Device driver creates a "health reporter" per each error/health type. +Error/Health type can be a known/generic (eg pci error, fw error, rx/tx error) +or unknown (driver specific). +For each registered health reporter a driver can issue error/health reports +asynchronously. All health reports handling is done by devlink. +Device driver can provide specific callbacks for each "health reporter", e.g. + - Recovery procedures + - Diagnostics and object dump procedures + - OOB initial parameters +Different parts of the driver can register different types of health reporters +with different handlers. + +Once an error is reported, devlink health will do the following actions: + * A log is being send to the kernel trace events buffer + * Health status and statistics are being updated for the reporter instance + * Object dump is being taken and saved at the reporter instance (as long as + there is no other dump which is already stored) + * Auto recovery attempt is being done. Depends on: + - Auto-recovery configuration + - Grace period vs. time passed since last recover + +The user interface: +User can access/change each reporter's parameters and driver specific callbacks +via devlink, e.g per error type (per health reporter) + - Configure reporter's generic parameters (like: disable/enable auto recovery) + - Invoke recovery procedure + - Run diagnostics + - Object dump + +The devlink health interface (via netlink): +DEVLINK_CMD_HEALTH_REPORTER_GET + Retrieves status and configuration info per DEV and reporter. +DEVLINK_CMD_HEALTH_REPORTER_SET + Allows reporter-related configuration setting. +DEVLINK_CMD_HEALTH_REPORTER_RECOVER + Triggers a reporter's recovery procedure. +DEVLINK_CMD_HEALTH_REPORTER_DIAGNOSE + Retrieves diagnostics data from a reporter on a device. +DEVLINK_CMD_HEALTH_REPORTER_DUMP_GET + Retrieves the last stored dump. Devlink health + saves a single dump. If an dump is not already stored by the devlink + for this reporter, devlink generates a new dump. + dump output is defined by the reporter. +DEVLINK_CMD_HEALTH_REPORTER_DUMP_CLEAR + Clears the last saved dump file for the specified reporter. + + + netlink + +--------------------------+ + | | + | + | + | | | + +--------------------------+ + |request for ops + |(diagnose, + mlx5_core devlink |recover, + |dump) ++--------+ +--------------------------+ +| | | reporter| | +| | | +---------v----------+ | +| | ops execution | | | | +| <----------------------------------+ | | +| | | | | | +| | | + ^------------------+ | +| | | | request for ops | +| | | | (recover, dump) | +| | | | | +| | | +-+------------------+ | +| | health report | | health handler | | +| +-------------------------------> | | +| | | +--------------------+ | +| | health reporter create | | +| +----------------------------> | ++--------+ +--------------------------+ diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink-info-versions.rst b/Documentation/networking/devlink-info-versions.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c79ad8593383 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/devlink-info-versions.rst @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) + +===================== +Devlink info versions +===================== + +board.id +======== + +Unique identifier of the board design. + +board.rev +========= + +Board design revision. + +board.manufacture +================= + +An identifier of the company or the facility which produced the part. + +fw.mgmt +======= + +Control unit firmware version. This firmware is responsible for house +keeping tasks, PHY control etc. but not the packet-by-packet data path +operation. + +fw.app +====== + +Data path microcode controlling high-speed packet processing. + +fw.undi +======= + +UNDI software, may include the UEFI driver, firmware or both. + +fw.ncsi +======= + +Version of the software responsible for supporting/handling the +Network Controller Sideband Interface. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink-params-mlxsw.txt b/Documentation/networking/devlink-params-mlxsw.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c63ea9fc7009 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/devlink-params-mlxsw.txt @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +fw_load_policy [DEVICE, GENERIC] + Configuration mode: driverinit + +acl_region_rehash_interval [DEVICE, DRIVER-SPECIFIC] + Sets an interval for periodic ACL region rehashes. + The value is in milliseconds, minimal value is "3000". + Value "0" disables the periodic work. + The first rehash will be run right after value is set. + Type: u32 + Configuration mode: runtime diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dsa/dsa.txt b/Documentation/networking/dsa/dsa.txt index 25170ad7d25b..43ef767bc440 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dsa/dsa.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dsa/dsa.txt @@ -236,19 +236,6 @@ description. Design limitations ================== -DSA is a platform device driver -------------------------------- - -DSA is implemented as a DSA platform device driver which is convenient because -it will register the entire DSA switch tree attached to a master network device -in one-shot, facilitating the device creation and simplifying the device driver -model a bit, this comes however with a number of limitations: - -- building DSA and its switch drivers as modules is currently not working -- the device driver parenting does not necessarily reflect the original - bus/device the switch can be created from -- supporting non-MDIO and non-MMIO (platform) switches is not possible - Limits on the number of devices and ports ----------------------------------------- @@ -533,16 +520,12 @@ Bridge VLAN filtering function that the driver has to call for each VLAN the given port is a member of. A switchdev object is used to carry the VID and bridge flags. -- port_fdb_prepare: bridge layer function invoked when the bridge prepares the - installation of a Forwarding Database entry. If the operation is not - supported, this function should return -EOPNOTSUPP to inform the bridge code - to fallback to a software implementation. No hardware setup must be done in - this function. See port_fdb_add for this and details. - - port_fdb_add: bridge layer function invoked when the bridge wants to install a Forwarding Database entry, the switch hardware should be programmed with the specified address in the specified VLAN Id in the forwarding database - associated with this VLAN ID + associated with this VLAN ID. If the operation is not supported, this + function should return -EOPNOTSUPP to inform the bridge code to fallback to + a software implementation. Note: VLAN ID 0 corresponds to the port private database, which, in the context of DSA, would be the its port-based VLAN, used by the associated bridge device. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/filter.txt b/Documentation/networking/filter.txt index 2196b824e96c..319e5e041f38 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/filter.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/filter.txt @@ -464,10 +464,11 @@ breakpoints: 0 1 JIT compiler ------------ -The Linux kernel has a built-in BPF JIT compiler for x86_64, SPARC, PowerPC, -ARM, ARM64, MIPS and s390 and can be enabled through CONFIG_BPF_JIT. The JIT -compiler is transparently invoked for each attached filter from user space -or for internal kernel users if it has been previously enabled by root: +The Linux kernel has a built-in BPF JIT compiler for x86_64, SPARC, +PowerPC, ARM, ARM64, MIPS, RISC-V and s390 and can be enabled through +CONFIG_BPF_JIT. The JIT compiler is transparently invoked for each +attached filter from user space or for internal kernel users if it has +been previously enabled by root: echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/core/bpf_jit_enable @@ -603,9 +604,10 @@ got from bpf_prog_create(), and 'ctx' the given context (e.g. skb pointer). All constraints and restrictions from bpf_check_classic() apply before a conversion to the new layout is being done behind the scenes! -Currently, the classic BPF format is being used for JITing on most 32-bit -architectures, whereas x86-64, aarch64, s390x, powerpc64, sparc64, arm32 perform -JIT compilation from eBPF instruction set. +Currently, the classic BPF format is being used for JITing on most +32-bit architectures, whereas x86-64, aarch64, s390x, powerpc64, +sparc64, arm32, riscv (RV64G) perform JIT compilation from eBPF +instruction set. Some core changes of the new internal format: @@ -827,7 +829,7 @@ tracing filters may do to maintain counters of events, for example. Register R9 is not used by socket filters either, but more complex filters may be running out of registers and would have to resort to spill/fill to stack. -Internal BPF can used as generic assembler for last step performance +Internal BPF can be used as a generic assembler for last step performance optimizations, socket filters and seccomp are using it as assembler. Tracing filters may use it as assembler to generate code from kernel. In kernel usage may not be bounded by security considerations, since generated internal BPF code @@ -865,7 +867,7 @@ Three LSB bits store instruction class which is one of: BPF_STX 0x03 BPF_STX 0x03 BPF_ALU 0x04 BPF_ALU 0x04 BPF_JMP 0x05 BPF_JMP 0x05 - BPF_RET 0x06 [ class 6 unused, for future if needed ] + BPF_RET 0x06 BPF_JMP32 0x06 BPF_MISC 0x07 BPF_ALU64 0x07 When BPF_CLASS(code) == BPF_ALU or BPF_JMP, 4th bit encodes source operand ... @@ -902,9 +904,9 @@ If BPF_CLASS(code) == BPF_ALU or BPF_ALU64 [ in eBPF ], BPF_OP(code) is one of: BPF_ARSH 0xc0 /* eBPF only: sign extending shift right */ BPF_END 0xd0 /* eBPF only: endianness conversion */ -If BPF_CLASS(code) == BPF_JMP, BPF_OP(code) is one of: +If BPF_CLASS(code) == BPF_JMP or BPF_JMP32 [ in eBPF ], BPF_OP(code) is one of: - BPF_JA 0x00 + BPF_JA 0x00 /* BPF_JMP only */ BPF_JEQ 0x10 BPF_JGT 0x20 BPF_JGE 0x30 @@ -912,8 +914,8 @@ If BPF_CLASS(code) == BPF_JMP, BPF_OP(code) is one of: BPF_JNE 0x50 /* eBPF only: jump != */ BPF_JSGT 0x60 /* eBPF only: signed '>' */ BPF_JSGE 0x70 /* eBPF only: signed '>=' */ - BPF_CALL 0x80 /* eBPF only: function call */ - BPF_EXIT 0x90 /* eBPF only: function return */ + BPF_CALL 0x80 /* eBPF BPF_JMP only: function call */ + BPF_EXIT 0x90 /* eBPF BPF_JMP only: function return */ BPF_JLT 0xa0 /* eBPF only: unsigned '<' */ BPF_JLE 0xb0 /* eBPF only: unsigned '<=' */ BPF_JSLT 0xc0 /* eBPF only: signed '<' */ @@ -936,8 +938,9 @@ Classic BPF wastes the whole BPF_RET class to represent a single 'ret' operation. Classic BPF_RET | BPF_K means copy imm32 into return register and perform function exit. eBPF is modeled to match CPU, so BPF_JMP | BPF_EXIT in eBPF means function exit only. The eBPF program needs to store return -value into register R0 before doing a BPF_EXIT. Class 6 in eBPF is currently -unused and reserved for future use. +value into register R0 before doing a BPF_EXIT. Class 6 in eBPF is used as +BPF_JMP32 to mean exactly the same operations as BPF_JMP, but with 32-bit wide +operands for the comparisons instead. For load and store instructions the 8-bit 'code' field is divided as: diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt b/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.rst index e74d8e1da0e2..36ca823a1122 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.rst @@ -1,54 +1,79 @@ - - Linux IEEE 802.15.4 implementation - +=============================== +IEEE 802.15.4 Developer's Guide +=============================== Introduction ============ The IEEE 802.15.4 working group focuses on standardization of the bottom two layers: Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical access (PHY). And there are mainly two options available for upper layers: - - ZigBee - proprietary protocol from the ZigBee Alliance - - 6LoWPAN - IPv6 networking over low rate personal area networks + +- ZigBee - proprietary protocol from the ZigBee Alliance +- 6LoWPAN - IPv6 networking over low rate personal area networks The goal of the Linux-wpan is to provide a complete implementation of the IEEE 802.15.4 and 6LoWPAN protocols. IEEE 802.15.4 is a stack of protocols for organizing Low-Rate Wireless Personal Area Networks. The stack is composed of three main parts: - - IEEE 802.15.4 layer; We have chosen to use plain Berkeley socket API, - the generic Linux networking stack to transfer IEEE 802.15.4 data - messages and a special protocol over netlink for configuration/management - - MAC - provides access to shared channel and reliable data delivery - - PHY - represents device drivers +- IEEE 802.15.4 layer; We have chosen to use plain Berkeley socket API, + the generic Linux networking stack to transfer IEEE 802.15.4 data + messages and a special protocol over netlink for configuration/management +- MAC - provides access to shared channel and reliable data delivery +- PHY - represents device drivers Socket API ========== -int sd = socket(PF_IEEE802154, SOCK_DGRAM, 0); -..... +.. c:function:: int sd = socket(PF_IEEE802154, SOCK_DGRAM, 0); The address family, socket addresses etc. are defined in the include/net/af_ieee802154.h header or in the special header in the userspace package (see either http://wpan.cakelab.org/ or the git tree at https://github.com/linux-wpan/wpan-tools). +6LoWPAN Linux implementation +============================ + +The IEEE 802.15.4 standard specifies an MTU of 127 bytes, yielding about 80 +octets of actual MAC payload once security is turned on, on a wireless link +with a link throughput of 250 kbps or less. The 6LoWPAN adaptation format +[RFC4944] was specified to carry IPv6 datagrams over such constrained links, +taking into account limited bandwidth, memory, or energy resources that are +expected in applications such as wireless Sensor Networks. [RFC4944] defines +a Mesh Addressing header to support sub-IP forwarding, a Fragmentation header +to support the IPv6 minimum MTU requirement [RFC2460], and stateless header +compression for IPv6 datagrams (LOWPAN_HC1 and LOWPAN_HC2) to reduce the +relatively large IPv6 and UDP headers down to (in the best case) several bytes. + +In September 2011 the standard update was published - [RFC6282]. +It deprecates HC1 and HC2 compression and defines IPHC encoding format which is +used in this Linux implementation. + +All the code related to 6lowpan you may find in files: net/6lowpan/* +and net/ieee802154/6lowpan/* + +To setup a 6LoWPAN interface you need: +1. Add IEEE802.15.4 interface and set channel and PAN ID; +2. Add 6lowpan interface by command like: +# ip link add link wpan0 name lowpan0 type lowpan +3. Bring up 'lowpan0' interface -Kernel side -============= +Drivers +======= Like with WiFi, there are several types of devices implementing IEEE 802.15.4. 1) 'HardMAC'. The MAC layer is implemented in the device itself, the device - exports a management (e.g. MLME) and data API. +exports a management (e.g. MLME) and data API. 2) 'SoftMAC' or just radio. These types of devices are just radio transceivers - possibly with some kinds of acceleration like automatic CRC computation and - comparation, automagic ACK handling, address matching, etc. +possibly with some kinds of acceleration like automatic CRC computation and +comparation, automagic ACK handling, address matching, etc. Those types of devices require different approach to be hooked into Linux kernel. - HardMAC -======= +------- See the header include/net/ieee802154_netdev.h. You have to implement Linux net_device, with .type = ARPHRD_IEEE802154. Data is exchanged with socket family @@ -64,9 +89,8 @@ net_device with a pointer to struct ieee802154_mlme_ops instance. The fields assoc_req, assoc_resp, disassoc_req, start_req, and scan_req are optional. All other fields are required. - SoftMAC -======= +------- The MAC is the middle layer in the IEEE 802.15.4 Linux stack. This moment it provides interface for drivers registration and management of slave interfaces. @@ -79,99 +103,78 @@ This layer is going to be extended soon. See header include/net/mac802154.h and several drivers in drivers/net/ieee802154/. +Fake drivers +------------ + +In addition there is a driver available which simulates a real device with +SoftMAC (fakelb - IEEE 802.15.4 loopback driver) interface. This option +provides a possibility to test and debug the stack without usage of real hardware. Device drivers API ================== The include/net/mac802154.h defines following functions: - - struct ieee802154_hw * - ieee802154_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len, const struct ieee802154_ops *ops): - allocation of IEEE 802.15.4 compatible hardware device - - void ieee802154_free_hw(struct ieee802154_hw *hw): - freeing allocated hardware device +.. c:function:: struct ieee802154_dev *ieee802154_alloc_device (size_t priv_size, struct ieee802154_ops *ops) - - int ieee802154_register_hw(struct ieee802154_hw *hw): - register PHY which is the allocated hardware device, in the system +Allocation of IEEE 802.15.4 compatible device. - - void ieee802154_unregister_hw(struct ieee802154_hw *hw): - freeing registered PHY +.. c:function:: void ieee802154_free_device(struct ieee802154_dev *dev) - - void ieee802154_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb, - u8 lqi): - telling 802.15.4 module there is a new received frame in the skb with - the RF Link Quality Indicator (LQI) from the hardware device +Freeing allocated device. - - void ieee802154_xmit_complete(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb, - bool ifs_handling): - telling 802.15.4 module the frame in the skb is or going to be - transmitted through the hardware device +.. c:function:: int ieee802154_register_device(struct ieee802154_dev *dev) + +Register PHY in the system. + +.. c:function:: void ieee802154_unregister_device(struct ieee802154_dev *dev) + +Freeing registered PHY. + +.. c:function:: void ieee802154_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb, u8 lqi): + +Telling 802.15.4 module there is a new received frame in the skb with +the RF Link Quality Indicator (LQI) from the hardware device. + +.. c:function:: void ieee802154_xmit_complete(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb, bool ifs_handling): + +Telling 802.15.4 module the frame in the skb is or going to be +transmitted through the hardware device The device driver must implement the following callbacks in the IEEE 802.15.4 -operations structure at least: -struct ieee802154_ops { - ... - int (*start)(struct ieee802154_hw *hw); - void (*stop)(struct ieee802154_hw *hw); - ... - int (*xmit_async)(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); - int (*ed)(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, u8 *level); - int (*set_channel)(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, u8 page, u8 channel); - ... -}; - - - int start(struct ieee802154_hw *hw): - handler that 802.15.4 module calls for the hardware device initialization. - - - void stop(struct ieee802154_hw *hw): - handler that 802.15.4 module calls for the hardware device cleanup. - - - int xmit_async(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb): - handler that 802.15.4 module calls for each frame in the skb going to be - transmitted through the hardware device. - - - int ed(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, u8 *level): - handler that 802.15.4 module calls for Energy Detection from the hardware - device. - - - int set_channel(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, u8 page, u8 channel): - set radio for listening on specific channel of the hardware device. +operations structure at least:: -Moreover IEEE 802.15.4 device operations structure should be filled. + struct ieee802154_ops { + ... + int (*start)(struct ieee802154_hw *hw); + void (*stop)(struct ieee802154_hw *hw); + ... + int (*xmit_async)(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); + int (*ed)(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, u8 *level); + int (*set_channel)(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, u8 page, u8 channel); + ... + }; -Fake drivers -============ +.. c:function:: int start(struct ieee802154_hw *hw): -In addition there is a driver available which simulates a real device with -SoftMAC (fakelb - IEEE 802.15.4 loopback driver) interface. This option -provides a possibility to test and debug the stack without usage of real hardware. +Handler that 802.15.4 module calls for the hardware device initialization. -See sources in drivers/net/ieee802154 folder for more details. +.. c:function:: void stop(struct ieee802154_hw *hw): +Handler that 802.15.4 module calls for the hardware device cleanup. -6LoWPAN Linux implementation -============================ +.. c:function:: int xmit_async(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb): -The IEEE 802.15.4 standard specifies an MTU of 127 bytes, yielding about 80 -octets of actual MAC payload once security is turned on, on a wireless link -with a link throughput of 250 kbps or less. The 6LoWPAN adaptation format -[RFC4944] was specified to carry IPv6 datagrams over such constrained links, -taking into account limited bandwidth, memory, or energy resources that are -expected in applications such as wireless Sensor Networks. [RFC4944] defines -a Mesh Addressing header to support sub-IP forwarding, a Fragmentation header -to support the IPv6 minimum MTU requirement [RFC2460], and stateless header -compression for IPv6 datagrams (LOWPAN_HC1 and LOWPAN_HC2) to reduce the -relatively large IPv6 and UDP headers down to (in the best case) several bytes. +Handler that 802.15.4 module calls for each frame in the skb going to be +transmitted through the hardware device. -In September 2011 the standard update was published - [RFC6282]. -It deprecates HC1 and HC2 compression and defines IPHC encoding format which is -used in this Linux implementation. +.. c:function:: int ed(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, u8 *level): -All the code related to 6lowpan you may find in files: net/6lowpan/* -and net/ieee802154/6lowpan/* +Handler that 802.15.4 module calls for Energy Detection from the hardware +device. -To setup a 6LoWPAN interface you need: -1. Add IEEE802.15.4 interface and set channel and PAN ID; -2. Add 6lowpan interface by command like: - # ip link add link wpan0 name lowpan0 type lowpan -3. Bring up 'lowpan0' interface +.. c:function:: int set_channel(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, u8 page, u8 channel): + +Set radio for listening on specific channel of the hardware device. + +Moreover IEEE 802.15.4 device operations structure should be filled. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/index.rst index 59e86de662cd..5449149be496 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/index.rst @@ -24,14 +24,21 @@ Contents: device_drivers/intel/i40e device_drivers/intel/iavf device_drivers/intel/ice + devlink-info-versions + ieee802154 kapi z8530book msg_zerocopy failover net_failover + phy + sfp-phylink alias bridge snmp_counter + checksum-offloads + segmentation-offloads + scaling .. only:: subproject diff --git a/Documentation/networking/msg_zerocopy.rst b/Documentation/networking/msg_zerocopy.rst index fe46d4867e2d..18c1415e7bfa 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/msg_zerocopy.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/msg_zerocopy.rst @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ Intro ===== The MSG_ZEROCOPY flag enables copy avoidance for socket send calls. -The feature is currently implemented for TCP sockets. +The feature is currently implemented for TCP and UDP sockets. Opportunity and Caveats diff --git a/Documentation/networking/operstates.txt b/Documentation/networking/operstates.txt index 355c6d8ef8ad..b203d1334822 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/operstates.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/operstates.txt @@ -22,8 +22,9 @@ and changeable from userspace under certain rules. 2. Querying from userspace Both admin and operational state can be queried via the netlink -operation RTM_GETLINK. It is also possible to subscribe to RTMGRP_LINK -to be notified of updates. This is important for setting from userspace. +operation RTM_GETLINK. It is also possible to subscribe to RTNLGRP_LINK +to be notified of updates while the interface is admin up. This is +important for setting from userspace. These values contain interface state: @@ -101,8 +102,9 @@ because some driver controlled protocol establishment has to complete. Corresponding functions are netif_dormant_on() to set the flag, netif_dormant_off() to clear it and netif_dormant() to query. -On device allocation, networking core sets the flags equivalent to -netif_carrier_ok() and !netif_dormant(). +On device allocation, both flags __LINK_STATE_NOCARRIER and +__LINK_STATE_DORMANT are cleared, so the effective state is equivalent +to netif_carrier_ok() and !netif_dormant(). Whenever the driver CHANGES one of these flags, a workqueue event is @@ -133,11 +135,11 @@ netif_carrier_ok() && !netif_dormant() is set by the driver. Afterwards, the userspace application can set IFLA_OPERSTATE to IF_OPER_DORMANT or IF_OPER_UP as long as the driver does not set netif_carrier_off() or netif_dormant_on(). Changes made by userspace -are multicasted on the netlink group RTMGRP_LINK. +are multicasted on the netlink group RTNLGRP_LINK. So basically a 802.1X supplicant interacts with the kernel like this: --subscribe to RTMGRP_LINK +-subscribe to RTNLGRP_LINK -set IFLA_LINKMODE to 1 via RTM_SETLINK -query RTM_GETLINK once to get initial state -if initial flags are not (IFF_LOWER_UP && !IFF_DORMANT), wait until diff --git a/Documentation/networking/phy.rst b/Documentation/networking/phy.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0dd90d7df5ec --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/phy.rst @@ -0,0 +1,447 @@ +===================== +PHY Abstraction Layer +===================== + +Purpose +======= + +Most network devices consist of set of registers which provide an interface +to a MAC layer, which communicates with the physical connection through a +PHY. The PHY concerns itself with negotiating link parameters with the link +partner on the other side of the network connection (typically, an ethernet +cable), and provides a register interface to allow drivers to determine what +settings were chosen, and to configure what settings are allowed. + +While these devices are distinct from the network devices, and conform to a +standard layout for the registers, it has been common practice to integrate +the PHY management code with the network driver. This has resulted in large +amounts of redundant code. Also, on embedded systems with multiple (and +sometimes quite different) ethernet controllers connected to the same +management bus, it is difficult to ensure safe use of the bus. + +Since the PHYs are devices, and the management busses through which they are +accessed are, in fact, busses, the PHY Abstraction Layer treats them as such. +In doing so, it has these goals: + +#. Increase code-reuse +#. Increase overall code-maintainability +#. Speed development time for new network drivers, and for new systems + +Basically, this layer is meant to provide an interface to PHY devices which +allows network driver writers to write as little code as possible, while +still providing a full feature set. + +The MDIO bus +============ + +Most network devices are connected to a PHY by means of a management bus. +Different devices use different busses (though some share common interfaces). +In order to take advantage of the PAL, each bus interface needs to be +registered as a distinct device. + +#. read and write functions must be implemented. Their prototypes are:: + + int write(struct mii_bus *bus, int mii_id, int regnum, u16 value); + int read(struct mii_bus *bus, int mii_id, int regnum); + + mii_id is the address on the bus for the PHY, and regnum is the register + number. These functions are guaranteed not to be called from interrupt + time, so it is safe for them to block, waiting for an interrupt to signal + the operation is complete + +#. A reset function is optional. This is used to return the bus to an + initialized state. + +#. A probe function is needed. This function should set up anything the bus + driver needs, setup the mii_bus structure, and register with the PAL using + mdiobus_register. Similarly, there's a remove function to undo all of + that (use mdiobus_unregister). + +#. Like any driver, the device_driver structure must be configured, and init + exit functions are used to register the driver. + +#. The bus must also be declared somewhere as a device, and registered. + +As an example for how one driver implemented an mdio bus driver, see +drivers/net/ethernet/freescale/fsl_pq_mdio.c and an associated DTS file +for one of the users. (e.g. "git grep fsl,.*-mdio arch/powerpc/boot/dts/") + +(RG)MII/electrical interface considerations +=========================================== + +The Reduced Gigabit Medium Independent Interface (RGMII) is a 12-pin +electrical signal interface using a synchronous 125Mhz clock signal and several +data lines. Due to this design decision, a 1.5ns to 2ns delay must be added +between the clock line (RXC or TXC) and the data lines to let the PHY (clock +sink) have enough setup and hold times to sample the data lines correctly. The +PHY library offers different types of PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII* values to let +the PHY driver and optionally the MAC driver, implement the required delay. The +values of phy_interface_t must be understood from the perspective of the PHY +device itself, leading to the following: + +* PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII: the PHY is not responsible for inserting any + internal delay by itself, it assumes that either the Ethernet MAC (if capable + or the PCB traces) insert the correct 1.5-2ns delay + +* PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII_TXID: the PHY should insert an internal delay + for the transmit data lines (TXD[3:0]) processed by the PHY device + +* PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII_RXID: the PHY should insert an internal delay + for the receive data lines (RXD[3:0]) processed by the PHY device + +* PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII_ID: the PHY should insert internal delays for + both transmit AND receive data lines from/to the PHY device + +Whenever possible, use the PHY side RGMII delay for these reasons: + +* PHY devices may offer sub-nanosecond granularity in how they allow a + receiver/transmitter side delay (e.g: 0.5, 1.0, 1.5ns) to be specified. Such + precision may be required to account for differences in PCB trace lengths + +* PHY devices are typically qualified for a large range of applications + (industrial, medical, automotive...), and they provide a constant and + reliable delay across temperature/pressure/voltage ranges + +* PHY device drivers in PHYLIB being reusable by nature, being able to + configure correctly a specified delay enables more designs with similar delay + requirements to be operate correctly + +For cases where the PHY is not capable of providing this delay, but the +Ethernet MAC driver is capable of doing so, the correct phy_interface_t value +should be PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII, and the Ethernet MAC driver should be +configured correctly in order to provide the required transmit and/or receive +side delay from the perspective of the PHY device. Conversely, if the Ethernet +MAC driver looks at the phy_interface_t value, for any other mode but +PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII, it should make sure that the MAC-level delays are +disabled. + +In case neither the Ethernet MAC, nor the PHY are capable of providing the +required delays, as defined per the RGMII standard, several options may be +available: + +* Some SoCs may offer a pin pad/mux/controller capable of configuring a given + set of pins'strength, delays, and voltage; and it may be a suitable + option to insert the expected 2ns RGMII delay. + +* Modifying the PCB design to include a fixed delay (e.g: using a specifically + designed serpentine), which may not require software configuration at all. + +Common problems with RGMII delay mismatch +----------------------------------------- + +When there is a RGMII delay mismatch between the Ethernet MAC and the PHY, this +will most likely result in the clock and data line signals to be unstable when +the PHY or MAC take a snapshot of these signals to translate them into logical +1 or 0 states and reconstruct the data being transmitted/received. Typical +symptoms include: + +* Transmission/reception partially works, and there is frequent or occasional + packet loss observed + +* Ethernet MAC may report some or all packets ingressing with a FCS/CRC error, + or just discard them all + +* Switching to lower speeds such as 10/100Mbits/sec makes the problem go away + (since there is enough setup/hold time in that case) + +Connecting to a PHY +=================== + +Sometime during startup, the network driver needs to establish a connection +between the PHY device, and the network device. At this time, the PHY's bus +and drivers need to all have been loaded, so it is ready for the connection. +At this point, there are several ways to connect to the PHY: + +#. The PAL handles everything, and only calls the network driver when + the link state changes, so it can react. + +#. The PAL handles everything except interrupts (usually because the + controller has the interrupt registers). + +#. The PAL handles everything, but checks in with the driver every second, + allowing the network driver to react first to any changes before the PAL + does. + +#. The PAL serves only as a library of functions, with the network device + manually calling functions to update status, and configure the PHY + + +Letting the PHY Abstraction Layer do Everything +=============================================== + +If you choose option 1 (The hope is that every driver can, but to still be +useful to drivers that can't), connecting to the PHY is simple: + +First, you need a function to react to changes in the link state. This +function follows this protocol:: + + static void adjust_link(struct net_device *dev); + +Next, you need to know the device name of the PHY connected to this device. +The name will look something like, "0:00", where the first number is the +bus id, and the second is the PHY's address on that bus. Typically, +the bus is responsible for making its ID unique. + +Now, to connect, just call this function:: + + phydev = phy_connect(dev, phy_name, &adjust_link, interface); + +*phydev* is a pointer to the phy_device structure which represents the PHY. +If phy_connect is successful, it will return the pointer. dev, here, is the +pointer to your net_device. Once done, this function will have started the +PHY's software state machine, and registered for the PHY's interrupt, if it +has one. The phydev structure will be populated with information about the +current state, though the PHY will not yet be truly operational at this +point. + +PHY-specific flags should be set in phydev->dev_flags prior to the call +to phy_connect() such that the underlying PHY driver can check for flags +and perform specific operations based on them. +This is useful if the system has put hardware restrictions on +the PHY/controller, of which the PHY needs to be aware. + +*interface* is a u32 which specifies the connection type used +between the controller and the PHY. Examples are GMII, MII, +RGMII, and SGMII. For a full list, see include/linux/phy.h + +Now just make sure that phydev->supported and phydev->advertising have any +values pruned from them which don't make sense for your controller (a 10/100 +controller may be connected to a gigabit capable PHY, so you would need to +mask off SUPPORTED_1000baseT*). See include/linux/ethtool.h for definitions +for these bitfields. Note that you should not SET any bits, except the +SUPPORTED_Pause and SUPPORTED_AsymPause bits (see below), or the PHY may get +put into an unsupported state. + +Lastly, once the controller is ready to handle network traffic, you call +phy_start(phydev). This tells the PAL that you are ready, and configures the +PHY to connect to the network. If the MAC interrupt of your network driver +also handles PHY status changes, just set phydev->irq to PHY_IGNORE_INTERRUPT +before you call phy_start and use phy_mac_interrupt() from the network +driver. If you don't want to use interrupts, set phydev->irq to PHY_POLL. +phy_start() enables the PHY interrupts (if applicable) and starts the +phylib state machine. + +When you want to disconnect from the network (even if just briefly), you call +phy_stop(phydev). This function also stops the phylib state machine and +disables PHY interrupts. + +Pause frames / flow control +=========================== + +The PHY does not participate directly in flow control/pause frames except by +making sure that the SUPPORTED_Pause and SUPPORTED_AsymPause bits are set in +MII_ADVERTISE to indicate towards the link partner that the Ethernet MAC +controller supports such a thing. Since flow control/pause frames generation +involves the Ethernet MAC driver, it is recommended that this driver takes care +of properly indicating advertisement and support for such features by setting +the SUPPORTED_Pause and SUPPORTED_AsymPause bits accordingly. This can be done +either before or after phy_connect() and/or as a result of implementing the +ethtool::set_pauseparam feature. + + +Keeping Close Tabs on the PAL +============================= + +It is possible that the PAL's built-in state machine needs a little help to +keep your network device and the PHY properly in sync. If so, you can +register a helper function when connecting to the PHY, which will be called +every second before the state machine reacts to any changes. To do this, you +need to manually call phy_attach() and phy_prepare_link(), and then call +phy_start_machine() with the second argument set to point to your special +handler. + +Currently there are no examples of how to use this functionality, and testing +on it has been limited because the author does not have any drivers which use +it (they all use option 1). So Caveat Emptor. + +Doing it all yourself +===================== + +There's a remote chance that the PAL's built-in state machine cannot track +the complex interactions between the PHY and your network device. If this is +so, you can simply call phy_attach(), and not call phy_start_machine or +phy_prepare_link(). This will mean that phydev->state is entirely yours to +handle (phy_start and phy_stop toggle between some of the states, so you +might need to avoid them). + +An effort has been made to make sure that useful functionality can be +accessed without the state-machine running, and most of these functions are +descended from functions which did not interact with a complex state-machine. +However, again, no effort has been made so far to test running without the +state machine, so tryer beware. + +Here is a brief rundown of the functions:: + + int phy_read(struct phy_device *phydev, u16 regnum); + int phy_write(struct phy_device *phydev, u16 regnum, u16 val); + +Simple read/write primitives. They invoke the bus's read/write function +pointers. +:: + + void phy_print_status(struct phy_device *phydev); + +A convenience function to print out the PHY status neatly. +:: + + void phy_request_interrupt(struct phy_device *phydev); + +Requests the IRQ for the PHY interrupts. +:: + + struct phy_device * phy_attach(struct net_device *dev, const char *phy_id, + phy_interface_t interface); + +Attaches a network device to a particular PHY, binding the PHY to a generic +driver if none was found during bus initialization. +:: + + int phy_start_aneg(struct phy_device *phydev); + +Using variables inside the phydev structure, either configures advertising +and resets autonegotiation, or disables autonegotiation, and configures +forced settings. +:: + + static inline int phy_read_status(struct phy_device *phydev); + +Fills the phydev structure with up-to-date information about the current +settings in the PHY. +:: + + int phy_ethtool_sset(struct phy_device *phydev, struct ethtool_cmd *cmd); + +Ethtool convenience functions. +:: + + int phy_mii_ioctl(struct phy_device *phydev, + struct mii_ioctl_data *mii_data, int cmd); + +The MII ioctl. Note that this function will completely screw up the state +machine if you write registers like BMCR, BMSR, ADVERTISE, etc. Best to +use this only to write registers which are not standard, and don't set off +a renegotiation. + +PHY Device Drivers +================== + +With the PHY Abstraction Layer, adding support for new PHYs is +quite easy. In some cases, no work is required at all! However, +many PHYs require a little hand-holding to get up-and-running. + +Generic PHY driver +------------------ + +If the desired PHY doesn't have any errata, quirks, or special +features you want to support, then it may be best to not add +support, and let the PHY Abstraction Layer's Generic PHY Driver +do all of the work. + +Writing a PHY driver +-------------------- + +If you do need to write a PHY driver, the first thing to do is +make sure it can be matched with an appropriate PHY device. +This is done during bus initialization by reading the device's +UID (stored in registers 2 and 3), then comparing it to each +driver's phy_id field by ANDing it with each driver's +phy_id_mask field. Also, it needs a name. Here's an example:: + + static struct phy_driver dm9161_driver = { + .phy_id = 0x0181b880, + .name = "Davicom DM9161E", + .phy_id_mask = 0x0ffffff0, + ... + } + +Next, you need to specify what features (speed, duplex, autoneg, +etc) your PHY device and driver support. Most PHYs support +PHY_BASIC_FEATURES, but you can look in include/mii.h for other +features. + +Each driver consists of a number of function pointers, documented +in include/linux/phy.h under the phy_driver structure. + +Of these, only config_aneg and read_status are required to be +assigned by the driver code. The rest are optional. Also, it is +preferred to use the generic phy driver's versions of these two +functions if at all possible: genphy_read_status and +genphy_config_aneg. If this is not possible, it is likely that +you only need to perform some actions before and after invoking +these functions, and so your functions will wrap the generic +ones. + +Feel free to look at the Marvell, Cicada, and Davicom drivers in +drivers/net/phy/ for examples (the lxt and qsemi drivers have +not been tested as of this writing). + +The PHY's MMD register accesses are handled by the PAL framework +by default, but can be overridden by a specific PHY driver if +required. This could be the case if a PHY was released for +manufacturing before the MMD PHY register definitions were +standardized by the IEEE. Most modern PHYs will be able to use +the generic PAL framework for accessing the PHY's MMD registers. +An example of such usage is for Energy Efficient Ethernet support, +implemented in the PAL. This support uses the PAL to access MMD +registers for EEE query and configuration if the PHY supports +the IEEE standard access mechanisms, or can use the PHY's specific +access interfaces if overridden by the specific PHY driver. See +the Micrel driver in drivers/net/phy/ for an example of how this +can be implemented. + +Board Fixups +============ + +Sometimes the specific interaction between the platform and the PHY requires +special handling. For instance, to change where the PHY's clock input is, +or to add a delay to account for latency issues in the data path. In order +to support such contingencies, the PHY Layer allows platform code to register +fixups to be run when the PHY is brought up (or subsequently reset). + +When the PHY Layer brings up a PHY it checks to see if there are any fixups +registered for it, matching based on UID (contained in the PHY device's phy_id +field) and the bus identifier (contained in phydev->dev.bus_id). Both must +match, however two constants, PHY_ANY_ID and PHY_ANY_UID, are provided as +wildcards for the bus ID and UID, respectively. + +When a match is found, the PHY layer will invoke the run function associated +with the fixup. This function is passed a pointer to the phy_device of +interest. It should therefore only operate on that PHY. + +The platform code can either register the fixup using phy_register_fixup():: + + int phy_register_fixup(const char *phy_id, + u32 phy_uid, u32 phy_uid_mask, + int (*run)(struct phy_device *)); + +Or using one of the two stubs, phy_register_fixup_for_uid() and +phy_register_fixup_for_id():: + + int phy_register_fixup_for_uid(u32 phy_uid, u32 phy_uid_mask, + int (*run)(struct phy_device *)); + int phy_register_fixup_for_id(const char *phy_id, + int (*run)(struct phy_device *)); + +The stubs set one of the two matching criteria, and set the other one to +match anything. + +When phy_register_fixup() or \*_for_uid()/\*_for_id() is called at module, +unregister fixup and free allocate memory are required. + +Call one of following function before unloading module:: + + int phy_unregister_fixup(const char *phy_id, u32 phy_uid, u32 phy_uid_mask); + int phy_unregister_fixup_for_uid(u32 phy_uid, u32 phy_uid_mask); + int phy_register_fixup_for_id(const char *phy_id); + +Standards +========= + +IEEE Standard 802.3: CSMA/CD Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications, Section Two: +http://standards.ieee.org/getieee802/download/802.3-2008_section2.pdf + +RGMII v1.3: +http://web.archive.org/web/20160303212629/http://www.hp.com/rnd/pdfs/RGMIIv1_3.pdf + +RGMII v2.0: +http://web.archive.org/web/20160303171328/http://www.hp.com/rnd/pdfs/RGMIIv2_0_final_hp.pdf diff --git a/Documentation/networking/phy.txt b/Documentation/networking/phy.txt deleted file mode 100644 index bdec0f700bc1..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/phy.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,427 +0,0 @@ - -------- -PHY Abstraction Layer -(Updated 2008-04-08) - -Purpose - - Most network devices consist of set of registers which provide an interface - to a MAC layer, which communicates with the physical connection through a - PHY. The PHY concerns itself with negotiating link parameters with the link - partner on the other side of the network connection (typically, an ethernet - cable), and provides a register interface to allow drivers to determine what - settings were chosen, and to configure what settings are allowed. - - While these devices are distinct from the network devices, and conform to a - standard layout for the registers, it has been common practice to integrate - the PHY management code with the network driver. This has resulted in large - amounts of redundant code. Also, on embedded systems with multiple (and - sometimes quite different) ethernet controllers connected to the same - management bus, it is difficult to ensure safe use of the bus. - - Since the PHYs are devices, and the management busses through which they are - accessed are, in fact, busses, the PHY Abstraction Layer treats them as such. - In doing so, it has these goals: - - 1) Increase code-reuse - 2) Increase overall code-maintainability - 3) Speed development time for new network drivers, and for new systems - - Basically, this layer is meant to provide an interface to PHY devices which - allows network driver writers to write as little code as possible, while - still providing a full feature set. - -The MDIO bus - - Most network devices are connected to a PHY by means of a management bus. - Different devices use different busses (though some share common interfaces). - In order to take advantage of the PAL, each bus interface needs to be - registered as a distinct device. - - 1) read and write functions must be implemented. Their prototypes are: - - int write(struct mii_bus *bus, int mii_id, int regnum, u16 value); - int read(struct mii_bus *bus, int mii_id, int regnum); - - mii_id is the address on the bus for the PHY, and regnum is the register - number. These functions are guaranteed not to be called from interrupt - time, so it is safe for them to block, waiting for an interrupt to signal - the operation is complete - - 2) A reset function is optional. This is used to return the bus to an - initialized state. - - 3) A probe function is needed. This function should set up anything the bus - driver needs, setup the mii_bus structure, and register with the PAL using - mdiobus_register. Similarly, there's a remove function to undo all of - that (use mdiobus_unregister). - - 4) Like any driver, the device_driver structure must be configured, and init - exit functions are used to register the driver. - - 5) The bus must also be declared somewhere as a device, and registered. - - As an example for how one driver implemented an mdio bus driver, see - drivers/net/ethernet/freescale/fsl_pq_mdio.c and an associated DTS file - for one of the users. (e.g. "git grep fsl,.*-mdio arch/powerpc/boot/dts/") - -(RG)MII/electrical interface considerations - - The Reduced Gigabit Medium Independent Interface (RGMII) is a 12-pin - electrical signal interface using a synchronous 125Mhz clock signal and several - data lines. Due to this design decision, a 1.5ns to 2ns delay must be added - between the clock line (RXC or TXC) and the data lines to let the PHY (clock - sink) have enough setup and hold times to sample the data lines correctly. The - PHY library offers different types of PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII* values to let - the PHY driver and optionally the MAC driver, implement the required delay. The - values of phy_interface_t must be understood from the perspective of the PHY - device itself, leading to the following: - - * PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII: the PHY is not responsible for inserting any - internal delay by itself, it assumes that either the Ethernet MAC (if capable - or the PCB traces) insert the correct 1.5-2ns delay - - * PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII_TXID: the PHY should insert an internal delay - for the transmit data lines (TXD[3:0]) processed by the PHY device - - * PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII_RXID: the PHY should insert an internal delay - for the receive data lines (RXD[3:0]) processed by the PHY device - - * PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII_ID: the PHY should insert internal delays for - both transmit AND receive data lines from/to the PHY device - - Whenever possible, use the PHY side RGMII delay for these reasons: - - * PHY devices may offer sub-nanosecond granularity in how they allow a - receiver/transmitter side delay (e.g: 0.5, 1.0, 1.5ns) to be specified. Such - precision may be required to account for differences in PCB trace lengths - - * PHY devices are typically qualified for a large range of applications - (industrial, medical, automotive...), and they provide a constant and - reliable delay across temperature/pressure/voltage ranges - - * PHY device drivers in PHYLIB being reusable by nature, being able to - configure correctly a specified delay enables more designs with similar delay - requirements to be operate correctly - - For cases where the PHY is not capable of providing this delay, but the - Ethernet MAC driver is capable of doing so, the correct phy_interface_t value - should be PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII, and the Ethernet MAC driver should be - configured correctly in order to provide the required transmit and/or receive - side delay from the perspective of the PHY device. Conversely, if the Ethernet - MAC driver looks at the phy_interface_t value, for any other mode but - PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII, it should make sure that the MAC-level delays are - disabled. - - In case neither the Ethernet MAC, nor the PHY are capable of providing the - required delays, as defined per the RGMII standard, several options may be - available: - - * Some SoCs may offer a pin pad/mux/controller capable of configuring a given - set of pins'strength, delays, and voltage; and it may be a suitable - option to insert the expected 2ns RGMII delay. - - * Modifying the PCB design to include a fixed delay (e.g: using a specifically - designed serpentine), which may not require software configuration at all. - -Common problems with RGMII delay mismatch - - When there is a RGMII delay mismatch between the Ethernet MAC and the PHY, this - will most likely result in the clock and data line signals to be unstable when - the PHY or MAC take a snapshot of these signals to translate them into logical - 1 or 0 states and reconstruct the data being transmitted/received. Typical - symptoms include: - - * Transmission/reception partially works, and there is frequent or occasional - packet loss observed - - * Ethernet MAC may report some or all packets ingressing with a FCS/CRC error, - or just discard them all - - * Switching to lower speeds such as 10/100Mbits/sec makes the problem go away - (since there is enough setup/hold time in that case) - - -Connecting to a PHY - - Sometime during startup, the network driver needs to establish a connection - between the PHY device, and the network device. At this time, the PHY's bus - and drivers need to all have been loaded, so it is ready for the connection. - At this point, there are several ways to connect to the PHY: - - 1) The PAL handles everything, and only calls the network driver when - the link state changes, so it can react. - - 2) The PAL handles everything except interrupts (usually because the - controller has the interrupt registers). - - 3) The PAL handles everything, but checks in with the driver every second, - allowing the network driver to react first to any changes before the PAL - does. - - 4) The PAL serves only as a library of functions, with the network device - manually calling functions to update status, and configure the PHY - - -Letting the PHY Abstraction Layer do Everything - - If you choose option 1 (The hope is that every driver can, but to still be - useful to drivers that can't), connecting to the PHY is simple: - - First, you need a function to react to changes in the link state. This - function follows this protocol: - - static void adjust_link(struct net_device *dev); - - Next, you need to know the device name of the PHY connected to this device. - The name will look something like, "0:00", where the first number is the - bus id, and the second is the PHY's address on that bus. Typically, - the bus is responsible for making its ID unique. - - Now, to connect, just call this function: - - phydev = phy_connect(dev, phy_name, &adjust_link, interface); - - phydev is a pointer to the phy_device structure which represents the PHY. If - phy_connect is successful, it will return the pointer. dev, here, is the - pointer to your net_device. Once done, this function will have started the - PHY's software state machine, and registered for the PHY's interrupt, if it - has one. The phydev structure will be populated with information about the - current state, though the PHY will not yet be truly operational at this - point. - - PHY-specific flags should be set in phydev->dev_flags prior to the call - to phy_connect() such that the underlying PHY driver can check for flags - and perform specific operations based on them. - This is useful if the system has put hardware restrictions on - the PHY/controller, of which the PHY needs to be aware. - - interface is a u32 which specifies the connection type used - between the controller and the PHY. Examples are GMII, MII, - RGMII, and SGMII. For a full list, see include/linux/phy.h - - Now just make sure that phydev->supported and phydev->advertising have any - values pruned from them which don't make sense for your controller (a 10/100 - controller may be connected to a gigabit capable PHY, so you would need to - mask off SUPPORTED_1000baseT*). See include/linux/ethtool.h for definitions - for these bitfields. Note that you should not SET any bits, except the - SUPPORTED_Pause and SUPPORTED_AsymPause bits (see below), or the PHY may get - put into an unsupported state. - - Lastly, once the controller is ready to handle network traffic, you call - phy_start(phydev). This tells the PAL that you are ready, and configures the - PHY to connect to the network. If you want to handle your own interrupts, - just set phydev->irq to PHY_IGNORE_INTERRUPT before you call phy_start. - Similarly, if you don't want to use interrupts, set phydev->irq to PHY_POLL. - - When you want to disconnect from the network (even if just briefly), you call - phy_stop(phydev). - -Pause frames / flow control - - The PHY does not participate directly in flow control/pause frames except by - making sure that the SUPPORTED_Pause and SUPPORTED_AsymPause bits are set in - MII_ADVERTISE to indicate towards the link partner that the Ethernet MAC - controller supports such a thing. Since flow control/pause frames generation - involves the Ethernet MAC driver, it is recommended that this driver takes care - of properly indicating advertisement and support for such features by setting - the SUPPORTED_Pause and SUPPORTED_AsymPause bits accordingly. This can be done - either before or after phy_connect() and/or as a result of implementing the - ethtool::set_pauseparam feature. - - -Keeping Close Tabs on the PAL - - It is possible that the PAL's built-in state machine needs a little help to - keep your network device and the PHY properly in sync. If so, you can - register a helper function when connecting to the PHY, which will be called - every second before the state machine reacts to any changes. To do this, you - need to manually call phy_attach() and phy_prepare_link(), and then call - phy_start_machine() with the second argument set to point to your special - handler. - - Currently there are no examples of how to use this functionality, and testing - on it has been limited because the author does not have any drivers which use - it (they all use option 1). So Caveat Emptor. - -Doing it all yourself - - There's a remote chance that the PAL's built-in state machine cannot track - the complex interactions between the PHY and your network device. If this is - so, you can simply call phy_attach(), and not call phy_start_machine or - phy_prepare_link(). This will mean that phydev->state is entirely yours to - handle (phy_start and phy_stop toggle between some of the states, so you - might need to avoid them). - - An effort has been made to make sure that useful functionality can be - accessed without the state-machine running, and most of these functions are - descended from functions which did not interact with a complex state-machine. - However, again, no effort has been made so far to test running without the - state machine, so tryer beware. - - Here is a brief rundown of the functions: - - int phy_read(struct phy_device *phydev, u16 regnum); - int phy_write(struct phy_device *phydev, u16 regnum, u16 val); - - Simple read/write primitives. They invoke the bus's read/write function - pointers. - - void phy_print_status(struct phy_device *phydev); - - A convenience function to print out the PHY status neatly. - - int phy_start_interrupts(struct phy_device *phydev); - int phy_stop_interrupts(struct phy_device *phydev); - - Requests the IRQ for the PHY interrupts, then enables them for - start, or disables then frees them for stop. - - struct phy_device * phy_attach(struct net_device *dev, const char *phy_id, - phy_interface_t interface); - - Attaches a network device to a particular PHY, binding the PHY to a generic - driver if none was found during bus initialization. - - int phy_start_aneg(struct phy_device *phydev); - - Using variables inside the phydev structure, either configures advertising - and resets autonegotiation, or disables autonegotiation, and configures - forced settings. - - static inline int phy_read_status(struct phy_device *phydev); - - Fills the phydev structure with up-to-date information about the current - settings in the PHY. - - int phy_ethtool_sset(struct phy_device *phydev, struct ethtool_cmd *cmd); - - Ethtool convenience functions. - - int phy_mii_ioctl(struct phy_device *phydev, - struct mii_ioctl_data *mii_data, int cmd); - - The MII ioctl. Note that this function will completely screw up the state - machine if you write registers like BMCR, BMSR, ADVERTISE, etc. Best to - use this only to write registers which are not standard, and don't set off - a renegotiation. - - -PHY Device Drivers - - With the PHY Abstraction Layer, adding support for new PHYs is - quite easy. In some cases, no work is required at all! However, - many PHYs require a little hand-holding to get up-and-running. - -Generic PHY driver - - If the desired PHY doesn't have any errata, quirks, or special - features you want to support, then it may be best to not add - support, and let the PHY Abstraction Layer's Generic PHY Driver - do all of the work. - -Writing a PHY driver - - If you do need to write a PHY driver, the first thing to do is - make sure it can be matched with an appropriate PHY device. - This is done during bus initialization by reading the device's - UID (stored in registers 2 and 3), then comparing it to each - driver's phy_id field by ANDing it with each driver's - phy_id_mask field. Also, it needs a name. Here's an example: - - static struct phy_driver dm9161_driver = { - .phy_id = 0x0181b880, - .name = "Davicom DM9161E", - .phy_id_mask = 0x0ffffff0, - ... - } - - Next, you need to specify what features (speed, duplex, autoneg, - etc) your PHY device and driver support. Most PHYs support - PHY_BASIC_FEATURES, but you can look in include/mii.h for other - features. - - Each driver consists of a number of function pointers, documented - in include/linux/phy.h under the phy_driver structure. - - Of these, only config_aneg and read_status are required to be - assigned by the driver code. The rest are optional. Also, it is - preferred to use the generic phy driver's versions of these two - functions if at all possible: genphy_read_status and - genphy_config_aneg. If this is not possible, it is likely that - you only need to perform some actions before and after invoking - these functions, and so your functions will wrap the generic - ones. - - Feel free to look at the Marvell, Cicada, and Davicom drivers in - drivers/net/phy/ for examples (the lxt and qsemi drivers have - not been tested as of this writing). - - The PHY's MMD register accesses are handled by the PAL framework - by default, but can be overridden by a specific PHY driver if - required. This could be the case if a PHY was released for - manufacturing before the MMD PHY register definitions were - standardized by the IEEE. Most modern PHYs will be able to use - the generic PAL framework for accessing the PHY's MMD registers. - An example of such usage is for Energy Efficient Ethernet support, - implemented in the PAL. This support uses the PAL to access MMD - registers for EEE query and configuration if the PHY supports - the IEEE standard access mechanisms, or can use the PHY's specific - access interfaces if overridden by the specific PHY driver. See - the Micrel driver in drivers/net/phy/ for an example of how this - can be implemented. - -Board Fixups - - Sometimes the specific interaction between the platform and the PHY requires - special handling. For instance, to change where the PHY's clock input is, - or to add a delay to account for latency issues in the data path. In order - to support such contingencies, the PHY Layer allows platform code to register - fixups to be run when the PHY is brought up (or subsequently reset). - - When the PHY Layer brings up a PHY it checks to see if there are any fixups - registered for it, matching based on UID (contained in the PHY device's phy_id - field) and the bus identifier (contained in phydev->dev.bus_id). Both must - match, however two constants, PHY_ANY_ID and PHY_ANY_UID, are provided as - wildcards for the bus ID and UID, respectively. - - When a match is found, the PHY layer will invoke the run function associated - with the fixup. This function is passed a pointer to the phy_device of - interest. It should therefore only operate on that PHY. - - The platform code can either register the fixup using phy_register_fixup(): - - int phy_register_fixup(const char *phy_id, - u32 phy_uid, u32 phy_uid_mask, - int (*run)(struct phy_device *)); - - Or using one of the two stubs, phy_register_fixup_for_uid() and - phy_register_fixup_for_id(): - - int phy_register_fixup_for_uid(u32 phy_uid, u32 phy_uid_mask, - int (*run)(struct phy_device *)); - int phy_register_fixup_for_id(const char *phy_id, - int (*run)(struct phy_device *)); - - The stubs set one of the two matching criteria, and set the other one to - match anything. - - When phy_register_fixup() or *_for_uid()/*_for_id() is called at module, - unregister fixup and free allocate memory are required. - - Call one of following function before unloading module. - - int phy_unregister_fixup(const char *phy_id, u32 phy_uid, u32 phy_uid_mask); - int phy_unregister_fixup_for_uid(u32 phy_uid, u32 phy_uid_mask); - int phy_register_fixup_for_id(const char *phy_id); - -Standards - - IEEE Standard 802.3: CSMA/CD Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications, Section Two: - http://standards.ieee.org/getieee802/download/802.3-2008_section2.pdf - - RGMII v1.3: - http://web.archive.org/web/20160303212629/http://www.hp.com/rnd/pdfs/RGMIIv1_3.pdf - - RGMII v2.0: - http://web.archive.org/web/20160303171328/http://www.hp.com/rnd/pdfs/RGMIIv2_0_final_hp.pdf diff --git a/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt b/Documentation/networking/scaling.rst index b7056a8a0540..f78d7bf27ff5 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/scaling.rst @@ -1,4 +1,8 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +===================================== Scaling in the Linux Networking Stack +===================================== Introduction @@ -10,11 +14,11 @@ multi-processor systems. The following technologies are described: - RSS: Receive Side Scaling - RPS: Receive Packet Steering - RFS: Receive Flow Steering - Accelerated Receive Flow Steering - XPS: Transmit Packet Steering +- RSS: Receive Side Scaling +- RPS: Receive Packet Steering +- RFS: Receive Flow Steering +- Accelerated Receive Flow Steering +- XPS: Transmit Packet Steering RSS: Receive Side Scaling @@ -45,7 +49,9 @@ programmable filters. For example, webserver bound TCP port 80 packets can be directed to their own receive queue. Such “n-tuple” filters can be configured from ethtool (--config-ntuple). -==== RSS Configuration + +RSS Configuration +----------------- The driver for a multi-queue capable NIC typically provides a kernel module parameter for specifying the number of hardware queues to @@ -63,7 +69,9 @@ commands (--show-rxfh-indir and --set-rxfh-indir). Modifying the indirection table could be done to give different queues different relative weights. -== RSS IRQ Configuration + +RSS IRQ Configuration +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Each receive queue has a separate IRQ associated with it. The NIC triggers this to notify a CPU when new packets arrive on the given queue. The @@ -77,7 +85,9 @@ affinity of each interrupt see Documentation/IRQ-affinity.txt. Some systems will be running irqbalance, a daemon that dynamically optimizes IRQ assignments and as a result may override any manual settings. -== Suggested Configuration + +Suggested Configuration +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ RSS should be enabled when latency is a concern or whenever receive interrupt processing forms a bottleneck. Spreading load between CPUs @@ -105,10 +115,12 @@ Whereas RSS selects the queue and hence CPU that will run the hardware interrupt handler, RPS selects the CPU to perform protocol processing above the interrupt handler. This is accomplished by placing the packet on the desired CPU’s backlog queue and waking up the CPU for processing. -RPS has some advantages over RSS: 1) it can be used with any NIC, -2) software filters can easily be added to hash over new protocols, +RPS has some advantages over RSS: + +1) it can be used with any NIC +2) software filters can easily be added to hash over new protocols 3) it does not increase hardware device interrupt rate (although it does -introduce inter-processor interrupts (IPIs)). + introduce inter-processor interrupts (IPIs)) RPS is called during bottom half of the receive interrupt handler, when a driver sends a packet up the network stack with netif_rx() or @@ -135,21 +147,25 @@ packets have been queued to their backlog queue. The IPI wakes backlog processing on the remote CPU, and any queued packets are then processed up the networking stack. -==== RPS Configuration + +RPS Configuration +----------------- RPS requires a kernel compiled with the CONFIG_RPS kconfig symbol (on by default for SMP). Even when compiled in, RPS remains disabled until explicitly configured. The list of CPUs to which RPS may forward traffic -can be configured for each receive queue using a sysfs file entry: +can be configured for each receive queue using a sysfs file entry:: - /sys/class/net/<dev>/queues/rx-<n>/rps_cpus + /sys/class/net/<dev>/queues/rx-<n>/rps_cpus This file implements a bitmap of CPUs. RPS is disabled when it is zero (the default), in which case packets are processed on the interrupting CPU. Documentation/IRQ-affinity.txt explains how CPUs are assigned to the bitmap. -== Suggested Configuration + +Suggested Configuration +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ For a single queue device, a typical RPS configuration would be to set the rps_cpus to the CPUs in the same memory domain of the interrupting @@ -163,7 +179,9 @@ and unnecessary. If there are fewer hardware queues than CPUs, then RPS might be beneficial if the rps_cpus for each queue are the ones that share the same memory domain as the interrupting CPU for that queue. -==== RPS Flow Limit + +RPS Flow Limit +-------------- RPS scales kernel receive processing across CPUs without introducing reordering. The trade-off to sending all packets from the same flow @@ -187,29 +205,33 @@ No packets are dropped when the input packet queue length is below the threshold, so flow limit does not sever connections outright: even large flows maintain connectivity. -== Interface + +Interface +~~~~~~~~~ Flow limit is compiled in by default (CONFIG_NET_FLOW_LIMIT), but not turned on. It is implemented for each CPU independently (to avoid lock and cache contention) and toggled per CPU by setting the relevant bit in sysctl net.core.flow_limit_cpu_bitmap. It exposes the same CPU -bitmap interface as rps_cpus (see above) when called from procfs: +bitmap interface as rps_cpus (see above) when called from procfs:: - /proc/sys/net/core/flow_limit_cpu_bitmap + /proc/sys/net/core/flow_limit_cpu_bitmap Per-flow rate is calculated by hashing each packet into a hashtable bucket and incrementing a per-bucket counter. The hash function is the same that selects a CPU in RPS, but as the number of buckets can be much larger than the number of CPUs, flow limit has finer-grained identification of large flows and fewer false positives. The default -table has 4096 buckets. This value can be modified through sysctl +table has 4096 buckets. This value can be modified through sysctl:: - net.core.flow_limit_table_len + net.core.flow_limit_table_len The value is only consulted when a new table is allocated. Modifying it does not update active tables. -== Suggested Configuration + +Suggested Configuration +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Flow limit is useful on systems with many concurrent connections, where a single connection taking up 50% of a CPU indicates a problem. @@ -280,10 +302,10 @@ table), the packet is enqueued onto that CPU’s backlog. If they differ, the current CPU is updated to match the desired CPU if one of the following is true: -- The current CPU's queue head counter >= the recorded tail counter - value in rps_dev_flow[i] -- The current CPU is unset (>= nr_cpu_ids) -- The current CPU is offline + - The current CPU's queue head counter >= the recorded tail counter + value in rps_dev_flow[i] + - The current CPU is unset (>= nr_cpu_ids) + - The current CPU is offline After this check, the packet is sent to the (possibly updated) current CPU. These rules aim to ensure that a flow only moves to a new CPU when @@ -291,19 +313,23 @@ there are no packets outstanding on the old CPU, as the outstanding packets could arrive later than those about to be processed on the new CPU. -==== RFS Configuration + +RFS Configuration +----------------- RFS is only available if the kconfig symbol CONFIG_RPS is enabled (on by default for SMP). The functionality remains disabled until explicitly -configured. The number of entries in the global flow table is set through: +configured. The number of entries in the global flow table is set through:: + + /proc/sys/net/core/rps_sock_flow_entries - /proc/sys/net/core/rps_sock_flow_entries +The number of entries in the per-queue flow table are set through:: -The number of entries in the per-queue flow table are set through: + /sys/class/net/<dev>/queues/rx-<n>/rps_flow_cnt - /sys/class/net/<dev>/queues/rx-<n>/rps_flow_cnt -== Suggested Configuration +Suggested Configuration +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Both of these need to be set before RFS is enabled for a receive queue. Values for both are rounded up to the nearest power of two. The @@ -347,7 +373,9 @@ functions in the cpu_rmap (“CPU affinity reverse map”) kernel library to populate the map. For each CPU, the corresponding queue in the map is set to be one whose processing CPU is closest in cache locality. -==== Accelerated RFS Configuration + +Accelerated RFS Configuration +----------------------------- Accelerated RFS is only available if the kernel is compiled with CONFIG_RFS_ACCEL and support is provided by the NIC device and driver. @@ -356,11 +384,14 @@ of CPU to queues is automatically deduced from the IRQ affinities configured for each receive queue by the driver, so no additional configuration should be necessary. -== Suggested Configuration + +Suggested Configuration +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ This technique should be enabled whenever one wants to use RFS and the NIC supports hardware acceleration. + XPS: Transmit Packet Steering ============================= @@ -430,20 +461,25 @@ transport layer is responsible for setting ooo_okay appropriately. TCP, for instance, sets the flag when all data for a connection has been acknowledged. -==== XPS Configuration +XPS Configuration +----------------- XPS is only available if the kconfig symbol CONFIG_XPS is enabled (on by default for SMP). The functionality remains disabled until explicitly configured. To enable XPS, the bitmap of CPUs/receive-queues that may use a transmit queue is configured using the sysfs file entry: -For selection based on CPUs map: -/sys/class/net/<dev>/queues/tx-<n>/xps_cpus +For selection based on CPUs map:: + + /sys/class/net/<dev>/queues/tx-<n>/xps_cpus + +For selection based on receive-queues map:: + + /sys/class/net/<dev>/queues/tx-<n>/xps_rxqs -For selection based on receive-queues map: -/sys/class/net/<dev>/queues/tx-<n>/xps_rxqs -== Suggested Configuration +Suggested Configuration +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ For a network device with a single transmission queue, XPS configuration has no effect, since there is no choice in this case. In a multi-queue @@ -460,16 +496,18 @@ explicitly configured mapping receive-queue(s) to transmit queue(s). If the user configuration for receive-queue map does not apply, then the transmit queue is selected based on the CPUs map. -Per TX Queue rate limitation: -============================= + +Per TX Queue rate limitation +============================ These are rate-limitation mechanisms implemented by HW, where currently -a max-rate attribute is supported, by setting a Mbps value to +a max-rate attribute is supported, by setting a Mbps value to:: -/sys/class/net/<dev>/queues/tx-<n>/tx_maxrate + /sys/class/net/<dev>/queues/tx-<n>/tx_maxrate A value of zero means disabled, and this is the default. + Further Information =================== RPS and RFS were introduced in kernel 2.6.35. XPS was incorporated into @@ -480,5 +518,6 @@ Accelerated RFS was introduced in 2.6.35. Original patches were submitted by Ben Hutchings (bwh@kernel.org) Authors: -Tom Herbert (therbert@google.com) -Willem de Bruijn (willemb@google.com) + +- Tom Herbert (therbert@google.com) +- Willem de Bruijn (willemb@google.com) diff --git a/Documentation/networking/segmentation-offloads.txt b/Documentation/networking/segmentation-offloads.rst index aca542ec125c..89d1ee933e9f 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/segmentation-offloads.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/segmentation-offloads.rst @@ -1,4 +1,9 @@ -Segmentation Offloads in the Linux Networking Stack +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +===================== +Segmentation Offloads +===================== + Introduction ============ @@ -15,6 +20,7 @@ The following technologies are described: * Partial Generic Segmentation Offload - GSO_PARTIAL * SCTP accelleration with GSO - GSO_BY_FRAGS + TCP Segmentation Offload ======================== @@ -42,6 +48,7 @@ NETIF_F_TSO_MANGLEID set then the IP ID can be ignored when performing TSO and we will either increment the IP ID for all frames, or leave it at a static value based on driver preference. + UDP Fragmentation Offload ========================= @@ -54,6 +61,7 @@ UFO is deprecated: modern kernels will no longer generate UFO skbs, but can still receive them from tuntap and similar devices. Offload of UDP-based tunnel protocols is still supported. + IPIP, SIT, GRE, UDP Tunnel, and Remote Checksum Offloads ======================================================== @@ -71,17 +79,19 @@ refer to the tunnel headers as the outer headers, while the encapsulated data is normally referred to as the inner headers. Below is the list of calls to access the given headers: -IPIP/SIT Tunnel: - Outer Inner -MAC skb_mac_header -Network skb_network_header skb_inner_network_header -Transport skb_transport_header +IPIP/SIT Tunnel:: + + Outer Inner + MAC skb_mac_header + Network skb_network_header skb_inner_network_header + Transport skb_transport_header -UDP/GRE Tunnel: - Outer Inner -MAC skb_mac_header skb_inner_mac_header -Network skb_network_header skb_inner_network_header -Transport skb_transport_header skb_inner_transport_header +UDP/GRE Tunnel:: + + Outer Inner + MAC skb_mac_header skb_inner_mac_header + Network skb_network_header skb_inner_network_header + Transport skb_transport_header skb_inner_transport_header In addition to the above tunnel types there are also SKB_GSO_GRE_CSUM and SKB_GSO_UDP_TUNNEL_CSUM. These two additional tunnel types reflect the @@ -93,6 +103,7 @@ header has requested a remote checksum offload. In this case the inner headers will be left with a partial checksum and only the outer header checksum will be computed. + Generic Segmentation Offload ============================ @@ -106,6 +117,7 @@ Before enabling any hardware segmentation offload a corresponding software offload is required in GSO. Otherwise it becomes possible for a frame to be re-routed between devices and end up being unable to be transmitted. + Generic Receive Offload ======================= @@ -117,6 +129,7 @@ this is IPv4 ID in the case that the DF bit is set for a given IP header. If the value of the IPv4 ID is not sequentially incrementing it will be altered so that it is when a frame assembled via GRO is segmented via GSO. + Partial Generic Segmentation Offload ==================================== @@ -134,6 +147,7 @@ is the outer IPv4 ID field. It is up to the device drivers to guarantee that the IPv4 ID field is incremented in the case that a given header does not have the DF bit set. + SCTP accelleration with GSO =========================== @@ -157,14 +171,14 @@ appropriately. There are some helpers to make this easier: - - skb_is_gso(skb) && skb_is_gso_sctp(skb) is the best way to see if - an skb is an SCTP GSO skb. +- skb_is_gso(skb) && skb_is_gso_sctp(skb) is the best way to see if + an skb is an SCTP GSO skb. - - For size checks, the skb_gso_validate_*_len family of helpers correctly - considers GSO_BY_FRAGS. +- For size checks, the skb_gso_validate_*_len family of helpers correctly + considers GSO_BY_FRAGS. - - For manipulating packets, skb_increase_gso_size and skb_decrease_gso_size - will check for GSO_BY_FRAGS and WARN if asked to manipulate these skbs. +- For manipulating packets, skb_increase_gso_size and skb_decrease_gso_size + will check for GSO_BY_FRAGS and WARN if asked to manipulate these skbs. This also affects drivers with the NETIF_F_FRAGLIST & NETIF_F_GSO_SCTP bits set. Note also that NETIF_F_GSO_SCTP is included in NETIF_F_GSO_SOFTWARE. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/sfp-phylink.rst b/Documentation/networking/sfp-phylink.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5bd26cb07244 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/sfp-phylink.rst @@ -0,0 +1,268 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +======= +phylink +======= + +Overview +======== + +phylink is a mechanism to support hot-pluggable networking modules +without needing to re-initialise the adapter on hot-plug events. + +phylink supports conventional phylib-based setups, fixed link setups +and SFP (Small Formfactor Pluggable) modules at present. + +Modes of operation +================== + +phylink has several modes of operation, which depend on the firmware +settings. + +1. PHY mode + + In PHY mode, we use phylib to read the current link settings from + the PHY, and pass them to the MAC driver. We expect the MAC driver + to configure exactly the modes that are specified without any + negotiation being enabled on the link. + +2. Fixed mode + + Fixed mode is the same as PHY mode as far as the MAC driver is + concerned. + +3. In-band mode + + In-band mode is used with 802.3z, SGMII and similar interface modes, + and we are expecting to use and honor the in-band negotiation or + control word sent across the serdes channel. + +By example, what this means is that: + +.. code-block:: none + + ð { + phy = <&phy>; + phy-mode = "sgmii"; + }; + +does not use in-band SGMII signalling. The PHY is expected to follow +exactly the settings given to it in its :c:func:`mac_config` function. +The link should be forced up or down appropriately in the +:c:func:`mac_link_up` and :c:func:`mac_link_down` functions. + +.. code-block:: none + + ð { + managed = "in-band-status"; + phy = <&phy>; + phy-mode = "sgmii"; + }; + +uses in-band mode, where results from the PHY's negotiation are passed +to the MAC through the SGMII control word, and the MAC is expected to +acknowledge the control word. The :c:func:`mac_link_up` and +:c:func:`mac_link_down` functions must not force the MAC side link +up and down. + +Rough guide to converting a network driver to sfp/phylink +========================================================= + +This guide briefly describes how to convert a network driver from +phylib to the sfp/phylink support. Please send patches to improve +this documentation. + +1. Optionally split the network driver's phylib update function into + three parts dealing with link-down, link-up and reconfiguring the + MAC settings. This can be done as a separate preparation commit. + + An example of this preparation can be found in git commit fc548b991fb0. + +2. Replace:: + + select FIXED_PHY + select PHYLIB + + with:: + + select PHYLINK + + in the driver's Kconfig stanza. + +3. Add:: + + #include <linux/phylink.h> + + to the driver's list of header files. + +4. Add:: + + struct phylink *phylink; + + to the driver's private data structure. We shall refer to the + driver's private data pointer as ``priv`` below, and the driver's + private data structure as ``struct foo_priv``. + +5. Replace the following functions: + + .. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 1 + :widths: 1 1 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - Original function + - Replacement function + * - phy_start(phydev) + - phylink_start(priv->phylink) + * - phy_stop(phydev) + - phylink_stop(priv->phylink) + * - phy_mii_ioctl(phydev, ifr, cmd) + - phylink_mii_ioctl(priv->phylink, ifr, cmd) + * - phy_ethtool_get_wol(phydev, wol) + - phylink_ethtool_get_wol(priv->phylink, wol) + * - phy_ethtool_set_wol(phydev, wol) + - phylink_ethtool_set_wol(priv->phylink, wol) + * - phy_disconnect(phydev) + - phylink_disconnect_phy(priv->phylink) + + Please note that some of these functions must be called under the + rtnl lock, and will warn if not. This will normally be the case, + except if these are called from the driver suspend/resume paths. + +6. Add/replace ksettings get/set methods with: + + .. code-block:: c + + static int foo_ethtool_set_link_ksettings(struct net_device *dev, + const struct ethtool_link_ksettings *cmd) + { + struct foo_priv *priv = netdev_priv(dev); + + return phylink_ethtool_ksettings_set(priv->phylink, cmd); + } + + static int foo_ethtool_get_link_ksettings(struct net_device *dev, + struct ethtool_link_ksettings *cmd) + { + struct foo_priv *priv = netdev_priv(dev); + + return phylink_ethtool_ksettings_get(priv->phylink, cmd); + } + +7. Replace the call to: + + phy_dev = of_phy_connect(dev, node, link_func, flags, phy_interface); + + and associated code with a call to: + + err = phylink_of_phy_connect(priv->phylink, node, flags); + + For the most part, ``flags`` can be zero; these flags are passed to + the of_phy_attach() inside this function call if a PHY is specified + in the DT node ``node``. + + ``node`` should be the DT node which contains the network phy property, + fixed link properties, and will also contain the sfp property. + + The setup of fixed links should also be removed; these are handled + internally by phylink. + + of_phy_connect() was also passed a function pointer for link updates. + This function is replaced by a different form of MAC updates + described below in (8). + + Manipulation of the PHY's supported/advertised happens within phylink + based on the validate callback, see below in (8). + + Note that the driver no longer needs to store the ``phy_interface``, + and also note that ``phy_interface`` becomes a dynamic property, + just like the speed, duplex etc. settings. + + Finally, note that the MAC driver has no direct access to the PHY + anymore; that is because in the phylink model, the PHY can be + dynamic. + +8. Add a :c:type:`struct phylink_mac_ops <phylink_mac_ops>` instance to + the driver, which is a table of function pointers, and implement + these functions. The old link update function for + :c:func:`of_phy_connect` becomes three methods: :c:func:`mac_link_up`, + :c:func:`mac_link_down`, and :c:func:`mac_config`. If step 1 was + performed, then the functionality will have been split there. + + It is important that if in-band negotiation is used, + :c:func:`mac_link_up` and :c:func:`mac_link_down` do not prevent the + in-band negotiation from completing, since these functions are called + when the in-band link state changes - otherwise the link will never + come up. + + The :c:func:`validate` method should mask the supplied supported mask, + and ``state->advertising`` with the supported ethtool link modes. + These are the new ethtool link modes, so bitmask operations must be + used. For an example, see drivers/net/ethernet/marvell/mvneta.c. + + The :c:func:`mac_link_state` method is used to read the link state + from the MAC, and report back the settings that the MAC is currently + using. This is particularly important for in-band negotiation + methods such as 1000base-X and SGMII. + + The :c:func:`mac_config` method is used to update the MAC with the + requested state, and must avoid unnecessarily taking the link down + when making changes to the MAC configuration. This means the + function should modify the state and only take the link down when + absolutely necessary to change the MAC configuration. An example + of how to do this can be found in :c:func:`mvneta_mac_config` in + drivers/net/ethernet/marvell/mvneta.c. + + For further information on these methods, please see the inline + documentation in :c:type:`struct phylink_mac_ops <phylink_mac_ops>`. + +9. Remove calls to of_parse_phandle() for the PHY, + of_phy_register_fixed_link() for fixed links etc. from the probe + function, and replace with: + + .. code-block:: c + + struct phylink *phylink; + + phylink = phylink_create(dev, node, phy_mode, &phylink_ops); + if (IS_ERR(phylink)) { + err = PTR_ERR(phylink); + fail probe; + } + + priv->phylink = phylink; + + and arrange to destroy the phylink in the probe failure path as + appropriate and the removal path too by calling: + + .. code-block:: c + + phylink_destroy(priv->phylink); + +10. Arrange for MAC link state interrupts to be forwarded into + phylink, via: + + .. code-block:: c + + phylink_mac_change(priv->phylink, link_is_up); + + where ``link_is_up`` is true if the link is currently up or false + otherwise. + +11. Verify that the driver does not call:: + + netif_carrier_on() + netif_carrier_off() + + as these will interfere with phylink's tracking of the link state, + and cause phylink to omit calls via the :c:func:`mac_link_up` and + :c:func:`mac_link_down` methods. + +Network drivers should call phylink_stop() and phylink_start() via their +suspend/resume paths, which ensures that the appropriate +:c:type:`struct phylink_mac_ops <phylink_mac_ops>` methods are called +as necessary. + +For information describing the SFP cage in DT, please see the binding +documentation in the kernel source tree +``Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/sff,sfp.txt`` diff --git a/Documentation/networking/snmp_counter.rst b/Documentation/networking/snmp_counter.rst index fe8f741193be..52b026be028f 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/snmp_counter.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/snmp_counter.rst @@ -1,16 +1,17 @@ -=========== +============ SNMP counter -=========== +============ This document explains the meaning of SNMP counters. General IPv4 counters -==================== +===================== All layer 4 packets and ICMP packets will change these counters, but these counters won't be changed by layer 2 packets (such as STP) or ARP packets. * IpInReceives + Defined in `RFC1213 ipInReceives`_ .. _RFC1213 ipInReceives: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-26 @@ -23,6 +24,7 @@ and so on). It indicates the number of aggregated segments after GRO/LRO. * IpInDelivers + Defined in `RFC1213 ipInDelivers`_ .. _RFC1213 ipInDelivers: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-28 @@ -33,6 +35,7 @@ supported protocols will be delivered, if someone listens on the raw socket, all valid IP packets will be delivered. * IpOutRequests + Defined in `RFC1213 ipOutRequests`_ .. _RFC1213 ipOutRequests: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-28 @@ -42,6 +45,7 @@ multicast packets, and would always be updated together with IpExtOutOctets. * IpExtInOctets and IpExtOutOctets + They are Linux kernel extensions, no RFC definitions. Please note, RFC1213 indeed defines ifInOctets and ifOutOctets, but they are different things. The ifInOctets and ifOutOctets include the MAC @@ -49,6 +53,7 @@ layer header size but IpExtInOctets and IpExtOutOctets don't, they only include the IP layer header and the IP layer data. * IpExtInNoECTPkts, IpExtInECT1Pkts, IpExtInECT0Pkts, IpExtInCEPkts + They indicate the number of four kinds of ECN IP packets, please refer `Explicit Congestion Notification`_ for more details. @@ -60,6 +65,7 @@ for the same packet, you might find that IpInReceives count 1, but IpExtInNoECTPkts counts 2 or more. * IpInHdrErrors + Defined in `RFC1213 ipInHdrErrors`_. It indicates the packet is dropped due to the IP header error. It might happen in both IP input and IP forward paths. @@ -67,6 +73,7 @@ and IP forward paths. .. _RFC1213 ipInHdrErrors: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-27 * IpInAddrErrors + Defined in `RFC1213 ipInAddrErrors`_. It will be increased in two scenarios: (1) The IP address is invalid. (2) The destination IP address is not a local address and IP forwarding is not enabled @@ -74,6 +81,7 @@ address is not a local address and IP forwarding is not enabled .. _RFC1213 ipInAddrErrors: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-27 * IpExtInNoRoutes + This counter means the packet is dropped when the IP stack receives a packet and can't find a route for it from the route table. It might happen when IP forwarding is enabled and the destination IP address is @@ -81,6 +89,7 @@ not a local address and there is no route for the destination IP address. * IpInUnknownProtos + Defined in `RFC1213 ipInUnknownProtos`_. It will be increased if the layer 4 protocol is unsupported by kernel. If an application is using raw socket, kernel will always deliver the packet to the raw socket @@ -89,10 +98,12 @@ and this counter won't be increased. .. _RFC1213 ipInUnknownProtos: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-27 * IpExtInTruncatedPkts + For IPv4 packet, it means the actual data size is smaller than the "Total Length" field in the IPv4 header. * IpInDiscards + Defined in `RFC1213 ipInDiscards`_. It indicates the packet is dropped in the IP receiving path and due to kernel internal reasons (e.g. no enough memory). @@ -100,20 +111,23 @@ enough memory). .. _RFC1213 ipInDiscards: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-28 * IpOutDiscards + Defined in `RFC1213 ipOutDiscards`_. It indicates the packet is dropped in the IP sending path and due to kernel internal reasons. .. _RFC1213 ipOutDiscards: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-28 * IpOutNoRoutes + Defined in `RFC1213 ipOutNoRoutes`_. It indicates the packet is dropped in the IP sending path and no route is found for it. .. _RFC1213 ipOutNoRoutes: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-29 ICMP counters -============ +============= * IcmpInMsgs and IcmpOutMsgs + Defined by `RFC1213 icmpInMsgs`_ and `RFC1213 icmpOutMsgs`_ .. _RFC1213 icmpInMsgs: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-41 @@ -126,6 +140,7 @@ IcmpOutMsgs would still be updated if the IP header is constructed by a userspace program. * ICMP named types + | These counters include most of common ICMP types, they are: | IcmpInDestUnreachs: `RFC1213 icmpInDestUnreachs`_ | IcmpInTimeExcds: `RFC1213 icmpInTimeExcds`_ @@ -180,6 +195,7 @@ straightforward. The 'In' counter means kernel receives such a packet and the 'Out' counter means kernel sends such a packet. * ICMP numeric types + They are IcmpMsgInType[N] and IcmpMsgOutType[N], the [N] indicates the ICMP type number. These counters track all kinds of ICMP packets. The ICMP type number definition could be found in the `ICMP parameters`_ @@ -192,12 +208,14 @@ IcmpMsgOutType8 would increase 1. And if kernel gets an ICMP Echo Reply packet, IcmpMsgInType0 would increase 1. * IcmpInCsumErrors + This counter indicates the checksum of the ICMP packet is wrong. Kernel verifies the checksum after updating the IcmpInMsgs and before updating IcmpMsgInType[N]. If a packet has bad checksum, the IcmpInMsgs would be updated but none of IcmpMsgInType[N] would be updated. * IcmpInErrors and IcmpOutErrors + Defined by `RFC1213 icmpInErrors`_ and `RFC1213 icmpOutErrors`_ .. _RFC1213 icmpInErrors: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-41 @@ -209,7 +227,7 @@ and the sending packet path use IcmpOutErrors. When IcmpInCsumErrors is increased, IcmpInErrors would always be increased too. relationship of the ICMP counters -------------------------------- +--------------------------------- The sum of IcmpMsgOutType[N] is always equal to IcmpOutMsgs, as they are updated at the same time. The sum of IcmpMsgInType[N] plus IcmpInErrors should be equal or larger than IcmpInMsgs. When kernel @@ -229,8 +247,9 @@ IcmpInMsgs should be less than the sum of IcmpMsgOutType[N] plus IcmpInErrors. General TCP counters -================== +==================== * TcpInSegs + Defined in `RFC1213 tcpInSegs`_ .. _RFC1213 tcpInSegs: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-48 @@ -247,6 +266,7 @@ isn't aware of GRO. So if two packets are merged by GRO, the TcpInSegs counter would only increase 1. * TcpOutSegs + Defined in `RFC1213 tcpOutSegs`_ .. _RFC1213 tcpOutSegs: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-48 @@ -258,6 +278,7 @@ GSO, so if a packet would be split to 2 by GSO, TcpOutSegs will increase 2. * TcpActiveOpens + Defined in `RFC1213 tcpActiveOpens`_ .. _RFC1213 tcpActiveOpens: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-47 @@ -267,6 +288,7 @@ state. Every time TcpActiveOpens increases 1, TcpOutSegs should always increase 1. * TcpPassiveOpens + Defined in `RFC1213 tcpPassiveOpens`_ .. _RFC1213 tcpPassiveOpens: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-47 @@ -275,6 +297,7 @@ It means the TCP layer receives a SYN, replies a SYN+ACK, come into the SYN-RCVD state. * TcpExtTCPRcvCoalesce + When packets are received by the TCP layer and are not be read by the application, the TCP layer will try to merge them. This counter indicate how many packets are merged in such situation. If GRO is @@ -282,12 +305,14 @@ enabled, lots of packets would be merged by GRO, these packets wouldn't be counted to TcpExtTCPRcvCoalesce. * TcpExtTCPAutoCorking + When sending packets, the TCP layer will try to merge small packets to a bigger one. This counter increase 1 for every packet merged in such situation. Please refer to the LWN article for more details: https://lwn.net/Articles/576263/ * TcpExtTCPOrigDataSent + This counter is explained by `kernel commit f19c29e3e391`_, I pasted the explaination below:: @@ -297,6 +322,7 @@ explaination below:: more useful to track the TCP retransmission rate. * TCPSynRetrans + This counter is explained by `kernel commit f19c29e3e391`_, I pasted the explaination below:: @@ -304,6 +330,7 @@ explaination below:: retransmissions into SYN, fast-retransmits, timeout retransmits, etc. * TCPFastOpenActiveFail + This counter is explained by `kernel commit f19c29e3e391`_, I pasted the explaination below:: @@ -313,6 +340,7 @@ explaination below:: .. _kernel commit f19c29e3e391: https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux.git/commit/?id=f19c29e3e391a66a273e9afebaf01917245148cd * TcpExtListenOverflows and TcpExtListenDrops + When kernel receives a SYN from a client, and if the TCP accept queue is full, kernel will drop the SYN and add 1 to TcpExtListenOverflows. At the same time kernel will also add 1 to TcpExtListenDrops. When a @@ -336,17 +364,22 @@ time client replies ACK, this socket will get another chance to move to the accept queue. +TCP Fast Open +============= * TcpEstabResets + Defined in `RFC1213 tcpEstabResets`_. .. _RFC1213 tcpEstabResets: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-48 * TcpAttemptFails + Defined in `RFC1213 tcpAttemptFails`_. .. _RFC1213 tcpAttemptFails: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-48 * TcpOutRsts + Defined in `RFC1213 tcpOutRsts`_. The RFC says this counter indicates the 'segments sent containing the RST flag', but in linux kernel, this couner indicates the segments kerenl tried to send. The sending @@ -354,6 +387,30 @@ process might be failed due to some errors (e.g. memory alloc failed). .. _RFC1213 tcpOutRsts: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-52 +* TcpExtTCPSpuriousRtxHostQueues + +When the TCP stack wants to retransmit a packet, and finds that packet +is not lost in the network, but the packet is not sent yet, the TCP +stack would give up the retransmission and update this counter. It +might happen if a packet stays too long time in a qdisc or driver +queue. + +* TcpEstabResets + +The socket receives a RST packet in Establish or CloseWait state. + +* TcpExtTCPKeepAlive + +This counter indicates many keepalive packets were sent. The keepalive +won't be enabled by default. A userspace program could enable it by +setting the SO_KEEPALIVE socket option. + +* TcpExtTCPSpuriousRTOs + +The spurious retransmission timeout detected by the `F-RTO`_ +algorithm. + +.. _F-RTO: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5682 TCP Fast Path ============ @@ -389,20 +446,23 @@ will disable the fast path at first, and try to enable it after kernel receives packets. * TcpExtTCPPureAcks and TcpExtTCPHPAcks + If a packet set ACK flag and has no data, it is a pure ACK packet, if kernel handles it in the fast path, TcpExtTCPHPAcks will increase 1, if kernel handles it in the slow path, TcpExtTCPPureAcks will increase 1. * TcpExtTCPHPHits + If a TCP packet has data (which means it is not a pure ACK packet), and this packet is handled in the fast path, TcpExtTCPHPHits will increase 1. TCP abort -======== +========= * TcpExtTCPAbortOnData + It means TCP layer has data in flight, but need to close the connection. So TCP layer sends a RST to the other side, indicate the connection is not closed very graceful. An easy way to increase this @@ -421,11 +481,13 @@ when the application closes a connection, kernel will send a RST immediately and increase the TcpExtTCPAbortOnData counter. * TcpExtTCPAbortOnClose + This counter means the application has unread data in the TCP layer when the application wants to close the TCP connection. In such a situation, kernel will send a RST to the other side of the TCP connection. * TcpExtTCPAbortOnMemory + When an application closes a TCP connection, kernel still need to track the connection, let it complete the TCP disconnect process. E.g. an app calls the close method of a socket, kernel sends fin to the other @@ -447,10 +509,12 @@ the tcp_mem. Please refer the tcp_mem section in the `TCP man page`_: * TcpExtTCPAbortOnTimeout + This counter will increase when any of the TCP timers expire. In such situation, kernel won't send RST, just give up the connection. * TcpExtTCPAbortOnLinger + When a TCP connection comes into FIN_WAIT_2 state, instead of waiting for the fin packet from the other side, kernel could send a RST and delete the socket immediately. This is not the default behavior of @@ -458,6 +522,7 @@ Linux kernel TCP stack. By configuring the TCP_LINGER2 socket option, you could let kernel follow this behavior. * TcpExtTCPAbortFailed + The kernel TCP layer will send RST if the `RFC2525 2.17 section`_ is satisfied. If an internal error occurs during this process, TcpExtTCPAbortFailed will be increased. @@ -465,7 +530,7 @@ TcpExtTCPAbortFailed will be increased. .. _RFC2525 2.17 section: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2525#page-50 TCP Hybrid Slow Start -==================== +===================== The Hybrid Slow Start algorithm is an enhancement of the traditional TCP congestion window Slow Start algorithm. It uses two pieces of information to detect whether the max bandwidth of the TCP path is @@ -481,23 +546,27 @@ relate with the Hybrid Slow Start algorithm. .. _Hybrid Slow Start paper: https://pdfs.semanticscholar.org/25e9/ef3f03315782c7f1cbcd31b587857adae7d1.pdf * TcpExtTCPHystartTrainDetect + How many times the ACK train length threshold is detected * TcpExtTCPHystartTrainCwnd + The sum of CWND detected by ACK train length. Dividing this value by TcpExtTCPHystartTrainDetect is the average CWND which detected by the ACK train length. * TcpExtTCPHystartDelayDetect + How many times the packet delay threshold is detected. * TcpExtTCPHystartDelayCwnd + The sum of CWND detected by packet delay. Dividing this value by TcpExtTCPHystartDelayDetect is the average CWND which detected by the packet delay. TCP retransmission and congestion control -====================================== +========================================= The TCP protocol has two retransmission mechanisms: SACK and fast recovery. They are exclusive with each other. When SACK is enabled, the kernel TCP stack would use SACK, or kernel would use fast @@ -516,12 +585,14 @@ https://pdfs.semanticscholar.org/0e9c/968d09ab2e53e24c4dca5b2d67c7f7140f8e.pdf .. _RFC6582: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6582 * TcpExtTCPRenoRecovery and TcpExtTCPSackRecovery + When the congestion control comes into Recovery state, if sack is used, TcpExtTCPSackRecovery increases 1, if sack is not used, TcpExtTCPRenoRecovery increases 1. These two counters mean the TCP stack begins to retransmit the lost packets. * TcpExtTCPSACKReneging + A packet was acknowledged by SACK, but the receiver has dropped this packet, so the sender needs to retransmit this packet. In this situation, the sender adds 1 to TcpExtTCPSACKReneging. A receiver @@ -532,6 +603,7 @@ the RTO expires for this packet, then the sender assumes this packet has been dropped by the receiver. * TcpExtTCPRenoReorder + The reorder packet is detected by fast recovery. It would only be used if SACK is disabled. The fast recovery algorithm detects recorder by the duplicate ACK number. E.g., if retransmission is triggered, and @@ -542,6 +614,7 @@ order packet. Thus the sender would find more ACks than its expectation, and the sender knows out of order occurs. * TcpExtTCPTSReorder + The reorder packet is detected when a hole is filled. E.g., assume the sender sends packet 1,2,3,4,5, and the receiving order is 1,2,4,5,3. When the sender receives the ACK of packet 3 (which will @@ -551,6 +624,7 @@ fill the hole), two conditions will let TcpExtTCPTSReorder increase than the retransmission timestamp. * TcpExtTCPSACKReorder + The reorder packet detected by SACK. The SACK has two methods to detect reorder: (1) DSACK is received by the sender. It means the sender sends the same packet more than one times. And the only reason @@ -562,6 +636,29 @@ packet yet, the sender would know packet 4 is out of order. The TCP stack of kernel will increase TcpExtTCPSACKReorder for both of the above scenarios. +* TcpExtTCPSlowStartRetrans + +The TCP stack wants to retransmit a packet and the congestion control +state is 'Loss'. + +* TcpExtTCPFastRetrans + +The TCP stack wants to retransmit a packet and the congestion control +state is not 'Loss'. + +* TcpExtTCPLostRetransmit + +A SACK points out that a retransmission packet is lost again. + +* TcpExtTCPRetransFail + +The TCP stack tries to deliver a retransmission packet to lower layers +but the lower layers return an error. + +* TcpExtTCPSynRetrans + +The TCP stack retransmits a SYN packet. + DSACK ===== The DSACK is defined in `RFC2883`_. The receiver uses DSACK to report @@ -574,10 +671,12 @@ sender side. .. _RFC2883 : https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2883 * TcpExtTCPDSACKOldSent + The TCP stack receives a duplicate packet which has been acked, so it sends a DSACK to the sender. * TcpExtTCPDSACKOfoSent + The TCP stack receives an out of order duplicate packet, so it sends a DSACK to the sender. @@ -586,6 +685,7 @@ The TCP stack receives a DSACK, which indicates an acknowledged duplicate packet is received. * TcpExtTCPDSACKOfoRecv + The TCP stack receives a DSACK, which indicate an out of order duplicate packet is received. @@ -640,23 +740,26 @@ A skb should be shifted or merged, but the TCP stack doesn't do it for some reasons. TCP out of order -=============== +================ * TcpExtTCPOFOQueue + The TCP layer receives an out of order packet and has enough memory to queue it. * TcpExtTCPOFODrop + The TCP layer receives an out of order packet but doesn't have enough memory, so drops it. Such packets won't be counted into TcpExtTCPOFOQueue. * TcpExtTCPOFOMerge + The received out of order packet has an overlay with the previous packet. the overlay part will be dropped. All of TcpExtTCPOFOMerge packets will also be counted into TcpExtTCPOFOQueue. TCP PAWS -======= +======== PAWS (Protection Against Wrapped Sequence numbers) is an algorithm which is used to drop old packets. It depends on the TCP timestamps. For detail information, please refer the `timestamp wiki`_ @@ -666,13 +769,15 @@ and the `RFC of PAWS`_. .. _timestamp wiki: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Transmission_Control_Protocol#TCP_timestamps * TcpExtPAWSActive + Packets are dropped by PAWS in Syn-Sent status. * TcpExtPAWSEstab + Packets are dropped by PAWS in any status other than Syn-Sent. TCP ACK skip -=========== +============ In some scenarios, kernel would avoid sending duplicate ACKs too frequently. Please find more details in the tcp_invalid_ratelimit section of the `sysctl document`_. When kernel decides to skip an ACK @@ -684,6 +789,7 @@ it has no data. .. _sysctl document: https://www.kernel.org/doc/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt * TcpExtTCPACKSkippedSynRecv + The ACK is skipped in Syn-Recv status. The Syn-Recv status means the TCP stack receives a SYN and replies SYN+ACK. Now the TCP stack is waiting for an ACK. Generally, the TCP stack doesn't need to send ACK @@ -697,6 +803,7 @@ increase TcpExtTCPACKSkippedSynRecv. * TcpExtTCPACKSkippedPAWS + The ACK is skipped due to PAWS (Protect Against Wrapped Sequence numbers) check fails. If the PAWS check fails in Syn-Recv, Fin-Wait-2 or Time-Wait statuses, the skipped ACK would be counted to @@ -705,18 +812,22 @@ TcpExtTCPACKSkippedTimeWait. In all other statuses, the skipped ACK would be counted to TcpExtTCPACKSkippedPAWS. * TcpExtTCPACKSkippedSeq + The sequence number is out of window and the timestamp passes the PAWS check and the TCP status is not Syn-Recv, Fin-Wait-2, and Time-Wait. * TcpExtTCPACKSkippedFinWait2 + The ACK is skipped in Fin-Wait-2 status, the reason would be either PAWS check fails or the received sequence number is out of window. * TcpExtTCPACKSkippedTimeWait + Tha ACK is skipped in Time-Wait status, the reason would be either PAWS check failed or the received sequence number is out of window. * TcpExtTCPACKSkippedChallenge + The ACK is skipped if the ACK is a challenge ACK. The RFC 5961 defines 3 kind of challenge ACK, please refer `RFC 5961 section 3.2`_, `RFC 5961 section 4.2`_ and `RFC 5961 section 5.2`_. Besides these @@ -729,8 +840,9 @@ unacknowledged number (more strict than `RFC 5961 section 5.2`_). .. _RFC 5961 section 5.2: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5961#page-11 TCP receive window -================= +================== * TcpExtTCPWantZeroWindowAdv + Depending on current memory usage, the TCP stack tries to set receive window to zero. But the receive window might still be a no-zero value. For example, if the previous window size is 10, and the TCP @@ -738,14 +850,16 @@ stack receives 3 bytes, the current window size would be 7 even if the window size calculated by the memory usage is zero. * TcpExtTCPToZeroWindowAdv + The TCP receive window is set to zero from a no-zero value. * TcpExtTCPFromZeroWindowAdv + The TCP receive window is set to no-zero value from zero. Delayed ACK -========== +=========== The TCP Delayed ACK is a technique which is used for reducing the packet count in the network. For more details, please refer the `Delayed ACK wiki`_ @@ -753,10 +867,12 @@ packet count in the network. For more details, please refer the .. _Delayed ACK wiki: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/TCP_delayed_acknowledgment * TcpExtDelayedACKs + A delayed ACK timer expires. The TCP stack will send a pure ACK packet and exit the delayed ACK mode. * TcpExtDelayedACKLocked + A delayed ACK timer expires, but the TCP stack can't send an ACK immediately due to the socket is locked by a userspace program. The TCP stack will send a pure ACK later (after the userspace program @@ -765,29 +881,152 @@ TCP stack will also update TcpExtDelayedACKs and exit the delayed ACK mode. * TcpExtDelayedACKLost + It will be updated when the TCP stack receives a packet which has been ACKed. A Delayed ACK loss might cause this issue, but it would also be triggered by other reasons, such as a packet is duplicated in the network. Tail Loss Probe (TLP) -=================== +===================== TLP is an algorithm which is used to detect TCP packet loss. For more details, please refer the `TLP paper`_. .. _TLP paper: https://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-dukkipati-tcpm-tcp-loss-probe-01 * TcpExtTCPLossProbes + A TLP probe packet is sent. * TcpExtTCPLossProbeRecovery + A packet loss is detected and recovered by TLP. +TCP Fast Open +============= +TCP Fast Open is a technology which allows data transfer before the +3-way handshake complete. Please refer the `TCP Fast Open wiki`_ for a +general description. + +.. _TCP Fast Open wiki: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/TCP_Fast_Open + +* TcpExtTCPFastOpenActive + +When the TCP stack receives an ACK packet in the SYN-SENT status, and +the ACK packet acknowledges the data in the SYN packet, the TCP stack +understand the TFO cookie is accepted by the other side, then it +updates this counter. + +* TcpExtTCPFastOpenActiveFail + +This counter indicates that the TCP stack initiated a TCP Fast Open, +but it failed. This counter would be updated in three scenarios: (1) +the other side doesn't acknowledge the data in the SYN packet. (2) The +SYN packet which has the TFO cookie is timeout at least once. (3) +after the 3-way handshake, the retransmission timeout happens +net.ipv4.tcp_retries1 times, because some middle-boxes may black-hole +fast open after the handshake. + +* TcpExtTCPFastOpenPassive + +This counter indicates how many times the TCP stack accepts the fast +open request. + +* TcpExtTCPFastOpenPassiveFail + +This counter indicates how many times the TCP stack rejects the fast +open request. It is caused by either the TFO cookie is invalid or the +TCP stack finds an error during the socket creating process. + +* TcpExtTCPFastOpenListenOverflow + +When the pending fast open request number is larger than +fastopenq->max_qlen, the TCP stack will reject the fast open request +and update this counter. When this counter is updated, the TCP stack +won't update TcpExtTCPFastOpenPassive or +TcpExtTCPFastOpenPassiveFail. The fastopenq->max_qlen is set by the +TCP_FASTOPEN socket operation and it could not be larger than +net.core.somaxconn. For example: + +setsockopt(sfd, SOL_TCP, TCP_FASTOPEN, &qlen, sizeof(qlen)); + +* TcpExtTCPFastOpenCookieReqd + +This counter indicates how many times a client wants to request a TFO +cookie. + +SYN cookies +=========== +SYN cookies are used to mitigate SYN flood, for details, please refer +the `SYN cookies wiki`_. + +.. _SYN cookies wiki: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/SYN_cookies + +* TcpExtSyncookiesSent + +It indicates how many SYN cookies are sent. + +* TcpExtSyncookiesRecv + +How many reply packets of the SYN cookies the TCP stack receives. + +* TcpExtSyncookiesFailed + +The MSS decoded from the SYN cookie is invalid. When this counter is +updated, the received packet won't be treated as a SYN cookie and the +TcpExtSyncookiesRecv counter wont be updated. + +Challenge ACK +============= +For details of challenge ACK, please refer the explaination of +TcpExtTCPACKSkippedChallenge. + +* TcpExtTCPChallengeACK + +The number of challenge acks sent. + +* TcpExtTCPSYNChallenge + +The number of challenge acks sent in response to SYN packets. After +updates this counter, the TCP stack might send a challenge ACK and +update the TcpExtTCPChallengeACK counter, or it might also skip to +send the challenge and update the TcpExtTCPACKSkippedChallenge. + +prune +===== +When a socket is under memory pressure, the TCP stack will try to +reclaim memory from the receiving queue and out of order queue. One of +the reclaiming method is 'collapse', which means allocate a big sbk, +copy the contiguous skbs to the single big skb, and free these +contiguous skbs. + +* TcpExtPruneCalled + +The TCP stack tries to reclaim memory for a socket. After updates this +counter, the TCP stack will try to collapse the out of order queue and +the receiving queue. If the memory is still not enough, the TCP stack +will try to discard packets from the out of order queue (and update the +TcpExtOfoPruned counter) + +* TcpExtOfoPruned + +The TCP stack tries to discard packet on the out of order queue. + +* TcpExtRcvPruned + +After 'collapse' and discard packets from the out of order queue, if +the actually used memory is still larger than the max allowed memory, +this counter will be updated. It means the 'prune' fails. + +* TcpExtTCPRcvCollapsed + +This counter indicates how many skbs are freed during 'collapse'. + examples -======= +======== ping test --------- +--------- Run the ping command against the public dns server 8.8.8.8:: nstatuser@nstat-a:~$ ping 8.8.8.8 -c 1 @@ -831,7 +1070,7 @@ and its corresponding Echo Reply packet are constructed by: So the IpExtInOctets and IpExtOutOctets are 20+16+48=84. tcp 3-way handshake ------------------- +------------------- On server side, we run:: nstatuser@nstat-b:~$ nc -lknv 0.0.0.0 9000 @@ -873,7 +1112,7 @@ ACK, so client sent 2 packets, received 1 packet, TcpInSegs increased 1, TcpOutSegs increased 2. TCP normal traffic ------------------ +------------------ Run nc on server:: nstatuser@nstat-b:~$ nc -lkv 0.0.0.0 9000 @@ -996,7 +1235,7 @@ and the packet received from client qualified for fast path, so it was counted into 'TcpExtTCPHPHits'. TcpExtTCPAbortOnClose --------------------- +--------------------- On the server side, we run below python script:: import socket @@ -1030,7 +1269,7 @@ If we run tcpdump on the server side, we could find the server sent a RST after we type Ctrl-C. TcpExtTCPAbortOnMemory and TcpExtTCPAbortOnTimeout ------------------------------------------------ +--------------------------------------------------- Below is an example which let the orphan socket count be higher than net.ipv4.tcp_max_orphans. Change tcp_max_orphans to a smaller value on client:: @@ -1152,7 +1391,7 @@ FIN_WAIT_1 state finally. So we wait for a few minutes, we could find TcpExtTCPAbortOnTimeout 10 0.0 TcpExtTCPAbortOnLinger ---------------------- +---------------------- The server side code:: nstatuser@nstat-b:~$ cat server_linger.py @@ -1197,7 +1436,7 @@ After run client_linger.py, check the output of nstat:: TcpExtTCPAbortOnLinger 1 0.0 TcpExtTCPRcvCoalesce -------------------- +-------------------- On the server, we run a program which listen on TCP port 9000, but doesn't read any data:: @@ -1257,7 +1496,7 @@ the receiving queue. So the TCP layer merged the two packets, and we could find the TcpExtTCPRcvCoalesce increased 1. TcpExtListenOverflows and TcpExtListenDrops ----------------------------------------- +------------------------------------------- On server, run the nc command, listen on port 9000:: nstatuser@nstat-b:~$ nc -lkv 0.0.0.0 9000 @@ -1305,7 +1544,7 @@ TcpExtListenOverflows and TcpExtListenDrops would be larger, because the SYN of the 4th nc was dropped, the client was retrying. IpInAddrErrors, IpExtInNoRoutes and IpOutNoRoutes ----------------------------------------------- +------------------------------------------------- server A IP address: 192.168.122.250 server B IP address: 192.168.122.251 Prepare on server A, add a route to server B:: @@ -1400,7 +1639,7 @@ a route for the 8.8.8.8 IP address, so server B increased IpOutNoRoutes. TcpExtTCPACKSkippedSynRecv ------------------------- +-------------------------- In this test, we send 3 same SYN packets from client to server. The first SYN will let server create a socket, set it to Syn-Recv status, and reply a SYN/ACK. The second SYN will let server reply the SYN/ACK @@ -1448,7 +1687,7 @@ Check snmp cunter on nstat-b:: As we expected, TcpExtTCPACKSkippedSynRecv is 1. TcpExtTCPACKSkippedPAWS ----------------------- +----------------------- To trigger PAWS, we could send an old SYN. On nstat-b, let nc listen on port 9000:: @@ -1485,7 +1724,7 @@ failed, the nstat-b replied an ACK for the first SYN, skipped the ACK for the second SYN, and updated TcpExtTCPACKSkippedPAWS. TcpExtTCPACKSkippedSeq --------------------- +---------------------- To trigger TcpExtTCPACKSkippedSeq, we send packets which have valid timestamp (to pass PAWS check) but the sequence number is out of window. The linux TCP stack would avoid to skip if the packet has diff --git a/Documentation/networking/switchdev.txt b/Documentation/networking/switchdev.txt index 82236a17b5e6..86174ce8cd13 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/switchdev.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/switchdev.txt @@ -92,11 +92,11 @@ device. Switch ID ^^^^^^^^^ -The switchdev driver must implement the switchdev op switchdev_port_attr_get -for SWITCHDEV_ATTR_ID_PORT_PARENT_ID for each port netdev, returning the same -physical ID for each port of a switch. The ID must be unique between switches -on the same system. The ID does not need to be unique between switches on -different systems. +The switchdev driver must implement the net_device operation +ndo_get_port_parent_id for each port netdev, returning the same physical ID for +each port of a switch. The ID must be unique between switches on the same +system. The ID does not need to be unique between switches on different +systems. The switch ID is used to locate ports on a switch and to know if aggregated ports belong to the same switch. @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ The switch device will learn/forget source MAC address/VLAN on ingress packets and notify the switch driver of the mac/vlan/port tuples. The switch driver, in turn, will notify the bridge driver using the switchdev notifier call: - err = call_switchdev_notifiers(val, dev, info); + err = call_switchdev_notifiers(val, dev, info, extack); Where val is SWITCHDEV_FDB_ADD when learning and SWITCHDEV_FDB_DEL when forgetting, and info points to a struct switchdev_notifier_fdb_info. On @@ -232,10 +232,8 @@ Learning_sync attribute enables syncing of the learned/forgotten FDB entry to the bridge's FDB. It's possible, but not optimal, to enable learning on the device port and on the bridge port, and disable learning_sync. -To support learning and learning_sync port attributes, the driver implements -switchdev op switchdev_port_attr_get/set for -SWITCHDEV_ATTR_PORT_ID_BRIDGE_FLAGS. The driver should initialize the attributes -to the hardware defaults. +To support learning, the driver implements switchdev op +switchdev_port_attr_set for SWITCHDEV_ATTR_PORT_ID_{PRE}_BRIDGE_FLAGS. FDB Ageing ^^^^^^^^^^ @@ -373,22 +371,3 @@ The driver can monitor for updates to arp_tbl using the netevent notifier NETEVENT_NEIGH_UPDATE. The device can be programmed with resolved nexthops for the routes as arp_tbl updates. The driver implements ndo_neigh_destroy to know when arp_tbl neighbor entries are purged from the port. - -Transaction item queue -^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ - -For switchdev ops attr_set and obj_add, there is a 2 phase transaction model -used. First phase is to "prepare" anything needed, including various checks, -memory allocation, etc. The goal is to handle the stuff that is not unlikely -to fail here. The second phase is to "commit" the actual changes. - -Switchdev provides an infrastructure for sharing items (for example memory -allocations) between the two phases. - -The object created by a driver in "prepare" phase and it is queued up by: -switchdev_trans_item_enqueue() -During the "commit" phase, the driver gets the object by: -switchdev_trans_item_dequeue() - -If a transaction is aborted during "prepare" phase, switchdev code will handle -cleanup of the queued-up objects. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/timestamping.txt b/Documentation/networking/timestamping.txt index 9d1432e0aaa8..bbdaf8990031 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/timestamping.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/timestamping.txt @@ -6,11 +6,21 @@ The interfaces for receiving network packages timestamps are: * SO_TIMESTAMP Generates a timestamp for each incoming packet in (not necessarily monotonic) system time. Reports the timestamp via recvmsg() in a - control message as struct timeval (usec resolution). + control message in usec resolution. + SO_TIMESTAMP is defined as SO_TIMESTAMP_NEW or SO_TIMESTAMP_OLD + based on the architecture type and time_t representation of libc. + Control message format is in struct __kernel_old_timeval for + SO_TIMESTAMP_OLD and in struct __kernel_sock_timeval for + SO_TIMESTAMP_NEW options respectively. * SO_TIMESTAMPNS Same timestamping mechanism as SO_TIMESTAMP, but reports the - timestamp as struct timespec (nsec resolution). + timestamp as struct timespec in nsec resolution. + SO_TIMESTAMPNS is defined as SO_TIMESTAMPNS_NEW or SO_TIMESTAMPNS_OLD + based on the architecture type and time_t representation of libc. + Control message format is in struct timespec for SO_TIMESTAMPNS_OLD + and in struct __kernel_timespec for SO_TIMESTAMPNS_NEW options + respectively. * IP_MULTICAST_LOOP + SO_TIMESTAMP[NS] Only for multicast:approximate transmit timestamp obtained by @@ -22,7 +32,7 @@ The interfaces for receiving network packages timestamps are: timestamps for stream sockets. -1.1 SO_TIMESTAMP: +1.1 SO_TIMESTAMP (also SO_TIMESTAMP_OLD and SO_TIMESTAMP_NEW): This socket option enables timestamping of datagrams on the reception path. Because the destination socket, if any, is not known early in @@ -31,15 +41,25 @@ same is true for all early receive timestamp options. For interface details, see `man 7 socket`. +Always use SO_TIMESTAMP_NEW timestamp to always get timestamp in +struct __kernel_sock_timeval format. -1.2 SO_TIMESTAMPNS: +SO_TIMESTAMP_OLD returns incorrect timestamps after the year 2038 +on 32 bit machines. + +1.2 SO_TIMESTAMPNS (also SO_TIMESTAMPNS_OLD and SO_TIMESTAMPNS_NEW): This option is identical to SO_TIMESTAMP except for the returned data type. Its struct timespec allows for higher resolution (ns) timestamps than the timeval of SO_TIMESTAMP (ms). +Always use SO_TIMESTAMPNS_NEW timestamp to always get timestamp in +struct __kernel_timespec format. + +SO_TIMESTAMPNS_OLD returns incorrect timestamps after the year 2038 +on 32 bit machines. -1.3 SO_TIMESTAMPING: +1.3 SO_TIMESTAMPING (also SO_TIMESTAMPING_OLD and SO_TIMESTAMPING_NEW): Supports multiple types of timestamp requests. As a result, this socket option takes a bitmap of flags, not a boolean. In @@ -323,10 +343,23 @@ SO_TIMESTAMP and SO_TIMESTAMPNS records can be retrieved. These timestamps are returned in a control message with cmsg_level SOL_SOCKET, cmsg_type SCM_TIMESTAMPING, and payload of type +For SO_TIMESTAMPING_OLD: + struct scm_timestamping { struct timespec ts[3]; }; +For SO_TIMESTAMPING_NEW: + +struct scm_timestamping64 { + struct __kernel_timespec ts[3]; + +Always use SO_TIMESTAMPING_NEW timestamp to always get timestamp in +struct scm_timestamping64 format. + +SO_TIMESTAMPING_OLD returns incorrect timestamps after the year 2038 +on 32 bit machines. + The structure can return up to three timestamps. This is a legacy feature. At least one field is non-zero at any time. Most timestamps are passed in ts[0]. Hardware timestamps are passed in ts[2]. diff --git a/Documentation/power/energy-model.txt b/Documentation/power/energy-model.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a2b0ae4c76bd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/power/energy-model.txt @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ + ==================== + Energy Model of CPUs + ==================== + +1. Overview +----------- + +The Energy Model (EM) framework serves as an interface between drivers knowing +the power consumed by CPUs at various performance levels, and the kernel +subsystems willing to use that information to make energy-aware decisions. + +The source of the information about the power consumed by CPUs can vary greatly +from one platform to another. These power costs can be estimated using +devicetree data in some cases. In others, the firmware will know better. +Alternatively, userspace might be best positioned. And so on. In order to avoid +each and every client subsystem to re-implement support for each and every +possible source of information on its own, the EM framework intervenes as an +abstraction layer which standardizes the format of power cost tables in the +kernel, hence enabling to avoid redundant work. + +The figure below depicts an example of drivers (Arm-specific here, but the +approach is applicable to any architecture) providing power costs to the EM +framework, and interested clients reading the data from it. + + +---------------+ +-----------------+ +---------------+ + | Thermal (IPA) | | Scheduler (EAS) | | Other | + +---------------+ +-----------------+ +---------------+ + | | em_pd_energy() | + | | em_cpu_get() | + +---------+ | +---------+ + | | | + v v v + +---------------------+ + | Energy Model | + | Framework | + +---------------------+ + ^ ^ ^ + | | | em_register_perf_domain() + +----------+ | +---------+ + | | | + +---------------+ +---------------+ +--------------+ + | cpufreq-dt | | arm_scmi | | Other | + +---------------+ +---------------+ +--------------+ + ^ ^ ^ + | | | + +--------------+ +---------------+ +--------------+ + | Device Tree | | Firmware | | ? | + +--------------+ +---------------+ +--------------+ + +The EM framework manages power cost tables per 'performance domain' in the +system. A performance domain is a group of CPUs whose performance is scaled +together. Performance domains generally have a 1-to-1 mapping with CPUFreq +policies. All CPUs in a performance domain are required to have the same +micro-architecture. CPUs in different performance domains can have different +micro-architectures. + + +2. Core APIs +------------ + + 2.1 Config options + +CONFIG_ENERGY_MODEL must be enabled to use the EM framework. + + + 2.2 Registration of performance domains + +Drivers are expected to register performance domains into the EM framework by +calling the following API: + + int em_register_perf_domain(cpumask_t *span, unsigned int nr_states, + struct em_data_callback *cb); + +Drivers must specify the CPUs of the performance domains using the cpumask +argument, and provide a callback function returning <frequency, power> tuples +for each capacity state. The callback function provided by the driver is free +to fetch data from any relevant location (DT, firmware, ...), and by any mean +deemed necessary. See Section 3. for an example of driver implementing this +callback, and kernel/power/energy_model.c for further documentation on this +API. + + + 2.3 Accessing performance domains + +Subsystems interested in the energy model of a CPU can retrieve it using the +em_cpu_get() API. The energy model tables are allocated once upon creation of +the performance domains, and kept in memory untouched. + +The energy consumed by a performance domain can be estimated using the +em_pd_energy() API. The estimation is performed assuming that the schedutil +CPUfreq governor is in use. + +More details about the above APIs can be found in include/linux/energy_model.h. + + +3. Example driver +----------------- + +This section provides a simple example of a CPUFreq driver registering a +performance domain in the Energy Model framework using the (fake) 'foo' +protocol. The driver implements an est_power() function to be provided to the +EM framework. + + -> drivers/cpufreq/foo_cpufreq.c + +01 static int est_power(unsigned long *mW, unsigned long *KHz, int cpu) +02 { +03 long freq, power; +04 +05 /* Use the 'foo' protocol to ceil the frequency */ +06 freq = foo_get_freq_ceil(cpu, *KHz); +07 if (freq < 0); +08 return freq; +09 +10 /* Estimate the power cost for the CPU at the relevant freq. */ +11 power = foo_estimate_power(cpu, freq); +12 if (power < 0); +13 return power; +14 +15 /* Return the values to the EM framework */ +16 *mW = power; +17 *KHz = freq; +18 +19 return 0; +20 } +21 +22 static int foo_cpufreq_init(struct cpufreq_policy *policy) +23 { +24 struct em_data_callback em_cb = EM_DATA_CB(est_power); +25 int nr_opp, ret; +26 +27 /* Do the actual CPUFreq init work ... */ +28 ret = do_foo_cpufreq_init(policy); +29 if (ret) +30 return ret; +31 +32 /* Find the number of OPPs for this policy */ +33 nr_opp = foo_get_nr_opp(policy); +34 +35 /* And register the new performance domain */ +36 em_register_perf_domain(policy->cpus, nr_opp, &em_cb); +37 +38 return 0; +39 } diff --git a/Documentation/process/4.Coding.rst b/Documentation/process/4.Coding.rst index cfe264889447..4b7a5ab3cec1 100644 --- a/Documentation/process/4.Coding.rst +++ b/Documentation/process/4.Coding.rst @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ features; most of these are found in the "kernel hacking" submenu. Several of these options should be turned on for any kernel used for development or testing purposes. In particular, you should turn on: - - ENABLE_WARN_DEPRECATED, ENABLE_MUST_CHECK, and FRAME_WARN to get an + - ENABLE_MUST_CHECK and FRAME_WARN to get an extra set of warnings for problems like the use of deprecated interfaces or ignoring an important return value from a function. The output generated by these warnings can be verbose, but one need not worry about diff --git a/Documentation/process/applying-patches.rst b/Documentation/process/applying-patches.rst index dc2ddc345044..fbb9297e6360 100644 --- a/Documentation/process/applying-patches.rst +++ b/Documentation/process/applying-patches.rst @@ -216,14 +216,14 @@ You can use the ``interdiff`` program (http://cyberelk.net/tim/patchutils/) to generate a patch representing the differences between two patches and then apply the result. -This will let you move from something like 4.7.2 to 4.7.3 in a single +This will let you move from something like 5.7.2 to 5.7.3 in a single step. The -z flag to interdiff will even let you feed it patches in gzip or bzip2 compressed form directly without the use of zcat or bzcat or manual decompression. -Here's how you'd go from 4.7.2 to 4.7.3 in a single step:: +Here's how you'd go from 5.7.2 to 5.7.3 in a single step:: - interdiff -z ../patch-4.7.2.gz ../patch-4.7.3.gz | patch -p1 + interdiff -z ../patch-5.7.2.gz ../patch-5.7.3.gz | patch -p1 Although interdiff may save you a step or two you are generally advised to do the additional steps since interdiff can get things wrong in some cases. @@ -245,62 +245,67 @@ The patches are available at http://kernel.org/ Most recent patches are linked from the front page, but they also have specific homes. -The 4.x.y (-stable) and 4.x patches live at +The 5.x.y (-stable) and 5.x patches live at - https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/v4.x/ + https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/v5.x/ -The -rc patches live at +The -rc patches are not stored on the webserver but are generated on +demand from git tags such as - https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/v4.x/testing/ + https://git.kernel.org/torvalds/p/v5.1-rc1/v5.0 +The stable -rc patches live at -The 4.x kernels + https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/v5.x/stable-review/ + + +The 5.x kernels =============== These are the base stable releases released by Linus. The highest numbered release is the most recent. If regressions or other serious flaws are found, then a -stable fix patch -will be released (see below) on top of this base. Once a new 4.x base +will be released (see below) on top of this base. Once a new 5.x base kernel is released, a patch is made available that is a delta between the -previous 4.x kernel and the new one. +previous 5.x kernel and the new one. -To apply a patch moving from 4.6 to 4.7, you'd do the following (note -that such patches do **NOT** apply on top of 4.x.y kernels but on top of the -base 4.x kernel -- if you need to move from 4.x.y to 4.x+1 you need to -first revert the 4.x.y patch). +To apply a patch moving from 5.6 to 5.7, you'd do the following (note +that such patches do **NOT** apply on top of 5.x.y kernels but on top of the +base 5.x kernel -- if you need to move from 5.x.y to 5.x+1 you need to +first revert the 5.x.y patch). Here are some examples:: - # moving from 4.6 to 4.7 + # moving from 5.6 to 5.7 - $ cd ~/linux-4.6 # change to kernel source dir - $ patch -p1 < ../patch-4.7 # apply the 4.7 patch + $ cd ~/linux-5.6 # change to kernel source dir + $ patch -p1 < ../patch-5.7 # apply the 5.7 patch $ cd .. - $ mv linux-4.6 linux-4.7 # rename source dir + $ mv linux-5.6 linux-5.7 # rename source dir - # moving from 4.6.1 to 4.7 + # moving from 5.6.1 to 5.7 - $ cd ~/linux-4.6.1 # change to kernel source dir - $ patch -p1 -R < ../patch-4.6.1 # revert the 4.6.1 patch - # source dir is now 4.6 - $ patch -p1 < ../patch-4.7 # apply new 4.7 patch + $ cd ~/linux-5.6.1 # change to kernel source dir + $ patch -p1 -R < ../patch-5.6.1 # revert the 5.6.1 patch + # source dir is now 5.6 + $ patch -p1 < ../patch-5.7 # apply new 5.7 patch $ cd .. - $ mv linux-4.6.1 linux-4.7 # rename source dir + $ mv linux-5.6.1 linux-5.7 # rename source dir -The 4.x.y kernels +The 5.x.y kernels ================= Kernels with 3-digit versions are -stable kernels. They contain small(ish) critical fixes for security problems or significant regressions discovered -in a given 4.x kernel. +in a given 5.x kernel. This is the recommended branch for users who want the most recent stable kernel and are not interested in helping test development/experimental versions. -If no 4.x.y kernel is available, then the highest numbered 4.x kernel is +If no 5.x.y kernel is available, then the highest numbered 5.x kernel is the current stable kernel. .. note:: @@ -308,23 +313,23 @@ the current stable kernel. The -stable team usually do make incremental patches available as well as patches against the latest mainline release, but I only cover the non-incremental ones below. The incremental ones can be found at - https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/v4.x/incr/ + https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/v5.x/incr/ -These patches are not incremental, meaning that for example the 4.7.3 -patch does not apply on top of the 4.7.2 kernel source, but rather on top -of the base 4.7 kernel source. +These patches are not incremental, meaning that for example the 5.7.3 +patch does not apply on top of the 5.7.2 kernel source, but rather on top +of the base 5.7 kernel source. -So, in order to apply the 4.7.3 patch to your existing 4.7.2 kernel -source you have to first back out the 4.7.2 patch (so you are left with a -base 4.7 kernel source) and then apply the new 4.7.3 patch. +So, in order to apply the 5.7.3 patch to your existing 5.7.2 kernel +source you have to first back out the 5.7.2 patch (so you are left with a +base 5.7 kernel source) and then apply the new 5.7.3 patch. Here's a small example:: - $ cd ~/linux-4.7.2 # change to the kernel source dir - $ patch -p1 -R < ../patch-4.7.2 # revert the 4.7.2 patch - $ patch -p1 < ../patch-4.7.3 # apply the new 4.7.3 patch + $ cd ~/linux-5.7.2 # change to the kernel source dir + $ patch -p1 -R < ../patch-5.7.2 # revert the 5.7.2 patch + $ patch -p1 < ../patch-5.7.3 # apply the new 5.7.3 patch $ cd .. - $ mv linux-4.7.2 linux-4.7.3 # rename the kernel source dir + $ mv linux-5.7.2 linux-5.7.3 # rename the kernel source dir The -rc kernels =============== @@ -343,38 +348,38 @@ This is a good branch to run for people who want to help out testing development kernels but do not want to run some of the really experimental stuff (such people should see the sections about -next and -mm kernels below). -The -rc patches are not incremental, they apply to a base 4.x kernel, just -like the 4.x.y patches described above. The kernel version before the -rcN +The -rc patches are not incremental, they apply to a base 5.x kernel, just +like the 5.x.y patches described above. The kernel version before the -rcN suffix denotes the version of the kernel that this -rc kernel will eventually turn into. -So, 4.8-rc5 means that this is the fifth release candidate for the 4.8 -kernel and the patch should be applied on top of the 4.7 kernel source. +So, 5.8-rc5 means that this is the fifth release candidate for the 5.8 +kernel and the patch should be applied on top of the 5.7 kernel source. Here are 3 examples of how to apply these patches:: - # first an example of moving from 4.7 to 4.8-rc3 + # first an example of moving from 5.7 to 5.8-rc3 - $ cd ~/linux-4.7 # change to the 4.7 source dir - $ patch -p1 < ../patch-4.8-rc3 # apply the 4.8-rc3 patch + $ cd ~/linux-5.7 # change to the 5.7 source dir + $ patch -p1 < ../patch-5.8-rc3 # apply the 5.8-rc3 patch $ cd .. - $ mv linux-4.7 linux-4.8-rc3 # rename the source dir + $ mv linux-5.7 linux-5.8-rc3 # rename the source dir - # now let's move from 4.8-rc3 to 4.8-rc5 + # now let's move from 5.8-rc3 to 5.8-rc5 - $ cd ~/linux-4.8-rc3 # change to the 4.8-rc3 dir - $ patch -p1 -R < ../patch-4.8-rc3 # revert the 4.8-rc3 patch - $ patch -p1 < ../patch-4.8-rc5 # apply the new 4.8-rc5 patch + $ cd ~/linux-5.8-rc3 # change to the 5.8-rc3 dir + $ patch -p1 -R < ../patch-5.8-rc3 # revert the 5.8-rc3 patch + $ patch -p1 < ../patch-5.8-rc5 # apply the new 5.8-rc5 patch $ cd .. - $ mv linux-4.8-rc3 linux-4.8-rc5 # rename the source dir + $ mv linux-5.8-rc3 linux-5.8-rc5 # rename the source dir - # finally let's try and move from 4.7.3 to 4.8-rc5 + # finally let's try and move from 5.7.3 to 5.8-rc5 - $ cd ~/linux-4.7.3 # change to the kernel source dir - $ patch -p1 -R < ../patch-4.7.3 # revert the 4.7.3 patch - $ patch -p1 < ../patch-4.8-rc5 # apply new 4.8-rc5 patch + $ cd ~/linux-5.7.3 # change to the kernel source dir + $ patch -p1 -R < ../patch-5.7.3 # revert the 5.7.3 patch + $ patch -p1 < ../patch-5.8-rc5 # apply new 5.8-rc5 patch $ cd .. - $ mv linux-4.7.3 linux-4.8-rc5 # rename the kernel source dir + $ mv linux-5.7.3 linux-5.8-rc5 # rename the kernel source dir The -mm patches and the linux-next tree diff --git a/Documentation/process/coding-style.rst b/Documentation/process/coding-style.rst index b78dd680c038..8ea913e99fa1 100644 --- a/Documentation/process/coding-style.rst +++ b/Documentation/process/coding-style.rst @@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ In function prototypes, include parameter names with their data types. Although this is not required by the C language, it is preferred in Linux because it is a simple way to add valuable information for the reader. -Do not use the `extern' keyword with function prototypes as this makes +Do not use the ``extern`` keyword with function prototypes as this makes lines longer and isn't strictly necessary. @@ -595,26 +595,43 @@ values. To do the latter, you can stick the following in your .emacs file: (* (max steps 1) c-basic-offset))) - (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook - (lambda () - ;; Add kernel style - (c-add-style - "linux-tabs-only" - '("linux" (c-offsets-alist - (arglist-cont-nonempty - c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg - c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only)))))) - - (add-hook 'c-mode-hook - (lambda () - (let ((filename (buffer-file-name))) - ;; Enable kernel mode for the appropriate files - (when (and filename - (string-match (expand-file-name "~/src/linux-trees") - filename)) - (setq indent-tabs-mode t) - (setq show-trailing-whitespace t) - (c-set-style "linux-tabs-only"))))) + (dir-locals-set-class-variables + 'linux-kernel + '((c-mode . ( + (c-basic-offset . 8) + (c-label-minimum-indentation . 0) + (c-offsets-alist . ( + (arglist-close . c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only) + (arglist-cont-nonempty . + (c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only)) + (arglist-intro . +) + (brace-list-intro . +) + (c . c-lineup-C-comments) + (case-label . 0) + (comment-intro . c-lineup-comment) + (cpp-define-intro . +) + (cpp-macro . -1000) + (cpp-macro-cont . +) + (defun-block-intro . +) + (else-clause . 0) + (func-decl-cont . +) + (inclass . +) + (inher-cont . c-lineup-multi-inher) + (knr-argdecl-intro . 0) + (label . -1000) + (statement . 0) + (statement-block-intro . +) + (statement-case-intro . +) + (statement-cont . +) + (substatement . +) + )) + (indent-tabs-mode . t) + (show-trailing-whitespace . t) + )))) + + (dir-locals-set-directory-class + (expand-file-name "~/src/linux-trees") + 'linux-kernel) This will make emacs go better with the kernel coding style for C files below ``~/src/linux-trees``. @@ -921,7 +938,37 @@ result. Typical examples would be functions that return pointers; they use NULL or the ERR_PTR mechanism to report failure. -17) Don't re-invent the kernel macros +17) Using bool +-------------- + +The Linux kernel bool type is an alias for the C99 _Bool type. bool values can +only evaluate to 0 or 1, and implicit or explicit conversion to bool +automatically converts the value to true or false. When using bool types the +!! construction is not needed, which eliminates a class of bugs. + +When working with bool values the true and false definitions should be used +instead of 1 and 0. + +bool function return types and stack variables are always fine to use whenever +appropriate. Use of bool is encouraged to improve readability and is often a +better option than 'int' for storing boolean values. + +Do not use bool if cache line layout or size of the value matters, as its size +and alignment varies based on the compiled architecture. Structures that are +optimized for alignment and size should not use bool. + +If a structure has many true/false values, consider consolidating them into a +bitfield with 1 bit members, or using an appropriate fixed width type, such as +u8. + +Similarly for function arguments, many true/false values can be consolidated +into a single bitwise 'flags' argument and 'flags' can often be a more +readable alternative if the call-sites have naked true/false constants. + +Otherwise limited use of bool in structures and arguments can improve +readability. + +18) Don't re-invent the kernel macros ------------------------------------- The header file include/linux/kernel.h contains a number of macros that @@ -944,7 +991,7 @@ need them. Feel free to peruse that header file to see what else is already defined that you shouldn't reproduce in your code. -18) Editor modelines and other cruft +19) Editor modelines and other cruft ------------------------------------ Some editors can interpret configuration information embedded in source files, @@ -978,7 +1025,7 @@ own custom mode, or may have some other magic method for making indentation work correctly. -19) Inline assembly +20) Inline assembly ------------------- In architecture-specific code, you may need to use inline assembly to interface @@ -1010,7 +1057,7 @@ the next instruction in the assembly output: : /* outputs */ : /* inputs */ : /* clobbers */); -20) Conditional Compilation +21) Conditional Compilation --------------------------- Wherever possible, don't use preprocessor conditionals (#if, #ifdef) in .c diff --git a/Documentation/process/howto.rst b/Documentation/process/howto.rst index 58b2f46c4f98..ad2b6c852b95 100644 --- a/Documentation/process/howto.rst +++ b/Documentation/process/howto.rst @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ Cross-Reference project, which is able to present source code in a self-referential, indexed webpage format. An excellent up-to-date repository of the kernel code may be found at: - http://lxr.free-electrons.com/ + https://elixir.bootlin.com/ The development process @@ -235,23 +235,21 @@ Linux kernel development process currently consists of a few different main kernel "branches" and lots of different subsystem-specific kernel branches. These different branches are: - - main 4.x kernel tree - - 4.x.y -stable kernel tree - - 4.x -git kernel patches - - subsystem specific kernel trees and patches - - the 4.x -next kernel tree for integration tests + - Linus's mainline tree + - Various stable trees with multiple major numbers + - Subsystem-specific trees + - linux-next integration testing tree -4.x kernel tree -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Mainline tree +~~~~~~~~~~~~~ -4.x kernels are maintained by Linus Torvalds, and can be found on -https://kernel.org in the pub/linux/kernel/v4.x/ directory. Its development -process is as follows: +Mainline tree are maintained by Linus Torvalds, and can be found at +https://kernel.org or in the repo. Its development process is as follows: - As soon as a new kernel is released a two weeks window is open, during this period of time maintainers can submit big diffs to Linus, usually the patches that have already been included in the - -next kernel for a few weeks. The preferred way to submit big changes + linux-next for a few weeks. The preferred way to submit big changes is using git (the kernel's source management tool, more information can be found at https://git-scm.com/) but plain patches are also just fine. @@ -278,21 +276,19 @@ mailing list about kernel releases: released according to perceived bug status, not according to a preconceived timeline."* -4.x.y -stable kernel tree -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Various stable trees with multiple major numbers +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Kernels with 3-part versions are -stable kernels. They contain relatively small and critical fixes for security problems or significant -regressions discovered in a given 4.x kernel. +regressions discovered in a given major mainline release, with the first +2-part of version number are the same correspondingly. This is the recommended branch for users who want the most recent stable kernel and are not interested in helping test development/experimental versions. -If no 4.x.y kernel is available, then the highest numbered 4.x -kernel is the current stable kernel. - -4.x.y are maintained by the "stable" team <stable@vger.kernel.org>, and +Stable trees are maintained by the "stable" team <stable@vger.kernel.org>, and are released as needs dictate. The normal release period is approximately two weeks, but it can be longer if there are no pressing problems. A security-related problem, instead, can cause a release to happen almost @@ -302,17 +298,8 @@ The file :ref:`Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst <stable_kernel_rule in the kernel tree documents what kinds of changes are acceptable for the -stable tree, and how the release process works. -4.x -git patches -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ - -These are daily snapshots of Linus' kernel tree which are managed in a -git repository (hence the name.) These patches are usually released -daily and represent the current state of Linus' tree. They are more -experimental than -rc kernels since they are generated automatically -without even a cursory glance to see if they are sane. - -Subsystem Specific kernel trees and patches -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Subsystem-specific trees +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ The maintainers of the various kernel subsystems --- and also many kernel subsystem developers --- expose their current state of @@ -336,19 +323,19 @@ revisions to it, and maintainers can mark patches as under review, accepted, or rejected. Most of these patchwork sites are listed at https://patchwork.kernel.org/. -4.x -next kernel tree for integration tests -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +linux-next integration testing tree +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ -Before updates from subsystem trees are merged into the mainline 4.x -tree, they need to be integration-tested. For this purpose, a special +Before updates from subsystem trees are merged into the mainline tree, +they need to be integration-tested. For this purpose, a special testing repository exists into which virtually all subsystem trees are pulled on an almost daily basis: https://git.kernel.org/?p=linux/kernel/git/next/linux-next.git -This way, the -next kernel gives a summary outlook onto what will be +This way, the linux-next gives a summary outlook onto what will be expected to go into the mainline kernel at the next merge period. -Adventurous testers are very welcome to runtime-test the -next kernel. +Adventurous testers are very welcome to runtime-test the linux-next. Bug Reporting diff --git a/Documentation/process/kernel-docs.rst b/Documentation/process/kernel-docs.rst index 3fb28de556e4..ab12dddc773e 100644 --- a/Documentation/process/kernel-docs.rst +++ b/Documentation/process/kernel-docs.rst @@ -565,7 +565,7 @@ Miscellaneous * Name: **Cross-Referencing Linux** - :URL: http://lxr.free-electrons.com/ + :URL: https://elixir.bootlin.com/ :Keywords: Browsing source code. :Description: Another web-based Linux kernel source code browser. Lots of cross references to variables and functions. You can see diff --git a/Documentation/process/license-rules.rst b/Documentation/process/license-rules.rst index 2bb8c0fc2238..6b09033a8e9e 100644 --- a/Documentation/process/license-rules.rst +++ b/Documentation/process/license-rules.rst @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ License identifier syntax The SPDX license identifier in kernel files shall be added at the first possible line in a file which can contain a comment. For the majority - or files this is the first line, except for scripts which require the + of files this is the first line, except for scripts which require the '#!PATH_TO_INTERPRETER' in the first line. For those scripts the SPDX identifier goes into the second line. @@ -368,7 +368,69 @@ kernel, can be broken down into: All SPDX license identifiers and exceptions must have a corresponding file -in the LICENSE subdirectories. This is required to allow tool +in the LICENSES subdirectories. This is required to allow tool verification (e.g. checkpatch.pl) and to have the licenses ready to read and extract right from the source, which is recommended by various FOSS organizations, e.g. the `FSFE REUSE initiative <https://reuse.software/>`_. + +_`MODULE_LICENSE` +----------------- + + Loadable kernel modules also require a MODULE_LICENSE() tag. This tag is + neither a replacement for proper source code license information + (SPDX-License-Identifier) nor in any way relevant for expressing or + determining the exact license under which the source code of the module + is provided. + + The sole purpose of this tag is to provide sufficient information + whether the module is free software or proprietary for the kernel + module loader and for user space tools. + + The valid license strings for MODULE_LICENSE() are: + + ============================= ============================================= + "GPL" Module is licensed under GPL version 2. This + does not express any distinction between + GPL-2.0-only or GPL-2.0-or-later. The exact + license information can only be determined + via the license information in the + corresponding source files. + + "GPL v2" Same as "GPL". It exists for historic + reasons. + + "GPL and additional rights" Historical variant of expressing that the + module source is dual licensed under a + GPL v2 variant and MIT license. Please do + not use in new code. + + "Dual MIT/GPL" The correct way of expressing that the + module is dual licensed under a GPL v2 + variant or MIT license choice. + + "Dual BSD/GPL" The module is dual licensed under a GPL v2 + variant or BSD license choice. The exact + variant of the BSD license can only be + determined via the license information + in the corresponding source files. + + "Dual MPL/GPL" The module is dual licensed under a GPL v2 + variant or Mozilla Public License (MPL) + choice. The exact variant of the MPL + license can only be determined via the + license information in the corresponding + source files. + + "Proprietary" The module is under a proprietary license. + This string is solely for proprietary third + party modules and cannot be used for modules + which have their source code in the kernel + tree. Modules tagged that way are tainting + the kernel with the 'P' flag when loaded and + the kernel module loader refuses to link such + modules against symbols which are exported + with EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL(). + ============================= ============================================= + + + diff --git a/Documentation/process/stable-api-nonsense.rst b/Documentation/process/stable-api-nonsense.rst index 24f5aeecee91..a9625ab1fdc2 100644 --- a/Documentation/process/stable-api-nonsense.rst +++ b/Documentation/process/stable-api-nonsense.rst @@ -169,14 +169,13 @@ driver for every different kernel version for every distribution is a nightmare, and trying to keep up with an ever changing kernel interface is also a rough job. -Simple, get your kernel driver into the main kernel tree (remember we -are talking about GPL released drivers here, if your code doesn't fall -under this category, good luck, you are on your own here, you leech -<insert link to leech comment from Andrew and Linus here>.) If your -driver is in the tree, and a kernel interface changes, it will be fixed -up by the person who did the kernel change in the first place. This -ensures that your driver is always buildable, and works over time, with -very little effort on your part. +Simple, get your kernel driver into the main kernel tree (remember we are +talking about drivers released under a GPL-compatible license here, if your +code doesn't fall under this category, good luck, you are on your own here, +you leech). If your driver is in the tree, and a kernel interface changes, +it will be fixed up by the person who did the kernel change in the first +place. This ensures that your driver is always buildable, and works over +time, with very little effort on your part. The very good side effects of having your driver in the main kernel tree are: diff --git a/Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst b/Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst index 0de6f6145cc6..06f743b612c4 100644 --- a/Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst +++ b/Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst @@ -38,6 +38,9 @@ Procedure for submitting patches to the -stable tree - If the patch covers files in net/ or drivers/net please follow netdev stable submission guidelines as described in :ref:`Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.rst <netdev-FAQ>` + after first checking the stable networking queue at + https://patchwork.ozlabs.org/bundle/davem/stable/?series=&submitter=&state=*&q=&archive= + to ensure the requested patch is not already queued up. - Security patches should not be handled (solely) by the -stable review process but should follow the procedures in :ref:`Documentation/admin-guide/security-bugs.rst <securitybugs>`. @@ -98,9 +101,9 @@ text, like this: commit <sha1> upstream. -Additionally, some patches submitted via Option 1 may have additional patch -prerequisites which can be cherry-picked. This can be specified in the following -format in the sign-off area: +Additionally, some patches submitted via :ref:`option_1` may have additional +patch prerequisites which can be cherry-picked. This can be specified in the +following format in the sign-off area: .. code-block:: none diff --git a/Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst b/Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst index 30dc00a364e8..be7d1829c3af 100644 --- a/Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst +++ b/Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst @@ -182,9 +182,11 @@ change five years from now. If your patch fixes a bug in a specific commit, e.g. you found an issue using ``git bisect``, please use the 'Fixes:' tag with the first 12 characters of -the SHA-1 ID, and the one line summary. For example:: +the SHA-1 ID, and the one line summary. Do not split the tag across multiple +lines, tags are exempt from the "wrap at 75 columns" rule in order to simplify +parsing scripts. For example:: - Fixes: e21d2170f366 ("video: remove unnecessary platform_set_drvdata()") + Fixes: 54a4f0239f2e ("KVM: MMU: make kvm_mmu_zap_page() return the number of pages it actually freed") The following ``git config`` settings can be used to add a pretty format for outputting the above style in the ``git log`` or ``git show`` commands:: diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-energy.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-energy.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..197d81f4b836 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-energy.txt @@ -0,0 +1,425 @@ + ======================= + Energy Aware Scheduling + ======================= + +1. Introduction +--------------- + +Energy Aware Scheduling (or EAS) gives the scheduler the ability to predict +the impact of its decisions on the energy consumed by CPUs. EAS relies on an +Energy Model (EM) of the CPUs to select an energy efficient CPU for each task, +with a minimal impact on throughput. This document aims at providing an +introduction on how EAS works, what are the main design decisions behind it, and +details what is needed to get it to run. + +Before going any further, please note that at the time of writing: + + /!\ EAS does not support platforms with symmetric CPU topologies /!\ + +EAS operates only on heterogeneous CPU topologies (such as Arm big.LITTLE) +because this is where the potential for saving energy through scheduling is +the highest. + +The actual EM used by EAS is _not_ maintained by the scheduler, but by a +dedicated framework. For details about this framework and what it provides, +please refer to its documentation (see Documentation/power/energy-model.txt). + + +2. Background and Terminology +----------------------------- + +To make it clear from the start: + - energy = [joule] (resource like a battery on powered devices) + - power = energy/time = [joule/second] = [watt] + +The goal of EAS is to minimize energy, while still getting the job done. That +is, we want to maximize: + + performance [inst/s] + -------------------- + power [W] + +which is equivalent to minimizing: + + energy [J] + ----------- + instruction + +while still getting 'good' performance. It is essentially an alternative +optimization objective to the current performance-only objective for the +scheduler. This alternative considers two objectives: energy-efficiency and +performance. + +The idea behind introducing an EM is to allow the scheduler to evaluate the +implications of its decisions rather than blindly applying energy-saving +techniques that may have positive effects only on some platforms. At the same +time, the EM must be as simple as possible to minimize the scheduler latency +impact. + +In short, EAS changes the way CFS tasks are assigned to CPUs. When it is time +for the scheduler to decide where a task should run (during wake-up), the EM +is used to break the tie between several good CPU candidates and pick the one +that is predicted to yield the best energy consumption without harming the +system's throughput. The predictions made by EAS rely on specific elements of +knowledge about the platform's topology, which include the 'capacity' of CPUs, +and their respective energy costs. + + +3. Topology information +----------------------- + +EAS (as well as the rest of the scheduler) uses the notion of 'capacity' to +differentiate CPUs with different computing throughput. The 'capacity' of a CPU +represents the amount of work it can absorb when running at its highest +frequency compared to the most capable CPU of the system. Capacity values are +normalized in a 1024 range, and are comparable with the utilization signals of +tasks and CPUs computed by the Per-Entity Load Tracking (PELT) mechanism. Thanks +to capacity and utilization values, EAS is able to estimate how big/busy a +task/CPU is, and to take this into consideration when evaluating performance vs +energy trade-offs. The capacity of CPUs is provided via arch-specific code +through the arch_scale_cpu_capacity() callback. + +The rest of platform knowledge used by EAS is directly read from the Energy +Model (EM) framework. The EM of a platform is composed of a power cost table +per 'performance domain' in the system (see Documentation/power/energy-model.txt +for futher details about performance domains). + +The scheduler manages references to the EM objects in the topology code when the +scheduling domains are built, or re-built. For each root domain (rd), the +scheduler maintains a singly linked list of all performance domains intersecting +the current rd->span. Each node in the list contains a pointer to a struct +em_perf_domain as provided by the EM framework. + +The lists are attached to the root domains in order to cope with exclusive +cpuset configurations. Since the boundaries of exclusive cpusets do not +necessarily match those of performance domains, the lists of different root +domains can contain duplicate elements. + +Example 1. + Let us consider a platform with 12 CPUs, split in 3 performance domains + (pd0, pd4 and pd8), organized as follows: + + CPUs: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 + PDs: |--pd0--|--pd4--|---pd8---| + RDs: |----rd1----|-----rd2-----| + + Now, consider that userspace decided to split the system with two + exclusive cpusets, hence creating two independent root domains, each + containing 6 CPUs. The two root domains are denoted rd1 and rd2 in the + above figure. Since pd4 intersects with both rd1 and rd2, it will be + present in the linked list '->pd' attached to each of them: + * rd1->pd: pd0 -> pd4 + * rd2->pd: pd4 -> pd8 + + Please note that the scheduler will create two duplicate list nodes for + pd4 (one for each list). However, both just hold a pointer to the same + shared data structure of the EM framework. + +Since the access to these lists can happen concurrently with hotplug and other +things, they are protected by RCU, like the rest of topology structures +manipulated by the scheduler. + +EAS also maintains a static key (sched_energy_present) which is enabled when at +least one root domain meets all conditions for EAS to start. Those conditions +are summarized in Section 6. + + +4. Energy-Aware task placement +------------------------------ + +EAS overrides the CFS task wake-up balancing code. It uses the EM of the +platform and the PELT signals to choose an energy-efficient target CPU during +wake-up balance. When EAS is enabled, select_task_rq_fair() calls +find_energy_efficient_cpu() to do the placement decision. This function looks +for the CPU with the highest spare capacity (CPU capacity - CPU utilization) in +each performance domain since it is the one which will allow us to keep the +frequency the lowest. Then, the function checks if placing the task there could +save energy compared to leaving it on prev_cpu, i.e. the CPU where the task ran +in its previous activation. + +find_energy_efficient_cpu() uses compute_energy() to estimate what will be the +energy consumed by the system if the waking task was migrated. compute_energy() +looks at the current utilization landscape of the CPUs and adjusts it to +'simulate' the task migration. The EM framework provides the em_pd_energy() API +which computes the expected energy consumption of each performance domain for +the given utilization landscape. + +An example of energy-optimized task placement decision is detailed below. + +Example 2. + Let us consider a (fake) platform with 2 independent performance domains + composed of two CPUs each. CPU0 and CPU1 are little CPUs; CPU2 and CPU3 + are big. + + The scheduler must decide where to place a task P whose util_avg = 200 + and prev_cpu = 0. + + The current utilization landscape of the CPUs is depicted on the graph + below. CPUs 0-3 have a util_avg of 400, 100, 600 and 500 respectively + Each performance domain has three Operating Performance Points (OPPs). + The CPU capacity and power cost associated with each OPP is listed in + the Energy Model table. The util_avg of P is shown on the figures + below as 'PP'. + + CPU util. + 1024 - - - - - - - Energy Model + +-----------+-------------+ + | Little | Big | + 768 ============= +-----+-----+------+------+ + | Cap | Pwr | Cap | Pwr | + +-----+-----+------+------+ + 512 =========== - ##- - - - - | 170 | 50 | 512 | 400 | + ## ## | 341 | 150 | 768 | 800 | + 341 -PP - - - - ## ## | 512 | 300 | 1024 | 1700 | + PP ## ## +-----+-----+------+------+ + 170 -## - - - - ## ## + ## ## ## ## + ------------ ------------- + CPU0 CPU1 CPU2 CPU3 + + Current OPP: ===== Other OPP: - - - util_avg (100 each): ## + + + find_energy_efficient_cpu() will first look for the CPUs with the + maximum spare capacity in the two performance domains. In this example, + CPU1 and CPU3. Then it will estimate the energy of the system if P was + placed on either of them, and check if that would save some energy + compared to leaving P on CPU0. EAS assumes that OPPs follow utilization + (which is coherent with the behaviour of the schedutil CPUFreq + governor, see Section 6. for more details on this topic). + + Case 1. P is migrated to CPU1 + ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + + 1024 - - - - - - - + + Energy calculation: + 768 ============= * CPU0: 200 / 341 * 150 = 88 + * CPU1: 300 / 341 * 150 = 131 + * CPU2: 600 / 768 * 800 = 625 + 512 - - - - - - - ##- - - - - * CPU3: 500 / 768 * 800 = 520 + ## ## => total_energy = 1364 + 341 =========== ## ## + PP ## ## + 170 -## - - PP- ## ## + ## ## ## ## + ------------ ------------- + CPU0 CPU1 CPU2 CPU3 + + + Case 2. P is migrated to CPU3 + ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + + 1024 - - - - - - - + + Energy calculation: + 768 ============= * CPU0: 200 / 341 * 150 = 88 + * CPU1: 100 / 341 * 150 = 43 + PP * CPU2: 600 / 768 * 800 = 625 + 512 - - - - - - - ##- - -PP - * CPU3: 700 / 768 * 800 = 729 + ## ## => total_energy = 1485 + 341 =========== ## ## + ## ## + 170 -## - - - - ## ## + ## ## ## ## + ------------ ------------- + CPU0 CPU1 CPU2 CPU3 + + + Case 3. P stays on prev_cpu / CPU 0 + ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + + 1024 - - - - - - - + + Energy calculation: + 768 ============= * CPU0: 400 / 512 * 300 = 234 + * CPU1: 100 / 512 * 300 = 58 + * CPU2: 600 / 768 * 800 = 625 + 512 =========== - ##- - - - - * CPU3: 500 / 768 * 800 = 520 + ## ## => total_energy = 1437 + 341 -PP - - - - ## ## + PP ## ## + 170 -## - - - - ## ## + ## ## ## ## + ------------ ------------- + CPU0 CPU1 CPU2 CPU3 + + + From these calculations, the Case 1 has the lowest total energy. So CPU 1 + is be the best candidate from an energy-efficiency standpoint. + +Big CPUs are generally more power hungry than the little ones and are thus used +mainly when a task doesn't fit the littles. However, little CPUs aren't always +necessarily more energy-efficient than big CPUs. For some systems, the high OPPs +of the little CPUs can be less energy-efficient than the lowest OPPs of the +bigs, for example. So, if the little CPUs happen to have enough utilization at +a specific point in time, a small task waking up at that moment could be better +of executing on the big side in order to save energy, even though it would fit +on the little side. + +And even in the case where all OPPs of the big CPUs are less energy-efficient +than those of the little, using the big CPUs for a small task might still, under +specific conditions, save energy. Indeed, placing a task on a little CPU can +result in raising the OPP of the entire performance domain, and that will +increase the cost of the tasks already running there. If the waking task is +placed on a big CPU, its own execution cost might be higher than if it was +running on a little, but it won't impact the other tasks of the little CPUs +which will keep running at a lower OPP. So, when considering the total energy +consumed by CPUs, the extra cost of running that one task on a big core can be +smaller than the cost of raising the OPP on the little CPUs for all the other +tasks. + +The examples above would be nearly impossible to get right in a generic way, and +for all platforms, without knowing the cost of running at different OPPs on all +CPUs of the system. Thanks to its EM-based design, EAS should cope with them +correctly without too many troubles. However, in order to ensure a minimal +impact on throughput for high-utilization scenarios, EAS also implements another +mechanism called 'over-utilization'. + + +5. Over-utilization +------------------- + +From a general standpoint, the use-cases where EAS can help the most are those +involving a light/medium CPU utilization. Whenever long CPU-bound tasks are +being run, they will require all of the available CPU capacity, and there isn't +much that can be done by the scheduler to save energy without severly harming +throughput. In order to avoid hurting performance with EAS, CPUs are flagged as +'over-utilized' as soon as they are used at more than 80% of their compute +capacity. As long as no CPUs are over-utilized in a root domain, load balancing +is disabled and EAS overridess the wake-up balancing code. EAS is likely to load +the most energy efficient CPUs of the system more than the others if that can be +done without harming throughput. So, the load-balancer is disabled to prevent +it from breaking the energy-efficient task placement found by EAS. It is safe to +do so when the system isn't overutilized since being below the 80% tipping point +implies that: + + a. there is some idle time on all CPUs, so the utilization signals used by + EAS are likely to accurately represent the 'size' of the various tasks + in the system; + b. all tasks should already be provided with enough CPU capacity, + regardless of their nice values; + c. since there is spare capacity all tasks must be blocking/sleeping + regularly and balancing at wake-up is sufficient. + +As soon as one CPU goes above the 80% tipping point, at least one of the three +assumptions above becomes incorrect. In this scenario, the 'overutilized' flag +is raised for the entire root domain, EAS is disabled, and the load-balancer is +re-enabled. By doing so, the scheduler falls back onto load-based algorithms for +wake-up and load balance under CPU-bound conditions. This provides a better +respect of the nice values of tasks. + +Since the notion of overutilization largely relies on detecting whether or not +there is some idle time in the system, the CPU capacity 'stolen' by higher +(than CFS) scheduling classes (as well as IRQ) must be taken into account. As +such, the detection of overutilization accounts for the capacity used not only +by CFS tasks, but also by the other scheduling classes and IRQ. + + +6. Dependencies and requirements for EAS +---------------------------------------- + +Energy Aware Scheduling depends on the CPUs of the system having specific +hardware properties and on other features of the kernel being enabled. This +section lists these dependencies and provides hints as to how they can be met. + + + 6.1 - Asymmetric CPU topology + +As mentioned in the introduction, EAS is only supported on platforms with +asymmetric CPU topologies for now. This requirement is checked at run-time by +looking for the presence of the SD_ASYM_CPUCAPACITY flag when the scheduling +domains are built. + +The flag is set/cleared automatically by the scheduler topology code whenever +there are CPUs with different capacities in a root domain. The capacities of +CPUs are provided by arch-specific code through the arch_scale_cpu_capacity() +callback. As an example, arm and arm64 share an implementation of this callback +which uses a combination of CPUFreq data and device-tree bindings to compute the +capacity of CPUs (see drivers/base/arch_topology.c for more details). + +So, in order to use EAS on your platform your architecture must implement the +arch_scale_cpu_capacity() callback, and some of the CPUs must have a lower +capacity than others. + +Please note that EAS is not fundamentally incompatible with SMP, but no +significant savings on SMP platforms have been observed yet. This restriction +could be amended in the future if proven otherwise. + + + 6.2 - Energy Model presence + +EAS uses the EM of a platform to estimate the impact of scheduling decisions on +energy. So, your platform must provide power cost tables to the EM framework in +order to make EAS start. To do so, please refer to documentation of the +independent EM framework in Documentation/power/energy-model.txt. + +Please also note that the scheduling domains need to be re-built after the +EM has been registered in order to start EAS. + + + 6.3 - Energy Model complexity + +The task wake-up path is very latency-sensitive. When the EM of a platform is +too complex (too many CPUs, too many performance domains, too many performance +states, ...), the cost of using it in the wake-up path can become prohibitive. +The energy-aware wake-up algorithm has a complexity of: + + C = Nd * (Nc + Ns) + +with: Nd the number of performance domains; Nc the number of CPUs; and Ns the +total number of OPPs (ex: for two perf. domains with 4 OPPs each, Ns = 8). + +A complexity check is performed at the root domain level, when scheduling +domains are built. EAS will not start on a root domain if its C happens to be +higher than the completely arbitrary EM_MAX_COMPLEXITY threshold (2048 at the +time of writing). + +If you really want to use EAS but the complexity of your platform's Energy +Model is too high to be used with a single root domain, you're left with only +two possible options: + + 1. split your system into separate, smaller, root domains using exclusive + cpusets and enable EAS locally on each of them. This option has the + benefit to work out of the box but the drawback of preventing load + balance between root domains, which can result in an unbalanced system + overall; + 2. submit patches to reduce the complexity of the EAS wake-up algorithm, + hence enabling it to cope with larger EMs in reasonable time. + + + 6.4 - Schedutil governor + +EAS tries to predict at which OPP will the CPUs be running in the close future +in order to estimate their energy consumption. To do so, it is assumed that OPPs +of CPUs follow their utilization. + +Although it is very difficult to provide hard guarantees regarding the accuracy +of this assumption in practice (because the hardware might not do what it is +told to do, for example), schedutil as opposed to other CPUFreq governors at +least _requests_ frequencies calculated using the utilization signals. +Consequently, the only sane governor to use together with EAS is schedutil, +because it is the only one providing some degree of consistency between +frequency requests and energy predictions. + +Using EAS with any other governor than schedutil is not supported. + + + 6.5 Scale-invariant utilization signals + +In order to make accurate prediction across CPUs and for all performance +states, EAS needs frequency-invariant and CPU-invariant PELT signals. These can +be obtained using the architecture-defined arch_scale{cpu,freq}_capacity() +callbacks. + +Using EAS on a platform that doesn't implement these two callbacks is not +supported. + + + 6.6 Multithreading (SMT) + +EAS in its current form is SMT unaware and is not able to leverage +multithreaded hardware to save energy. EAS considers threads as independent +CPUs, which can actually be counter-productive for both performance and energy. + +EAS on SMT is not supported. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/osd.txt b/Documentation/scsi/osd.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 5a9879bad073..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/scsi/osd.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,197 +0,0 @@ -The OSD Standard -================ -OSD (Object-Based Storage Device) is a T10 SCSI command set that is designed -to provide efficient operation of input/output logical units that manage the -allocation, placement, and accessing of variable-size data-storage containers, -called objects. Objects are intended to contain operating system and application -constructs. Each object has associated attributes attached to it, which are -integral part of the object and provide metadata about the object. The standard -defines some common obligatory attributes, but user attributes can be added as -needed. - -See: http://www.t10.org/ftp/t10/drafts/osd2/ for the latest draft for OSD 2 -or search the web for "OSD SCSI" - -OSD in the Linux Kernel -======================= -osd-initiator: - The main component of OSD in Kernel is the osd-initiator library. Its main -user is intended to be the pNFS-over-objects layout driver, which uses objects -as its back-end data storage. Other clients are the other osd parts listed below. - -osd-uld: - This is a SCSI ULD that registers for OSD type devices and provides a testing -platform, both for the in-kernel initiator as well as connected targets. It -currently has no useful user-mode API, though it could have if need be. - -exofs: - Is an OSD based Linux file system. It uses the osd-initiator and osd-uld, -to export a usable file system for users. -See Documentation/filesystems/exofs.txt for more details - -osd target: - There are no current plans for an OSD target implementation in kernel. For all -needs, a user-mode target that is based on the scsi tgt target framework is -available from Ohio Supercomputer Center (OSC) at: -http://www.open-osd.org/bin/view/Main/OscOsdProject -There are several other target implementations. See http://open-osd.org for more -links. - -Files and Folders -================= -This is the complete list of files included in this work: -include/scsi/ - osd_initiator.h Main API for the initiator library - osd_types.h Common OSD types - osd_sec.h Security Manager API - osd_protocol.h Wire definitions of the OSD standard protocol - osd_attributes.h Wire definitions of OSD attributes - -drivers/scsi/osd/ - osd_initiator.c OSD-Initiator library implementation - osd_uld.c The OSD scsi ULD - osd_ktest.{h,c} In-kernel test suite (called by osd_uld) - osd_debug.h Some printk macros - Makefile For both in-tree and out-of-tree compilation - Kconfig Enables inclusion of the different pieces - osd_test.c User-mode application to call the kernel tests - -The OSD-Initiator Library -========================= -osd_initiator is a low level implementation of an osd initiator encoder. -But even though, it should be intuitive and easy to use. Perhaps over time an -higher lever will form that automates some of the more common recipes. - -init/fini: -- osd_dev_init() associates a scsi_device with an osd_dev structure - and initializes some global pools. This should be done once per scsi_device - (OSD LUN). The osd_dev structure is needed for calling osd_start_request(). - -- osd_dev_fini() cleans up before a osd_dev/scsi_device destruction. - -OSD commands encoding, execution, and decoding of results: - -struct osd_request's is used to iteratively encode an OSD command and carry -its state throughout execution. Each request goes through these stages: - -a. osd_start_request() allocates the request. - -b. Any of the osd_req_* methods is used to encode a request of the specified - type. - -c. osd_req_add_{get,set}_attr_* may be called to add get/set attributes to the - CDB. "List" or "Page" mode can be used exclusively. The attribute-list API - can be called multiple times on the same request. However, only one - attribute-page can be read, as mandated by the OSD standard. - -d. osd_finalize_request() computes offsets into the data-in and data-out buffers - and signs the request using the provided capability key and integrity- - check parameters. - -e. osd_execute_request() may be called to execute the request via the block - layer and wait for its completion. The request can be executed - asynchronously by calling the block layer API directly. - -f. After execution, osd_req_decode_sense() can be called to decode the request's - sense information. - -g. osd_req_decode_get_attr() may be called to retrieve osd_add_get_attr_list() - values. - -h. osd_end_request() must be called to deallocate the request and any resource - associated with it. Note that osd_end_request cleans up the request at any - stage and it must always be called after a successful osd_start_request(). - -osd_request's structure: - -The OSD standard defines a complex structure of IO segments pointed to by -members in the CDB. Up to 3 segments can be deployed in the IN-Buffer and up to -4 in the OUT-Buffer. The ASCII illustration below depicts a secure-read with -associated get+set of attributes-lists. Other combinations very on the same -basic theme. From no-segments-used up to all-segments-used. - -|________OSD-CDB__________| -| | -|read_len (offset=0) -|---------\ -| | | -|get_attrs_list_length | | -|get_attrs_list_offset -|----\ | -| | | | -|retrieved_attrs_alloc_len| | | -|retrieved_attrs_offset -|----|----|-\ -| | | | | -|set_attrs_list_length | | | | -|set_attrs_list_offset -|-\ | | | -| | | | | | -|in_data_integ_offset -|-|--|----|-|-\ -|out_data_integ_offset -|-|--|--\ | | | -\_________________________/ | | | | | | - | | | | | | -|_______OUT-BUFFER________| | | | | | | -| Set attr list |</ | | | | | -| | | | | | | -|-------------------------| | | | | | -| Get attr descriptors |<---/ | | | | -| | | | | | -|-------------------------| | | | | -| Out-data integrity |<------/ | | | -| | | | | -\_________________________/ | | | - | | | -|________IN-BUFFER________| | | | -| In-Data read |<--------/ | | -| | | | -|-------------------------| | | -| Get attr list |<----------/ | -| | | -|-------------------------| | -| In-data integrity |<------------/ -| | -\_________________________/ - -A block device request can carry bidirectional payload by means of associating -a bidi_read request with a main write-request. Each in/out request is described -by a chain of BIOs associated with each request. -The CDB is of a SCSI VARLEN CDB format, as described by OSD standard. -The OSD standard also mandates alignment restrictions at start of each segment. - -In the code, in struct osd_request, there are two _osd_io_info structures to -describe the IN/OUT buffers above, two BIOs for the data payload and up to five -_osd_req_data_segment structures to hold the different segments allocation and -information. - -Important: We have chosen to disregard the assumption that a BIO-chain (and -the resulting sg-list) describes a linear memory buffer. Meaning only first and -last scatter chain can be incomplete and all the middle chains are of PAGE_SIZE. -For us, a scatter-gather-list, as its name implies and as used by the Networking -layer, is to describe a vector of buffers that will be transferred to/from the -wire. It works very well with current iSCSI transport. iSCSI is currently the -only deployed OSD transport. In the future we anticipate SAS and FC attached OSD -devices as well. - -The OSD Testing ULD -=================== -TODO: More user-mode control on tests. - -Authors, Mailing list -===================== -Please communicate with us on any deployment of osd, whether using this code -or not. - -Any problems, questions, bug reports, lonely OSD nights, please email: - OSD Dev List <osd-dev@open-osd.org> - -More up-to-date information can be found on: -http://open-osd.org - -Boaz Harrosh <ooo@electrozaur.com> - -References -========== -Weber, R., "SCSI Object-Based Storage Device Commands", -T10/1355-D ANSI/INCITS 400-2004, -http://www.t10.org/ftp/t10/drafts/osd/osd-r10.pdf - -Weber, R., "SCSI Object-Based Storage Device Commands -2 (OSD-2)" -T10/1729-D, Working Draft, rev. 3 -http://www.t10.org/ftp/t10/drafts/osd2/osd2r03.pdf diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ufs.txt b/Documentation/scsi/ufs.txt index 520b5b033256..1769f71c4c20 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ufs.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ufs.txt @@ -147,6 +147,17 @@ send SG_IO with the applicable sg_io_v4: io_hdr_v4.max_response_len = reply_len; io_hdr_v4.request_len = request_len; io_hdr_v4.request = (__u64)request_upiu; + if (dir == SG_DXFER_TO_DEV) { + io_hdr_v4.dout_xfer_len = (uint32_t)byte_cnt; + io_hdr_v4.dout_xferp = (uintptr_t)(__u64)buff; + } else { + io_hdr_v4.din_xfer_len = (uint32_t)byte_cnt; + io_hdr_v4.din_xferp = (uintptr_t)(__u64)buff; + } + +If you wish to read or write a descriptor, use the appropriate xferp of +sg_io_v4. + UFS Specifications can be found at, UFS - http://www.jedec.org/sites/default/files/docs/JESD220.pdf diff --git a/Documentation/security/LSM.rst b/Documentation/security/LSM.rst index 8b9ee597e9d0..31d92bc5fdd2 100644 --- a/Documentation/security/LSM.rst +++ b/Documentation/security/LSM.rst @@ -11,4 +11,7 @@ that end users and distros can make a more informed decision about which LSMs suit their requirements. For extensive documentation on the available LSM hook interfaces, please -see ``include/linux/lsm_hooks.h``. +see ``include/linux/lsm_hooks.h`` and associated structures: + +.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/lsm_hooks.h + :internal: diff --git a/Documentation/security/LSM-sctp.rst b/Documentation/security/SCTP.rst index 6e5a3925a860..d903eb97fcf3 100644 --- a/Documentation/security/LSM-sctp.rst +++ b/Documentation/security/SCTP.rst @@ -1,6 +1,15 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +==== +SCTP +==== + SCTP LSM Support ================ +Security Hooks +-------------- + For security module support, three SCTP specific hooks have been implemented:: security_sctp_assoc_request() @@ -12,11 +21,11 @@ Also the following security hook has been utilised:: security_inet_conn_established() The usage of these hooks are described below with the SELinux implementation -described in ``Documentation/security/SELinux-sctp.rst`` +described in the `SCTP SELinux Support`_ chapter. security_sctp_assoc_request() ------------------------------ +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Passes the ``@ep`` and ``@chunk->skb`` of the association INIT packet to the security module. Returns 0 on success, error on failure. :: @@ -26,7 +35,7 @@ security module. Returns 0 on success, error on failure. security_sctp_bind_connect() ------------------------------ +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Passes one or more ipv4/ipv6 addresses to the security module for validation based on the ``@optname`` that will result in either a bind or connect service as shown in the permission check tables below. @@ -102,7 +111,7 @@ ASCONF chunk when the corresponding ``@optname``'s are present:: security_sctp_sk_clone() -------------------------- +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Called whenever a new socket is created by **accept**\(2) (i.e. a TCP style socket) or when a socket is 'peeled off' e.g userspace calls **sctp_peeloff**\(3). @@ -114,7 +123,7 @@ calls **sctp_peeloff**\(3). security_inet_conn_established() ---------------------------------- +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Called when a COOKIE ACK is received:: @sk - pointer to sock structure. @@ -122,7 +131,8 @@ Called when a COOKIE ACK is received:: Security Hooks used for Association Establishment -================================================= +------------------------------------------------- + The following diagram shows the use of ``security_sctp_bind_connect()``, ``security_sctp_assoc_request()``, ``security_inet_conn_established()`` when establishing an association. @@ -173,3 +183,161 @@ establishing an association. ------------------------------------------------------------------ +SCTP SELinux Support +==================== + +Security Hooks +-------------- + +The `SCTP LSM Support`_ chapter above describes the following SCTP security +hooks with the SELinux specifics expanded below:: + + security_sctp_assoc_request() + security_sctp_bind_connect() + security_sctp_sk_clone() + security_inet_conn_established() + + +security_sctp_assoc_request() +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Passes the ``@ep`` and ``@chunk->skb`` of the association INIT packet to the +security module. Returns 0 on success, error on failure. +:: + + @ep - pointer to sctp endpoint structure. + @skb - pointer to skbuff of association packet. + +The security module performs the following operations: + IF this is the first association on ``@ep->base.sk``, then set the peer + sid to that in ``@skb``. This will ensure there is only one peer sid + assigned to ``@ep->base.sk`` that may support multiple associations. + + ELSE validate the ``@ep->base.sk peer_sid`` against the ``@skb peer sid`` + to determine whether the association should be allowed or denied. + + Set the sctp ``@ep sid`` to socket's sid (from ``ep->base.sk``) with + MLS portion taken from ``@skb peer sid``. This will be used by SCTP + TCP style sockets and peeled off connections as they cause a new socket + to be generated. + + If IP security options are configured (CIPSO/CALIPSO), then the ip + options are set on the socket. + + +security_sctp_bind_connect() +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Checks permissions required for ipv4/ipv6 addresses based on the ``@optname`` +as follows:: + + ------------------------------------------------------------------ + | BIND Permission Checks | + | @optname | @address contains | + |----------------------------|-----------------------------------| + | SCTP_SOCKOPT_BINDX_ADD | One or more ipv4 / ipv6 addresses | + | SCTP_PRIMARY_ADDR | Single ipv4 or ipv6 address | + | SCTP_SET_PEER_PRIMARY_ADDR | Single ipv4 or ipv6 address | + ------------------------------------------------------------------ + + ------------------------------------------------------------------ + | CONNECT Permission Checks | + | @optname | @address contains | + |----------------------------|-----------------------------------| + | SCTP_SOCKOPT_CONNECTX | One or more ipv4 / ipv6 addresses | + | SCTP_PARAM_ADD_IP | One or more ipv4 / ipv6 addresses | + | SCTP_SENDMSG_CONNECT | Single ipv4 or ipv6 address | + | SCTP_PARAM_SET_PRIMARY | Single ipv4 or ipv6 address | + ------------------------------------------------------------------ + + +`SCTP LSM Support`_ gives a summary of the ``@optname`` +entries and also describes ASCONF chunk processing when Dynamic Address +Reconfiguration is enabled. + + +security_sctp_sk_clone() +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Called whenever a new socket is created by **accept**\(2) (i.e. a TCP style +socket) or when a socket is 'peeled off' e.g userspace calls +**sctp_peeloff**\(3). ``security_sctp_sk_clone()`` will set the new +sockets sid and peer sid to that contained in the ``@ep sid`` and +``@ep peer sid`` respectively. +:: + + @ep - pointer to current sctp endpoint structure. + @sk - pointer to current sock structure. + @sk - pointer to new sock structure. + + +security_inet_conn_established() +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Called when a COOKIE ACK is received where it sets the connection's peer sid +to that in ``@skb``:: + + @sk - pointer to sock structure. + @skb - pointer to skbuff of the COOKIE ACK packet. + + +Policy Statements +----------------- +The following class and permissions to support SCTP are available within the +kernel:: + + class sctp_socket inherits socket { node_bind } + +whenever the following policy capability is enabled:: + + policycap extended_socket_class; + +SELinux SCTP support adds the ``name_connect`` permission for connecting +to a specific port type and the ``association`` permission that is explained +in the section below. + +If userspace tools have been updated, SCTP will support the ``portcon`` +statement as shown in the following example:: + + portcon sctp 1024-1036 system_u:object_r:sctp_ports_t:s0 + + +SCTP Peer Labeling +------------------ +An SCTP socket will only have one peer label assigned to it. This will be +assigned during the establishment of the first association. Any further +associations on this socket will have their packet peer label compared to +the sockets peer label, and only if they are different will the +``association`` permission be validated. This is validated by checking the +socket peer sid against the received packets peer sid to determine whether +the association should be allowed or denied. + +NOTES: + 1) If peer labeling is not enabled, then the peer context will always be + ``SECINITSID_UNLABELED`` (``unlabeled_t`` in Reference Policy). + + 2) As SCTP can support more than one transport address per endpoint + (multi-homing) on a single socket, it is possible to configure policy + and NetLabel to provide different peer labels for each of these. As the + socket peer label is determined by the first associations transport + address, it is recommended that all peer labels are consistent. + + 3) **getpeercon**\(3) may be used by userspace to retrieve the sockets peer + context. + + 4) While not SCTP specific, be aware when using NetLabel that if a label + is assigned to a specific interface, and that interface 'goes down', + then the NetLabel service will remove the entry. Therefore ensure that + the network startup scripts call **netlabelctl**\(8) to set the required + label (see **netlabel-config**\(8) helper script for details). + + 5) The NetLabel SCTP peer labeling rules apply as discussed in the following + set of posts tagged "netlabel" at: http://www.paul-moore.com/blog/t. + + 6) CIPSO is only supported for IPv4 addressing: ``socket(AF_INET, ...)`` + CALIPSO is only supported for IPv6 addressing: ``socket(AF_INET6, ...)`` + + Note the following when testing CIPSO/CALIPSO: + a) CIPSO will send an ICMP packet if an SCTP packet cannot be + delivered because of an invalid label. + b) CALIPSO does not send an ICMP packet, just silently discards it. + + 7) IPSEC is not supported as RFC 3554 - sctp/ipsec support has not been + implemented in userspace (**racoon**\(8) or **ipsec_pluto**\(8)), + although the kernel supports SCTP/IPSEC. diff --git a/Documentation/security/SELinux-sctp.rst b/Documentation/security/SELinux-sctp.rst deleted file mode 100644 index a332cb1c5334..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/security/SELinux-sctp.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,158 +0,0 @@ -SCTP SELinux Support -===================== - -Security Hooks -=============== - -``Documentation/security/LSM-sctp.rst`` describes the following SCTP security -hooks with the SELinux specifics expanded below:: - - security_sctp_assoc_request() - security_sctp_bind_connect() - security_sctp_sk_clone() - security_inet_conn_established() - - -security_sctp_assoc_request() ------------------------------ -Passes the ``@ep`` and ``@chunk->skb`` of the association INIT packet to the -security module. Returns 0 on success, error on failure. -:: - - @ep - pointer to sctp endpoint structure. - @skb - pointer to skbuff of association packet. - -The security module performs the following operations: - IF this is the first association on ``@ep->base.sk``, then set the peer - sid to that in ``@skb``. This will ensure there is only one peer sid - assigned to ``@ep->base.sk`` that may support multiple associations. - - ELSE validate the ``@ep->base.sk peer_sid`` against the ``@skb peer sid`` - to determine whether the association should be allowed or denied. - - Set the sctp ``@ep sid`` to socket's sid (from ``ep->base.sk``) with - MLS portion taken from ``@skb peer sid``. This will be used by SCTP - TCP style sockets and peeled off connections as they cause a new socket - to be generated. - - If IP security options are configured (CIPSO/CALIPSO), then the ip - options are set on the socket. - - -security_sctp_bind_connect() ------------------------------ -Checks permissions required for ipv4/ipv6 addresses based on the ``@optname`` -as follows:: - - ------------------------------------------------------------------ - | BIND Permission Checks | - | @optname | @address contains | - |----------------------------|-----------------------------------| - | SCTP_SOCKOPT_BINDX_ADD | One or more ipv4 / ipv6 addresses | - | SCTP_PRIMARY_ADDR | Single ipv4 or ipv6 address | - | SCTP_SET_PEER_PRIMARY_ADDR | Single ipv4 or ipv6 address | - ------------------------------------------------------------------ - - ------------------------------------------------------------------ - | CONNECT Permission Checks | - | @optname | @address contains | - |----------------------------|-----------------------------------| - | SCTP_SOCKOPT_CONNECTX | One or more ipv4 / ipv6 addresses | - | SCTP_PARAM_ADD_IP | One or more ipv4 / ipv6 addresses | - | SCTP_SENDMSG_CONNECT | Single ipv4 or ipv6 address | - | SCTP_PARAM_SET_PRIMARY | Single ipv4 or ipv6 address | - ------------------------------------------------------------------ - - -``Documentation/security/LSM-sctp.rst`` gives a summary of the ``@optname`` -entries and also describes ASCONF chunk processing when Dynamic Address -Reconfiguration is enabled. - - -security_sctp_sk_clone() -------------------------- -Called whenever a new socket is created by **accept**\(2) (i.e. a TCP style -socket) or when a socket is 'peeled off' e.g userspace calls -**sctp_peeloff**\(3). ``security_sctp_sk_clone()`` will set the new -sockets sid and peer sid to that contained in the ``@ep sid`` and -``@ep peer sid`` respectively. -:: - - @ep - pointer to current sctp endpoint structure. - @sk - pointer to current sock structure. - @sk - pointer to new sock structure. - - -security_inet_conn_established() ---------------------------------- -Called when a COOKIE ACK is received where it sets the connection's peer sid -to that in ``@skb``:: - - @sk - pointer to sock structure. - @skb - pointer to skbuff of the COOKIE ACK packet. - - -Policy Statements -================== -The following class and permissions to support SCTP are available within the -kernel:: - - class sctp_socket inherits socket { node_bind } - -whenever the following policy capability is enabled:: - - policycap extended_socket_class; - -SELinux SCTP support adds the ``name_connect`` permission for connecting -to a specific port type and the ``association`` permission that is explained -in the section below. - -If userspace tools have been updated, SCTP will support the ``portcon`` -statement as shown in the following example:: - - portcon sctp 1024-1036 system_u:object_r:sctp_ports_t:s0 - - -SCTP Peer Labeling -=================== -An SCTP socket will only have one peer label assigned to it. This will be -assigned during the establishment of the first association. Any further -associations on this socket will have their packet peer label compared to -the sockets peer label, and only if they are different will the -``association`` permission be validated. This is validated by checking the -socket peer sid against the received packets peer sid to determine whether -the association should be allowed or denied. - -NOTES: - 1) If peer labeling is not enabled, then the peer context will always be - ``SECINITSID_UNLABELED`` (``unlabeled_t`` in Reference Policy). - - 2) As SCTP can support more than one transport address per endpoint - (multi-homing) on a single socket, it is possible to configure policy - and NetLabel to provide different peer labels for each of these. As the - socket peer label is determined by the first associations transport - address, it is recommended that all peer labels are consistent. - - 3) **getpeercon**\(3) may be used by userspace to retrieve the sockets peer - context. - - 4) While not SCTP specific, be aware when using NetLabel that if a label - is assigned to a specific interface, and that interface 'goes down', - then the NetLabel service will remove the entry. Therefore ensure that - the network startup scripts call **netlabelctl**\(8) to set the required - label (see **netlabel-config**\(8) helper script for details). - - 5) The NetLabel SCTP peer labeling rules apply as discussed in the following - set of posts tagged "netlabel" at: http://www.paul-moore.com/blog/t. - - 6) CIPSO is only supported for IPv4 addressing: ``socket(AF_INET, ...)`` - CALIPSO is only supported for IPv6 addressing: ``socket(AF_INET6, ...)`` - - Note the following when testing CIPSO/CALIPSO: - a) CIPSO will send an ICMP packet if an SCTP packet cannot be - delivered because of an invalid label. - b) CALIPSO does not send an ICMP packet, just silently discards it. - - 7) IPSEC is not supported as RFC 3554 - sctp/ipsec support has not been - implemented in userspace (**racoon**\(8) or **ipsec_pluto**\(8)), - although the kernel supports SCTP/IPSEC. diff --git a/Documentation/security/index.rst b/Documentation/security/index.rst index 85492bfca530..aad6d92ffe31 100644 --- a/Documentation/security/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/security/index.rst @@ -9,7 +9,6 @@ Security Documentation IMA-templates keys/index LSM - LSM-sctp - SELinux-sctp + SCTP self-protection tpm/index diff --git a/Documentation/sound/hd-audio/models.rst b/Documentation/sound/hd-audio/models.rst index 368a07a165f5..7d7c191102a7 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/hd-audio/models.rst +++ b/Documentation/sound/hd-audio/models.rst @@ -254,10 +254,12 @@ alc274-dell-aio ALC274 fixups on Dell AIO machines alc255-dummy-lineout Dell Precision 3930 fixups -alc255-dell-headset"}, +alc255-dell-headset Dell Precision 3630 fixups alc295-hp-x360 HP Spectre X360 fixups +alc-sense-combo + Headset button support for Chrome platform ALC66x/67x/892 ============== diff --git a/Documentation/sound/kernel-api/writing-an-alsa-driver.rst b/Documentation/sound/kernel-api/writing-an-alsa-driver.rst index b37234afdfa1..6b154dbb02cc 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/kernel-api/writing-an-alsa-driver.rst +++ b/Documentation/sound/kernel-api/writing-an-alsa-driver.rst @@ -3520,14 +3520,14 @@ allocator will try to get an area as large as possible within the given size. The second argument (type) and the third argument (device pointer) are -dependent on the bus. In the case of the ISA bus, pass -:c:func:`snd_dma_isa_data()` as the third argument with +dependent on the bus. For normal devices, pass the device pointer +(typically identical as ``card->dev``) to the third argument with ``SNDRV_DMA_TYPE_DEV`` type. For the continuous buffer unrelated to the bus can be pre-allocated with ``SNDRV_DMA_TYPE_CONTINUOUS`` type and the ``snd_dma_continuous_data(GFP_KERNEL)`` device pointer, where -``GFP_KERNEL`` is the kernel allocation flag to use. For the PCI -scatter-gather buffers, use ``SNDRV_DMA_TYPE_DEV_SG`` with -``snd_dma_pci_data(pci)`` (see the `Non-Contiguous Buffers`_ +``GFP_KERNEL`` is the kernel allocation flag to use. For the +scatter-gather buffers, use ``SNDRV_DMA_TYPE_DEV_SG`` with the device +pointer (see the `Non-Contiguous Buffers`_ section). Once the buffer is pre-allocated, you can use the allocator in the @@ -3924,15 +3924,12 @@ The scheme of the real suspend job is as follows. 2. Call :c:func:`snd_power_change_state()` with ``SNDRV_CTL_POWER_D3hot`` to change the power status. -3. Call :c:func:`snd_pcm_suspend_all()` to suspend the running - PCM streams. - -4. If AC97 codecs are used, call :c:func:`snd_ac97_suspend()` for +3. If AC97 codecs are used, call :c:func:`snd_ac97_suspend()` for each codec. -5. Save the register values if necessary. +4. Save the register values if necessary. -6. Stop the hardware if necessary. +5. Stop the hardware if necessary. A typical code would be like: @@ -3946,12 +3943,10 @@ A typical code would be like: /* (2) */ snd_power_change_state(card, SNDRV_CTL_POWER_D3hot); /* (3) */ - snd_pcm_suspend_all(chip->pcm); - /* (4) */ snd_ac97_suspend(chip->ac97); - /* (5) */ + /* (4) */ snd_mychip_save_registers(chip); - /* (6) */ + /* (5) */ snd_mychip_stop_hardware(chip); return 0; } @@ -3994,13 +3989,9 @@ A typical code would be like: return 0; } -As shown in the above, it's better to save registers after suspending -the PCM operations via :c:func:`snd_pcm_suspend_all()` or -:c:func:`snd_pcm_suspend()`. It means that the PCM streams are -already stopped when the register snapshot is taken. But, remember that -you don't have to restart the PCM stream in the resume callback. It'll -be restarted via trigger call with ``SNDRV_PCM_TRIGGER_RESUME`` when -necessary. +Note that, at the time this callback gets called, the PCM stream has +been already suspended via its own PM ops calling +:c:func:`snd_pcm_suspend_all()` internally. OK, we have all callbacks now. Let's set them up. In the initialization of the card, make sure that you can get the chip data from the card diff --git a/Documentation/sound/soc/dpcm.rst b/Documentation/sound/soc/dpcm.rst index f6845b2278ea..77f67ded53de 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/soc/dpcm.rst +++ b/Documentation/sound/soc/dpcm.rst @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ drivers that expose several ALSA PCMs and can route to multiple DAIs. The DPCM runtime routing is determined by the ALSA mixer settings in the same way as the analog signal is routed in an ASoC codec driver. DPCM uses a DAPM graph representing the DSP internal audio paths and uses the mixer settings to -determine the patch used by each ALSA PCM. +determine the path used by each ALSA PCM. DPCM re-uses all the existing component codec, platform and DAI drivers without any modifications. @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ The audio driver processes this as follows :- 4. Machine driver or audio HAL enables the speaker path. -5. DPCM runs the PCM ops for startup(), hw_params(), prepapre() and +5. DPCM runs the PCM ops for startup(), hw_params(), prepare() and trigger(start) for DAI1 Speakers since the path is enabled. In this example, the machine driver or userspace audio HAL can alter the routing @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ like a BT phone call :- This allows the host CPU to sleep while the DSP, MODEM DAI and the BT DAI are still in operation. -A BE DAI link can also set the codec to a dummy device if the code is a device +A BE DAI link can also set the codec to a dummy device if the codec is a device that is managed externally. Likewise a BE DAI can also set a dummy cpu DAI if the CPU DAI is managed by the @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ configuration. struct snd_interval *channels = hw_param_interval(params, SNDRV_PCM_HW_PARAM_CHANNELS); - /* The DSP will covert the FE rate to 48k, stereo */ + /* The DSP will convert the FE rate to 48k, stereo */ rate->min = rate->max = 48000; channels->min = channels->max = 2; @@ -386,5 +386,3 @@ This means creating a new FE that is connected with a virtual path to both DAI links. The DAI links will be started when the FE PCM is started and stopped when the FE PCM is stopped. Note that the FE PCM cannot read or write data in this configuration. - - diff --git a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx index 13a0b7fb192f..551325b66b23 100644 --- a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx +++ b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx @@ -21,15 +21,15 @@ Typically a SPI master is defined in the arch/.../mach-*/board-*.c as a "platform device". The master configuration is passed to the driver via a table found in include/linux/spi/pxa2xx_spi.h: -struct pxa2xx_spi_master { +struct pxa2xx_spi_controller { u16 num_chipselect; u8 enable_dma; }; -The "pxa2xx_spi_master.num_chipselect" field is used to determine the number of +The "pxa2xx_spi_controller.num_chipselect" field is used to determine the number of slave device (chips) attached to this SPI master. -The "pxa2xx_spi_master.enable_dma" field informs the driver that SSP DMA should +The "pxa2xx_spi_controller.enable_dma" field informs the driver that SSP DMA should be used. This caused the driver to acquire two DMA channels: rx_channel and tx_channel. The rx_channel has a higher DMA service priority the tx_channel. See the "PXA2xx Developer Manual" section "DMA Controller". @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ static struct resource pxa_spi_nssp_resources[] = { }, }; -static struct pxa2xx_spi_master pxa_nssp_master_info = { +static struct pxa2xx_spi_controller pxa_nssp_master_info = { .num_chipselect = 1, /* Matches the number of chips attached to NSSP */ .enable_dma = 1, /* Enables NSSP DMA */ }; @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ DMA and PIO I/O Support ----------------------- The pxa2xx_spi driver supports both DMA and interrupt driven PIO message transfers. The driver defaults to PIO mode and DMA transfers must be enabled -by setting the "enable_dma" flag in the "pxa2xx_spi_master" structure. The DMA +by setting the "enable_dma" flag in the "pxa2xx_spi_controller" structure. The DMA mode supports both coherent and stream based DMA mappings. The following logic is used to determine the type of I/O to be used on diff --git a/Documentation/static-keys.txt b/Documentation/static-keys.txt index d68135560895..9803e14639bf 100644 --- a/Documentation/static-keys.txt +++ b/Documentation/static-keys.txt @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ particularly the CPU hotplug lock (in order to avoid races against CPUs being brought in the kernel while the kernel is getting patched). Calling the static key API from within a hotplug notifier is thus a sure deadlock recipe. In order to still allow use of the -functionnality, the following functions are provided: +functionality, the following functions are provided: static_key_enable_cpuslocked() static_key_disable_cpuslocked() diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/fs.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/fs.txt index 819caf8ca05f..ebc679bcb2dc 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/fs.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/fs.txt @@ -56,26 +56,34 @@ of any kernel data structures. dentry-state: -From linux/fs/dentry.c: +From linux/include/linux/dcache.h: -------------------------------------------------------------- -struct { +struct dentry_stat_t dentry_stat { int nr_dentry; int nr_unused; int age_limit; /* age in seconds */ int want_pages; /* pages requested by system */ - int dummy[2]; -} dentry_stat = {0, 0, 45, 0,}; --------------------------------------------------------------- - -Dentries are dynamically allocated and deallocated, and -nr_dentry seems to be 0 all the time. Hence it's safe to -assume that only nr_unused, age_limit and want_pages are -used. Nr_unused seems to be exactly what its name says. + int nr_negative; /* # of unused negative dentries */ + int dummy; /* Reserved for future use */ +}; +-------------------------------------------------------------- + +Dentries are dynamically allocated and deallocated. + +nr_dentry shows the total number of dentries allocated (active ++ unused). nr_unused shows the number of dentries that are not +actively used, but are saved in the LRU list for future reuse. + Age_limit is the age in seconds after which dcache entries can be reclaimed when memory is short and want_pages is nonzero when shrink_dcache_pages() has been called and the dcache isn't pruned yet. +nr_negative shows the number of unused dentries that are also +negative dentries which do not map to any files. Instead, +they help speeding up rejection of non-existing files provided +by the users. + ============================================================== dquot-max & dquot-nr: diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt index c0527d8a468a..aa058aa7bf28 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt @@ -79,6 +79,7 @@ show up in /proc/sys/kernel: - reboot-cmd [ SPARC only ] - rtsig-max - rtsig-nr +- sched_energy_aware - seccomp/ ==> Documentation/userspace-api/seccomp_filter.rst - sem - sem_next_id [ sysv ipc ] @@ -94,7 +95,7 @@ show up in /proc/sys/kernel: - stop-a [ SPARC only ] - sysrq ==> Documentation/admin-guide/sysrq.rst - sysctl_writes_strict -- tainted +- tainted ==> Documentation/admin-guide/tainted-kernels.rst - threads-max - unknown_nmi_panic - watchdog @@ -890,6 +891,17 @@ rtsig-nr shows the number of RT signals currently queued. ============================================================== +sched_energy_aware: + +Enables/disables Energy Aware Scheduling (EAS). EAS starts +automatically on platforms where it can run (that is, +platforms with asymmetric CPU topologies and having an Energy +Model available). If your platform happens to meet the +requirements for EAS but you do not want to use it, change +this value to 0. + +============================================================== + sched_schedstats: Enables/disables scheduler statistics. Enabling this feature @@ -1019,39 +1031,33 @@ compilation sees a 1% slowdown, other systems and workloads may vary. 1: kernel stack erasing is enabled (default), it is performed before returning to the userspace at the end of syscalls. - ============================================================== -tainted: +tainted Non-zero if the kernel has been tainted. Numeric values, which can be ORed together. The letters are seen in "Tainted" line of Oops reports. - 1 (P): A module with a non-GPL license has been loaded, this - includes modules with no license. - Set by modutils >= 2.4.9 and module-init-tools. - 2 (F): A module was force loaded by insmod -f. - Set by modutils >= 2.4.9 and module-init-tools. - 4 (S): Unsafe SMP processors: SMP with CPUs not designed for SMP. - 8 (R): A module was forcibly unloaded from the system by rmmod -f. - 16 (M): A hardware machine check error occurred on the system. - 32 (B): A bad page was discovered on the system. - 64 (U): The user has asked that the system be marked "tainted". This - could be because they are running software that directly modifies - the hardware, or for other reasons. - 128 (D): The system has died. - 256 (A): The ACPI DSDT has been overridden with one supplied by the user - instead of using the one provided by the hardware. - 512 (W): A kernel warning has occurred. - 1024 (C): A module from drivers/staging was loaded. - 2048 (I): The system is working around a severe firmware bug. - 4096 (O): An out-of-tree module has been loaded. - 8192 (E): An unsigned module has been loaded in a kernel supporting module - signature. - 16384 (L): A soft lockup has previously occurred on the system. - 32768 (K): The kernel has been live patched. - 65536 (X): Auxiliary taint, defined and used by for distros. -131072 (T): The kernel was built with the struct randomization plugin. + 1 (P): proprietary module was loaded + 2 (F): module was force loaded + 4 (S): SMP kernel oops on an officially SMP incapable processor + 8 (R): module was force unloaded + 16 (M): processor reported a Machine Check Exception (MCE) + 32 (B): bad page referenced or some unexpected page flags + 64 (U): taint requested by userspace application + 128 (D): kernel died recently, i.e. there was an OOPS or BUG + 256 (A): an ACPI table was overridden by user + 512 (W): kernel issued warning + 1024 (C): staging driver was loaded + 2048 (I): workaround for bug in platform firmware applied + 4096 (O): externally-built ("out-of-tree") module was loaded + 8192 (E): unsigned module was loaded + 16384 (L): soft lockup occurred + 32768 (K): kernel has been live patched + 65536 (X): Auxiliary taint, defined and used by for distros +131072 (T): The kernel was built with the struct randomization plugin + +See Documentation/admin-guide/tainted-kernels.rst for more information. ============================================================== diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt index 2793d4eac55f..2ae91d3873bb 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt @@ -52,6 +52,7 @@ two flavors of JITs, the newer eBPF JIT currently supported on: - sparc64 - mips64 - s390x + - riscv And the older cBPF JIT supported on the following archs: - mips @@ -291,6 +292,20 @@ user space is responsible for creating them if needed. Default : 0 (for compatibility reasons) +devconf_inherit_init_net +---------------------------- + +Controls if a new network namespace should inherit all current +settings under /proc/sys/net/{ipv4,ipv6}/conf/{all,default}/. By +default, we keep the current behavior: for IPv4 we inherit all current +settings from init_net and for IPv6 we reset all settings to default. + +If set to 1, both IPv4 and IPv6 settings are forced to inherit from +current ones in init_net. If set to 2, both IPv4 and IPv6 settings are +forced to reset to their default values. + +Default : 0 (for compatibility reasons) + 2. /proc/sys/net/unix - Parameters for Unix domain sockets ------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt index 187ce4f599a2..6af24cdb25cc 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ used: cat (1234): drop_caches: 3 These are informational only. They do not mean that anything is wrong -with your system. To disable them, echo 4 (bit 3) into drop_caches. +with your system. To disable them, echo 4 (bit 2) into drop_caches. ============================================================== diff --git a/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py b/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py index 94bf6944bb1e..95d6e31f1e3a 100755 --- a/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py +++ b/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py @@ -297,7 +297,6 @@ def tcm_mod_build_configfs(proto_ident, fabric_mod_dir_var, fabric_mod_name): buf += " .sess_get_index = " + fabric_mod_name + "_sess_get_index,\n" buf += " .sess_get_initiator_sid = NULL,\n" buf += " .write_pending = " + fabric_mod_name + "_write_pending,\n" - buf += " .write_pending_status = " + fabric_mod_name + "_write_pending_status,\n" buf += " .set_default_node_attributes = " + fabric_mod_name + "_set_default_node_attrs,\n" buf += " .get_cmd_state = " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_cmd_state,\n" buf += " .queue_data_in = " + fabric_mod_name + "_queue_data_in,\n" @@ -479,13 +478,6 @@ def tcm_mod_dump_fabric_ops(proto_ident, fabric_mod_dir_var, fabric_mod_name): buf += "}\n\n" bufi += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_write_pending(struct se_cmd *);\n" - if re.search('write_pending_status\)\(', fo): - buf += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_write_pending_status(struct se_cmd *se_cmd)\n" - buf += "{\n" - buf += " return 0;\n" - buf += "}\n\n" - bufi += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_write_pending_status(struct se_cmd *);\n" - if re.search('set_default_node_attributes\)\(', fo): buf += "void " + fabric_mod_name + "_set_default_node_attrs(struct se_node_acl *nacl)\n" buf += "{\n" diff --git a/Documentation/timers/highres.txt b/Documentation/timers/highres.txt index 9d88f67781c2..8f9741592123 100644 --- a/Documentation/timers/highres.txt +++ b/Documentation/timers/highres.txt @@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ in the idle period to make sure that jiffies are up to date and the interrupt handler has not to deal with an eventually stale jiffy value. The dynamic tick feature provides statistical values which are exported to -userspace via /proc/stats and can be made available for enhanced power +userspace via /proc/stat and can be made available for enhanced power management control. The implementation leaves room for further development like full tickless diff --git a/Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst b/Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst index 0131df7f5968..7c5e6d6ab5d1 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst +++ b/Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst @@ -233,6 +233,12 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files: This interface also allows for commands to be used. See the "Filter commands" section for more details. + As a speed up, since processing strings can't be quite expensive + and requires a check of all functions registered to tracing, instead + an index can be written into this file. A number (starting with "1") + written will instead select the same corresponding at the line position + of the "available_filter_functions" file. + set_ftrace_notrace: This has an effect opposite to that of @@ -1396,6 +1402,57 @@ enabling function tracing, we incur an added overhead. This overhead may extend the latency times. But nevertheless, this trace has provided some very helpful debugging information. +If we prefer function graph output instead of function, we can set +display-graph option:: + with echo 1 > options/display-graph + + # tracer: irqsoff + # + # irqsoff latency trace v1.1.5 on 4.20.0-rc6+ + # -------------------------------------------------------------------- + # latency: 3751 us, #274/274, CPU#0 | (M:desktop VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:4) + # ----------------- + # | task: bash-1507 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:0 rt_prio:0) + # ----------------- + # => started at: free_debug_processing + # => ended at: return_to_handler + # + # + # _-----=> irqs-off + # / _----=> need-resched + # | / _---=> hardirq/softirq + # || / _--=> preempt-depth + # ||| / + # REL TIME CPU TASK/PID |||| DURATION FUNCTION CALLS + # | | | | |||| | | | | | | + 0 us | 0) bash-1507 | d... | 0.000 us | _raw_spin_lock_irqsave(); + 0 us | 0) bash-1507 | d..1 | 0.378 us | do_raw_spin_trylock(); + 1 us | 0) bash-1507 | d..2 | | set_track() { + 2 us | 0) bash-1507 | d..2 | | save_stack_trace() { + 2 us | 0) bash-1507 | d..2 | | __save_stack_trace() { + 3 us | 0) bash-1507 | d..2 | | __unwind_start() { + 3 us | 0) bash-1507 | d..2 | | get_stack_info() { + 3 us | 0) bash-1507 | d..2 | 0.351 us | in_task_stack(); + 4 us | 0) bash-1507 | d..2 | 1.107 us | } + [...] + 3750 us | 0) bash-1507 | d..1 | 0.516 us | do_raw_spin_unlock(); + 3750 us | 0) bash-1507 | d..1 | 0.000 us | _raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore(); + 3764 us | 0) bash-1507 | d..1 | 0.000 us | tracer_hardirqs_on(); + bash-1507 0d..1 3792us : <stack trace> + => free_debug_processing + => __slab_free + => kmem_cache_free + => vm_area_free + => remove_vma + => exit_mmap + => mmput + => flush_old_exec + => load_elf_binary + => search_binary_handler + => __do_execve_file.isra.32 + => __x64_sys_execve + => do_syscall_64 + => entry_SYSCALL_64_after_hwframe preemptoff ---------- @@ -2784,6 +2841,38 @@ Produces:: We can see that there's no more lock or preempt tracing. +Selecting function filters via index +------------------------------------ + +Because processing of strings is expensive (the address of the function +needs to be looked up before comparing to the string being passed in), +an index can be used as well to enable functions. This is useful in the +case of setting thousands of specific functions at a time. By passing +in a list of numbers, no string processing will occur. Instead, the function +at the specific location in the internal array (which corresponds to the +functions in the "available_filter_functions" file), is selected. + +:: + + # echo 1 > set_ftrace_filter + +Will select the first function listed in "available_filter_functions" + +:: + + # head -1 available_filter_functions + trace_initcall_finish_cb + + # cat set_ftrace_filter + trace_initcall_finish_cb + + # head -50 available_filter_functions | tail -1 + x86_pmu_commit_txn + + # echo 1 50 > set_ftrace_filter + # cat set_ftrace_filter + trace_initcall_finish_cb + x86_pmu_commit_txn Dynamic ftrace with the function graph tracer --------------------------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/trace/histogram.rst b/Documentation/trace/histogram.rst index 7dda76503127..0ea59d45aef1 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/histogram.rst +++ b/Documentation/trace/histogram.rst @@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ Documentation written by Tom Zanussi hist:keys=<field1[,field2,...]>[:values=<field1[,field2,...]>] [:sort=<field1[,field2,...]>][:size=#entries][:pause][:continue] - [:clear][:name=histname1] [if <filter>] + [:clear][:name=histname1][:<handler>.<action>] [if <filter>] When a matching event is hit, an entry is added to a hash table using the key(s) and value(s) named. Keys and values correspond to @@ -1831,41 +1831,87 @@ and looks and behaves just like any other event:: Like any other event, once a histogram is enabled for the event, the output can be displayed by reading the event's 'hist' file. -2.2.3 Hist trigger 'actions' ----------------------------- +2.2.3 Hist trigger 'handlers' and 'actions' +------------------------------------------- -A hist trigger 'action' is a function that's executed whenever a -histogram entry is added or updated. +A hist trigger 'action' is a function that's executed (in most cases +conditionally) whenever a histogram entry is added or updated. -The default 'action' if no special function is explicitly specified is -as it always has been, to simply update the set of values associated -with an entry. Some applications, however, may want to perform -additional actions at that point, such as generate another event, or -compare and save a maximum. +When a histogram entry is added or updated, a hist trigger 'handler' +is what decides whether the corresponding action is actually invoked +or not. -The following additional actions are available. To specify an action -for a given event, simply specify the action between colons in the -hist trigger specification. +Hist trigger handlers and actions are paired together in the general +form: - - onmatch(matching.event).<synthetic_event_name>(param list) + <handler>.<action> - The 'onmatch(matching.event).<synthetic_event_name>(params)' hist - trigger action is invoked whenever an event matches and the - histogram entry would be added or updated. It causes the named - synthetic event to be generated with the values given in the +To specify a handler.action pair for a given event, simply specify +that handler.action pair between colons in the hist trigger +specification. + +In theory, any handler can be combined with any action, but in +practice, not every handler.action combination is currently supported; +if a given handler.action combination isn't supported, the hist +trigger will fail with -EINVAL; + +The default 'handler.action' if none is explicity specified is as it +always has been, to simply update the set of values associated with an +entry. Some applications, however, may want to perform additional +actions at that point, such as generate another event, or compare and +save a maximum. + +The supported handlers and actions are listed below, and each is +described in more detail in the following paragraphs, in the context +of descriptions of some common and useful handler.action combinations. + +The available handlers are: + + - onmatch(matching.event) - invoke action on any addition or update + - onmax(var) - invoke action if var exceeds current max + - onchange(var) - invoke action if var changes + +The available actions are: + + - trace(<synthetic_event_name>,param list) - generate synthetic event + - save(field,...) - save current event fields + - snapshot() - snapshot the trace buffer + +The following commonly-used handler.action pairs are available: + + - onmatch(matching.event).trace(<synthetic_event_name>,param list) + + The 'onmatch(matching.event).trace(<synthetic_event_name>,param + list)' hist trigger action is invoked whenever an event matches + and the histogram entry would be added or updated. It causes the + named synthetic event to be generated with the values given in the 'param list'. The result is the generation of a synthetic event that consists of the values contained in those variables at the - time the invoking event was hit. - - The 'param list' consists of one or more parameters which may be - either variables or fields defined on either the 'matching.event' - or the target event. The variables or fields specified in the - param list may be either fully-qualified or unqualified. If a - variable is specified as unqualified, it must be unique between - the two events. A field name used as a param can be unqualified - if it refers to the target event, but must be fully qualified if - it refers to the matching event. A fully-qualified name is of the - form 'system.event_name.$var_name' or 'system.event_name.field'. + time the invoking event was hit. For example, if the synthetic + event name is 'wakeup_latency', a wakeup_latency event is + generated using onmatch(event).trace(wakeup_latency,arg1,arg2). + + There is also an equivalent alternative form available for + generating synthetic events. In this form, the synthetic event + name is used as if it were a function name. For example, using + the 'wakeup_latency' synthetic event name again, the + wakeup_latency event would be generated by invoking it as if it + were a function call, with the event field values passed in as + arguments: onmatch(event).wakeup_latency(arg1,arg2). The syntax + for this form is: + + onmatch(matching.event).<synthetic_event_name>(param list) + + In either case, the 'param list' consists of one or more + parameters which may be either variables or fields defined on + either the 'matching.event' or the target event. The variables or + fields specified in the param list may be either fully-qualified + or unqualified. If a variable is specified as unqualified, it + must be unique between the two events. A field name used as a + param can be unqualified if it refers to the target event, but + must be fully qualified if it refers to the matching event. A + fully-qualified name is of the form 'system.event_name.$var_name' + or 'system.event_name.field'. The 'matching.event' specification is simply the fully qualified event name of the event that matches the target event for the @@ -1896,6 +1942,12 @@ hist trigger specification. wakeup_new_test($testpid) if comm=="cyclictest"' >> \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_wakeup_new/trigger + Or, equivalently, using the 'trace' keyword syntax: + + # echo 'hist:keys=$testpid:testpid=pid:onmatch(sched.sched_wakeup_new).\ + trace(wakeup_new_test,$testpid) if comm=="cyclictest"' >> \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_wakeup_new/trigger + Creating and displaying a histogram based on those events is now just a matter of using the fields and new synthetic event in the tracing/events/synthetic directory, as usual:: @@ -2000,6 +2052,212 @@ hist trigger specification. Entries: 2 Dropped: 0 + - onmax(var).snapshot() + + The 'onmax(var).snapshot()' hist trigger action is invoked + whenever the value of 'var' associated with a histogram entry + exceeds the current maximum contained in that variable. + + The end result is that a global snapshot of the trace buffer will + be saved in the tracing/snapshot file if 'var' exceeds the current + maximum for any hist trigger entry. + + Note that in this case the maximum is a global maximum for the + current trace instance, which is the maximum across all buckets of + the histogram. The key of the specific trace event that caused + the global maximum and the global maximum itself are displayed, + along with a message stating that a snapshot has been taken and + where to find it. The user can use the key information displayed + to locate the corresponding bucket in the histogram for even more + detail. + + As an example the below defines a couple of hist triggers, one for + sched_waking and another for sched_switch, keyed on pid. Whenever + a sched_waking event occurs, the timestamp is saved in the entry + corresponding to the current pid, and when the scheduler switches + back to that pid, the timestamp difference is calculated. If the + resulting latency, stored in wakeup_lat, exceeds the current + maximum latency, a snapshot is taken. As part of the setup, all + the scheduler events are also enabled, which are the events that + will show up in the snapshot when it is taken at some point: + + # echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/enable + + # echo 'hist:keys=pid:ts0=common_timestamp.usecs \ + if comm=="cyclictest"' >> \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_waking/trigger + + # echo 'hist:keys=next_pid:wakeup_lat=common_timestamp.usecs-$ts0: \ + onmax($wakeup_lat).save(next_prio,next_comm,prev_pid,prev_prio, \ + prev_comm):onmax($wakeup_lat).snapshot() \ + if next_comm=="cyclictest"' >> \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_switch/trigger + + When the histogram is displayed, for each bucket the max value + and the saved values corresponding to the max are displayed + following the rest of the fields. + + If a snaphot was taken, there is also a message indicating that, + along with the value and event that triggered the global maximum: + + # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_switch/hist + { next_pid: 2101 } hitcount: 200 + max: 52 next_prio: 120 next_comm: cyclictest \ + prev_pid: 0 prev_prio: 120 prev_comm: swapper/6 + + { next_pid: 2103 } hitcount: 1326 + max: 572 next_prio: 19 next_comm: cyclictest \ + prev_pid: 0 prev_prio: 120 prev_comm: swapper/1 + + { next_pid: 2102 } hitcount: 1982 \ + max: 74 next_prio: 19 next_comm: cyclictest \ + prev_pid: 0 prev_prio: 120 prev_comm: swapper/5 + + Snapshot taken (see tracing/snapshot). Details: + triggering value { onmax($wakeup_lat) }: 572 \ + triggered by event with key: { next_pid: 2103 } + + Totals: + Hits: 3508 + Entries: 3 + Dropped: 0 + + In the above case, the event that triggered the global maximum has + the key with next_pid == 2103. If you look at the bucket that has + 2103 as the key, you'll find the additional values save()'d along + with the local maximum for that bucket, which should be the same + as the global maximum (since that was the same value that + triggered the global snapshot). + + And finally, looking at the snapshot data should show at or near + the end the event that triggered the snapshot (in this case you + can verify the timestamps between the sched_waking and + sched_switch events, which should match the time displayed in the + global maximum): + + # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/snapshot + + <...>-2103 [005] d..3 309.873125: sched_switch: prev_comm=cyclictest prev_pid=2103 prev_prio=19 prev_state=D ==> next_comm=swapper/5 next_pid=0 next_prio=120 + <idle>-0 [005] d.h3 309.873611: sched_waking: comm=cyclictest pid=2102 prio=19 target_cpu=005 + <idle>-0 [005] dNh4 309.873613: sched_wakeup: comm=cyclictest pid=2102 prio=19 target_cpu=005 + <idle>-0 [005] d..3 309.873616: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/5 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=cyclictest next_pid=2102 next_prio=19 + <...>-2102 [005] d..3 309.873625: sched_switch: prev_comm=cyclictest prev_pid=2102 prev_prio=19 prev_state=D ==> next_comm=swapper/5 next_pid=0 next_prio=120 + <idle>-0 [005] d.h3 309.874624: sched_waking: comm=cyclictest pid=2102 prio=19 target_cpu=005 + <idle>-0 [005] dNh4 309.874626: sched_wakeup: comm=cyclictest pid=2102 prio=19 target_cpu=005 + <idle>-0 [005] dNh3 309.874628: sched_waking: comm=cyclictest pid=2103 prio=19 target_cpu=005 + <idle>-0 [005] dNh4 309.874630: sched_wakeup: comm=cyclictest pid=2103 prio=19 target_cpu=005 + <idle>-0 [005] d..3 309.874633: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/5 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=cyclictest next_pid=2102 next_prio=19 + <idle>-0 [004] d.h3 309.874757: sched_waking: comm=gnome-terminal- pid=1699 prio=120 target_cpu=004 + <idle>-0 [004] dNh4 309.874762: sched_wakeup: comm=gnome-terminal- pid=1699 prio=120 target_cpu=004 + <idle>-0 [004] d..3 309.874766: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/4 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=gnome-terminal- next_pid=1699 next_prio=120 + gnome-terminal--1699 [004] d.h2 309.874941: sched_stat_runtime: comm=gnome-terminal- pid=1699 runtime=180706 [ns] vruntime=1126870572 [ns] + <idle>-0 [003] d.s4 309.874956: sched_waking: comm=rcu_sched pid=9 prio=120 target_cpu=007 + <idle>-0 [003] d.s5 309.874960: sched_wake_idle_without_ipi: cpu=7 + <idle>-0 [003] d.s5 309.874961: sched_wakeup: comm=rcu_sched pid=9 prio=120 target_cpu=007 + <idle>-0 [007] d..3 309.874963: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/7 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=rcu_sched next_pid=9 next_prio=120 + rcu_sched-9 [007] d..3 309.874973: sched_stat_runtime: comm=rcu_sched pid=9 runtime=13646 [ns] vruntime=22531430286 [ns] + rcu_sched-9 [007] d..3 309.874978: sched_switch: prev_comm=rcu_sched prev_pid=9 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R+ ==> next_comm=swapper/7 next_pid=0 next_prio=120 + <...>-2102 [005] d..4 309.874994: sched_migrate_task: comm=cyclictest pid=2103 prio=19 orig_cpu=5 dest_cpu=1 + <...>-2102 [005] d..4 309.875185: sched_wake_idle_without_ipi: cpu=1 + <idle>-0 [001] d..3 309.875200: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/1 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=cyclictest next_pid=2103 next_prio=19 + + - onchange(var).save(field,.. .) + + The 'onchange(var).save(field,...)' hist trigger action is invoked + whenever the value of 'var' associated with a histogram entry + changes. + + The end result is that the trace event fields specified as the + onchange.save() params will be saved if 'var' changes for that + hist trigger entry. This allows context from the event that + changed the value to be saved for later reference. When the + histogram is displayed, additional fields displaying the saved + values will be printed. + + - onchange(var).snapshot() + + The 'onchange(var).snapshot()' hist trigger action is invoked + whenever the value of 'var' associated with a histogram entry + changes. + + The end result is that a global snapshot of the trace buffer will + be saved in the tracing/snapshot file if 'var' changes for any + hist trigger entry. + + Note that in this case the changed value is a global variable + associated withe current trace instance. The key of the specific + trace event that caused the value to change and the global value + itself are displayed, along with a message stating that a snapshot + has been taken and where to find it. The user can use the key + information displayed to locate the corresponding bucket in the + histogram for even more detail. + + As an example the below defines a hist trigger on the tcp_probe + event, keyed on dport. Whenever a tcp_probe event occurs, the + cwnd field is checked against the current value stored in the + $cwnd variable. If the value has changed, a snapshot is taken. + As part of the setup, all the scheduler and tcp events are also + enabled, which are the events that will show up in the snapshot + when it is taken at some point: + + # echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/enable + # echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/tcp/enable + + # echo 'hist:keys=dport:cwnd=snd_cwnd: \ + onchange($cwnd).save(snd_wnd,srtt,rcv_wnd): \ + onchange($cwnd).snapshot()' >> \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/tcp/tcp_probe/trigger + + When the histogram is displayed, for each bucket the tracked value + and the saved values corresponding to that value are displayed + following the rest of the fields. + + If a snaphot was taken, there is also a message indicating that, + along with the value and event that triggered the snapshot: + + # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/tcp/tcp_probe/hist + { dport: 1521 } hitcount: 8 + changed: 10 snd_wnd: 35456 srtt: 154262 rcv_wnd: 42112 + + { dport: 80 } hitcount: 23 + changed: 10 snd_wnd: 28960 srtt: 19604 rcv_wnd: 29312 + + { dport: 9001 } hitcount: 172 + changed: 10 snd_wnd: 48384 srtt: 260444 rcv_wnd: 55168 + + { dport: 443 } hitcount: 211 + changed: 10 snd_wnd: 26960 srtt: 17379 rcv_wnd: 28800 + + Snapshot taken (see tracing/snapshot). Details: + triggering value { onchange($cwnd) }: 10 + triggered by event with key: { dport: 80 } + + Totals: + Hits: 414 + Entries: 4 + Dropped: 0 + + In the above case, the event that triggered the snapshot has the + key with dport == 80. If you look at the bucket that has 80 as + the key, you'll find the additional values save()'d along with the + changed value for that bucket, which should be the same as the + global changed value (since that was the same value that triggered + the global snapshot). + + And finally, looking at the snapshot data should show at or near + the end the event that triggered the snapshot: + + # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/snapshot + + gnome-shell-1261 [006] dN.3 49.823113: sched_stat_runtime: comm=gnome-shell pid=1261 runtime=49347 [ns] vruntime=1835730389 [ns] + kworker/u16:4-773 [003] d..3 49.823114: sched_switch: prev_comm=kworker/u16:4 prev_pid=773 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R+ ==> next_comm=kworker/3:2 next_pid=135 next_prio=120 + gnome-shell-1261 [006] d..3 49.823114: sched_switch: prev_comm=gnome-shell prev_pid=1261 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R+ ==> next_comm=kworker/6:2 next_pid=387 next_prio=120 + kworker/3:2-135 [003] d..3 49.823118: sched_stat_runtime: comm=kworker/3:2 pid=135 runtime=5339 [ns] vruntime=17815800388 [ns] + kworker/6:2-387 [006] d..3 49.823120: sched_stat_runtime: comm=kworker/6:2 pid=387 runtime=9594 [ns] vruntime=14589605367 [ns] + kworker/6:2-387 [006] d..3 49.823122: sched_switch: prev_comm=kworker/6:2 prev_pid=387 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R+ ==> next_comm=gnome-shell next_pid=1261 next_prio=120 + kworker/3:2-135 [003] d..3 49.823123: sched_switch: prev_comm=kworker/3:2 prev_pid=135 prev_prio=120 prev_state=T ==> next_comm=swapper/3 next_pid=0 next_prio=120 + <idle>-0 [004] ..s7 49.823798: tcp_probe: src=10.0.0.10:54326 dest=23.215.104.193:80 mark=0x0 length=32 snd_nxt=0xe3ae2ff5 snd_una=0xe3ae2ecd snd_cwnd=10 ssthresh=2147483647 snd_wnd=28960 srtt=19604 rcv_wnd=29312 + 3. User space creating a trigger -------------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/trace/uprobetracer.rst b/Documentation/trace/uprobetracer.rst index 4c3bfde2ba47..4346e23e3ae7 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/uprobetracer.rst +++ b/Documentation/trace/uprobetracer.rst @@ -73,10 +73,9 @@ For $comm, the default type is "string"; any other type is invalid. Event Profiling --------------- -You can check the total number of probe hits and probe miss-hits via -/sys/kernel/debug/tracing/uprobe_profile. -The first column is event name, the second is the number of probe hits, -the third is the number of probe miss-hits. +You can check the total number of probe hits per event via +/sys/kernel/debug/tracing/uprobe_profile. The first column is the filename, +the second is the event name, the third is the number of probe hits. Usage examples -------------- diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/admin-guide/README.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/admin-guide/README.rst index 80f5ffc94a9e..b37166817842 100644 --- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/admin-guide/README.rst +++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/admin-guide/README.rst @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ .. _it_readme: -Rilascio del kernel Linux 4.x <http://kernel.org/> +Rilascio del kernel Linux 5.x <http://kernel.org/> =================================================== .. warning:: diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/doc-guide/sphinx.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/doc-guide/sphinx.rst index 474b7e127893..793b5cc33403 100644 --- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/doc-guide/sphinx.rst +++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/doc-guide/sphinx.rst @@ -3,6 +3,8 @@ .. note:: Per leggere la documentazione originale in inglese: :ref:`Documentation/doc-guide/index.rst <doc_guide>` +.. _it_sphinxdoc: + Introduzione ============ diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/4.Coding.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/4.Coding.rst index c61059015e52..c05b89e616dd 100644 --- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/4.Coding.rst +++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/4.Coding.rst @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ La maggior parte di queste opzioni possono essere attivate per qualsiasi kernel utilizzato per lo sviluppo o a scopo di test. In particolare dovreste attivare: - - ENABLE_WARN_DEPRECATED, ENABLE_MUST_CHECK, e FRAME_WARN per ottenere degli + - ENABLE_MUST_CHECK e FRAME_WARN per ottenere degli avvertimenti dedicati a problemi come l'uso di interfacce deprecate o l'ignorare un importante valore di ritorno di una funzione. Il risultato generato da questi avvertimenti può risultare verboso, ma non bisogna diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/applying-patches.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/applying-patches.rst index f5e9c7d0b16d..1d30e5cd2a3d 100644 --- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/applying-patches.rst +++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/applying-patches.rst @@ -1,13 +1,15 @@ .. include:: ../disclaimer-ita.rst :Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/applying-patches.rst <applying_patches>` - +:Translator: Federico Vaga <federico.vaga@vaga.pv.it> .. _it_applying_patches: -Applicare modifiche al kernel Linux -=================================== +Applicare patch al kernel Linux ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ -.. warning:: +.. note:: - TODO ancora da tradurre + Questo documento è obsoleto. Nella maggior parte dei casi, piuttosto + che usare ``patch`` manualmente, vorrete usare Git. Per questo motivo + il documento non verrà tradotto. diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/changes.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/changes.rst index 956cf95a1214..d0874327f301 100644 --- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/changes.rst +++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/changes.rst @@ -1,12 +1,495 @@ .. include:: ../disclaimer-ita.rst :Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/changes.rst <changes>` +:Translator: Federico Vaga <federico.vaga@vaga.pv.it> .. _it_changes: Requisiti minimi per compilare il kernel ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ -.. warning:: +Introduzione +============ - TODO ancora da tradurre +Questo documento fornisce una lista dei software necessari per eseguire i +kernel 4.x. + +Questo documento è basato sul file "Changes" del kernel 2.0.x e quindi le +persone che lo scrissero meritano credito (Jared Mauch, Axel Boldt, +Alessandro Sigala, e tanti altri nella rete). + +Requisiti minimi correnti +************************* + +Prima di pensare d'avere trovato un baco, aggiornate i seguenti programmi +**almeno** alla versione indicata! Se non siete certi della versione che state +usando, il comando indicato dovrebbe dirvelo. + +Questa lista presume che abbiate già un kernel Linux funzionante. In aggiunta, +non tutti gli strumenti sono necessari ovunque; ovviamente, se non avete un +modem ISDN, per esempio, probabilmente non dovreste preoccuparvi di +isdn4k-utils. + +====================== ================= ======================================== + Programma Versione minima Comando per verificare la versione +====================== ================= ======================================== +GNU C 4.6 gcc --version +GNU make 3.81 make --version +binutils 2.20 ld -v +flex 2.5.35 flex --version +bison 2.0 bison --version +util-linux 2.10o fdformat --version +kmod 13 depmod -V +e2fsprogs 1.41.4 e2fsck -V +jfsutils 1.1.3 fsck.jfs -V +reiserfsprogs 3.6.3 reiserfsck -V +xfsprogs 2.6.0 xfs_db -V +squashfs-tools 4.0 mksquashfs -version +btrfs-progs 0.18 btrfsck +pcmciautils 004 pccardctl -V +quota-tools 3.09 quota -V +PPP 2.4.0 pppd --version +isdn4k-utils 3.1pre1 isdnctrl 2>&1|grep version +nfs-utils 1.0.5 showmount --version +procps 3.2.0 ps --version +oprofile 0.9 oprofiled --version +udev 081 udevd --version +grub 0.93 grub --version || grub-install --version +mcelog 0.6 mcelog --version +iptables 1.4.2 iptables -V +openssl & libcrypto 1.0.0 openssl version +bc 1.06.95 bc --version +Sphinx\ [#f1]_ 1.3 sphinx-build --version +====================== ================= ======================================== + +.. [#f1] Sphinx è necessario solo per produrre la documentazione del Kernel + +Compilazione del kernel +*********************** + +GCC +--- + +La versione necessaria di gcc potrebbe variare a seconda del tipo di CPU nel +vostro calcolatore. + +Make +---- + +Per compilare il kernel vi servirà GNU make 3.81 o successivo. + +Binutils +-------- + +Il sistema di compilazione, dalla versione 4.13, per la produzione dei passi +intermedi, si è convertito all'uso di *thin archive* (`ar T`) piuttosto che +all'uso del *linking* incrementale (`ld -r`). Questo richiede binutils 2.20 o +successivo. + +pkg-config +---------- + +Il sistema di compilazione, dalla versione 4.18, richiede pkg-config per +verificare l'esistenza degli strumenti kconfig e per determinare le +impostazioni da usare in 'make {g,x}config'. Precedentemente pkg-config +veniva usato ma non verificato o documentato. + +Flex +---- + +Dalla versione 4.16, il sistema di compilazione, durante l'esecuzione, genera +un analizzatore lessicale. Questo richiede flex 2.5.35 o successivo. + +Bison +----- + +Dalla versione 4.16, il sistema di compilazione, durante l'esecuzione, genera +un parsificatore. Questo richiede bison 2.0 o successivo. + +Perl +---- + +Per compilare il kernel vi servirà perl 5 e i seguenti moduli ``Getopt::Long``, +``Getopt::Std``, ``File::Basename``, e ``File::Find``. + +BC +-- + +Vi servirà bc per compilare i kernel dal 3.10 in poi. + +OpenSSL +------- + +Il programma OpenSSL e la libreria crypto vengono usati per la firma dei moduli +e la gestione dei certificati; sono usati per la creazione della chiave e +la generazione della firma. + +Se la firma dei moduli è abilitata, allora vi servirà openssl per compilare il +kernel 3.7 e successivi. Vi serviranno anche i pacchetti di sviluppo di +openssl per compilare il kernel 4.3 o successivi. + + +Strumenti di sistema +******************** + +Modifiche architetturali +------------------------ + +DevFS è stato reso obsoleto da udev +(http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/hotplug/) + +Il supporto per UID a 32-bit è ora disponibile. Divertitevi! + +La documentazione delle funzioni in Linux è una fase di transizione +verso una documentazione integrata nei sorgenti stessi usando dei commenti +formattati in modo speciale e posizionati vicino alle funzioni che descrivono. +Al fine di arricchire la documentazione, questi commenti possono essere +combinati con i file ReST presenti in Documentation/; questi potranno +poi essere convertiti in formato PostScript, HTML, LaTex, ePUB o PDF. +Per convertire i documenti da ReST al formato che volete, avete bisogno di +Sphinx. + +Util-linux +---------- + +Le versioni più recenti di util-linux: forniscono il supporto a ``fdisk`` per +dischi di grandi dimensioni; supportano le nuove opzioni di mount; riconoscono +più tipi di partizioni; hanno un fdformat che funziona con i kernel 2.4; +e altre chicche. Probabilmente vorrete aggiornarlo. + +Ksymoops +-------- + +Se l'impensabile succede e il kernel va in oops, potrebbe servirvi lo strumento +ksymoops per decodificarlo, ma nella maggior parte dei casi non vi servirà. +Generalmente è preferibile compilare il kernel con l'opzione ``CONFIG_KALLSYMS`` +cosicché venga prodotto un output più leggibile che può essere usato così com'è +(produce anche un output migliore di ksymoops). Se per qualche motivo il +vostro kernel non è stato compilato con ``CONFIG_KALLSYMS`` e non avete modo di +ricompilarlo e riprodurre l'oops con quell'opzione abilitata, allora potete +usare ksymoops per decodificare l'oops. + +Mkinitrd +-------- + +I cambiamenti della struttura in ``/lib/modules`` necessita l'aggiornamento di +mkinitrd. + +E2fsprogs +--------- + +L'ultima versione di ``e2fsprogs`` corregge diversi bachi in fsck e debugfs. +Ovviamente, aggiornarlo è una buona idea. + +JFSutils +-------- + +Il pacchetto ``jfsutils`` contiene programmi per il file-system JFS. +Sono disponibili i seguenti strumenti: + +- ``fsck.jfs`` - avvia la ripetizione del log delle transizioni, e verifica e + ripara una partizione formattata secondo JFS + +- ``mkfs.jfs`` - crea una partizione formattata secondo JFS + +- sono disponibili altri strumenti per il file-system. + +Reiserfsprogs +------------- + +Il pacchetto reiserfsprogs dovrebbe essere usato con reiserfs-3.6.x (Linux +kernel 2.4.x). Questo è un pacchetto combinato che contiene versioni +funzionanti di ``mkreiserfs``, ``resize_reiserfs``, ``debugreiserfs`` e +``reiserfsck``. Questi programmi funzionano sulle piattaforme i386 e alpha. + +Xfsprogs +-------- + +L'ultima versione di ``xfsprogs`` contiene, fra i tanti, i programmi +``mkfs.xfs``, ``xfs_db`` e ``xfs_repair`` per il file-system XFS. +Dipendono dell'architettura e qualsiasi versione dalla 2.0.0 in poi +dovrebbe funzionare correttamente con la versione corrente del codice +XFS nel kernel (sono raccomandate le versioni 2.6.0 o successive per via +di importanti miglioramenti). + +PCMCIAutils +----------- + +PCMCIAutils sostituisce ``pcmica-cs``. Serve ad impostare correttamente i +connettori PCMCIA all'avvio del sistema e a caricare i moduli necessari per +i dispositivi a 16-bit se il kernel è stato modularizzato e il sottosistema +hotplug è in uso. + +Quota-tools +----------- + +Il supporto per uid e gid a 32 bit richiedono l'uso della versione 2 del +formato quota. La versione 3.07 e successive di quota-tools supportano +questo formato. Usate la versione raccomandata nella lista qui sopra o una +successiva. + +Micro codice per Intel IA32 +--------------------------- + +Per poter aggiornare il micro codice per Intel IA32, è stato aggiunto un +apposito driver; il driver è accessibile come un normale dispositivo a +caratteri (misc). Se non state usando udev probabilmente sarà necessario +eseguire i seguenti comandi come root prima di poterlo aggiornare:: + + mkdir /dev/cpu + mknod /dev/cpu/microcode c 10 184 + chmod 0644 /dev/cpu/microcode + +Probabilmente, vorrete anche il programma microcode_ctl da usare con questo +dispositivo. + +udev +---- + +``udev`` è un programma in spazio utente il cui scopo è quello di popolare +dinamicamente la cartella ``/dev`` coi dispositivi effettivamente presenti. +``udev`` sostituisce le funzionalità base di devfs, consentendo comunque +nomi persistenti per i dispositivi. + +FUSE +---- + +Serve libfuse 2.4.0 o successiva. Il requisito minimo assoluto è 2.3.0 ma +le opzioni di mount ``direct_io`` e ``kernel_cache`` non funzioneranno. + + +Rete +**** + +Cambiamenti generali +-------------------- + +Se per quanto riguarda la configurazione di rete avete esigenze di un certo +livello dovreste prendere in considerazione l'uso degli strumenti in ip-route2. + +Filtro dei pacchetti / NAT +-------------------------- + +Il codice per filtraggio dei pacchetti e il NAT fanno uso degli stessi +strumenti come nelle versioni del kernel antecedenti la 2.4.x (iptables). +Include ancora moduli di compatibilità per 2.2.x ipchains e 2.0.x ipdwadm. + +PPP +--- + +Il driver per PPP è stato ristrutturato per supportare collegamenti multipli e +per funzionare su diversi livelli. Se usate PPP, aggiornate pppd almeno alla +versione 2.4.0. + +Se non usate udev, dovete avere un file /dev/ppp che può essere creato da root +col seguente comando:: + + mknod /dev/ppp c 108 0 + +Isdn4k-utils +------------ + +Per via della modifica del campo per il numero di telefono, il pacchetto +isdn4k-utils dev'essere ricompilato o (preferibilmente) aggiornato. + +NFS-utils +--------- + +Nei kernel più antichi (2.4 e precedenti), il server NFS doveva essere +informato sui clienti ai quali si voleva fornire accesso via NFS. Questa +informazione veniva passata al kernel quando un cliente montava un file-system +mediante ``mountd``, oppure usando ``exportfs`` all'avvio del sistema. +exportfs prende le informazioni circa i clienti attivi da ``/var/lib/nfs/rmtab``. + +Questo approccio è piuttosto delicato perché dipende dalla correttezza di +rmtab, che non è facile da garantire, in particolare quando si cerca di +implementare un *failover*. Anche quando il sistema funziona bene, ``rmtab`` +ha il problema di accumulare vecchie voci inutilizzate. + +Sui kernel più recenti il kernel ha la possibilità di informare mountd quando +arriva una richiesta da una macchina sconosciuta, e mountd può dare al kernel +le informazioni corrette per l'esportazione. Questo rimuove la dipendenza con +``rmtab`` e significa che il kernel deve essere al corrente solo dei clienti +attivi. + +Per attivare questa funzionalità, dovete eseguire il seguente comando prima di +usare exportfs o mountd:: + + mount -t nfsd nfsd /proc/fs/nfsd + +Dove possibile, raccomandiamo di proteggere tutti i servizi NFS dall'accesso +via internet mediante un firewall. + +mcelog +------ + +Quando ``CONFIG_x86_MCE`` è attivo, il programma mcelog processa e registra +gli eventi *machine check*. Gli eventi *machine check* sono errori riportati +dalla CPU. Incoraggiamo l'analisi di questi errori. + + +Documentazione del kernel +************************* + +Sphinx +------ + +Per i dettaglio sui requisiti di Sphinx, fate riferimento a :ref:`it_sphinx_install` +in :ref:`Documentation/translations/it_IT/doc-guide/sphinx.rst <it_sphinxdoc>` + +Ottenere software aggiornato +============================ + +Compilazione del kernel +*********************** + +gcc +--- + +- <ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gcc/> + +Make +---- + +- <ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/make/> + +Binutils +-------- + +- <https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/devel/binutils/> + +Flex +---- + +- <https://github.com/westes/flex/releases> + +Bison +----- + +- <ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/bison/> + +OpenSSL +------- + +- <https://www.openssl.org/> + +Strumenti di sistema +******************** + +Util-linux +---------- + +- <https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util-linux/> + +Kmod +---- + +- <https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/kmod/> +- <https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/utils/kernel/kmod/kmod.git> + +Ksymoops +-------- + +- <https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/ksymoops/v2.4/> + +Mkinitrd +-------- + +- <https://code.launchpad.net/initrd-tools/main> + +E2fsprogs +--------- + +- <http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/e2fsprogs/e2fsprogs-1.29.tar.gz> + +JFSutils +-------- + +- <http://jfs.sourceforge.net/> + +Reiserfsprogs +------------- + +- <http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/fs/reiserfs/> + +Xfsprogs +-------- + +- <ftp://oss.sgi.com/projects/xfs/> + +Pcmciautils +----------- + +- <https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/pcmcia/> + +Quota-tools +----------- + +- <http://sourceforge.net/projects/linuxquota/> + + +Microcodice Intel P6 +-------------------- + +- <https://downloadcenter.intel.com/> + +udev +---- + +- <http://www.freedesktop.org/software/systemd/man/udev.html> + +FUSE +---- + +- <https://github.com/libfuse/libfuse/releases> + +mcelog +------ + +- <http://www.mcelog.org/> + +Rete +**** + +PPP +--- + +- <ftp://ftp.samba.org/pub/ppp/> + +Isdn4k-utils +------------ + +- <ftp://ftp.isdn4linux.de/pub/isdn4linux/utils/> + +NFS-utils +--------- + +- <http://sourceforge.net/project/showfiles.php?group_id=14> + +Iptables +-------- + +- <http://www.iptables.org/downloads.html> + +Ip-route2 +--------- + +- <https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/net/iproute2/> + +OProfile +-------- + +- <http://oprofile.sf.net/download/> + +NFS-Utils +--------- + +- <http://nfs.sourceforge.net/> + +Documentazione del kernel +************************* + +Sphinx +------ + +- <http://www.sphinx-doc.org/> diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/coding-style.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/coding-style.rst index b707bdbe178c..2fd0e7f79d55 100644 --- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/coding-style.rst +++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/coding-style.rst @@ -449,6 +449,9 @@ Nonostante questo non sia richiesto dal linguaggio C, in Linux viene preferito perché è un modo semplice per aggiungere informazioni importanti per il lettore. +Non usate la parola chiave ``extern`` coi prototipi di funzione perché +rende le righe più lunghe e non è strettamente necessario. + 7) Centralizzare il ritorno delle funzioni ------------------------------------------ @@ -600,26 +603,43 @@ segue nel vostro file .emacs: (* (max steps 1) c-basic-offset))) - (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook - (lambda () - ;; Add kernel style - (c-add-style - "linux-tabs-only" - '("linux" (c-offsets-alist - (arglist-cont-nonempty - c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg - c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only)))))) - - (add-hook 'c-mode-hook - (lambda () - (let ((filename (buffer-file-name))) - ;; Enable kernel mode for the appropriate files - (when (and filename - (string-match (expand-file-name "~/src/linux-trees") - filename)) - (setq indent-tabs-mode t) - (setq show-trailing-whitespace t) - (c-set-style "linux-tabs-only"))))) + (dir-locals-set-class-variables + 'linux-kernel + '((c-mode . ( + (c-basic-offset . 8) + (c-label-minimum-indentation . 0) + (c-offsets-alist . ( + (arglist-close . c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only) + (arglist-cont-nonempty . + (c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only)) + (arglist-intro . +) + (brace-list-intro . +) + (c . c-lineup-C-comments) + (case-label . 0) + (comment-intro . c-lineup-comment) + (cpp-define-intro . +) + (cpp-macro . -1000) + (cpp-macro-cont . +) + (defun-block-intro . +) + (else-clause . 0) + (func-decl-cont . +) + (inclass . +) + (inher-cont . c-lineup-multi-inher) + (knr-argdecl-intro . 0) + (label . -1000) + (statement . 0) + (statement-block-intro . +) + (statement-case-intro . +) + (statement-cont . +) + (substatement . +) + )) + (indent-tabs-mode . t) + (show-trailing-whitespace . t) + )))) + + (dir-locals-set-directory-class + (expand-file-name "~/src/linux-trees") + 'linux-kernel) Questo farà funzionare meglio emacs con lo stile del kernel per i file che si trovano nella cartella ``~/src/linux-trees``. @@ -929,7 +949,40 @@ qualche valore fuori dai limiti. Un tipico esempio è quello delle funzioni che ritornano un puntatore; queste utilizzano NULL o ERR_PTR come meccanismo di notifica degli errori. -17) Non reinventate le macro del kernel +17) L'uso di bool +----------------- + +Nel kernel Linux il tipo bool deriva dal tipo _Bool dello standard C99. +Un valore bool può assumere solo i valori 0 o 1, e implicitamente o +esplicitamente la conversione a bool converte i valori in vero (*true*) o +falso (*false*). Quando si usa un tipo bool il costrutto !! non sarà più +necessario, e questo va ad eliminare una certa serie di bachi. + +Quando si usano i valori booleani, dovreste utilizzare le definizioni di true +e false al posto dei valori 1 e 0. + +Per il valore di ritorno delle funzioni e per le variabili sullo stack, l'uso +del tipo bool è sempre appropriato. L'uso di bool viene incoraggiato per +migliorare la leggibilità e spesso è molto meglio di 'int' nella gestione di +valori booleani. + +Non usate bool se per voi sono importanti l'ordine delle righe di cache o +la loro dimensione; la dimensione e l'allineamento cambia a seconda +dell'architettura per la quale è stato compilato. Le strutture che sono state +ottimizzate per l'allineamento o la dimensione non dovrebbero usare bool. + +Se una struttura ha molti valori true/false, considerate l'idea di raggrupparli +in un intero usando campi da 1 bit, oppure usate un tipo dalla larghezza fissa, +come u8. + +Come per gli argomenti delle funzioni, molti valori true/false possono essere +raggruppati in un singolo argomento a bit denominato 'flags'; spesso 'flags' è +un'alternativa molto più leggibile se si hanno valori costanti per true/false. + +Detto ciò, un uso parsimonioso di bool nelle strutture dati e negli argomenti +può migliorare la leggibilità. + +18) Non reinventate le macro del kernel --------------------------------------- Il file di intestazione include/linux/kernel.h contiene un certo numero @@ -953,7 +1006,7 @@ rigido sui tipi. Sentitevi liberi di leggere attentamente questo file d'intestazione per scoprire cos'altro è stato definito che non dovreste reinventare nel vostro codice. -18) Linee di configurazione degli editor e altre schifezze +19) Linee di configurazione degli editor e altre schifezze ----------------------------------------------------------- Alcuni editor possono interpretare dei parametri di configurazione integrati @@ -987,8 +1040,8 @@ d'indentazione e di modalità d'uso. Le persone potrebbero aver configurato una modalità su misura, oppure potrebbero avere qualche altra magia per far funzionare bene l'indentazione. -19) Inline assembly ---------------------- +20) Inline assembly +------------------- Nel codice specifico per un'architettura, potreste aver bisogno di codice *inline assembly* per interfacciarvi col processore o con una funzionalità @@ -1020,7 +1073,7 @@ al fine di allineare correttamente l'assembler che verrà generato: "more_magic %reg2, %reg3" : /* outputs */ : /* inputs */ : /* clobbers */); -20) Compilazione sotto condizione +21) Compilazione sotto condizione --------------------------------- Ovunque sia possibile, non usate le direttive condizionali del preprocessore diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/howto.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/howto.rst index 909e6a55bc43..9903ac7c566b 100644 --- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/howto.rst +++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/howto.rst @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ il progetto Linux Cross-Reference, che è in grado di presentare codice sorgente in un formato autoreferenziale ed indicizzato. Un eccellente ed aggiornata fonte di consultazione del codice del kernel la potete trovare qui: - http://lxr.free-electrons.com/ + https://elixir.bootlin.com/ Il processo di sviluppo @@ -244,7 +244,6 @@ e di molti altri rami per specifici sottosistemi. Questi rami sono: - I sorgenti kernel 4.x - I sorgenti stabili del kernel 4.x.y -stable - - Le modifiche in 4.x -git - Sorgenti dei sottosistemi del kernel e le loro modifiche - Il kernel 4.x -next per test d'integrazione @@ -313,16 +312,6 @@ Il file Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst (nei sorgenti) documenta quali tipologie di modifiche sono accettate per i sorgenti -stable, e come avviene il processo di rilascio. -Le modifiche in 4.x -git -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ - -Queste sono istantanee quotidiane del kernel di Linus e sono gestite in -una repositorio git (da qui il nome). Queste modifiche sono solitamente -rilasciate giornalmente e rappresentano l'attuale stato dei sorgenti di -Linus. Queste sono da considerarsi più sperimentali di un -rc in quanto -generate automaticamente senza nemmeno aver dato una rapida occhiata -per verificarne lo stato. - Sorgenti dei sottosistemi del kernel e le loro patch ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/stable-api-nonsense.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/stable-api-nonsense.rst index d4fa4abf8dd3..cdfc509b8566 100644 --- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/stable-api-nonsense.rst +++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/stable-api-nonsense.rst @@ -1,13 +1,209 @@ .. include:: ../disclaimer-ita.rst :Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/stable-api-nonsense.rst <stable_api_nonsense>` - +:Translator: Federico Vaga <federico.vaga@vaga.pv.it> .. _it_stable_api_nonsense: L'interfaccia dei driver per il kernel Linux ============================================ -.. warning:: +(tutte le risposte alle vostre domande e altro) + +Greg Kroah-Hartman <greg@kroah.com> + +Questo è stato scritto per cercare di spiegare perché Linux **non ha +un'interfaccia binaria, e non ha nemmeno un'interfaccia stabile**. + +.. note:: + + Questo articolo parla di interfacce **interne al kernel**, non delle + interfacce verso lo spazio utente. + + L'interfaccia del kernel verso lo spazio utente è quella usata dai + programmi, ovvero le chiamate di sistema. Queste interfacce sono **molto** + stabili nel tempo e non verranno modificate. Ho vecchi programmi che sono + stati compilati su un kernel 0.9 (circa) e tuttora funzionano sulle versioni + 2.6 del kernel. Queste interfacce sono quelle che gli utenti e i + programmatori possono considerare stabili. + +Riepilogo generale +------------------ + +Pensate di volere un'interfaccia del kernel stabile, ma in realtà non la +volete, e nemmeno sapete di non volerla. Quello che volete è un driver +stabile che funzioni, e questo può essere ottenuto solo se il driver si trova +nei sorgenti del kernel. Ci sono altri vantaggi nell'avere il proprio driver +nei sorgenti del kernel, ognuno dei quali hanno reso Linux un sistema operativo +robusto, stabile e maturo; questi sono anche i motivi per cui avete scelto +Linux. + +Introduzione +------------ + +Solo le persone un po' strambe vorrebbero scrivere driver per il kernel con +la costante preoccupazione per i cambiamenti alle interfacce interne. Per il +resto del mondo, queste interfacce sono invisibili o non di particolare +interesse. + +Innanzitutto, non tratterò **alcun** problema legale riguardante codice +chiuso, nascosto, avvolto, blocchi binari, o qualsia altra cosa che descrive +driver che non hanno i propri sorgenti rilasciati con licenza GPL. Per favore +fate riferimento ad un avvocato per qualsiasi questione legale, io sono un +programmatore e perciò qui vi parlerò soltanto delle questioni tecniche (non +per essere superficiali sui problemi legali, sono veri e dovete esserne a +conoscenza in ogni circostanza). + +Dunque, ci sono due tematiche principali: interfacce binarie del kernel e +interfacce stabili nei sorgenti. Ognuna dipende dall'altra, ma discuteremo +prima delle cose binarie per toglierle di mezzo. + +Interfaccia binaria del kernel +------------------------------ + +Supponiamo d'avere un'interfaccia stabile nei sorgenti del kernel, di +conseguenza un'interfaccia binaria dovrebbe essere anche'essa stabile, giusto? +Sbagliato. Prendete in considerazione i seguenti fatti che riguardano il +kernel Linux: + + - A seconda della versione del compilatore C che state utilizzando, diverse + strutture dati del kernel avranno un allineamento diverso, e possibilmente + un modo diverso di includere le funzioni (renderle inline oppure no). + L'organizzazione delle singole funzioni non è poi così importante, ma la + spaziatura (*padding*) nelle strutture dati, invece, lo è. + + - In base alle opzioni che sono state selezionate per generare il kernel, + un certo numero di cose potrebbero succedere: + + - strutture dati differenti potrebbero contenere campi differenti + - alcune funzioni potrebbero non essere implementate (per esempio, + alcuni *lock* spariscono se compilati su sistemi mono-processore) + - la memoria interna del kernel può essere allineata in differenti modi + a seconda delle opzioni di compilazione. + + - Linux funziona su una vasta gamma di architetture di processore. Non esiste + alcuna possibilità che il binario di un driver per un'architettura funzioni + correttamente su un'altra. + +Alcuni di questi problemi possono essere risolti compilando il proprio modulo +con la stessa identica configurazione del kernel, ed usando la stessa versione +del compilatore usato per compilare il kernel. Questo è sufficiente se volete +fornire un modulo per uno specifico rilascio su una specifica distribuzione +Linux. Ma moltiplicate questa singola compilazione per il numero di +distribuzioni Linux e il numero dei rilasci supportati da quest'ultime e vi +troverete rapidamente in un incubo fatto di configurazioni e piattaforme +hardware (differenti processori con differenti opzioni); dunque, anche per il +singolo rilascio di un modulo, dovreste creare differenti versioni dello +stesso. + +Fidatevi, se tenterete questa via, col tempo, diventerete pazzi; l'ho imparato +a mie spese molto tempo fa... + + +Interfaccia stabile nei sorgenti del kernel +------------------------------------------- + +Se parlate con le persone che cercano di mantenere aggiornato un driver per +Linux ma che non si trova nei sorgenti, allora per queste persone l'argomento +sarà "ostico". + +Lo sviluppo del kernel Linux è continuo e viaggia ad un ritmo sostenuto, e non +rallenta mai. Perciò, gli sviluppatori del kernel trovano bachi nelle +interfacce attuali, o trovano modi migliori per fare le cose. Se le trovano, +allora le correggeranno per migliorarle. In questo frangente, i nomi delle +funzioni potrebbero cambiare, le strutture dati potrebbero diventare più grandi +o più piccole, e gli argomenti delle funzioni potrebbero essere ripensati. +Se questo dovesse succedere, nello stesso momento, tutte le istanze dove questa +interfaccia viene utilizzata verranno corrette, garantendo che tutto continui +a funzionare senza problemi. + +Portiamo ad esempio l'interfaccia interna per il sottosistema USB che ha subito +tre ristrutturazioni nel corso della sua vita. Queste ristrutturazioni furono +fatte per risolvere diversi problemi: + + - È stato fatto un cambiamento da un flusso di dati sincrono ad uno + asincrono. Questo ha ridotto la complessità di molti driver e ha + aumentato la capacità di trasmissione di tutti i driver fino a raggiungere + quasi la velocità massima possibile. + - È stato fatto un cambiamento nell'allocazione dei pacchetti da parte del + sottosistema USB per conto dei driver, cosicché ora i driver devono fornire + più informazioni al sottosistema USB al fine di correggere un certo numero + di stalli. + +Questo è completamente l'opposto di quello che succede in alcuni sistemi +operativi proprietari che hanno dovuto mantenere, nel tempo, il supporto alle +vecchie interfacce USB. I nuovi sviluppatori potrebbero usare accidentalmente +le vecchie interfacce e sviluppare codice nel modo sbagliato, portando, di +conseguenza, all'instabilità del sistema. + +In entrambe gli scenari, gli sviluppatori hanno ritenuto che queste importanti +modifiche erano necessarie, e quindi le hanno fatte con qualche sofferenza. +Se Linux avesse assicurato di mantenere stabile l'interfaccia interna, si +sarebbe dovuto procedere alla creazione di una nuova, e quelle vecchie, e +mal funzionanti, avrebbero dovuto ricevere manutenzione, creando lavoro +aggiuntivo per gli sviluppatori del sottosistema USB. Dato che gli +sviluppatori devono dedicare il proprio tempo a questo genere di lavoro, +chiedergli di dedicarne dell'altro, senza benefici, magari gratuitamente, non +è contemplabile. + +Le problematiche relative alla sicurezza sono molto importanti per Linux. +Quando viene trovato un problema di sicurezza viene corretto in breve tempo. +A volte, per prevenire il problema di sicurezza, si sono dovute cambiare +delle interfacce interne al kernel. Quando è successo, allo stesso tempo, +tutti i driver che usavano quelle interfacce sono stati aggiornati, garantendo +la correzione definitiva del problema senza doversi preoccupare di rivederlo +per sbaglio in futuro. Se non si fossero cambiate le interfacce interne, +sarebbe stato impossibile correggere il problema e garantire che non si sarebbe +più ripetuto. + +Nel tempo le interfacce del kernel subiscono qualche ripulita. Se nessuno +sta più usando un'interfaccia, allora questa verrà rimossa. Questo permette +al kernel di rimanere il più piccolo possibile, e garantisce che tutte le +potenziali interfacce sono state verificate nel limite del possibile (le +interfacce inutilizzate sono impossibili da verificare). + + +Cosa fare +--------- + +Dunque, se avete un driver per il kernel Linux che non si trova nei sorgenti +principali del kernel, come sviluppatori, cosa dovreste fare? Rilasciare un +file binario del driver per ogni versione del kernel e per ogni distribuzione, +è un incubo; inoltre, tenere il passo con tutti i cambiamenti del kernel è un +brutto lavoro. + +Semplicemente, fate sì che il vostro driver per il kernel venga incluso nei +sorgenti principali (ricordatevi, stiamo parlando di driver rilasciati secondo +una licenza compatibile con la GPL; se il vostro codice non ricade in questa +categoria: buona fortuna, arrangiatevi, siete delle sanguisughe) + +Se il vostro driver è nei sorgenti del kernel e un'interfaccia cambia, il +driver verrà corretto immediatamente dalla persona che l'ha modificata. Questo +garantisce che sia sempre possibile compilare il driver, che funzioni, e tutto +con un minimo sforzo da parte vostra. + +Avere il proprio driver nei sorgenti principali del kernel ha i seguenti +vantaggi: + + - La qualità del driver aumenterà e i costi di manutenzione (per lo + sviluppatore originale) diminuiranno. + - Altri sviluppatori aggiungeranno nuove funzionalità al vostro driver. + - Altri persone troveranno e correggeranno bachi nel vostro driver. + - Altri persone troveranno degli aggiustamenti da fare al vostro driver. + - Altri persone aggiorneranno il driver quando è richiesto da un cambiamento + di un'interfaccia. + - Il driver sarà automaticamente reso disponibile in tutte le distribuzioni + Linux senza dover chiedere a nessuna di queste di aggiungerlo. + +Dato che Linux supporta più dispositivi di qualsiasi altro sistema operativo, +e che girano su molti più tipi di processori di qualsiasi altro sistema +operativo; ciò dimostra che questo modello di sviluppo qualcosa di giusto, +dopo tutto, lo fa :) + + + +------ - TODO ancora da tradurre +Dei ringraziamenti vanno a Randy Dunlap, Andrew Morton, David Brownell, +Hanna Linder, Robert Love, e Nishanth Aravamudan per la loro revisione +e per i loro commenti sulle prime bozze di questo articolo. diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submit-checklist.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submit-checklist.rst index b6b4dd94a660..70e65a7b3620 100644 --- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submit-checklist.rst +++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submit-checklist.rst @@ -1,12 +1,131 @@ .. include:: ../disclaimer-ita.rst :Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/submit-checklist.rst <submitchecklist>` +:Translator: Federico Vaga <federico.vaga@vaga.pv.it> .. _it_submitchecklist: -Lista delle cose da fare per inviare una modifica al kernel Linux -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Lista delle verifiche da fare prima di inviare una patch per il kernel Linux +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ -.. warning:: +Qui troverete una lista di cose che uno sviluppatore dovrebbe fare per +vedere le proprie patch accettate più rapidamente. - TODO ancora da tradurre +Tutti questi punti integrano la documentazione fornita riguardo alla +sottomissione delle patch, in particolare +:ref:`Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submitting-patches.rst <it_submittingpatches>`. + +1) Se state usando delle funzionalità del kernel allora includete (#include) + i file che le dichiarano/definiscono. Non dipendente dal fatto che un file + d'intestazione include anche quelli usati da voi. + +2) Compilazione pulita: + + a) con le opzioni ``CONFIG`` negli stati ``=y``, ``=m`` e ``=n``. Nessun + avviso/errore di ``gcc`` e nessun avviso/errore dal linker. + + b) con ``allnoconfig``, ``allmodconfig`` + + c) quando si usa ``O=builddir`` + +3) Compilare per diverse architetture di processore usando strumenti per + la cross-compilazione o altri. + +4) Una buona architettura per la verifica della cross-compilazione è la ppc64 + perché tende ad usare ``unsigned long`` per le quantità a 64-bit. + +5) Controllate lo stile del codice della vostra patch secondo le direttive + scritte in :ref:`Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/coding-style.rst <it_codingstyle>`. + Prima dell'invio della patch, usate il verificatore di stile + (``script/checkpatch.pl``) per scovare le violazioni più semplici. + Dovreste essere in grado di giustificare tutte le violazioni rimanenti nella + vostra patch. + +6) Le opzioni ``CONFIG``, nuove o modificate, non scombussolano il menu + di configurazione e sono preimpostate come disabilitate a meno che non + soddisfino i criteri descritti in ``Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt`` + alla punto "Voci di menu: valori predefiniti". + +7) Tutte le nuove opzioni ``Kconfig`` hanno un messaggio di aiuto. + +8) La patch è stata accuratamente revisionata rispetto alle più importanti + configurazioni ``Kconfig``. Questo è molto difficile da fare + correttamente - un buono lavoro di testa sarà utile. + +9) Verificare con sparse. + +10) Usare ``make checkstack`` e ``make namespacecheck`` e correggere tutti i + problemi rilevati. + + .. note:: + + ``checkstack`` non evidenzia esplicitamente i problemi, ma una funzione + che usa più di 512 byte sullo stack è una buona candidata per una + correzione. + +11) Includete commenti :ref:`kernel-doc <kernel_doc>` per documentare API + globali del kernel. Usate ``make htmldocs`` o ``make pdfdocs`` per + verificare i commenti :ref:`kernel-doc <kernel_doc>` ed eventualmente + correggerli. + +12) La patch è stata verificata con le seguenti opzioni abilitate + contemporaneamente: ``CONFIG_PREEMPT``, ``CONFIG_DEBUG_PREEMPT``, + ``CONFIG_DEBUG_SLAB``, ``CONFIG_DEBUG_PAGEALLOC``, ``CONFIG_DEBUG_MUTEXES``, + ``CONFIG_DEBUG_SPINLOCK``, ``CONFIG_DEBUG_ATOMIC_SLEEP``, + ``CONFIG_PROVE_RCU`` e ``CONFIG_DEBUG_OBJECTS_RCU_HEAD``. + +13) La patch è stata compilata e verificata in esecuzione con, e senza, + le opzioni ``CONFIG_SMP`` e ``CONFIG_PREEMPT``. + +14) Se la patch ha effetti sull'IO dei dischi, eccetera: allora dev'essere + verificata con, e senza, l'opzione ``CONFIG_LBDAF``. + +15) Tutti i percorsi del codice sono stati verificati con tutte le funzionalità + di lockdep abilitate. + +16) Tutti i nuovi elementi in ``/proc`` sono documentati in ``Documentation/``. + +17) Tutti i nuovi parametri d'avvio del kernel sono documentati in + ``Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst``. + +18) Tutti i nuovi parametri dei moduli sono documentati con ``MODULE_PARM_DESC()``. + +19) Tutte le nuove interfacce verso lo spazio utente sono documentate in + ``Documentation/ABI/``. Leggete ``Documentation/ABI/README`` per maggiori + informazioni. Le patch che modificano le interfacce utente dovrebbero + essere inviate in copia anche a linux-api@vger.kernel.org. + +20) Verifica che il kernel passi con successo ``make headers_check`` + +21) La patch è stata verificata con l'iniezione di fallimenti in slab e + nell'allocazione di pagine. Vedere ``Documentation/fault-injection/``. + + Se il nuovo codice è corposo, potrebbe essere opportuno aggiungere + l'iniezione di fallimenti specifici per il sottosistema. + +22) Il nuovo codice è stato compilato con ``gcc -W`` (usate + ``make EXTRA_CFLAGS=-W``). Questo genererà molti avvisi, ma è ottimo + per scovare bachi come "warning: comparison between signed and unsigned". + +23) La patch è stata verificata dopo essere stata inclusa nella serie di patch + -mm; questo al fine di assicurarsi che continui a funzionare assieme a + tutte le altre patch in coda e i vari cambiamenti nei sottosistemi VM, VFS + e altri. + +24) Tutte le barriere di sincronizzazione {per esempio, ``barrier()``, + ``rmb()``, ``wmb()``} devono essere accompagnate da un commento nei + sorgenti che ne spieghi la logica: cosa fanno e perché. + +25) Se la patch aggiunge nuove chiamate ioctl, allora aggiornate + ``Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt``. + +26) Se il codice che avete modificato dipende o usa una qualsiasi interfaccia o + funzionalità del kernel che è associata a uno dei seguenti simboli + ``Kconfig``, allora verificate che il kernel compili con diverse + configurazioni dove i simboli sono disabilitati e/o ``=m`` (se c'è la + possibilità) [non tutti contemporaneamente, solo diverse combinazioni + casuali]: + + ``CONFIG_SMP``, ``CONFIG_SYSFS``, ``CONFIG_PROC_FS``, ``CONFIG_INPUT``, + ``CONFIG_PCI``, ``CONFIG_BLOCK``, ``CONFIG_PM``, ``CONFIG_MAGIC_SYSRQ``, + ``CONFIG_NET``, ``CONFIG_INET=n`` (ma l'ultimo con ``CONFIG_NET=y``). diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submitting-drivers.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submitting-drivers.rst index 16df950ef808..dadd77e47613 100644 --- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submitting-drivers.rst +++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submitting-drivers.rst @@ -1,12 +1,16 @@ .. include:: ../disclaimer-ita.rst :Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/submitting-drivers.rst <submittingdrivers>` +:Translator: Federico Vaga <federico.vaga@vaga.pv.it> .. _it_submittingdrivers: Sottomettere driver per il kernel Linux ======================================= -.. warning:: +.. note:: - TODO ancora da tradurre + Questo documento è vecchio e negli ultimi anni non è stato più aggiornato; + dovrebbe essere aggiornato, o forse meglio, rimosso. La maggior parte di + quello che viene detto qui può essere trovato anche negli altri documenti + dedicati allo sviluppo. Per questo motivo il documento non verrà tradotto. diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submitting-patches.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submitting-patches.rst index d633775ed556..2ab9c1401aa1 100644 --- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submitting-patches.rst +++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submitting-patches.rst @@ -1,13 +1,867 @@ .. include:: ../disclaimer-ita.rst :Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst <submittingpatches>` - +:Translator: Federico Vaga <federico.vaga@vaga.pv.it> .. _it_submittingpatches: -Sottomettere modifiche: la guida essenziale per vedere il vostro codice nel kernel -================================================================================== +Inviare patch: la guida essenziale per vedere il vostro codice nel kernel +========================================================================= + +Una persona o un'azienda che volesse inviare una patch al kernel potrebbe +sentirsi scoraggiata dal processo di sottomissione, specialmente quando manca +una certa familiarità col "sistema". Questo testo è una raccolta di +suggerimenti che aumenteranno significativamente le probabilità di vedere le +vostre patch accettate. + +Questo documento contiene un vasto numero di suggerimenti concisi. Per +maggiori dettagli su come funziona il processo di sviluppo del kernel leggete +:ref:`Documentation/translations/it_IT/process <it_development_process_main>`. +Leggete anche :ref:`Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submit-checklist.rst <it_submitchecklist>` +per una lista di punti da verificare prima di inviare del codice. Se state +inviando un driver, allora leggete anche :ref:`Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submitting-drivers.rst <it_submittingdrivers>`; +per delle patch relative alle associazioni per Device Tree leggete +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/submitting-patches.txt. + +Molti di questi passi descrivono il comportamento di base del sistema di +controllo di versione ``git``; se utilizzate ``git`` per preparare le vostre +patch molto del lavoro più ripetitivo lo troverete già fatto per voi, tuttavia +dovete preparare e documentare un certo numero di patch. Generalmente, l'uso +di ``git`` renderà la vostra vita di sviluppatore del kernel più facile. + +0) Ottenere i sorgenti attuali +------------------------------ + +Se non avete un repositorio coi sorgenti del kernel più recenti, allora usate +``git`` per ottenerli. Vorrete iniziare col repositorio principale che può +essere recuperato col comando:: + + git clone git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux.git + +Notate, comunque, che potreste non voler sviluppare direttamente coi sorgenti +principali del kernel. La maggior parte dei manutentori hanno i propri +sorgenti e desiderano che le patch siano preparate basandosi su di essi. +Guardate l'elemento **T:** per un determinato sottosistema nel file MAINTANERS +che troverete nei sorgenti, o semplicemente chiedete al manutentore nel caso +in cui i sorgenti da usare non siano elencati il quel file. + +Esiste ancora la possibilità di scaricare un rilascio del kernel come archivio +tar (come descritto in una delle prossime sezioni), ma questa è la via più +complicata per sviluppare per il kernel. + +1) ``diff -up`` +--------------- + +Se dovete produrre le vostre patch a mano, usate ``diff -up`` o ``diff -uprN`` +per crearle. Git produce di base le patch in questo formato; se state +usando ``git``, potete saltare interamente questa sezione. + +Tutte le modifiche al kernel Linux avvengono mediate patch, come descritte +in :manpage:`diff(1)`. Quando create la vostra patch, assicuratevi di +crearla nel formato "unified diff", come l'argomento ``-u`` di +:manpage:`diff(1)`. +Inoltre, per favore usate l'argomento ``-p`` per mostrare la funzione C +alla quale si riferiscono le diverse modifiche - questo rende il risultato +di ``diff`` molto più facile da leggere. Le patch dovrebbero essere basate +sulla radice dei sorgenti del kernel, e non sulle sue sottocartelle. + +Per creare una patch per un singolo file, spesso è sufficiente fare:: + + SRCTREE= linux + MYFILE= drivers/net/mydriver.c + + cd $SRCTREE + cp $MYFILE $MYFILE.orig + vi $MYFILE # make your change + cd .. + diff -up $SRCTREE/$MYFILE{.orig,} > /tmp/patch + +Per creare una patch per molteplici file, dovreste spacchettare i sorgenti +"vergini", o comunque non modificati, e fare un ``diff`` coi vostri. +Per esempio:: + + MYSRC= /devel/linux + + tar xvfz linux-3.19.tar.gz + mv linux-3.19 linux-3.19-vanilla + diff -uprN -X linux-3.19-vanilla/Documentation/dontdiff \ + linux-3.19-vanilla $MYSRC > /tmp/patch + +``dontdiff`` è una lista di file che sono generati durante il processo di +compilazione del kernel; questi dovrebbero essere ignorati in qualsiasi +patch generata con :manpage:`diff(1)`. + +Assicuratevi che la vostra patch non includa file che non ne fanno veramente +parte. Al fine di verificarne la correttezza, assicuratevi anche di +revisionare la vostra patch -dopo- averla generata con :manpage:`diff(1)`. + +Se le vostre modifiche producono molte differenze, allora dovrete dividerle +in patch indipendenti che modificano le cose in passi logici; leggete +:ref:`split_changes`. Questo faciliterà la revisione da parte degli altri +sviluppatori, il che è molto importante se volete che la patch venga accettata. + +Se state utilizzando ``git``, ``git rebase -i`` può aiutarvi nel procedimento. +Se non usate ``git``, un'alternativa popolare è ``quilt`` +<http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/quilt>. + +.. _it_describe_changes: + +2) Descrivete le vostre modifiche +--------------------------------- + +Descrivete il vostro problema. Esiste sempre un problema che via ha spinto +ha fare il vostro lavoro, che sia la correzione di un baco da una riga o una +nuova funzionalità da 5000 righe di codice. Convincete i revisori che vale +la pena risolvere il vostro problema e che ha senso continuare a leggere oltre +al primo paragrafo. + +Descrivete ciò che sarà visibile agli utenti. Chiari incidenti nel sistema +e blocchi sono abbastanza convincenti, ma non tutti i bachi sono così evidenti. +Anche se il problema è stato scoperto durante la revisione del codice, +descrivete l'impatto che questo avrà sugli utenti. Tenete presente che +la maggior parte delle installazioni Linux usa un kernel che arriva dai +sorgenti stabili o dai sorgenti di una distribuzione particolare che prende +singolarmente le patch dai sorgenti principali; quindi, includete tutte +le informazioni che possono essere utili a capire le vostre modifiche: +le circostanze che causano il problema, estratti da dmesg, descrizioni di +un incidente di sistema, prestazioni di una regressione, picchi di latenza, +blocchi, eccetera. + +Quantificare le ottimizzazioni e i compromessi. Se affermate di aver +migliorato le prestazioni, il consumo di memoria, l'impatto sollo stack, +o la dimensione del file binario, includete dei numeri a supporto della +vostra dichiarazione. Ma ricordatevi di descrivere anche eventuali costi +che non sono ovvi. Solitamente le ottimizzazioni non sono gratuite, ma sono +un compromesso fra l'uso di CPU, la memoria e la leggibilità; o, quando si +parla di ipotesi euristiche, fra differenti carichi. Descrivete i lati +negativi che vi aspettate dall'ottimizzazione cosicché i revisori possano +valutare i costi e i benefici. + +Una volta che il problema è chiaro, descrivete come lo risolvete andando +nel dettaglio tecnico. È molto importante che descriviate la modifica +in un inglese semplice cosicché i revisori possano verificare che il codice si +comporti come descritto. + +I manutentori vi saranno grati se scrivete la descrizione della patch in un +formato che sia compatibile con il gestore dei sorgenti usato dal kernel, +``git``, come un "commit log". Leggete :ref:`it_explicit_in_reply_to`. + +Risolvete solo un problema per patch. Se la vostra descrizione inizia ad +essere lunga, potrebbe essere un segno che la vostra patch necessita d'essere +divisa. Leggete :ref:`split_changes`. + +Quando inviate o rinviate una patch o una serie, includete la descrizione +completa delle modifiche e la loro giustificazione. Non limitatevi a dire che +questa è la versione N della patch (o serie). Non aspettatevi che i +manutentori di un sottosistema vadano a cercare le versioni precedenti per +cercare la descrizione da aggiungere. In pratica, la patch (o serie) e la sua +descrizione devono essere un'unica cosa. Questo aiuta i manutentori e i +revisori. Probabilmente, alcuni revisori non hanno nemmeno ricevuto o visto +le versioni precedenti della patch. + +Descrivete le vostro modifiche usando l'imperativo, per esempio "make xyzzy +do frotz" piuttosto che "[This patch] makes xyzzy do frotz" or "[I] changed +xyzzy to do frotz", come se steste dando ordini al codice di cambiare il suo +comportamento. + +Se la patch corregge un baco conosciuto, fare riferimento a quel baco inserendo +il suo numero o il suo URL. Se la patch è la conseguenza di una discussione +su una lista di discussione, allora fornite l'URL all'archivio di quella +discussione; usate i collegamenti a https://lkml.kernel.org/ con il +``Message-Id``, in questo modo vi assicurerete che il collegamento non diventi +invalido nel tempo. + +Tuttavia, cercate di rendere la vostra spiegazione comprensibile anche senza +far riferimento a fonti esterne. In aggiunta ai collegamenti a bachi e liste +di discussione, riassumente i punti più importanti della discussione che hanno +portato alla creazione della patch. + +Se volete far riferimento a uno specifico commit, non usate solo +l'identificativo SHA-1. Per cortesia, aggiungete anche la breve riga +riassuntiva del commit per rendere la chiaro ai revisori l'oggetto. +Per esempio:: + + Commit e21d2170f36602ae2708 ("video: remove unnecessary + platform_set_drvdata()") removed the unnecessary + platform_set_drvdata(), but left the variable "dev" unused, + delete it. + +Dovreste anche assicurarvi di usare almeno i primi 12 caratteri +dell'identificativo SHA-1. Il repositorio del kernel ha *molti* oggetti e +questo rende possibile la collisione fra due identificativi con pochi +caratteri. Tenete ben presente che anche se oggi non ci sono collisioni con il +vostro identificativo a 6 caratteri, potrebbero essercene fra 5 anni da oggi. + +Se la vostra patch corregge un baco in un commit specifico, per esempio avete +trovato un problema usando ``git bisect``, per favore usate l'etichetta +'Fixes:' indicando i primi 12 caratteri dell'identificativo SHA-1 seguiti +dalla riga riassuntiva. Per esempio:: + + Fixes: e21d2170f366 ("video: remove unnecessary platform_set_drvdata()") + +La seguente configurazione di ``git config`` può essere usata per formattare +i risultati dei comandi ``git log`` o ``git show`` come nell'esempio +precedente:: + + [core] + abbrev = 12 + [pretty] + fixes = Fixes: %h (\"%s\") + +.. _it_split_changes: + +3) Separate le vostre modifiche +------------------------------- + +Separate ogni **cambiamento logico** in patch distinte. + +Per esempio, se i vostri cambiamenti per un singolo driver includono +sia delle correzioni di bachi che miglioramenti alle prestazioni, +allora separateli in due o più patch. Se i vostri cambiamenti includono +un aggiornamento dell'API e un nuovo driver che lo sfrutta, allora separateli +in due patch. + +D'altro canto, se fate una singola modifica su più file, raggruppate tutte +queste modifiche in una singola patch. Dunque, un singolo cambiamento logico +è contenuto in una sola patch. + +Il punto da ricordare è che ogni modifica dovrebbe fare delle modifiche +che siano facilmente comprensibili e che possano essere verificate dai revisori. +Ogni patch dovrebbe essere giustificabile di per sé. + +Se al fine di ottenere un cambiamento completo una patch dipende da un'altra, +va bene. Semplicemente scrivete una nota nella descrizione della patch per +farlo presente: **"this patch depends on patch X"**. + +Quando dividete i vostri cambiamenti in una serie di patch, prestate +particolare attenzione alla verifica di ogni patch della serie; per ognuna +il kernel deve compilare ed essere eseguito correttamente. Gli sviluppatori +che usano ``git bisect`` per scovare i problemi potrebbero finire nel mezzo +della vostra serie in un punto qualsiasi; non vi saranno grati se nel mezzo +avete introdotto dei bachi. + +Se non potete condensare la vostra serie di patch in una più piccola, allora +pubblicatene una quindicina alla volta e aspettate che vengano revisionate +ed integrate. + + +4) Verificate lo stile delle vostre modifiche +--------------------------------------------- + +Controllate che la vostra patch non violi lo stile del codice, maggiori +dettagli sono disponibili in :ref:`Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/coding-style.rst <it_codingstyle>`. +Non farlo porta semplicemente a una perdita di tempo da parte dei revisori e +voi vedrete la vostra patch rifiutata, probabilmente senza nemmeno essere stata +letta. + +Un'eccezione importante si ha quando del codice viene spostato da un file +ad un altro -- in questo caso non dovreste modificare il codice spostato +per nessun motivo, almeno non nella patch che lo sposta. Questo separa +chiaramente l'azione di spostare il codice e il vostro cambiamento. +Questo aiuta enormemente la revisione delle vere differenze e permette agli +strumenti di tenere meglio la traccia della storia del codice. + +Prima di inviare una patch, verificatene lo stile usando l'apposito +verificatore (scripts/checkpatch.pl). Da notare, comunque, che il verificator +di stile dovrebbe essere visto come una guida, non come un sostituto al +giudizio umano. Se il vostro codice è migliore nonostante una violazione +dello stile, probabilmente è meglio lasciarlo com'è. + +Il verificatore ha tre diversi livelli di severità: + - ERROR: le cose sono molto probabilmente sbagliate + - WARNING: le cose necessitano d'essere revisionate con attenzione + - CHECK: le cose necessitano di un pensierino + +Dovreste essere in grado di giustificare tutte le eventuali violazioni rimaste +nella vostra patch. + + +5) Selezionate i destinatari della vostra patch +----------------------------------------------- + +Dovreste sempre inviare una copia della patch ai manutentori dei sottosistemi +interessati dalle modifiche; date un'occhiata al file MAINTAINERS e alla storia +delle revisioni per scoprire chi si occupa del codice. Lo script +scripts/get_maintainer.pl può esservi d'aiuto. Se non riuscite a trovare un +manutentore per il sottosistema su cui state lavorando, allora Andrew Morton +(akpm@linux-foundation.org) sarà la vostra ultima possibilità. + +Normalmente, dovreste anche scegliere una lista di discussione a cui inviare +la vostra serie di patch. La lista di discussione linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org +è proprio l'ultima spiaggia, il volume di email su questa lista fa si che +diversi sviluppatori non la seguano. Guardate nel file MAINTAINERS per trovare +la lista di discussione dedicata ad un sottosistema; probabilmente lì la vostra +patch riceverà molta più attenzione. Tuttavia, per favore, non spammate le +liste di discussione che non sono interessate al vostro lavoro. + +Molte delle liste di discussione relative al kernel vengono ospitate su +vger.kernel.org; potete trovare un loro elenco alla pagina +http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html. Tuttavia, ci sono altre liste di +discussione ospitate altrove. + +Non inviate più di 15 patch alla volta sulle liste di discussione vger!!! + +L'ultimo giudizio sull'integrazione delle modifiche accettate spetta a +Linux Torvalds. Il suo indirizzo e-mail è <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>. +Riceve moltissime e-mail, e, a questo punto, solo poche patch passano +direttamente attraverso il suo giudizio; quindi, dovreste fare del vostro +meglio per -evitare di- inviargli e-mail. + +Se avete una patch che corregge un baco di sicurezza che potrebbe essere +sfruttato, inviatela a security@kernel.org. Per bachi importanti, un breve +embargo potrebbe essere preso in considerazione per dare il tempo alle +distribuzioni di prendere la patch e renderla disponibile ai loro utenti; +in questo caso, ovviamente, la patch non dovrebbe essere inviata su alcuna +lista di discussione pubblica. + +Patch che correggono bachi importanti su un kernel già rilasciato, dovrebbero +essere inviate ai manutentori dei kernel stabili aggiungendo la seguente riga:: + + Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org + +nella vostra patch, nell'area dedicata alle firme (notate, NON come destinatario +delle e-mail). In aggiunta a questo file, dovreste leggere anche +:ref:`Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst <it_stable_kernel_rules>` + +Tuttavia, notate, che alcuni manutentori di sottosistema preferiscono avere +l'ultima parola su quali patch dovrebbero essere aggiunte ai kernel stabili. +La rete di manutentori, in particolare, non vorrebbe vedere i singoli +sviluppatori aggiungere alle loro patch delle righe come quella sopracitata. + +Se le modifiche hanno effetti sull'interfaccia con lo spazio utente, per favore +inviate una patch per le pagine man ai manutentori di suddette pagine (elencati +nel file MAINTAINERS), o almeno una notifica circa la vostra modifica, +cosicché l'informazione possa trovare la sua strada nel manuale. Le modifiche +all'API dello spazio utente dovrebbero essere inviate in copia anche a +linux-api@vger.kernel.org. + +Per le piccole patch potreste aggiungere in CC l'indirizzo +*Trivial Patch Monkey trivial@kernel.org* che ha lo scopo di raccogliere +le patch "banali". Date uno sguardo al file MAINTAINERS per vedere chi +è l'attuale amministratore. + +Le patch banali devono rientrare in una delle seguenti categorie: + +- errori grammaticali nella documentazione +- errori grammaticali negli errori che potrebbero rompere :manpage:`grep(1)` +- correzione di avvisi di compilazione (riempirsi di avvisi inutili è negativo) +- correzione di errori di compilazione (solo se correggono qualcosa sul serio) +- rimozione di funzioni/macro deprecate +- sostituzione di codice non potabile con uno portabile (anche in codice + specifico per un'architettura, dato che le persone copiano, fintanto che + la modifica sia banale) +- qualsiasi modifica dell'autore/manutentore di un file (in pratica + "patch monkey" in modalità ritrasmissione) + + +6) Niente: MIME, links, compressione, allegati. Solo puro testo +---------------------------------------------------------------- + +Linus e gli altri sviluppatori del kernel devono poter commentare +le modifiche che sottomettete. Per uno sviluppatore è importante +essere in grado di "citare" le vostre modifiche, usando normali +programmi di posta elettronica, cosicché sia possibile commentare +una porzione specifica del vostro codice. + +Per questa ragione tutte le patch devono essere inviate via e-mail +come testo. .. warning:: - TODO ancora da tradurre + Se decidete di copiare ed incollare la patch nel corpo dell'e-mail, state + attenti che il vostro programma non corrompa il contenuto con andate + a capo automatiche. + +La patch non deve essere un allegato MIME, compresso o meno. Molti +dei più popolari programmi di posta elettronica non trasmettono un allegato +MIME come puro testo, e questo rende impossibile commentare il vostro codice. +Inoltre, un allegato MIME rende l'attività di Linus più laboriosa, diminuendo +così la possibilità che il vostro allegato-MIME venga accettato. + +Eccezione: se il vostro servizio di posta storpia le patch, allora qualcuno +potrebbe chiedervi di rinviarle come allegato MIME. + +Leggete :ref:`Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/email-clients.rst <it_email_clients>` +per dei suggerimenti sulla configurazione del programmi di posta elettronica +per l'invio di patch intatte. + +7) Dimensione delle e-mail +-------------------------- + +Le grosse modifiche non sono adatte ad una lista di discussione, e nemmeno +per alcuni manutentori. Se la vostra patch, non compressa, eccede i 300 kB +di spazio, allora caricatela in una spazio accessibile su internet fornendo +l'URL (collegamento) ad essa. Ma notate che se la vostra patch eccede i 300 kB +è quasi certo che necessiti comunque di essere spezzettata. + +8) Rispondere ai commenti di revisione +-------------------------------------- + +Quasi certamente i revisori vi invieranno dei commenti su come migliorare +la vostra patch. Dovete rispondere a questi commenti; ignorare i revisori +è un ottimo modo per essere ignorati. Riscontri o domande che non conducono +ad una modifica del codice quasi certamente dovrebbero portare ad un commento +nel changelog cosicché il prossimo revisore potrà meglio comprendere cosa stia +accadendo. + +Assicuratevi di dire ai revisori quali cambiamenti state facendo e di +ringraziarli per il loro tempo. Revisionare codice è un lavoro faticoso e che +richiede molto tempo, e a volte i revisori diventano burberi. Tuttavia, anche +in questo caso, rispondete con educazione e concentratevi sul problema che +hanno evidenziato. + +9) Non scoraggiatevi - o impazientitevi +--------------------------------------- + +Dopo che avete inviato le vostre modifiche, siate pazienti e aspettate. +I revisori sono persone occupate e potrebbero non ricevere la vostra patch +immediatamente. + +Un tempo, le patch erano solite scomparire nel vuoto senza alcun commento, +ma ora il processo di sviluppo funziona meglio. Dovreste ricevere commenti +in una settimana o poco più; se questo non dovesse accadere, assicuratevi di +aver inviato le patch correttamente. Aspettate almeno una settimana prima di +rinviare le modifiche o sollecitare i revisori - probabilmente anche di più +durante la finestra d'integrazione. + +10) Aggiungete PATCH nell'oggetto +--------------------------------- + +Dato l'alto volume di e-mail per Linus, e la lista linux-kernel, è prassi +prefiggere il vostro oggetto con [PATCH]. Questo permette a Linus e agli +altri sviluppatori del kernel di distinguere facilmente le patch dalle altre +discussioni. + + +11) Firmate il vostro lavoro - Il certificato d'origine dello sviluppatore +-------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Per migliorare la tracciabilità su "chi ha fatto cosa", specialmente per +quelle patch che per raggiungere lo stadio finale passano attraverso +diversi livelli di manutentori, abbiamo introdotto la procedura di "firma" +delle patch che vengono inviate per e-mail. + +La firma è una semplice riga alla fine della descrizione della patch che +certifica che l'avete scritta voi o che avete il diritto di pubblicarla +come patch open-source. Le regole sono abbastanza semplici: se potete +certificare quanto segue: + +Il certificato d'origine dello sviluppatore 1.1 +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Contribuendo a questo progetto, io certifico che: + + (a) Il contributo è stato creato interamente, o in parte, da me e che + ho il diritto di inviarlo in accordo con la licenza open-source + indicata nel file; oppure + + (b) Il contributo è basato su un lavoro precedente che, nei limiti + della mia conoscenza, è coperto da un'appropriata licenza + open-source che mi da il diritto di modificarlo e inviarlo, + le cui modifiche sono interamente o in parte mie, in accordo con + la licenza open-source (a meno che non abbia il permesso di usare + un'altra licenza) indicata nel file; oppure + + (c) Il contributo mi è stato fornito direttamente da qualcuno che + ha certificato (a), (b) o (c) e non l'ho modificata. + + (d) Capisco e concordo col fatto che questo progetto e i suoi + contributi sono pubblici e che un registro dei contributi (incluse + tutte le informazioni personali che invio con essi, inclusa la mia + firma) verrà mantenuto indefinitamente e che possa essere + ridistribuito in accordo con questo progetto o le licenze + open-source coinvolte. + +poi dovete solo aggiungere una riga che dice:: + + Signed-off-by: Random J Developer <random@developer.example.org> + +usando il vostro vero nome (spiacenti, non si accettano pseudonimi o +contributi anonimi). + +Alcune persone aggiungono delle etichette alla fine. Per ora queste verranno +ignorate, ma potete farlo per meglio identificare procedure aziendali interne o +per aggiungere dettagli circa la firma. + +Se siete un manutentore di un sottosistema o di un ramo, qualche volta dovrete +modificare leggermente le patch che avete ricevuto al fine di poterle +integrare; questo perché il codice non è esattamente lo stesso nei vostri +sorgenti e in quelli dei vostri contributori. Se rispettate rigidamente la +regola (c), dovreste chiedere al mittente di rifare la patch, ma questo è +controproducente e una totale perdita di tempo ed energia. La regola (b) +vi permette di correggere il codice, ma poi diventa davvero maleducato cambiare +la patch di qualcuno e addossargli la responsabilità per i vostri bachi. +Per risolvere questo problema dovreste aggiungere una riga, fra l'ultimo +Signed-off-by e il vostro, che spiega la vostra modifica. Nonostante non ci +sia nulla di obbligatorio, un modo efficace è quello di indicare il vostro +nome o indirizzo email fra parentesi quadre, seguito da una breve descrizione; +questo renderà abbastanza visibile chi è responsabile per le modifiche +dell'ultimo minuto. Per esempio:: + + Signed-off-by: Random J Developer <random@developer.example.org> + [lucky@maintainer.example.org: struct foo moved from foo.c to foo.h] + Signed-off-by: Lucky K Maintainer <lucky@maintainer.example.org> + +Questa pratica è particolarmente utile se siete i manutentori di un ramo +stabile ma al contempo volete dare credito agli autori, tracciare e integrare +le modifiche, e proteggere i mittenti dalle lamentele. Notate che in nessuna +circostanza è permessa la modifica dell'identità dell'autore (l'intestazione +From), dato che è quella che appare nei changelog. + +Un appunto speciale per chi porta il codice su vecchie versioni. Sembra che +sia comune l'utile pratica di inserire un'indicazione circa l'origine della +patch all'inizio del messaggio di commit (appena dopo la riga dell'oggetto) +al fine di migliorare la tracciabilità. Per esempio, questo è quello che si +vede nel rilascio stabile 3.x-stable:: + + Date: Tue Oct 7 07:26:38 2014 -0400 + + libata: Un-break ATA blacklist + + commit 1c40279960bcd7d52dbdf1d466b20d24b99176c8 upstream. + +E qui quello che potrebbe vedersi su un kernel più vecchio dove la patch è +stata applicata:: + + Date: Tue May 13 22:12:27 2008 +0200 + + wireless, airo: waitbusy() won't delay + + [backport of 2.6 commit b7acbdfbd1f277c1eb23f344f899cfa4cd0bf36a] + +Qualunque sia il formato, questa informazione fornisce un importante aiuto +alle persone che vogliono seguire i vostri sorgenti, e quelle che cercano +dei bachi. + + +12) Quando utilizzare Acked-by:, Cc:, e Co-developed-by: +-------------------------------------------------------- + +L'etichetta Signed-off-by: indica che il firmatario è stato coinvolto nello +sviluppo della patch, o che era nel suo percorso di consegna. + +Se una persona non è direttamente coinvolta con la preparazione o gestione +della patch ma desidera firmare e mettere agli atti la loro approvazione, +allora queste persone possono chiedere di aggiungere al changelog della patch +una riga Acked-by:. + +Acked-by: viene spesso utilizzato dai manutentori del sottosistema in oggetto +quando quello stesso manutentore non ha contribuito né trasmesso la patch. + +Acked-by: non è formale come Signed-off-by:. Questo indica che la persona ha +revisionato la patch e l'ha trovata accettabile. Per cui, a volte, chi +integra le patch convertirà un "sì, mi sembra che vada bene" in un Acked-by: +(ma tenete presente che solitamente è meglio chiedere esplicitamente). + +Acked-by: non indica l'accettazione di un'intera patch. Per esempio, quando +una patch ha effetti su diversi sottosistemi e ha un Acked-by: da un +manutentore di uno di questi, significa che il manutentore accetta quella +parte di codice relativa al sottosistema che mantiene. Qui dovremmo essere +giudiziosi. Quando si hanno dei dubbi si dovrebbe far riferimento alla +discussione originale negli archivi della lista di discussione. + +Se una persona ha avuto l'opportunità di commentare la patch, ma non lo ha +fatto, potete aggiungere l'etichetta ``Cc:`` alla patch. Questa è l'unica +etichetta che può essere aggiunta senza che la persona in questione faccia +alcunché - ma dovrebbe indicare che la persona ha ricevuto una copia della +patch. Questa etichetta documenta che terzi potenzialmente interessati sono +stati inclusi nella discussione. + +L'etichetta Co-developed-by: indica che la patch è stata scritta dall'autore in +collaborazione con un altro sviluppatore. Qualche volta questo è utile quando +più persone lavorano sulla stessa patch. Notate, questa persona deve avere +nella patch anche una riga Signed-off-by:. + + +13) Utilizzare Reported-by:, Tested-by:, Reviewed-by:, Suggested-by: e Fixes: +----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +L'etichetta Reported-by da credito alle persone che trovano e riportano i bachi +e si spera che questo possa ispirarli ad aiutarci nuovamente in futuro. +Rammentate che se il baco è stato riportato in privato, dovrete chiedere il +permesso prima di poter utilizzare l'etichetta Reported-by. + +L'etichetta Tested-by: indica che la patch è stata verificata con successo +(su un qualche sistema) dalla persona citata. Questa etichetta informa i +manutentori che qualche verifica è stata fatta, fornisce un mezzo per trovare +persone che possano verificare il codice in futuro, e garantisce che queste +stesse persone ricevano credito per il loro lavoro. + +Reviewd-by:, invece, indica che la patch è stata revisionata ed è stata +considerata accettabile in accordo con la dichiarazione dei revisori: + +Dichiarazione di svista dei revisori +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Offrendo la mia etichetta Reviewed-by, dichiaro quanto segue: + + (a) Ho effettuato una revisione tecnica di questa patch per valutarne + l'adeguatezza ai fini dell'inclusione nel ramo principale del + kernel. + + (b) Tutti i problemi e le domande riguardanti la patch sono stati + comunicati al mittente. Sono soddisfatto dalle risposte + del mittente. + + (c) Nonostante ci potrebbero essere cose migliorabili in queste + sottomissione, credo che sia, in questo momento, (1) una modifica + di interesse per il kernel, e (2) libera da problemi che + potrebbero metterne in discussione l'integrazione. + + (d) Nonostante abbia revisionato la patch e creda che vada bene, + non garantisco (se non specificato altrimenti) che questa + otterrà quello che promette o funzionerà correttamente in tutte + le possibili situazioni. + +L'etichetta Reviewed-by è la dichiarazione di un parere sulla bontà di +una modifica che si ritiene appropriata e senza alcun problema tecnico +importante. Qualsiasi revisore interessato (quelli che lo hanno fatto) +possono offrire il proprio Reviewed-by per la patch. Questa etichetta serve +a dare credito ai revisori e a informare i manutentori sul livello di revisione +che è stato fatto sulla patch. L'etichetta Reviewd-by, quando fornita da +revisori conosciuti per la loro conoscenza sulla materia in oggetto e per la +loro serietà nella revisione, accrescerà le probabilità che la vostra patch +venga integrate nel kernel. + +L'etichetta Suggested-by: indica che l'idea della patch è stata suggerita +dalla persona nominata e le da credito. Tenete a mente che questa etichetta +non dovrebbe essere aggiunta senza un permesso esplicito, specialmente se +l'idea non è stata pubblicata in un forum pubblico. Detto ciò, dando credito +a chi ci fornisce delle idee, si spera di poterli ispirare ad aiutarci +nuovamente in futuro. + +L'etichetta Fixes: indica che la patch corregge un problema in un commit +precedente. Serve a chiarire l'origine di un baco, il che aiuta la revisione +del baco stesso. Questa etichetta è di aiuto anche per i manutentori dei +kernel stabili al fine di capire quale kernel deve ricevere la correzione. +Questo è il modo suggerito per indicare che un baco è stato corretto nella +patch. Per maggiori dettagli leggete :ref:`it_describe_changes` + + +14) Il formato canonico delle patch +----------------------------------- + +Questa sezione descrive il formato che dovrebbe essere usato per le patch. +Notate che se state usando un repositorio ``git`` per salvare le vostre patch +potere usare il comando ``git format-patch`` per ottenere patch nel formato +appropriato. Lo strumento non crea il testo necessario, per cui, leggete +le seguenti istruzioni. + +L'oggetto di una patch canonica è la riga:: + + Subject: [PATCH 001/123] subsystem: summary phrase + +Il corpo di una patch canonica contiene i seguenti elementi: + + - Una riga ``from`` che specifica l'autore della patch, seguita + da una riga vuota (necessaria soltanto se la persona che invia la + patch non ne è l'autore). + + - Il corpo della spiegazione, con linee non più lunghe di 75 caratteri, + che verrà copiato permanentemente nel changelog per descrivere la patch. + + - Una riga vuota + + - Le righe ``Signed-off-by:``, descritte in precedenza, che finiranno + anch'esse nel changelog. + + - Una linea di demarcazione contenente semplicemente ``---``. + + - Qualsiasi altro commento che non deve finire nel changelog. + + - Le effettive modifiche al codice (il prodotto di ``diff``). + +Il formato usato per l'oggetto permette ai programmi di posta di usarlo +per ordinare le patch alfabeticamente - tutti i programmi di posta hanno +questa funzionalità - dato che al numero sequenziale si antepongono degli zeri; +in questo modo l'ordine numerico ed alfabetico coincidono. + +Il ``subsystem`` nell'oggetto dell'email dovrebbe identificare l'area +o il sottosistema modificato dalla patch. + +La ``summary phrase`` nell'oggetto dell'email dovrebbe descrivere brevemente +il contenuto della patch. La ``summary phrase`` non dovrebbe essere un nome +di file. Non utilizzate la stessa ``summary phrase`` per tutte le patch in +una serie (dove una ``serie di patch`` è una sequenza ordinata di diverse +patch correlate). + +Ricordatevi che la ``summary phrase`` della vostra email diventerà un +identificatore globale ed unico per quella patch. Si propaga fino al +changelog ``git``. La ``summary phrase`` potrà essere usata in futuro +dagli sviluppatori per riferirsi a quella patch. Le persone vorranno +cercare la ``summary phrase`` su internet per leggere le discussioni che la +riguardano. Potrebbe anche essere l'unica cosa che le persone vedranno +quando, in due o tre mesi, riguarderanno centinaia di patch usando strumenti +come ``gitk`` o ``git log --oneline``. + +Per queste ragioni, dovrebbe essere lunga fra i 70 e i 75 caratteri, e deve +descrivere sia cosa viene modificato, sia il perché sia necessario. Essere +brevi e descrittivi è una bella sfida, ma questo è quello che fa un riassunto +ben scritto. + +La ``summary phrase`` può avere un'etichetta (*tag*) di prefisso racchiusa fra +le parentesi quadre "Subject: [PATCH <tag>...] <summary phrase>". +Le etichette non verranno considerate come parte della frase riassuntiva, ma +indicano come la patch dovrebbe essere trattata. Fra le etichette più comuni +ci sono quelle di versione che vengono usate quando una patch è stata inviata +più volte (per esempio, "v1, v2, v3"); oppure "RFC" per indicare che si +attendono dei commenti (*Request For Comments*). Se ci sono quattro patch +nella serie, queste dovrebbero essere enumerate così: 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4. +Questo assicura che gli sviluppatori capiranno l'ordine in cui le patch +dovrebbero essere applicate, e per tracciare quelle che hanno revisionate o +che hanno applicato. + +Un paio di esempi di oggetti:: + + Subject: [PATCH 2/5] ext2: improve scalability of bitmap searching + Subject: [PATCH v2 01/27] x86: fix eflags tracking + +La riga ``from`` dev'essere la prima nel corpo del messaggio ed è nel +formato: + + From: Original Author <author@example.com> + +La riga ``from`` indica chi verrà accreditato nel changelog permanente come +l'autore della patch. Se la riga ``from`` è mancante, allora per determinare +l'autore da inserire nel changelog verrà usata la riga ``From`` +nell'intestazione dell'email. + +Il corpo della spiegazione verrà incluso nel changelog permanente, per cui +deve aver senso per un lettore esperto che è ha dimenticato i dettagli della +discussione che hanno portato alla patch. L'inclusione di informazioni +sui problemi oggetto dalla patch (messaggi del kernel, messaggi di oops, +eccetera) è particolarmente utile per le persone che potrebbero cercare fra +i messaggi di log per la patch che li tratta. Se la patch corregge un errore +di compilazione, non sarà necessario includere proprio _tutto_ quello che +è uscito dal compilatore; aggiungete solo quello che è necessario per far si +che la vostra patch venga trovata. Come nella ``summary phrase``, è importante +essere sia brevi che descrittivi. + +La linea di demarcazione ``---`` serve essenzialmente a segnare dove finisce +il messaggio di changelog. + +Aggiungere il ``diffstat`` dopo ``---`` è un buon uso di questo spazio, per +mostrare i file che sono cambiati, e il numero di file aggiunto o rimossi. +Un ``diffstat`` è particolarmente utile per le patch grandi. Altri commenti +che sono importanti solo per i manutentori, quindi inadatti al changelog +permanente, dovrebbero essere messi qui. Un buon esempio per questo tipo +di commenti potrebbe essere quello di descrivere le differenze fra le versioni +della patch. + +Se includete un ``diffstat`` dopo ``---``, usate le opzioni ``-p 1 -w70`` +cosicché i nomi dei file elencati non occupino troppo spazio (facilmente +rientreranno negli 80 caratteri, magari con qualche indentazione). +(``git`` genera di base dei diffstat adatti). + +Maggiori dettagli sul formato delle patch nei riferimenti qui di seguito. + +.. _it_explicit_in_reply_to: + +15) Usare esplicitamente In-Reply-To nell'intestazione +------------------------------------------------------ + +Aggiungere manualmente In-Reply-To: nell'intestazione dell'e-mail +potrebbe essere d'aiuto per associare una patch ad una discussione +precedente, per esempio per collegare la correzione di un baco con l'e-mail +che lo riportava. Tuttavia, per serie di patch multiple è generalmente +sconsigliato l'uso di In-Reply-To: per collegare precedenti versioni. +In questo modo versioni multiple di una patch non diventeranno un'ingestibile +giungla di riferimenti all'interno dei programmi di posta. Se un collegamento +è utile, potete usare https://lkml.kernel.org/ per ottenere i collegamenti +ad una versione precedente di una serie di patch (per esempio, potete usarlo +per l'email introduttiva alla serie). + +16) Inviare richieste ``git pull`` +---------------------------------- + +Se avete una serie di patch, potrebbe essere più conveniente per un manutentore +tirarle dentro al repositorio del sottosistema attraverso l'operazione +``git pull``. Comunque, tenete presente che prendere patch da uno sviluppatore +in questo modo richiede un livello di fiducia più alto rispetto a prenderle da +una lista di discussione. Di conseguenza, molti manutentori sono riluttanti +ad accettare richieste di *pull*, specialmente dagli sviluppatori nuovi e +quindi sconosciuti. Se siete in dubbio, potete fare una richiesta di *pull* +come messaggio introduttivo ad una normale pubblicazione di patch, così +il manutentore avrà la possibilità di scegliere come integrarle. + +Una richiesta di *pull* dovrebbe avere nell'oggetto [GIT] o [PULL]. +La richiesta stessa dovrebbe includere il nome del repositorio e quello del +ramo su una singola riga; dovrebbe essere più o meno così:: + + Please pull from + + git://jdelvare.pck.nerim.net/jdelvare-2.6 i2c-for-linus + + to get these changes: + +Una richiesta di *pull* dovrebbe includere anche un messaggio generico +che dica cos'è incluso, una lista delle patch usando ``git shortlog``, e una +panoramica sugli effetti della serie di patch con ``diffstat``. Il modo più +semplice per ottenere tutte queste informazioni è, ovviamente, quello di +lasciar fare tutto a ``git`` con il comando ``git request-pull``. + +Alcuni manutentori (incluso Linus) vogliono vedere le richieste di *pull* +da commit firmati con GPG; questo fornisce una maggiore garanzia sul fatto +che siate stati proprio voi a fare la richiesta. In assenza di tale etichetta +firmata Linus, in particolare, non prenderà alcuna patch da siti pubblici come +GitHub. + +Il primo passo verso la creazione di questa etichetta firmata è quello di +creare una chiave GNUPG ed averla fatta firmare da uno o più sviluppatori +principali del kernel. Questo potrebbe essere difficile per i nuovi +sviluppatori, ma non ci sono altre vie. Andare alle conferenze potrebbe +essere un buon modo per trovare sviluppatori che possano firmare la vostra +chiave. + +Una volta che avete preparato la vostra serie di patch in ``git``, e volete che +qualcuno le prenda, create una etichetta firmata col comando ``git tag -s``. +Questo creerà una nuova etichetta che identifica l'ultimo commit della serie +contenente una firma creata con la vostra chiave privata. Avrete anche +l'opportunità di aggiungere un messaggio di changelog all'etichetta; questo è +il posto ideale per descrivere gli effetti della richiesta di *pull*. + +Se i sorgenti da cui il manutentore prenderà le patch non sono gli stessi del +repositorio su cui state lavorando, allora non dimenticatevi di caricare +l'etichetta firmata anche sui sorgenti pubblici. + +Quando generate una richiesta di *pull*, usate l'etichetta firmata come +obiettivo. Un comando come il seguente farà il suo dovere:: + + git request-pull master git://my.public.tree/linux.git my-signed-tag + + +Riferimenti +----------- + +Andrew Morton, "La patch perfetta" (tpp). + <http://www.ozlabs.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt> + +Jeff Garzik, "Formato per la sottomissione di patch per il kernel Linux" + <http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html> + +Greg Kroah-Hartman, "Come scocciare un manutentore di un sottosistema" + <http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer.html> + + <http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-02.html> + + <http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-03.html> + + <http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-04.html> + + <http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-05.html> + + <http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-06.html> + +No!!!! Basta gigantesche bombe patch alle persone sulla lista linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org! + <https://lkml.org/lkml/2005/7/11/336> + +Kernel Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/coding-style.rst: + :ref:`Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/coding-style.rst <it_codingstyle>` + +E-mail di Linus Torvalds sul formato canonico di una patch: + <http://lkml.org/lkml/2005/4/7/183> + +Andi Kleen, "Su come sottomettere patch del kernel" + Alcune strategie su come sottomettere modifiche toste o controverse. + + http://halobates.de/on-submitting-patches.pdf diff --git a/Documentation/translations/ja_JP/howto.rst b/Documentation/translations/ja_JP/howto.rst index f3116381c26b..2621b770a745 100644 --- a/Documentation/translations/ja_JP/howto.rst +++ b/Documentation/translations/ja_JP/howto.rst @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ Linux カーネルソースツリーの中に含まれる、きれいにし、 できます。この最新の素晴しいカーネルコードのリポジトリは以下で見つかり ます - - http://lxr.free-electrons.com/ + https://elixir.bootlin.com/ 開発プロセス ------------ @@ -256,7 +256,6 @@ Linux カーネルの開発プロセスは現在幾つかの異なるメイン - メインの 4.x カーネルツリー - 4.x.y -stable カーネルツリー - - 4.x -git カーネルパッチ - サブシステム毎のカーネルツリーとパッチ - 統合テストのための 4.x -next カーネルツリー @@ -319,15 +318,6 @@ Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst ファイルにはどのような 類の変更が -stable ツリーに受け入れ可能か、またリリースプロセスがどう 動くかが記述されています。 -4.x -git パッチ -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ - -git リポジトリで管理されているLinus のカーネルツリーの毎日のスナップ -ショットがあります。(だから -git という名前がついています)。これらのパッ -チはおおむね毎日リリースされており、Linus のツリーの現状を表します。こ -れは -rc カーネルと比べて、パッチが大丈夫かどうかも確認しないで自動的 -に生成されるので、より実験的です。 - サブシステム毎のカーネルツリーとパッチ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ diff --git a/Documentation/translations/ko_KR/howto.rst b/Documentation/translations/ko_KR/howto.rst index a8197e072599..bcd63731b80a 100644 --- a/Documentation/translations/ko_KR/howto.rst +++ b/Documentation/translations/ko_KR/howto.rst @@ -77,10 +77,12 @@ Documentation/process/howto.rst 리눅스 커널 소스 코드는 GPL로 배포(release)되었다. 소스트리의 메인 디렉토리에 있는 라이센스에 관하여 상세하게 쓰여 있는 COPYING이라는 -파일을 봐라. 여러분이 라이센스에 관한 더 깊은 문제를 가지고 있다면 -리눅스 커널 메일링 리스트에 묻지말고 변호사와 연락하라. 메일링 -리스트들에 있는 사람들은 변호사가 아니기 때문에 법적 문제에 관하여 -그들의 말에 의지해서는 안된다. +파일을 봐라. 리눅스 커널 라이센싱 규칙과 소스 코드 안의 `SPDX +<https://spdx.org/>`_ 식별자 사용법은 +:ref:`Documentation/process/license-rules.rst <kernel_licensing>` 에 설명되어 +있다. 여러분이 라이센스에 관한 더 깊은 문제를 가지고 있다면 리눅스 커널 메일링 +리스트에 묻지말고 변호사와 연락하라. 메일링 리스트들에 있는 사람들은 변호사가 +아니기 때문에 법적 문제에 관하여 그들의 말에 의지해서는 안된다. GPL에 관한 잦은 질문들과 답변들은 다음을 참조하라. @@ -99,7 +101,7 @@ mtk.manpages@gmail.com의 메인테이너에게 보낼 것을 권장한다. 다음은 커널 소스 트리에 있는 읽어야 할 파일들의 리스트이다. - README + :ref:`Documentation/admin-guide/README.rst <readme>` 이 파일은 리눅스 커널에 관하여 간단한 배경 설명과 커널을 설정하고 빌드하기 위해 필요한 것을 설명한다. 커널에 입문하는 사람들은 여기서 시작해야 한다. @@ -220,13 +222,6 @@ ReST 마크업을 사용하는 문서들은 Documentation/output 에 생성된 가지고 있지 않다면 다음에 무엇을 해야할지에 관한 방향을 배울 수 있을 것이다. -여러분들이 이미 커널 트리에 반영하길 원하는 코드 묶음을 가지고 있지만 -올바른 포맷으로 포장하는데 도움이 필요하다면 그러한 문제를 돕기 위해 -만들어진 kernel-mentors 프로젝트가 있다. 그곳은 메일링 리스트이며 -다음에서 참조할 수 있다. - - https://selenic.com/mailman/listinfo/kernel-mentors - 리눅스 커널 코드에 실제 변경을 하기 전에 반드시 그 코드가 어떻게 동작하는지 이해하고 있어야 한다. 코드를 분석하기 위하여 특정한 툴의 도움을 빌려서라도 코드를 직접 읽는 것보다 좋은 것은 없다(대부분의 @@ -235,7 +230,7 @@ ReST 마크업을 사용하는 문서들은 Documentation/output 에 생성된 소스코드를 인덱스된 웹 페이지들의 형태로 보여준다. 최신의 멋진 커널 코드 저장소는 다음을 통하여 참조할 수 있다. - http://lxr.free-electrons.com/ + https://elixir.bootlin.com/ 개발 프로세스 @@ -247,7 +242,6 @@ ReST 마크업을 사용하는 문서들은 Documentation/output 에 생성된 - main 4.x 커널 트리 - 4.x.y - 안정된 커널 트리 - - 4.x -git 커널 패치들 - 서브시스템을 위한 커널 트리들과 패치들 - 4.x - 통합 테스트를 위한 next 커널 트리 @@ -303,17 +297,9 @@ Andrew Morton의 글이 있다. 4.x.y는 "stable" 팀<stable@vger.kernel.org>에 의해 관리되며 거의 매번 격주로 배포된다. -커널 트리 문서들 내에 Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst 파일은 어떤 -종류의 변경들이 -stable 트리로 들어왔는지와 배포 프로세스가 어떻게 -진행되는지를 설명한다. - -4.x -git 패치들 -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ - -git 저장소(그러므로 -git이라는 이름이 붙음)에는 날마다 관리되는 Linus의 -커널 트리의 snapshot 들이 있다. 이 패치들은 일반적으로 날마다 배포되며 -Linus의 트리의 현재 상태를 나타낸다. 이 패치들은 정상적인지 조금도 -살펴보지 않고 자동적으로 생성된 것이므로 -rc 커널들 보다도 더 실험적이다. +커널 트리 문서들 내의 :ref:`Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst <stable_kernel_rules>` +파일은 어떤 종류의 변경들이 -stable 트리로 들어왔는지와 +배포 프로세스가 어떻게 진행되는지를 설명한다. 서브시스템 커널 트리들과 패치들 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ @@ -360,9 +346,10 @@ https://bugzilla.kernel.org 는 리눅스 커널 개발자들이 커널의 버 https://bugzilla.kernel.org/page.cgi?id=faq.html -메인 커널 소스 디렉토리에 있는 admin-guide/reporting-bugs.rst 파일은 커널 버그라고 생각되는 -것을 보고하는 방법에 관한 좋은 템플릿이며 문제를 추적하기 위해서 커널 -개발자들이 필요로 하는 정보가 무엇들인지를 상세히 설명하고 있다. +메인 커널 소스 디렉토리에 있는 :ref:`admin-guide/reporting-bugs.rst <reportingbugs>` +파일은 커널 버그라고 생각되는 것을 보고하는 방법에 관한 좋은 템플릿이며 문제를 +추적하기 위해서 커널 개발자들이 필요로 하는 정보가 무엇들인지를 상세히 설명하고 +있다. 버그 리포트들의 관리 @@ -377,15 +364,7 @@ https://bugzilla.kernel.org 는 리눅스 커널 개발자들이 커널의 버 다른 사람들의 버그들을 수정하기 위하여 시간을 낭비하지 않기 때문이다. 이미 보고된 버그 리포트들을 가지고 작업하기 위해서 https://bugzilla.kernel.org -를 참조하라. 여러분이 앞으로 생겨날 버그 리포트들의 조언자가 되길 원한다면 -bugme-new 메일링 리스트나(새로운 버그 리포트들만이 이곳에서 메일로 전해진다) -bugme-janitor 메일링 리스트(bugzilla에 모든 변화들이 여기서 메일로 전해진다) -에 등록하면 된다. - - https://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-new - - https://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-janitors - +를 참조하라. 메일링 리스트들 @@ -430,7 +409,8 @@ bugme-janitor 메일링 리스트(bugzilla에 모든 변화들이 여기서 메 "John 커널해커는 작성했다...."를 유지하며 여러분들의 의견을 그 메일의 윗부분에 작성하지 말고 각 인용한 단락들 사이에 넣어라. -여러분들이 패치들을 메일에 넣는다면 그것들은 Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst에 +여러분들이 패치들을 메일에 넣는다면 그것들은 +:ref:`Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst <submittingpatches>` 에 나와있는데로 명백히(plain) 읽을 수 있는 텍스트여야 한다. 커널 개발자들은 첨부파일이나 압축된 패치들을 원하지 않는다. 그들은 여러분들의 패치의 각 라인 단위로 코멘트를 하길 원하며 압축하거나 첨부하지 않고 보내는 것이 diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/HOWTO b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/HOWTO index 5f6d09edc9ac..7a00a8a4eb15 100644 --- a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/HOWTO +++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/HOWTO @@ -192,7 +192,6 @@ Linux内核代码中包含有大量的文档。这些文档对于学习如何与 些分支包括： - 2.6.x主内核源码树 - 2.6.x.y -stable内核源码树 - - 2.6.x -git内核补丁集 - 2.6.x -mm内核补丁集 - 子系统相关的内核源码树和补丁集 @@ -240,14 +239,6 @@ kernel.org网站的pub/linux/kernel/v2.6/目录下找到它。它的开发遵循 版内核接受的修改类型以及发布的流程。 -2.6.x -git补丁集 ----------------- -Linus的内核源码树的每日快照，这个源码树是由git工具管理的（由此得名）。这 -些补丁通常每天更新以反映Linus的源码树的最新状态。它们比-rc版本的内核源码 -树更具试验性质，因为这个补丁集是全自动生成的，没有任何人来确认其是否真正 -健全。 - - 2.6.x -mm补丁集 --------------- 这是由Andrew Morton维护的试验性内核补丁集。Andrew将所有子系统的内核源码 diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/coding-style.rst b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/coding-style.rst index 1466aa64b8b4..3cb09803e084 100644 --- a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/coding-style.rst +++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/coding-style.rst @@ -535,26 +535,43 @@ Documentation/doc-guide/ 和 scripts/kernel-doc 以获得详细信息。 (* (max steps 1) c-basic-offset))) - (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook - (lambda () - ;; Add kernel style - (c-add-style - "linux-tabs-only" - '("linux" (c-offsets-alist - (arglist-cont-nonempty - c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg - c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only)))))) - - (add-hook 'c-mode-hook - (lambda () - (let ((filename (buffer-file-name))) - ;; Enable kernel mode for the appropriate files - (when (and filename - (string-match (expand-file-name "~/src/linux-trees") - filename)) - (setq indent-tabs-mode t) - (setq show-trailing-whitespace t) - (c-set-style "linux-tabs-only"))))) + (dir-locals-set-class-variables + 'linux-kernel + '((c-mode . ( + (c-basic-offset . 8) + (c-label-minimum-indentation . 0) + (c-offsets-alist . ( + (arglist-close . c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only) + (arglist-cont-nonempty . + (c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only)) + (arglist-intro . +) + (brace-list-intro . +) + (c . c-lineup-C-comments) + (case-label . 0) + (comment-intro . c-lineup-comment) + (cpp-define-intro . +) + (cpp-macro . -1000) + (cpp-macro-cont . +) + (defun-block-intro . +) + (else-clause . 0) + (func-decl-cont . +) + (inclass . +) + (inher-cont . c-lineup-multi-inher) + (knr-argdecl-intro . 0) + (label . -1000) + (statement . 0) + (statement-block-intro . +) + (statement-case-intro . +) + (statement-cont . +) + (substatement . +) + )) + (indent-tabs-mode . t) + (show-trailing-whitespace . t) + )))) + + (dir-locals-set-directory-class + (expand-file-name "~/src/linux-trees") + 'linux-kernel) 这会让 emacs 在 ``~/src/linux-trees`` 下的 C 源文件获得更好的内核代码风格。 diff --git a/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt b/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt index f901ec77439c..9dd1dc7b1009 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt @@ -34,7 +34,9 @@ $ echo 1 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/usbX/authorized_default By default, Wired USB devices are authorized by default to connect. Wireless USB hosts deauthorize by default all new connected devices (this is so because we need to do an authentication phase -before authorizing). +before authorizing). Writing "2" to the authorized_default attribute +causes kernel to only authorize by default devices connected to internal +USB ports. Example system lockdown (lame) diff --git a/Documentation/userspace-api/spec_ctrl.rst b/Documentation/userspace-api/spec_ctrl.rst index c4dbe6f7cdae..1129c7550a48 100644 --- a/Documentation/userspace-api/spec_ctrl.rst +++ b/Documentation/userspace-api/spec_ctrl.rst @@ -28,18 +28,20 @@ PR_GET_SPECULATION_CTRL returns the state of the speculation misfeature which is selected with arg2 of prctl(2). The return value uses bits 0-3 with the following meaning: -==== ===================== =================================================== -Bit Define Description -==== ===================== =================================================== -0 PR_SPEC_PRCTL Mitigation can be controlled per task by - PR_SET_SPECULATION_CTRL. -1 PR_SPEC_ENABLE The speculation feature is enabled, mitigation is - disabled. -2 PR_SPEC_DISABLE The speculation feature is disabled, mitigation is - enabled. -3 PR_SPEC_FORCE_DISABLE Same as PR_SPEC_DISABLE, but cannot be undone. A - subsequent prctl(..., PR_SPEC_ENABLE) will fail. -==== ===================== =================================================== +==== ====================== ================================================== +Bit Define Description +==== ====================== ================================================== +0 PR_SPEC_PRCTL Mitigation can be controlled per task by + PR_SET_SPECULATION_CTRL. +1 PR_SPEC_ENABLE The speculation feature is enabled, mitigation is + disabled. +2 PR_SPEC_DISABLE The speculation feature is disabled, mitigation is + enabled. +3 PR_SPEC_FORCE_DISABLE Same as PR_SPEC_DISABLE, but cannot be undone. A + subsequent prctl(..., PR_SPEC_ENABLE) will fail. +4 PR_SPEC_DISABLE_NOEXEC Same as PR_SPEC_DISABLE, but the state will be + cleared on :manpage:`execve(2)`. +==== ====================== ================================================== If all bits are 0 the CPU is not affected by the speculation misfeature. @@ -92,6 +94,7 @@ Speculation misfeature controls * prctl(PR_SET_SPECULATION_CTRL, PR_SPEC_STORE_BYPASS, PR_SPEC_ENABLE, 0, 0); * prctl(PR_SET_SPECULATION_CTRL, PR_SPEC_STORE_BYPASS, PR_SPEC_DISABLE, 0, 0); * prctl(PR_SET_SPECULATION_CTRL, PR_SPEC_STORE_BYPASS, PR_SPEC_FORCE_DISABLE, 0, 0); + * prctl(PR_SET_SPECULATION_CTRL, PR_SPEC_STORE_BYPASS, PR_SPEC_DISABLE_NOEXEC, 0, 0); - PR_SPEC_INDIR_BRANCH: Indirect Branch Speculation in User Processes (Mitigate Spectre V2 style attacks against user processes) diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt index 356156f5c52d..7de9eee73fcd 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt @@ -45,6 +45,23 @@ the API. The only supported use is one virtual machine per process, and one vcpu per thread. +It is important to note that althought VM ioctls may only be issued from +the process that created the VM, a VM's lifecycle is associated with its +file descriptor, not its creator (process). In other words, the VM and +its resources, *including the associated address space*, are not freed +until the last reference to the VM's file descriptor has been released. +For example, if fork() is issued after ioctl(KVM_CREATE_VM), the VM will +not be freed until both the parent (original) process and its child have +put their references to the VM's file descriptor. + +Because a VM's resources are not freed until the last reference to its +file descriptor is released, creating additional references to a VM via +via fork(), dup(), etc... without careful consideration is strongly +discouraged and may have unwanted side effects, e.g. memory allocated +by and on behalf of the VM's process may not be freed/unaccounted when +the VM is shut down. + + 3. Extensions ------------- diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/halt-polling.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/halt-polling.txt index 4a8418318769..4f791b128dd2 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/halt-polling.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/halt-polling.txt @@ -53,7 +53,8 @@ the global max polling interval then the polling interval can be increased in the hope that next time during the longer polling interval the wake up source will be received while the host is polling and the latency benefits will be received. The polling interval is grown in the function grow_halt_poll_ns() and -is multiplied by the module parameter halt_poll_ns_grow. +is multiplied by the module parameters halt_poll_ns_grow and +halt_poll_ns_grow_start. In the event that the total block time was greater than the global max polling interval then the host will never poll for long enough (limited by the global @@ -80,22 +81,30 @@ shrunk. These variables are defined in include/linux/kvm_host.h and as module parameters in virt/kvm/kvm_main.c, or arch/powerpc/kvm/book3s_hv.c in the powerpc kvm-hv case. -Module Parameter | Description | Default Value +Module Parameter | Description | Default Value -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -halt_poll_ns | The global max polling interval | KVM_HALT_POLL_NS_DEFAULT - | which defines the ceiling value | - | of the polling interval for | (per arch value) - | each vcpu. | +halt_poll_ns | The global max polling | KVM_HALT_POLL_NS_DEFAULT + | interval which defines | + | the ceiling value of the | + | polling interval for | (per arch value) + | each vcpu. | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -halt_poll_ns_grow | The value by which the halt | 2 - | polling interval is multiplied | - | in the grow_halt_poll_ns() | - | function. | +halt_poll_ns_grow | The value by which the | 2 + | halt polling interval is | + | multiplied in the | + | grow_halt_poll_ns() | + | function. | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -halt_poll_ns_shrink | The value by which the halt | 0 - | polling interval is divided in | - | the shrink_halt_poll_ns() | - | function. | +halt_poll_ns_grow_start | The initial value to grow | 10000 + | to from zero in the | + | grow_halt_poll_ns() | + | function. | +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +halt_poll_ns_shrink | The value by which the | 0 + | halt polling interval is | + | divided in the | + | shrink_halt_poll_ns() | + | function. | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- These module parameters can be set from the debugfs files in: diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/mmu.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/mmu.txt index e507a9e0421e..f365102c80f5 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/mmu.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/mmu.txt @@ -224,10 +224,6 @@ Shadow pages contain the following information: A bitmap indicating which sptes in spt point (directly or indirectly) at pages that may be unsynchronized. Used to quickly locate all unsychronized pages reachable from a given page. - mmu_valid_gen: - Generation number of the page. It is compared with kvm->arch.mmu_valid_gen - during hash table lookup, and used to skip invalidated shadow pages (see - "Zapping all pages" below.) clear_spte_count: Only present on 32-bit hosts, where a 64-bit spte cannot be written atomically. The reader uses this while running out of the MMU lock @@ -402,27 +398,6 @@ causes its disallow_lpage to be incremented, thus preventing instantiation of a large spte. The frames at the end of an unaligned memory slot have artificially inflated ->disallow_lpages so they can never be instantiated. -Zapping all pages (page generation count) -========================================= - -For the large memory guests, walking and zapping all pages is really slow -(because there are a lot of pages), and also blocks memory accesses of -all VCPUs because it needs to hold the MMU lock. - -To make it be more scalable, kvm maintains a global generation number -which is stored in kvm->arch.mmu_valid_gen. Every shadow page stores -the current global generation-number into sp->mmu_valid_gen when it -is created. Pages with a mismatching generation number are "obsolete". - -When KVM need zap all shadow pages sptes, it just simply increases the global -generation-number then reload root shadow pages on all vcpus. As the VCPUs -create new shadow page tables, the old pages are not used because of the -mismatching generation number. - -KVM then walks through all pages and zaps obsolete pages. While the zap -operation needs to take the MMU lock, the lock can be released periodically -so that the VCPUs can make progress. - Fast invalidation of MMIO sptes =============================== @@ -435,8 +410,7 @@ shadow pages, and is made more scalable with a similar technique. MMIO sptes have a few spare bits, which are used to store a generation number. The global generation number is stored in kvm_memslots(kvm)->generation, and increased whenever guest memory info -changes. This generation number is distinct from the one described in -the previous section. +changes. When KVM finds an MMIO spte, it checks the generation number of the spte. If the generation number of the spte does not equal the global generation @@ -452,13 +426,16 @@ stored into the MMIO spte. Thus, the MMIO spte might be created based on out-of-date information, but with an up-to-date generation number. To avoid this, the generation number is incremented again after synchronize_srcu -returns; thus, the low bit of kvm_memslots(kvm)->generation is only 1 during a +returns; thus, bit 63 of kvm_memslots(kvm)->generation set to 1 only during a memslot update, while some SRCU readers might be using the old copy. We do not want to use an MMIO sptes created with an odd generation number, and we can do -this without losing a bit in the MMIO spte. The low bit of the generation -is not stored in MMIO spte, and presumed zero when it is extracted out of the -spte. If KVM is unlucky and creates an MMIO spte while the low bit is 1, -the next access to the spte will always be a cache miss. +this without losing a bit in the MMIO spte. The "update in-progress" bit of the +generation is not stored in MMIO spte, and is so is implicitly zero when the +generation is extracted out of the spte. If KVM is unlucky and creates an MMIO +spte while an update is in-progress, the next access to the spte will always be +a cache miss. For example, a subsequent access during the update window will +miss due to the in-progress flag diverging, while an access after the update +window closes will have a higher generation number (as compared to the spte). Further reading diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/s390-diag.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/s390-diag.txt index 48c4921794ed..7c52e5f8b210 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/s390-diag.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/s390-diag.txt @@ -68,7 +68,8 @@ Subcode 3 - virtio-ccw notification identifier, it is ignored. After completion of the DIAGNOSE call, general register 2 may contain - a 64bit identifier (in the kvm_io_bus cookie case). + a 64bit identifier (in the kvm_io_bus cookie case), or a negative + error value, if an internal error occurred. See also the virtio standard for a discussion of this hypercall. diff --git a/Documentation/vm/index.rst b/Documentation/vm/index.rst index 2b3ab3a1ccf3..b58cc3bfe777 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/vm/index.rst @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ Linux Memory Management Documentation This is a collection of documents about the Linux memory management (mm) subsystem. If you are looking for advice on simply allocating memory, -see the :ref:`memory-allocation`. +see the :ref:`memory_allocation`. User guides for MM features =========================== diff --git a/Documentation/vm/slub.rst b/Documentation/vm/slub.rst index 195928808bac..933ada4368ff 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/slub.rst +++ b/Documentation/vm/slub.rst @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Trying to find an issue in the dentry cache? Try:: to only enable debugging on the dentry cache. You may use an asterisk at the end of the slab name, in order to cover all slabs with the same prefix. For example, here's how you can poison the dentry cache as well as all kmalloc -slabs: +slabs:: slub_debug=P,kmalloc-*,dentry @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ can be influenced by kernel parameters: (list_lock) where contention may occur. ``slub_min_order`` - specifies a minim order of slabs. A similar effect like + specifies a minimum order of slabs. A similar effect like ``slub_min_objects``. ``slub_max_order`` diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/mlx-wdt.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/mlx-wdt.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..66eeb78505c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/watchdog/mlx-wdt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + Mellanox watchdog drivers + for x86 based system switches + +This driver provides watchdog functionality for various Mellanox +Ethernet and Infiniband switch systems. + +Mellanox watchdog device is implemented in a programmable logic device. + +There are 2 types of HW watchdog implementations. + +Type 1: +Actual HW timeout can be defined as a power of 2 msec. +e.g. timeout 20 sec will be rounded up to 32768 msec. +The maximum timeout period is 32 sec (32768 msec.), +Get time-left isn't supported + +Type 2: +Actual HW timeout is defined in sec. and it's the same as +a user-defined timeout. +Maximum timeout is 255 sec. +Get time-left is supported. + +Type 1 HW watchdog implementation exist in old systems and +all new systems have type 2 HW watchdog. +Two types of HW implementation have also different register map. + +Mellanox system can have 2 watchdogs: main and auxiliary. +Main and auxiliary watchdog devices can be enabled together +on the same system. +There are several actions that can be defined in the watchdog: +system reset, start fans on full speed and increase register counter. +The last 2 actions are performed without a system reset. +Actions without reset are provided for auxiliary watchdog device, +which is optional. +Watchdog can be started during a probe, in this case it will be +pinged by watchdog core before watchdog device will be opened by +user space application. +Watchdog can be initialised in nowayout way, i.e. oncse started +it can't be stopped. + +This mlx-wdt driver supports both HW watchdog implementations. + +Watchdog driver is probed from the common mlx_platform driver. +Mlx_platform driver provides an appropriate set of registers for +Mellanox watchdog device, identity name (mlx-wdt-main or mlx-wdt-aux), +initial timeout, performed action in expiration and configuration flags. +watchdog configuration flags: nowayout and start_at_boot, hw watchdog +version - type1 or type2. +The driver checks during initialization if the previous system reset +was done by the watchdog. If yes, it makes a notification about this event. + +Access to HW registers is performed through a generic regmap interface. diff --git a/Documentation/x86/resctrl_ui.txt b/Documentation/x86/resctrl_ui.txt index e8e8d14d3c4e..c1f95b59e14d 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/resctrl_ui.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/resctrl_ui.txt @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Fenghua Yu <fenghua.yu@intel.com> Tony Luck <tony.luck@intel.com> Vikas Shivappa <vikas.shivappa@intel.com> -This feature is enabled by the CONFIG_X86_RESCTRL and the x86 /proc/cpuinfo +This feature is enabled by the CONFIG_X86_CPU_RESCTRL and the x86 /proc/cpuinfo flag bits: RDT (Resource Director Technology) Allocation - "rdt_a" CAT (Cache Allocation Technology) - "cat_l3", "cat_l2" diff --git a/Documentation/xtensa/booting.txt b/Documentation/xtensa/booting.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..402b33a2619f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/xtensa/booting.txt @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +Passing boot parameters to the kernel. + +Boot parameters are represented as a TLV list in the memory. Please see +arch/xtensa/include/asm/bootparam.h for definition of the bp_tag structure and +tag value constants. First entry in the list must have type BP_TAG_FIRST, last +entry must have type BP_TAG_LAST. The address of the first list entry is +passed to the kernel in the register a2. The address type depends on MMU type: +- For configurations without MMU, with region protection or with MPU the + address must be the physical address. +- For configurations with region translarion MMU or with MMUv3 and CONFIG_MMU=n + the address must be a valid address in the current mapping. The kernel will + not change the mapping on its own. +- For configurations with MMUv2 the address must be a virtual address in the + default virtual mapping (0xd0000000..0xffffffff). +- For configurations with MMUv3 and CONFIG_MMU=y the address may be either a + virtual or physical address. In either case it must be within the default + virtual mapping. It is considered physical if it is within the range of + physical addresses covered by the default KSEG mapping (XCHAL_KSEG_PADDR.. + XCHAL_KSEG_PADDR + XCHAL_KSEG_SIZE), otherwise it is considered virtual. |
